Full Specs PNGMH02721 - REV2-design Basis PDF

PNGMH02721 Rev.
2 1/765
PNGMH02721 Rev.2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
OF
CONDENSATE POLISHING PLANT
for the
2 x 1,000MW Coal-Fired Power Plant Project

Tanjung Jati B Re-expansion Project -TJB 5 & 6
Central Java, INDONESIA
Revised as per the

2 12 Oct '16 H. Tao K. Tanaka Y.Takano
design progress
Revised as per the Rakesh/

1 5 Apr '16 H. Tao K. Tanaka
design progress Y.Takano
0 24 May '13 First Issue H.Shiraishi A.Kinoshita Y.Takano
REV. DATE DESCRIPTION APPROVED CHECKED BY PREPARED

NO. BY BY
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
PLANT ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT
YOKOHAMA JAPAN
Distribution: (Ka-Chotatsu), (Ka-Chohin), (Ka-EX), (Ka-IX), (Ka-IC), (Ka-CV), (Ka-FP)
1/17
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 2/765
PNGMH02721 Rev.2
INDEX
1. DEFINITION 3
2. GENERAL 4
3. SCOPE OF WORK 8
4. WORK NOTTO BE INCLUDED 11
5. CODES AND STANDARDS 12
6. ELECTRICAL POWER AND l&C REQUIREMENT 13
7. TRANSPORTATION LIMITS 13
8. PERMISSIBLE NOISE LEVEL 13
9. VIBRATION 13
10. SEISMIC REQUIREMENT 13
11. SITE CONDITION 14
12. PAINTING SPECIFICATION 14
13. INSPECTION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENT 14
14. SPARE PARTS/ SPECIAL TOOLS I CONSUMABLES 14
15. PRICE SCHEDULE 16
16. WARRANTY 16
17. GUARANTEE ITEMS 16
18. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 16
19. ATTACHMENTS LIST 17
2/17
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 3/765
PNGMH02721 Rev.2
1. DEFINITION
The following complements define the meaning of term. The following words and expressions
shall be used in all documents under the contract. Capitalized terms used elsewhere in this
technical specification and which are not defined below shall have the meaning (if any)
ascribed to them in the general conditions of contract or main contract as the case may be,
provided always that in the event of conflict, the definition in the general conditions of
contract shall prevail over the main contract.
Meaning
(1) Owner PT Central Java Power or SPC
(2) Employer Sumitomo Corporation.
(3) Purchaser/Sub Contractor Toshiba Corporation
(4) Bidder The firm or company submitting a proposal for

the work covered by this specification.
(5) Vendor The firm or company whose tender has been

accepted by Purchaser.
(6) Contract The written agreement between the Purchaser

and the Vendor for execution of and payment for
the Work.
(7) Specification This technical specification and/or documents

issued by Purchaser.
(8) Letter of Intent The letter issued by the Purchaser indicating his
intention to award the Contract.
(9) Purchase Order A written order to the Vendor issued and Signed
by the Purchaser.
(10) Work Include all equipment works to be done in

accordance with the provisions of the Contract. It
may also mean site if indicated by the context.
(11) Drawing All drawings indicated under the Contract, or any

revisions of them certified by a written consent of
the Purchaser or Owner and all other drawings
prepared and certified by Purchaser or Owner.
(12) Unit Any 1 of 2 coal fired power generating units

forming part of the plant and comprising a coal
fired boiler, steam turbine generator and ancillary
equipment and facilities ...
(13) Site The destination of the equipment and location of

the plant.
Notwithstanding the foregoing and only in Annexure-A, the term "Purchaser / Lot 1
Sub-Contractor" shall be construed as meaning "Vendor" as defined above.
3/17
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 4/765
PNGMH02721 Rev.2
2. GENERAL
(1) Project name 2 x 1,000MW Coal-Fired Power Plant Project

Tanjung Jati B Re-expansion Project -
T JB 5 & 6
(2) Location of the power station Tubanan Village, Jepara, Central Java,
Indonesia.
The T J B site is located on the north coast of
Central Java, approximately 100 km north
east of the city of Semarang and 20 km north
of the city of Jepara.
(3) Name of Owner PT Central Java Power or SPC
(4) Net Capacity 1,000,000kW each unit
(5) Unit Nos. Two (2) units
(6) Delivery >- For Equipment manufactured inside

Japan: FOB Yokohama Port
>- For Equipment manufactured outside
Japan: CFR at Port Semarang
>- For Equipment manufactured in
Indonesia: DDP at site
5
(7) Provisional delivery Unit #5: 1 Nov 2018
schedule Unit #6 : 1st Apr 2019
(Note : This is a target schedule and actual
schedule shall be adjusted and informed
separately.)
(8) Expected provisional Unit #5: (Later)

Unit #6: (Later)
acceptance schedule
(subject to change)
(9) Project description 2 x 1,000MW class Ultra Super Critical Coal
Fired Thermal Power Plant Consisting of
Steam Turbine / Generator Sets & their
Auxiliaries
(10) Unit
The Vendor's design and works shall be conducted in the Systems
International units (SI) of units.
Refer to B0.11.11 in Annexure A
4/17
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 5/765
PNGMH02721 Rev.2
(11) Language
The language for all communications related to or required by the Contract is
the English language.
(12) Compliance with this specification

In order to comply with the intent and spirit of this specification, any item not
specifically referred to, but considered to be necessary to the fulfillment of the
requirements of this specification shall be included in the Vendor's quotation
and so noted.
(13) Progress and expediting

Within 30 days after the Letter of intent or 14 days after the date of the Purchase order
(whichever is the earlier), the Vendor shall submit to the Purchaser for approval his
manufacturing schedule showing in critical path method the various processes of the
work such as design, ordering of material, subletting, fabrication, machining, testing,
inspection, cleaning, painting, dispatch and all other relevant scopes of work.
The said manufacturing schedule shall be maintained monthly and reported to the
Purchaser as a monthly progress report.
The monthly progress report shall include the following statements at a minimum;
The state of progress in the work

The updated manufacturing schedule
The updated drawing list
Any photographs for equipment under manufacturing
A statement of any delay and reason why such a delay has occurred
An assessment of any delay on the contractual schedule
A statement of efforts to minimize or recover the delay
Neither the approval by the Purchaser of the said manufacturing schedule nor the
issuance by the Vendor of the monthly progress report shall release the Vendor from
any obligation under the contract.
The Purchaser shall have the right to pay visits to the Vendor's or their sub-vendor's
factory for checking the manufacturing progress. The Vendor shall provide full
opportunity to the Purchaser to the detailed extent necessary to establish that the
satisfactory progress relative to the monthly progress report is being achieved.
(14) Change and confirmation

Whenever Vendor desires to change the contents of the specification and/or the
drawings, Vendor shall receive the Purchaser's written approval in advance. When
Vendor finds it difficult or impossible to understand clearly the objectives and
requirements of the specification only through the documents and drawings provided by
Purchaser, or have questions about each item, Vendor shall immediately communicate
5/17
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 6/765
PNGMH02721 Rev.2
their doubts with Purchaser in order to receive the Purchaser's written clarification and
consent.
Vendor shall notice any doubt in writing at least one month prior to any critical date (e.g.
the placement of material order, start of manufacturing and/ or inspection). If Purchaser
fails to return the comments to the Vendor by one month, Vendor shall re-issue the
notice to the Purchaser. Otherwise, Vendor shall be responsible for any drawbacks due
to neglecting the Purchaser's comments or for the rejection of the supplied Equipment or
work caused by Vendor's individual judgment.
(15) Alternative proposal

When Bidder desires to improve the design required in this specification due justifiable
reasons, such as a better effectiveness, economical advantage and design, Bidder may
propose an alternative proposal as option showing the differences from the basic
proposal in terms of technical features, quality, price or lead time for manufacturing.
(16) Conflict
Purchaser shall clarify all points regarded by their judgment as conflicting that could exist
among the requirements in this specification, drawings and related codes. Bidder shall
be aware of such conflicting points in the bidding or contract documents and submit
written notice to Purchaser immediately.
The precedence of Documents in this Technical Specifications is in accordance with the
order listed below:
aa) This technical specification including Attachment~ .ffi

bb) Technical specification of the Indonesia/ 1x1 OOOMW Coal Fired Power Plant Project
(An nexu re-A)
(17) Meeting
Purchaser has a right to hold a meeting with Vendor when Purchaser judges it
necessary. Vendor shall submit the minutes of meeting (including memorandums of
telephone communications) to Purchaser within five (5) days after the meeting or the
telephone conversation. Purchaser shall return the minutes of meeting with signature
after confirmation. Vendor shall attend any meeting with the Owner at Vendor's expense
under the request of Purchaser/Owner.
(18) Experience of similar equipment

Bidder shall advise their experience in regard to the design and/or manufacture of similar
equipment, submitting a reference list including Plant name, Owner's name, commercial
operation period, technical characteristics (e.g. type, quantity, flow, head, weight, and so
on) shall be submitted to Purchaser along with the quotation.
Bidder must clarify to Purchaser in case Bidder intends to propose new / prototype
design and / or new technology, and must obtain Purchaser's approval before its
application.
(19) Product liability

Vendor shall consider all safety measures for the design, manufacture, inspection and
6/17
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 7/765
PNGMH02721 Rev.2
delivery in order to prevent accidents (e.g. injury, fire, explosion, etc) so that Vendor's
Product Liability will not be demanded by Owner.
As a result of Vendor's review for Product Liability, caution plates shall be installed
wherever judged necessary. Furthermore, Vendor shall describe the item which must be
called for user's attention in the Instruction Manuals in concrete manner.
(20) Design life

Vendor shall use a period of not less than thirty (30) years as the basis for the design
lifetime of all works intended for incorporation in the plant in normal commercial
operation.
(21) Measure to earth environment (Green Procurement)

Global environmental issues concern the foundation of the existence of humankind. As
natural resources are finite, it turns necessary to transform the conventional economy
and society characterized by mass production, mass consumption and mass disposal.
Purchaser is engaged in the development of environmentally conscious products with
minimal environmental impact at every stage, from the procurement of raw materials,
their manufacturing, distribution and consumption to its disposal. We have been
promoting environmentally conscious procurement of raw materials by Vendor and in
accordance with our Green Procurement Guidelines.
The details are referred to the Attachment - 8.1 and latest requirements shall be referred
to the Purchaser's Web Site (http://www.toshiba.co.jp/procure/en/green/index.htm).
If any changes occur to the requirements after the contract effectiveness of this
Specification, that will constitute an adjustment item of the Contract, the adequate
rectification work for the changed requirement will be the Vendor's and their Purchaser's
responsibility with cost adjustment, if necessary.
r
(22) Control of B3 material (Indonesian regulation) requirements
Regarding Indonesian B3 material shown in Attachment-8.2, the substances listed in
lampiran II table 1 are not allowed to be used.
If Bidder and their intended Sub-vendors use the substances listed in lampiran II table2,
Vendor shall submit the notice to the Sub-Contractor.
(23) Plant and Equipment Identification.

The Vendor shall apply a plant identification system showing the name and number of
each item of plant and its respective arrangement drawing number and add any
additional items necessary to fully identify the plant. All design submissions shall include
a detailed labelling list indicating the label text size of the lettering and fixing details for
the approval of the Purchaser or its representative. The identification and numbering of
equipment, system, items etc. of supply, as well as of all documents and drawings shall
be in accordance with the latest version of KKS system. There is to be only one
description for any one item of plant and this must be used consistently for plant,
electrical and instrumentation designation throughout.
The Vendor shall supply all labels, nameplates, instruction and warning plates
necessary for the identification and safe operation and all inscriptions shall be in the
English language. Refer to B0.11.4 in Annexure A.
7/17
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 8/765
PNGMH02721 Rev.2
(24) Material Requirement.

Materials complying with codes and standards written in B0.11.15 in Annexure A shall be
used for the design and construction work. Unless the materials meet these codes and
standards or their equivalent ASME/ASTM, it shall be subjected to Owner's approval.
3. SCOPE OF WORK
(1) General
Vendor shall, in accordance with the provisions of the contract, design, manufacture, test,
supply and complete the works in accordance with the specification and the division of
works to the extent so applicable to Vendor and provide all labor (including the
supervision thereof). Vendor shall carry out its obligations hereunder to the extent that the
necessity for providing the same is specified in or is reasonably inferred from this contract.
Vendor shall generally be responsible for the following aspects relating to its works:
(a) Conducting works of design, specification and selection of materials, equipment,

machinery goods, processes and technology and managing and coordinating the
works;
(b) Designing, manufacturing or procuring materials, equipment, machinery and other

goods or things (including all spare parts as listed in the specification in respect of
the equipment) including such major design as listed in Attachment 1;
(c) Storing, protecting and securing materials, equipment, machinery and other goods
or things (including all spare parts as listed in the specification in respect of the
equipment) and arranging for the transportation of such materials, equipment,
machinery and other goods or things (including such spare parts) to a port of
unloading in Indonesia;
(d) Supporting, coordinating and acting as a liaison with and having necessary consent
and permit that is reasonably inferred under the Contract from Purchaser and
Owner to ensure that the Works shall be completed smoothly.
(e) Preparing documents, reporting and submitting such documents and/or information
to Purchaser and/or Owner, at the reasonable request of the Purchaser, within a
reasonable period of time as required by the Purchaser.
(2) Design Information, Operating and Maintenance Manual

Vendor shall compile and provide all necessary manuals, drawings and documents listed
in Attachment-4.
Drawings
Vendor shall, during the progress of the works, submit to Purchaser of the following:
(a) Design information as required for by the Specification, and in the numbers of copies
required therein, within such reasonable times as Purchaser may require;
8/17
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 9/765
PNGMH02721 Rev.2
(b) Drawings of the general arrangement and details of the works within such reasonable
times as Purchaser may require; and
(c) Vendor shall submit drawings to Purchaser via OMS (Document Management System)
prepared by Purchaser. Purchaser will provide the manual of OMS and instruct the
operation procedure.
(d) CAD data submission
1. Submission of the CAD File
When Vendor delivers the drawings to Purchaser for the approval or reference
(hereinafter "Drawings"), at the same time, Vendor shall submit to Purchaser the
20-CAD File and/or 30-CAD File (hereinafter collectively the "CAD File"), in electric
form, which should include the information equal to the information of the Drawings
delivered by Vendor. Vendor also shall be responsible for above obligation when
Vendor submits the amendment or updated Drawings to Purchaser.
The format of CAD File to be submitted by Vendor in accordance with above shall
be DWG or DXF format of Auto CAD 2009 or earlier, or DGN format of Micro
Station/J.
The subject drawings for which Vendor submits CAD File to Purchaser shall be:
20-CAD File for Drawings of the outline of the equipment and/or building structures
except for the detailed drawings of the parts; and
30-CAD File for Drawings of the outline of the equipment and/or building structures.
When Vendor submits the CAD File in any form other than forms stipulated in above
clause for rational reason or has any other comment concerning the CAD File,
Vendor shall immediately notice that to Purchaser.
2. Treatment of CAD File
2-1. The CAD File submitted by Vendor shall never be deemed as the approval
drawings for Purchaser even if the submitted CAD File were the data of the
approval drawings. Purchaser gives approval to the Drawings only.
2-2 Copyrights of the CAD File shall remain in possession of the Vendor. Vendor shall
agree herein that Purchaser modifies, arranges, converts or combines the CAD
File in order to incorporate into the 30 Review Data which would be prepared by
Purchaser. And also Vendor shall agree herein Purchaser use such 30 Review
Data including CAD File at its own discretion, with no compensation, only for the
purposes and within the scope following:
To review for studying, checking or confirmation of arrangement, conflicts,

interference, coordination or harmonization in Purchaser and/or with concerning
third companies, and disclose to such companies for such practices; or
9/17
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 10/765
PNGMH02721 Rev.2
To submit to Purchaser's customers as the part of official drawing material if

necessary
2-3 Vendor shall not claim or exercise its Copyrights of CAD File against Purchaser to
the extent that Purchaser uses CAD File for the purposes and within the scopes
provided in above sub clause 2-2.
Purchaser may object to any design information so provided:
(i) On the grounds that such design information does not conform with the requirements
of the specification, giving reasons for its objection. Based on such information,
Vendor shall modify the design information and re-submit the modified design
information to Purchaser but Vendor shall not be entitled to any extension of time or
increase in the contract price in respect of any such modification; and
(ii) On any ground other than that referred to in (i) above, as soon as is reasonably
practicable and Vendor shall, within the time period specified by Purchaser of
Vendor's receipt of such objection, acknowledge its receipt thereof and state in such
acknowledgement either that, in its reasonable opinion, any modification required to
give effect to such objection will have an adverse cost and/or time implication and
therefore it will not proceed with such modification or that, in its reasonable opinion,
there is no such implication and that it will (1) forthwith make the required modification
or (2) notwithstanding the absence of such implication, not make the required
modification, in which case, it shall include in such acknowledgement a detailed
written explanation for such refusal.
Submitted Drawings
Drawings submitted to Purchaser and to which no objection is raised shall not be

departed from except with the prior consent of Purchaser. If any drawings are changed,
Vendor shall promptly provide Purchaser with copies of such amended drawings.
Design Information Required for the Purchaser's Approval
Without prejudice to the provisions in this clause, Vendor shall prepare and furnish to
Purchaser the design information specified by Purchaser and listed in Attachment-4 in
this specification for Purchaser's approval.
Vendor shall not depart from any approved design information unless Vendor has first
submitted to Purchaser amended design information and obtained Purchaser's approval
thereof pursuant to the provision of this clause.
Witness of Drawing Inspection
Purchaser and such other person as Purchaser may reasonably require be present,
including Owner, shall have the right at all reasonable times to inspect all drawings for
any part of works.
Plant Manual and Other Drawings and Information
10/17
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 11/765
PNGMH02721 Rev.2
Vendor shall provide Purchaser, at such time as it may reasonably request, with sufficient
information in order for Purchaser to prepare the plant manual in accordance with
Purchaser's/Employer's/Owner's requirement.
(3) Training of Personnel off Site Training

Vendor shall train personnel nominated by Purchaser / Employer / Owner and supply
operation and maintenance manuals and associated training materials to do so, in
accordance with, and to the standards set out in, the training schedule set forth in the
specification (or subsequently provided by Purchaser), to the extent that such personnel
shall, assuming exercise of reasonable diligence by them, be able to operate the
equipment and be able to have good acknowledgement and understand to the design and
the equipment of the Vendor's work without further assistance from Vendor and/or
Purchaser. This level of operational competence shall be achieved by no later than the
commencement of the Reliability trials. The costs of such manuals and associated
training materials are included in the contract price.
The daily trainer fee of on site classroom training for the Vendor's scope of work shall be
estimated separately. However, OJT (on the job training required other than the on site
class room training) at site shall be included in the contract price of technical adviser fee
estimated separately. The technical adviser special conditions are listed in Attachment
12.
(4) Assistance and Support Work

Vendor shall provide engineering support for permission work for local regulation.
Vendor shall review Purchaser's and other related drawings.
(5) Environmental Impact

Vendor shall comply with relevant environmental legislation and requirements or
guidelines written in clause 6.11 in Annexure A. In addition Vendor shall co-operate with
the Purchaser for the purposes of the environmental management and monitoring plans
required by the environmental legislation; by among other things, submitting data,
conducting interviews and meetings and controlling its Purchaser's activities.
(6) Export Packing and Ocean Transportation

Vendor shall be fully responsible for export packing and ocean transportation.
(7) Temporary Instrumentation

Vendor shall supply the Purchaser with all temporary instrumentation as shall be
necessary to prove the warranties, performance and compliance with the specification
herein.
4. WORK NOT TO BE INCLUDED
(1) In case of delivery from Japan (FOB): Ocean transportation and inland transportation in
Indonesia
(2) In case of delivery from other country (CFR): Inland transportation in Indonesia
(The delivery of local procurements in Indonesia should be DDP at site.)
(3) Installation, erection and commissioning work at the site
11/17
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 12/765
PNGMH02721 Rev.2
(4) Civil works including building and foundations.

(5) External cabling
5. CODES AND STANDARDS
(1) The material, design and construction of the Equipment and the works to be provided by
Vendor shall be in accordance with the most recent version of the applicable codes and
standards listed in the Attached specifications for the Equipment.
Refer B0.11.2 in Annexure A.
(2) Applicable Codes and standards
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS American Welding Society
BS British Standards Institution
DIN German Standardization Institute
HEI Heat Exchanger Institute
IEC International Electrical Commission
ISO International Standard Organization
JIS Japanese Industrial Standard
JCS Japan Cable Manufacture's Standards
JEM Japanese Electrical Manufacture's Standard
Indonesian Codes Indonesian Standard and Code may apply for the equipment and the
material procured in Indonesia. As for the offshore procurement equipment and material, the
manufacture may apply the relevant applicable Standards and Codes of the country of origin
of the manufacture, which are internationally recognized Standards and Codes, subject to
the prior approval of Owner/ Employer.
If there is any conflict among the above standards and the specific standards called for by
the relevant authorities in Indonesia, the Vendor shall apply the higher and more stringent
code or standard.
(3) Test code shall comply with the above standard, and the guarantee items as indicated in
clause 17 and/or Attachment-2 shall be proven at the test.
(4) Where the requirements of specification are at variance with codes and standards, in which
12/17
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 13/765
PNGMH02721 Rev.2
case the requirements of this specification shall take precedence. Vendor shall also bring
such items to Purchaser's attention.
(5) Where Vendor has an intention to use other standards, Vendor shall submit proof that the
alternative standards offered are equivalent to or higher quality than those listed in this
specification in sufficient time beforehand for Purchaser to review. Vendor shall provide two
(2) originals for codes and standards.
6. ELECTRIC POWER AND l&C REQUIREMENTS
For Electrical and Drive Motors Specifications Refer to Attachment 6, General Specification
for Electrical Equipment, and to Attachment 5 for the General Requirements for l&C
Equipment.
7. TRANSPORTATION LIMITS
Following transportation limit shall be adhered to.

- Maximum length: 12 m
- Maximum width: 3.5 m
- Maximum height: 3.8 m
- Maximum weight: 50 ton
8. PERMISSIBLE NOISE LEVEL
The Permissible Noise Level shall be Max. 85 dB(A) at 1m distance from the equipment and
1.5m above floor for operational condition without any influence of background noise.
Refer to[ B0.4.3.1.2]of Annexure A.
~
9. VIBRATION
Rotating machine has to comply with the requirements for vibration magnitude (criterion 1)
designation as "zone A" or "zone B" stipulated by ISO 10816-1 to 3. Bidder must specify in
their bid the vibration level attained by their Equipment. The vibration level is a Guarantee
Item.
Refer to B0.11.7.2 inAnnexureA.
10. SEISMIC REQUIREMENT
Seismic loads equal to a horizontal acceleration of at least 0.3G at ground level shall be
considered as safety factor. Vendor should also consider the descriptions in Technical
Specification of Annexure-A.
11. SITE CONDITION
Refer to B0.2 in Annexure-A,.
13/17
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 14/765
PNGMH02721 Rev.2
12. PAINTING SPECIFICATIONS
Refer to Attachment 9.1, Painting Specification and B0.11.6 in Annexure A.

The final color of equipment will be indicated after award of contract.
13. INSPECTION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
(1) During the manufacturing, Purchaser and such other person as Purchaser may
reasonably require to be present, including Owner, shall have the right to inspect and
examine, and to witness shop tests of, equipment prior to shipment, as the case may be.
Such examination, witnessing or inspection shall not relieve the Vendor of any liabilities
under the contract. The Vendor shall propose to the Purchaser in a timely manner the
dates of the tests to be witnessed. Upon request by the Purchaser, arrangements for
air-tickets, accommodation and transportation for Owner staff shall be made by Vendor.
(2) Vendor shall give at least 40 days prior notice to Purchaser of the date on, and the
place at which, any equipment will be ready for testing. Inspection and test shall be
conducted in the manner and procedure duly approved by Purchaser. All such tests
shall be carried out at the expense and cost of Vendor. The travel, lodging and
subsistence cost of attendance of Purchaser and Owner shall be borne by Purchaser.
As and when any equipment shall have passed the tests referred to in this clause,
within seven (7) days of the successful completion of such test, Vendor shall furnish to
Purchaser a certificate in writing to that effect together with all test records of such test.
(3) If any equipment fail to pass the applicable inspection, examination or test in
accordance with this Contract, Vendor shall promptly make good the defect and ensure
that the equipment comply with requirements of this Contract. The tests referred to
above shall be repeated at the expense or cost of Vendor and the travel, lodging,
subsistence and other costs of attendance by Owner's representative or other permitted
person, including Owner, Purchaser, at the repeated tests shall be borne by the Vendor.
Test and inspection items requested by Purchaser are shown in Attachment-3. Owner's
detailed inspection and test requirements are stated in Annexure-A, B0.10. Vendor shall
issue the "site inspection and test plan" and "shop inspection and test plan" that is
incorporating test and inspection items listed in Attachment-3 and Annexure-A. The all
items stated in the refereed documents are the part of Vendor's scope of work even if
the item is not listed in the plan prepared by Vendor.
14. SPARE PARTS/ SPECIAL TOOLS I CONSUMABLES

Bidder shall provide separate lists with fully itemized pricing for the following five (5) types
of spares and tools; Refer to B0.7.7 in Annexure A.
1. Commissioning & Testing Spare parts

- These are required for erection and commissioning periods.(To be included in Base
offer by Bidder)
14/17
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 15/765
PNGMH02721 Rev.2
2. Mandatory Spare Parts. (Spares for the first two (2) years operation from COD)
- These shall include spares anticipated to be used for the first two (2) years operations
from COD.
- If the spare parts are found to be inadequate within the above period, the Vendor shall
furnish additional spare parts as required at no additional cost to the Purchaser.
(To be included in Base offer by Bidder)
3. Recommended Spares
- These shall include the strategic spare (which need a very long lead time (more than
six (6) months), or which is whether used or not used in its life. But it is better to keep
for replacement), major parts, replace parts for planned/unplanned maintenance.
The list of Recommended Spares is enclosed herewith. Refer to Attachment 10.4.
Bidder shall quote spares based on this list. If there are any excesses or deficiencies,
they shall be reflected.
4. Special tools
- Necessary special tools (including gauges and lifting) for maintenance which cannot
be procured in the general market. (shall be included in the basic offer by the Vendor)
One (1) set of special tools for Two (2) units shall be supplied.
5. Consumables
- Necessary consumables until unit's Expected provisional acceptance schedule (Shall
be included in the base offer by the Vendor).
As a guide, typical spare parts are shall be listed in format as enclosed in Attachment 10.4.
All price lists shall be fully itemized and valid to the end of the Warranty Periods, to allow
the Purchaser to purchase the spares items either initially, or throughout the duration of the
Contract.
All spares shall be directly interchangeable with the corresponding parts installed in the
plant and shall meet the requirements of the specification of the original plant.
Spares shall be warranted in accordance with the Warranty Period requirement as per
Clause 16.
For spares which have long lead times, Vendor shall identify the critical order dates for such
spares to ensure that they are on site at least three months prior to taking over of the first
unit.
15. PRICE SCHEDULE

Bidder shall submit the price schedule for both the Scope of work, Attachment-1 and Design
Specifications, Attachment-2 for each equipment of their offer and detailing the price
breakdown of Items, at least as per the following detail list:
The price schedule is included in Attachment 11.
15/17
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 16/765
PNGMH02721 Rev.2
16. WARRANTY - Refer to General Terms and Conditions.
17. GUARANTEE ITEMS

The process performance Guarantee is listed in Attachment 2, Design Specification.
The Noise, Vibration Guarantee requirements are mentioned in Clause 8, 9 above.
The document and delivery schedule requirements shall also be guaranteed. :
18. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES - Refer to General Terms and Conditions.

Vendor shall provide his equipment with performances to meet all guarantee items as
required by Clause 17 .0. In case the guarantee items cannot be met, Vendor should take
corrective actions to remedy the equipment. However, if the equipment still fails to meet the
guarantee after the corrective actions have been taken by Vendor and obtain agreement
from Purchaser and Owner, the Vendor shall pay Liquidated Damages for each failed
guarantee item.
19. ATTACHMENT LIST
Attachment 1 : Scope of Supply

Attachment 2 : Design Specifications
Attachment 2.1 Arrangement
Attachment 2.2 Terminal Point for Electrical
Attachment 2.3 Terminal Point for Civil
Attachment 2.3 Flow Diagram
Attachment 3 : Inspection and tests
Attachment 3.1 : Shop Inspection and Tests
Attachment 3.2 : Site Inspection and Tests
Attachment 3.2 : Shop Inspection and Test Plan for Pumps, Pipings and Heat
Exchangers.
Attachment 4 : Drawing List
Attachment 5 : Specifications for C&I Equipment
Attachment 5.1 : General requirement for C&I equipment (With Package
Control System)
Attachment 5.2 : Basic concept of Alarm system
Attachment 5.3 : Basic Interface concept for Controllers.
Attachment 6 : General Electrical Equipment requirements
Attachment 6.1 : General Specification of AC and DC motors.
Attachment 6.2 Motor Operated Valve Inner Wiring Diagram
Attachment 7 : Plant Identification
Attachment 7.1 Naming Guideline
Attachment 8 : Environmental Requirement
Attachment 8.1 : Green Procurement Guidelines
16/17
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 17/765
PNGMH02721 Rev.2
Attachment 8.2: Indonesia B3 material

Attachment 9: Other General Requirement
Attachment 9.1 : Painting Specification.
Attachment 10 : List Format
Attachment 10.1 : Technical Data Sheet
Attachment 10.2 : Not Used
Attachment 10.3 : Power Consumption List
Attachment 10.4 : Spare Parts List
Attachment 10.5 : Consumable List
Attachment 10.6 : Special Tool List
Attach ment-10. 7 : Lubricant List
Attachment 10.8 : 1/0 List (Enclosed in Attachment 5.1)
Attachment-10.9: Control Items (Enclosed in Attachment 5.1)

Attachment 10.1 O : Mod bus data link list (Enclosed in Attachment 5.1)
Attachment 10.11 : Instrument List (Enclosed in Attachment 5.1)
Attachment 10.12 : Set Point List (Enclosed in Attachment 5.1)
Attachment 10.13 Terminal Point List
Attachment 10.14 BOO List Formats
Attachment 11 : Price Schedule.

Attachment 12 : Special Conditions of Supervisory Services ..
Annexure-A: Technical Specification of Tanjung Jati B_Re-expansion Project - T JB 5 & 6
17/17
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 18/765
Attachment 1 : SCOPE OF SU PPLY

Table-1
Sr. No. Description Vendor Purchaser Remarks
/ Bidder
A General
A1 Basic Mechanical Engineering ~ Drawings and data
required as per
Attachment 4.
A2 Detail Mechanical Engineering ~ Drawings and data
required as per
Attachment 4
A3 Basic Civil Engineering ~ Vendor to provide design
criteria including layout,
foundation outline and
load data.
A4 Detail Civil Engineering ~
A5 Basic Electrical Engineering ~ Vendor to provide the
electrical load list and
single line diagram for
MCC/DP.
A6.1 Detail Engineering for MCC/DP ~
A6.2 Detail Engineering for Electrical ~
Equipment in Vendor's Scope
A? Basic C&I Engineering ~ DCS shall be decided by
Purchaser and I/Os for
DCS and LCP shall be
confirmed by Purchaser
and Vendor.
A8 Detail C&I Engineering ~ Local control panel, l&C
Cabling, Instrumentation.
A9 Review of Purchaser's and other ~
documents or drawings related
to CPP equipment and design.
The engineering drawings/documents to be submitted by Vendor will include the drawing /documents
listed in Attachment 4.
A10 Assembly and fabrication works ~ Refer to "(3) Special Note"
for all of equipment and
materials supplied under the
Contract including provision of
steel structural mounting
bases/skids (pre-wired and
pre-piped)
A11 Shop Painting with primer and ~
Finish Painting as per requested
paint specifications.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 19/765

/ Bidder
A11.1 Touch up paint material for all '1
equipment (10% of total painting
surface).
A12 Shop Test and Inspection '1 Testing, clearances and
endorsement to be carried
out as required by laws
and/or regulations
A13 Packing with rust preventive '1
treatment for transportation and
site storage
A14 Transportation - - See Commercial
Conditions.
A15.1 Installation Manuals '1
A15.2 Erection work at site '1
A15.3 Supervision of erection work at '1
site
A16.1 Site test, commissioning and '1
performance test procedures
A16.2 Site test, commissioning, '1
performance test and reports of
these tests to the Owner
A16.3 Supply of support labor for site '1 Vendor to inform
test, commissioning and necessary manpower of
performance test support labor.
&v <Option>
Vendor to estimate the
cost in case all
commissioning work and
performance test are
carried out by Vendor
without any support labor.
A17 Site training for O&M Staff '1
including preparing of training
manual
A18 Approval from Local Statutory '1
Authority (if any).
A19 Permission Work '1 Permission Work for CPP
equipment in local
regulation
B Mechanical Main required equipment
is as follows, but not
limited to.
B1 Condensate Polishing Plant: - - See below B1 .1 - B1 .6
B1 .1 Cartridge Filters '1
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 20/765

/ Bidder
B1.2 Not Used - -
B1.3 Not Used - -
B1 .4 Mixed Bed Ion Exchanger ~
B1.5 Air Blowers for Mixed bed Ion ~
Exchanger Vessel.
B1.6 Resin Traps ~
B2 External regeneration unit - - One ( 1) for Two (2) 1000
MW unit
See below B2.1 - B2.17
B2.1 Resin separation vessel ~
B2.2 Anion regeneration vessel ~
B2.3 Cation regeneration vessel ~
B2.4 Air Blowers for External ~
regeneration unit
B2.5 Resin Make up Hopper ~
B2.6 Not used -
B2.8 OM water regeneration pumps ~
B2.9 Acid Day (measuring) tank ~
B2.10 Alkali Day (measuring) tank ~
B2.11 Acid metering pumps ~
B2.12 Alkali metering pumps ~
B2.13 Hot water tank ~
B2.14 Bulk acid tank ~
B2.15 Bulk alkali tank ~
B2.16 Acid unloading pumps ~
B2.17 Alkali unloading pumps ~
83 Other Mechanicals - - See below B3.1 - B3.14
83.1 Resins ~ Refer to F5
83.2 Piping and tubing including ~ a) One (1) lot as required,
valves, bolts, nuts, gaskets and including drain pipe
pipe support, penetration from equipment to
sleeve, piping rack, seal plate drain pit.
and buried object. b) Pipe line between
each ion exchanger
room in the Power
House and the
regeneration facility is
estimated to be
approximate 100
meters.
83.3 Sump Pit ~ Vendor to inform
requirement of
Neutralization pit.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 21/765

/ Bidder
83.4 Chemical Dosing Facility for - -
Neutralizing
83.5 Effluent Transfer Pump ~
~
[ 83.6 Ammonia Containing Effluent
Transfer Pump I
83.7 Lifting facility for maintenance ~
83.8 Platform, step, ladder and ~
handrail for operation,
maintenance and patrol
83.9 Safety eye showers ~
83.10 Specific lighting for equipment ~
83.11 Grating or checker plate for ~
drain channel
83.12 Safety guards for all exposed ~
moving parts of pumps.
83.13 Matching flanges at terminal ~
points with bolts, nuts and
gaskets
83.14 Sampling system for CPP. ~
C Electrical
C1 Motors for blowers, pumps. ~
C2 Motors for valve actuators ~
C3 MCC and DP ~
C4 Cable including cable tray, - - Cable way between each
conduit, and flexible hoses, ion exchanger unit room in
fittings and supports, etc. the Power House and the
regeneration facility is
estimated to be
approximate 100 meters.
See below C4.1 and C4.2
C4.1 Above C4 between Purchaser ~
equipment and Vendor
equipment or terminal box.
C4.2.1 Above C4 between Vendor ~
equipments or terminal boxes.
C4.2.2 Above C4 between Ion ~* Bidder to inform the
exchanger unit room and Optional Cost.
regeneration facility (Normal
Cables).
C4.2.3 Special Cable such as Fiber ~ Base Scope
optic cable between Vendor
equipment's or terminal boxes.
C5 Terminal stud for Earthing ~
C6 Earthing wire from rising point ~
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 22/765

/ Bidder
D Control & Instrumentation
01 DCS ~
02 Local Control Panel with PLC ~ Including necessary
and Operator Work Station maintenance tools.
& (*)Bidder shall inform the
cost separately.
03 Necessary Instruments, but not ~
limited to
04 Specific Conductivity indicators/ ~
recorders for each of the ion
exchangers and for the
regeneration vessels
05 pH recorders for cation ~
regeneration vessels and each
of the ion exchangers
06 Level Indicator for all the ~
chemical tanks
07 Level and temperature ~
Instrumentation & controls for
hot water tank and thermostatic
control for alkali heating system
08 Concentration meters and Flow ~
Indicators on chemical lines
09 Pressure Gauges and Flow ~
Indication for the regeneration
vessels and ion exchangers
010 Differential pressure switch ~
across each Cartridge Filter and
ion exchangers.
011 Silica Analyzer at outlet header ~
of CPP service vessels
012 Dissolved Oxygen Analyzer at ~
outlet header of CPP service
vessels
013 Cation Conductivity Analyzer at ~
outlet header of CPP service
vessels
014 Sodium Analyzer at outlet ~
header of CPP service vessels
015 Instrumentation other than the ~
above, Instrumentation Rack,
Stanchion and Junction box
016 Shed for outdoor local ~
instrumentations
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 23/765

/ Bidder
017 Special instrument for '1
Performance test.
E Civil Portion
E1 Foundation bolts and associated '1 Nuts, washers, packers,
materials liners & shims for setting
and aligning
E2 Setting work '1
E3 Civil works including foundation '1
F Others
F1 Spare parts - -
F1 .1 Spares for Commissioning & '1 Quote unitary prices. Use
Start up the format of attachment
10.4
F1 .2 Mandatory Spare parts, (Spares '1 Quote unitary prices. Use
for the first two (2) years the format of attachment
Operation) 10.4
List submitted to Owner is
enclosed in Annexure A
F1 .3 Recommended Spares '1 Quote unitary prices as
Option. Use the format of
attachment 10.4,
List submitted to Owner is
enclosed in Annexure A
F2 Special tools and tackles for '1 Quote unitary prices. Use
installation and maintenance the format of attachment
10.6
F3 Initial charge and spare charge '1 Including up to
of chemicals Commercial Operation
Date. Quantity to be
informed by Vendor.
F4 Initial charge and spare charge '1 Including up to
of consumables such as Commercial Operation
reagent, oil and grease etc Date.
F5 Initial charge and spare charge '1 Total Six (6) charges of
of resin one vessel for 2 Units
(Five (5) sets of vessels
(Mixed), one (1) spare for
commissioning).
F6 Temporary facility for installation, '1 Ex. Temporary strainers,
site test and commissioning valve, flange, chain and
lock, etc. as required
F7 Nameplates for equipment, '1 Shall be written in English.
valves, electrical boards, control
panels, instrumentation items,
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 24/765

/ Bidder
etc.
F8 Caution plates and warning ~ Shall be written in English.
signs for personnel safety and
also equipment/materials
protection.
F9 Safety signboards required by ~ Shall be written in English.
statutory authorities
F10 Reagent and periodical ~
calibration of chemical
instrument for commissioning.
F11 Insulation (Design, Material ~
Supply).
Any other work / equipment / service, whether specified or not, but needed to complete the
Condensate Polishing Plant and as required by local statutory regulations shall be included in the
scope of Bidder.
(1) Terminal Points

Major terminal points are as indicated below. All equipments and services as required for
completing the system in all respect within these terminal points and detailed elsewhere shall be
within the scope of the Bidder.
Mechanical:
No TP Number Description Remarks
1 TP-5-01 Influent Condensate to Condensate Refer Attachment
polishing plant of Unit 5 1 Appendix 1
2 TP-5-02 Effluent Condensate to Condensate Same as above
polishing plant. of Unit 5
3 TP-5-03 Instrument air supplied to Condensate Same as above
polishing plant of Unit 5.
4 TP-5-04 Service air supplied to Condensate Same as above
polishing plant of Unit 5
5 TP-6-01 Influent Condensate to Condensate Same as above
6 TP-6-02 Effluent Condensate to Condensate Same as above
polishing plant. of Unit 6
7 TP-6-03 Instrument air supplied to Condensate Same as above
polishing plant of Unit 6.
8 TP-6-04 Service air supplied to Condensate Same as above
9 TP-C-01 Instrument air supplied to Common Same as above
regeneration facility.
10 TP-C-02 OM water to Common regeneration Same as above
facility.
11 TP-C-03 Service air to Common regeneration Same as above
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 25/765
facility.
12 TP-C-04 Living water will be supplied for eye Same as above
shower
13 TP-C-5X The effluents generated during Same as above
regeneration shall be discharged in the
Sump pit to be provided by Purchaser.
14 TP-C-6X Neutralizing acidtalkali supply to the Same as above
P+t
15 TP-C-7X Suction of Effluent discharge pump for Same as above
Discharge Effluent to discharge pit.
16 TP-C-8A Discharge of drain pit sump pump to Same as above
Ammonia Removal System.
17 TP-C-8B Discharge of drain pit sump pump to Same as above
Waste water treatment System.
18 TP-C-09 Connection for Alkali Tanker Same as above
19 TP-C-10 Connection for Acid Tanker. Same as above
Electrical:
MCC/DB and cable from MCC/DB to Vendor equipment will be provided by

Purchaser as per requirement of Vendor. If MCC/DB is required in the regeneration
plant the same will be on the scope of the Purchaser.
All cabling, cable trays, conduits, flexible tube and supports etc including design and
supply between Vendor equipment shall be in the scope of Vendor.
Civil:
Top of civil foundation and footing, foundation bolts, base plates and embedded
materials to be supplied by Vendor. Civil works including plant building and any other
concrete works will be executed by the other in accordance with the basic design
provided by the Vendor. Such basic designs to include the plant layout plan views,
sectional views and elevation views of the said structures. (Refer to Attachment-2.3)
Control & Instrumentation:
Micro processor based PLC with PLC maintenance facility and communication test
program between Bidder's PLC and Purchaser's DCS are in the scope of Bidder.
(2) Options
Should the Bidder want to suggest any alternate system, equipment or arrangement
which may be technically more suitable and/or more cost effective in lieu of
improvements in technology day by day, he may make alternate offers. In such cases,
adequate technical information and operational feedback etc. shall be enclosed with the
offer in order to assess the superiority and reliability of the alternatives offered. In case of
alternative offers, its implications on the performance, guaranteed parameters etc. shall
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 26/765
be clearly brought out so as to make an overall assessment. In any case, the base offer
shall be inline with the specification. Under no circumstances, the specified equipments
and services shall be brought out as alternate offer.
(3) Special Note: Shop assembly and prefabrication for equipment and materials
(Refer to A 1O of the Table-1)
a. All of equipment and materials supplied under the Contract shall be assembled or
prefabricated at the Vendor's shop as per the instructions below and then delivered. The
extent of shop assembly and prefabrication shall be finalized after discussion and mutually
agreed during the contract stage. The Vendor's proposal for the whole extent shall be
included in their tender documents.
b All equipment and materials, including piping materials, tubing materials, valves, electrical
and control & instrumentation items, cabling and earthing materials, access platforms,
ladders, etc. supplied under the Contract shall be assembled on a common steel structural
mounting base or frame.
c. Plant, which comprises of all miscellaneous equipment, shall also be assembled as per
above instructions of "a". If separate assembly of units is unavoidable, the number of units
shall be minimized.
d. Large equipment and materials including vessels, bins, supporting steel structures, etc.
whose sizes are in excess of the limitation sizes for transportation shall be prefabricated to
a size as large as allowed for transportation.
e. Piping materials, tubing materials and cabling materials to be laid on the shop assembled
units, can be allowed to be delivered separately subjected to Purchaser acceptance during
the contract stage. If those are delivered separately, piping materials whose sizes are in
excess of 2 inches and cable trays/ducts shall be prefabricated to a reasonable length with
their fittings.
f. All accessories for pneumatic type actuators or instruments, such as positioner, filter,
pressure regulator, solenoid valve, lock-up valve, interconnecting tubing, limit switches, etc.
shall be arranged and assembled on actuator or instrument body.
g. Any applicable thermal or acoustic insulation and jacket for the equipment and piping within
the scope of the Equipment or Plant to be delivered as a package shall be completed in the
Vendor's shop. Thermal shrouds of punched metal, if applied, shall be done as well.
(4) Sub-Vendor
Vendor shall select sub-vendors as per their choice. As a guidance the following list agreed
by Employer is enclosed. Preferably, Vendor shall comply with the followings.
All motors in this system shall be provided from one manufacture. Vendor shall select
the motor manufacture who has service shop in Indonesia.
Bidder shall submit the cost adjustment in case that Bidder will select the sub-vendor
unless otherwise specified by Customer.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 27/765
Attachment 2: DESIGN SPECIFICATION
This chapter covers the requirement for design as applicable to Condensate Polishing Plant. All
equipment shall be designed to prevent injury, hazard or any damage to the operation and
maintenance persons.
2.1 General Description
(1) There will be Two (2) No. of Condensate Polishing Plants (CPP), One for each 1000 MW
unit and a common External Regeneration Unit.
(2) Condensate Polishing Plant (CPP) will be provided in the steam water cycle at the
downstream of the[ Condensate Extraction Pumps (CEPJ for maintaining the purity of the
feed water. .&,
(3) CPP will be used to purify the condensate from the condenser by removing solids and
dissolved salts with the intent of reducing corrosion and deposits in the steam water cycle.
Treated condensate from polisher vessel shall be delivered to the G~ Steam Condenser.
(4) Full condensate flow from the outlet of[ condensate extraction pump] of each Unit shall be
delivered to the polishing system for treatment. If required the polishing system can be
isolated from the condensate stream and bypassed.
(5) Condensate polishing will be continuously operated.
2.2 Configuration of Condensate Polishing Plant
Two (2) complete and workable systems fully installed and tested shall be furnished. Main
equipment for each unit is as follows, but not to be limited to.
Condensate Polishing Unit.- Main equipment is as follows, but not limited to.
(1) Two (2) x 100% cartridge filters for condensate polishing, complete with by-pass, associated
piping, pneumatically operated valves, differential pressure gauge with adjustable high alarm
and cartridges.
(2) Two (2) x 50% ion exchanger lines each containing;

a) Two (2) x 50% working mixed bed ion exchanger, complete with filling and all associated
piping, pneumatically operated valves and instrumentation for automatic operation and
regeneration
a-1) Two (2) x 100%, Air blowers for polisher mixed bed vessels.
a-2) Two (2), Polisher mixed bed vessel resin trap, one for each ion exchanger.
(3) Automatically operated bypass over CPP plant for condensate flow from the condenser.
(4) Complete set of measuring instruments like manometers, level controls and pH- analyzers
for the complete system
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 28/765
The Polishing units, one for each 1OOOMW Unit, shall be located on the ground floor of the
steam turbine building.
External Regeneration System. - Main equipment is as follows, but not limited to.
(1) One (1) HCL (Acid) regeneration station for the regeneration of the mixed bed ion
exchangers complete with bulk storage tanks, day tank, dosing metering pumps(2 x 100%),
unloading pumps(2 x 100%), flow control injector and all associated piping and
instrumentation.
(2) One (1) Na OH (Base) regeneration station for the regeneration of the mixed bed ion
exchangers, complete with bulk storage tanks, day tank, dosing metering pumps(2 x 100%),
unloading pumps(2 x 100%), flow control injector and all associated piping and
instrumentation.
(3) Two (2) x 100% air blowers for regeneration facility.
(4) Two (2) x 100% regeneration water pumps.
(5) Drain system for waste water from CPP into collection and neutralization basin
(Neutralization Collection Basin Out of bidder's scope).
(6) Complete set of measuring instruments like manometers, level controls and pH- analyzers
for the complete system
(7) Complete set of Sampling equipment including sampling coolers
2.3 Design Pressure, Temperature, Flow rate
- Design Pressure :[ 14.9 bar (g) ]&

- Design Temperature : 60 deg C
- Design Flow rate : 2085 ton/h
- Maximum Pressure Drop across CPP : 6.3 bar (at design flow rate)
Condensate Flow rate and Operating Temperature.

Each temperature and flow rate under operation condition is as below.
BMCR CMCR ECR ECR ECR ECR HP heater
100% 75% 50% 40% One String
Flow 2,078,036 2,035,753 1,976,162 1,496,917 1,016,305 840,455 2,084,694
(kg/hr)
Temperature, 40.3 42.8 39.8 38.2 36.9 36.4 40.3
(deg C)
Note 1 : Condensate polishing system shall also perform at all operating conditions.
Note 2 : The above values are tentative.
Note 3 : The Guarantee condition for operation performance shall be 100% ECR.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 29/765
2.4 Condensate Quality
(1) The CPP shall be designed to be operated on the following cycles. The below mentioned
time periods (Service life time) shall be guaranteed by the Bidder, while maintaining the
effluent quality.
i. During start-up: 50 hours (minimum)
ii. During Normal operation : Minimum 3 days on Hydrogen cycle.
iii. During Normal operation : Minimum 24 days on Ammonia cycle (including Hydrogen
cycle)
iv. During condenser tube leakage condition: 12 hours (minimum)
(2) The condensate quality during operation for CPP design shall be as follows :
Location Item Unit Normal Start up/ Condenser

h\ Operation Shut down Tube Leakage
Inlet Total dissolved solid µ g/L as CaC03 50 ] 3000 3000
Cation Conductivity µ Siem at 25°C - - -
Dissolved silica µ g/L as Si02 30 100 100
Dissolved ammonia µ g/L as NH3 1300-2450 1300-2450 -
(AVT)
Dissolved ammonia µ g/L as NH3 15-950 - -
(CWT)
pH (AVT) -- 9.4-9.6(*1) 9.4-9.6(*1) -
pH (CWT) -- 8.0-9.3(*1) - -
Iron µ g/L 30 500 30
Copper µ g/L 5 5 5
Sodium µ g/L as Na 50 50 50
Chloride µ g/L as Cl - 100 100
2
S04 - µ g/L - 10 20
TOC µ g/L - - -
Crud µ g/L - A 1000 -
Outlet Total dissolved solid µ g/L as CaC03 l\/l~y ?!=; ~
Si02 µ g/L Max.20 Max.30 -
Cation Conductivity µ Siem at 25°C Max.0.15 Max. 1 -
Iron µ g/L as Fe Max.5 Max.SO -
Copper µ g/L as Cu Max.2 - -
Sodium µ g/L as Na Max.1 h\ Max.1 Max.3
Chloride µ g/L as Cl Max.3 ] Max.0.5 -
2
S04 - µ g/L Max.1 Max.2 -
TOC µ g/L - - -
Crud µ g/L - 150 -
(*1) Design condition for CPP is as follows;
pH (AVT):9.5
&
pH (CWT): 9.3
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 30/765
(3) External Regeneration time and Service Life Time.

The external regeneration time (including resin transfer) of exhausted resin for each polisher
vessel shall be max. 1o hours 00 minutes. The service life time is indicated above.
2.5 Technical Requirement for CPP
1. The mixed bed (MB) ion exchanger shall be equipped with full bypass facilities.
2. All Pressure vessels will be rubber lined in three (3) layers, resulting in a minimum total
thickness of 3 mm on the internal surfaces of the vessel. The lining will be extended over the
full face of all flanged connections and will have a minimum thickness of 3 mm in all such
external areas.
3. The number of nozzle in the exchangers shall be at least 80 per m2 , all nozzles shall be of
adequate corrosion resistant material.
4. Strong acid cation and Strong base anion resins shall be used to maintain the feed water
quality. The resins will be separated and regenerated externally by transferring to external
regeneration unit.
5. The MB unit shall be provided with 2 x 100% air blowers of centrifugal or twin lobe type.
Each blower is complete with motor, V -belt drive with belt guard, inlet filter/ silencer, flexible
coupling and discharge snubber mounted on a single base.
6. Sampling equipment shall be installed in all places where required for local and remote
supervision of the operation for early recognition of disturbances and for the clarification of
the causes of damages.
7. The sampling coolers shall be fitted with stainless steel coils and stainless steel piping
connections up to the take-off point. The position of each sampling point shall ensure
representative samples and shall led to one common sampling station or shall be combined
in a minimum number of groups.
8. At the design flow rate, Bidder shall decide a pressure drop across the cartridge filter and the
polisher service vessels with clean resin bed. This pressure drop will include losses due to
entrance and exit nozzles, flow elements, distributors, under drains, resins and the effluent
resin traps. Also the maximum pressure drop under clogged condition shall be proposed in
the Bidder's proposal specification.
2.6 Resin Selection
(1) The resins used for Condensate Polishing Plant (CPP) are of spherical form. The base is a
co-polymer of styrene and divinylbenzene forming a macro porous or macro reticular
structure.
Cation Resin : Strong Acid with sulphonic acid as functional group
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 31/765
Anion Resin : Strong Base with quaternary amines as functional group

Inert Resin (if required) : Non ionic, compatible with the above resin types
For the CPP, adequate resins for each polishing vessels along with one (1) spare charge
of resin in the regeneration area shall be provided by the bidder. A separate charge of
resin shall also be included for the commissioning of CPP. Thus, the total number of
charges supplied will be as follows:
For 2x50% service cation/mixed vessels per units (2 sets of exchangers x 1 unit)
= 2 charges
External regeneration unit resin storage tank = 1 charge .&,
Separate spare resin charge for commissioning = 1 charge
Total resin charges 1 unit with one regeneration facility = 6 charges
The Bidder shall also provide suitable alternate storage of additional resin charges.
(2) The total wet volume exchange capacities will not be less than the following.
Cation in Hydrogen form: 1.7 eq/Liter

Anion in Hydroxide form : 1.0 eq/Liter
The average force required to fracture individual bead of cation resin in Hydrogen form,
anion resin in Hydroxide form and inert resin will exceed 350 grams. Not more than 5%
of the beads tested in each batch would get fractured by forces less than 200 grams.
2.7 External Regeneration Unit
(1) External Regeneration Facility shall be located at outside of Turbine Building (refer to
Attachment-2.2).
(2) An outdoor external regeneration unit shall be provided for resins regeneration for each unit
in which the pressure vessels of vertical (spherical or cylindrical) type will be designed for a
minimum design pressure of 1o kg/cm 2 (g).
(3) The Pressure vessels shall be provided with adequate freeboards over the top of the settled
resins in order to minimize the loss of resin during their use.
The minimum freeboards to be provided shall be as follows.
- Resin separator : 50% of resin volume

- Cation regeneration vessel : 50% of resin volume
-Anion regeneration vessel : 50% of resin volume
(4) Each Pressure vessel shall consist of the following.
- Condensate inlet and outlet piping headers, complete with valves

-All necessary sampling points, drains and vents, complete with valves
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 32/765
-Resin transfer headers, connecting the external regeneration facilities to the condensate
polisher vessels.
- External resin traps at the outlet of each polisher vessel, designed for in-place manual
back washing
- Common drain headers for the CPPs
-All necessary piping, fittings & valves with actuators
(5) The requirements of External Regeneration Unit will be as follows.
- External separation / regeneration vessels, complete with vents, drains, piping, fittings
and valves for air scrubbing, back washing and regeneration
- Resin injection hopper, complete with water ejector system for resin make up to the
external; separation vessel
- Common waste effluent header with one resin trap designed for in-place manual
backwashing
- Two (2) Numbers (1w + 1s) horizontal centrifugal OM water pumps shall be provided for
water supply for chemical preparation or dosing and transfer of resin from the service
vessel to the regenerating vessel and vice-versa.
(6) The External regeneration unit shall be provided with 2 x 100% air blowers of centrifugal or
twin lobe type. Each blower is complete with motor, V - belt drive with belt guard, inlet filter/
silencer, flexible coupling and discharge snubber mounted on a single base.
(7) Process of External Regeneration (This may be modified as per the proven regeneration
process of the CPP supplier) is as follows :
i. The main MB unit when exhausted is fluidized and the resins are hydraulically transported
to an external separation vessel.
ii. The regeneration of the exhausted resins in the external separation vessel is automatically
controlled. The exhausted resin is first backwashed in the external separation vessel, the
cation and anion beds thus getting separated. Once this is done the anion resins are
hydraulically transported to the external anion regeneration vessel.
iii. The cation resin left in the separation vessel is air scrubbed, backwashed and regenerated
with acid. The crud on the resin is thus removed.
iv. The anion resin is similarly regenerated with alkali in the anion regeneration vessel.
v. A provision for ammonization will also be provided in the regeneration area if required.
2.8 Bypass System
(1) Automatic bypass of the polishing units shall be provided when there is excessive pressure
difference between the condensate inlet and outlet headers. A control valve opens
automatically under such conditions to bypass the required quantities of condensate to
prevent this excessive pressure difference from exceeding a preset limit when two vessels/
one vessel/ no vessel are in operation.
(2) The control valves are designed so as to bypass from 50% to 100% of rated flow when one
or two of the service vessels are out of service.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 33/765
(3) Differential pressure transmitters or controllers shall be provided across the condensate inlet
and outlet headers to control the bypass valve.
2.9 Resin Traps
Outlet of each condensate polisher vessel, and waste effluent header of the common
regeneration shall be provided with a resin trap. All resin traps shall be provided with
differential pressure indicators and transmitters. The resin traps on process effluent
header shall have a screen opening not exceeding 120% of associated process vessel
under drain screen opening.
2.10 Chemical Dosing system for CPP
All equipment for dosing of acid, alkali ammonia (if required) solutions are rated to
provide a maximum dosing rate of 20% in excess of that required from process
calculations. Similarly all tanks shall be sized to store one regeneration requirement with
20% excess requirement.
The acid and alkali dosing equipment for regeneration of condensate polishing resins
shall consist of
-Acid measuring tank with fume absorber

-Alkali measuring tank with CO2 absorber and over flow seal
- Hot water tank with 2 x 50% electric heating coils for heating alkali diluent water to
50°C within[reasonable time ) Lt.
- 2 x 100% metering pumps or hydraulically operated ejectors shall be provided for acid
and alkali dosing
- OM water shall be used as diluent water for acid and alkali preparation
- All equipment, piping, valves, fittings etc. shall be provided to make the system
complete
- Day tank and metering pumps for ammonization of the resin in regeneration shall be
provided, if required
- Bulk acid tank and bulk alkali tanks shall be provided for CPP. These shall cater to the
requirement of acid or alkali for MB units for 20 day normal operation at full load. The
bulk tanks are sized for one (1) tanker capacity of 1o tones with a margin of 120% as the
minimum requirement.
- 2 x 100% acid and alkali unloading pumps shall be provided for unloading of acid and
alkali from road tankers
2.11 Air Blowers
The external regeneration facility and CPP service vessels are provided with 2 x 100% air
blowers. Each blower is complete with motor, V-belt drive with belt guard, inlet filter /
silencer, flexible coupling and discharge snubber, all mounted on a single base.
2.12 Regeneration Water Requirement
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 34/765
Water required for regeneration will be taken from OM Water storage tank.
Total volume of demineralized water shall be max 350 ton/cycle for One (1) train.
2.13 Effluent Disposal System
The waste water from the external regeneration facility is led to the neutralizing pit and
neutralized in the pit. The required amounts of acid/alkali are dozed to neutralize and
neutralized effluent water is to be let to the plant waste water treatment retention basin.
The ammonia drain pit water is guided to ammonia removal system.
Total volume of wastewater produced from regeneration of each condensate polisher train
for each unit shall be maximum 350 ton.
2.14 Instrument Air
Instrument Air for the CPP and regeneration facility will be tapped from convenient
locations on the main instrument air header.
Minimum Pressure at Terminal Point : 6.0 bar (g)
Air Consumption Expected : 3.0 Nm3/min.
Bidder shall inform the required quantity of Instrument air in the proposal.
2.15 Control & Operation philosophy
The Condensate Polishing Plants consisting of 2x50% streams with integral bypass are
designed with the flexibility of full automatic operation of exchange units in any
combination.
2.16 Operational features
i) The regeneration system will be external to all the polishers. For regeneration, resin from
the exhausted CPP service vessel will be transferred pneumatically / hydraulically to this
facility. The regenerated resin already available in external regeneration station is
transferred to the polisher vessel. After that the exhausted resin charge will be cleaned,
separated, regenerated, mixed and rinsed, then go back to CPP service vessel for the next
use.
ii) The common influent headers of each polisher service unit will be connected to an
automatic bypass line to be provided. This bypass line will include a differential pressure
device, which on a high signal will cause an automatic valve to open, bypassing the service
vessels.
iii) The condensate polisher system will consist of the two (2) sets of service vessels
complete with the influent, effluent and rinse water headers, connections for resin transfer
to and from each of the vessels and all necessary controls and instrumentation. Each of
the service vessels will be provided with an external resin trap on its effluent line.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 35/765
2.17 Control & Operation of the Condensate Polishing Plant (CPP)
The control, monitoring and programming requirements of each CPP and their external
regeneration unit shall be implemented in a single PLC based control system, located in
External regeneration facilities. Operator Work Stations shall be provided on an LCP near
each CPP. The LCP also houses the conductivity meters and window based alarm
announcer.
i) The Condensate Polishing Plant of each unit will be controlled from the Purchaser DCS
and Operator Work station (OWS) provided on the CPP LCP, located near the respective
polishing vessels or from the OWS in the Common Regeneration Area.
ii) It will be possible to select each of the CPP vessels for any of the following operations:
a) Service
b) Resin Transfer from CPP vessel to Regeneration plant.
c) Resin Transfer from Regeneration Plant to CPP vessel.
d) Isolation from service.
e) Rinse Recycle.
Further from DCS and OWS, it will also be possible to initiate any of the above operating
modes.
iii) Rinse Recycle

The rinse recycle will be a manually initiated full automatic sequence. This sequence will
include the rinse down step using condensate, until the unit effluent quality is acceptable
for boiler feed water.
The effluent quality will be determined by conductivity monitoring of the rinse water outlet,
which is returned to the condenser hot well for recycle. The panel mounted Cation
conductivity indicator will be interlocked to prevent advancing of the automatic sequence
until the rinse down is complete.
iv) Service Mode

Flow indicators will monitor Service flow rate for each polishing vessel. During periods of
low condensate flow the operator may select to remove one of the vessels from service by
a manually initiated automatic sequence. A differential pressure switch installed between
the influent and effluent headers will cause an alarm on high differential pressure. By
observing the individual vessel flow indicators, or conductivity at vessel outlet the operator
can determine which vessel is contributing most to the pressure drop and is in need of
resin cleaning.
Panel mounted Cation conductivity indicators will monitor the polishing system influent and
effluent streams as well as the discharge of each service vessel. A 'high influent
conductivity' alarm will alert the plant operator that a problem condition such as air or
condenser cooling water leakage has occurred.
This conductivity analyzer will also provide contacts for an alarm at the power station main
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 36/765
control room. An alarm for 'high conductivity' in effluent header or service vessel will alert
the operator to the need for regeneration of a polishing vessel.
iii) The sequence

Resin Transfer from CPP Vessel to regeneration plant' and resin transfer from
Regeneration plant to CPP Vessel' will be initiated from the Condensate Polishing Plant
OWS or DCS.
2.18 Control and Operation of the External Regeneration System
This system will be designed for physical cleaning and chemical regeneration of the resin
system and will consist of required number of resin separation and regeneration vessels,
the tank for introducing the required regeneration solutions and means for adding make-up
resin, It will have acid, alkali dosing system.
Regeneration Control
A manually initiated automatic sequence for physical cleaning and chemical regeneration of
the resin shall be implemented in the PLC based control system. Control for chemical
dosing system will also be provided in it.
Physical cleaning of the resin will consist of three steps, drain to level, air scrub and rinse.
The air scrub and rinse steps are of short duration, approximately 1 and 2 to 3 minutes
respective time. However the program will allow the operator to increase or decrease the
number of times the sequence is repeated to meet the requirements existing at that time.
The chemical regeneration is many steps of sequence. This will include hydraulic
reclassification of the resins and the transfer of the resins to the respective regeneration
vessels. The separated resins are then back washed, regenerated with hydrochloric acid
and sodium hydroxide solutions (the latter being at 50 deg. C respectively and then rinsed.
Following the rinse step the resins will be given an air scrub followed by a good backwash.
The resin is then transferred back to the resin separation vessel and the resins are air
mixed. The mixed resins are then given a final rinse with the discharge conductivity being
monitored.
The quality of this discharge will determine if the regeneration has been effective. If the
quality is not satisfactory the regeneration sequence must be repeated.
Demineralised water will be used throughout the regeneration process for backwashing
regenerant diluent, rinsing and resin transfer.
A conical bottom hopper having a water ejector will be used for resin make- up.
2.19 Resin Transfer
Automatic sequences will be provided for transferring resin from a vessel to the remote
common facility for physical cleaning and chemical regeneration and for returning fresh
resin to that vessel. The transfer of resin from the service vessel will include isolation of the
service vessel, hydraulic transfer of the resin to the external regeneration system (resin
separation vessel) and the complete drain down of the service vessel.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 37/765
The complete control and operation requirements of the Regeneration Plant will be
implemented in the PLC based system implementing the CPP controls. It shall be possible
to operate the Regeneration Plant in Auto/ Semi auto I Manual mode.
Following operations will be possible for the Regeneration Control from the DCS and OWS:
a) Complete Regeneration
b) Starting
c) Stopping
d) Selection of a particular step
e) Repeat of each step of program
In 'Auto' mode, once the sequence has been initiated, it will proceed from step to step
automatically.
In 'Semi-Auto' mode a set of steps are performed after each initiation by the operator.
In 'Manual' mode complete operation, step by step, will be performed by the operator from
the DCS and OWS.
The sequence control requirements are implemented in the PLC.
It will be possible to switch mode of operation from one to the other at any moment and the
operation will proceed on the newly selected mode from that step and time.
For steps, which require frequent time adjustment, it will be possible to change the time
setting from the DCS and/or OWS.
For all sequences, the current step number, set time of the step, elapsed time of the step
and the total elapsed time of the sequence will be indicated on the DCS and OWS.
A mimic diagram of the Regeneration system will be provided on the OWS monitor to
indicate the status of various drives and valves.
The system will incorporate the necessary safety features. During automatic sequential
operation, if any pre-requisite criteria are not fulfilled or missing for a pre-determined time
interval, the steps should not proceed further, and Alarm will be provided.
The safety system for any sequence/stop will check the opening / closing of the required
valves and the remaining valves of the plant to avoid mal-operation.
Wherever standby equipments are provided, it shall be possible to select each of the drive
on 'standby' duty.
Start, progress and stop of each of the sequence shall be annunciated on the OWS
monitor.
2.20 Interlocks
All interlocks for safe operation of the plant shall be provided. They shall include the
following as a minimum: Service vessels can be back in service, only after they have been
pressurized.
Service vessels can be taken up for resin transfer only after they have been completely
isolated from the condensate system and depressurized.
Resin can be transferred to and from only one service vessel at a time.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 38/765
Resin transfer between the service and the regeneration area shall be permitted only when
the receiving vessel is empty.
Wherever possible, completion of all timed steps in the regeneration and resin transfer
process shall be verified by appropriate process conditions such as effluent conductivity etc,
as applicable. The automatic sequence shall be prevented from advancing to the next step,
till these required process conditions are achieved, and at the same time the delay if any
shall be annunciated in the control panel, to draw the attention of the operator. The
automatic sequence of operations will be interruptible at any time by the operator take over
the control of the operation in manual from that step onwards.
Further operator should be able to override sequence, if required. It shall be possible for
the operator to extend the timing of a particular step by isolating the timer for the duration.
The timer will restart once the operator puts back the system on 'auto' and the other steps
will then follow as programmed.
The regeneration sequence will be prevented from advancing further in the event of
tripping of a running motor or other fault condition, which do not permit the various desired
parameter of this step to be achieved. A manual override for this shall also be provided.
Annunciation logic will be carefully designed so that the alarms are activated only under
abnormal conditions. As for example, low flow of diluent water is only relevant when the
chemical dosing is in progress. All other times, when no diluent water flow is required, this
annunciation should be blocked. In general, Normal and trouble free operation of the plant
will not activate any of these alarms.
The immersion heater in the hot water tank can be put on only when there is adequate
water level in the tank.
CPP Service Vessel inlet and outlet isolation valves shall be closed automatically in the
event of tripping of Condensate Pumps.
2.21 Electric motors
Specification of electric motor of each equipment shall follow the below;

- Rated output : Bidder shall confirm.
- Number of poles and speed Bidder shall confirm.
- Rated voltage : 380V
- Number of phase : 3 phases
- Rated frequency : 50 Hz
- Other technical requirement of motor is shown in Annexure-A, as well as Attachment 6.
2.22 Instrumentation and control system
The field instrumentation will be provided as per the system requirement. Instrumentation
and control system shall adhere to the correct sequence of operations and pre-determined
time intervals as described above in operation & control philosophy.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 39/765
Apart from the minimum instruments shown in the P&I diagram, the list of instruments
envisaged are as follows:
1. Conductivity indicators/ recorders for each of the CPPs and for the regeneration vessels
2. pH recorders for cation regeneration vessel
3. Level indicators for all chemical tanks
4. Level and temperature instrumentation & controls for hot water tank and thermostatic
control for alkali heating system
5. Concentration meters and flow indicators on chemical lines
6. Pressure gauges and flow indication for the regeneration vessels and CPPs
7. Differential Pressure switch across each CPP
8. Online Silica analyzer at outlet of each CPP service vessels
9. Online Sodium analyzer at outlet of each CPP service vessels
All solenoid valves shall be provided with local LED status display and limit switches shall
be provided for critical applications to facilitate remote indication on OWS.
2.23 Performance Guarantee
No Item description Guarantee Value Remarks

1 Condensate polisher plant effluent Refer to Table provided
water quality. under Section 2.3 of
Attachment 2.
2 Acid (HCL) consumption per (To be informed
regeneration cycle ,i.e. for one by Bidder)
service tank. (1 OO%wt kg)
3 Caustic (NaOH) consumption per (To be informed
regeneration cycle, i.e. for one by Bidder)
service tank. (1 OO%wt kg).
4 Volume of waste water produced (To be informed
from one regeneration cycle. i.e. by Bidder)
for one service tank. (Cubic meter)
5 The continuous run cycle time for eact Refer to provided under (To be informed
condensate polisher unit. (Hours) Section 2.3 of by Bidder)
Attachment 2.
6 Total regeneration time for one (To be informed
cycle, i.e. for one service tank, by Bidder)
(Hours)
7 Noise Level (d BA) Refer to Clause8. (To be informed
Permissible noise level by Bidder)
in main body.
8 Vibration (Zone 1 or Zone 2) Refer to Clause 9. (To be informed
Vibration in main body. by Bidder)
9 Auxiliary Power Consumption. (To be informed) (To be informed
(kW) by Bidder)
Note 1: These guarantee items shall be achieved under 100% ECR operation.
Note 2: To establish whether or not the system has met the performance guarantees as
specified above, a field acceptance test will be run before COD of the Plant. Therefore all
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 40/765
materials required for the test should be furnished by Vendor.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 41/765
Annexure - I SPECIFIC DESIGN DATA
Annexure -1
SPECIFIC DESIGN DATA
Sr. No Item Unit S~ecification I Quantit~

A General A
A1 Design code for Tanks and Vessels - I ASME VIII Div. 1 1~
B Mechanical
81 Condensate Polishing Plant - For each Unit 5 & Unit 6
81 .1 Cartridge Filter 2 x 100% per unit
Full flow condensate polishing
Type of Filter - To propose
Filter mesh µm To propose
81.2 Mixed Bed Ion Exchanger Units Number 2 x 50% per unit
Full flow condensate polishing
Type of Vessel - Vertical
(Spherical Cylinder)
Condensate Flow to each MB m3/hr 1,043 for each MB
i.e. each MB capacity (Total flow is 2,085 m3/hr.)
Design surface flow rate m3/hr/ To propose
m2
Maximum Design Temperature oc 60
Normal Design Temperature oc 43
Capacity per stream ton/h To suit
Pressure Drop in clean condition of
resin including valves, fittings and barg To propose
resin traps
Pressure Drop in clogged condition
of resin including valves, fittings and
barg To propose
resin traps
Material of construction
a) Shell To propose
b) Dished Ends To propose
81.3 Air Blowers 2 X 100%
Type Centrifugal / Twin Lobe
Material Cast Iron with suction air
filters, relief valves and
associated items
Duty Intermittent
Capacity and head To suit
81 .4 Resin Traps To propose
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 42/765
Sr. No Item Unit Specification I Quantity

82 External regeneration unit One (1) for Unit 5&6
Minimum design pressure for

barg 10
pressure vessels
Pressure Drop in clean condition of
resin including valves, fittings and bar To propose
resin traps
Pressure Drop in clogged condition
of resin including valves, fittings and
To propose
resin traps bar
(<6.3 bar at Design Flow)

Type of Vessel Vertical
(Spherical Cylinder)
Material of construction
a) Shell To propose
b) Dished Ends To propose
82.1 Resin separation vessel 1 No
82.2 Anion regeneration vessel 1 No
82.3 Cation regeneration vessel 1 No
82.4 Air Blowers for External 2 X 100%
Regeneration Unit
Type Centrifugal / Twin Lobe
Material Cast Iron with suction air
filters, relief valves and
associated items
Duty Intermittent
Capacity and head To suit
82.5 Resin Make up Hopper 1 No of suitable capacity,
sized for one fill of resin or
based on maximum attribution
loss, whichever is higher.
82.6 Not used.
82.7 DM water regeneration pumps 2 X 100%
82.7a DM water Parameters at terminal point Flow To be proposed.
(Considering a case to avoid DM water (m3/hr)
t----------1
regeneration pumps)
82.7b (The water requirement i.e continuous, Pressure
t----------1
Intermittent etc) shall be reflected under (barg)
t-----'------=--'-----+------------------1
82.7c Frequency. Frequency

82.8 Alkali measuring tank (Day tank) 1 No of capacity 120% of one
regeneration
Material To propose
82.9 Acid measuring tank (Day tank) 1 No of capacity 120% of one
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 43/765

regeneration
Material To propose
82.10 Acid metering pumps 2 x 100% of suitable capacity
and head
82.11 Alkali metering pumps 2 x 100% of suitable capacity
and head
82.12 Hot water tank One (1) No.
Capacity: 2 x 50% electric
heating coils to heat alkali
diluent water to 50°C in 2.5
hours
82.13 Acid bulk tank 1 No. (minimum 20 days
storage required or one (1)
tanker capacity of 1o tones
with a margin of 20%)
Material To propose
82.14 Alkali Bulk tank 1 No. (minimum 20 days
storage required or one (1)
tanker capacity of 1o tones
with a margin of 20%))
Material To propose
82.15 Acid unloading pumps 2 X 100%
82.16 Alkali unloading pumps 2 X 100%
83 Other Mechanicals -
83.1 Resins As required
Cation resin Strongly acidic with
Sulphonic acid as
functional group
Anion resin Strong Base with
quaternary amines as
functional group
Inert resin Non ionic, compatible
with SAC & SBA resins
Volumetric ratio To propose
Resin quantity Total Six (6) charges
- 50% capacity / each x 2 sets
of vessels x 2 unit
- 1 spare for commissioning
83.2 Piping and tubing including valves, 1 lot, As required, includes
bolts, nuts, gaskets and support drain pipe from equipment to
drain pit.
CPP inlet piping To propose
CPP outlet piping To propose
CPP Bypass piping To propose
(Butterfly valves of flangeless wafer
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 44/765

type)
Resin transfer piping To propose
(Full Port Ball valves)
Back wash, Acid & Alkali To propose
regeneration piping
(Diaphragm valves)
Acid or Alkali transfer piping To propose
(Diaphragm valves)
Effluent transfer piping To propose
(Diaphragm valves)
lnstrumentAir piping To propose
(Full Port Ball valves)
B3.3 Nel:ltFalii!:atieR Faeilit¥ -
B3.4 GReFRieal aesiR§ faeilit¥ feF Rel:ltFalii!:iR§
B3.5 Nel:ltFalii!:ea Effluent Transfer Pump 2 X 100%
Material To propose
-..,
B3.6 rAmmonia Containing Effluent Transfer 2 X 100%
Pump
\,. ~,,.,.., -'-,....,-i;::jl To ur,1111,.,.,,,...., ~
B3.7 Lifting facility for maintenance

C Electrical Equipment
For Specifications of individual
D Control & Instrumentation components, Refer to
Attachment 5 of this RFQ.
01 Local Control Panel with PLC and Micro-processor based
Operator Work Station Programmable Logic Control
System in Hot redundant
configuration
F Others
F1 Regenerant chemicals -
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 45/765
Attachment-2.1: Arrangement
Approval on PDM
B
FL+SOOO
0
PRE LI NW~ARY
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 52/765
Attachment-2.2: Terminal Point for Electrical
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 53/765
Attachment-2.2: Terminal Point for Electrical
Power Cable
~~
Purchaser Vendor
Motor
HV/MV/LV
for
SWGR
Equipment
LV Motor
SWGR Valve
Purchaser Vendor
LV Distribution
SWGR Panel
~ ~.
Purchaser Vendor
Switch Box Motor
LV
/Inverter for
SWGR
Panel Equipment
Lighting Cable
Purchaser~
Lighting Fixture
LV Distribution
for
SWGR Panel
Building/Room I
Purchas~
Lighting Fixture
LV Distribution
for
SWGR Panel
Yard Area I
~~
Purchaser Vendor
Lighting Fixture
LV Distribution
for
SWGR Panel
Equipment
I & C Cable
Purchaser Vendor
DCS at Central i---------.....,_ocal Control i---------1 Instruments

Control Building Panel
Junction Box
Motor Control
Center
Notes
: Cables with Cable tray, Conduit pipes and fitting materials
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 54/765
---
Vendor
f1r I
- P·I
..
'"'
-
--...
11 R-1 l · I· i
2 ----
lJ ( ..
I
.I • • 3
.....
- p .. z
I
I I .
..
--
'~-
I
I I R .. z f I 2
s '
u-
'-' -
5
,_
,~·--
- P-1 , .....
7
a I....I R-t I II I
u
9
10
- P-? I, .
:
--
-
I I
, , R<?
-
- '
2
7
V
12 LI l CA3l.:.
•.
~
J~IS'i~uM ~JJT
-,I
Purchaser ~
.,
'
I.
I
:rurJc:::rra.J 8oX
The terminal points between Purchaser and Vendor are each terminals in Junction Box as shown on
the above typical drawing. Vendor shall supply local instruments, cable and Junction Box with terminal
lug for cabling of Purchaser.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 55/765
Attachment-2.3: Terminal Point for Civil
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 56/765
Attachement -2.3 : Civil Interface
2 x 1,000MW Coal-Fired Power Plant Project
Tanjung Jati B Re-expansion Project - TJB 5 & 6
Civil Interface
Contents
1. Anchor Bolt/ Expansion Anchor · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2
2. Anchor Frame I Anchor Bolt Fixed by Template · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3
3. Anchor Support/ Welded Support · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4
4. Opening for Pipe, Cable etc········································ 5
5. Equipment Foundation·············································· 7
6. Tank···································································· 8
7. Pit/ Ditch · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 9
8. Panel / Cabinet · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 10
9. Cable, Cable Tray, Cable Conduit · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 12
10. Earthing······························································ 14
11. Crane/ Monorail · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 15
12. Pipe/ Cable Rack··················································· 16
Symbol
V: Vendor
C: Others
1/ 16
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 57/765
Attachement -2.3 Civil Interface
Civil Interface
Symbol
V:Vendor
C: Others
No. Item Material & Construction Supply Const- Remarks

ruction
1-1 Anchor Bolt in Box-out
2 1. Anchor bolt and V C
Base Plate
2. Shims/Liner Plate V C
3. Box-out C C
4 4. Chipping C
5. Grouting (Fill-in Concrete) C C
8 6. Finishing C
7. Packer C C
7 8. Packer Plate C C
5 3
1-2 Anchor Bolt in Winding Pipe

2 1 1. Anchor bolt and V C
j
Base Plate
2. Shims/Liner Plate V C
3. Winding Pipe C C
6
4 4. Chipping C
5. Grouting (Fill-in Concrete) C C
6. Finishing C
8
7. Packer C C
7 8. Packer Plate C C
5 3
1-3 Expansion anchor

1. Steel Structure and Base V C
Plate
3 2. Expansion Bolt V C
(Hole-In Anchor)
3. Concrete Comer C C Where Applicable
1-4 Support structure for STG lugging

1. Steel Structure and Base V C
Plate
2. Expansion Bolt V C
(Hole-In Anchor)
2 /16
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 58/765

ruction
2-1 Anchor Bolt Fixed by Anchor Frame
6 1. Steel Structure
2. Template (anchor frame)
and Anchor Bolt for
Steel Structure NA
5
(Equipment)
3.Support
4. Frame Setting Anchor
4 5. Fill-in Concrete
6. Chipping
7. Grouting
8. Finishing
2-2 Anchor Bolt Fixed by Anchor Frame

1. Steel Structure
2. Template (anchor frame)
NA
and Anchor Bolt for
Steel Structure
(Equipment)
3.Support
4. Frame setting Anchor
5. Chipping
6. Finishing
2-3 Anchor Bolt Fixed by Template

1. Anchor Bolt V C
1 2. Template V C
3
3.Foundation C C
4.Angle V C
2-4 Anchor Frame for Mechanical

Equipment 1. Steel Structure C C
2. Concrete floor C C
4 3 3.Support V C
4. Fill in Concrete C C
5. Welding C C
3 /16
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 59/765

ruction
3-1 Anchor Support Fixed by Welding
1. Steel Support to be V C
Welded
2. Welding C C
3. Embedded Steel Plate V C
withAnchor
3-2 Support onto Concrete Structure

(for Eye Plates, Piping Hanger Supports, 1. Steel Structure V C
Monorail Supports, etc.) 2.Support V C If applicable
4 3. Embedded Anchor V C
Plate
4. Concrete Floor, Beam C C
5. Welding Works C C
3-3 Support onto Deck Plate Ceiling

(for Eye Plates, Piping Hanger Supports, 1. Steel Structure N.A
Monorail Supports, etc.) 2. Reinforcement
Chemical or Mechanical anchor
3. Concrete floor is applicable if required.
incl. Deck Plate
4. Welding Works
3-4 Eye Plates

1. Eye Plate (Round Bar) V C
2. Concrete C C
~I
3-5 Support onto Steel Structure

(for Eye Plates, Piping Hanger Supports, 1. (Hanger) Support V C
Monorail Supports, etc.) 2. Steel Structure C C
2
3
4 /16
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 60/765

ruction
4-1 Opening - Type 1
1. Penetration C C
2. Filling Concrete C C
3. Pipe V C
4. Cover Plate V C Where Applicable
3 2

1. Penetration C C
2. Sleeve V C If necessruy
4
3. Pipe/ Cable Tray V C
/ Conduit
4. Cover Plate V C Where Applicable
5. Cutting out Deck Plate C C
6. Deck plate C C
7. Concrete C C
2 3

1. Penetration C C
2. Filling Concrete C C * Grouting filling tube
embedded in concrete by
C if required
3. Cover Plate V C
4. Pipe V C
5. Support Collar Welded V C Where required
5
to the Pipe

1. Penetration C C
2. Pipe / Cable Tray / Bus V C
Duct etc V C Where Applicable
3. Seal/ Cover Plate
4. Sleeve C C Where Applicable

5. End Plate C C
3&6 6. Seal Plate Welding

4
1. Penetration C C
3
2. Pipe V C
2 3. Frame Structure (Girts) C C
4. Seal Plate V C
5. Sealing C C
5
* Water protection and/or fire protection for each sealing material to be applied by the party who the material will supply
where necessruy
5 /16
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 61/765

ruction
1. Penetration C C
4~~J/ 2
2. Pipe
3. Frame Structure (Girts)
4. Rain Seal Support
5. Rain Seal
V
C
V
V
C
C
C
C
6 6. Seal Plate Welded to the V C
Pipe

1. Frame C C
2. Cover V C
3. Pipe V C
~ 2~~3
4-8
i
Opening - Type 8
4
1. Penetration C C
2. Pipe / Cable Tray / Bus V C
2 Duct etc V C Where Applicable
3. Seal/Cover Plate welded
to plate/cable tray etc V C
4. Bolt, Nut, Packing etc C C
3 5. Penetration frame welded
to building structure C C
6 6. Building Structure C C
7. Siding of the building

Concrete tank / Pit nozzle 1. Concrete Tank or Pit N.A
2. Nozzle with Flange Concrete Tanks are not included
2 3. Pipe with Flange
in TSB portion.
4. Bolt, Nut and Gasket
5. Lining / Coating
* Water protection and/or fire protection for each sealing material to be applied by the party who the material will supply
where necessary
6 /16
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 62/765

ruction
5-1 Equipment Base 1. Foundation C C
2. Channel Base V C
3. Filling Concrete C C
4
4. Chipping C
5. Finishing Grout C C
6. Anchor Bolt V C
5-2 Around Equipment Foundation Plinth

(Concrete Stair/Platform) 1. Equipment V C
2. Foundation Plinth C C
3 3. Handrail C C For operation platform
4. Concrete Stair C C
3 5. Concrete Platform C C
6. Anchor for Equipment V C
5
5-3 Around Equipment Foundation Plinth

(Steel Stair/Platform) 1. Equipment V C
2.Foundation C C
3 3. Handrail V C For operation platform
4. Steel Stair V C For operation platform
3 5. Steel Platform V C For operation platform
6. Anchor for Equipment V C
5
7 /16
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 63/765

ruction
6-1 Around Tank Foundation
1. Tank Shell V C
2. Base Plate V C
3. Tank Foundation C C
4. Oil Sand C C
5. Bitumen (Asphalt) Sheet C C
6. Anchor Bolt * * *As per scope of anchor
bolt
7. Box Out I Winding pipe C C
6-2 Oil Tank Foundation and Oil Dyke

1. Oil Tank V C
4 2. Oil Dyke C C
2 5
3. Concrete Stair for Dike C C Incase of steel, "V"
4. Handrail for Stair C C
5. Drain Pit / drainage for C C
Oil Dyke
6-3 Chemical Tank Foundation

1. Chemical Tank V C
4 2. Bundle Wall/ Dike C C
3. Drain Pit/ Trench C C
4. Lining / Coating on C C
foundation
6-4 Eye Wash and Shower

1. Drain Pit C C
2. Dike C C
3.Washer Equipment V C
4. Potable Water Piping C C
8 /16
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 64/765

ruction
7-1 Pit
1. Concrete Pit/ Pond C C
4 2. Lining/ Coating C C
3. Steps / Ladder C C
6 4. Handrail C C For operation platform
Including comer angle
5. Manhole and Cover C C
6. Concrete Stair C C
7. Submerged Pump V C For operation
8. Pipe and Conduit V C
9. Dewatering before C C
handover from C to EC
7-2 Pit (Thickener/ Clarifier etc)

1. Pit
4
N.A
2. Lining/ Coating
3. Steps / Ladder These equipment are not
4. Handrail included in TSB portion. platform
5. Manhole and Cover
6. Concrete Stair
7. Equipment
8. Embedded Pipe
9. Dewatering before
handover from C to EC
7-3 Cable Pit, Cable / Pipe Trench

1. Cable Pit/ Trench C C
6 2 7 2. Pit/ Trench Cover C C Including opemng if
necessary
3. Embedded Comer Angle C C
(Anchor Strap)
4. Steps / Ladder C C
5. Support Rack V C
6. Cable/ Pipe V C
7. Tray V C
8. Embedded Plate V C
9. Ditch and Drain Pit C C
9 10. Embedded pipe, cable,
V C
cable conduit
11. Dewatering before
handover from C to EC C C
12. Dewatering after handover C C By permanent sump

pump
7-4 Drain Pit, Ditch

2 1. Pit, Ditch C C
2. Cover V C
3. Coating I Lining C C If necessary
'
1
~
9 /16
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 65/765

ruction
8-1 Channel Base for Cabinet/Panel- I
1. Cabinet/Panel V C
2. Channel Base V C
3. Support/ Reinforcement C C
4. Filling Concrete / C C The work shall be done
4 Finishing Mortar before panel installation
5. Box-out C C Where Applicable
8-2 Channel Base for Cabinet/Panel-2

1. Cabinet/Panel V C
2. Panel Base V C
3. Expansion Anchor V C
(Hole in Anchor)
8-3 Local Panel / Cabinet/ Stanchion

1. Local Panel/Cabinet V C
~I (Hole in Anchor)
3 3. Concrete Comer C C
8-4 Analyzer
I.Analyzer V C
/1 2. Expansion Anchor V C
(Hole in Anchor)
3. Channel Base V C
4. Concrete Plinth C C
10 / 16
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 66/765

ruction
8-5 Panel in Building
(Boiler operation panel, APC Cabinet,
Junction Box, Interlock Relay Panel, Panel
for Cool Feeder and Classifier)
8-5 Direct Installation on Floor 1. Bolt/Nut between Panel V C
-a and Channel Base
2. Channel Base V C
ui 1 (Hole in Anchor)
4. PTile C C
5. Penetration for Cable C C
____ ]\i ~ !
8-5 Free Access 1. Bolt/Nut between Panel V C

-b and Channel Base
2. Channel Base V C
Panel 3. Bolt/Nut between V C
~ i/1 Channel Base and Pedestal
4. Free Access Floor C C
(Assembly Floor)
5. Pedestal V C
(Hole in Anchor)
7. Concrete Slub Floor C C
8. Calking (Finishing) C C Where necessary
11 / 16
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 67/765

ruction
9-1 Fire ProofTreatVnt around Panel
1. Opening C C
2
2. Panel V C
3. Panel Ground C C
4. Partition Plate under * *
Panel
5. Fire Seal * *
*As per scope of supply

for panel
9-2 Water/ Fire Proof Treatment for Trench,

1. Cable Trench and C C
4 Opening
2. Cable Tray/Conduit V C
3. Water/ Fire Proof Panel * *
4. Water/ Fire Seal * *
~- P@tt@ttltti@tt f@1 ~1ttil@ ~ ~
+Hi) ,C@mltttt
for cable tray/conduit
9-3 Fire Proof Treatment for Wall

Penetration 1. Fire Proof Partition Wall C C
I with Penetration
) 2. Cable Tray/Conduit
3. Fire Seal
V
*
C
*
:~, 3//i:
I
for cable tray/conduit
JP JP
~ JP
9-4 Water Proof Treatment for Duct Bunk

1. Duct Bunk / Manhole C C
2. Cable V C
3. Water Seal *11 *11
* 11: Same as scope of

supply for Cable
12 / 16
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 68/765

ruction
9-5 Embedded Cable Conduit and Pipe
1. Cable Conduit/ Pipe V C
I
2. Foundation/ Floor C C
3. Pit/ Trench C C
J;Y,~3 4. Pit/ Trench Cover C C
9-6 Cable Conduit

3 1. Cable (If any) V C
2. Conduit Pipe/ HDPE C C
Pipe
3Cap V C
9-7 Piping Under Ground

(for plant drain) 1. Underground Pipe for C C
~
Plant Drain
2 3 -- Chemical Drain
-- Oily Drain
----------- 2. Pipe above Ground V C
3. Flange, Bolt, Nut and V C
Gasket
1/
13 / 16
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 69/765

ruction
10-1 Earthing
9 1. Equipment V C
2. Earthing Wire C C
3 3. Connector (underground) C C
4. Pig-tail C C
5. Earthing mesh C C
6. Connector (above ground) C C
7. Excavation/Backfill C C
8.Lug V
4 9. Termination C
~
H = Im above Ground
Floor
L = Im from equipment to
6 be earthed
5
14 / 16
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 70/765

ruction
11-1 Monorail for Hoist/ Chain block
3 I.Monorail V C
2.Support V C
3. Steel Structure C C
2 5. Hoist Stopper V C
15 / 16
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 71/765

ruction
12-1 Pipe / Cable Rack
1. Superstructure steel V C
CD 2. Pipe V C
~ 3. Cable and trays V C
00 4. F mmdation C C
@8
••
@
--
II I i i I
16 / 16
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 72/765
Attachment-2.4: Flow Diagram
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev.2 73/765
~ - ~ - - - - 1_ _ _ _~1 _ _ _ _2_ _ _ _ _1 _ _ _ _3_ _ _ _ _1_ _ _ _ _

4 _ _ _ _1~ ____ s _ _ _ _ 1__ _ _ _6_ _ _ _~1 _ _ _ _7_ _ _ _ _1_ _ _ _ s_ _ _ _ _ f____ 9_ _ _ _~ 1_ _ _ _ 1_0_ _ _ _ 1__ _ _ _
11_ _ _ _~1 ____ 12_ _ _ _~1 _ _ _ _1_3_ _ _~ 1_ _ _ _ 1_4_ _ _~ 1_ _ _ _ 1_s_ _ _ _~
1 ___ 1_6_ _ _ _ _ ~~
A TURBINE HOUSE:GROUND FLOOR NOTES: A
,-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 NOMENCLATURE :
1. THE DIAGRAM SHOWN IS INDICATIVE ONLY.
IH 14 IGMHOll 49 , (8~(2) · - · - UNITS POLISHING SYSTEM V --> VENDOR.
P --> PURCHASER. 2. REGENERATION IS UNDERTAKEN IN EXTERNAL VESSEL.
FROM CONDENSATE PUMP®~ ~
DISCHARGE P uOGCF10
AA020
ui1g~10
uOGCFIO
AAOJO
• ,
G--;:~~
N
,
~ :~; ,
3. ALL VALVES ARE NOT SHOWN FOR SIMPLICITY.
~.. . . v: ~------------------------+---------------. TURBINE HOUSE:GROUND FLOOR

,---------------------------------------------------1
u0GCF10 AAT030
-
I UNIT6 POLISHING SYSTEM
u0GCF10 uOGCFI 0 B
B~ et04l etO~
u0GCF10 AT040
CARTRIDGE FILTER 10GCF1088010 10GCF1088020

2x100% f-
.9 ~9. (SAME AS UNIT 5)

V '
(A) V '
(B)
uOGCF31 uOGCF31
AA030 AA020
C C
/ '
-----..--- POLISHER MIXED BED VESSEL
~788 2x50%
~~~
-
L _- -- ---------- ---------- -- -- ------ -- --------~ -- ----_J
- POLISHER MIXED BED VESSEL POLISHER MIXED BED VESSEL
RESIN TRAP ==:;::i RESIN TRAP ==:::;::i
-
-- (A) (B) ~-~"T"""""-"
,. -
10GCF10AT010 1OGCF10AT020
D TO GLAND STEAM
CONDENSER INLET
ED~(2) ' D
' CPP- - EXTERNAL REGENERATION FACILITY

<IGMH01149 IH 15 ,----- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -,1JGCF1117iPTilO - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ----,
I u0GCF50 fMl I
® ~-
7:;::30 ~s 7NO
~
~- ~ 7~'.;=
AA020 9
~ \..
u0GCF50
AA.OU}
~ ig::f
"7
~'
: I / -
- uo Uo uo uo
L.'-.~::f ~ ::f 1).g:;E uOGCFSO Q r ...
a .l
a AA030 (A)
• Al R BLOWER FOR 10GCF10AP110
~-e------t--<.~ CAUSTIC FROM TANKER I
y y POLISHER MIXED
BED VESSEL •
u0GCF50
~05_1!_
fMl
9 u0GCF50 '
' .....,vC><~J::/2}---c;-~, ~o~
2x100%
E 10GCF10AN010 u0GCF50 ° (Bf-") , E
..-® - u0GCF12 AA060 •
'+-----1··::,Tk(.•I-+ SERVICE AIR V
Q
'
AIR~c::::::s-{
"
(A)
-.....
AA010
''
u0GCF11
-- CAUSTIC
UNLOADING
t
CAUSTIC BULK
\
-
®<EB> 10GCF10AN020
u0GCF11
AA020
10GCF1 OAP060
CAUSTIC
DAY TANK
PUMPS
2x100% STORAGE TANK(A) -+----,~x~---,-~
V '
" AA010 M 10GCF1088040

10GCF1088070 uOGCF51
AA010
f-
AIR-;o·oc,::::=::l>-{ -
.... ' A• uOGCF50 uOGCF50
(B) AA080
- AA070 y
L---- ® ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ------ J
u0GCF12 A ~
AA020 V ' (A) V '
10GCF1 OAP070
F ..--1-~•ED uOGCF50 M uOGCF50 10GCF1 OAP080 F
®' ,. - AA100
-- AA090
-- uOGCF60 fMl
INSTRUMENT AIR V '
(B)
AA020 9 uOGCF60
r--,:C><r;•,,.-2'.F---c;--_,~ ~o~
® - 8 ..-®
V '
CAUSTIC u0GCF60 Q (Av) _

~~'~ -_J METERING PUMPS
AA030
10GCF10AP090
r--.__e-------------------f----f-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2x 100% ~-e-----+-C~ACID FROM TANKER I f--
uOGCF60
AA050
fMl
9 u0GCF60
- ' ® ..,
(2) EXTERNAL REGENERATION FACILITY (COMMON) .....,.C><J::,,,-2-}---,:::;-",, AA049
uOGcFM 0
- AA060 (B) , "
' ACID ACID / \
G METERING ACID G
PUMPS UNLOADING
ACID PUMPS BULK STORAGE TANK(A) • _
2X 100%
- DAY TANK 2x100% 10GCFBB090
-+--,.X,1--+I
u0GCF61
10GCF10AP030
AA010
M
-
7t2~
HEATER u0GCF60
AA080
u0GCF60
AA070
10GCFIOBB050
"--------~- y
~ ..). ~-
7 ~o
uo
g::;:f: ~ ;:. g::f uo
/
10GCF1088060
.
V .._.
,.-H'IXI--,V .._.
u0GCF50
' a u0GCF34 u0GCF99 ' a
AA110
(A)
AA050 AAOIO ==U>-
/ /
f--;o, I OGCF1088010 . '
.9.
~-{>'(!-----.
.9. .?. ==II>- 10GCFI OAP040
10GCF1088030
• V ' 1DGCF1088020 V ~
==II>-
H
TO ATM RESIN .9. CATION
.9_ u0GCF97
.... ""' AA010 ANION .?. ==U>- uOGCF60 M uOGCF60 H
AIR BLOWER .9. SEPARATION V '
.9. ~EGENERATIOt ..9.' uOGCFJJ .9. 'EGENERATIOt V '
AA100
..... ,.,
AA090
..... ,.,
_J
FOR REGENERATION ' V '
VESSEL
u0GCF96
AA010 V '
VESSEL .... _.. AA020 V '
VESSEL
u0GCF9B
AA010
HOT ,,,..--·y··Y'<"""'Y··,\r--y_~-~~'i'·-""<·-,(-y···y-r<...--._(~----....
V "'I \
1
/ 1 -;._, V "'I
<"-..1~""",(.....,('(---y··y···v-··-~
FACILITY N
u0GCF32 u0GCF42
. '
u0GCF42
~ - ,'OGCF10A:'.o ,),-------------------------------- i
AA010 AAOIO AAOIO
2x100% ~~
u~ WATER
-
I OGCF1 OANOJO
M uOGCF40
~:f .9. .9. TANK ( uOGCF10 [¥] u;g~6O i ) ,
./
~ :::,TI"Gcr; o ~
/ V ' V ' V '
AA020
AIR ---..... -A .......____....---r uOGCF90 uOGCF95 u0GCF95
AA010 ' Moso £ o ( ) .. , ,r0 I
(A) uOGCF40
AA010
~-
a--; ~8~
u~
7~0 AA020
s~o-:
~:::f: ~
7
~-
' ~g~ 7~0 ,.. ' ' A AA070 .9. i.~ ,
I
®.. •)
L uo
a 10GCF1 OAP020 • • :')
'
I OGCF1 OAN040 a
[¥] U;fi6°
y'
M uOGCF41 r,,\ : A • I
AIR • ~
..... ~ y y ~@) ,- , I --....., ~ ' ·\ I
'
(B) uOGCF41
...e--+---1-----+------.....+-+-+-+-------1------+-+-SERVICE y u6Gcno
O
(B) "~fb6° I >'> - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~
AA020 AA090
~~
1
" + - + - - - - + - - - - - - ~ - ~ - t - - - - - - ! ' - ·- - - , - - - - 1 - - - - ,
- EFFLUENT TRANSFER PUMPS I ,, TERMINAL POINTS. TERMINAL POINTS.
~--+-----+-------+~ (2 x 100%) , .,( UNIT 5
- COMMON
. ~ A
,, 10GCF10AP140 I ., TP-5-1 : CONDENSATE INLET TP-C-1 INSTRUMENT AIR.
f-
•
u0GCF34
' v '
u0GCF34
'.,°. ,'. TP-C-7 ,
a
(2) uOGCF10
fMl
9 uOGCFIO
AA 140 I ., TP-5-2 : CONDENSATE OUTLET
1 ' TP-C-2 DM WATER.
OM REGENERATION ,. A AAOIO AA020 .. • ,I, M12 £ -..... ' A ~ I (p)
TP-5-3 : INSTRUMENT AIR. TP-C-3 SERVICE AIR
- ~ (V ? f."-:: TP-5-4 : SERVICE AIR TP-C-4 LIVING WATER
PUMPS
EDG- ; • , (A) ~ m o
0
uocci42 • ~.
2x100% AA010 r
,(0 r
,(0 .T
~ UNI
T6 TP-C-5 DRAIN LINE TO PIT.
J
IOGCFIOAPOIO
fMl uOGCF30
•
!+------------------+----+
.._TP-C-5)
®
A'\V
TP-C-5
®
A'\V I A flj\
'\V
[¥]
10GCF10AP150
uOGCFIO
v ,
(2)+ 4 TP-6-1: CONDENSATE INLET.

TP-C-7A,7B : EFFLUENT TRANSFER PUMP SUCTION. J
uOGCF30 9 AA0 20 - ~- PJt p Jt (P)t I (§ ~~~ A TP-6-2 : CONDENSATE OUTLET.

•
TP-C-SA,88 : EFFLUENT TRANSFER PUMP DISCHARGE.
~ ~Ol,Q J - ...... G-' ~ so§ I CPP CPP O (B) uOGCFlO ' TP 6 3 INSTRUMENT AIR TP-C-9 CONNECTION FOR ALKALI TANKER.
~ ~
A f
FROM MAKE-UP v Q (A) u~g;]o r '-':a: )- REGENERATION REGENERATION "~f~O AAIBO I ' TP=6=4 : SERVICE AIR. . TP-C-10 CONNECTION FOR ACID TANKER.
WATER PUMP I •® IOGCFIOAP020 ° ( DRAIN PIT DRAIN PIT AMMONIA CONTAINING 1 ';--------------~
-1c lll 1GMH01256 3/~ : .. [¥] uOGCFJO ( (AMMONIA) EFFLUENT TRANSFER PUMPS I )
I® A £ 0 ~50 : ( (2 X 100%) ' )
~ ~ ~
The information in this material is confidential and
I' u'<c:cr"'o
,AA040'
- (B) uOGCFJO
M060
SAFETY
& EYESHOWER
WASH ! -- -- -- . .,_, _/,.,.•../·,.=·
____( _~ r ~ - • , j,--r;
· - .•,,.. /'·---,__~ 4 ,------r -·c-:,;: - - - ,;:---:;.- -
,..r--~--·___.,,,_, __..,_/'.j - _ ; o __, , ,-......- . _ /-, .°A":·- ---r-·- S ')
/ __.><:..:: -•"'-·"·-•·-...,
contains Toshiba's intellectual properly including
know-how. II shall not be disclosed lo any third
K party, copied, reproduced, used for unauthorized K
L_ __________________________________________________________________________ _J purposes nor modified without prior written consent
I FOR PROPOSAL I of Toshiba. Toshiba Corporation
f--$_-_e :~ ! ~:;;
_ _,~·~AA~PRovrn BY ~-~A~~~;ED BY '6)1' TITLE FLOW DIAGRAM FOR
- jji:. l!IAPPROVED BY Rg_ SCALE 12.0ct.'16 12.0ct.'16 CONDENSATE POLISHING PLANT ~
LIVING WATER 1-------+------+!Jll~:i!'~CH~E~CK~E~D~B'-,Y 1 - -- - - - - j al",t DESIGNED BY ~Gil DRAWN BY 2 x 1OOOMW
J!:ll!:t'REVISED BY .ii>ill UNITS Y.TAKANO _ Tanjung Jati B Re-Exr:iansion Project _
V)
1-------+------ec-=-~~~~B SI 12.oct.'16 TJB 5&6
u,1-----~-----~-----+--------------~~~-
lJ, CONTENTS GS ,a Gililiilt-ll- DRAWING NO. ~ REV.MARK
L
1-------+------+-------I= TOSH I BA (1/\ JI!:~ @
:!:~A~}!CRATICN ,1 GM.H,O, 1 6,1 710 0
J
i,( ~REGISTERED t.11 L
L
I
2
I
3
I
4
I
5
I
6
I
7
I
I I
8 < 9
I I I
I
10
I
11
I
12 13
I
11*~ REGISTERED
14
I
lS PR~1N~\o I O O ,? 0
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 74/765
Attachment-3 :Test and Inspection Item
Attachment-3.1 : Shop Inspection and Test.

Attachment-3.2 : Site Inspection and Test.
Attachment-3.3 : Shop Inspection and Test Plan for Pumps, Piping and Heat
Exchangers.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 75/765
Attachment-3.1 : Shop Test and Inspection Item
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 76/765
Attachment-3.1 Test and lnsoection Item

Inspection and Test during Shop Manufacturing Processes
Abbreviation ....
QJ
(J Ill
"i QJ
w : Inspection and Test to be witnessed by the OWNER ::s

C
!'Cl I- ...
Ill
"i .!::! ....
QJ
s : Inspection and Test Records to be submitted to the OWNER >... CIJ

"C
C
·-:i ].... l~
0 ... QJ
....C
W/S : WorS
For several units or many parts, "W" will be applied to the first -0 QJ
QJ ::s QJ !l tiQJ
QJ
E
one only except otherwise noted.
"C
C
!'Cl
C
C.
U)
.c
Ill·-
cC
-; ..:
) I-
'QJ
:, Cl
QJ
>
"i
>...
....
Ill
QJ
.s
Ill
C
0
ti ....
0 :Owner also attend the test/inspection at the time of TSB's witness test. 0
Cl
::i: .5 ai -~ I- .5
... QJ Ill
QJ
NDE : Non-Destructive Examination ti ... "C E 42

C
::s C C.
I- Note I Remark
..2 f! 0 ~ .... 42 0 Ill
....
- :: -....
0::: .5 ollS
QJ
-:
0
0 ::s ti QJ
; ~
WPS : Welding Procedure Specification Ill C. (J Ill Ill
~
ll. QJ (J Cl ~ C
PQR : Welding Procedure Qualification Record ] s
Ill
.5 "C I- Ill
QJ
QJ
QJ
C. C
~
0
~ -
Ill C Ill QJ
:ii:: :::n ti
- 0
QJ QJ I- .c Ill ·c ti
~
"C !'Cl QJ (.)
WPQ : Welder Performance Qualification Test Record ai "i QJ
= Cl I- .5 ::i t QJ
-
(J (J
CAAS : Computer Aided Assembly System for Steam Turbine

~
:ii::
...
0:::
0 s 5C "C
QJ
QJ
I-
-
~
QJ
(J § ';
.....
QJ
~
!'Cl
!'Cl
"i
C
C
!'Cl
"i
C
>,
:i5 Cl
QJ
(.)
C.
Ill
- E
·- 0
ll. C Ill·- C. C QJ 0 0 .5
.A.: Inspection and Test Records to be submitted to TSB. QJ
(.) 42 0 ai 0 U) 'C:
....
.l'Ill.!! .. ::s ii: ...J
tiC 0 tiC E :§ £' ...
....
! a:~ j
QJ
w w QJ
=
U)
0: Inspection and Test to be witnessed by TSB. ll. E [ ~ (J ·-
Ill ~ 't: Ill C "i
QJ
'iii ::s
- : Not Requirement. :i
C
z s C
z ·-
C .5 Ill
0
...J
I-
Ill
QJ -
w QJ
0::: >
QJ
U)
::s
LL.
QJ
ll.
::s
LL.
Ill
<( ll. 0 0
EQUIPMENT NAME / PART NAME .... N M II) U) ..... co O'l ....

C) ........ ....N ....
M
;!: ....
II)
....
U)

""'
1 POLISHER MIXED BED VESSEL UNITS includinq ;
1 POLISHER MIXED BED VESSEL (A), (B) .. - - .. 0/JJ. - - S/0 - - - - - Ji. - -
*1 : Pin hole test shall be
included in painting/Lining
2 POLISHER MIXED BED VESSEL RESIN TRAP (A), (B)
3 AIR BLOWER FOR POLISHER MIXED BED VESSEL (A) & (B) AND MOTOR
4 POLISHER MIXED BED VESSEL LOCAL CONTROL PANEL
..
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
..
-
0/JJ.
0/JJ.
0/JJ.
-
-
-
S/0
S/0
- Ji.
S/0
-
-
-
-
-
-
S/0
-
S/0
- .
-
-
-
-
-
Ji.
Ji.
Ji.
-
-
-
-
-
-
Inspection for rubber lined
vessel.
2 EXTERNAL REGENERATION FACILITY including;

1 CATION REGENERATION VESSEL ... - - ... 0/JJ. - - S/0 - - - - - Ji. - -
2 ANION REGENERATION VESSEL
3 RESIN SEPARATION VESSEL ... -
-
-
- . 0/JJ.
0/JJ.
..
-
-
-
-
S/0
S/0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Ji.
Ji.
-
-
-
-
4 OM REGENERATION PUMP (A) & (B) AND MOTOR
5 CAUSTIC BULK STORAGE TANK (A)&(B) .. -
-
-
- ..
- 0/JJ.
0/JJ. -
S/0
-
Ji.
S/0
-
-
-
-
S/0
-
-
-
-
-
Ji.
Ji.
-
-
-
-
6 ACID BULK STORAGE TANK (A)&(B)
7 ACID METERING PUMP (A) & (B) AND MOTOR ... -
-
-
- -
0/JJ.
0/JJ. ...-
S/0
- S/0
Ji.
-
-
-
-
-
S/0
-
-
-
-
Ji.
Ji.
-
-
-
-
8 ALKALI (CAUSTIC) METERING PUMP (A) & (B) AND MOTOR
9 ALKALI (CAUSTIC) DAY (METERING) TANK ... -
-
-
-
-
... 0/JJ.
0/JJ. -
S/0
-
Ji.
S/0
-
-
-
-
S/0
-
-
-
-
-
Ji.
Ji.
-
-
-
-
10 ACID DAY (METERING) TANK
11 EFFLUENT TRANSFER PUMPS AND MOTOR .. -
-
-
- -
...
0/JJ.
0/JJ. . -
S/0
- S/0
Ji.
-
-
-
-
-
S/0
-
-
-
-
Ji.
Ji.
-
-
-
-
12 AIR BLOWER FOR REGENERATION FACILITY (A) & (B) AND MOTOR
13 HOT WATER TANK ... -
-
-
-
0/JJ.
0/JJ.
..
-
-
S/0
-
Ji.
S/0
-
-
-
-
S/0
-
-
-
-
-
Ji.
Ji.
-
-
-
-
14 CAUSTIC UNLOADING PUMP (A)&(B) AND MOTOR
15 ACID UNLOADING PUMP (A)&(B) AND MOTOR
16 REGENERATION FACILITY LOCAL CONTROL PANEL -
. -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0/JJ.
0/JJ.
0/JJ. -
S/0
S/0
S/0
Ji.
Ji.
-
-
-
-
-
-
S/0
S/0
S/0
-
-
..
-
-
-
-
Ji.
Ji.
Ji.
-
-
-
-
-
-
Notes: 1) Welding Inspection 5) Performance Test of Pumps and Aerators
Main welded part of any resin vessels shall be received for welding inspection. The following items shall be checked at the tests.
2) Hydrostatic Test a) Pump performance (Q-H curve, shut-off head, efficiency & input power)
Test pressure shall be 1.5 times of the design pressure of the components b) NPSH (Net Positive Suction Head)
for 30 minutes with no leakage. The open tank shall be tested to be filled for c) Vibration
more than 10 hours with no leakage. d) Noise
3) Record of instrumentation parts test e) Temperature rise of bearings
Vendor shall maintain record of Instrumentation parts test f) Function of seal water line
4) Valve test g) Function of lubricant oil line
Following valve test results shall be submited to contractor. h) Existence of leakage
• Motorized valve 6) Indonesia local regulation and code for pressure vessel related to CPP shall be considered by Vendor.
• Pneumatic valve It may be necessary to attend 3rd party in the Hydro static test, if the regulation requires it.
• Safety valve
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 77/765
Attachment-3.2 : Site Inspection and Test Plan
Approval on PDM
Attat!fWW~t-112'· 2 781765
TOSHIBA LST-GFH-XIT5-1001 REV.1
~fiSN
DATE ISSUED 24 Sep, 2015
~t§:/j!f!.%
JOB/QUOT .NO.
~ft~
OWNER Sumitomo Corporation
Tanjung Jati B Re-Expansion Project
TJB 5&6
?"'1'!--1v
TITLE Site Inspection and Test Plan
The information in this material is confidential and contains

For Information Toshiba's intellectual property including know-how. It shall
not be disclosed to any third party, copied, reproduced,
used for unauthorized purposes nor modified without prior
written consent of Toshiba.
Toshiba Corporation
3
z
0
u5 2
>
w
0:::
1 07-0ct-'15 Revised as per customer's comment. (Page 6/12) Y.Nakata T.Suzuki M.Noguchi
IS(
~ 0 24-Sep-'15 First Issue for CDA-1 discussion purpose. Indicated in below.
@I~ B 1-t !2. $ ~

~ ~ t§ 3
12. 1TI
REV.NO
~
DATE CONTENTS
~ fi
*
iJ
II"-'
APPROVED BY CHECKED BY
Plant Engineering Group

REVISED BY
DISTRIBUTION (Karyoku-Hin) C (Ka-PU) C (Ka-CV) C ISSUED BY Field Engineering Dept.

ii
Client A (Henden-Gi) C (Ka-EX) C (PJ-2) *
C ~PPROVED BY Yuji Nakata
Ill] iii:
(Ka-IX) C (Kai-Ei-1) C CHECKED BY Yuji Nakata
f.§ 3
(Ka-IC) C (Ka-FP) t~ PREPARED BY Toshikazu Suzuki
A: Attention, v ~aroon 1~opytt-<ererence
**itfH•± ilU!: 1/12

TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Proprietary Information
© Toshiba Corporation 2015, All Rights Reserved
Approval on PDM
Table of Contents
1 SITE INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN (MECHANICAL) 3

2 SITE INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN (ELECTRICAL) 7
3 SITE INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN (I&C) 12
General
This document shows the site inspection and test plan for Toshiba portion for Tanjung Jati B Re-Expansion
Project (T JB 5 & 6).
The abbreviations indicated in the column of "CUSTOMER ATTENDANCE STATUS" on the following tables
means:-
W: Witness
R: Record Review
**itfH•± ilU!: - 2/12-

TOSHIBA CORPORATION
© Toshiba Corporation 2015, All Rights Reserved Approval on PDM
AttaMWW~t-11.'2'· 2 801765
LST-GFH-XIT5-1001 Rev.1
1 SITE INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN (MECHANICAL)
TEST CATEGORY
INSPECTION AND TEST ITEM ~RCE REMARKS
AT SITE
ERECTION TEST STEAM TURBINE FOUNDATION CHECK OUT R
(INSPECTION & ELEVATION CHECK FOR BENCHMARKS,
SETTING OF SOLE PLATES)
INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLING CHECK OF MSV/CV R
INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLING CHECK AS BELOW;- R
- INSPECTION & RECORD OF LP OUTER CASING
- INSPECTION & RECORD OF LP INNER CASING
- INSPECTION & RECORD OF BEARING STAND
- INSPECTION & RECORD OF IP OUTER CASING
- INSPECTION & RECORD OF IP INNER CASING
- INSPECTION & RECORD OF HP OUTER CASING
- INSPECTION & RECORD OF HP INNER CASING
- INSPECTION & RECORD OF KEY & GIVE KEY
- INSPECTION & RECORD OF NOZZLE
- INSPECTION & RECORD OF LABYRINTH & OIL DEFLECTOR
- INSPECTION & RECORD OF TURBINE ROTOR
- INSPECTION & RECORD OF TURBINE BEARING
- INSPECTION & RECORD OF CONTROL DEVICE AND INSTRUMENTS
- CLEARANCE MEASUREMENT
- OVERALL CHECK & RECORD
ROTATING MECHANICAL t-U I\JDAI IUI\J CHECK AS 1-'t:.K U~,8 v'v "Jl:i R
EQUIPMENT INITIAL CHECK FOR ANCHOR R
(MOTOR AND PUMP) INITIAL LEVELING CHECK R
CHECK AT INSTALLATION, GROUTING AND ALIGNMENT AS BELOW;- R
- PRE-ALIGNMENT BEFORE GROUTING
- GROUTING WORK
- FIRST ALIGNMENT AFTER GROUTING
- PIPING CONNECTION
- FINAL ALIGNMENT AFTER PIPING CONNECTION
FINAL INSPECTION R
STATIC MECHANICAL FOUNDATION CHECK AS PER DRAWING R

EQUIPMENT (DEAERATOR, CHECK DURING INSTALLATION R
HEATER, TANK) (ORIENTATION, ELEVATION, LEVELLING, CENTER LINE ETC)
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT INSPECTION (IF APPLICABLE) R
FINAL INSPECTION R
3 /12
Approval on PDM
AttaMWW~t-11.'2'· 2 81 1765
TEST CATEGORY
INSPECTION AND TEST ITEM REMARKS
AT SITE
ERECTION TEST CONDENSER WELDER QUALIFICATION R
INSPECTION DURING INSTALLATION FOR BOTTOM PLATE, LOWER SHELL, TUBE R
SUPPORT PLATE, UPPER SHELL, LP HEATERS, EXPANSION JOINT, NOZZLE AND
INTERNAL Pl Pl NG AS BELOW;-
- FIT-UP & ALIGNMENT

- VISUAL INSPECTION OF WELDING
- DYE PENETRANT TEST (IF APPLICABLE)
WATER FILL-UP TEST R
PIPING WELDER QUALIFICATION R

PIPING ERECTION R
(PIPE SPOOL FABRICATION, ERECTION AND INSPECTION)
PIPE SUPPORT (DIMENSION CHECK,VISUAL CHECK) R
LINE CHECK R
PRESSURE TEST R Appropriate method or
(HYDROSTATIC TEST OR PNEUMATIC TEST (IF REQUIRED)) exemption will be applied as
a licable.
OIL FLUSHING R
- STEAM TURBINE LUBE OIL PIPING
- GENERATOR SEAL OIL PIPING
- T-BFP & DRIVE TURBINE LUBE OIL PIPING
- M-BFP, F/C & MOTOR LUBE OIL PIPING
- EHC OIL PIPING
BLOWING OUT R
- STEAM TURBINE GLAND SEAL PIPING
- BFP TURBINE STEAM SUPPLY PIPING
ERECTION & FUNCTION CRANE & HOIST INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLING CHECK R
TEST FUNCTION CHECK AND LOAD TEST R
FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLING CHECK R
FUNCTION CHECK R
4 /12
Approval on PDM
AttaMWW~t-11.'2'· 2 821765
TEST CATEGORY
AT SITE
PRE-COMMISSIONING DRIVE TURBINE for BFP HEAT RUN TEST (UNCOUPPLED WITH PUMP) R
& FINAL INSPECTION T-BFP HEAT RUN TEST (AFTER COUPLED WITH DRIVE TURBINE) R
AND TEST M-BFP HEAT RUN TEST R
M-BFP BOOSTER PUMP HEAT RUN TEST (WITH M-BFP) R
AUXILIARY COOLING HEAT RUN TEST R
WATER PUMP
CLOSED CYCLE COOLING HEAT RUN TEST R
WATER PUMP
CONDENSATE PUMP HEAT RUN TEST R
CONDENSATE BOOSTER HEAT RUN TEST R
PUMP
LP HEATER DRAIN PUMP HEAT RUN TEST R
CONDENSER VACUUM HEAT RUN TEST R
PUMP
EHC OIL PUMP HEAT RUN TEST R
JACKING OIL PUMP HEAT RUN TEST R
LUBRICATING OIL OIL PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT R
SYSTEM
MOP, SOP HEAT RUN TEST R
TOP HEAT RUN TEST R
EOP HEAT RUN TEST R
BFP-T MOP HEAT RUN TEST R
BFP-T EOP HEAT RUN TEST R
VAPOR EXTRACTOR HEAT RUN TEST R
OIL CONDITIONER HEAT RUN TEST R
FILTER PUMP
GSE HEAT RUN TEST R
TURNING DEVICE HEAT RUN TEST R
CONDENSATE POLISHING FUNCTION TEST (AVT, OWT) R
I 5"r Ll I r-1u~
CONDENSER TUBE HEAT RUN TEST FOR PUMPS R

I
CLEANING SYSTEM FUNCTION TEST
CCCW CHEMICAL FEED HEAT RUN TEST FOR PUMPS R
SYSTEM FUNCTION TEST
MISCELLANEOUS PUMPS HEAT RUN TEST R
5 /12
Approval on PDM
AttaMWW~t-11.'2'· 2 831765
TEST CATEGORY
AT SITE
UNIT OPERATION & UNIT STEAM TURBINE AND GENERATOR INTERLOCK TEST R
FUNCTIONAL TEST TURBINE PRE-WARMING TEST R
VACUUM UP TEST R
STAEAM TURBINE STRETCH OUT R
CV WARMING TEST R
TURBINE VIBRATION CHECK DURING ROLL UP R
ST NO LOAD TEST AND SAFETY DEVICE TEST R
START UP TEST AT EACH MODE R
LOAD TEST (STABILITY CHECK) R
25%L, 50%L, 75%L & 100%L
SPECIAL OPERATION TEST
- HP HTR BYPASS TEST
- LP3,4 HTR BYPASS TEST
- LP1 ,2 HTR BYPASS TEST
- CONDENSER HALF TUBE BANDLE TEST
- T+M BFP PARALLEL OPERATION TEST
- ONE T-BFP TRIP RUNBCK TEST
BENCHMARK TEST UNIT BENCHMARK TEST (50%L & 75%L) w

COMPLETION TEST UNIT PERFORMANCE TEST (50%L(H/R), 75%L(H/R), 100%L(H/R) & T-MCR(O/P)) w
RELIABILITY RUN w
6 /12
Approval on PDM
AttaMWW~t-11.'2'· 2 841765
2 SITE INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN (ELECTRICAL)
TEST CATEGORY
AT SITE
ERECTION TEST STEAM TURBINE FOUNDATION CHECK OUT R
GENERATOR (INSPECTION & ELEVATION CHECK FOR BENCHMARKS,
SETTING OF SOLE PLATES)
INSTALLATION AND ASSEMBLING CHECK AS BELOW;- R
- GENERATOR STATOR
- ASSEMBLING OF HV BUSHING
- ASSEMBLING OF H2 GAS COOLER
- INSERTION OF ROTOR
-ASSEMBLING OF BEARING BRACKET
- COUPLING OF TURBINE & GENERATOR
-ASSEMBLING OF BEARING
- ASSEMBLING OF BRUSH HOLDER
- FINAL ASSEMBLING
PRE-COMMISSIONING STEAM TURBINE H2 LEAK TEST R With seal oil system

& FINAL INSPECTION GENERATOR MEASUREMENT OF STATOR AND ROTOR INSULATION RESISTANCE R
AND TEST PHASE SEQUENCE CHECK R
VIBRATION MEASUREMENT R
NO-LOAD OPERATION TEST- OPEN CIRCUIT TEST R
MEASUREMENT OF SHAFT VOLTAGE R
HEAT RUN TEST R
OPERATION CHECK OF AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT/ SYSTEM R
(1) SEAL OIL SYSTEM
(2) GAS CONTROL SYSTEM
(3) STATOR COOLING WATER SYSTEM
(4) HYDROGEN GENERTING PLANT
BCTTEST R
(1) VISUAL INSPECTION
(2) INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT
(3) POLARITY CHECK
7 /12
Approval on PDM
AttaMWW~t-11.'2'· 2 851765
TEST CATEGORY
AT SITE
PRE-COMMISSIONG TRANSFORMER INSULATION OIL TEST R except for EXT
& FINAL INSPECTION - GENERATOR (GT) (1) MEASUREMENT OF DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
AND TEST - UNIT AUXILIARY (UT) (2) MEASUREMENT OF MOISTURE CONTENT
- EXCITATION (EXT) VISUAL INSPECTION R

MEASUREMENT OF VOLTAGE RATIO R
CHECK OF VECTOR RELATION SHIP R
MEASUREMENT OF INSULATION RESISTANCE R
CHECK OF AUXILIARY DEVICE R except for EXT
BUSHING TYPE CURRENT TRANSFORMER TEST R
OIL TIGHTNESS TEST R
ERECTION & ISOLATED VISUAL INSPECTION R
PRE-COMMISSIONING PHASE BUSDUCT (IPB) INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT R
DI ELECTRIC TEST R
NGRCUBICLE VISUAL INSPECTION R

INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT R
POLARITY TEST OF NGR TRNASFORMER R
SECONDARY RESISTOR RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT R
NON-SEGRAGATED VISUAL INSPECTION R

PHASE BUSDUCT INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT R
DI ELECTRIC TEST R
8 /12
Approval on PDM
AttaMWW~t-11.'2'· 2 861765
TEST CATEGORY
AT SITE
ERECTION & MVMOTORS INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT R
PRE-COMMISSIONING LVMOTORS ROTATION CHECK R With Rotation meter
DC MOTORS
MV SWITCHGEAR VISUAL INSPECTION R
INTERLOCK TEST R
LV SWITCHGEAR VISUAL INSPECTION R

MOTOR CONTROL INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT R
CENTER INTERLOCK TEST R Except for Distribution Panel
DISTRIBUTION PANEL
DC MOTOR STARTER ALARM TEST R

PANEL RELAY SETTING TEST R
VISUAL INSPECTION R
INTERLOCK TEST R
MEDIUM VOLTAGE VISUAL INSPECTION R

TRANSFORMER INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT R
VOLTAGE RATIO MEASUREMENT R Only for large capacity MV
LOW VOLTAGE Transformer
TRANSFORMER
9 /12
Approval on PDM
AttaMWW~t-11.'2'· 2 87 1765
TEST CATEGORY
AT SITE
ERECTION & GEN AUXILIARY VISUAL INSPECTION R
PRE-COMMISSIONING CONTROL PANEL WIRING CHECK R
GEN PROTECTION RELAY INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT R
PANEL SEQUENCE CHECK R
INTERLOCK TEST R
SYNCHRO. CHECK RELAY SETTING TEST R Only for GACP
RELAY SETTING TEST R Only for GRP
EXCITATION CONTROL VISUAL INSPECTION R

PANNEL (AVR) WIRING CHECK R
FIELD CIRCUIT BREAKER INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT R
CUBICLE (FCB) SEQUENCE CHECK R
THYRISTOR RECTIFIER RELAY SETTING TEST (if applicable) R
CUBICLE (THY) OPERATION CHECK OF FCB R
INI CUBICLE OPERATION CHECK OF THYRISTOR RECTIFIER & COOLING FAN R
1/0 CONFIRMATION TEST R
STATIC CHARACTERISTIC TEST R ForAVR
DYAMIC CHARACTERISTIC TEST R ForAVR
GENERATOR VISUAL INSPECTION R

CIRCUIT BREAKER INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT R
OPERATION TEST OF CB R
ACCESSORY DEVICE CHECK R
DC POWER SUPPLY VISUAL INPSECTION R

SYSTEM INSULATION MEASUREMENT R
FUNCTION TEST R
BATTERY INITIAL CHARGE AND DISCHARGE TEST R
HYDROGEN GENERATION VISUAL INSPECTION R
PLANT OPERATION TEST R
10 /12
Approval on PDM
AttaMWW~t-11.'2'· 2 881765
TEST CATEGORY
AT SITE
ERECTION, GIS(GENERAL) VISUAL INSPECTION OF INSTALLATION R
PRE-COMMISSIONING WIRING CHECK R
& FINAL INSPECTION DIELECTRIC TEST WITH POWER FREQUENCY AND PARTIAL DISCHARGE TEST w
CONTACT RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT R
MOISTURE CONTENT MEASUREMENT OF SF6 GAS R
SF6 GAS LEAKAGE TEST R
SF6 GAS DENSITY SWITCH TEST R
GIS (GCB, OS/ES) MECHANICAL OPERATION TEST FOR GCB/DS/ES R
ELECTRICAL FUNCTION TEST R
TIMING (CLOSE-OPEN-CLOSE) TEST OF GCB R
POLE DISCREPANCY TEST OF GCB R
GIS (CT/VT) POLARITY CHECK R
CHECK OF THE RATIO R
WINDING DC RESISTANCE R
GIS (LCP) FUNCTION TEST R
INTERLOCK TEST R
ANNUNCIATOR CIRCUIT TEST R
METERING TEST R
GIS (BUSHING) INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT R
SURGE ARRESTER VISUAL INSPECTION OF INSTALLATION R
LEAKAGE CURRENT MEASUREMENT R
CVT VISUAL INSPECTION OF INSTALLATION R
OIL LEVEL CHECK R
CONTROL PANEL VISUAL INSPECTION R
PROTECTION PANEL INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT R
AC/DC DPs INPUT POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT R
SECONDARY INJECTION TEST (METERING & RELAY OPERATION CHECK TEST) R
INTERLOCK TEST R
ALARM TEST R
DISTURBANCE RECORDER VISUAL INSPECTION R
EVENT RECORDER INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT R
OPERATION TEST (ANALOG INPUT & DIGITAL INPUT) R
BATTERY AND BATTERY VISUAL INPECTION R
CHARGER INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT R
FUNCTION TEST AND PROTECTION TEST R
BATTERY INITIAL CHARGING TEST R
BATTERY DISCHARGE TEST R
SS SYSTEM END TO END TEST w
11 /12
Approval on PDM
AttaMWW~t-11.'2'· 2 891765
3 SITE INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN (l&C)
TEST CATEGORY
AT SITE
ERECTION & ST EHC, BFPT EHC INSTALLATION CHECK
PRE-COMMISSIONING (1) VISUAL CHECK R
RESTORATION TEST
(1) ASSEMBLING CHECK R
(2) WIRING CHECK R
(3) CONTROL POWER RECEIVING TEST R
PRE COMMISSIONING
(1) SENSOR TEST (1/0 TEST) R
(2) FUNCTION TEST R
(3) VALVE ADJUSTMENT R EHC only
TSI ASSEMBLING FOR SENSOR R

INSTALLATION CHECK
(1) VISUAL CHECK R
RESTORATION TEST
(2) WIRING CHECK R
PRE COMMISSIONING
(2) FUNCTION TEST R
DCS AND OTHER INSTALLATION CHECK

CONTROL/ MONITORING (1) VISUAL CHECK R
SYSTEM (Incl. CMMS) RESTORATION TEST
(2) WIRING CHECK R
PRE COMMISSIONING
(2) OPERATION TEST R
(3) FUNCTION TEST R
FIELD INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION TEST R
CONTROL VALVE AND VALVE OPERATION TEST AND ADJUSTMENT R

MOTOR OPERATED
VALVE
12 /12
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 90/765
Attachment-3.3 : Shop Inspection and Test Plan for Pumps. Pipings. and
Heat Exchangers
Approval on PDM
Attat!fWW~t-11'3'· 2 91 1765
TOSHIBA QCD-GMH-XITS-0002 Rev.O
~fiB1-t 22 Jan. 2016

DATE ISSUED
M211995
l.!5i/JMIS~
M211996
JOB/QUOT.NO.
;: $t fi
CUSTOMER SUMITOMO CORPORATION
Tanjung Jati B Re-Expansion Project T JB 5&6
SHOP INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR

PUMPS, PIPINGS, AND HEAT EXCHANGERS
The information in this material is confidential and contains Toshiba's

intellectual property including know-how. It shall not be disclosed to any
third party, copied, reproduced, used for unauthorized purposes nor
modified without prior written consent of Toshiba.
Toshiba Corporation
U)
z
Q
U)
>
w
0:::
fm,{
K.Tanaka
-l€R( 0 22 Jan. 2016 First issue. Superseded PCD-GMH-XIT5-0002. H.Tao Y.Umemoto
T.Miyazaki
@I
REV.NO.
~ B
DATE
N !c.
CONTENTS • * ~
APROVED
BY
fill]
CHECKED
BY
~ t§
REVISED
BY
3
~c. 1fi" *- (PJ2) 1 (Ta-A) 1 (Ka-Chohin) 1 Utility Power Plant

DISTRIBUTION 1E fi if
Engineering Group
ISSUED BY
SC 1 (Ka-EX) 1 (Seigyo) 1 (Hin2) 1 Plant Engineering Dept.
(Ka-IX) 1 (P-setsu) 1 (Hin3) 1

jf( ti H.Tao
APPROVED BY
iJil ~
(Ka-FP) 1 (Netsusetsu) 1 K.Tanaka / T.Miyazaki
CHECKED BY
t§ 3
(Ka-IC) 1 (Ka-PU) 1 Y.Umemoto
PREPARED BY
1/13
Approval on PDM
Attat!fWW~t-11'3'· 2 921765
CONTENTS
General
1. Applicable Codes and Standards
2. Abbreviations
3. Witness Test and Inspection Procedure
4. Internal Shop Tests and Inspections
Attachment SHOP TEST & INSPECTION PLAN TABLE FOR 2

X 1000MW TANJUNG JATI B RE-EXPANSION
PROJECT TJB 5&6
2/13
**~1H-±;i~
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
© Toshiba Corporation 2016 All Rights Reserved
Approval on PDM
Attat!fWW~t-11'3'· 2 931765
General
This "Shop Test and Inspection Program" regarding Steam Turbine, Heat Exchanger and
Auxiliary, BOP Auxiliaries, Boiler Piping, Control and Instrument and Electrical covers the
shop tests and inspections applied to the mechanical and electrical equipment manufactured
or purchased by TOSHIBA CORPORATION.
1. Applicable Codes and Standards
Applicable Codes and Standards for Tests and Inspections should be in accordance with the
following codes and standards for the most parts.
In addition, in some cases, we will apply TOSHIBA's Standard or Manufacturer's Standard
based upon our experience.
ASTM American Society for Testing and Material

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ANSI American National Standards Institute
BS British standard Institute
EN European Norm
HEI Heat Exchange Institute
ISO lnternation Organization for Standardization
JI S Japanese Industrial Standard
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
2. Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in this schedule.
(1) For the Customer
w Test and Inspection should be witnessed by the Customer or his

Representative and those certificates or records should be submitted to
the Customer. Witness test shall be executed only for Unit 5, and test
record shall be submitted for Unit 6.
R Test and Inspection certificates or records for both Unit 5 and Unit 6
should be submitted to the Customer.
(2) For TOSHIBA
WT Test and Inspection should be performed or witnessed by TOSHIBA.

RT Test and Inspection certificates or records should be reviewed by
TOSHIBA.
3/13
**~1H-±;i~
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Attat!fWW~t-11'3'· 2 941765
3. Witness Test and Inspection Procedure
TOSHIBA shall provide the Customer or his Representatives at least thirty-five (35)
Calender Days prior notice with the aim of witness the test and inspection of Equipment and
Materials. The inspection and test shall be carried in the manner and procedure approved
by Customer or his Representative. TOSHIBA shall have to right to decide the test and
inspection date of Equipment and Materials. If the Customer fails to attend such test and
inspection on the informed date provided by TOSHIBA, then the result shall be deemed to
have been approved by the Customer. TOSHIBA shall be bear the expense and cost in
order to carried out all such tests. In addition, TOSHIBA shall not be responsible regarding
attendance cost of Customer or his Representative. TOSHIBA shall be submitted the test
records to the Customer or his Representative after seven days since the date of successful
completion of such test.
4. Internal Shop Tests and Inspections

All other applicable shop tests and inspections excluding in this schedule will be performed
with international standard and manner.
4/13
**~1H-±;i~
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
AttaMWW~t-11.9'· 2 951765
TOSHIBA SHOP TEST & INSPECTION PLAN TABLE FOR 2 X 1000MW TANJUNG JATI B RE-EXPANSION PROJECT TJB 5&6
W/R,WT/RT : W or R,WT or RT
Abbreviation For multiple units/ parts, "W" will be applied to
the first unit/ part only, unless otherwise stated.
w : Inspection and Test to be witnessed by the OWNER
R : Inspection and Test Records to be submitted to the OWNER TSBSt Toshiba Standard
WT : Inspection and Test to be witnessed by the TOSHIBA Eq.T : Equivalent to
RT : Inspection and Test Records to be submitted to the TOSHIBA NDE Non-Destructive Examination
MST : Manufacturer's Standard
TOSHIBA
RT
RT
1.2GLAND STEAM EXHAUSTER A & B RT
2;0 TURBINE (3ENERATOR LUBE OIL SYSTEM
2.1 MAIN LUBRICATING OIL COOLER (A) & (B) Plate Type RT
Customer's S ec. RT
3.0 CONDENSER AIR EXTRACTION
3.1 CONDENSER VACUUM PUMP UNIT (A) & (B) Mill Certificate ASME,JIS or E
Dimensional Check MST
Non Destructive Examination Test MST
Water Filling Test or Hydrostatic
RT
PressureTest or Leaka e Test MST
MST
RT
Balance Test E .T JIS B0905 or ISO
Performance Test JIS B 8323 8340 8341 or R RT
Items per MST MST RT
4.0
4.1 1--_C_e_rt_if_ic_a_te_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--1-A=-=S.:..:M.:..::E::.c,--=J.:. . :IS:. c,. .:. H.:. : E: .:.1,_,T.:....S=-:B=--=S'-"t.---1--------'-R.:....*_1'-------1----.:....:....:..-----.1*1 :Applied to tube & tube sheet.
Water Filling Test or Hydrostatic ASME, JIS, HEI, TSB St. R *2 RT *2:Applied to water box. Hydro tested at
1-----+-------------------------+-P_r_es_s_u_re_T_e_s_t_or_L_e_a_k_a...e_T_e_st_ _ _- - - 1 - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - 1 , - - - - - - - - - - - 1 1 . 3 times the design pressure according
4.2 CONDENSATE PUMP (A), (B) & (C) ,_M_i_ll_C_e_rt_ifi_ca_t_e_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ A_S_M_E~,J_I_S_o_r_E~u_iv_.- - - - + - - - - - - - _ _ ,_ _ _ _ R_T_ _ __,to HEI.
....D~im~e_ns~i=on~a_l~C-h_e~c_k~~-~----+-M_S_T_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--1-----------1-----R_T_ _ _--.1*3:Shell plate, head plate, tube & tube
Water Filling Test or Hydrostatic MST RT sheet.
,_P_r_es_s_u_re_T_e_s_t_or_L_e_a_k_a...e_T_es_t_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--+_ _ _ _ _ _ ___,_ _ _ _ _ _ ___,*4:Shaft, Impeller & casing.
MST RT *5:Applied to tube only.
1-B_a_la_n_c_e_T_e_st_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---1=E"""'""'.T__J'""'l..c..S"""o-'-r-'-ISC...0"-------+----------1----------1*6:Applied to shell plate only.
JIS B 8301, 8302 R RT *?:Radiographic Test records only.
t---4-_-31--C-O_N__D__E__N_S_A__T=E-B_O_O_S
__T___E
___R
___
P_U_M=P-(-A-),-(B__) _ & _ ( _ C _ ) - - - - - - - 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - t - - ~ ~ - - - u - i v - .---1--------1-----R---T--------1*8'R:Report' applies for only one motor
h-rr:T":-':-,i""""~...-:-::T"":""'.:"Tir:-:===-=-----+-~=~_;;_;_-=.c~..;...._--+---------+----------10f Unit5-A among 3 pumps/plant. No
MST RT official submittal of report for the other
1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - M - S - T - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - 1 t w o ( 2 ) motors.
Balance Test E .T JIS or ISO RT
JIS B 8301, 8302
R RT
Performance Test ore uiv.
App r o~a 13 on PDM

AttaMWW~t-11.9'· 2 961765
PART NAME TOSHIBA Note/

4.4 DRIBING MOTOR FOR CONDENSATE PUMP (A), (B) & (C) *9:First unit of each type of motor only
IEC 60034/ ISO 1680/ apllies to conduct type test. In case of
Stator winding resistance measurement R *8 RT*10
ISO 10816/ MST certificates of the type available, type
IEC 60034/ ISO 1680/ test can be cancelled for the same type
R *8 RT*10
Insulation resistance measurement ISO 10816/ MST motor.
IEC 60034/ ISO 1680/ *10:ln case Toshiba required.
R *8 RT*10
ISO 10816/ MST
IEC 60034/ ISO 1680/
R *8 RT*10
No load test ISO 10816/ MST
IEC 60034/ ISO 1680/
R *8 RT*10
Over-s eed test ISO 10816/ MST
IEC 60034/ ISO 1680/
Check of motor vibration R *8 RT*10
ISO 10816/ MST
IEC 60034/ ISO 1680/
R *8 RT*10
ISO 10816/ MST
4.5 LP HEATER 1 R *3 RT
R *5 RT
R *7 RT
R RT
4.6 LP HEATER 2 R *3 RT
R *5 RT
R *7 RT
R RT
PressureTest or Leaka e Test
4.7 LP HEATER 3 Mill Certificate ASME JIS HEI TSB St. R *3 RT
NOE for Materials R *5 RT
R *7 RT
R RT
4.8 LP HEATER 4 ASME JIS HEI TSB St. R *3 RT
R *5 RT
R *7 RT
R RT
4.9 LP HEATER DRAIN TANK Mill Certificate ASME JIS TSB St. R *6 RT
R RT
JIS B 8301, 8302
4.10 LP HEATER DRAIN PUMP R RT
Performance Test ore uiv.
App rota 13 on PDM

AttaMWW~t-11.9'· 2 97 1765
TOSHIBA
RT
a er I ing es or y ros a 1c
1 CATION REGENERATION VESSEL MST R RT
2 ANION REGENERATION VESSEL MST R RT
3 RESIN SEPARATOR VESSEL MST R RT
PressureTest or Leakage Test
Performance Test MST R RT
5 CAUSTIC MEASURING TANK MST R RT
6 ACID DAY TANK MST R RT
9 HOT WATER TANK MST R RT
10 CAUSTIC BULK STORAGE TANK (A) & (B) MST R RT
11 ACID BULK STORAGE TANK (A) & (B) MST R RT
Performance Test MST RT
Functional Test MST R RT
BFP-T(A) & (B) OIL COOLER h'Tr::r:::-::""1"'=~"'::'-:::r-=:'TT."===-----tA_S_M_E_JI_S_T_S_B_S_t._ _---t_ _ _ _ _ _ _--;-----R-T_ _ _.,*1 Plate Only
RT
YSTEM
'""'M=ill....;;C;..;;e;.;..;rt"""if=ic=at=e_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _;..;..;;.=.....;;.;...;;;......;...;;;.;;;;....;;...;.;..__ _ _ _ ____;_;.......;._ _ _+-------'-R.;..;.T_ _ _..... *1: Applied to shell plate & head plate.
'""'N'-'=D=E.....:o;.;..n;....;W'-'--"-e=ld=s-----------+.;...;..;:;"'"'-=::.......:..;...;:;......;....;:c.=...~----+---...;..R.;_*.....;5;....__ _-+----W~T-----1*2: Shell plate , head plate , tube and
Water Filling Test or Hydrostatic ASME, JIS, TSB St. R •6 WT tube plate. Performed/ produced by
App r ova 13 on PDM

AttaMWW~t-11.9'· 2 981765

*3: Shaft & Impeller and Casing.
RT *4: Applied to tube only.
JIS ASTM GB and MST RT *5: Radiographic Test records only.
JIS ASTM GB and MST RT Performed at TOSHIBA's workshop.
ASME JIS and/or MST RT
*6: Performed at TOSHIBA's workshop.
MST RT
TOS St. *7: First unit of each type of motor only
Dynamic Balance R RT apllies to conduct type test. In case of
E .T ASTM E 609
certificates of the type available, type
R RT test can be cancelled for the same type
JIS ASTM ASME MST R RT motor.
2 TURBINE DRIVEN BOILER FEEDWATER PUMP (A) & (B) JIS ASTM ASME MST R *3 RT *8: In case Toshiba required.
JIS ASTM GB and MST R RT
ASME, JIS and/or MST R RT
R RT
Dynamic Balance Eq.T ASTM E 609 R RT
JIS, ASTM, ASME, MST

Performance Test JIS ASTM ASME MST
7.3 MOTOR DRIVEN BOILER FEEDWATER PUMP UNIT
1 M-BFP BOOSTER PUMP JIS ASTM ASME MST R *3 RT
ASME, JIS and/or MST R RT
R RT
Dynamic Balance R RT
Eq.T ASTM E 609
JIS, ASTM, ASME, MST R RT
JIS ASTM ASME MST R RT
2 MOTOR DRIVEN BOILER FEEDWATER PUMP JIS ASTM ASME MST R *3 RT
ASME JIS and/or MST R RT
MST R RT
TOSSt.
Dynamic Balance R RT
E .T ASTM E 609
JIS ASTM ASME MST R *3 RT
JIS, ASTM, ASME, MST R RT
JIS ASTM ASME MST R RT
App r o~a 13 on PDM

AttaMWW~t-11.9'· 2 991765
W : Inspection and Test to be witnessed by the OWNER
R : Inspection and Test Records to be submitted to the OWNER TSBSt : Toshiba Standard
RT : Inspection and Test Records to be submitted to the TOSHIBA NDE : Non-Destructive Examination

Functional Test RT
Performance Test RT
Performance Test RT
6 M-BFP LUBRICATING OIL COOLER MST R RT
7 M-BFP WORKING OIL COOLER MST R RT
8 DRIVING MOTOR FOR M-BFP Visual ins ection MST
IEC 60034/ ISO 1680/
R RT*8
Stator winding resistance measurement ISO 10816/ MST
IEC 60034/ ISO 1680/
R RT*8
Insulation resistance measurement ISO 10816/ MST
IEC 60034/ ISO 1680/
R RT*8
High voltage test ISO 10816/ MST
IEC 60034/ ISO 1680/
R RT*8
No load test ISO 10816/ MST
IEC 60034/ ISO 1680/
R RT*8
Over-speed test ISO 10816/ MST
IEC 60034/ ISO 1680/
Check of motor vibration R RT*8
ISO 10816/ MST
IEC 60034/ ISO 1680/
R RT*8
Type Test *7 ISO 10816/ MST
7.4 HP HEATER 6A & 6B Mill Certificate ASME, JIS, HEI, TSB St. R *2 RT
NOE for Materials ASME JIS HEI TSB St. R *4 WT
NOE on Welds ASME JIS HEI TSB St. R *5 WT
ASME, JIS, HEI, TSB St. R *6 WT
7.5 HP HEATER 7A & 7B Mill Certificate ASME, JIS, HEI, TSB St. R *2 RT
7.6 HP HEATER 8A & 8B Mill Certificate ASME JIS HEI TSB St. R *2 RT
7.7 DESUPERHEATER Mill Certificate ASME JIS HEI TSB St. R *2 RT
App rota 13 on PDM

Atta~ft¥~~Ht~.'9 2 1001765
PART NAME TOSHIBA
CLOSED CYCLE COOLING WATER PUMP (A), (B) & (C) RT *1: as for Impeller unit
R RT *2: Applied to Plate only.
MST
MST R RT
MST R RT
JIS B 8301 8302 R RT
MST , IEC60034 or Equiv. RT
Mill Certificate ASME JIS TSB St. R *2 RT

ASME, JIS, TSB St. R RT
8.4 CLOSED CYCLE COOLING WATER HEAD PIPE ASME, JIS, TSB St. R RT
9.0 CCCW CHEMICAL DOSING SY
9.1 CCCW CHEMICAL MEASURING TANK MST R RT
9.2 CCCW CHEMICAL STORAGE TANK MST R RT
9.3 CCCW CHEMICAL STORAGE TANK AGITATOR Functional Test MST R RT
9.4 CCCW CHEMICAL BIOCIDE POT MST R RT
9.5 Performance Test MST R RT
10. COOLING WATER SYSTEM
10.1 AUXILIARY COOLING WATER 1-:M.....e,_c..,..h_a-=ni,..,,c.,,...al_T....,e=-s_t-,-----,-,,........,.-,......,..,----+-J_IS_G_4_0_5~1__H_5_1_20_o_r_E~u_i_v.-+---------+----------1*1: as for Impeller unit
Water Filling Test or Hydrostatic MST RT *2: Shell Plate of Strainer.
Non Destructive Examination MST RT
Static Balance *1 MST RT
8301 8302
Performance Test JIS B • R RT
uiv. RT
10.3 CONDENSATE TUBE BALL CLEANING SYSTEM A & B
1 BALL STRAINER PUMP (A) & (B) Performance Test ASME JIS TSB St. R RT
MST RT
2 BALL COLECTOR (A) & (B) ASME JIS TSB St. RT
MST RT
3 BALL STRAINER (A) & (B) Mill Certificate ASME JIS TSB St. R *2 RT
MST RT
Mill Certificate ASTM ASME B31.1 R RT

NOE on Welds ASTM ASME B31.1 R WT/ RT
2 BFP MINIMUM FLOW PIPING 1-M"-'=ill__Cc_ec..c.rt=if--icc..c.a--te'-----------+-Ac..c.S--'-T--M-"-'-A'""S--M--E"-=B--3--1.--'1----+------'-R'---------1------'-'R'-'-T-----1*3: Pin hole examination, Film thickness
.___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___. NOE on Welds ASTM ASME B31.1 R RT insoection. and Hardness insoection.
App r o~a 13 on PDM

Atta~ft¥~~Ht~.'9 2 101 1765
TOSHIBA Note I
11.3 MAIN TURBINE and BFP TURBINE INTEGRAL PAIPING
11.4 OTHER PIPING, MANUFACTURED IN INDONESIA
11.5 COAL-TAR EPOXY LINING OF PIPING 1-P_in_H_o_le_E_x_a_m_i_na_t_io_n_*_1_ _ _ _ _---+"""M"'"'S'"""T---------+---------+----W_T_/_R_T_ _--1*1 :Inspected by pinhole detector, the
1-F"""il.C..C.m'-T'-'h-"-ic=k..c..n"'"'e...c.ss.c.....c..c.ln"'"'s-"'-'-ec"'"'tc..cio""'n_*=2-----+-M-S_T_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-+-----"'-----+----'-W'-T'-/'-R'-'-'-T_ _--1voltage being 5000 V/mm.
Visual Inspection MST RT *2:Film thickness shall be inspected
and measured by electromagnetic
gauge at 12 points; 4 points of both
ends and center portion of pipe
respectively.
11.6 RUBBER LINING OF PIPING 1-P_in_H_o_le_E_x_a_m_i_na_t_io_n_*_1_ _ _ _ _---+_M_S_T_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-+-_ _ _ _R_ _ _---+_ _ _ W_T_/R_T_ _--1*1 :Inspected by pinhole detector, the
1-F_il_m_T_h_ic_k_n_e_ss_ln_s_,_p_ec_t_io_n_*_2_ _ _ _ _M_S_T_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-+-_ _ _ _R_ _ _---+_ _ _W_T_/R_T_ _--1voltage being 5000 V/mm plus an
Hardness Test *3 MST R WT / RT additional 5000 V.
1----------------+-----------+---------+----------1
Visual Inspection MST RT *2:Film thickness shall be inspected
and measured by electromagnetic
gauge at 12 points; 4 points of both
ends and center portion of pipe
respectively.
*3:Lining hardness shall be measured
by hardness tester (JIS A type or
equivalent).
11.7
Functional Test MST R *3 RT
11.8
Mill Certificate MST R *1 RT
NOE for Materials MST R RT
MST R *1 RT
Seat Leaka e Test for Valve MST R RT
2 HIGH PRESSURE FORGED NON-RETURN VALVE Mill Certificate MST R *1 RT
(EXTRACTION NRV) NOE for Materials MST R RT
MST R *1 RT
Seat Leaka e Test for Valve MST R RT
App r ova 13 on PDM

Atta~ft¥~~Ht~.'9 2 1021765
WT : Inspection and Test to be witnessed by the TOSHIBA Eq.T Equivalent to
MST Manufacturer's Standard
TOSHIBA
*1: Steel Plate is the limited item to RT

submit to Customer. Others are under
Subcontractor's ualit control.
Visual.Construction and Dimension MST R RT The requirement in the Subcontract
1-C_h_e_c_k_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _- + - - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 c l a u s e B0.12.9.2 shall be interpreted as
1-ln_s_u_la_t_io_n_R_e_s_is_t_a_n_ce_T_es_t_ _ _ _ _-+-IE_C_o_r_E_._u_iv_.- - - - - - + - - - - - R_ _ _ _-+-____
R_T_ _ _----1follo1NS and to apply the following
Mechanical Function test MST R RT practice fulfills the contract requirement.
Cranes are not required to be fully
assembled at the shop.
Mechanical Components are assembled
at shop and tested with using factory
equipped testing basement or
manufacturer's standard method.
Verification of loading capacity is to be
done at field as the essential test with
the assembled and installed condition.
The loading test at shop is required only
when Subcontractor requires it and
subject solely to Subcontractor's reason.
12.2 CRANE CAPACITY (OVER 10 TON) (OTHER THAN 12.1) Mill Certificates *1 MST - *1 RT 1: Steel Plate is the limited item to
submit to Customer. Others are under
Subcontractor's quality control.
Visual.Construction and Dimension RT Cranes are not required to be fully
,._C_h_e_c_k_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _M_S_T_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __,assembled at the shop.
...1n;;.;.s;..;u;;.;.la;;;.;t;;..;io"'"n;..;R.,.;.e~s;;.;.is""'t;.;;.;a;..;.n..;;..ce;;....;..T.;;,es.;;..t;.....__ _ _ _--+-"1E;; ;.C.;. . . ;o. .;. r. ; ;E; .; i.; ;u.;. ;iv. .;. .------+----------+------'-R;..;.T_ _ _ _ Mechanical Components are tested with
Mechanical Function test MST RT using factory equipped testing basement
or Manufacturer's standard method.
the assembled and installed condition.
The loading test at shop is required only
when Subcontractor requires it and
subject solely to Subcontractor's reason.
App r o~a 13 on PDM

Atta~ft¥~~Ht~.'9 2 1031765
WT : Inspection and Test to be witnessed by the TOSHIBA Eq.T Equivalent to
MST Manufacturer's Standard
ART NAME TOSHIBA Note/

12.3 LIFTING HOISTS (~10 TON) Visual.Construction and Dimension RT Lifting Hoist is not required to be fully
l-'C"""h.;. .; e. . ; .c.;. ;.k_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---+"""M"'"'S......T_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-+---------+----------1assembled at the shop.
Mechanical Function test MST - (R) *1 RT Catarog type/model products are
qualified fully based on manufacturer's
standard quality controls under
Subcontractor's quality control.
the assembled condition or temporary
field-testing structure. The loading test
at shop is required only when
Subcontractor requires it and subject
solely to Subcontractor's reason.
*1 : Sample testing at site or field-testing
shall also be allowed.
App r ova 13 on PDM

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 104/765
Attachment-4 : Drawing List
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 105/765
Attachment-4: Drawing List
The Bidder / Vendor shall supply all the necessary documents and drawings to fulfill this
specification. The following documents and drawings shall be included, but not limited to.
The time scale of submission is preliminary and the detail should be discussed at contract
stage.
Date of Submittal RFQ LO Status

No. Description (After Award) : Weeks *1 *2 *3
G:GENERAL
Manufacturing and Engineering Schedule Three (3)
G-1
G-2 List of Drawing and Document Three (3)
"' A
A
Four (4)
G-3
G-4
Technical Specification
System description Four (4)
"' A
A
Control Philosophy Four (4)
"' "'
G-5
G-6 Layout Drawing Three (3)
"' "' A
A
G-7 Equipment List Six (6)
"' "' A
Four (4)
G-8
G-9
Terminal Point List
Sub-vendor List One (1)
"' A
A
G-10 Spare Parts for first two (2) year operation from Three (3)
"' A
COD List
G-11 Commissioning & Test Spare Parts List Six (6) A
G-12 Recommended Spare Parts List Three (3) I
G-13 Special Tool List Three (3) A
G-14 Consumable List Three (3) A
G-15 Living Water Consumption List Three (3) A
G-16 Service Water Consumption List Three (3) A
Three (3)
G-17
G-18
Chemical Consumption List
Grease and Lubricant List Three (3)
"' A
A
G-19 Name Plate Drawing Six (6) A
G-20 Painting Specification (with Color List) Six (6) A
G-21 BQ List for Painting Three (3) I
G-22 Maintenance & Patrol Plan Six (6) I
G-23 Proforma Packing List One (1) I
G-24 Packing list 40 days Prior to The Shipment Date I
G-25 Pre-shipment Notice Documents 40 days Prior to The Shipment Date I
G-26
G-27
Operation/ Maintenance Manual
Training Manual
40 days Prior to The Shipment Date
"' I
I
G-28 As Built Drawing
40 days Prior to The Shipment Date
LATER
"' I
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 106/765

G-29 Monthly Progress Report Every Month I
G-30 Datasheet (Attachment 2; Annexure I) Four (4) .I A
M: Mechanical
M-1 Outline / Arrangement Drawing Three (3) .I .I A
M-2 Sectional Drawing Three (3) .I .I A
M-3 Flow (P&ID) Diagram Six (6) .I .I A
M-4 Piping Arrangement Drawing Four (4) A
M-5 Piping Isometric Drawing Four (4) A
M-6 Valve List Six (6) A
M-7 Support Structure Drawing Four (4) A
M-8 Access Step & Bridge Installation Plan for Six (6) A
Operation and Maintenance Work
M-9 Application Material (specification, calculation, Four (4) Months Prior to .I A
shop test record, certificate) for Local The Shipment Date
Regulation for the followings, but not limited to

- Pressure vessel, Heat exchanger, Tank, (2
Bar g and over)
- Safety valve and relief valve
- Crane and hoist
M-10 Gaskets list Six (6) .I A

M-11 Bolts and nuts list Six (6) .I A
M-12 Characteristic curves of Pumps and Motor Six (6) A
E: Electrical
E-1 One Line Diagram Drawing Four (4) A
E-2 Motor Data Sheet with Drawing Six (6) A
E-3 Wiring Diagram Six (6) A
E-4 Power Consumption List Three (3) .I A
E-5 Cable List Six (6) A
I: Control & Instrument
1-1 1/0 List Six (6) A
1-2 Alarm List Six (6) A
1-3 Setting Point List Six (6) A
1-4 Instrument List Six (6) A
1-5 Operational Logic Diagrams Six (6) A
1-6 Schematic Diagrams Six (6) A
1-7 Connection Diagrams Six (6) A
1-8 Instrument Hook-Up Drawing Six (6) A
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 107/765

C: Civil
Loading Data and Foundation Drawing of Each Three (3)
C-1
Equipment
"'
*4)
"' A
C-2 Concrete Tank Design Data (for CIVIL) Three (3) A

Pit drawing for civil work Three (3)
"'
C-3
C-4 Wall Penetration Requirement Drawing Three (3)
"' A
A
C-5 Flushing Plan for Wall Penetration Six (6)
"' I
C-6 Embedded Material Outline Drawing Three (3) A
C-7 Embedded Material Arrangement Drawing Three (3) A
C-8 Drainage design drawing Three (3)
"' A
Earthing (Grounding) Requirement Drawing Three (3)
"'
C-9
C-10 Equipment Heat Emission Data Three (3)
"' A
I
C-11 Manhole installation plan for maintenance work Six (6)
"' A
of Concrete Tank/Basin
"'
Area Lighting Requirement Drawing for Outdoor Four (4)
C-12
Equipment
"' I
C-13 Requirement for civil coating Four (4)

F: Field
"'
F-1 Storage & Preservation Manual Six (6) A
F-2 Installation Procedure Six (6) A
F-3 Installation Drawing Six (6) A
F-4 Site Flushing Procedure Eight (8) months Prior to the A
Test/ Inspection Date
F-5 Site Inspection & Test Procedure Eight (8) months Prior to the A
F-6 Site Inspection & Test Application 40 days Prior to The Test/ I
Inspection Date
F-7 Site Inspection & Test Plan A

Eight (8) months Prior to the

"'
F-8 Site Performance Test Procedure Eight (8) months Prior to the

"' A
F-9 Site Commissioning Procedure A

Eight (8) months Prior to the

"'
F-10 Site Inspection & Test Record Two (2) weeks after test date I
Q: Quality Control
Q1 QA/QC Manual Three (3) A
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 108/765

Q2 Shop Inspection & Test Procedure Three (3) month Prior to the .I A
Test I Inspection Date
Q3 Shop Inspection & Test Plan Three (3) .I A

Q4 Shop Inspection & Test Application 40 days Prior to The Test/ I
Inspection Date
Q5 Shop Inspection & Test Record Two (2) weeks after test date I
Q6 WPS Six (6) I
Q7 WPQR Six (6) I
Q8 WQC Six (6) I
SP1 Pre-Commissioning and Commissioning .I

Schedule (Including required Man-day)
SP2 BQ List for Equipment, Cable, Cable tray, Pipe, .I
Panels and Lightings.
(Refer Attachment 10.14)
Other required data, documents and drawings To be informed A or I

whenever required
NOTE
*1) Bidder shall submit the preliminary documents in the quotation.
*2) Vendor will be charged LO per the delayed days of document submission.
*3) Status is indicated by "A: for Approval" or "I : for Information".
*4) Bidder shall submit the "Loading Data and Foundation Drawing" for this project (NOT as a reference) in
the quotation.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 109/765
Attachment-5 : General Specification for C&I Equipment
Attachment-5.1 : General Requirement for C&I Equipment (With Packaged

Control System)
Attachment-5.2 : Basic concept of Alarm system.
Attachment-5.3 : Basic Interface concept for Controllers
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 110/765
Attachment-5.1: General Requirement for C&I Equipment

(for pump. fan, etc ... )
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 111/765
Specification No. SPC-GCH-XITS-0011

Rev.O
Customer Sumitomo Corporation
Plant Tanjung Jati B Re-Expansion Project TJB 5&6
General Requirements
for
C&I Equipment
(with Packaged Control System)

Toshiba Corporation
3
2
1
0 7-Mar-16 First Issue Y.Fushimi Y.Fushimi H.Saito
REV. NO. DATE DESCRIPTION APPROVED BY CHECKED BY PREPARED BY
Global Plant Engineering Group

Information and Control Systems Eng. Dept.
Thermal & Hydro Power Systems & Services Div.
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
1 / 15
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 112/765
Contents
1. General ............................................................................................................................................. 3
2. Scope of Supply and Work ................................................................................................................ 3
3. Technical General .............................................................................................................................. 6
4. Submittal Documents and Schedule ................................................................................................ 11
5. Supplementary Explanation on Submittal DocumenUDrawings ....................................................... 13
Attachment-1 Customer Specification

Attachment-2.1 10 List
Attachment-2.2 Control Item List
Attachment-2.3 Modbus Data Link List
Attachment-2.4 Instrument List
Attachment-2.5 Set point & Alarm List
Attachment-3 General Specification for Panels
Attachment-4 Instrumentation Work Installation Manual
2 I 15
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 113/765
1. General
This specification covers the requirements for design, manufacture, delivery, assembly, test and
inspection of all l&C equipment that pertains to a mechanical/ electrical system. Manufacturer shall
provide all l&C equipment that fully complies with this specification.
Any deviation from this specification is NOT ACCEPTABLE. However, in the case that specifications
are not applicable nor it is not possible to comply with the specifications, the deviation must be
raised by the BidderNendor to the attention of the Sub-Contractor for clarification and resolution with
the quote submittal, or otherwise it is considered as all compliance with the specifications.
Equipment design shall be a proven one with many experiences in the same model and similar
capacity.
In the case that the equipment design includes improved design with only a few experiences or trial
design, clarification must be raised by the BidderNendor.
2. Scope of Supply and Work

There are two types of figures in this specification.
D Fig1 is applied to pump, motor and fan supplier.
• Fig2 is applied to packaged system including some local controllers such as PLC panel.
The figures illustrate the supply scope of equipment, instrument air and cables including the
necessity of installations. The equipment to be supplied and/or installed by the BidderNendor is
illustrated in solid box and figures within the double line in either of the Figures selected above.
2.1 Scope of Fig 2

The equipment to be supplied and/or installed includes
• Local Controller (PLC) (with installation)
D Distribution Panel (DP) (with installation)
D Motor Control Center (MCC) (with installation)*
• Cable (with installation)
• Instruments (with installation)
• Rack and Station (with installation)
• Equipment for MODBUS or OPC communication (with installation)
3 I 15
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 114/765
Fig 1 Supply scope and Installation scope
[Legend]
CD Cable supply and installation
- : By BidderNendor - - - · : By Others
(2) Control air supply pipe and installation
= : By BidderNendor - · By Others
@ Connection work
• : By BidderNendor 0 : By Others
Supply Air
DCS
I I
-------- --------
··-···-··-··-· -··-··-··-··-·
I I
I
··-· ·-··--, I I
, - - - -1
I I
Instrumentation
Piston Motor
Valve Operated
Valve Pump,
BidderNendor supply scope Fan
- · · - · · - · · - · · - · · - · · - · · - · · - · · - · · - · · - .. .J
4 I 15
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 115/765
Fig 2 Supply scope and Installation scope

[Legend]
CD Cable supply and installation
- : By BidderNendor - - - · : By Others
(2) Control air supply pipe and installation
= : By BidderNendor = = : By Others
@ Connection work
• : By BidderNendor 0 : By Others
Supply Air
DCS
MODBUS -----1
,,
, ,-----7
I
I I
TCP/IP I I
Module
--9-2- •,~
I I
- - - - 7I ~
Fiber Optical Converter
~ I
MODBUS
TCP/IP I I ~
'- - - - - _ J.'
Interface
Local
Controller
----,
Instrumentation
: Solenoid
I Valve
Piston Motor
I Valve BidderNendor supply scope Operated
. Valve Pump,Fan·
· ~ .. ~ .. ~ .. ~ .. ~ .. ~ .. ~ .. ~ .. ~ .. ~ .. ~ .. ~ .. .J
5 I 15
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 116/765
3. Technical General
3.1. System Overview
(1) Primary control equipment

D (a) DCS • (b) BidderNendor provided PLC D (c) Others _ _ _ _ _ __
(2) Primary operation (System In-Service/Shutdown operation) equipment

• (a) DCS D (b) BidderNendor provided Hardwired Panel D (c) Others _ _ _ _ _ _ __
(3) Secondary operation (Each Equipment (pump, valve, etc)) equipment

D (a) DCS • (b) BidderNendor provided PLC D (c) Others _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
(4) Automatic control

• Yes D No
(5) Man Machine Interface

• Yes D No
(6) PLC maintenance tool with printer. (Laptop PC is preferable)

• Yes D No
3.2. System configuration and redundancy

(1) Controller
D Single • Redundant ( • Dual D Triple )
(2) Power source for Control equipment

D Single (AC) • Dual (240V AC UPS feeder x 2) D Dual (AC,DC)
(3) Power supply from Sub-Contractor

• Dedicated power source for Controller, this source shall not be supplied to Mechanical /Electrical
Equipment.
D Common use for Mechanical/Electrical system power source and control equipment.
(4) BidderNendor control system's Power supply system

D Single • Dual / D with UPS D with Battery charger
(5) Interface with sub-contractor's DCS

• Yes (D Single • Redundant/ _1_: Number of channels) D No
• Modbus TCP/IP(• Metal cable D Optical cable)
Note1) Modbus TCP/IP and required specification shall be refered to "Standard Modbus Protocol
Specification" later.
Note2) BidderNendor shall supply cable 1Om between PLC/Control Panel and converter.
6 I 15
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 111 /765
note5) If cable distance between DCS cabinet and PLC/Control Panel are less than 1OOOm and apply
converters to both DCS cabinet and PLC/Control Panel, Metal cable is applied to the interface cable.
(6) Time synchronization

• Yes (• IRIG-B D NTP) D No
(7) Emergency-stop PB (Install near equipment)

• Yes (• for System D for Pump D for Valve) D No
(8) PLC vendor and model

DYes (Allen Bradley, Siemens)
Purchaser has a right to select one manufacturer from above manufacturers.
• No (BidderNendor's preference with Purchaser's approval)
(9) 1/0 Boards

• Single D Redundant
Note : Even "Single" is selected, no single failure of any components should bring the system to
shutdown or continuous stable operation. 1/0 signals from/to redundant sensors, equipments, panels,
etc. shall be assigned to separate 1/0 boards.
(10) 1/0 signals from/to Controller (if PLC is applied)

Bidder/Vendor is requested to provide suggested 1/0 counts for both via Data link and via Hard wire
with proposal
No. Item Data link Hard wire

1 Overall system abnormal common signal.
• ---
2 System abnormal common signal that cannot be reported via Data link.
---
•
3 All signals necessary for remote operation and monitoring using
graphical screen or indication Lamps. • ---
4 Selected signals, such as major equipment failure and major process

variables. • ---
5 Priority selection of redundant equipment or system from remote

operating system. • ---
(11) Sensors
a) For major equipment trip
• Triple (• with average I median selecting function)
D Dual (D with average I median selecting function)
D Single
b) For major control loops

D Triple (D with average I median selecting function)
• Dual (• with average I median selecting function)
D Single
7 I 15
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 118/765
c) Others (For a Monitoring or minor control loops)

• Single
d) General rule
Sensors among trip, control and monitoring are to be physically separated including cables.
• Yes D No
The Contractor responsible for cable routing and laying has to observe a strict unit separation. The
cables must be routed in different cable channels or, as the minimum requirement, on different
cable trays, so that in case of a fire or any accident in a cable channel or tray two units shall not be
affected.
(12) Miscellaneous
a) Man machine interface shall be applied operator station with 21 inches LCD display, keyboard and
mouse, or TFT touch display.
b) After commissioning, the marshalling racks, instrument racks, etc. must contain 15% of spare space.
Junction boxes will have 15% spare capacity of fitted terminals.
c) Cable shall be resistant to solar radiation, termite, mice, the effect of oil, seawater and bacterial
action. Outer sheaths are to be manufactured from non-combustible or flame retardant material in
accordance with IEC 60332-3 cat. C.
d) At least 5% free space shall be available in 10 points.
e) Panel specification shall be referred to Attachment-3 "General Specification for Panels".
If PLC is applied, following requirements shall be included:

f) Controller has the capability to perform online modification
g) The controller must have 40% spare functional capacity to implement additional function blocks
under worst load conditions.
h) Control program (Backup software with description) shall be supplied after completion of site test.
8 I 15
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 119/765
3.3Specification of Instrument
(1) All instruments requested for BidderNendor's equipment are listed below;
No. Instrument Type Application Manufacturer Signal Range
a. Pressure, Temperature, Level, Refer to Attachment-1 Bidder/Vendor's -

Flow Local Gauge standard
b. Pressure, Temperature, Level, Refer to Attachment-1 Bidder/Vendor's Contact rating:

Flow Switch standard 24VDC, 5mA,
DCS Powered
C. Position Switch Refer to Attachment-1 Bidder/Vendor's Contact rating:

standard 24VDC, 5mA,
DCS Powered
d. Pressure, Differential Pressure Refer to Attachment-1 Bidder/Vendor's 24VDC,4-20mA
Transmitter (*1, *2, *3) standard DCS Powered
e. Level, Flow transmitter (*2, *3) Refer to Attachment-1 Bidder/Vendor's 24VDC,4-20mA
standard DCS Powered
f. Speed sensor (motor driven Refer to Attachment-1 Bidder/Vendor's -
boiler feed water pump only) standard
g. RTD (*4) Refer to Attachment-1 Bidder/Vendor's Pt100 Q (@0°C)
standard
h. Thermocouple (*5) Refer to Attachment-1 Bidder/Vendor's Type E( <600°C)

standard Type K(>600°C)
i. Solenoid valve Refer to Attachment-1 Bidder/Vendor's -

standard
j. Control Valve Refer to Attachment-1 Bidder/Vendor's
standard
k. Mounting Bracket for Every bearing of MV - Sensor type
Vibration Sensor Motor and its equipment Informed later
Note:
*1: Including flow, level measurement using differential pressure transmitter
*2: LED indicator is requested
*3: One Handy terminal for calibration of all Bidder/Vendor's transmitters is requested
*4: 3 wire, single element, IEC 60751-class A
*5: Un-grounded, dual element, IEC 60584-class 1
(2) Bidder/Vendor must supply all labels, nameplates, tags, instruction and warning plates necessary for
the identification and safe operation of the Plant.
(3) All nameplates on equipment must be written in English. The format must be submitted to Owner for
review during detailed engineering stage. Nameplates for plant and Equipment identification and record
purposes must be manufactured from stainless steel with a matt or satin finish and engraved with black
9 I 15
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 120/765
lettering of a size which is legible from the working level.

(4) BidderNendor shall refer to Attachment-4 "Instrumentation Works Installation Manual".
10 / 15
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 121/765
4. Submittal Documents and Schedule

BidderNendor shall submit documents/drawings to Sub-Contractor as follows.
All drawings and documents shall be submitted in electronics file in addition to on ordinary paper ones.
Drawings and /or Documents Number Date of Submittal Status

Required (After Award)
Manufacturing and engineering schedule 3C,1E 0 A
Documents and drawings list 0 A
Power consumption List 0 A
Instrument Air Consumption List 0 A
Shop test/inspection procedure 0 A

Same for all items
1/0 List for DCS and Other Equipment below 30 A
Control Device List 30 A
Outline of Control Panels 30 A
Outline of Operation Stations 30 A
Outline of Channel Bases 30 A
MODBUS data-link list (if applicable) 60 A
Instrument List 60 A
Set-point List 60 A
Alarm List 60 A
Function Logic Diagram (If applicable) 60 A
Logic Description 60 A
Graphic Sketch for Graphic display 60

Monitoring (If applicable)
ECWD of PLC (if applicable) and local 60 A

control cubicles
Terminal Block Wiring Diagram 60 A
Specification of instruments 90 A
11 / 15
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 122/765
Drawings and /or Documents Number Date of Submittal Status

Required (After Award)
Outline of local instrument rack and 90 A

stanchion
90 A
On-off valve Specification and assembly
drawing
90
Safety valve Specification and assembly
drawing
90 A
Control valve Specification and assembly
drawing
90 A
Instrument Hook-Up Drawing
120 A
Spare parts, special tools and consumable
item list
120
Shop test & inspection procedure
120
Field test& inspection procedure
120
0 & M Manuals
after FAT
Shop test & inspection records
Two weeks ahead
Shipping Invoice of shipment
after TIO
Field test & Inspection records
(Note) 1. Explanation of abbreviation used in "number required" column

"C": copy
"E": electronic files (e.g Excel). Especially, lists must be prepared using internationally
recognized computer program (e.g. Excel).
2. Explanation of abbreviation used in "status" column
"A": for approval
"I": for information
12 / 15
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 123/765
5. Supplementary Explanation on Submittal Document/Drawings

First of all, a clear illustration of cloud marks to every single part where modification is made is
mandatory for all of the submittals in addition to revision control by revision numbers.
Documents and drawings list

This list is to include, but not limited to, drawing title, revision, for app./ info. , expected submittal date,
submittal due date, actual submittal date.
1/0 List
This list is used to specify signals for BidderNendor's system's input and output from I to local
instruments or control equipment only for hardwired connection portion.
The signals related to control devices is not subjected for this list.
BidderNendor shall provide the list in accordance with the format that is as Attachment-2.1.
Control Item List

This list is used to define devices controlled by DCS. The DCS inpuUoutput signals related to these
devices will be generated in accordance with "Basic Interface Concept". BidderNendor shall provide the
list in accordance with the format as Attachment-2.2.
MODBUS data-link list (if applicable)

This list is used to specify data-link signals between DCS and PLC.
BidderNendor shall provide the list in accordance with the format as Attachment-2.3.
Instrument List
This list is used to specify local instrumentation such as transmitters, gauges, thermocouple, etc.
Set-point and Alarm List

This list is used to define set-points for alarms and interlocks for both of the following categories.
• Set-point of Binary signals for alarm/ interlock with offset value
• Set-point of Analog signals for alarm/ interlock into the control system with offset value
Alarm List
This list is to include Items of alarm as follows,
• Alarm signals for process disturbance
• Alarm signals for system fault etc.
Function Logic Diagram

This document is to illustrate control logic and operation requirements controlled by both DCS and PLC.
ISA Format shall be used for logic symbols. Ladder Logic is prohibited.
Logic Description
BidderNendor shall submit logic description in a written format to exactly specify the operation
philosophy for each control device and each control loop. This description shall also include the
explanation for the system start up / shut down procedure, interlocks, protective condition and normal
operation requirements.
13 / 15
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 124/765
Graphic Sketch for Graphic Display Monitoring

This document is used to define Bidder/Vendor's suggestion of Graphic Sketch on DCS graphic display
using ISA standard symbols for the system plant remote monitoring.
ECWD of PLC (if applicable) and local control cubicles

This document is to illustrate elementary control wiring diagram (ECWD) to be used for system validation
including actual interface among systems.
Terminal Block Wiring Diagram

This document is used for Sub-Contractor to connect cables among terminal blocks including
Sub-Contractor's systems. Bidder/Vendor is to submit all terminal block wiring diagram. Bidder/Vendor
is to also include the information within Bidder/Vendor's scope.
Specification of instrument
Bidder/Vendor shall submit specification of each type of instrument.
The specification shall include but not limited to,
• Pressure transmitter
• Pressure gauge
• Pressure switches
• Differential pressure gauges and switches
• thermo couples and resistance thermometers
• Temperature Switch
• Local thermometers
• Level transmitter
• Level indicator
• Level switch
• Flow transmitter
• Flow indicator
• Position transmitter
• 1/P Converter
• Thermo well
14 / 15
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 125/765
Spare parts and special tools list
• Startup, Testing, and Commissioning Spare Parts

The BidderNendor must furnish consumables and spare parts to perform testing, startup, and
commissioning. The BidderNendor must provide skilled construction crafts and labor support as
requested.
• Mandatory Spare Parts

The BidderNendor shall include pnc1ng in the base bid and provide a breakout price of
mandatory spare parts for two years warranty period.
The pricing shall be valid through the two year warranty period.
• Strategic Spare Parts

The BidderNendor shall provide a list of strategic spare parts required for major equipment
overhauls that are not included in the construction, startup, and commissioning spare parts
required.
The BidderNendor shall provide with the bid optional price information and lead times for these
parts.
The pricing shall be valid through the two year warranty period.
• special tools
The BidderNendor base price shall include for the provision of all special tools required for
installation, checking, inspection, repair, and future maintenance as provided by the equipment
supplier.
All special tools shall be delivered to the site with the related equipment.
Test and inspection item list

• At BidderNendor's factory
• At Site
• At TOSHIBA Fuchu factory (Modbus Test between DCS and PLC)
15 / 15
Approval on PDM
Attachment-1
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 126 1165
Tanjung Jati B Re-Expansion Project - T JB 5 & 6
•
General Instrumentation and
Control Requirements
BO - General Technical Specification BO - 189

Approval on PDM
Attachment-1
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 121 1165
80.14. General Instrumentation and Control

Requirements
In the event of contradictions between requirements of this Section and stipulations in the
Parts Bl, B2, B3 and B4 or other Section of this BO-Part, the contradictions shall be clarified
by mutual consent before Contract signature. In case contradictions have been not clarified
the more stringent requirements shall apply.
B0.14.1 Main design criteria
This Section applies to the design of the instrumentation and control equipment for the
entire plant and shall be strictly observed with regard to design and execution. Only
requirements for technical performance of the equipment are stated herein, whilst the
detailed formulation of the tasks to be performed by the control systems and the scope of
supplies and services are specified in the relevant Sections of this Specification.
For any deviation from the following specification all Lots shall obtain a written
clarification from SC.
This specification does not however relieve each Lot of his responsibility for the basic
design and execution of the instrumentation and control system respectively.
A consistent instrumentation and control philosophy shall apply throughout the plant and
shall be implemented in terms of a range of equipment exhibiting a minimum diversity of
make and type as far as possible. The objective shall be to standardize all instrumentation
and control equipment throughout the plant for easier operation, maintenance and reduction
of spares inventory.
The equipment shall be of compact design incorporating the latest developments in proven
technology.
Instrumentation and control equipment shall be matched to the layout of the plant equipment
in every respect. All aspects with regard to operating and maintenance shall be observed.
Special attention shall be paid to the plant safety.
The selected field equipment installed in pipes, tanks, etc. shall fully meet the requirements
concerning the operational conditions of the media to be measured.
Remote-mounting type field instruments shall be installed by means of open type pipe stand
made by hot dip galvanized steel stanchion, rack made by hot dip galvanized steel angle &
channel, or mounted by appropriate support materials such as bracket, channel, angle, plate,
etc. In particular all equipment shall be classified according to IEC 60529, 'Degrees of
Protection Provided by Enclosures'.
The maximum allowable ambient temperature of the electronic devices as well as easy
access for the maintenance staff shall be considered when selecting the mounting location.
Any equipment to be installed within potentially explosives atmospheres shall comply with
the requirements of international standards and codes, e.g. IEC-60079, NEC 500 etc.
The instrumentation and control equipment shall have a high grade of immunity with regard
to electro-magnetic and radio frequency interference and shall not be affected by portable
Approval on PDM
Attachment-1
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 1281165
radiotelephonic transmitters, cellular phones, radio-telecontrol devices etc. operated in the

vicinity of the equipment. The relevant !EC-standards concerning electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) shall be observed.
80.14.2 Transmitters
Generally, transmitters in 2-wire technology of the "SMART"-type with an impressed output

current of 4 - 20 mA, corresponding to zero to full range input shall be provided. The output
signal shall not be affected by the loop resistance over a wide range.
Preferably transmitters shall operate with 24 V DC nominal voltage, but shall be operable
within a wide voltage range.
The accuracy considering also other effects such as linearity, hysteresis and repeatability
shall be± 0.5% of span or better except for particular transmitter such as banker level
transmitter.
If not specified otherwise, local parameterization at the transmitter or via modem and
PC/laptop or hand held communicator using HART -protocol shall be possible.
For measurements of corrosive process fluids, slurries or highly viscous media diaphragm
seals shall be provided. The diaphragm seal shall be of the direct mount flange type or of the
capillary type. The material selection shall be according to the requirements of the fluids to
be measured.
Electrical connection shall be by via screwed glands. Plugged connection may also be
accepted.
All transmitters (except head mounted or rail mounted temperature transmitters) shall be
fitted with a LCD-indicator displaying user defined pressure, flow, level or volume units.
For the continuous remote position indication of valves, dampers etc. also transmitters with
impressed output signal of 4- 20 mA shall be employed. The position sensing transmitter
shall be based on capacitance or strain principle.
Transmitters shall be installed by means of open type pipe stand made by hot dip galvanized
steel stanchion, rack made by hot dip galvanized steel angle & channel, or mounted by
appropriate support materials such as bracket, channel, angle, plate, etc.
80.14.3 Binary sensors
If binary signals cannot be derived from an analog value, binary sensors e.g. temperature
switches, pressure switches, level switches, flow monitors, position switches, etc. may be
employed. All binary sensors shall be of robust design and reliable performance.
The switching elements shall be of snap-action and change over type.
The set point and the dead-band (reset point) of each switch shall be adjustable and lockable
over a wide range. The set point and reset point shall be indicated on the adjusting
mechanism.
Mercury filled switching devices are not permitted.
All switching devices shall be housed in robust, dust and moisture proof cases with cable
glands. The protection class of the housing shall be in compliance with the ambient
conditions at the mounting location.
Position sensors at valves, dampers etc. shall preferably be of the proximity type. If
appropriate, snap-lock limit switches may also be employed.
Approval on PDM
Attachment-1
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 129 1165
For the sensing of level in tanks, vessels or bunkers float switches, vibration level switches
or other suitable switching devices with conductive or capacitive electrodes shall be
provided.
For monitoring of machine coolant or lubricant flow (dry running protection) suitable flow
or level sensors shall be employed.
B0.14.4 Temperature measurements
Local measurements
For local temperature measurements machine glass thermometers or dial thermometers (bi-
metallic-or capillary type) of class 1.5 shall be provided.
They shall generally be mounted on fixtures or instrument panels in such a way that they are
protected from vibration, jarring and sprayed water. The thermometers shall confirm to
protection class IP54 according to IEC 60529. Tubes of capillary type instruments shall be
protected to avoid damages.
Thermometers provided with vendor packages such as pumps, compressors, instrument air
dryers, etc. make and type according to the vendors' standard shall be accepted.
The thermometer stem shall be inserted into standard thermowells.
Remote measurements
For remote measurements and if not specified otherwise, type K or type E thermocouples in
accordance with IEC 60584, class 1. Application range shall be employed from 300°C up to
maximum temperature of 1200°C. For higher temperatures thermocouples type R may be
used.
Resistance thermometers (RTDs ), type Pt 100 according IEC 607 51, class A shall be
employed. All R TDs shall be shock proof type and wired according to the three-conductor
principle. The application range shall be up to a maximum temperature of about 380°C.
The above thermocouples and RTD-thermometers shall be of the quick response type,
ungrounded and of single type. Except for special applications all sensors shall be fitted in
protective wells (thermowells). Fast response type thermowells shall be provided for all
applications involving control of critical process temperatures. The thermocouples/ RTD-
thermometers must be easily exchangeable.
The style and lengths of the thermowells (welded-in, screwed-in, flanged, immersion well)
shall depend on the pipe size and pressure rating, measured media etc. For measurements in
high pressure medium e.g. water or steam welded-in type thermowells shall be employed.
Insofar as local conditions or extreme temperature do not require otherwise, screw-in
immersion wells for flue gas and air shall meet the following requirements:
nominal length not less than 0.5 m

the attachment of the well in the wall of the flue gas channel or air duct must be gas-proof.
For the measurement of other media the following requirements shall be observed:
In pipework a minimum immersion depth of 55 mm in the internal pipeline cross-Section

and a minimum distance of 15 mm from the opposite pipe wall shall be observed. If the
Approval on PDM
Attachment-1
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 130 1165
diameter of the pipe does not allow the thermowells to be inserted perpendicular to the pipe
axis while still maintaining the above mentioned measurements, another solution must be
found. When determining the lengths of the insertion and connecting tubes the insulation
thickness is to be taken into consideration.
Where more than one temperature tapping points shall be required at one location, e.g. for
redundant loops or different services, individual protective wells with sensors shall be
provided. Protective wells for unoccupied tapping points shall be provided with a screw-on
protection cover.
Radiation pyrometers may be considered for use on applications where:
temperatures are above the practical operating range of thermocouples.

the environment shall contaminate or seriously limit the life time of thermocouples.
an average temperature of a large area is required.
Radiation pyrometers shall respond to 98% of target temperature change within two seconds.
B0.14.5 Pressure measurements
Local measurements
Pressure gauges of class 1.5 shall be employed. The kind of gauge (e.g. bourdon tube type,
capsule element type, diaphragm element type, differential pressure gauge etc.) shall be
selected according to the application needs. The standard measuring ranges must be selected
with regard to the maximum operating pressure.
Pressure gauges provided with vendor packages such as pumps, compressors, instrument air
dryers, etc. make and type according to the vendors' standard shall be accepted. However,
note the requirement for pressure measurements in bar or millibar, as the case may be.
Liquid filled pressure gauges may be used in order to ensure destruction in case of high
dynamic pressure load.
Gauge process connections shall be with thread G ~ B male. Each gauge shall be mounted
on a pressure gauge valve. Test connection with separate isolating valve with thread G ~
male are required for all vital process measurements e.g. feed water, live steam, etc,
appropriately.
Remote measurements
Pressures to be remotely indicated, recorded or used for automatic control purposes shall be
measured by means of pressure transmitters (ref to Clause "Transmitters").
Tapping points shall generally be in accordance with the specification for the pipeline in
which they are installed and shall be equipped with one primary isolating valve arranged
directly at the tapping point and having a nominal bore of at least 15 mm (W'). For high
pressure installations above 40barg two isolating valves shall be installed in accordance with
the specification for the corresponding pipeline.
The above stipulations do not apply to measurements of combustion air and flue gas.
Impulse piping shall be of approved quality and sized for the particular service. In all cases
the pipe size shall be chosen to ensure strength and freedom from blockage.
Approval on PDM
Attachment-1
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 131 1165
Pressure transmitters shall not be mounted directly at the tapping point, but shall be arranged
at a distance from the tapping point. The impulse line between tapping point and transmitter
shall be arranged in such a way as to form a siphon loop, when only steam pressure
measurements are involved where the length of impulse piping is not enough to cool the
process temperature lower than the instrument's allowable temperature.
Each transmitter shall be mounted on a stop valve as specified above for pressure gauges.
5-valve manifolds or multi way cocks shall be provided, where differential pressure is to be
measured if the transmitter's manufacturer standard does not allow receiving the pressure
from one-side.
B0.14.6 Flow measurements
Local measurements
Local measuring and indication of volume flow rates of liquids shall be performed by means
of turbine meters, sliding vane meters, oval-wheel meters, glass tube Rotameters, etc.
Remote measurements
Remote flow measurements of water, steam, combustion air, flue gas etc. shall, unless
otherwise specified, be carried out by the differential pressure principle.
Primary elements such as orifice plates or flow nozzles located in steam or high pressure
feed water pipes shall be of the weld-in type. Material, dimensions and installation of orifice
plates, nozzles and their tapping points shall be in accordance with the specification for the
pipes in which they are installed.
Tapping points shall be equipped with one primary isolating valve having a nominal bore of
at least 15 mm (W'). For high pressure installations above 40 barg two isolating valves in
accordance with the specification for the corresponding pipeline shall be installed. In the
case of steam measurements condensation pots (steam traps) shall be provided after the
isolating valve.
In order to achieve exact installation, the vendor supplying the orifice plate or nozzle for
high pressure pipes shall install the orifice plate or nozzle in its own works in a Section of
pipe of about 3.5 times the pipe diameter (2.5 x NB upstream,1.0 x NB downstream).
The dimensions of the piping runs shall conform to those laid down for the piping concerned.
The welding seams shall be executed in such a manner that no turbulence, which shall affect
the measurement, can occur. For orifice plates or nozzles installed in pipes with a nominal
bore smaller than 80 mm, complete meter runs shall be supplied.
Orifice plates and nozzles shall be manufactured of ANSI 316 Stainless Steel, unless
specified otherwise. Orifice plates shall be sized for a d/D ratio not less than 0.2 and not
greater than O. 7.
Higher rather than lower d/D ratio are preferred to minimize line restrictions.
For flow measurements in LP-systems e.g. water or condensate, orifice plate installation
using slip-on orifice flanges shall be provided. All flanged orifice plates shall have their own
tappings incorporated into the plate i.e. use of simple orifice plates with the tappings situated
in the pipe is not allowed.
Approval on PDM
Attachment-1
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 132 1165
Venturi tubes shall only be considered when operating economy requires low permanent
pressure losses. Rectangular venturi tubes may be considered where other measuring devices
are impossible or impractical (e.g. in large rectangular air duct of boilers).
Tagging on primary elements shall contain the basic design information (i.e. flow rate,
pressure and temperature of the passing fluid, the orifice diameter and the pressure
differential generated). The flow direction shall be consistently marked on the orifice or
nozzle by means of an arrow.
The transmitters shall be as specified under Clause "Transmitters". Changes in density,
pressure or temperature of the measured medium shall be compensated wherever necessary.
Volume flow rates may also be measured by other devices such as annubar flowmeters,
electromagnetic or ultrasonic flowmeters, positive displacement flowmeters, turbine meters,
oval-wheel meters, Vortex meters, metal tube rotameters, etc. in case of technical or
economically advantages.
For mass flow measurements coriolis type meters, thermal mass flowmeters or other suitable
devices shall be employed.
B0.14.7 Level measurements
Local measurements
Local gauge glasses of mica type or flat glass reflex type shall be provided. They shall be
designed so that the level column shall be indicated over the entire level range. If
appropriate, the indication devices may also be equipped with level threshold sensors. Vents
and drains as well as integral illumination facilities shall be foreseen.
For other local level measurements devices operating on float or displacement principle
shall be employed. Also devices operating on the principle of communicating tubes may be
provided for use with aggressive, noxious or flammable substances and in harsh
environment.
Remote measurements
For the remote level measurements at feed water and condensate vessels, tanks, etc.,
differential pressure transmitters shall preferably be employed.
Transmitters as specified under Clause "Transmitters" shall be provided.
For measurements where a reference leg of process fluid is used, the design of the system
shall ensure that the reference leg is fully maintained at its prescribed height during all
conditions of process level change and changes in process conditions and the density of the
reference leg does not vary from that of the process fluid due to temperature changes or
other reasons.
For all measurement with differential pressure transmitters isolating valves at the tapping
point, 5-valve manifolds and separate blow-off valves at the transmitter side shall be
provided if the transmitter's manufacturer standard does not allow to receive the pressure
from one-side.
For special applications such as level measurements in silos, bunkers, chemical storage
tanks etc., devices operating on techniques such as radar, ultrasonic, capacitance, etc. should
Approval on PDM
Attachment-1
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 133 1165
be considered. Proper Level measurement devices shall be considered for the application in
dusty environment such as ash silo or in ESP. For level measurement in tanks with sub-
atmospheric pressure (vacuum) displacement type level transmitters shall be employed.
80.14.8 Vibration measurements
At large rotating or reciprocating machinery (steam turbine, BFPT, pulverizer, primary air
fan, forced draft fan, induced draft fan) pedestal bearing and /or shaft vibrations shall be
measured and monitored for protection and predictive maintenance purposes.
Bearing vibration shall be measured by means of piezo-electrical accelerometers. For shaft

vibration measurements non-contacting proximity-type sensors shall be employed. As for
fans, seismic type vibration sensor on the bearing housing shall be applied.
All measurements shall be evaluated in a vibration monitoring system Exceeding threshold

values shall be suitably alarmed in the control room or the machine shall be tripped.
The vibration monitoring system shall be modular, reliable, accurate, easy to maintain, and
suitable for use in such ambient conditions appertaining to the intended plant installation.
80.14.9 Analyses
Analysis of steam and water

The analyzers supplied by Lot 1 shall be arranged in such a way that excessively long probe
sampling lines shall be avoided. Where possible they shall be arranged in groups at a
common analyzer rack supplied by Lot 1.
If required by the medium to be analyzed, all samples shall be adequately cooled and
pressure reducing devices shall be provided where necessary.
The sampling system shall include but not be limited to all probes, valves, filters, coolers,
drainage facilities, flow regulators, flowmeters, piping and pumps as necessary, to give the
analyzer a representative and suitably conditioned sample. A protective device shall be
incorporated in the sample cooler to isolate the analyzer in the event of excessive
temperature, where applicable.
Each automatic analysis sampling point shall be provided to permit a sample to be easily
taken. Manual sampling point shall be provided at the analyzer rack. All sampling lines shall
be run to common sampling racks on which shall be fitted all the analysis associated
equipment.
In order to eliminate the influence of ammonia and hydrazine at conductivity analyzers,

cation-filters shall be provided. The cation-filters shall have visible color indicators to show
when they have to be regenerated.
For all analyzers temperature compensation shall be provided, with the temperature sensor
being an integral part of the probe.
Chlorine residual monitors and hypochlorite concentration meters shall preferably be able to
measure concentrations over a wide range. The analysis of hypochlorite concentration shall
not be affected by the presence of other oxidizing components in the sample.
Approval on PDM
Attachment-1
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 134 1165
Individual or multiple prefabricated analyzer installations shall be used to reduce site

installation work. This prefabrication shall include sample conditioners, analyzers, air and
electrical distribution, cooling water distribution or coolant circulating system all piped and
wired on a common frame. Interconnecting pipework and accessories shall be of stainless
steel. The arrangement shall permit testing of the entire assembly before dispatch to site and
shall be arranged for convenient removal from on-line operation to facilitate routine
maintenance and calibration.
Flue gas analysis

Oxygen-analyzers required for combustion control shall be of the in-situ type with zirconia-
probe. The response time shall suit the requirement for closed-loop controls. The accuracy
of the device shall be better than 2.0% of the span and the drift shall be not more than 0.1 %
0 2 per week. Maintenance shall not be more than once a week.
Signals of the continuous emission monitoring system shall be monitored on DCS display in
CCR. Local authorities have to confirm this display.
All equipment of the continuous emission monitoring system (CEMS) shall be suitable for
operation in dusty and humid environments at high ambient and flue gas temperatures.
The use of multi-component analyzers shall be considered. Programmable auto-calibration
devices for zero and span shall be foreseen. Zero and span gas bottles shall be provided.
In order to keep the sampling line to acceptable limits the analyzers shall be located close to
their sampling point. Easy access shall be ensured by provision a sampling platform.
The flue gas sampling lines shall be heated to prevent condensation and shall not form a
siphon in the case where condensate may be collected during heater failure. Condensate
drainage facilities shall be provided at the analyzer side.
Generally, the analyzers and the sampling probe equipment shall be suitable for mounting in
an easy accessible standard cubicle. However, if this is not feasible, the equipment shall be
mounted in a container or local electronic room. Depending on the prevailing environmental
conditions the aforesaid housings shall be air-conditioned.
Power failure and system failures shall be monitored and alarmed to the central control room
by group alarm.
Measured values and certain status signals shall be processed by an emission evaluation
computer via serial interface, to be installed within the Central Control Room. The emission
data shall be calculated, converted, printed out and stored according to the governmental
requirements.
B0.14.1 o Electrical value measurements
For the processing of electrical values such as voltage, current, power, frequency etc.
transmitters as specified under Clause "Transmitters" shall be provided. The transmitters
shall be housed in the switchgear.
For power measurements precision electricity meters for asymmetrical three-phase networks
are to be supplied. Connection of the meters shall generally be to 2 x 5A current
transformers and 3 x 110/sqrt. 3V voltage transformers. The meter accuracy class is to be
Approval on PDM
Attachment-1
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 135 1165
approximate to the respective transformer classes. Instrument transformers with an accuracy

class of 0.5 or better shall be used for metering purposes for generator main circuit and
instrument transformers with an accuracy class of 1. 0 shall be used for metering purposes
for power distribution circuits.
For the purpose of billing for electrical energy (settlement metering) and for acceptance tests,
an instrument transformer of class 0.2 (precision) accuracy and high precision electricity
meters of class 0.2 have to be provided. Meters for billing purposes shall be of the approved
calibrated type (certified by independent testing stations). All meters for billing purposes are
to be provided as double 2 x 100% meters.
At all points where power direction reversal is possible, the necessary meters for both
directions are to be provided.
The meters in the local switchgear are to be arranged behind the clear plastic fronts of the
cubicle doors so that the counter readings can be taken without opening the doors.
B0.14.11 Control valves
Control valve spindles and internals shall be made of chromium steel and shall have a high
resistance to wear and corrosion. Cones and seats shall be hard faced with materials with a
high resistance to wear and corrosion. Housings shall be made of forged or cast steel. A
hand wheel, with provision for switching to manual operation and a local position indicator
shall also be provided.
All control valves, orifices and nozzles shall comply with the relevant international standards.
Control valve characteristic shall allow smooth and continuous control of the control
parameter.
Valves shall have trim designed to avoid cavitation damage. If an application cannot avoid
cavitation entirely, material selection shall be such as to withstand the effects without
damage.
Line strainers shall be provided upstream of control valves where required.
Valves shall generally be sized so that at normal maximum flow the valve is at
approximately 85% open position. The design pressure drop across the valve should be 15 to
20% of the total available pressure drop at no flow.
Although control valves shall not be used for shut-off service, to provide reasonable shut-off
performance, leakage through a closed control valve shall not exceed 1% for single ported
valves or 2% for balanced ported valves.
All control valve materials shall be compatible with the fluid handled. Materials shall be in
accordance with the piping materials standard.
Valve characteristics shall be picked to suit the process and control system dynamics.
All the control valves for boiler feed water services should be of anti-cavitation type with
flash-flow trims and cage type to avoid cavitation problems.
Approval on PDM
Attachment-1
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 1361765
The installation shall include upstream and downstream isolating valves, where applicable.
The bypass valve shall have a similar characteristic as the control valve but shall provide
tight shut-off. Where a service is subject to a pressure above 3 bar a 25 mm drain valve shall
be provided, between the upstream and downstream isolating valves, in order to relieve the
pressure to enable maintenance to be carried out on the control valve. Control valves shall
be adequately supported in all cases and shall be accessible for maintenance.
For normal duty globe type valves shall be used.
Where very large sizes are involved (on high flows), or low pressure drops and low static
pressure are a determining factor, making globe valves unattractive or impossible, butterfly
valves shall be used, They shall be of the "balanced torque" type disc usable to the fully
open position (90° opening). The overall shaft rating shall be at least 25% above the static
pressure as differential across the closed valve.
Multi-stage valves shall be used on services, e.g. steam and gas, having very high pressure
drops which would result in supersonic velocity inside a conventional body and shock waves
in the piping, creating unacceptable noise levels. Angle valves shall be provided:
For steam pressure reducing de-superheating stations of the "combination"-type.

For erosive services, e.g. slurries.
On applications where solid contaminants might settle in the valve body.
On hydrocarbon services with a tendency for "coking".
Ball valves shall be used for on-off and throttling services under moderate operating
conditions.
The control valves must be provided with all data important for their identification, such as
TAG no., type, nominal diameter, nominal pressure, seating, CV value. Flow direction to be
indicated ad the valve body.
B0.14.12 Actuators
Unless otherwise specified actuators for open/close or modulating services shall either be
pneumatic or electrically operated. Self contained sealed hydraulic units may be considered
where high thrusts or high speeds of operation are required.
The various types and sizes of actuators shall be rationalized and as far as possible each type
shall be from a common manufacturer to facilitate interchangeability and spares.
For all electric driven actuators of valves and dampers 4 freely adjustable position limit
switches and 2 torque switches shall be provided. If the valve or damper needs to be operated
in intermediate positions, a position transmitter with 4-20 mA output as specified in Clause
"Transmitters" shall also be foreseen. Actuators manufactured by AUMA, DREHMO, or
equivalent shall be preferred.
All actuators shall be provided with a local indication and with a handwheel for direct
manual operation. The diameter of the handwheel and geared effort shall be such that they
can be reasonably operated by one man. A lockable mechanical clutch mechanism shall be
provided to inhibit motor drive during handwheel operation.
Approval on PDM
Attachment-1
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 131 1165
Pneumatically operated actuators shall - depending on the process needs - be designed in

such a way that in the event of air failure the actuator shall remain in the position
immediately prior to loss of power (FB), or shall assume a position which is safe for the
process (FO or FC).
An air set with pressure regulator, filter, gauge and auto drainage shall be provided with the
actuator, if necessary.
For remote position indication proximity-type position sensors or an analog position

transmitter shall be provided for all actuators for open/close service. An electric/pneumatic
positioner shall be foreseen for all actuators of control valves to be remotely controlled.
80.14.13 Indicators
Indicators mounted into the front side of cubicles, panels, desks, etc. shall be of the digital
type, of the analog type with moving coil- mechanism or bar graph display type. Analog
type indicators may be with square or rectangular frame of uniform color with scales clearly
divided and indelibly marked in black on a white background. If no other measured error
rating is required otherwise, the indicators shall correspond to class 1. 5.
The glass shall be of the non-reflecting, anti-static type and should minimize parallax errors.
The selected sizes shall allow reading from 2 meters distance. Indicators with integrated
alarm signaling unit are allowed within package units only.
Digital indicators shall be with LED-display with 13 mm character size as a minimum.

The maximum reading shall be at least± 1999 digits. The accuracy shall be not less than
0.1 % of measured value (± 1 digit). Readout overflow and measuring range overflow shall
be indicated. The measuring cycle shall be adjustable from the front side.
Multi channel bargraph type indicators with self- luminous LCD-display may be provided
for special applications i.e. for temperature indication. Alarm thresholds shall be freely
assignable to the input channels.
80.14.14 Programmable logic controller
Programmable logic control (PLC) devices shall be deployed in subsidiary installations,

which do not affect the availability of the main process in case of malfunction. Standard
products of PLC manufacturers shall be used. The processor shall be a state of the art
microprocessor based module with enough computing, memory and resources available to
perform the required controls. Automatic re-start after power failure shall be ensured.
The diversity of makes and types shall be kept to a minimum. SC reserves the right to
stipulate make and type following award of contract.
For signal exchange with the main DCS, the PLC shall be compatible with this system.
Depending on the amount of information to be exchanged, parallel or serial interfacing shall
be considered. The sequence of events signals should be directly physically connected to the
SER
If only few signals are to be exchanged, parallel interfacing is preferred, whereby binary
signals shall be galvanically isolated. Analogue signals shall be de-coupled.
Approval on PDM
Attachment-1
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 13 s1 165
In cases of serial signal exchange, the interface devices must be capable of communication
using an industrial standard protocol. The transmission baud rate shall be selected dependent
on the application. When one Lot interfaces with another Lot, the protocol to be utilized are
to, should be agreed to ensure compatibility.
As a minimum requirement, the offered serial link shall have a data integrity checking and
retransmission facility in case of error detection, independent of the DCS or external system
software. Hardware and software failures during data transmission shall be monitored and
alarmed.
The functions realized in the PLC and the method by which they are invoked shall be
represented graphically according to IEC 61131-3. Additionally, a program description shall
be provided.
Programming devices with keyboard, display and printer for ease of programming, effective
on-line monitoring and diagnostic functions, together with the necessary equipment to write
in and to erase EEPROM's shall be provided. Only English language shall be used for
Operating and programming software and logics. PLC/HMI installed in critical plants, shall
have provision for storing historical data and trends for trouble shooting and analysis
purpose.
For local operation and monitoring a panel or desk mounted Human Machine Interface
(HMI) unit, operable by keypad or touch screen with LED-displays shall be provided.
Protection class of panel mounted HMI (front side) shall be IP 31 according to IEC 60529.
The PLC hardware and other associated control equipment shall be installed in suitable
enclosure or control cubicle to be installed at a suitable location in the vicinity of the plant or
system to be controlled.
B0.14.15 Power supply and fusing
The voltage levels as specified in Section 'Electrical and associated Systems shall be
considered for the design of the I & C systems.
If a different voltage level shall be required, all necessary equipment including DC/DC
converters or inverters, de-coupling diodes, busbars etc., shall be designed, supplied and
installed for this system respectively.
The supply voltages for the control cubicles within the Central Electronics Room (CER)
shall preferably be 24 V DC and must be arranged as separately fused double infeeds.
The individual feeders may serve either a single cubicle or several cubicles combined as a
logical group.
Electrical actuator drives shall be fed by 220 V AC Actuator drives necessary for the safe
operation and shut-down of the plant in the event of 0.4 kV switchgear failure shall be
connected to the UPS.
Fuse ratings and time characteristics shall be selected in such a way that a fault within the
fused consumer loop shall cause a rupture of the corresponding individual fuse before the
main fuse shall be triggered.
Approval on PDM
Attachment-1
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 139 1165
Trip of a main fuse shall affect the overall operation of the plant as little as possible and
shall be indicated in the CCR by means of an alarm. The alarm shall clearly identify the
blown fuse. Tripping of an individual fuse (within cubicle or at a electronic module) shall be
indicated by a general alarm. All fuse trips shall be logged by the DCS.
By this, the Section of the control cubicle in which the tripped fuse is located shall be clearly
identified.
The design of the electrical power supplies and fusing system shall ensure that any fault in
modules or other devices, which may block automatic sequences, interlocks, automatic
control functions etc., shall be restricted to the system in which the fault has occurred.
All equipment shall be adequately protected against over current by means of fuses or other
current protection devices. The fuses for main power supply shall be functionally grouped
and housed within separate power distribution cubicles.
B0.14.16 Cubicles, panels, control desks
The following requirements mainly apply to cubicles, panels, control desks which may be
required for the local control of secondary systems. However, the requirements apply also to
cubicles installed within the Central Electronics Room (CER).
They shall be designed for free-standing and constructed of folded sheet steel of adequate
thickness in order to ensure rigid support for the instrumentation and control equipment
mounted in. They shall be designed in such a way that vibrations of the building shall be
absorbed to a large extent.
In order to ease maintenance, all control and monitoring devices mounted there shall be
easily accessible.
Cubicles installed in the field shall be suitable for their mounting location and shall provide
adequate protection against dust, moisture or mechanical damage for the equipment
mounted therein. Where applicable, suitable weather protection shades shall be foreseen for
all cubicles located outdoors.
Outdoor installed cubicles shall be provided with thermostatically controlled heating

elements in order to prevent the formation of condensate which may occur due to large
variations of ambient conditions, if necessary.
Adequate lighting and sockets for hand tools protected by 30 mA Residual Current
Differential Switch (RCDS) shall also be provided for cubicles and panels, if necessary.
Cable connections to cubicles, panels and desks shall be made via suitable seals so as to
prevent the ingress of dust, vermin or the propagation of a possible fire. During installation
period, a provisional sealing of cable penetrations shall be ensured.
Approval on PDM
Attachment-1
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 140 1165
Where appropriate i.e. for operator assistance in assimilating the operational state of the
plant a simplified process mimic diagram shall be provided at the front side of local cubicles,
panels or control desks. The preferred technique to indicate the path of the various media
may by means of raised plastic strips of distinctive colors. Also a uniform scheme of colors
for different media shall be adopted.
80.14.17 Racks and junction boxes
Marshalling racks
Open type racks constructed of angle steel may be used for the marshalling and termination
of low voltage control cables within the Central Electronics Rooms (CER). Cubicle type
marshalling racks may also be considered.
For voltages exceeding 60 V, a suitably separated Section with isolation cover shall be
provided.
Instrument racks
Wherever possible, local instruments and devices, e.g. transmitters, converters, terminal
boxes, etc. shall be mounted on instrument racks. The instrument racks shall be installed
with due regard to control engineering needs, material-saving assembly and easy
accessibility for maintenance and checking work, and shall be constructed of angle steel.
Pipe stands made by galvanized steel stanchion, or other appropriate support materials such
as bracket, channel, angle, plate, etc. shall also be used for mounting local instruments and
devices.
Junction boxes
In order to simplify local collection of spur cables from local sensors and actuators suitable
junction boxes shall be installed.
The junction boxes shall be fitted with the necessary terminal strips, grounding terminals.
Protection class shall be selected based on the environmental conditions at the mounting
location.
After commissioning, the marshalling racks, instrument racks, etc. must contain 15% of
spare space. Junction boxes shall have 15% spare capacity of fitted terminals.
80.14.18 Erection works
Mechanical erection
All field mounted apparatus shall be mounted in such a way that under operating conditions
excessive vibrations shall be avoided. Instruments mounted in racks or cubicles shall be
isolated against vibrations by dampers, if appropriate.
Junction boxes shall be installed at the locations indicated on the lay-out drawings in such a
way that they are permanently accessible. They shall be fixed on walls or structures of the
plant. In open areas the junction boxes may be mounted on substantial frames.
Instrument impulse piping from the tapping point to the transmitters / binary sensors shall be
as short as possible and fixed in distances of not more than 2 m or maximum 3m acceptable
depending on the actual route of impulse piping. Joints in impulse lines shall be accepted
due to the required length of impulse piping and standard manufacturing unit length of
Approval on PDM
Attachment-1
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 141 1165
material. Impulse piping shall be principally consisting of tubing made by stainless steel
and/or appropriate material, and the detail specification shall be in accordance with vendor's
standard specification or the sub-vendor's standard.
Capillary tubing and instrument air tubing from the air sets to the pneumatic apparatus shall
be fixed and supported in a suitable manner.
Instrument installation drawings (hook up drawings) shall show the approximate
configuration of the impulse piping and the instrument location relative to the process
connections. The exact placement of the instrument and the routing of the impulse piping
shall be determined in the field. Sufficient clearance shall be provided for removal of the
instrument or for adjustments.
Labeling of all instruments, cubicles, racks, junction boxes etc. shall be in accordance with
the specified plant identification system.
All pneumatic instrument lines shall be soap tested and any leakage shall be rectified.
Approval on PDM
Atta~(J-¥1=W~H1!~.1. 2 142;16s
1/0 List- General Format Attachment-2.1
Analog Signal Signal Purpose

No.of Input Input Input
Logic Signal Range- Range- Range Power Signal CN
Rev P&ID Controller Tag Number Full Description DCS Description chara Range- Range- Range IND INT ANN TRIP SOE Contents Notes
Sheet Type Start End Units Source Range T
cters Start End Units
I I
I I
I I
+ t
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Example
6 JEP-TSB-B6-LD-21630 TSQA 10LAB10CP001 KC103 SEAWATER BOOSTER PUMP OUTLET STRAINER A DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWBP OUTL STR A DP 18 Al 0 1.5 Bar DCS 4-20mA y y y
DI DCS y y
Description
1 Revision number for each line
2 Process and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) number
3 Controller name of DCS
4 Tao Number for DCS
5 Logic Sheet Number (Toshiba internal use)
6 Full signal description
7 DCS description (accordina to abbreviation list, maximum 40 characters)
8 Number of characters of DCS description
9 Signal type (Al: Analog Input, AO: Analog Output, DI: Digital Input, DO: Digital Output, Pl: Pulse Input, PO: Pulse Output)
10 Measurement ranae of analoa sianal (Start) <Ea.: Differential Pressure of flow measurement shall be used>
11 Measurement range of analog signal (End) <Eg.: Differential pressure of flow measurement shall be used>
12 Measurement range of analog signal (Unit) <Eg.: Differential pressure of flow measurement shall be used>
13 Indication ranae of analoa sianal on DCS araPhic disolav (Start)
14 Indication ranae of analoa sianal on DCS araphic disolav (End)
15 Indication range of analog signal on DCS graphic display (Unit)
16 Power supply equipment for analoa sianal (DCS or Local, etc)
17 Signal type of analog input (4-20mA, mV Type E or K <for thermocouple, RTD>, etc)
18 Signal Purpose, IND: Indication signal (Please mark "Y" if applicable)
19 Sianal Purpose, CNT: Control sianal (Please mark "Y" if applicable)
20 Signal Purpose, INT: Interlock signal (Please mark "Y" if applicable)
21 Signal Purpose, ANN: Annunciation signal (Please mark "Y" if applicable)
22 Sianal Purpose, Trip: rip sianal (Please mark "Y" if applicable)
23 Signal Purpose, SOE: Sequence of Event signal, (Used for analysis of plant critical fault) (Please mark "Y" if applicable)
24 Extra information
25 Notes
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
1> Toshiba Corporation 2014. All Rights Reserved
Approval on PDM
Atta~(J-¥1=W~H1!~.1. 2 143/765
Control Items- General Format
No.of Logic Basic Running

Equip. Macro Seating Fail
f;ev Pl.ID TA( No. ACS Full De cription DCS Description chara Sheet lnterfac SWGR/MCC Location Inc ~ing Time Cortents Notes
Type Type Type Safe
cters Number e (Sec)
I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I
t t t t t T t t
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Example
14 JEP-TSB-B6-LD-21630 OOBHT11GS010 CES 11KV STATION BOARD A INCOMING BREAKER FROM 1A 11 KV STN BD A INCMR FROM 1A 31 CB JC501 3A SWGR 11 KV STATION BOARD A
Description

2 Process and Instrumentation Diaaram (P&ID number
3 TAG number of control items
4 DCS cabinet description (Toshiba internal use)
5 Full description of control items
6 DCS description (according to abbreviation list, maximum 40 character)
8 TvPes of control items. (MOTOR.FAN, CV: Control Valve, PV: ON/OFF Valve, MOV: Motor Operated Valve. SV: Solenoid Valve, CB:Circuit breaker)
9 Loaic sheet number !Toshiba Internal Use)
10 Basic Interface number (According to Basic Interface Concept Document)
11 Toshiba standard loaic description/number (Toshiba internal use)
12 Switchgear/MCC description
13 Inching operation of MOV (Please mark "Y" if applicable, "-" if not applicable)
14 Seatina tvPe of MOV Toraue. Limit)
15 Open to Close (Close to Open) running time for valve
16 Fail operation (FO:Open when Fail, FC: Close when fail, FL(O): Fail to Lock(Finally to Open), FL(C): Fail to Lock(Finally to Close))
18 Notes
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Ci Tnshih;:i Cnrpnn=itinn 2014. All Rights RP.;<;FH'Vf'H~
Approval on PDM
Atta~ft¥~~Hi~.'1- 2 144/765
Modbus Data-Link-Format&explanation Attachment-2.3
MODBUS PLC DCDAS
RANGE COUNT RANGE

REV ADDRESS BIT IDNO. Tag Number Signal Description/Service Description REMARKS DCS Description
LOW HIGH UNIT LOW HIGH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Example:(Analog from PLC)
2 30001 woooo 10LCM10BL001XQOO ECP SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATOR A INLET FLOW 0 200 m3/h 0 30000 CM350A
ECP NaCIO GEN A INL FLW
3 30002 W0001 10LCM10BL002XQOO ECP SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE STORAGE TANK A LEVEL 1.0 11.0 m 0 30000 CM350 D
ECP NaCIO STRG TNK A LVL
1 30003 SPARE
2 30004 SPARE
4 30005 W001D 10LCM10PL002XQOO ECP SEAWATER SUPPLY PRESSURE 0.00 2.00 bar 0 30000 CM356A ECP SEA WTR SPL Y
Description:
2 Signal mod bus address (input according to worksheets.signal type,direction of signal, eg : analog/digital to PLC.analog/digital from PLC)
3 Signal bit
4 Maker's ID number (if applicable)
5 Tag Number(Refer to KKS coding (JEP-ITHC-BO-GEN-25000) for signal numbering)
6 Description of signal
7 Actual Signal range (Low limit)
8 Actual Signal range (High limit)
9 Actual Signal range (Unit)
10 Count range of modbus data (Low limit), (Default is 0)
11 Count range of modbus data (High limit), (Default is 30000)
13 DCS description, abbreviation description from item No.6 (Abbreviation is according to Naming and Abbreviation Guideline(JEP-ITHC-BO-M-25002))
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
© Toshiba Corporation 2016. All Rights Reserved
Approval on PDM
Atta~(J-¥1=W~H1!~.1. 2 145/765
Instrument List Format and Explanation
Example
LMA50ACW33/CD- 1GMH01455(1 /2 HEATER DRAIN AND VENT
LI HP HTR (6A) LVL 1200 KANEKO SANGYO WATER INDICATE mm 22 barg 220 degC ) 1-4 SYSTEM-1
sew GEN OUTLET CONDUCTIVITY STATOR CiJiJLING WATER
LATER
Example
TOSHIBA/
KA-IC 0
TOSHIBA/
LATER KA-IC 0
Description *Device Type List

1 Input is unncessary 31 : Input Signal PT: Pressure Transmitter
2 Device Type (Refer to :*:Device Type List) 32 Output Signal1 PS: Pressure Switch
3 Tag Nmber 33 Output Signal2 Pl: Pressure Indicator
4 Service Description 34 Input from FT: Flow Transmitter
5 Model Number 35 Outputto1 Fl: Flow Indicator
6 Manufacturer 36 Outputto2 FE: Flow Element
7 Medium (WATER, STEAM, AIR, FLUE GAS, OIL, etc.) 37 Power Supply type ex)DC24V FM: Flow Minitor / Ttalizer
8 Pourpose (ALARM/ INDICATE/ MONITORING/ CONTROL/ TEST/ INTERLOCK/ Tf 38 Power Consumption(W) LT: Level Transmitter
9 Range1 Start 39 Element Type LS: Level Switch
10 Range~ End 40 Element Material LI: Level Indicator
11 Range1 Unit 41 Element Connection Size Tl: Temperature Indicator
12 Range2 Start 42 Process Connection Size AT Analyzer
13 Range2 End 43 Conduit Connection Size PDT: Differential Pressure Transmitter
14 Range2 Unit 44 Maximum Condition Flow POI: Differential Pressure Indicator
15 Maximum Condition Pressure 45 Normal Condition Pressure BE: Burner Flame Element
16 Unit for Maximum Condition Pressure 46 Normal Condition Temperature TE: Temperature Element
17 -Maximum Condition Temperature 47 Normal Cndition Flow VE: Vibration Element
18 Unit for Maximum Condition Temperature 48 Other1 SE: Speed Element
19 P&ID Drawing Number 49 Other2 WT: Weight
20 Location in P&ID 50 Other3
21 P&ID Title 51 Other4
22 Location 52 Accessary
23 Set Point1 53 Enclosure: Protection Class (IP)
24 Set Point2 54 Cnnection Junction Box
25 Set Point3 55 Instrument Supplier
26 Set Point4 56 Connection Size to Equipment
27 Differential 57 Equipment Supplier
28 Contact Form 58 Serial Numer
29 Contact Number 59 Instrument Pressure to Bear
30 Contact Capacity 60 Remarks
61 Revision Number
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~ft¥~~Ht~.1- 2 1461765
Format Explanation
SET POINT
NO. PAGE TAG NO DESCRIPTION PURPOSE SET VALUE RESET VALUE UNIT SET AT ALARM LEVEL LIST ALARM LIST REV
1 CF101 OOM U-LIXOO 1B MKUPWTR TK B LVL Senser Abnormal DCS 2 y
2 CF101 OOMU-LIX001 B MKUP WTR TK B LVL Alarm(HIGH) 200 mm DCS 2 y y
3 CF101 OOMU-LIX001 B MKUP WTR TK B LVL Alarm(LOW) -3700 mm DCS 2 y y
4 CF101 OOMU-LIX001 B MKUP WTR TK B LVL Alarm(LOW LOW) -9500 mm DCS 2 y y
l l 13
14
1 1 l l l 8
1
10
1 11
l l
12 13
1 NO. : Item number

2 PAGE : Page number of logic diagrams or reference drawing number (see page 4 for details of reference drawing)
3 TAG NO : Tag number of the signal (If applicable)
4 DESCRIPTION : Signal description
5 PURPOSE : Purpose of the signal to be used or alarm definition
6 SETVALUE : Set value (if applicable)
7 RESET VALUE : Reset value (if applicable)
8 UNIT : Unit of set/reset value
9 SET AT : Location of set point (Eg. DCS, PLC, AVR, EHC Local etc]
10 ALARM LEVEL : Alarm level set at DCS or electrical panel (refer TSB Dwg. SPC-GCH-XIT3-0002 Alarm System Concept of Turbine Portion (Except for Fire Fighting System
11 SET POINT LIST : If signal has set point value, 'Y' is Input
12 ALARM LIST : If signal has alarm indication, 'Y' is input
13 REV : Revision number
Note: 11
-
11
for not applicable items
3 © Toshiba Corporation 2014, All Rights Reserved
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 147/765
Attachment-3
Sheet ~1~ of ~8-
SPEC: SPC-GCH-XITS-0001
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR Rev.a
PANELS AND CUBICLES Ref: QI# NWP00004 7

NWP000048
PROJECT: T JB5&6 2x1000MW ISITE: INDONESIA
PANELS AND CUBICLES

intellectual property including know-how. It shall not be disclosed to
any third party, copied, reproduced, used for unauthorized purposes
nor modified without prior written consent of Toshiba.
Toshiba Corporation
REV. 0
DATE 13-Jun-13
APPROVED BY M.Takashima
CHECKED BY M.Takashima
PREPARED BY H.Saito
First issue
DESCRIPTION
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 148/765
Attachment-3
Sheet _2_ of ~8-
PANELS AND CUBICLES SPEC: SPC-GCH-XIT5-0001

Rev.a
0. INTRODUCTION -Attention-
This specification defines the general requirements for the panels and cubicles
used in the power plant.
Further to the items stated as "later" in this specification, bidder shall mind
that these items will be specified at the revised edition.
The details will be informed at engineering stage.
1. CONSTRUCTION
1.1 Degree of Protection (as per IEC 60529 Latest version)
( 1) Outdoor Installation
D IP31, D IP42, D1P54, • Others _IP_5_5_W_ _ _ _ __
(2) Indoor Installation
• IP31, D IP41, D IP51, D Others electrical rooms
D IP31, D IP41, •1P51, D Others ......;L;;;;..;;o;...;;.c..;;.;.;al'-------
(3) Indoor Installation (Air Conditioned Room)
D1P31, D IP41, D IP51, • Others _I_P2_1_ _ _ _ _ __
1.2 Provision of key for door Handle

• Required ( One (1) Key per door)
D Not required
1.3 Panel Thickness (minimum requirement)

( 1) Outdoor Installation
• 2.0 mm, D Others _ _ _ _ _ __
(2) Indoor Installation
• 2.0 mm, D Others _ _ _ _ _ __
1.4 Design Temperature

(1) Outdoor Installation : 50 deg C
(2) Indoor Installation : 40 deg C
2. PAINTING
Later
3. INTERNAL WIRINGS
3.1 Standard
D JIS, D AWG, D UL Listed (UL _ ), D CSA Certified (CSA_ )
D Other, _ _ _ _ __
• Manufacturer's standard (Vender to specify)
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 149/765
Attachment-3
Sheet _3_ of ~8-

Rev.a
3.2 Minimum Wire Size (minimum requirement)

(1) Above 60V : • 1.25sq·mm, D Other_ _ _ __
(2) Below 60V : • 0.5 sq· mm, D Other_ _ _ __
(3) CT & VT 2ry or 3ry : • 2.0 sq· mm, D Other_ _ _ __
(4) Grounding circuit : • 5.5 sq· mm, D Other_ _ _ __
3.3 Wire Sheath Coloring

(1) CT 2ndary : D Yellow, • Manufacturer's Standard.
(2) VT 2ndary : D Yellow, • Manufacturer's Standard.
(3) DC Control : D Yellow, • Manufacturer's Standard.
(4) AC Control : D Yellow, • Manufacturer's Standard.
(5) Ground D Green , • Manufacturer's Standard.
(6) Shield Wire : D Grey , • Manufacturer's Standard.
(Note) Special cables (such as cables used in pre-assembled

units 1 module) may be of manufacturer's standard.
3.4 Wire End Marking

Wire ends shall be provided with following markings;
(1) The two ends of all cables must be allocated with unique identification numb
ers.
(2) The cable termination boxes must have nonmagnetic gland plates.
c::::=::=::::, I I
0 c::::=::=::::, I I
I
II
(
\ _ _ _ Identification numbers
EXAMPLE
(This figure shows typical application. Terminal, color tube, wire mark tube,
and etc, will be applied manufacturer's standard material.)
3.5 Polarity Color Code

(1) AC circuit, R(U) Phase : • Red, D Other
(2) AC circuit, S(V) Phase : • White, D Yellow, D Other
(3) AC circuit, T(W) Phase : • Blue, D Other
(4) AC circuit, Neutral Phase : • Black, D Other
(5) DC circuit, P Pole
(6) DC circuit, N Pole : •
• Red,
Blue,
D Other
D Other
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 150/765
Attachment-3
Sheet ~4- of ~8-

Rev.a
4. Phase Arrangement
Arrangement AC (3phase) AC (1 phase) DC
From Left U,V,W Positive &

Live & Neutral
to Right & Neutral Negative
From Top U,V,W Positive &
Live & Neutral
to Bottom & Neutral Negative
From Front U,V,W Positive &
Live & Neutral Negative
to Back & Neutral
5. NAME PLATES
5.1 Material
Shall be selected to withstand the environmental conditions where they are
installed.
Stainless steel is preferable for all condition. But for indoor location, white color
plastic or aluminum nameplate may be used and mounted on the surface of
the panel and cubicle. Instruments and internal devices of cubicles can use
plastic tape as nameplate.
5.2 Language
Shall be written in English.
5.3 Color
Block Capital and Black. Stainless steel and plastic nameplate shall be engraved.
Aluminum nameplate will employ photo-printing.
5.4 Tag No.

All internally mounted apparatuses and equipment shall be provided with
Tag No. markings.
5.5 Caution Plate

Adequate caution plates shall be provided for safe operation of the equipment,
and shall be written in English.
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 151/765
Attachment-3
Sheet _5_ of _8_

Rev.a
6. ELECTRICAL INSTRUMENT
6.1 Utility Voltage (at power source/at equipment terminal)
(1) Medium Voltage

10 kV, 50 Hz, 3phase- 3wire
3 kV, 50 Hz, 3phase - 3wire
(2) Low Voltage (Normal Supply)

380 V, 50 Hz, 3phase - 4wire
V, Hz,
(3) Low Voltage (Emergency Supply)

380 V, 50 Hz, 3phase - 4wire
- - - - - - V, _ _ _ _ Hz,
(4) Low Voltage (UPS Supply)

220 V, 50 Hz, Single phase.- 2wire
(5) DC Voltage
220 V for All DC Consumers
(6) Voltage and Frequency Variations

a) AC Normal and Emergency Supply
Voltage • ± 10%, D Others_ _ _ _ _ __
Frequency : • ± 5%, • Others_ _ _ _ _ __
b) UPS Supply
Voltage D ±1.5%, • Others ± 10.0%
Frequency : D ± 0.5%, • Others_±____;;,...5;;..;..0....;...%.;......__ __
c) DC Supply
Voltage : D ± 10%, • +10% to -15%
D Others_ _ _ __
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 152/765
Attachment-3
Sheet _6_ of ~8-
PANELS AND CUBICLES SPEC: SPC-GCH-XITS-0001

Rev.a
6.2 Instrument Transformers

(1) Voltage Transformer
Secondary Voltage (Phase to phase)
• 110V of110/ ,,f 3V, D 120V or 120/ ,,f 3V
Tertiary Voltage
D 110/3V, D 120/3V, • 190/3V
(2) Current Transformer Secondary Current

• SA, D 1A
6.3 Indication Lights

(1) CB Closed/RunningNalve Open : • Red, D Other_ __
(2) CB Open/StoppingNalve Close : • Green, D Other_ __
(3) Normal or Healthy Indication : • White, D Other_ __
(4) Alarm Indication • Amber, D Other_ __
Note: Indication lamps for valve shall be lit both open and close lamps
during intermediate position.
Note: Indicating light must be of the miniature type using LED clusters which
must be replaceable from the front of the panel without the use of tools.
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 153/765
Attachment-3
Sheet ~7- of ~8-

Rev.a
7. ACCESSORIES AND CONSUMABLES
The following accessories shall be provided.
7.1 All anchor bolts, securing plates, channel bases (embedded type
includes), etc. necessary for installation of equipment.
7.2 Terminal blocks (including 25% spare) for external cable (power, control &
grounding) connection.
7.3 Cable gland plates. Plates shall be split in halves to enable easy
mounting of glands.
Glands will be provided by others.
7.4 Consumables
• Fuses (100% of actual use)
• Lamp bulbs (100% of actual use)
• Globes of indication lamps (5% of each type)
• Touch-up paint
7.5 Others
• Space Heater c• With thermostat ( ON < 40°C ), D Without thermostat)
( AC 220Volt, SOW, 50Hz, 1 phase, 2 wire)
• For panels and cubicles installed in outdoor and non air-conditioned
indoor locations
D For panels and cubicles installed in air-conditioned indoor locations
1 1
• Internal lighting *
• Receptacles for maintenance 1* 1
<* 1 Note : Interior lighting and receptacles (where provided) shall be

of a type easily purchased in the country of this plant.
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 154/765
Attachment-3
Sheet ~8- of ~8-

Rev.a
8. SHOP TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
Each panel and cubicle shall undergo complete shop tests according to
international standards and this specification.
Shop test items and its procedure shall be submitted for approval.
The Vender is to consider that the Client, Toshiba and/or his representative
may witness any of the shop tests.
Test certificates for components and materials shall also be submitted.
The following tests shall be included as a minimum ,
• Visual and Dimensional Inspection

• Operation and Function Test
• Characteristics Measurement
• Wiring Check
• Insulation Resistance Measurement
• Withstand Voltage Test
D Heat Run Test
• Item and Number Inspection before Shipment
9. REQUIREMENT TO DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS
The following information (but not limited to) are to be included
9.1 In Outline/Foundation Drawings or Equivalent

(1) Degree of Protection (IP)
(2) Static and Dynamic Loads (Weights), Heating load under operating
(3) Foundation and Installation Details
(4) Name Plate Details (including Inscription)
(5) Paint Colors and Gloss
(6) Cable Entry and Earthing Connection Details
9.2 In Schematic/Connection Diagrams or Equivalent

(1) Wire Numbers
(2) Wire Details (including Standard, Size Color, Voltage, etc.)
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 155 1165
Attachment-3
•
General Electrical Requirements
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 1561765
Attachment-3
80.13. General Electrical Requirements

80.13.1 Voltage levels
The following voltage levels shall apply:
• 500 kV, 50 Hz connection voltage to the public EHV transmission grid

• 27 kV, 50 Hz generator rated voltage, voltage for the generator main
circuit and generator circuit breaker, depending on
manufacturer standard
• 10 kV,+ 10/-10%, 50 Hz voltage for motors equal to/bigger
than 1000 kW and for power
distribution within the plant
• 380/220 V + 10/-10%, 50 Hz standard voltage for power
supplies to small electric power
consumers and motors below
150 kW, lighting and domestic
power outlets
• 220 V DC+ 10%/-15% voltage for emergency loads of
electricity, like turbine emergency
oil pumps, circuit breaker control, etc.
• 380/220 V, + 10/-10%, 50 Hz uninterrupted voltage supplies to
loads, which require
uninterrupted infeed like DCS components,
burner control panels, VDU s, etc.
• 24 V + 10/-10%, 50 Hz for maintenance/repair work in enclosed plant
items of metal, if any.
The general arrangement of the particular voltage level for each part of the plant within the
scope of the Contract and the connections of the power supply systems can be seen from the
general single line diagram.
80.13.2 Installation conditions and protection class for electrical

operational equipment and control and monitoring equipment
If not specified otherwise the electrical operational equipment must be designed to meet
protection classes stated below.
Switchgear, housings for electrical equipment and electrical equipment itself must be
designed at least to:
• Class IP 21 if located in air-conditioned area
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 151 1165
Attachment-3
• Class IP 31 if located indoors (electrical rooms) but also in non-air-conditioned/ventilated

areas
• Class IP 54 if located indoors but in non-air-conditioned/ventilated areas
• Class IP 55W with additional measures if located outdoors in accordance with IEC 60529
or equivalent (general protection requirements for enclosures). The additional measures
shall consist of sunshades, protection covers against splashing water and sand, additional
sealing's, special acid resistive coating etc., depending upon the particular site conditions.
Electrical operational equipment which must be installed in areas exposed to danger from
explosions must have the required explosion-proof design appropriate to the flash-point
group classification of the explosive mixture as laid down in IEC 60079, IEC 61241 and
VDE 0170/0171 (EN 50014 to EN 50020). Attention must be paid to IEC 60079, IEC 61241
and VDE O165 or equivalent with respect to the use of electrical operational equipment in
workshops and storage premises exposed to the risk of explosions.
In all rooms and areas where the local and operational conditions and surroundings can lead
to the accumulation of gases, vapors, mists or dusts which, in combination with air, form
explosive mixtures, the operational equipment and installations to be used in these
circumstances must be of explosion-proof design. All operational equipment must be
designed to comply with the class of protection dictated by the ignitable mixture (e.g.
compression-proof casing, external ventilation, inherent safety, etc.).
Electrical operational equipment should be located outside rather than inside buildings or
other structures exposed to the risk of explosion. Whenever operational equipment has to be
installed within areas liable to the risk of explosion, protection against explosion must, in
general, be applied wherever explosive mixtures can arise. In this connection, the ignition of
explosive mixtures must be reliably prevented by adopting the correct choice of design and
construction of the operational equipment and the incorporation of supplementary
safeguards where applicable.
Electrical, chemical, thermal and mechanical influences must on no account impair, in any
way, the protection afforded against explosion. In particular the high ambient temperatures
and the influence of nearby heat sources at the installation point must be taken fully into
account.
B0.13.JProtective measures, earthing and lightning protection
In view of the potential dangers of electrical power, the following measures are required for
the protection of life, equipment and materials. Basically, all 'live' parts, i.e. all parts of
electrical, operational equipment at an electrical potential above or below earth potential
when in operation, and with a rated voltage over 24 V, must be insulated or covered so that
they cannot be touched accidentally.
In addition, measures must be taken by each Lot to prevent the occurrence or persistence of
excessively high contact potentials on conductive parts of electrical operational equipment
(frames etc.) brought about by faults in insulation respectively.
For installations up to 1000 V, voltages over 50 V are considered to be excessive contact

voltages. Within enclosed electrical installations, with voltages over 1000 V, the contact
potential shall be according to the values given in VDE O101 (HD63 7S 1, Power installations
exceeding AC lkV): enclosure C.
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 15 s1 165
Attachment-3
The following rules and regulations are to be observed in carrying out protective measures
and in earthing procedure:
IEC 60079 and 60364 for installations up to 1000 V,
VDE 0101 (HD 637 SI) for installations above 1000 V.
In areas exposed to the hazard of explosion, the protective measures outlined in IEC 60079
and IEC 61241 are to be adhered to in the erection and installation of electrical plant and
equipment.
B0.13.4Protective measures for installations up to 1000 V
Protection against direct contact

All 'live' parts of electrical operational equipment that can be reached by hand must be
protected against direct contact either by means of insulation or through constructional
design, position or arrangement, or by means of special devices. If, in the case of enclosed
switchgear or control cabinets, access is required in the course of normal operation (e.g. for
replacing fuses), protection against direct contact must still be ensured when the switchgear
or control cabinet has been opened up.
Protective insulation
Protective insulation is to be provided by means of additional insulation over and above the
insulation provided for operational purposes. This measure must prevent the occurrence of a
dangerous contact potential.
Use of low voltages as a safety measure, if applicable

This safeguard applies to all equipment, which is required to operate in metal enclosures,
boilers, tanks etc. The operational voltage of lighting equipment must not exceed 24 V AC.
Each Lot shall provide 24 V isolating low voltage transformer for the purpose of lighting for
maintenance and repair work inside metal enclosures. A separate 24 V system shall not be
provided.
Use of Isolating transformers

Isolating transformers shall be provided by each Lot for the purpose of protective voltage
supply of tools for maintenance and repair work inside metal enclosures.
Low Voltage Network

LV network for power supply of consumers shall be ofIT type, i.e. the LV neutral of the
transformer shall be isolated, therefore delta/delta winding transformer shall be used for LV
power supply. The LV networks shall be provided with continuous monitoring for ground
faults. The system shall include an automated ground fault location solution for the
individual outgoing feeders. Fault detection and location shall occur while the system stays
online. Remote communication to the DCS shall ensure immediate notification when a fault
occurs and indicate the fault feeder.
For lighting and small power LV network shall be of the TN type, i.e. the LV neutrals of the
station service transformers are earthed directly. For Lighting and small power a transformer
with neutral connection shall be provided.
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 159 1165
Attachment-3
Neutralization (protective multiple earthing) is intended to prevent the persistence of an

excessively high contact potential on conductive parts of the installation which do not form
part of the actual operating circuit.
The LV system for symmetrically as well as unsymmetrical connected power consumers

shall generally be of the TN-S type, i.e. a five wire system. The separation ofN and PE shall
be carried out at the feeding transformer. Because of the clear demarcation between the
neutral conductor N, carrying operational current, and the protective earthing conductor PE,
which - under non-fault conditions - carries no current, NO connection between either N
and PE is permissible beyond the point of separation into PE and N.
The neutral conductor is to be insulated in the same manner as the phase conductors. The
use of constructional parts of the switchgear as a neutral conductor is not permitted.
B0.13.5Protective measures for installations over 1000 V
Protection against contact

At least the following measures are to be taken for all parts that are 'live' when in operation:
• Outside of closed electrical operating areas
• complete protection from all sides against contact, degree of protection shall be at least
IP23D according to IEC 61330.
• protective devices may only be removed by means of tools
• Inside of closed electrical operating areas
• protection against contact with 'live' parts within reach of personnel
• protection against accidental contact outside the reach of personnel.
The above-mentioned measures for protection against contact are also to be applied to 'dead'
parts of the plant where, in the case of a fault, a dangerous contact potential might arise,
however, where the parts must not be connected to the protective earthing system for
operational reasons.
Protection against contact voltages

Protective earthing is to be used as a safeguard against excessively high contact potentials
for conductive parts of the installation, which do not form part of the operational circuit.
Here, all normally 'dead' parts equipment and apparatus shall be earthed if it is possible for
them to come into contact with 'live' parts as a result of faults due to the occurrence of
surface leakage paths, arcs or direct connections to a 'live' part of the equipment.
In considering the dimensioning of the protective earthing system, the thermal loading and
voltages on the earthing equipment are decisive factors and these should be based on the
maximum possible earthing current, which can arise.
B0.13.6Earthing and lightning protection
80.13.6.1 Earthing and potential equalization system
The earthing system and potential equalization shall comply with the following standards:
• EN50522 (VDE 0101-2)
• IEC 60364-4-41, IEC 60364-5-54
• IEC 61643EN 50310
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 160 1165
Attachment-3
• VDE 0845, Part 1.
For earthing, protective earthing, functional earthing, potential equalization and lightning
protection-potential equalization, a common system shall be established.
Within all electrical rooms, transformer boxes and technical process areas and
buildings/rooms internal earthing rings shall be installed. These shall be linked by way of
connection tags to the foundation ground and outdoor earthing system. Additionally the
internal earthing rings shall be connected to each other to form a meshed earthing grid.
No framework parts or other structural components shall be used for the earthing bus.
All system and plant components that are to be grounded as well as electrical components,
like protection and control cubicles, subdistribution boards, control systems, motors and
transformers, shall be connected to the ground bus.
All steel structures within a welded Section shall be connected to the main earthing system.
At pipelines for flammable liquids or gases, earthing tags shall be provided at each flange.
All bolted flanges shall be bridged using a flexible braided copper conductor. Each pipe
shall be connected at least once to the main earthing system.
Tanks and vessels containing flammable liquids or gas shall be earthed by a connection to
the earthing grid or by bonding to earthed metal structures.
The earthing installations shall be designed and constructed in accordance with approved
standards.
Generally, underneath the power station and switchgear buildings an earthing grid of
stranded copper conductor shall be installed. Lot 1 must choose the size of the stranded
copper conductor and the size of mesh according to the maximum occurring earth currents.
The size of the stranded copper conductors used must be uniform throughout the area under
Contract as far as possible.
Inside the power station buildings encircling, galvanized steel strips must be installed on the
walls. From the inner earthing ring the connections to the switchgear, high voltage motors,
cable trays, vertical cable runs, steelwork, etc. are to be made using bare plain copper
conductor. All the electrical equipment, frames and mechanical apparatus must be fitted
with earthing screws and studs.
The copper conductors can be laid and fixed on the cable trays and vertical runs for AC
power cables. Where this is not possible, earthing conductor supports are to be provided.
The earthing rings in the power station buildings (switchgear, turbine hall, water treatment,
etc.) are to be connected to one another.
The cable trays and vertical runs are to be connected to a separate earthing conductor at
intervals of 20 m max. in such a way as to give good connection. This earthing conductor
must likewise be connected to the earthing ring.
At a maximum distance of 20 m the inside earthing ring of the buildings must be connected
with the outdoor earthing system. These connections must be provided with flexible PVC
single-core cables which are to be laid through the concrete walls above the ground water
level.
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 161 1165
Attachment-3
In buildings without a basement the internal earthing ring is to be connected to the outer
earthing ring at maximum intervals of 20 m.
The crossing-point connections of the earthing cables underneath the buildings and outside
the buildings must be made by compression connectors. Connections by Cadweld system
shall also be acceptable. All other earthing conductor connections and junctions must be
made in the same way to ensure secure, lasting connections having good contact.
In the case of installations without an earthing ring above ground (e.g. boilers), all parts to
be earthed are to be connected to the earthing ring which must be laid 1 m away from the
foundations at a depth of 0. 7 m.
The earthing installations of all the power station buildings must be interconnected with
stranded copper cables. The earthing system of unit 5 and 6 shall be interconnected to the
existing earthing system of units 1 to 4 in order to generate a global earthing system as
called for in EN 50522.
The lighting columns of the external lighting system are to be connected with separate
copper conductors to the earthing grid.
The generator housing is to be connected at two points to the earthing ring according to the
requirements.
The star points on the 500 kV side of the generator transformers must be connected to the
central earthing installation where they are earthed directly. Also, the protective and neutral
conductors to the electrical apparatus, the frames of the latter and the lightning installations
for all the buildings, stacks, fuel depots, etc. must be connected to the central earthing
installation
Foundation earthing
All buildings, including those with a steel skeleton, shall be equipped with foundation
earthing. The foundation earthing shall be installed in addition to reinforcement that is
likewise connected together with braided conductors.
The foundation earthing shall be used in connection with the other earthing systems like
protective, operational, functional and lightning protection earthing, and shall be designed in
accordance with JIS, DIN 18014 "Foundation earthing" or equivalent.
In the case of pile foundations, earthing rods of the same length as the piles shall be installed
along with the foundation piles at intervals of around 10 m and connected at around every 2
m to the pile reinforcement using braided conductors. The earthing rods shall project beyond
the top of the piles and then be connected to the earthing system of the ring foundation.
In addition to the closed ring of the foundation earthing system, a net of mesh size around
10 x 20 m shall be embedded in the bottommost concrete layer. The foundation earthing
shall be connected to the reinforcement by a braided conductor at intervals of about 2 m.
At intervals not exceeding 20 m, and with at least two in every room, connection tags from
the foundation earthing shall be foreseen for connecting the internal earthing ring.
Connection tags shall likewise be foreseen for connection to the external earthing system
and to the lightning rods. Optionally, lighting rods can be connected to the external ring
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 162 1165
Attachment-3
ground, with connections then made from this ring ground to the foundation ground by way
of the internal earthing ring at intervals not exceeding 20 m.
Earthing material
Stranded copper conductor is to be used as earth conductor for laying in the ground.
Stranded copper conductors shall be used for the internal earthing ring inside the buildings,
on cable trays and for the earthing of HV motors, steel frames, etc.
Screening
The measures described in the following serve for screening and potential control and for
lessening overvoltage's.
For reinforced concrete buildings, at each corner of the building including the bottom slab,
an additional mesh of re bars, of approximate mesh size 10 x 10 m, shall be provided at the
topmost reinforcement. The meshes shall be produced by welding. This additional
reinforcement, connected so that it is electrically conducting, may be dispensed with if it is
ensured that the existing reinforcement is so connected by welding at appropriate points that
it is electrically conducting.
At intervals corresponding to the mesh width, earthing wires from the reinforcement shall be
incorporated into the building pillars, rising from the foundations to the roof, and so welded
that they are continuous. These earthing wires shall terminate at the roof parapet. The
meshes and earthing wires shall be welded to each other.
For steel skeleton buildings, equivalent measures shall be taken. Framework Sections shall
be welded to make up a defined, electrically conducting connection or shall be bolted
together so that they are electrically conducting.
Metal fa~ades and coverings shall be preferred over non-conducting materials and at their
topmost and bottommost points shall be connected at an adequate frequency to the lightning
protection system.
Reinforcement of cable ducts of reinforced concrete shall be connected to parallel running

earthing cables. These earthing cables shall be connected to the screen of the building
earthing system or to the foundation earthing system.
B0.13.7 Lightning protection
All buildings and structures shall be equipped with a lightning protection system (LPS). LPS
protection level I according to IEC 61024-1 shall be considered.
The building lightning protection system is to be executed to, among other standards,
according to IEC 62305 and IEC 61024 and alongside protection of human life, shall
prevent damage not only to buildings, but also to electrical and electronic installations.
All buildings and structures are to be protected against lightning strikes by means of
lightning collectors and conductors. The collectors are to be arranged in such a way that, as
far as possible they collect all lightning strokes without these directly striking the parts to be
protected. This condition is considered to have been fulfilled if no point on the roof surface
is more than 5 m away from a collector. Collector lines suffice as collectors, e.g. along the
ridge and at gables and eaves.
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 1631765
Attachment-3
Ridge conductors must be taken right to the end of the ridge. Moreover roof conductors
should run as natural continuations of all main conductors. Conductors at the gable
extremities or eaves must be laid in the closest possible proximity thereto. In the case of
steel-framed structures the ridge conductors must be connected to the roof supporting
structure at least every 20 m. Lower level annexes are also to be provided with collectors.
Roof lines and other conductors are to be laid and fixed in such a way that they can
withstand the stresses expected from storms, lightning strokes, roof work etc.
One main conductor between the lightning collectors mounted on the top of the building and
the potential grading ring laid in the ground is to be provided every 20 m of the before-
mentioned lightning collector. The max. spacing between conductor fixings may not exceed
1 m for horizontal runs and 1.2 m for vertical runs.
All main and secondary conductors which are connected to an earthing conductor must be
provided with an accessible isolating point in order to be able to measure the earth resistance.
All isolating points must be numbered consecutively in the drawings and at the buildings.
Nuts and bolts at isolating or other points, which are to remain detachable, must be made of
copper-nickel-silicon-bronze.
All main and secondary conductors are to be connected, using compression connectors, to
the earthing ring running around the buildings and tanks.
The connection points are to be protected against corrosion by wrappings or bitumen.
Lightning protection material

In case of buildings with steel structures and sheet steel cladding, the steel columns and the
sheet steel cladding shall be used as lightning conductor. In case of buildings with concrete
structure, galvanized round steel embedded in the concrete columns shall be used as
lightning conductor. In case of masonry buildings, external lightning conductors made of
copper or stainless steel shall be used. Lightning arrestors (arrestor tips and roof conductors)
or Lightning air terminal shall also be made of copper or stainless steel rods. The conductor
supports of the lightning protection system must be copper or bronze. Nuts and bolts at
isolating or other points which are to remain detachable must be made of copper-nickel-
silicon-bronze.
80.13.8 Technical conditions for motors
80.13.8.1 General
The design of equipment shall ensure that all operating and maintenance activities can be
performed safely and conveniently.
Medium and low voltage motors shall be suitable for driven equipment. In general, motor
shall be 3 phase, squirrel cage, induction type, with F class insulation and B class
temperature rise, an ambient temperature of 40°C, suitable for direct-on-line starting method,
location in non-hazardous and non-seismic area with an altitude not greater than 1000m, and
a continuous duty with a service factor of 1. 0 in accordance with IEC 60034 standards or
equivalent.
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 1641765
Attachment-3
80.13.9 Medium voltage motors
80.13.9.1 Ratings
Rating Continuous rating

Voltage rating AC Motors
Above 150 kW to 1000 kW : 3kV
Above 1000 kW lOkV
Continuous delivery and rated power at voltage range between 90% and 110% of
the rated voltage at the rated frequency within the thermal limits of insulation class
B (F class insulation and B class temperature rise).
3 Phase, 3 Wires
Phase System AC Motor
Frequency (AC Motor) 50Hz
80.13.9.2 Starting
Starting Method
AC Motor Direct-on-line (DOL) starting method
Minimum starting voltage 80% of the rated voltage
Starting current Max. 550% of the rated current
(The voltage drop at direct-on-line starting shall not exceed 12% at the motor
terminal. Actual starting current shall be limited to the suitable values for acceptable
voltage drop level)
Consecutive Numbers of
Motor Starting
At Cold Condition 2 times
At Hot Condition 1 time
80.13.9.3 Insulation Class and Temperature Rise
Ambient Temperature 40 degree C

Insulation class Class F
Temperature rise As per the requirement of Class B Insulation
80.13.9.4 Enclosure Type
Degree of protection (motor

and terminal box)
Indoor motor IP44 with terminal box IP54
Outdoor motor IP54
80.13.9.5 Connections, star-point terminal boxes etc.
All motors must have the star-point connection brought out separately to terminals.
For all motors with a rating of 2000 kW or above a differential relay for winding protection
shall be provided and installed in the associated switch-gear. In that case the star-point
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 1651765
Attachment-3
connection shall be brought out separately to terminals. The differential current

transformers are to be designed to class 5 P 10 with a rating matched to the protection system.
The CT's shall be accommodated in the star-point terminal box.
80.13.9.6 Bearings
Motors with ratings below 2000 kW shall be provided with roller bearings and with a
lubricator and lubricant supply regulator fitted with solid brass cages, that can be refilled
while the machine is running.
Large motors with rated outputs greater than 2000 kW shall be fitted, as far as possible, with
sleeve bearings. Motors with sleeve bearings and smaller than 4000 kW shall preferably be
provided with a constant level gravity fed type oil lubrication system with reservoir and oil
breather, whereas for larger motors oil supply to the bearings must be ensured by means of
an lubrication oil pump.
Motors with slave bearings shall have following maintenance intervals, as a minimum:
gravity fed type: 8000 hours

lubrication oil pump type: 2000 hours.
The bearings of the motors must be free from stray bearing currents.
Coupling
The motor shaft halves of the couplings, finish-bored, balanced, and complete with key
ways are to be drawn on to the motor shaft and balanced out together with the rotor.
Cooling
Air cooling for the motors is the preferred method. Where water-cooling is applied,
conditioned and treated, water shall be used.
Motor air exchanger circuits should be suitable for the prevailing atmospheric conditions, i.e.
ambient temperature, content of humidity and salt in the air, etc. are to be considered.
Running quality
The running quality must be within the classification of "Class C, Zone A" according to the
ISO 10816-1 or equivalent, i.e. the vibration velocity must be not greater than 1.8 mm/s
(rms).
Reverse speed
If reverse running can occur in the case of equipment driven by a motor (e.g. cooling water
pump), the motor must be designed for maximum possible reverse speed.
A reverse rotation alarm and starting-circuit interlock are to be provided to ensure that the
equipment cannot be started while running in reverse.
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 1661765
Attachment-3
80.13.10 Low voltage motors
80.13.10.1 Ratings

Voltage rating
AC Motors up to 150 kW 380 V AC
DC Motor - Voltage rating 220V DC
B.
Phase System
AC Motor 3Phase, 3Wires
DC Motor 2wires
80.13.10.2 Starting
Starting Method
voltage drop level)
DC Motor Current limiting starting method
Starting current Max. 350%ofthe rated current
Motor Starting
80.13.10.3 Insulation class and temperature rise

80.13.10.4 Enclosure type

and terminal box)
Indoor motor IP44
Outdoor motor IP54
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 161 1165
Attachment-3
80.13.11 Bearings
All bearings for motors except sealed ball bearing shall be accessible for inspection,
maintenance and replacement.
The type of bearing such as sleeve, roller or ball shall be applied as per motor
manufacturer's standard, which shall be of proven design and well experienced.
Motors that have a forced oil lubrication system shall have oil rings that provide for a short
time operation without the lubrication system in operation.
To prevent shaft-circulating currents, one or both bearings shall be insulated from motor
frame.
Drainage plug shall be provided to discharge old grease when refilling.
80.13.12 Terminal arrangement
Terminal box shall be made of cast iron or sheet steel, suitable to accommodate termination
of motor lead and located on the motor appropriately. Cable connection to the terminal shall
be stud type unless otherwise specified.
Terminal housing shall have the IP degree equal to or exceeding the motor's IP degree.
Cable entry shall be explosion-proof packing type if explosion- proof enclosure is required.
Motor shall be provided with the earthing terminals of sufficient size and conveniently
located on the motor frame and inside of the terminal box.
80.13.13 Actuator drives
As far as applicable the above "Technical conditions for low voltage motors" shall apply.
In addition actuators for valves, dampers etc. are to be fitted with socket and plug ofwell-
established make to IEC 60309 or equivalent for the power cable connection, or cables are
to be connected to terminal block through cable gland.
For the control cable connection separate socket and plug shall be provided, or cables are to
be connected to terminal block through cable gland.
Self-cooling at respective ambient temperature conditions is mandatory. Fan cooling is not

accepted.
80.13.14 Frequency converters
General
On the basis of the requirements of the driven equipment, Lot 1,2,3 and 4 shall design,
supply, install and commission a complete, fully operative, variable-speed converter drive
(frequency converter and motor, for motors up to 400 kW, for motors 400 kW and above in
addition to the converter a converter transformer shall be provided).
Converters made by reputable manufacturers are to be used.
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 1681765
Attachment-3
Technical requirements
The design of the converter (maximum continuous rating) is to be based on the maximum
shaft output required by the equipment assembly.
Maintenance work and cable connections must always be possible from the front of the
converter cubicles.
The terminals on the input and output sides are to be rated such that parallel cables can be
connected.
The converter allows the speed of three-phase asynchronous motors to be adjusted steplessly.
It must be fully equipped for remote control and monitoring in the control room.
An on-load dis connector and a power contactor are to be provided at the power input of the
converter.
For motors with a rating up to 400 kW the frequency converter shall be designed in at least a
six-pulse circuit on both the line and motor sides.
Frequency converters using Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs) should preferably be
provided on both the line and the motor sides.
For motors with a rating above 400 kW the converter should preferably be designed in a 12
pulse circuit supplied via converter transformer.
The converter is to be disconnected if the voltage drops to less than 80% of the rated voltage
or if one or more phases of the line voltages are missed. When the line voltage is restored,
the converter is to be connected again automatically, providing the break in the power
supply did not last longer preferably than 5 seconds. The plant check back signals (floating
change-over contacts) must continue to be received during this period, while alarms are to
be suppressed. It must be possible for the converter to be connected at any coasting-down
drive speed and with in-phase voltages. The specified frequency set point is to be resumed
automatically.
If the voltage reduction or the power failure lasts for a long time, the drive must remain
switched off~ in this case, it must subsequently only be possible to switch it on again either
manually or by means of the higher order control.
The converters are to be designed for 10% more than the maximum power output required
by the system. The purpose of regulating the converter is to ensure that the indirect current
and voltage remain within the permissible limits during all control processes. This should
apply both when the motor is started up and when the speed is adjusted during operation.
Forced ventilated converters are to be equipped with redundant fans (two double fans).
Flow monitors (not air vanes) are to be used to monitor the fans. Positive control is to be
provided for fan drives with a master drive.
Converter transformers
The converter transformers for supplying the frequency converters are to be designed and
the auxiliary equipment to be provided in accordance with IEC 60076-11.
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 1691765
Attachment-3
The transformers are to take the form of cast-resin transformers for indoor installation and
are to be installed in protective casings made of sheet steel, cooling method AN, type of
protection IP 21.
The transformer output shall correspond to the power requirement of the frequency
converters.
It should be possible to vary the high-voltage side within a range of 2 x ± 2. 5%, by means of
reversible clamp connectors.
The connections on the high-voltage side have to be carried out using cables.
Busbar connections with short-circuit protection are to be provided to the current converters
on the low-voltage side.
Suitable earthing studs are to be provided for maintenance purposes (earthing and short-
circuiting).
All accessories - especially sensors and terminal connections - must be arranged so that they
are readily accessible.
The windings must be flame-retardant and self-extinguishing. The cast-resin mixture must
not contain any flame-inhibiting additives which develop toxic vapors or gases either under
the influence of secondary fires or in the electric arc. A report on this subject has to be
enclosed with the Bid.
Moisture-proof design:
It must not be necessary to dry the winding after shut-off periods. The protection against
voltage surges and short circuits, the noise levels and the freedom from partial discharges up
to twice the rated voltage must be verified by means of type tests.
The windings are to be protected by means of a temperature monitoring system, comprising

the following minimum components:
• 3 PTC resistors (1 for each phase)
• 1 tripping unit with isolated change-over contacts for remote signaling (alarms).
Instrumentation and control

The instrumentation is subdivided into a local Section in the converter cubicle and into a
"remote" Section in the control room. All the measures necessary to enable the drive to be
remote-controlled and remote-monitored must be implemented, i.e. all the 24 V DC
interposing relays which are required to convert the on/off commands from the
instrumentation and control system, signal transducers, etc.
A suitable automatic compensation facility is to be provided, to ensure that the transfer

between LOCAL mode and REMOTE mode is bumpless in both directions. The emergency
shutdown function of the equipment must act on the converter directly, regardless of
whether 'local' or 'remote' mode is set.
Local instrumentation and control

The following are to be provided as a minimum in the converter cubicle:
Controls
• Local/remote converter control (key-operated switch)
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 110 1165
Attachment-3
• "On" and "off' converter controls

• Set point adjuster (speed)
• Incoming master switch, "on-off'
• All the controls necessary for internal converter settings and adjustments, as specified by
the manufacturer
Indications, signals, monitoring

• Line voltage indicator
• Output frequency
• Output current
• Operating status signals, in accordance with the specifications of the instrumentation and
control supplier, though at least "Ready", "Drive running" and "Zero and set speed
reached"
• Motor temperature monitor - alarm Motor temperature monitor - shut-down
• Signals concerning internal operating states of the converter, in accordance with the
manufacturer's standards, though at least:
• Overtemperature
• Line voltage monitoring
• Line undervoltage
• Overcurrent
• Control voltage monitoring
• Converter protection
• Fan monitoring
• Incoming air temperature
• Motor feeder interruption
• Motor feeder short circuit
• Earth fault
• Motor blocked
• Other faults.
Remote control and remote indications

• Account must be taken of the following types of remote control and indication in the
control room, and suitable interposing relays, transducers and switchgears are to be
provided in the cubicle:
• Converter "on/off' and "local/remote"
• Set point adjuster for speed (4 - 20 mA)
• Remote indication for speed as 4 - 20 mA standard signal
• Motor current as 4 - 20 mA standard signal
• Combined fault
• Remote indication of the set speed potentiometer as a 4 - 20 mA standard signal
• Other controls and indications.
All event signals and check back signals must be made available on the terminal strip as
floating change-over contacts.
System perturbation
The perturbation caused by the voltage harmonics in the feeding three-phase system, which
are a result of the converter drives, must not exceed the specified limit values, i.e. 5% for the
5th harmonic voltage, 4% for the 7th and 2% for each of the 11th and 13th. IEC 61000 and
EN 50160 are to be considered in this connection. The system perturbations are to be curbed
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 111 1165
Attachment-3
by means of suitable measures if necessary. each Lot is responsible for demonstrating

conformance with the above-mentioned limit values.
80.13.15 Cable and cable trays
80.13.15.1 Cable laying and routing requirements
The Lot Contractor responsible for cable routing and laying has to observe a strict unit
separation. The cables must be routed in different cable channels or, as the minimum
requirement, on different cable trays, so that in case of a fire or any accident in a cable
channel or tray two units shall not be affected.
On vertical cable risers, walls and ceilings the cables must be secured with corrosion-
resistant cable clips (e.g. cable clamps with cable protecting cable sleeves).
Cable risers near gangways or in electrical rooms that are exposed to possible mechanical
damage are to be protected up to 1 meter from ground by suitable metal cover.
Tray cover shall be provided on highest cable trays where damage is likely to occur due to
objects fallen.
All holes in ceilings, floors and wall made for cable routing must be sealed fire-resistant,
when the cables have been laid. This also applies to switchgear panels and cubicles,
passages between cable ducts, at vertical risers etc. As there is an increased danger of fire
during the construction period the holes shall be fire-resistant sealed at that stage already.
This applies especially to vertical runs.
When the cables are no longer supported on cable trays or risers etc. the power, DC and
instrument transformer cables must generally be run singly in plastic conduit, at ambient
temperatures above 60 °C in galvanized steel conduit. With lighting cables, measuring and
control cables and telephone cables, several similar cables can be run in one conduit.
Surface-mounted conduits must be secured every 1.5 m.
The control and communication cables must be laid sufficiently apart from the power cables
so that no interference shall occur and the transmission of fault signals is excluded. For this
purpose the following minimum separations are to be observed:
• 300 mm between low voltage power cables and measuring and control cables at voltages
of 60 V and below,
• 300 mm between power cables and measuring and control cables at voltages above 60 V,
• 600 mm between medium voltage power cables and measuring and control cables at
voltages of 60 V and below.
The laying of cables outside of buildings should be preferably on cable bridges that
preferably are to be naturally ventilated.
If the cables are laid in the ground, after excavating the trench a layer of sand must be
introduced. On the sand the cables are laid separately from each other according to voltage
systems. The cables must be laid at a depth of 0.8 mat least. The trench is filled with sand
and covered with concrete covers or bricks. The thermal resistance of the backfilling shall
not exceed 150 Kcm/W. A ground temperature of 25 °C to 40 °C according to the project
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 112 1165
Attachment-3
requirements has to be considered. Where cables have to pass under streets cable duct blocks
with a suitable bore(s) should be provided. The marking of cable routes by cable warning
tapes must be provided.
When laying the cables on cable trays, cable risers, cable channels, etc. and when choosing
the size of the cables care must be taken that sufficient ventilation is available and that there
is no possibility of thermal overheating, or strain on the cables.
Cables that must move with connected apparatus owing to thermal expansion (e.g. boilers)
must be provided in a flexible form or they must have sufficient slack at the location.
All the ends of the cables must be prepared according to the particular requirements of the
manufacturers and connected to existing terminal strips, terminal screws, apparatus
terminals, etc.
The necessary cable sealing ends and the stripped and fanned-out cable ends, where no
sealing ends are provided, must be fixed to the appropriate supporting structures.
80.13.16 General Cable construction requirements
The medium and low voltage cables shall be plastic-insulated copper cables. For cables that
are exposed to ambient temperatures above 60 °C, teflon or silicone cables are to be
provided.
The cables must be suitable for laying indoors, in the open (director indirect sunlight), in
ducts, on trays, in the ground and in water. The cables must be resistant to solar radiation,
the effect of oil, seawater and bacterial action,. Outer sheaths are to be manufactured from
non-combustible or flame retardant material in accordance with IEC 60332-3 cat. C.
Cables shall be armoured if directly buried. Non-armoured cables shall be used if installed in
conduits, cable trays or underground cable trenches.
All cables must be provided at both ends with identification in the form of numbered labels
corresponding to the coding system. The individual cores shall be numbered or identified by
color-coding.
The cables must be laid to ensure that they can be replaced or renewed in a simple manner.
80.13.17 Medium voltage (MV) power cables
The design of the MV cables shall be screened, stranded, single-core or three-core cables
preferably with XLPE insulation. Three-core cables shall be designed with individually
screened cores.
The MV power cables must be designed for the thermal and short-circuit characteristics of
the electrical systems, taking into consideration a actual short circuit duration of the actual
operation time of protection relay.
The cables must be terminated and connected to the indoor metal-clad switchgear or the
sealing ends are installed in cable connection hoods mounted on the power transformers.
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 113 1165
Attachment-3
In the event of outage of the air-conditioning plants of the switchgear buildings the internal
and external conditions shall become the same. Therefore, sealing ends are to be used which
shall be suitable for the maximum conditions at site.
80.13.18 Low voltage (LV) power cables
The low voltage power cables shall be standard single and multi-core cables with copper
conductor and PVC or XLPE insulation.
To ensure the elimination of excessive contact potentials on any object, effective earthing
must be carried out as a safety measure and suitable 3-core, 4-core and 5-core low voltage
power cables must be provided. The minimum conductor cross-Section of the low voltage
power cables is 2.5 mm2. If 3 1/2-core cables are used, the reduced conductor for protective
earth (PE) must have a cross-Section of at least 16 mm2.
Depending on the site conditions the DC cables must be single-core, 2-core or 4-core.
Between batteries or rectifiers and the DC switchgear single-core power cables should in
general be used.
The L V power cables must be designed for the dynamic and thermal characteristics of the
electrical system and for continuous operation.
80.13.19 Current carrying capacity of power cables
The ratings for continuous loading of the cables shall be calculated according to the relevant
IEC regulations. each Lot must submit corresponding tabulations for all cables to be used
respectively. The maximum voltage drop under normal conditions shall not exceed 2.5% for
MV cables and 5. 0% for L V cables
80.13.20 Measuring and control cables above 60 V/ instrument

transformer cables
For voltages above 60 V the cables must have PVC insulation and a mini-mum conductor
cross-Section of 1. 5 mm2 .
For instrument transformer cables inside buildings the minimum conductor cross-Section
must be 2.5 mm2 .
Instrument transformer cables leading to outlying buildings must have a minimum size of
4mm2 .
The maximum voltage drop shall not exceed 2%.
80.13.21 Measuring and control cables below 60 V
For voltages up to 60 V, measuring and control cables shall have stranded or solid copper
conductors of minimum 0.8 mm diameter. Multi-pair control cables with paired lay-up of
the leads and lay-up of the pairs themselves shall be used.
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 114 1165
Attachment-3
Wherever necessary, e.g. for all cables leading outside the relay rooms and/or control rooms,
the control cables shall have a non-shield (digital circuit) or overall screen (analog circuit :
Al-foil or Cu-foil).
Cables must generally have appropriate electrical protection against inductive/resistive

influences and lightning.
The required compensating wires for temperature measurements must be at least 1.5 mm2 .
The individual cores of the multi-pair control cables shall be identified by numbers or a
color coding system.
80.13.22 Cable supporting structures
Construction requirements
Basically, pre-fabricated cable trays, cable risers, hanger rods, screws, clamps and all fixing
material of corrosion-resistant finish, hot-dip galvanized, shall be used. If in certain Sections
the use of trays and risers is not possible, cable racks are to be provided in such places.
These shall be made of corrosion-resistant, steel angle Sections, hot dip galvanized.
The steel angles must be cut to size on site and exposed cut surfaces must be suitably treated
on the spot to prevent corrosion before being fitted. The minimum requirement for this
treatment is the application of an anti-corrosion layer of zinc coating.
All cable tray T-junctions, cross-overs, vertical and other shelving, bends, etc. must consist
of pre-fabricated tray elements so that crushing of the cables at these transition points is
avoided.
The cables laid on the trays must be carefully arranged and ordered. Sun-shade which
combine with tray cover made of the material as described for the cable tray equipment shall
be provided on the top layer of cable tray Sections that are located outside buildings and
exposed to the sunlight. Proper Clamping arrangement shall be considered for the covers of
cable tray installed outdoor, considering the wind speed in the plant area.
Generally trays and risers must be installed in such a way that in accessible manways an
escape route at least 800 mm wide by 1950 mm high is available for the personnel.
However at several locations where keeping the specified space is very difficult such as in
cable trench under switchgear room, ladder and manhole penetrating floor with cover escape
route shall be provide at a smaller but maximum practicable size.
For safety reasons the lower parts of the hanger rods and all other exposed parts in manways
and escape routes must be fitted with plastic covers.
For the minimum safety of personnel, appropriate safety goods such as hazard indication
tape shall be provided for exposed parts of cable tray support systems at escape routes.
For both indoor and outdoor installations hot dip galvanized material with an average
coating thickness according to JIS, ASTM Al23 or EN ISO 1461 is to be used.(i.e., under
2.0mm thickness: 47microns, under 3.2mm thickness: 65microns).
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 115 1165
Attachment-3
The cable trays must be designed to ensure that there is 5% spare space on all trays when
commissioning and handing-over is complete.
The fixing materials for the cable trays and risers must be corrosion-resistant or at least be
hot-dip galvanized. The rods, brackets and risers must be fitted with appropriate support
brackets to be fixed to anchor rails or fixed by dowels and screws in walls and ceilings.
Welding to steel structures and the welding together of hot-dip galvanized cable-laying
accessories is not permitted.
After completion of the cable-laying work the maximum deflection of the cable trays shall
not exceed 2.5 mm per 1.5 m (specified distance between two hanger rods).
B0.13.23 EMC measures
All EMC measures shall ensure that during subsequent operation, no impermissible
malfunctions or damage to equipment occurs due to violating electromagnetic compatibility.
The description of the measures is not be limited to this chapter, but also forms a part of
other chapters, in particular "Protective measures", "earthing and lightning protection"
and "Cabling".
The EMC requirements are set out in the following.
Under consideration of the conditions and constraints, the equipment used shall emit the
lowest interference signals and exhibit the highest immunity to interference.
All equipment items shall operate properly when connected to networks with a power supply
corresponding to the maximum permissible tolerances as laid down in EN 50160 (as regards,
harmonics, voltage fluctuations etc.).
In line with general EC regulations for EMC and German EMC legislation, only equipment
bearing the "CE" mark of EC conformity may be used.
Priority is given to reducing sources of interference.
Additionally, by means of high-capacity screening, generation of overvoltages due to

inductive or capacitive coupling shall be reduced. Influencing by electrical and magnetic
fields shall be lessened.
Earthing and potential equalization systems designed for low-impedance shall reduce
generation of overvoltages due to ohmic coupling.
If EMC resulting from the measures named above is still not adequate, further measures
shall be taken within buildings, for example by isolation and suppressor circuits.
Thanks to the lightning protection and screening measures taken at the buildings, within
them an EMC protection zone is formed.
All installations penetrating this protection zone, that is where they pass through the external
walls of buildings, shall be incorporated into a lightning protection-potential equalization
system as close as possible to the points of entry and exit of the building. This applies also
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 116 1165
Attachment-3
for conductors carrying a potential. At entry or exit, these shall be included in the lightning
protection-potential equalization system by way of suppressor circuits.
Cable runs to outdoor plant components and between buildings may also be screened by
appropriate measures, and so form a part of the protection zone. If this is done, the
suppressor circuit can be dispensed with.
A suppressor circuit shall be provided at all low-voltage main distribution boards.
Overvoltage protection shall be foreseen within the power supply for both central and
distributed power supplies to electronic cubicles.
All conductive parts of the structures and installation within the scope of the Contract must
be connected to the main earthing system.
B0.13.24 Requirements for local cubicles and local housings for e.g.
switchgear, control, measurement and signaling equipment
The switchgear cubicles must be partitioned off and incorporate a busbar system, the
necessary instruments, control switches, switch panels of the individual switch and
apparatus chambers. The main busbars are to be installed on the rear face, top side of the
switchgear cubicle in a lockable shuttered compartment.
Connections to switching devices, MCB's fuses etc. are to be made from these busbars.
The lower part of the cubicle shall house the terminal strips and connecting blocks, the
clamps for the cable terminals and, if required parallel connection copper straps for the
connection of more than 2 cables in parallel. An adequate number of ball studs must be
provided within the switchgear cubicle suitable for earthing the main and distribution
bus bars as well as the switchgear itself by means of portable earthing and short circuiting
equipment (to be provided once per switchgear panel row).
The space in the interior of the cubicles must be divided into a Section with 'live' parts, 'live'
switching elements etc. and a Section with control and measuring equipment. The Sections
are to be separated by reinforced sheet-steel.
Care must be taken that in the event of arcing hot gases shall not escape to the front of the
cubicles (the operational side).
Ammeters are to be provided on the cubicle front panel for the cubicle feeders and the
supply outlets for motors particularly important for the process. A single voltmeter with 4-
position voltmeter changeover switch must be provided for measurements of bus bar voltage
between each phase and neutral. Measuring instruments should, in general, be square in
shape.
All cubicles, cabinets, panels, etc. shall be designed for the ambient temperature according
to the project requirements of 40 °C (outside the enclosure) in non-air conditioned areas.
Special precautions shall be taken in the design of electronic devices for protection and
control systems housed in the cubicle in order to allow for these conditions.
Heating elements are to be provided generally in each local cubicle or cabinet and shall be
humidity controlled.
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 111 1165
Attachment-3
MCCB's or fuse switches shall be provided as per the existing plant.
PVC-insulated, copper stranded conductors must be used for wiring within the switchgear
cabinets, which must be numbered at each end with special tabs so that change by mistake is
impossible.
Preferably plug-in type auxiliary relays are to be used. Apparatus being sensitive to impact
must be protected against shock and vibration.
Incoming and outgoing cables have to be fixed by suitable metallic cable glands.
Cable entry to all cubicles, cabinets, panels, etc. shall be from bottom, only. Cable entries to
cubicles, cabinets, panels, etc. from top, even if provided with cable glands, are not
acceptable.
The electrical and control panels which have a large amount of cables shall not be provided
with cable glands, however cover plate for cable entry and sealing shall be provided
appropriately.
All local control/switchgear panels and "black boxes" shall be provided with duplicate
supplies for control and alarm signaling purposes. Such duplicate supplies shall be derived
from separate power sources as far as practical.
80.13.25 Local control points and level control cabinets
80.13.25.1 General
Any electrical consumer unit, which is not controlled automatically or from the central
control room, is to be fitted with a suitable local control cabinet. The local control cabinets
are to be installed in the immediate vicinity of the motor drive to be controlled.
Pump motors, which are level controlled locally, shall be given an automatic and manual
control. The respective level control cabinets are to be fitted in the immediate vicinity of the
pump motors, gauge glasses or level monitoring instruments.
80.13.26 Construction requirements
In general local control cabinets and level control cabinets with plastic casings resistant to
impact, sand, light and seawater, mounted on walls or hot-dip galvanized supporting
constructions, are to be provided. Hot-dip galvanized casings shall be acceptable.
Protection class must be IP 54 if installed indoors and IP 55W with additional measures if
located outdoors. The necessary earthing terminals must be provided for earthing purposes.
The cabinets must be equipped with the necessary mini circuit breakers, fuses, auxiliary
relays, power contactors, terminal blocks and cable attachment components.
For motors with pre-selection control (operation/stand-by) operation hours counters are to be
provided.
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 11 s1 165
Attachment-3
The stipulation of clause "Reg. for local cubicles and local housing for e.g. switchgear,
control, measuring and signaling equipment" shall be applied too.
In hazardous areas, the necessary explosion proof control cabinets and level control
equipment must be provided in accordance with IEC 60079and IEC 61241.
80.13.27 Local control points
The local control points are to be equipped as the minimum requirement with:
• ON button
• OFF button
• Running lamp
• FAULTLAMP
• TRIP HEAL THY indication
• Lamp test.
When two motors are installed, serving as operation and stand-by unit, then in addition to a
double set of the above items, the following equipment has to be installed as the minimum
requirement:
• MOTOR 1 - MOTOR 2 (running motor/stand-by motor)pre-selection switch,

• automatic transfer to the stand-by motor in case of failure of the running motor.
80.13.28 Level controls
In the case of pump motors controlled by levels, except for drainage pump, control of
individual pump motors may be effected as follows:
• level control with maximum and minimum contacts
• low level contact on motor - OFF
• bottom maximum contact on motor - ON
• local control point with ON and OFF button, running and fault lamp.
When two pump motors are installed for the same purpose the control may be effected as
follows:
• PUMP 1 - PUMP 2 (running pump/ stand-by pump) pre-selection switch
• level control with three high level contacts:
• first (1 ): high level contact for pre-selected ON
• low level contacts for pumps OFF
• local control and lamps as listed above for local control cabinets, for each motor.
80.13.29 Terminal boxes and terminal cabinets
In order to minimize the amount of cables and distribution of signals and to centralize
connections in the plant, terminal boxes or, wherever necessary, by larger amounts of
terminals, terminal cabinets shall be fitted on all the necessary
• cable crossover terminal points
• collecting points for individual analog and binary signals and local transmitters
• signal collecting and distribution points for fire alarm, telephone, loudspeaker and clock
system
Approval on PDM
Atta~Jt¥1WeHi~.1- 2 119 1165
Attachment-3
• distribution points for local signals.
Terminal boxes and cabinets must at least have class of protection IP 54 if installed indoors
and IP 55W if installed outdoors and must be equipped with the necessary terminal strips,
cable glands and fittings components for the connection of the cables. Cable entry will be
from the bottom for any outdoor installation.
The necessary earthing terminals are to be provided for the earthing of the boxes and
cabinets. In any area subject to the danger of explosion, the necessary explosion-protected
terminal boxes and cabinets are to be provided in accordance with IEC 60079 and IEC
61241.
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.1- 2 180/765
Attachment-4
TOSHIBA INS-GIH-XITS-0001 Rev.O
~ff S1i
DATE ISSUED
25.June.2013
~3i/JU!~% NWP000047
JOB/QUOT. NO. NWP000048
~ ft :t Sumitomo Corporation
CUSTOMER
7'7 / 1--:t Tanjung Jati B Re-Expansion Project

PLANT
TJB 5&6
TITLE
Specification of Instrumentation Installation

(LOT-1 Portion)

Toshiba Corporation
For Proposal
4
Cl;)
:z
2
Cl;) 3
>
LJ.J
c:::
2
)ffi,{
~~ 1
@I ~ B ft ic $ ;if( ij:g tJlrl ][ :j:.§. 3

REV.NO. DATE CONTENTS APROVED CHECKED REVISED
BY BY BY
~c :;Jn" )t;
(j(FP) 1
DISTRIBUTION 38 1t !J: Info. & Cont. Sys. Eng. Dept
ISSUED BY Thermal & Hydro Power
(PJ=) 1 (J<CV) 1 Sys. & Serv. Div.
7$( wg N.Morohoshi
()<PU) 1 TPSC 1
APPROVED BY 25.,Jun.2013
tJlrl ][ T.Sakurai
(j(EU) 1
CHECKED BY 25.,Jun.2013
:j:.§. 3 K.Sugawara
(J<IC) 1 (J<IC) }~ PREPARED BY 25.Jun.2013
**xt:i:H-±Jli~ 1/30
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 1s11165
TOSHIBA INS-GIH-XIT5-0001 Rev.O
CONTENTS
Page
1 . GENERAL • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 3
1. 1 GENERAL • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 3
1. 2 STANDARDS AND CODES • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4
2. PRIMARY PIPING FOR INSTRUMENTATION • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5

2. 1 DESIGN CONDITION OF PRIMARY PIPING • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5
2. 2 GENERAL REQUIREMENT OF INSTALLATION • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 7
2. 3 PRESSURE DETECT I ON PIP I NG • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1 1
2.4 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE DETECTION PIPING (FLOW)· • • • • • • • • • • • • 1 1
2. 5 CONDENSER VACUUM DETECT ION PIP I NG • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1 1
2. 6 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE DETECTION PIPING (LEVEL) • • • • • • • • • • • • 1 6
2. 7 TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT AND WELL • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1 7
3. INSTRUMENT AIR PIPING • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1 9

3. 1 SUPPLY AIR PIP I NG • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1 9
3. 2 CONTROL AIR TUBING • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2 O
4 . INSTRUMENT RACK (STANCH I ON) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2 1
5. PAINTING • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2 7
5. 1 GENERAL • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2 7
5. 2 INSTRUMENT RACK (STANCH I ON) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2 7
5. 3 PRIMARY PIPING, VALVE AND SUPPORT • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2 7
6. TEST AND INSPECTION • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2 8

6. 1 GENERAL • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2 8
6. 2 VISUAL CHECK • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2 8
6. 3 FLUSH I NG OF PIP I NG • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 2 9
6. 4 LEAK TEST • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 3 O
2/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 1s21165
1. GENERAL
1. 1 General
This documents covers the basic requirements for installation of instruments
in thermal power plant. Main purpose of this document is as fol lows:
1) To make uniformity and standardization of installation works for
instrumentation in the thermal power plant.
2) To avoid measuring error, delayed detection, operational error, etc. as far
as poss ib Ie.
During design stage, the fol lowing items should be considered in designing
the arrangement of instrument locations.
a) Length of primary piping should be as short as possible.
b) Instrument, instrument va Ive, root va Ive and b Iow va Ive shou Id be
accessible as possible for operation and maintenance.
c) The location should be as low as possible in vibration.
d) In the explosion-proof area, the instruments should be explosion-proof
and explosion-proof materials should be used for installation work.
3) To keep good looking appearance after installation completed with
consideration of plant safety and economics.
3/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 1s31165
1.2 Standards and Codes

The fol lowing standards and regulations should be applied.
·ASME Amer can Society of Mechanical Engineers
·AISC Amer can Institute of Steel Construction
· AI SI Amer can Iron &Steel Institute
·ANSI Amer can National Standards Institute
·API Amer can Petroleum Institute
·ASTM Amer can Society for Testing and Materials
·AWS Amer can Welding Society
·AIJ Arch tectural Institute Of Japan
·HEI Heat Exchanger Institute
· I EC International Electrical Commission
· ISO International Organization For Standardization
·NFPA National Fire Protection Association
·SSPC Steel Structure Painting Counci I
·BS British Standards Institute
·DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung
·EN European Norm
·JIS Japanese Industrial Standards
·JCS Japan Cable Manufacture' s Standards
·JEM Japanese Electrical Manufacture' s Standards
·JFSL Japan Fire Service Law
·JSCE Japan Society of Civi I Engineers
·JEC Standards of Japanese Electrotechnical Committee
·GB Standard of China
4/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 1s41165
2. PRIMARY PIPING FOR INSTRUMENTATION
2. 1 Design Condition of primary Piping
The design condition of primary piping should be as fol lows:
1) For steam or water (Include sea water)
r_-G)
Instrument
i---®
J
Note) 1. The drain valve cannot be opened for an extended time (three minutes)
during normal operation.
2. In case of b I ow out, temporary bucket is needed to co 11 ect the drainage.
Fig. 2. 1 Typical Instrument Piping

No. Part Design Pressure Design Temperature
1 Piping between tapping Design pressure of Design temperature
and root valve including main pipe of main pipe
reservoir
2 Root valve Design pressure of Design temperature
main pipe of main pipe
3 From root valve or Design pressure of Design temperature
reservoir to fitting main pipe of main pipe
(Tubing)
4 Fitting Design pressure of Design temperature
main pipe of main pipe
5 Drain valve Design pressure of Saturation temperature
(Cap) main pipe at design pressure of
main pipe
6 Drain pipe (Tubing) Design pressure of Saturation temperature
main pipe at design pressure of
main pipe
5/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 1s51165
No. Part Design Pressure Design Temperature

7 Tubing before instrument Design pressure of Saturation temperature
Valve main pipe at design pressure of
main pipe
8 Instrument valve Design pressure of Saturation temperature
main pipe at design pressure of
main pipe
9 Tubing (Note. 6) Design pressure of Ambient temperature
main pipe
Notes: 1. Itern No. 5 and 6 cannot be i nsta I Ied on o i I I i ne , vacuum I i ne ,

instrument/service air I ine, flue gas and air combustion.
2. Design condition of item No. 5 to 8 should be design temperature
of main I ine where fluid is water.
3. In principle, the selection of instrument piping and instrument
va Ives (root va Ive, b Iow va Ive, instrument va Ive) are based on
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
4. In principle, the materials of instrument piping (item No. 1) and
root va Ive ( itern No. 2) are app I i ed to equ iva Ient mater ia I of main
piping.
5. The mater ia Is of instrument piping or tubing ( itern No. 3'"'-'8) are
applied to stainless steel.
6. Pressure transmitter and Differential pressure transmitter are
jointed with manifold valve directly.
2) 0 i I I i ne
Pressure and temperature same as for main I ine.
Notes: 1. Item No. 5 and 6 cannot be i nsta 11 ed on o i I Ii ne.
3) Other fluids (Example : gasses, compressed air)
According to the design pressure and temperature of main I ine.
Notes: 1. Itern No. 5 and 6 cannot be i nsta I Ied on vacuum I i ne.
6/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 1861765
2.2 General Requirement of Installation

1) In principle, size of a tapping point is as a rule more than DN15 except
around turbine and generator machine.
2) Piping from tap to root valve is as a rule DN15 or more.
3) Size of a root valve is as a rule DN15 or more.
4) Stain Iess stee I tubing or piping from root va Ive to b Iow va Ive is nor ma I Iy
3/8"0D or 1/2"0D (10mm0D or 12mm0D).
Stain Iess stee I tubing or piping inside Ioca I instrument racks and
stanchions are 3/8"0D or 1/2"0D (1 Omm0D or 12mm0D)
5) The socket-weld connection shal I be used for piping to tap and root valve
unless otherwise specified.
6) A bend of a primary piping shal I be used elbow material unless otherwise
specified.
If bend the pipe, it shal I be formed by pipe bender. Radius of 90° bend
shal I be more than 5D (pipe diameter).
7) Minimum gradient (slope) of 1/12 shal I be given to a horizontal portion
of a primary piping.
8) A instrument inlet valve can be eliminated only when the instrument is
mounted directly on the tapping point with a root valve.
9) Doub Ie root va Ives are provided for a 11 piping system rated 40barg or higher.
7/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 181 1165
10) Piping between tapping and root valve.

In principle, the piping between tapping and root valve is as fol lows.
However, if main pipe is sma I Ier than 6 inches and support mater ia I of
instrument pipe can not be installed on main pipe, the distance between
tapping and root valve shal I be applied 150mm as minimum.
Operating I mm
Temperature
Be Iow 350°c ~250
351-500°C ~300
501-600°C ~400
Fig. 2.2
11) The primary piping should have expansion to avoid the stress caused by
thermal movement from main piping and/or equipments.
And also the fixed support after root valve should be considered.
12) Maximum distance between adjoining pipe supports shal I be 2.0 m or less.
Attention sha 11 be paid to proper Iy distribute a fixed point and a s I id i ng
point al I over the length of a pipe to absorb expansion of the pipe while
the pipe is blown out.
13) Fixed supports are universal clamp or U-bolts, and U-bolts shal I be used
for vibration expected. Moreover, if expansion of the primary piping is
expected, the sleeve type support that permits sliding should be
considered. (Refer to Fig. 2. 4)
14) AI I primary piping sha I I have b Iow out piping except for ones of fue I o i I,
Iubr icat i ng o i I, vacuum, instrument/service air piping, f Iue gas and air
combustion.
A screwed pipe thread p Iug (or cap) sha 11 be i nsta 11 ed after a b Iow va Ive.
8/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 1881765
15) Fol lowing provisions shal I be made on a primary piping to prevent thermal
shock in a main I ine due to reverse flow of cooled drain in primary piping.
a) To apply thermal insulation on primary piping from tap to root valve
for steam I i ne.
16) The fol lowing attention shal I be considered for installation works.
a) Where the pipe is cut, the end of pipe should be plane.
b) Valve should be installed after checking of the direction of flow.
c) The piping routes should be rechecked after temporary welding.
d) After removing welding slag, polish the welded area with a wire brush
to prevent pinholes in advances.
e) Welding should be done in accordance with the fol lowing.
rnF~~;, 0. 5 +
1 mm
For oi I
(Applied TOSHIBA standard)

+1
2 mm
For other service
(App I ied ASME B31. 1)

Fig. 2.3 Welding
17) Namep Iates (instrument, root va Ive, b Iow va Ive, instrument va Ive) are
installed at site except installed in instrument racks or stanchions.
Namep Iates for instrument racks and stanchions wi 11 be i nsta 11 ed at
manufacturer's factory.
The instrument racks, stanchions, pane Is, instruments, root va Ives,
instrument valves and blow valves shal I be provided with nameplates having
tag number and service name.
Nameplates shal I be attached to the equipment with stainless steel screws,
rivets, drive screws, stainless steel wire.
9/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 1s91165
< Primary Piping Support>
U-bolt
Angle
Fig. 2.4 Primary Piping Support
10/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 1901165
2.3 Pressure Detection Piping

1) A loop seal or a siphon shal I be furnished for a pressure gauge except a
compound gauge direct Iy mounted on a pipe if temperature of steam or f Iu id
inside is equal or above 100°C.
2) Pressure tapping point sha 11 be Iocated in the range shown in the fo 11 owing
diagrams.
2.4 Differential Pressure Detection Piping (Flow)

1) Attention shal I be paid to make temperature of a primary piping on high
pressure side and low pressure side equal.
2) A reservoir or tee sha 11 be furnished in a primary pipe I i ne between a tap
va Ive and an instrument, if the f Iu id is steam f Iow, except for a diaphragm
type differential pressure detector, a bellows type differential pressure
detector and a bourdon tube type differential pressure detector.
3) Al I differential pressure instruments are provided with 3-way valve
man ifo Id.
2.5 Condenser Vacuum Detection Piping

1) To measure condenser vacuum accurately, basket chips and piping shal I be
furnished inside the condenser, as shown in Fig. 2. 7.
2) The end of detecting pipe is equipped with basket chips to avoid the effect
of steam. The out I ine of the basket chip is shown in Fig. 2.8.
Materials of a basket chip is 304SS.
3) The drain flows to condenser at the slope of 1/12.
11/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 191 1165
Pressure transmitter and switch

DN15 x 12. 7mm0D Pressure
Pressure Switch
Transmitter
"-12. 7mm0D
DN25 x DN15
"-12. 7mm0D
x 1/2NPT
12. 70mm0D
1/2NPT
Pressure indicator and test tap
Siphon
Siphon
DN15 DN15
DN15 DN15 DN15 DN15
DN25 x DN15 DN25 x DN15 DN25 x DN15 DN25 x DN15
Siphon Below 100°C Be I ow 100°C Equal or Above 100°C Equal or Above 100°C
Root Valve Below 40barg Equal or Above 40barg Below 40barg Equal or Above 40barg
G1/2
DN15
DN25 x DN15
Test tap Test tap

Root Valve Below 40barg Equal or Above 40barg
Fig. 2. 5 Example for Pressure Transmitter, Switch, Indicator and Test tap
12/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 192 1165
eservoir or Tee
,.,.-·--·,.,. ,.,.-·--., reservoir function)
---------f-- ~ ------------------------------- ( --- or steam
\,. _.,.,The height of center I i ne of ·\. _ I ow
·- · piping (reservoir) sha 11 be kept equal-·
' T h e temperature
sha 11 be equa I i zed.
Differential Pressure
H L Transmitter or Switch
Differential Pressure
Transmitter with
~~~~~manifold valve
L
Fig. 2. 6 Example for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Switch
13/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 193 1165
406 mm
{ To vacuum transmitter
Welding
DN65
'DN25
'DN25
'DN25
Condenser
NWL
Fig. 2. 7 Condenser Vacuum Detection
14/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 1941165
Direction of steam flow
----~DN25 pipe (Stainless steel)
1. 6mm dia. Hole x 6mm pitch
Diameter
Fig. 2.8 Basket Chip
15/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 195 1165
2. 6 Differential Pressure Detection Piping (Level)

1) Level transmitter should be installed at the lower position than minimum
water Ieve I in vesse I or tank.
2) Reservoir for Ieve I transmitter shou Id be furnished and i nsta 11 ed on
detecting piping of steam side in vesse I or tank. (Except diaphragm sea Ied
differential transmitter.)
Reservoir
Steam
Transmitter or
Switch
Water
Ca
Note: Reservoir shal I be furnished and installed on instrument piping where

detecting condition is steam with high temperature and pressure.
Water tank
Level transmitter
In case of water tank Ieve I (If used)
16/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 1961765
2. 7 Temperature Measurement and wel I

1) In principle, a temperature measurement shal I be installed on piping of
DN100 and over.

If temperature measurement is installed on the piping of less than DN100,
it shal I be installed on a bended pipe or expanded pipe.
2) Temperature measurement sha 11 be provided in the direction against off I ow.
(Installed on a bended pipe)
3) Where I i quid f i I I ed thermometer is i nsta I I ed on the vesse I or piping,
capi I lary tube shal I be protected with raceway, etc.
4) Position of thermometer sha 11 be se I ected where vibration of piping is very
smal I.
5) Where thermometer sha 11 be provided on upstream or downstream at an orifice,
that position should be decided far position of 5 times and over at inside
diameter of pipe from orifice in case of downstream and in case of upstream
bu I b shou Id be dee i ded a far position of 20 ti mes and over at inside diameter
of pipe from orifice.
Installation on straight pipe
"'DN100
DN100 and over Be Iow DN100
17/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 191 1165
Installation on bended pipe
Flow ------
DN80 and over
DN80 and over Below DN80
18/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 19 s1 165
TOSHIBA INS-GIH-XIT5-0001 Rev. 0
3. INSTRUMENT AIR PIPING

3. 1 Supply Air Piping
1) Material
a) Pipe
GALVANIZED PIPE
b) Valves
BRASS, BRONZE
c) Fittings
BRASS, BRONZE
2) Connection type
SCREWED JOINT
3) Insta I Iat ion
a) The size of isolating valve at air piping shal I be selected in
accordance with total air consumption.
b) Air f Iow diagram and system sha 11 be designed based on air consumption
and the type of instruments.
The minimum size of supply air piping shal I be DN15.
c) From instrument and instrument rack (stanchion) the tubing and the tube
fittings shal I be installed.
d) As a rule, there is a single air supply I ine for one instrument and
one instrument rack (stanchion).
e) The air supply piping shal I be supported. The same method as primary
piping shal I be applied.
f) Before connecting piping, the inside shou Id be checked and kept c Iean.
g) Branching in air supply piping shal I be made at the top of main pipe.
h) Air supply piping at downstream of air dryer shal I be furnished and
installed with the A53B with galvanized.
i) Furthermore, a 11 joints in piping sha 11 be screwed joints. (ga Ivan i zed
carbon steel)
j) The bending radius of PVC sheathed copper tube (or stain Iess tube) sha 11
be more than 10 times the outside diameter of tube.
k) PVC sheathed copper tube shal I be supported within in 2.0 meter.
19/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 199 1165
3.2 Control Air Tubing
1) Mater ia I
a) Tube
COPPER TUBE SHEATHED PVC
b) Valve and fittings
BRASS
2) Specifications of tube
Size: 6mm0D, 8mm0D, 10mm0D, 12mm0D
3) Connection type
Double bite (Ferrules)
4) Insta I I at ion method
Instal I tubing in the fol lowing procedure.
a) Supporting interval: 2m or less
b) Supporting method Piping clamp or Tray
c) The sealing shal I be done with Seal tape.
d) Extremely high or low temperature places shal I be avoided for its
i nsta I I at ion.
e) For connection of instrument and instrument rack (stanchion), joints
shal I be located properly to faci I itate maintenance and modification
works (for instance, to make it possible to remove those joints with
a spanner).
20/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 200 1165
4. INSTRUMENT RACK (STANCH ION)

1) Insta I I at ion I ocat ion
The fol lowing items are our recommendations to determine the location.
a) The location is as near to the tapping as possible.
b) The environment and atmosphere are free of such factors as to cause
measuring error.
(1) The instrument is not affected by vibration generated from
other system components.
(2) The environment temperature is within the specified operating
temperature range of the instrument ( i nsta 11 at ion in the vicinity
of heat-generating equipment shal I be avoided).
c) The location should be decided to check the interference with plant
equipment and piping.
d) Operation, check and maintenance convenience is fully guaranteed as
fo 11 ows:
(1) No hazardous condition is generated when equipment is operating.
(2) The enough space is provided al I around the instrument rack
(stanchion).
21/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 201 1165
SAMPLE
STANCHION
INDOOR USE
1~8 I
DN50 PIPE
~
~NAME PLATE
1~8
l
I
8-8
I
A
-ES
A
-1_ -1_
A-A
OUTDOOR USE
1------,~--- 1~8
N p
~NAME PLATE
DN50 PIPE
~
1~8
8-8
I
A A
-1_ -1_
-EB
A-A
22/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 202 1165
SAMPLE
OPEN RACK TYPE PANEL
I
I
OPEN RACK (ANGLE RACK)
0 0
23/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 203 1165
TOSHIBA INS-GIH-XIT5-0001 Rev. 0
2) Insta 11 at ion of Instrument Rack and Stanchion

In principle, the instrument racks and stanchions shal I be installed on
the concrete floor, the instrument racks and stanchions shal I be fixed by
anchor bolts as shown in Fig. 4. 1.
When the instrument racks and stanchions shal I be installed on a steel
structure (grating), it sha 11 be we I ded on the beam as shown in Fig. 4. 2.
STANCHION
C o n c r e t e F I o o r Anchor Bo It
Open Rack
C o n c r e t e F I o o r Anchor Bo It
Fig. 4. 1 Insta 11 at ion of stanchion and rack on concrete f I oor
24/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 204 1165
<Inside grating area>
Lornl instrurient rnck
Su ort be0r1
Lornl instrurient rnck
Front
Su ort be0r1
If re uired
25/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 205 1165
<Outside grating area>

It shall be welded on the beam.
Support becrn
Lornl instruMent rnd-<
Frnnt
Lornl instruMent rnd-<
If re uired
Fig. 4. 2 Installation of stanchion and rack on steel structure
26/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 206 1165
5. PAINTING
5. 1 General
Al I the instruments and equipment delivered and installed should be painted.
However, painting of instrument such as gauge, transmitters, control valves,
stainless steel materials etc. are excepted from this clause.
5. 2 Instrument Rack (Stanchion)

1) Prime coating: 2 times
2) Finish coating: 1 time
For any damages at site repairing work should be conducted at the site
after welding work is finished.
3) Color
Indoor type 5Y7/1 Semi-Gloss
Outdoor type 5Y7/1 Semi-Gloss
5.3 Primary Piping, valve and Support

Please refer to 'PAINTING SPECIFICATION FOR TURBINE PLANT' wi 11 be issued
I ater.
27/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 201 1165
6. TEST AND INSPECTION

6. 1 General
Prior to the in it ia I operation after comp I et i ng i nsta 11 at ion work, the fo 11 owing
visual checks and tests wi I I be conducted by our instrumentation supervisor.
In addition, equipments that cannot be tested after completing the work wi I I
be tested during the installation work.
6.2 Visual check

1) General
a) Check for damages and discrepancies caused by p I ant expansion,
vibration and movement.
b) Check the operation and maintenance spaces.
c) Check and see if the device function can be fully operated.
d) Check the appearance of piping, I ocat ion, etc.
2) Primary pipe
a) Check and see if there is any imp roper piping connected with instrument
that may impede its function.
b) Check and see if operational and maintenance check can be conducted
easily.
c) Check and see if materials used are proper ones.
d) Check and see if there are any wrong connections.
e) Check and see if the support is in proper position.
3) Supply Air Piping
a) Check and see if funct iona I I y proper piping is i nsta I I ed for the
instrument.
b) Check and see if operat iona I and maintenance check be conducted eas i I y.
c) Check for wrong connections. Check and see if the air capacity is
sufficient.
d) Check and see if the support is in proper position.
28/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 20 s1 165
4) Control Air Tubing

a) Check and see if functionally proper piping is installed for the
instrument.
b) Check and see if operational and maintenance check can be conducted
easily.
c) Check and see if there is any wrong connection of pipes.
d) Check and see if the support is in proper position.
e) Check the appearance.
6.3 Flushing of Piping

Upon completion of the piping work, the primary pipes and air pipe flushing
wi I I be conducted in the fol lowing method.
1) Primary piping
In principle, the primary pipe should undergo a cleaning blow at the same
time the main pipe undergoes a blowing.
2) Instrument air piping
a) Supply air several times unti I foreign objects or oi I, etc. are
comp Iete Iy removed from ind iv idua I instrument and instrument rack
(stanchion) and inside the pipes.
b) As to the so Ieno id va Ive or air va Ive, remove the connecting pipe from
the inlet and perform a flushing by using individual stop valves.
3) Control air tubing
a) The air pipe installed on air supply side should undergo a flushing
just before the air filter-regulator.
b) After removing the pipe at each instrument, connect the control air
pipe and conduct a check.
29/30
Approval on PDM
Attachment-4
Atta~ft¥~eHi~.1- 2 209 1165
6.4 Leak Test
In principle, pipe leak test shal I be conducted by giving pressure of the pipe
with water or air.
Leak test shal I be conducted for al I instrumentation piping, tubing, fitting
and va Ives.
1) Primary pipe
a) Make it a water pressure test. Conduct the test for al I the pipe.
(For o i I pipes, conduct an air pressure test.)
b) In pr inc ip Ie, test pressure shou Id be 1. 5 ti mes of design pressure.
(For air pressure test 1. 25 times)
The test pressure of main steam pressure and BFP discharge pressure I i ne
should be determined through consultations.
2) Supply air pipe
Close the air isolating valve, and check connections by using soap water.
3) Air pipe for around turbine or machine
a) Cover the exhaust port of so Ieno id va Ive and air va Ive with p Iug. Open
the supply valve of each equipment, close the air isolating valve and
check in by means of soap water.
4) Control air Tubing.
Open miniature va Ive on supp Iy air I i ne and Ieave the instrument in service
and check by using soap water.
30/30
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 210/765
Attachment-5.2 : Basic Concept of Alarm System
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.2 2 211/765
TOSHIBA SPC-GCH-XITS-0006 Rev.O
~ fi B 1-t
DATE ISSUED 22-August-2013
~~/.mni~ NWP000047
JOB/QUOT. NO.
NWP000048
~ 1r:. :g
CUSTOMER
Sumitomo Corporation
Basic Concept of Alarm System

For Proposal intellectual property including know-how. It shall not be disclosed to any
Toshiba Corporation
Cl)
z
Q
Cl)
>
UJ
0:::
Im,(
1
@I
0
!J&
22-Aug.'-13
B {-t
First Issue.
!c ~
/ jf< !!{
/ filffl 1!t
/ t!! s
REV. NO. DATE CONTENTS APROVED BY CHECKED BY REVISED BY
12 111 9r.
Kaiei-1 1 Information and Control
DISTRIBUTION ~ fi" !l
Systems Eng. Dept.
ISSUED BY
Customer 1 PJ-2 1 Plant Eng. Group
jf< !i
Ka-PU 1 M. Takashima
APPROVED BY
~ 1!t
Ka-EU 1 M. Takashima
CHECKED BY
Ka-IC 1 Ka-lU 1
t!! s H.Saito
PREPARED BY
TOSHIBA CORPORATION 1/9

Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.2 2 212/765
Contents
1. General ......................................................................................................................................... 3
2. Alarm System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 4
2.1 Function Description of Alarm System .................................................................................... 4
3. Alarm Display and Functions of DCS (OPS) ............................................................................. 6
3.1 General Description of Alarm Processing ............................................................................... 6
3.2 Layout of Alarm List Window ................................................................................................... 7
3.3 Format of Alarm Messages ..................................................................................................... 8
3.4 Alarm Message and Alarm Indicator States ............................................................................ 9
**it:fi*i ~ 2/9
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.2 2 213/765
1. General
This specification describes the alarm concept applied for Tanjung Jati B Re-Expansion
Project by showing how the alarm system are composed of the plant's boiler, turbine,
generator, flue-gas desulfurization system and BOP systems. This specification covers
the following points:
• The functions of each subsystem that is a part of the visual alarm system;
• The interface among each system;
This document is prepared to show alarm concept of DCS, but electrical panel,
programmable logic controller (PLC) and local control panel (LCP) will also follow this
document. If they cannot comply with this concept, their alarm concept or detailed logic
diagrams will be defined in their document.
**it:fi*i ~ 3/9
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.2 2 214/765
2. Alarm System Configuration
2.1 Function Description of Alarm System

Plant alarm are generally detected at DCS, electrical panel and PLC/LCP as shown on
figure-2.1. Alarm system configuration for each system is as follows.
1) DCS
User-friendly operator stations (OPS) are provided for monitoring necessary plant
information. Alarm signals input from field instruments, electrical panel, PLC and LCP, or
initiated in DCS can be monitored on OPS. No hardware alarm window is provided.
Audible buzzer is provided, and the buzzer sounds to let operator know the alarm
occurrence when alarm is initiated in DCS. Audible buzzer has three different tones. The
tone is changed as per priority (importance) of the alarm signals.
OPS has alarm acknowledgement and silence PBs as on figure-2.1. Operator can silent
the buzzer or reset alarm signals from alarm display if the alarm source is disappeared.
2) Electrical Panel
Alarm signals input to electrical panel are indicated on the panel using dedicated or
integrated alarm indicators in accordance with significance of the alarm signal. Audible
buzzer is not applied. Dedicated or integrated alarm signals are output from electrical
panel to DCS for integrated monitoring and audible buzzer.
3) PLC and LCP

Alarm signals input to PLC and LCP are integrated in accordance with significance of the
alarm signal. If PLC has a visual display, alarm signals are indicated on the display. LCP
or PLC, which does not have a visual display, are equipped with alarm indicators and
lamp test PB on the panel. For LCP and local control box used for maintenance purpose
only, indication lamps, alarm lamps and lamp test PBs are not provided.
If PLC or LCP is located in dedicated local control room, audible buzzer, alarm silence PB
and acknowledgement PB will be provided as per each supplier's standard. Audible
buzzer alarm indication cannot be reset from OPS in CCR. Operator is requested to
confirm that the alarm source is disappeared and reset the alarm at local control room.
All alarm signals of PLC or LCP are integrated to one alarm signal, and the signal is
output to DCS as common alarm.
**it:fi*i ~ 4/9
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~ft¥/W~Hi~.2 2 2151765
DCS Operator Station
r----------------------------,
. -.. "* .........
ITCisHIBA TOSMAP-DS
Buzzer
, -----~-----=-=~-=-==~ ------
I
DCS, EHC, AVR Controller
Alarm Detection Circuit
I
I
L_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ...J
Electrical Panel
r ~a~ Indication
I Lamp I
I I Buzzer I
I I (if applicable) I
I . . . ------"-_ _____.___ ____.______,
I
I
Alarm Detection Circuit
I ...._____ ___ Alarm Detection Circuit
~___.
I I
I I
L __ _ __ ..... L __ _ __.J
(if applicable)
Field (Instruments or Measurement Panel)
Figure-2.1 Plant Alarm System Configuration
**it:fi*i ~ 5/9
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.2 2 216/765
3. Alarm Display and Functions of DCS (OPS)
3.1 General Description of Alarm Processing

The system provides a facility to generate alarms for both analog and digital signals.
Each alarm signal is categorized into three levels as per its priority (importance). Alarm
level definition is as follows;
*Level-1 : Information alarm message

This alarm level is used for status alarm, for example, equipment back up start, permit
condition established and so on.
*Level-2: Except for level-1 and level-3 alarm message

This alarm level is used for process status alarm such as tank level low and pump outlet
flow high, and equipment failure such as electrical failure of motor and process circuit
board failure of control equipment.
*Level-3: Plant critical alarm message

This alarm level is used for plant critical alarm such as plant trip condition initiated.
**it:fi*i ~ 6/9
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~ft¥/W~Hi~.2 2 217 1765
3.2 Layout of Alarm List Window

The layout of Alarm List window of OPS is shown in the figure below. The alarms are
displayed in reverse chronological order, with the most recent alarm positioned at the top
of the list.
009.9HN
Total number of alarms Scroll to Top
Alarm Acknowledge = Alarm Silence

Latest Alarm is indicated at
top of list
Fig. 3.1 Alarm List Display Layout
The "Alarm Silence" button deactivates the audible alarm. The "Top" button moves the
scroll bar to the top of the Alarm list.
**it:fi*i ~ 7/9
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.2 2 218/765
3.3 Format of Alarm Messages

The format of alarm messages in the alarm list is shown below.
The color of alarm importance is different depending on the alarm level.
Tag Description
xnV.l jDJG Il!CRDrG)
Importance
Level-1 black
Level-2 yellow
Level-3 red
Normal green
Fig. 3.2 Alarm List Message Format
Date & Time: The Date and Time format is specified for each project.
Category: The category that the Tag belongs to is indicated. System designator of
signal identification system is assigned as the Category.
Importance: Importance defined in clause 3.1
Tag No., Tag Description: The Tag number and the Tag's description are provided.
Tag Value & Unit: Current value or status is indicated and updated continuously.
Limit Value: The limit value that has been exceeded is shown, and the alarm's
direction is indicated by "<", ">", "<=", or">=".
Alarm State: A text description of the alarm status is indicated as H/H H/H H H,
L/LL/LLL, ABNORMAL, or RTN (return to normal).
**it:fi*i ~ 8/9
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~ft¥/W~Hi~.2 2 2191765
3.4 Alarm Message and Alarm Indicator States

The alarm message has five states that represent the alarm condition and the
acknowledgment status.
Each state is identified by the color displayed with flashing red, flashing green, steady red
and steady green. The diagram below shows the five states and the transitions between
them.
NORMAL
Acknowledged NO MESSAGE Acknowledged
Normal to
~ N
.....o-rm-al----......
NORMAL Alarm NORMAL

ACKNOWLEDGED NOT YET ACK.
STEADY GREEN FLASHING GREEN
Return
ALARM
NOT YET ACK.
ACKNOWLEDGED Acknowledged
while Alarm FLASHING RED
STEADY RED
Fig.3.3 Alarm message states and transitions
**it:fi*i ~ 9/9
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 220/765
Attachment-5.3 : Basic Interface Concept for Controllers
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 221/765
~fiBi-t
DATE ISSUED 22-August-2013
~~/!Hlil% NVVP000047, NVVP000048
JOB/QUOT.NO.
~ $fc 45
CUSTOlv1ER Sumitomo Corporation
Basic Interface Concept for Controllers

FOR PROPOSAL intellectual property including know-how. It shall not be disclosed to any
This document will be finalized after the
discussion with each equipment supplier. Toshiba Corporation
3
Cl)
:z
0
Cl) 2
;:
L.J.J
c:::
1
~
~~ 0
!J&
22-Aug.-'13 First Issue
it i2
/ ~
/ ifflJ 1:t
/ '1§
@I
REV.NO.
B
DATE CONTENTS * *
APROVEDBY CHECKED
BY
t.!::I.
REVISED
BY
~2 ;;ff] 1c
DISTRIBUTION ~2 ;;ff] 1c Systems Engineering Dept.
DISTRIBUTION
Customer 1 PJ-2 1 Global Plant Eng. Group
~
Ka-PU 1 * i:tJi::t"
APPROVED BY
M. Takashima
ifflJ 1:t
Ka-EU 1 M. Takashima
CHECKED BY
t.!::I. '1§
Ka-IC 1 Ka-lU H. Saito
PREPARED BY
1/ 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 2221165
Contents
1. General .................................................................................................................................................... 3
2. Concept of 1/0 Partitioning .................................................................................................................... 4
(1) Input signal for single transmitter/switch ............................................................................ 4
(2) Tern perature measurement ................................................................................................... 5
(3) Pulse measurement ............................................................................................................... 8
(4) Control output signal ............................................................................................................. 9
(5) Interface between DCS and PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) ............................... 10
(6) SOE Input .............................................................................................................................. 11
(7) Grounding ............................................................................................................................. 12
3. Application of Hardwired Interfaces between Controllers and DCS ................................................ 13
(1-1) MV Switchgear Equipment (10kV, 3kV, General) ........................................................... 13
(1-2) MV Switchgear Equipment (1 OkV, 3kV, with Emergency Stop) .................................... 14
(2) LV Switchgear Equipment (380V, :::132KW) ....................................................................... 15
(3-1) AC motor control center equipment (380V, <132KW) ................................................... 16
(3-2) AC motor control center equipment (380V, <132KW) ................................................... 17
(4) DC Motor Control Center Equipment (220VDC) ................................................................ 18
(5-1) Motor operated valve (AC, with Position Transmitter) .................................................. 19
(5-2) Motor operated valve (AC, without Position Transmitter) ............................................ 20
(6-1) Motor Operated Valve (DC, with Position Transmitter) ................................................. 21
(6-2) Motor Operated Valve (DC, without Position Transmitter) ........................................... 22
(7-1) Single Coil Solenoid Valve (Pneumatic/Hydraulic On-Off Valve) ................................. 23
(7-2) Single Coil Solenoid Valve (Air Operated Motor) ........................................................... 24
(8-1) Double Coil Solenoid valve (General) ............................................................................. 25
(8-2) Double Coil Solenoid valve (Mill Cut Damper, Burner Gun) ......................................... 26
(9) Pneumatic Modulating Control Valve (Fail-Close/Fail-Open) .......................................... 27
(10-1) Pneumatic Modulating Control Valve (Fail-Lock, with Position Transmitter) ........... 28
(10-2) Pneumatic Modulating Control Valve (Fail-Lock, without Position Transmitter) ..... 29
(10-3) Pneumatic Modulating Control Valve (Fail-Lock, with Separate 1/P Converter) ....... 30
(11) MCWP Outlet Valve (Hydraulic Valve) .............................................................................. 31
(12-1) MV Incomer (10kV, Unit SWGR) ..................................................................................... 32
(12-2) MV Incomer (10kV, Station SWGR) ............................................................................... 33
(13) MV Incomer (3kV) ............................................................................................................... 34
(14) MV Feeder (10kV, 3kV) ....................................................................................................... 35
(15) MV lnterconnector (3kV) .................................................................................................... 36
(16) LV Incomer ......................................................................................................................... 37
(17) LV Switchgear Feeder ....................................................................................................... 38
(18) LV lnterconnector .............................................................................................................. 39
(19) GCB ................................................................................................................................... 40
2 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 223/765
1. General
The purpose of this document is to show the concept of 1/0 interface such as operational facility and
required signal exchange between DCS and MV/LV Switchgear, Motor Control Center (MCC) and
various Equipment.
Concept of 1/0 partitioning for redundant equipment and instruments is also shown here in.
This document shows the interface between DCS and other equipment, but PLC and local control
panel shall also comply with this document.
Suppliers for both control panels, such as DCS, PLC, etc., and electrical panels are requested to
prepare 1/0 interfaces in accordance with this document.
3 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 224/765
2. Concept of 1/0 Partitioning

(1) Input signal for single transmitter/switch
(a) Single measurement
A signal from transmitter/switch is assigned to one input board.
CTC : I/0 terminal

(b) Dual redundant transmitters/switches
Each signal is assigned to separate input board.
(A) (B)
(A) (B)
(c) Triple redundant transmitters/switches

Each signal is assigned to separate input board.
r·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·
AI board AI board AI board
(A) (B) (C)

(A) (B) (C)
4 / 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 225/765
(2) Temperature measurement

Thermocouple or RTD is used for temperature measurement.
In General, if measurement range is up to 600°C, thermocouple Type E is applied. Over 600°C,
thermocouple Type K is applied. Both thermocouples are ungrounded, single element, IEC
60584-class 1. As for MV motor (10.5kV), two winding measurement RTDs for every phase and
one temperature element for each bearing will be equipped. RTD is PT-100 0 (@0°C), three wire,
single element IEC 60751-class A, quick response type.
Dual element of thermocouple and RTD may be used in accordance with manufacturer's
standard.
(a) Single measurement

*Thermocouple
TC Module
JB
(A-1) (A-2)
*If applicable
*RTD
(A-1) (A-2)
If applicable
5 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 226/765
(b) Dual measurement
*Thermocouple
LBI
TC Module TC Module
(A-1) (A-2) (B-1) (B-2)
*If applicable *If applicable
*RTD
r·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·---------------------------------------------·---·,
LBI
RTDModule RTDModule
(A-1) (A-2) (B-1) (B-2)

*If applicable *If applicable
6 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 221 /765
(c) Triple measurement
*Thermocouple
LBI
TC Module TC Module TC Module
JB
(A-1) (A-2) (B-1) (B-2) (C-1) (C-2)
*If applicable *If applicable *If applicable
*RTD
RTDModule RTD Module RTDModule
(A-1) (A-2) (B-1) (B-2) (C-1) (C-2)

*If applicable *If applicable *If applicable
7 / 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 228/765
(3) Pulse measurement

24VDC power for pulse measurement circuit is supplied by DCS.
PI Module
Pulse
Generator
8 / 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 229/765
(4) Control output signal

(a) Single drive
Signal is outputted from one output board.
CPU CPU
* 1: if applicable
(b) Dual redundant drives

Each signal is outputted from separate output boards.
r·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·------- r·-------------------------·-·-·-·-·-·-·-
CPU CPU
(A) (B)
(A) (B)
* 1 : if applicable
9 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 230/765
(5) Interface between DCS and PLC (Programmable Logic Controller)
DCS PLC
*4 (If applicable)
*1
r------ -------- ------- -------
BOP system controlled by

PLC
Notes:
1. Redundant RS485 Modbus interface is applied.
2. StarUstop operation of BOP system can be operated from DCS and PLC.
3. StarUstop or open/close operation of each auxiliary machine of BOP system can
be operated from PLC.
4. StarUstop command signals and PLC system failure signal are interfaced with
DCS by hardwire. (If applicable)
5. Major information of BOP system send to DCS by Modbus datalink.
10 / 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 231/765
(6) SOE Input

*In case of SOE input signal from control cubicle or local to SOE, single pair cable is applied for input
signal separately.
_ SOE . _. _. _. _·- ·-·-· -· _. _·- ·-·-·
DI board
A B C
L--·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·
Control Cubicle, etc.
Note:
A, B and C signals are different sources of SOE inputs,
and single pair cables are used for each signal separately.
*In case of a signal is used for SOE input and interlock, two contacts are supplied for SOE input and
ACS controller separately.
_SOE ·-·-·-·-·-·- ACS Controller _
r-·-·- -·-·-·
Al A2
Control Cubicle, etc.
Note:
Al and A2 contacts are same setting, and input to SOE
and ACS controller separately.
11 / 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 232/765
(7) Grounding
(a) Analog input and output signals between DCS and local are grounded at DCS. Digital input and
output signals are not grounded generally.
r-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-
Actuator
Analog input Analog output Digital input
(b) Analog input signals from other control panels to DCS are grounded at the control panels. On the
other hand, analog output signals from DCS to other control panels are grounded at DCS. Digital
input and output signals are not grounded generally.
12 / 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 233/765
3. Application of Hardwired Interfaces between Controllers and DCS

(1-1) MV Switchgear Equipment (1 OkV, 3kV, General)
DCS MV SWITCHGEAR
220VAC
Supply 220VDC
DO
Stop Command
24VDC Stopped
Running
Rack-out or Test
DI (Rack-out or Test to Close)
Electrical Failure
(Fail to Close)
Earth Fault
(Earth Fault to Close)
Earthing Switch
(ES Close to Close)
P-Common
Ampere
Transducer
4-20mADC (4-20mA)
(24 VDC
Switchgear Powered)
Notes:
1. All equipment shown in de-energized and racked out position.
2. The interface drawing shows the functional intent. Signals such as Electrical Failure is composed of additional
control signals in series or in parallel e.g. Protection Activated, Circuit Breaker Tripped and etc. to make up the
functional intent of the signal to the DCS.
3. Contact rating ofDCS is DC24V, 2A and AC240V, IA.
4. DI circuit ofDCS is supplied DC24V, 5mA.
5. Internal resistance of DCS AI circuit board is 490 Q.
6. Signal Rack-out or test is connected to Rack-out input ofDCS macro to ensure the breaker can still be operated
from CCR while at Rack-out or test position for testing purpose.
13 / 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 234/765
(1-2) MV Switchgear Equipment (1 OkV, 3kV, with Emergency Stop)
DCS MV SWITCHGEAR
220VAC
Supply 220VDC
DO
Stop Command
Emergency Stop Command
24VDC Stopped
Running
Rack-out or Test
Electrical Failure
(Fail to Close)
Earth Fault
Earthing Switch
(ES Close to Close)
P-Common
Ampere
Transducer
4-20mADC (4-20mA)
(24 VDC
Switchgear Powered)
Notes:
2. The interface drawing shows the functional intent. Signals such as Electrical Failure is composed of
additional control signals in series or in parallel e.g. Protection Activated, Circuit Breaker Tripped and etc. to
make up the functional intent of the signal to the DCS.
6. Emergency Stop Command is driven by BPS
7. Signal Rack-out or Test is connected to Rack-out input of DCS macro to ensure the breaker can still be
operated from CCR while at Rack-out or Test position for testing purpose.
14 / 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 235/765
(2) LV Switchgear Equipment (380V, ~132KW)
DCS SWITCH BOARD

220VAC
Supply 220VDC
Start Command
DO
Stop Command
24VDC Stopped
Running
Rack-out or Test
Electrical Failure
(Fail to Close)
P-Common
Ampere Transducer
(4-20mA)
4-20mADC
(24 VDC
Switchgear Powered)
Notes:
additional control signals in series or in parallel e.g. Protection Activated, Circuit Breaker Tripped and etc. to
make up the functional intent of the signal to the DCS.
5. Internal resistance of DCS AI circuit board is 490 Q
6. Signal "Rack-out or Test" is composed of Rack-out and Test. This signal is connected to Rack-out input of
DCS macro to ensure the breaker can still be operated from CCR while at Rack-out or Test position for
testing purpose.
7. This interface is applied to LV switchgear equipments for above 75KW rated power supply.
15 / 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 236/765
(3-1) AC motor control center equipment (380V, <132KW)
DCS MCC
R 220VAC
T
Stop Command
DO
Start Command
- ~ Holding
Coil
24VDC
Running
DI
Electrical Failure
(Fail to Close)
P-Common
Ampere Transducer
(4-20mA)
4-20mADC
(24 VDC
Switchgear Powered)
Notes:
1. All equipment shown in de-energized condition.
control signals in series or in parallel e.g. Protection Activated, Circuit Breaker Tripped, No Control Voltage
and etc. to make up the functional intent of the signal to the DCS.
DCS macro to ensure the breaker can still be operated from CCR while at Rack-out or Test position for testing
purpose.
6. This interface is applied to AC MCC for above 132KW rated power supply.
16 / 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 231 /765
(3-2) AC motor control center equipment (380V, <132KW)
DCS MCC
R
T
~· 220VAC
~
Stop Command
--- --
DO
I
- --
Start Command
I
--
-- -
-
--
r· - - -1
I
I
L. I
I
I
I
I
9"-J
I
Holding
Coil
r
24VDC
-- -- ~ Running
DI
- -- ~ Electrical Failure
(Fail to Close)
-- -- P-Common
Notes:
1. 1 equipment shown in de-energized condition.
control signals in series or in parallel e.g. Protection Activated, Circuit Breaker Tripped, No Control Voltage
and etc. to make up the functional intent of the signal to the DCS.
DCS macro to ensure the breaker can still be operated from CCR while at Rack-out or Test position for testing
purpose.
6. This interface is applied to AC MCC for below 132KW rated power supply.
17 / 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 238/765
(4) DC Motor Control Center Equipment (220VDC)

DCS DCMCC
240VAC
Supply
---------- DC220V
Stop Command
DO
Start Command
Holding
Coil
24VDC
Running
Electrical Failure
DI (Fail to Close)
P-Common
Notes:
control signals in series or in parallel e.g. Protection Activated, Circuit Breaker Tripped and etc. to make up the
functional intent of the signal to the DCS.
18 / 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 239/765
(5-1) Motor operated valve (AC, with Position Transmitter)
DCS Local
i=======f=t-~-
________3:_(fJ=4_W___3_8_0=V=A=C
Li Converter
(380VAC/24VDC)
Open Command
DO
Close Command
CL OL
Remote Selected
24VDC
Electrical Failure
(Fail to Close)
DI Open Limit
Close Limit
Over Torque (Open)

Over Torque (Close)
Position
Indication
Transmitter
4-20mADC (4-20mA)
(24 VDC DCS Powered)
Notes:
1. No limit switch operated and no torque switch operated.
2. The interface drawing shows the functional intent. Signals such as Electrical Failure may be
composed of additional control signals in series or in parallel.
3. Jumper cable described as dashed line is needed, when motor operated valve is torque seating
type.
4. Contact rating of DCS is DC24V, 2A and AC240V, IA.
5. DI circuit of DCS is supplied DC24V, 5mA.
7. This interface is applied to AC Motor Operated Valves which equip with Position transmitter.
19 / 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 240/765
(5-2) Motor operated valve (AC, without Position Transmitter)
DCS Local
i=======f-t--~-
________3=(/J=4_W___3_8_0=V=A=C
Li Converter
(380VAC/24VDC)
Open Command
DO
Close Command
CL OL
Remote Selected
24VDC
Electrical Failure
(Fail to Close)
DI Open Limit
Close Limit
Over Torque (Open)

Over Torque (Close)
Notes:
3. Jumper cable described as dashed line is needed, when motor operated valve is torque seating type.
7. This interface is applied to Motor operated valves, which don't equip with Position transmitter.
20 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 241/765
(6-1) Motor Operated Valve (DC, with Position Transmitter)
DCS Local
DC220V _ _ _ _ ;
______
t _
J__L Transformar
(220V/24 VDC)
Open Command
DO
Close Command
CL OL
Remote Selected
24VDC
Electrical Failure
(Fail to Close)
DI
Open Limit
Close Limit
Over Torque (Open)

Over Torque (Close)
Position
Indication
Transmitter
4-20 mADC
(4-20mA)
Notes:
3. Jumper cable described as dashed line is needed, when motor operated valve is torque seating type.
7. This interface is applied to Motor operated valves, which equip with Position transmitter.
21 / 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 242/765
(6-2) Motor Operated Valve (DC, without Position Transmitter)
DCS Local
DC220V _ _ _ _ ;
______
t _
J__l Transformar
(220V/24VDC)
Open Command
DO
Close Command
CL OL
Remote Selected
24VDC
Electrical Failure
(Fail to Close)
DI
Open Limit
Close Limit
Over Torque (Open)

Over Torque (Close)
Notes:
3. Jumper cable described as dashed line is needed, when motor operated valve is torque seating
type.
6. Internal resistance ofDCS AI circuit board is 500 Q.
7. This interface is applied to Motor operated valves, which don't equip with Position transmitter.
22 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 243/765
(7-1) Single Coil Solenoid Valve (Pneumatic/Hydraulic On-Off Valve)
DCS LOCAL
24VDC/220VAC
Supply
DO
OPEN or
CLOSE
COMMAND
Valve or Equipment
Open Limit
DI {
Close Limit
24VDC
Notes:
1. All equipment shown in de-energized state.
2. No limit switch operated.
4. Power supply from DCS to each solenoid valve is DC24V for below 30W and AC240V equal and
above 30W.
6. Valve/equipment move to safe position in accordance with philosophy of safe operation,
when power supply is failed.
7. There are types of only one side limit switch at open or close end.
For example, Non return valve is usually installed a limit switch at open or close end only.
23 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 244/765
(7-2) Single Coil Solenoid Valve (Air Operated Motor)
DCS LOCAL
DO
OPEN or
CLOSE
COMMAND
Air Operated Motor
Notes:
above 30W.
6. Valve/equipment move to safe position in accordance with philosophy of safe operation,
when power supply is failed.
24 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 245/765
(8-1) Double Coil Solenoid valve (General)
DCS LOCAL
24 VDC/240VAC
Supply
DO
3l
:::,
OPEN u.
COMMAND
CLOSE
COMMAND
Valve or Equipment
Open Limit
DI {
Close Limit
24VDC
Notes:
above 30W.
6. Open or close position of valve/equipment is maintained, when power supply is failed.
25 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 246/765
(8-2) Double Coil Solenoid valve (Mill Cut Damper, Burner Gun)
DCS LOCAL
24 VDC/220VAC
Supply
Q)
Cl)
::J
u.
DO
3l
::J
OPEN u.
COMMAND
CLOSE
COMMAND
No.I No.I
Valve or Equipment
No. I Open Limit
No. I Close Limit
DI
24VDC ------------+--f----- No.2 Open Limit
No.2 Close Limit
Notes:
3. Contact rating of DCS is DC24V, 2A and AC240V, lA.
above 30W.
6. Open or close position of valve/equipment is maintained, when power supply is failed.
26 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 247/765
(9) Pneumatic Modulating Control Valve (Fail-Close/Fail-Open)
DCS Actuator
4-20mADC
(24VDCDCS
Powered)
Position
e,----t-t--------------
Command e,---------------- Air Supply
Position Indication
Transmitter
AI (4-20mA)
4-20mADC (If Applicable)
27 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 248/765
(10-1) Pneumatic Modulating Control Valve (Fail-Lock, with Position Transmitter)
DCS Actuator
Air Fail Lock Valve
4-20mADC
(24VDCDCS
Powered)
Position
Command Air Supply
Position Indication
Transmitter
AI (4-20mA)
Air Pressure Low

(Air Fail to Close)
24:C {------------------ Air Pressure Not Low

For Burnout Detection
Notes:
28 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 249/765
(10-2) Pneumatic Modulating Control Valve (Fail-Lock, without Position Transmitter)
DCS A
Air Fail Lock Valve
4-20mADC
(24VDCDCS
Powered)
Position
Command Air Supply
Air Pressure Low

(Air Fail to Close)
24:C {---------------- Air Pressure Not Low

For Burnout Detection
Notes:
29 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 250/765
(10-3) Pneumatic Modulating Control Valve (Fail-Lock, with Separate 1/P Converter)
DCS
Air Fail Lock Valve
Air Supply
4-20mADC
(24VDCDCS
Powered)
Position
Command
Position Indication
Transmitter
AI (4-20mA)
Air Pressure Low for 1/P

(Air Fail to Close)
Air Pressure Not Low fo
1/P for Burnout Detection
DI
Air Pressure Low for
24VDC Positioner (Air Fail to
Close)
Air Pressure Not Low fo
Positioner for Burnout
Detection
Notes:
1, No limit switch operated.
30 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 251/765
(11) MCWP Outlet Valve (Hydraulic Valve)
DCS Local Control Panel
24VDC
Open Command
Close Command
DO
Open
24VDC Close
Remote
DI
(Remote to Close)
Hydraulic Supply Unit In
Service (In Service to Close
Common Alarm
(Alarm to Close)
P-Common
Notes:
31 / 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 252/765
(12-1) MV Incomer (1 OkV, Unit SWGR)

DCS SWITCHGEAR
220VAC
Supply
220VDC
Close Command
IL
ST
SP~
NEUTRAL
DO
Ooen 52
EARY-U
SYNC CHECK OK
-------------f" CB Ooen
CB Close
Rack-out or Test
(Rack-out or Test to Close)
Electrical Failure
(Fail to Close)
PROTECTION RELAY
FAILURE (FAIL TO CLOSE)
No Control Voltage
(Fail to Close)
24VDC INCOMER UNDER VOLTAGE
DI (Fail to Close)
VT MCB Tripped
(Trip to Close)
Earthing Switch Close

(ES Close to Close)
P-Common
AI
4-20mADC
(24 VDC Switchgear P
-Power (W)
- Ampere
- Voltage )
- Var (Var
r)
Transducers for
x 3Phase
Watt-Hour Transducer
(Pulse)
PI

control signals in series or in parallel e.g. Protection Activated, Circuit Breaker Tripped and etc. to make up
the functional intent of the signal to the DCS.
5. Internal resistance of DCS AI circuit board is 490 Q .
6. Synchro(43-25) as Synchronization Check is applied for 1 lkV unit boards incoming breaker only.
7. Signal Rack-out is connected to Rack-out input of DCS macro to ensure the breaker can still be operated from
CCR while at Rack-out position for testing purpose.
32 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 253/765
(12-2) MV Incomer (1 OkV, Station SWGR)
220VAC
Supply
220VDC
IL
ST
SP~
NR1JTRAT,
DO
52
FARY-TT
SYNC CHECK OK
--------------=t' CB Onen
CB Close
Rack-out or Test
Electrical Failure
(Fail to Close)
PROTECTION RELAY
FAILURE (FAIL TO CLOSE)
No Control Voltage
(Fail to Close)
24VDC INCOMER UNDER VOLTAGE
DI (Fail to Close)
VT MCB Tripped
(Trip to Close)

(ES Close to Close)
P-Common
Transducers for
-Power (W)
4-20 mADC - Ampere~) x 3Phase
(24 VDC Switchgear P - Voltage )
AI _ ,r.:.r {Vc,r
Watt-Hour Transducer
(Pulse)
PI Watt-Hour Transducer
i.......;.;....;;..;;..._...... (Pulse)
Notes:
control signals in series or in parallel e.g. Protection Activated, Circuit Breaker Tripped and etc. to make up
the functional intent of the signal to the DCS.
6. One DI signal of "AC MCB Tripped" is commonly provided for each MV bus.
7. Signal Rack-out is connected to Rack-out input of DCS macro to ensure the breaker can still be operated from
CCR while at Rack-out position for testing purpose.
33 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 254/765
(13) MV Incomer (3kV)
DCS SWITCHGEAR
220VAC
Supply 220VDC
DO
Ooen Co mand
CB Close
Rack-out or Test
Electrical Failure
(Fail to Close)
Protection Relay Failure
Incoming Under Voltage
(Fail to Close)
24VDC
DI No Control Voltage
(Fail to Close)
VT MCB Tripped
(Trio to Close)
Earth Fault
(ES Close to Close)
P-Common
- - ~ Transducers for
-Power (W)
- Ampere~) x 3Phase
4-20 mADC - Voltage )
AI (24 VDC Switchgear Powered) - Var (Var
Notes:
additional control signals in series or in parallel e.g. Protection Activated, Circuit Breaker Tripped and etc.
to make up the functional intent of the signal to the DCS.
34 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 255/765
(14) MV Feeder (1 OkV, 3kV)
DCS EAR
220VAC
220VDC
Supply
Close Command
DO
Onen Co mand
CB Ooen
CB Close
Rack-out or Test
24VDC
DI Electrical Failure
(Fail to Close)
Earth Fault
•------+-------------------- Earthing Switch Close

(ES Close to Close)
P-Common
Ampere Transducer
(4-20mA)
AI 4-20mADC
(24 VDC Switchgear Powered)
Notes:
35 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 256/765
(15) MV lnterconnector (3kV)
DCS SWITCHGEAR
220VAC
Supply 220VDC
Close Command
DO
Open Com and
CB Open
CB Close
Rack-out or Test
24VDC Electrical Failure
DI (Fail to Close)

•-----+------------------
(ES Close to Close)
P-Common
Ampere Transducer
AI x 3 Phase (4-20mA)
4-20 mADC
Notes:
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 251 /765
(16) LV Incomer
DCS SWITCHGEAR
220VAC 220VDC
Supply
Close Command
DO
Ooen Co mand
----------------t--
CB Close
Rack-out or Test
24VDC --------+------------------"---- Electrical Failure
DI rv~il tn rlrn1p\
No Control Voltage
(Fail to Close)
No Busbar Voltage
rv~il tn rlm:p\
Incomirnz Under Volta~rn

P-Common
Ampere Transducer
4-20mADC (4-20mA)
Voltage Transducer
(4-20mA)
4-20 mADC
AI
BUS Voltage Transducer
(4-20mA)
4-20 mADC
Notes:
2. The interface drawing shows the functional intent. Signals such as Electrical Failure is composed of additional control signals
in series or in parallel e.g. Protection Activated, Circuit Breaker Tripped and etc. to make up the functional intent of the signal
to the DCS.
3. Contact rating ofDCS is DC24V, 2A and AC240V, IA
5. Internal resistance ofDCS AI circuit board is 4900.
6. Signal "Rack-out or Test" is composed of Rack-out and Test. This signal is connected to Rack-out input of DCS macro to
ensure the breaker can still be operated from CCR while at Rack-out or Test position for testing purpose.
**:i:e~i±iliE 37 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 258/765
(17) LV Switchgear Feeder

SWITCHGEAR
DCS
220VAC
Supply
220VDC
Close Command
DO
Open Command
52
TC
CB Open
24VDC CB Close
DI
Rack-out or Test
Electrical Failure
(Fail to Close)
P-Common
Ampere Transducer
AI (4-20mA)
4-20mADC
Notes:
testing purpose.
38 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 259/765
(18) LV lnterconnector
DCS SWITCHGEAR
220VAC
Supply
220VDC
Close Command
DO
Open Command
CB Open
24VDC
CB Close
DI
Rack-out or Test
Electrical Failure
(Fail to Close)
P-Common
Ampere Transducer
AI (4-20mA)
4-20 mADC
Notes:
testing purpose.
39 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
Atta~'t¥/W~Hi~.'B 2 260/765
GENERATOR
(19) GCB /TRANSFORMER
DCS PROTECTION PANEL GCB
220VAC
Supply GCP
220VDC
IL
_Jopen Command
D01
52
Close Command
(Auto Synchro.)
IL
GCB Open
GCB Close
24VDC Remote selected

(Remote to Close)
DI
SF6 Press Low
(Press Low to Close)
GCB Trouble
(Trouble to Close)
Blocking SF6
(Blocking to Close)
AC Circuit Failure
(Fail to Close)
Control Circuit Failure
(Fail to Close)
DS Open
(DS open to Close)
ES Line Side Close
(ES close to Close)
ES Gen Side Close
(ES close to Close)
Phase Sequence Relay
(Fail to Close)
--1----------------------1----~ P-Common
otes:
additional control signals in series or in parallel e.g. Protection Activated, Circuit Breaker Tripped and
etc. to make up the functional intent of the signal to the DCS.
5. GCB Trouble is a DI signal described from group of Electrical/ Mechanical trouble, which are not
separately provided, such as Hydraulic pump failure and Motors failure.
6. All digital inputs and pulse inputs cables will be over-all shielded and earthed at DCS.
40 I 40
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 261/765
Attachment-6 : General Electrical Equipment Requirements
Attachment-6.1 : General Specification for A.C and D.C. Motors.

Attachment-6.2 : Motor operated valve inner wiring diagram.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 262/765
Attachment-6.1: General Specification for A.C. and D.C. Motors
Approval on PDM
TOSHIBA SPC-GEH-XITS-0003 Rev.O
~ fi B ff
25 /Jan./ 2016
DATE ISSUED
~~/~fiffi:~ 0/# M211995
JOB/QUOT. NO. 0/# M211996
CUSTOMER Sumitomo Corporation

TANJUNG JATI 'B' Re-Expansion Project
PLANT
UNIT 5 & 6 2 x 1000 MW
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
TITLE FOR
A.C. AND D.C. MOTORS

contains Toshiba's intellectual property including
know-how. It shall not be disclosed to any third party,
copied, reproduced, used for unauthorized purposes nor
Toshiba Corporation
Cl)
4
:z
-
Cl
C l)
>
3
LJ.J
c::
~ 2
tl.;I
1
@I ~ B it tc !Jlrl ~ :j:_§_ 3
REV. NO. DATE *
CONTENTS * iji
APROVED BY CHECKED BY REVISED BY
ij2 :;ffj" ,16 Plant Engineering Group
DISTRIBUTION
Ka-chohin 1
~ 1T ~ EI ectr i ca I Engineering Dept.
ISSUED BY Therma I & Hydro Power Systems &
Ka-PU 1 Ka-Chotatsu 1 Service Div.
i~,
*APPROVED BY
W.Nakarnura
tJlrl ~
CHECKED BY
W.Nakarnura
:j:_§_ 3
PREPARED BY
A.Matsumoto
**~1H·±Jli~ 1115
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
SPC-GEH-XIT5-0003
TOSHIBA SPC-GEH-XITS-0003 Rev. 0
***** CONTENTS *****
1. :PlJRJ>()SE: ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
2. Ci-E:NE:~I., ------------------------------------------------------------- 3
3. ME:DIUM V()I.,TACi-E: M()T()RS ------------------------------- 4
4. I.,()W V()I.,TACi-E: M()T()RS ------------------------------- 7
5. BE:ARINCi-S -------------------------------------- 9
6. TE:RMINAI., ARRAN Ci-E:ME:NT -------------------------------------- 9
7. M()NIT()RINCi- ----------------------------------------------------- 9
8. N()ISE: I.,E:VE:I., ----------------------------------------------- 9
9. C()ATINCi- (:PAINT) ----------------------------------------------------------- 10
10. TE:STS AND INS:PE:CTl()NS ------------------------------------------ 10
Attachment - 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------- 11
Attachment - 2 --------------------------------------------------------------- 12
Attachment - 3 14
Attachment - 4 15
2/15
© Toshiba Corporation 2016, All Rights Reserved 2 / 15
Approval on PDM
SPC-GEH-XIT5-0003
1. PURPOSE
This document specified the design conditions and technical requirements of AC and DC motors, which
are provided to Tanjung Jati 'B' Re-Expansion Project Unit 5 & 6.
2. GENERAL
( 1) Codes and Standards

IEC-60034-1 (2010), IS01680 (2013) and 10816 (1995)
(2) Frame Size

To comply to IEC standards
3/15
© Toshiba Corporation 2016, All Rights Reserved 3 I 15
Approval on PDM
SPC-GEH-XIT5-0003
3. Medium Voltage Motors

(1) Ratings
Voltage rating for AC Motors
Above 150 kW to 1000 kW 3kV
Above 1000 kW lOkV
Continuous delivery and rated power at voltage range between 90% and 110% of the rated voltage at
the rated frequency within the thermal limits of insulation class B.
Phase System AC Motor 3 Phase, 3 Wires
Frequency (AC Motor) 50 Hz± 5%
(2) Starting
Starting Method
Starting current max. 550% of the rated current
Consecutive Numbers of Motor Starting:
(3) Insulation Class and Temperature Rise

(4) Enclosure Type

Degree of protection (motor and terminal box)
Indoor motor min. IP44 with terminal box IP54
Outdoor motor min. IP54
(5) Space Heater

Voltage rating 220V AC, lph
Applications All MV motors
4/15
© Toshiba Corporation 2016, All Rights Reserved 4 I 15
Approval on PDM
SPC-GEH-XIT5-0003
(6) Connections, Star-point terminal boxes etc.

For all motors with a rating of 2000kW or above a differential relay for winding protection shall be
provided and installed in the associated switchgear. In that case, the star-point connection shall be
brought out separately to terminals. The differential current transformers are to be designed to class
SP 10 with a rating matched to the protection system.
The vendor shall supply the CT's which are accommodate in the star-point terminal box.
(7) Bearings
Motors with ratings below 2000 kW shall be provided with roller bearings and with a lubricator and
lubricant supply regulator fitted with solid brass cages, that can be refilled while the machine is
runnmg.
Large motors with rated outputs greater than 2000 kW shall be fitted, as far as possible, with sleeve
bearings. Motors with sleeve bearings and smaller than 4000 kW shall preferably be provided with a
constant level gravity fed type oil lubrication system with reservoir and oil breather, whereas for
larger motors oil supply to the bearings must be ensured by means of an lubrication oil pump.
lubrication oil pump type: 2000 hours
Coupling
The motor shaft halves of the couplings, finish-bored, balanced, and complete with key ways are to
be drawn on to the motor shaft and balanced out together with the rotor.
Cooling
Air cooling for the motors is the preferred method. Where water-cooling is applied, conditioned and
treated, water shall be used.
Running quality
The running quality must be within the classification of "Class C, Zone A" according to the ISO
10816-1 or equivalent, i.e. the vibration velocity must be not greater than 1.8 mm/s (rms).
5/15
Approval on PDM
SPC-GEH-XIT5-0003
Reverse speed
If reverse running can occur in the case of equipment driven by a motor (e.g. cooling water pump),
the motor must be designed for maximum possible reverse speed.
6/15
Approval on PDM
4. Low Voltage Motors

(1) Ratings
Voltage rating
AC Motors, Up to 150 kW 380V AC
DC Motors 220VDC
Continuous delivery and rated power at voltage range between 90% and 110% of the rated voltage at
the rated frequency within the thermal limits of insulation class B.
Phase System
AC Motor 3 Phase, 3 Wires
DC Motor 2 Wires
Frequency (AC Motor) 50 Hz± 5%
(2) Starting
Starting Method
Insulation Class and Temperature Rise
Consecutive Numbers of Motor Starting :

(Actual starting current will be limited to the suitable values for acceptable voltage drop level)
Insulation Class and Temperature Rise
Temperature rise As per the requirement of Class F Insulation
7/15
Approval on PDM
(3) Enclosure Type

Degree of protection (motor and terminal box)
Indoor motor min. IP44
Outdoor motor min. IP54
(4) Space Heater

Voltage rating 220V AC, lph
Applications All motors installed outdoor
8/15
Approval on PDM
SPC-GEH-XIT5-0003
5. Bearings
All bearings for motors except sealed ball bearing shall be accessible for inspection, maintenance
and replacement.
The type of bearing such as sleeve, roller or ball shall be applied as per motor manufacturer's
standard, which shall be of proven design and well experienced.
Motors that have a forced oil lubrication system shall have oil rings that provide for a short time
operation without the lubrication system in operation.
To prevent shaft-circulating currents, one or both bearings shall be insulated from motor frame.
6. Terminal Arrangement
Terminal box will be made of cast iron or sheet steel, suitable to accommodate termination of motor
lead and located on the motor appropriately. Cable connection to the terminal will be stud type
unless otherwise specified.
Terminal housing will have the IP degree equal to or exceeding the motor's IP degree.
Cable entry will be explosion-proof packing type if explosion- proof enclosure is required.
Motor will be provided with the earthing terminals of sufficient size and conveniently located on
the motor frame and inside of the terminal box.
7. MONITORING
(1) Six Pt 100 RTD shall be provided for stator slot temperature measurement for all MV motors.
8. NOISE LEVEL
(1) The noise level shall not exceed 82dB(A) at lm away from motor frame and under the full
load operating conditions.
9/15
Approval on PDM
SPC-GEH-XIT5-0003
9. COATING (PAINT)
(1) Later
10. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
The test items listed in the Attachment-3 for AC motors and the Attachment-4 for DC motors shall
be carried out at works.
10/15
Approval on PDM
SPC-GEH-XIT5-0003
Attachment- 1
Drawings, data and manuals for the motors shall be submitted as indicated below.
a) Complete motor data. (To fulfill attached motor data sheet, Attachment-2.)
b) Outline Drawing
c) Foundation Plan and Loading
d) Cable end box details
e) Characteristics Curves and Outline Drawings of Current Transformers
f) Space Requirement for Rotor Removal
g) Starting and Speed Torque Characteristics at 80%, 90%, and 100% voltage.
h) Efficiency Curves
i) Packing Lists
j) Erection and Maintenance Manuals
k) Type test report
1) Other necessary Documents (if required)
11/15
Approval on PDM
SPC-GEH-XIT5-0003
Attachment - 2
1. Manufacturer
2. Service name
3. System Identification Number
4. Type
5. Output(kW) (kW)
6. Voltage (V)
7. Normal current (A)
8. Number of pole
9. Rated power factor
10. Speed (rpm) Synchronous/ Rated speed (rpm)
11. IP Class
12. Locked rotor current (A)
13. Starting time (second) (sec)
14. Load characteristics
1) Efficiency at 100% load..___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. . .,(......
%"+)-
at 75% load _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _____.(~06i~)..__
at50%load _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _____.(~o6i~)..__
at25%load _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _____.(~o6i~)..__
2) Power factor
at rated condition
at starting condition
15. Service factor
16. Insulation class E Class
17. Temperature rise limited to B Class insulation
18. Location (Indoor / Out door)
19. Noise level at full load conditions 82 dB(A)
20. Direction of rotation (viewed from non-coupling . .s. ..id
. . .....e_,_)___________
21. Slip at Full load condition (%)
2
22. GD (kg-rrf) (kg-ru)
23. Load ratio: Load torque at motor rated slip X 100.....,(,.....%....,)_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Motor rated torque
24. Stator winding connection Wye or Delta
25. Lubrication type
Grease brand / type
26. Weight (kg)
12/15
Approval on PDM
SPC-GEH-XIT5-0003
Number of start allowed from cold condition per _ha....1_1t_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _c_a....J_d_

Number of start allowed from hot condition per hour _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _H_ot_ _
2 7. Minimum time between 2 starts
28. Max. allowable time at locked rotor condition
1) Hot condition (sec.)
2) Cold condition (sec.)
29. Numbers of starting times per year (guaranteed)
30. Space heater (AC 220V 1 phase) Yes/No KW
31. Attachment document number
1) Outline drawing
2) Terminal Box drawings
( For main power, space heater, instruments etc.)
-------------
3) Characteristics Curves of CT
4) Outline drawing of CT and terminal strip with
short-circuit links
5) Efficiency curves
6) Thermal curve of the motor from cold condition (thermal state= 0%)and from
hot condition (thermal state = 90%)
7) Rotor stalled curve at Uh and 0.8Un
8) Starting and speed torque characteristics at 80%, 90% and 100% voltage.
13/15
Approval on PDM
PNGMH0272j &e~. 2 276/765
!Attachment-'.~ Ajtacnment-o. I
SPC-GE H-XIT 5-0003
Inspection and Test item Verification

Category Major Package System Equipment Name Applied Standard manufacturer Remarks
Owner TSB
Visual inspection Approved drawings w w
Dimension check Approved drawings and Manu.std w w
Measurement of winding resistance Procedure approved by purchaser W w
Locked rotor test !EC 60034 w w
No-load test !EC 60034 w w
Direction of rotation !EC 60034 w w
Measurement of noise level !EC 60034 W*1 W*1
Measurement of vibration !EC 60034 w w
Over speed test !EC 60034 w w
Determination of characteristics !EC 60034 w w
Temperature rise test !EC 60034 W*1 W*1
Power frequency voltage withstand test on the !EC 60034 w w
main circuit
*1 :Each type motor
HV Motor Power frequency voltage withstand test on the !EC 60034 w w *2:Vertical motor only
auxiliary circuit
Measurement of insulation resistance on the Procedure approved by purchaser W w
main circuit(Before and after power frequency
voltage withstand test)
Measurement of insulation resistance on the Procedure approved by purchaser W w
auxiliary circuit(Before and after power
frequency voltage withstand test)
Measurement of bearing insulation (At ground Procedure approved by purchaser W w
and unground condition)
Measurement of shaft voltage Procedure approved by purchaser W w
Measurement of natural frequency Procedure approved by purchaser W*2 W*2
Polarity test of CT !EC 60044 w w

CT ratio test !EC 60044 w w
Painting inspection Specification w w
Shipping inspection Procedure approved by purchaser W w
Visual inspection Approved drawings R R
Dimension check Approved drawings and Manu.std R R
Measurement of winding resistance !EC 60034 R R
I AC Motor
I Locked rotor test
No-load test
Direction of rotation
!EC 60034
!EC 60034
!EC 60034
R
R
R
R
R
R
Measurement of noise level !EC 60034 R*1 R*1
Measurement of vibration !EC 60034 R R
Over speed test !EC 60034 R R
Determination of characteristics !EC 60034 R R
Temperature rise test !EC 60034 R*1 R*1 *1 :Each type motor
LV Motor
Power frequency voltage withstand test !EC 60034 R R *2:Vertical motor only
Measurement of insulation resistance !EC 60034 R R
(Before and after power frequency voltage
withstand test)
Measurement of bearing insulation (At ground !EC 60034 R R
and unground condition)
Measurement of shaft voltage !EC 60034 R R
Measurement of natural frequency !EC 60034 R*2 R*2
Painting inspection Specification R R
Measurement of the ratio !EC 60044 R R

Measurement of error and magnetization !EC 60044 R R
characteristic
Measurement of burden !EC 60044 R R
CT Power frequency voltage withstand test !EC 60044 R R
Measurement of insulation resistance !EC 60044 R R
Measurement of winding resistance !EC 60044 R R

Measurement of resistance Manu. Std R R
Accessary
Measurement of insulation resistance Manu. Std R R
(WTD,BTD,Space Heater etc)
Power frequency voltage withstand test Manu. Std R R
Function test Manu. Std R R
Equipments and devices for test of Certification data Manu. Std R R 14 / 15

factory .
ftfJf,.H uva 1 on PDM
Att~~~m~H-t!-te.'t 2 2111165
IAttachment-4 SPC-GE H-XIT 5-0003
I
Inspection and Test item Verification

Category Major Package System Equipment Name Applied Standard manufacturer Remarks
Owner TSB
Measurement of winding resistance Procedure approved by purchaser R R
Measurement of air gap IEC 60034 R R
No-load test IEC 60034 R R
Direction of rotation [EC 60034 R R
Measurement of noise level IEC 60034 R R
Measurement of vibration IEC 60034 R R
Over speed test [EC 60034 R R
Load -speed test IEC 60034 R R
Motor
Temperature rise test IEC 60034 R R
Power frequency voltage withstand test IEC 60034 R R
Measurement of insulation resistance(Before Procedure approved by purchaser R R
and after power frequency voltage withstand
I DC Motor
I test)
Over load test [EC 60034 R R
Determination of characteristics IEC 60034 R R
Painting inspection Specification R R
Shipping inspection Procedure approved by purchaser R R

Measurement of resistance Manu. Std R R
Accessary Measurement of insulation resistance Manu. Std R R
(WTD,BTD,Space Heater etc) Power frequency voltage withstand test Manu. Std R R
Function test Manu. Std R R
Equipments and devices for test of Certification data Manu. Std R R

factory
15 / 15
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 278/765
Attachment-6.2: Motor Operated Valve Inner Wiring Diagram
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 279/765
Attachment-6.2
TOSHIBA SPC-GIH-XIT3-0008 Rev.3
9E 1'r B ft
DATE ISSUED . 6.Mar.2009
~iiV~fJ{!;:%
QI# NAX000004
JOB/QUOT.NO.
0/# M210463/M210464
~ $'c ~
CUSTOMER
P.T. CENTRAL JAVA POWER
/7/r-~ TANJUNG JATI 'B' COAL-FIRED POWER STATION
PLANT
UNIT 3 & 4 2 x 660 MW (NET)
MOTOR OPERATED VALVE INNER WIRING DIAGRAM
gp P. T. CENTRAL JAVA POWER

TANJUNG JATI 'B' COAL-FIRED POWER STATION
UNITS 3 & 4 2 x 660MW(NET)
• SUMITOMO CORPORATION
IRevl 3
Ai 0 0 I T s 5 4 5 2

intellectual property including know-how. It shall not be disclosed to any third
party, copied, reproduced, used for unauthorized purposes nor modified
AS BUILT without prior written consent of Toshiba.
Toshiba Corporation
4
Cl)
z
0
Cl) 3 9.Jun.'09 Refer to sheet 7 M.Fukui K.Mukoyama K.Sugawara
>
UJ
c:::
2 6.Mar.'09 Refer to sheet 7 K.Hayashida K.Mukoyama K.Sugawara
]S{
-1€,~ 1 17.Sep.'08 Refer to sheet 7. K.Hayashida K.Mukoyama K.Sugawara
@] ~ f.t !c :lJ w f)al 1:£ m ~

REV.NO.
B
DATE CONTENTS *
APROVED
BY
Jl)L/'\
CHECKED
BY
REVISED
BY
!'Je, ~ n;
DISTRIBUTION
KAI-Pl-P 1 TA-HAI 1 2HATSUSHI 1
~ 1T ~, Thermal Power Plant Project
Engineering Dept.
ISSUED BY Electricity & Instrument
SC 1 KAI-Pl-M 1 NETSUSETSU 1 DENSE 1 Design Group
w Y.Ishizaki
Fichtner 1 KAI-Pl-IC 1 * l=)li::.'\
APPROVED BY 9.Sep.'08
f)al 1:£ K.Mukoyama
KAI-Pl-E 1
CHECKED BY 9.Sep.'08
KAI-Pl-F 1 DENKEISETSU 1
m ~ K.Sugawara
PREPARED BY 9.Sep.'08
**I.t~i±. ~ 1 / 7
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 280/765
Attachment-6.2
CONTENTS
AC LIMIT SEATING (AC380V) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3
AC TORQUE SEATING (AC380V) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 4
AC LIMIT SEATING (AC220V) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5
AC TORQUE SEATING (AC220V) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 6
Reference drawings
·BASIC INTERFACE CONCEPT FOR CONTROLLERS· · · · · · · · · · · · · · A-00-I-TS-7652

SPC-GCH-XIT3-0003
2 I 7
Approval on PDM
(\C .\!OTOH)
DC24\'
*l
*l
*2
*2
S.11
(NOTE. 6)
49X
1 :LOCAL "
w --
o 1
_ :·~~·-;_:_E~-
r
o:orr
2 :HE.\IOTE
~~,~~1--------~
(NOTE. 2)
4 \hb 10
880 49X
(~OTE. 4)
TC
HISE '.380V/DC24V HISE

w
~
--1
POWER OPEN LOCAL CLOSE CLOSE OPEN OVER ELECTHIC!\L POSITION

SOURCE CO:vLvL\ND SELECTED CO.i!.vL\ND LL\IIT LL\IIT TORQUE fAILUHE THANS.\IITTEH
(,\C:380\' 50Ilz) (rrm.\l DCS) (TO DCS) (rHCl.\l DCS) (TO DCS) (TO DCS) (TO DCS) (TO DCS) (TO DCS)
NOTE
VALVE l'osi lion (%) 1. Valve shown in fully closed position.
V,\LVE Ccntact Flll't 1.WIE 0 100 J1YnPEI function
\o. This diagram is integral control type.
1
2
f-- -
-
I - - - - -I - - - -
BY-P,\SS CIR.
- - IND. LIGIIT
(ha)
(hb)
2.Position Transmitter should be installed if ""'Cl
::z:
OPEN 3
4
-- - - - -1 - - - - - SP,\HE
- - OPEN LL\IIT (hb)
"\!OTOH OPERATED VALVE SPECffICATION LIST" required.
'.t TO:OPEN Direction Torque Switch
G.>
C/:Es:
r-ca:
5 -- - - - - 1 - -
-
- - INDIC!\TION (ha)
TC:CLOSE Direction Torque Switch (")_O
>
6
7
8 --
-- ---
- - SPARE
- - - - - - BY-PASS crn.
IND. LIGIIT
(lb)
Oa)
4. Electrical failure contact (49X) make in
power fa i 1ure.
5. TI!. OL contacts break in thermal over load ~
~
Ir-.::,
0.........i
-- ---
"C CLOSE 9 - - - - - - SP,\HE (\lotor thermal Switches)
"C
~
......
0
<
10
11
12
--- f-- - - I---- - -
CLOSE LL\IIT
INDICATION
SPARE
(la)
(lb)
6. S.11 (Space lleater) should be installed if
":vtOTOH OPERATED VALVE SPECffICATION LIST" required.
7.Lamps color should be below
f-f'D
~
Q)
Open RED ~
Close GHEEN
0
contact close (make)
contact open (break) Torque ORANGE (A\IBEH) 8N
0~
::::s AC LIMIT SEATING ro-.......
""'Cl
c::,
(AC380V) .........i
C')
:s:: c.n
(\C .\!OTOH)
DC24V
*l
*l
*2
*2
S.11
(NOTE. 6)
49X
1 :LOCAL "
o:orr
2 :HE.\IOTE
w --o 1
_ :·~~·-;_:_E~-
~~,~~1--------~
(NOTE. 2)
4 \hb
880 49X
(~OTE. 4)
TC
HISE '.380V/DC24V HISE

,.p,.
~
--1

SOURCE CO:vLvL\ND SELECTED CO.i!.vL\ND LL\IIT LL\IIT TORQUE fAILURE THANS.\IITTER
(,\C:380V 50Ilz) (rrm.\l DCS) (TO DCS) (rHCl.\l DCS) (TO DCS) (TO DCS) (TO DCS) (TO DCS) (TO DCS)
VAL\'l l'osi lion (%) NOTE

V,\LVE Ccntact Flll't 1.WIE 0 100 J1YnPEI function L Valve shown in fully closed position.
\o.
1
2
f-- - I - - - - -I - - - -
-
BY-P,\SS CIR.
--
IND. LIGIIT
(ha)
(hb)
This diagram is integral control type.
2.Position Transmitter should be installed if
""'Cl
::z:
OPEN 3
4
-- - - - -1 - - - - -
SP,\HE
".\!OTOH OPERATED VALVE SPECffICATION LIST" required.
G.>
C/:Es:
r-ca:
5 -- - - - -1 - - - - -
INDIC!\TION (ha)
(")_O
--
TC:CLOSE Direction Torque Switch
6 - - SPARE Ir-.::,
-- ---
4. Electrical failure contact (49X) make in 0.........i
7 - - - - - - BY-PASS crn. (lb) power fa i 1ure. ~
> 8 IND. LIGIIT Oa) ~
-- ---
"C - - - - - - SP,\HE 5. TI!. OL contacts break in thermal over load
CLOSE 9
"C (\lot or thermal Switches)
~
......
0
<
10
11
12
--- f-- - - I---- - -
SP,\HE
INDICATION
SPARE
(lb) 6. S.11 (Space lleater) should be installed if
":vtOTOR OPERATED VALVE SPECffICATION LIST" required.
f-f'D
~
Q)
?.Lamps color should be below ~
contact close (make) Open
Close
RED
GHEEN 8N
~
0 contact open (break)
::::s Torque Oft\NGE (A\IBEH) AC TORQUE SEATING ro-.......
""'Cl
c::,
(AC380V) .........i
C')
:s:: c.n
(\C .\!OTOH)
DC24V
*l
*l
*2
*2
S.11
(NOTE. 6)
49X
1 :LOCAL "
w --o 1
_ :8~i;:~~~~~~j;:·~~-':_E__
r
o:orr
2 :HE.\IOTE
(NOTE. 2)
4 \hb HI
880 f----------------r 88C 49X
C~OTL 4)
TC
HJSE 220V/DC24V HJSE

Ql
--1

SOURCE CO:vLvL\ND SELECTED CO.ili!AND LL\IIT LL\IIT TORQUE fAILUHE THANS.\IITTEH
(,\C220V 50Ilz) (rrm.\l DCS) (TO DCS) (rrm.\l DCS) (TO DCS) (TO DCS) (TO DCS) (TO DCS) (TO DCS)
NOTE
V,\LVE IC1ntad1. . . VALVE Position (%) 1. Valve shown in fully closed posit.inn.
- \o. Lll"t 1l1JiEI O 100 I lLLY nPE: function
1 f- - f- - - +- - ---+----, BY-P,\SS crn. (ha) 2.Pnsitinn Transmitter should be installed if ""'Cl
2 - -j IND. LIGIIT (hb} ::z:
"\!OTOH OPERATED VALVE SPECffICATION LIST" required.
OPEN 3 f- --- f- --- --- + --- ---
---+----, SP,\HE :3.TO:OPEN Direction Torque Switch
G.>
C/:Es:
4 --- -j OPEN LL\IIT (hb}
5 f- -f- --- --- + --- ---
---+----, INDIC!\TION illiu
TC:CLOSE Direction Torque Switch
~
(Jr-.:,
6 - -j SPARE I ........i
~
7 ~--+-----i----1BY-PASS crn. (lb} power fa i 1ure.
5. Tl!. OL contacts break in thermal over load
> 8 f- --- IND. LIGIIT (la}
(\Int.or thermal Switches) ~
"'C I CLOSE 9 ~ --- --- + --- --- ---1 --- ---1 SP,\HE
"'C
...... 10 f- --- CLOSE LL\IIT il£u 6. S.11 (Space lleater) should be installed if ~
0 11 t---+- - - +- -
---j - ---j INDICATION (lb} ":vtOTOH OPERATED VALVE SPECffICATION LIST" required. f-f'D
~
< 12 f- --- SPARE 7.Lamps color should be below
Q)
....... Open RED ~
contact close (make) Close GHEEN Qr-.:,
0 contact open (break) Torque ORANGE (A\IBEH) Ooo
::::s AC LIMIT SEATING Ow
ro-.......
""'Cl
c::,
(AC220V) ........i
C')
:s:: c.n
(\C .\!OTOH)
DC24V
*l
*l
*2
*2
S.11
(NOTE. 6)
49X
1 :LOCAL "
o:orr
2 :HE.\IOTE
w --o 1
_ :·~~·-;_:_E~-
(NOTE. 2)
4 \hb
880 f----------------r 88C 49X
(~OTE. 4)
TC
HJSE 220V/DC24V HJSE

en
~
--1

SOURCE CO:vLvL\ND SELECTED CO.i!.vL\ND LL\IIT LL\IIT TORQUE fAILURE THANS.\IITTER
(,\C220V 50Ilz) (rrm.\l DCS) (TO DCS) (rHCl.\l DCS) (TO DCS) (TO DCS) (TO DCS) (TO DCS) (TO DCS)
VAL\'l l'osi lion (%) NOTE

V,\LVE Ccntact Flll't 1.WIE 0 100 J1YnPEI function L Valve shown in fully closed position.
\o.
1
2
f-- - I - - - - -I - - - -
-
BY-P,\SS CIR.
--
IND. LIGIIT
(ha)
(hb)
2.Position Transmitter should be installed if
""'Cl
::z:
OPEN 3
4
-- - - - -1 - - - - -
SP,\HE
".\!OTOH OPERATED VALVE SPECffICATION LIST" required. C/:Es:
G.>
-- - ~
5 - - - -1 - - - - INDIC!\TION (ha)
--
TC:CLOSE Direction Torque Switch (Jr-.:,
6 - - SPARE
I .........i
-- ---
7 - - - - - - BY-PASS crn. (lb) power fa i 1ure. ~
> 8 IND. LIGIIT Oa) ~
-- ---
"C - - - - - - SP,\HE 5. TI!. OL contacts break in thermal over load
CLOSE 9
"C (\lot or thermal Switches)
~
......
0
<
10
11
12
--- f-- - - I---- - -
SP,\HE
INDICATION
SPARE
(lb) 6. S.11 (Space lleater) should be installed if
":vtOTOR OPERATED VALVE SPECffICATION LIST" required.
f-f'D
~
Q)
?.Lamps color should be below ~
contact close (make) Open RED Qr-.:,
0 contact open (break) Close GHEEN Ooo
::::s Torque Oft\NGE (A\IBEH) AC TORQUE SEATING 0-i::::,.
ro:......_
""'Cl
c::,
(AC220V) .........i
C')
:s:: c.n
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 285/765
Attachment-6.2
SPC-GlH-XlT3-0008 ~~~;ff]; MOTOR OPERATED VALVE lNNER WlRlNG DlAGRAM 1/ 1

DWG. NO. TITLE
* if mi ~ rn ~
REV. NO. REV. ISSUED CHANGED PLACE AND CONTENT APPROVED BY CHECKED BY PREPARED BY
0 9.Sep.'08 INITIAL ISSUE Refer to Refer to Refer to
sheet 1 sheet 1 sheet 1
1 17.Sep.'08 We deleted the sheets for inching operation. Refer to Refer to Refer to
Sh-3,4,5,6 sheet 1 sheet 1 sheet 1
We revised the wirmg for remote/local selected
operation.
2 6.Mar.'09 Sh-3,4,5,6 Refer to Refer to Refer to

We revised the wiring for stop P.B. operation. sheet 1 sheet 1 sheet 1
We revised the color of lamps.
3 9.Jun.'09 Sh-2,3,4,5,6 Refer to Refer to Refer to

We deleted DC LIMIT SEATING sheet and DC sheet 1 sheet 1 sheet 1
TORQUE SEATING sheet.
We added AC LIMIT SEATING(AC220V) sheet and
AC TORQUE SEATING(AC220V) sheet.
7 I 7
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 286/765
Attachment-7: Plant Identification.
Attachment 7.1: Naming Guideline.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 287/765
Attachment-7.1
TOSHIBA PCD-GMH-XIT5-0003 Rev.3
561'TS1i
23 I Feb./ 2016
DATE ISSUED
~ii/ J'!ffF,1}%
JOB/QUOT.NO.
0/# M211995/M211996
~ 7t ~
TANJUNG JATI 'B' Re-Expansion Project

UNIT 5 & 6 2 x 1000 MW
NAMING GUIDELINE
The information in this material is confidential and contains Toshiba's intellectual

property including know-how. It shall not be disclosed to any third party, copied,
reproduced, used for unauthorized purposes nor modified without prior written
consent of Toshiba.
FOR APPROVAL Toshiba Corporation
4
Cl)
:z:
2
Cl) ':>
._) 2016.7.14 Revised as per the customer's comment. H.Tao K.Tanaka Y.Takano
>
LJ.J
c::
2 2016.6.21 Revised as per the customer's comment. H.Tao K.Tanaka Y.Takano
~
~t;\ 2016.4.4 H.Tao K.Tanaka Y.Takano

1 Revised as per the customer's comment.
@I ~ B it i2 ~ lmJ 1i tEl 3
REVNO DATE CONTENTS * *
APROVED
BY
CHECKED
BY
REVISED
BY
@2 :;Jn" :ft
(PJM) 1 (5' D) 1 98 1T i,J
Utility Plant Engineering
DISTRIBUTION
Group Plant Engineering
ISSUED BY
SC 1 (Y<.EX) 1 (miJ1!P) 1 Dept.
~D
(x.IX) 1 (*J:t~n.)
n»i:i...X 1 *
APPROVED
J:IJ[),
BY
H. Tao
lmJ 1i
(x.IC) 1 (P~) 1 K. Tanaka
CHECKED BY
tEl 3
(5' A) 1 (X.PU) t~ PREPARED BY
Y. Takano
**xtfH±,R~ 1/42
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 288/765
Attachment-7.1
1. PURPOSE
This guideline describes the naming system concept for equipment and instruments in the
"Tanjung Jati B Expansion (Jawa-4) Coal Fired Steam Power Plant 2xl 000 MW". The purpose
of this document is to unify the equipment and instruments naming principle; so as to support the
systematic management of the plant components and easy understanding in each stage of
construction, operation and maintenance i.e. design, manufacturing, erection and commissioning.
Moreover it will prevent occurring troubles caused by misunderstanding.
Proprietary Information 2/42

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 289/765
Attachment-7.1
2. SCOPE
This document covers the naming guideline and designation to be used for nameplates and
labels, graphic display of the major components for EPC Lot Sub contractors portion in
"Tanjung Jati B Expansion (Jawa-4) Coal Fired Steam Power Plant 2x1000 MW".
Equipment, instruments and signals naming used in drawing, such as in P&ID, electrical one
line diagram, logic diagram, equipment list, etc., shall be described as per this guideline. On the
other hand, documentation and O&M manual to show equipment and system specification,
function, instruction etc., can use manufacturer's standard naming.
Guideline for equipment identification number is provided by EPC Contractor, namely

'KKS Power Plant Equipment Identification System' while this naming guideline is prepared
to support identifying the equipment and instruments' naming description.
In general, naming guideline is divided into the following category:
- Clause 3 : General Naming Guideline

- Clause 4: Naming Guideline for Equipment
- Clause 5: Naming Guideline for Valve
- Clause 6: Naming Guideline for Instrument
- Clause 7: Naming Guideline for Switchboard
- Clause 8 : Naming Guideline for Electrical Instrument
- Clause 9: Naming Guideline for Circuit Breaker
- Clause 10: Naming Guideline for Cubicle, Panel and others
For illustration purpose in this document, upper side of page is deemed as North and left side
of the page is deemed West.

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 290/765
Attachment-7.1
3. GENERAL NAMING GUIDELINE
a) Unit number ('5' or '6') and common description ('COMMON') will not be stated in the
naming description unless otherwise specify in this document.
b) Hyphen,'-' and bracket,'()' will not be used in naming description unless otherwise specify
in this document.
c) The term 'COMMON' will be applied for certain equipment if the equipment cannot be
identified either unit or common system. In other words, 'COMMON' term will be stated in
the description in such cases. Examples:
1. CCCW CHEMICAL FEED COMMON REDUNDANT PUMP (refer figure 3.1)
(CCCW - CLOSED CYCLE COOLING WATER)
CCCW CHEMICAL
STORAGE TANK
Unit 5 (i)
To CCCW system To CCCW system

Unit 5 Unit 6
Figure 3.1

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 291/765
Attachment-7 .1
d) For Common electrical system, the term 'STATION' will be applied in naming description for electrical equipment. Considering the duplication
quantity of unit equipment, connection between electrical station and unit system in several cases and to avoid confuse, the terms 'UNIT' and
'STATION' will be applied in certain description. For example: (refer figure 3.2)
( i) lOkV UNIT SWGR A
(ii) lOkV UNIT SWGR B
(iii) lOkV UNIT SWGR C
(iv) lOkV UNIT SWGR D
Unit AUX. TR A J1, Unit AUX. TR B ( v) lOkV STATION SWGR C
(vi) lOkV STATION SWGR D
(vii) lOkV STATION SWGR A
(viii) lOkV STATION SWGR B
1
Jl
{ (ii) { I (v)
{ (vi)
{ { { {{{ { { { { { {
111 fff ff f f f 1
Figure 3.2

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 292/765
Attachment-7.1
e) All naming description should be m CAPITAL LETTERS except some common use
descriptions (e.g.: pH).
f) The length of naming description should be taking into account especially signal description
that will be used in DCS. Although abbreviation will be used, there is limited number of
characters that is allowable in DCS.
g) Space between words must be added in the description so that the explanation is clear.
CONDENSER- VACUUM- PUMP A SEPARATOR- TANK- LEVEL

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 293/765
Attachment-7.1
4. NAMING GUIDELINE FOR EQUIPMENT
In general, equipment in this project is named base on the following guideline:

(refer figure 4. 1)
AAA A/B
AA~ Suffix (if applicable)
Sub-Component (eg. Motor, Fan, etc)
Suffix
Major Equipment
Figure 4.1
Example:
[Major Equipment] [Suffix] [Sub-Component] [Suffix]

BOILER FEEDWATER PUMP TURBINE A MAIN OIL PUMP B_
For system or sub-systems, which is a redundant system (e.g.: 2 x 50%, 2 x 100%, 3 x 50% and
etc);
- Alphabetical suffix will be applied for equipment arranged in parallel. (refer figure 4.2a)
- Numerical suffix will be applied for equipment arranged in series. (refer figure 4.2b)
(ii)
Figure 4.2a
Examples for figure 4.2a:
1. CONDENSATE PUMP A
11. CONDENSATE PUMP B
(ii) (i)
Figure 4.2b
Examples for figure 4.2b:
1. MBFP MOTOR 1
11. MBFP MOTOR 2

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 294/765
Attachment-7.1
The sequence of suffix shall follow the following guidelines in principle (refer figure 4.3) unless
there is a limitation of equipment arrangement due to system design.
From Plant East to West

From Plant North to South
WEST 1 A
+ +
2 B
+
3
+
C
+ +
4 D
SOUTH
Figure 4.3
Special cases for equipment naming description:
a. For some pieces of equipment where dual component are connected to sin le &ment, and both
are not redundant system, numerical suffix will be used. (refer figur 3

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 295/765
Attachment-7.1
b. In case for parallel description components under the same equipment or cabinet, the following
sequence shall be applied:(refer figure 4.5)
Rear
left right
eg. Module 1 A A-+B-+C-+D
Top
°t °t 1---.2___.3___.4
.
eg. Module
....
2
3
B
C
eg. Module
..
4 D
eg. Module Bottom
Figure4.5
c. For Feedwater Heater, Turbine Bearing, Boiler Feedwater Pump Turbine Bearing and Boiler
Feedwater Pump Turbine Control Valve, instead of using alphabetical suffix, numerical suffix
description is used. Please Note that for full naming description involves numerical suffix, the
number will be describe as "#" or 'NO.#', where # represent 1,2,3 ... and no space in the
description.
Example:
1. LP FEEDWATER HEATER 1
11. BOILER FEEDWATER PUMP TURBINE A BEARING NO. I
111. BFPT A CONTROL VAL VE 1
(LP - LOW PRESSURE)
d. The sequence of numerical suffix described for Main Steam Control Valves are shown in figure
4.6. For the sequence of numerical suffix described for Low Pressure Heater and High Pressure
Heater, the number's sequence are following the flow direction, where it starts from Low Pressure
Feedwater Heater 1 to Heater 4, follow by Deaerator and Feedwater Tank and High Pressure
Feedwater Heater 6 to Heater 8. The sequence of number and descriptions are illustrated in figure
4.7.
e. Numerical suffix description is also applied for extraction steam pipe to heaters or Deaerator. The
numerical suffix is named by referring to the destination where the steam is extracted. The naming
is illustrated in figure 4. 7.

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 296/765
Attachment-7.1
CRV
CV
8
MSVA
MSVB
CV
•
GENERATOR
CRV
Figure 4.6
MSV: MAIN STOP VAL VE

CV: CONTROL VAL VE
CRV: COMBINED REHEAT VAL VE
N0.5 EXTRATION
BOILER f
DEA N0.4 EXTRATION
N0.8 EXTRATION
ffi
/' 'I
ffi LPHTR4
HPHTR8B
LPHTR3
HPHTR 7B
LPHTR2
HPHTR6B,
\. LPHTR 1
BFP
Figure 4.7

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 297/765
Attachment-7.1
f. Naming description for Bearing and Thrust Bearing for Main Steam Turbine are as follow:
Examples:
1. BEARING NO.I
11. BEARING N0.2
111. THRUST BEARING
The description is written as 'BEARING NO. I', 'THRUST BEARING' instead of 'STEAM
TURBINE BEARING NO. I' or 'MAIN STEAM THRUST BEARING'. In other words, the term
'STEAM TURBINE' is eliminated in description for bearing and thrust bearing for Main Steam
Turbine
g. For the sequence of numerical suffix in describing the Turbine Bearing, the sequence number
( 1,2,3 ... ) starts from High Pressure Turbine side towards Generator side. (refer figure 4. 8)
IP TURBINE LP TURBINE LP TURBINE
GENERATOR
BRGl BRG2 BRG3 BRG4 BRG5 BRG6 BRG7 BRG8 BRG9 BRGIO
I-Bearing Figure 4.8

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 298/765
Attachment-7.1
h. The naming of bearings attached on fan and motors will be differentiated as Drive End (DE) and
Non Drive End (NDE) as follow: (refer figure 4.9)
MOTOR i~~~~~~-rl
(DRIVE) y FAN
/ PUMP
NDE DE DE NDE
Figure 4.9
Drive End (DE) represent the drive where it is connected with other component while Non Drive
End (NDE) is free end turning part.
MOTOR
i~~~~~~-y
ri FAN A
/PUMP
(DRIVE)
NDE=2 DE =1 DE=l NDE=2

(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
Figure 4.10
Naming guideline for the above situation is stated in the figure 4.10, where numerical suffix
description start from Drive End (DE) following by Non Drive End (NDE) bearing. For example,
the descriptions for figure 4.10 are as follow:
1. [MAJOR EQUIPMENT][SUFFIX] FAN A MOTOR BEARING N0.2

11. [MAJOR EQUIPMENT][SUFFIX] FAN A MOTOR BEARING NO. I
111. [MAJOR EQUIPMENT][SUFFIX] FAN A BEARING NO. I
1v. [MAJOR EQUIPMENT][SUFFIX] FAN A BEARING N0.2

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 299/765
Attachment-7.1
1. Bearing's naming guideline for Turbine Driven Boiler Feedwater Pump and Motor Driven Boiler
Feedwater Pump shall applied the following description:
TURBINE DRIVEN BOILER FEEDWATER PUMP (TBFP) (refer figure 4. I I)
TBFP BP
0-~ (vi)
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v)
Figure 4.11
BFPT - BOILER FEEDWATER PUMP TURBINE

BP - BOOSTER PUMP
Examples for figure 4. I I:
1. BFPT A BEARING NO.I

11. BFPT A BEARING N0.2
111. TBFP A BEARING NO. I
1v. TBFP A BEARING N0.2
v. TBFP A BP BEARING NO. I
v1. TBFP A BP BEARING N0.2

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 300/765
Attachment-7.1
MOTOR DRIVEN BOILER FEEDWATER PUMP (MBFP) (refer figure 4. I2)

FLUID COUPLING
MBFPBP MOTOR2 MOTOR I

(i)---~(ii) (iii) - - - ~ ( i v ) (v) - - - ~ ( v i ) (vii) (viii)
MBFP
Figure 4. I2 (ix) (x) (xi)(xii) (xiii) (xiv)
Examples for figure 4. I2:
1. MBFP BP BEARING N0.2

11. MBFP BP BEARING NO. I
111. MBFP MOTOR 2 BEARING NO. I
1v. MBFP MOTOR 2 BEARING N0.2
v. MBFP MOTOR I BEARING NO. I
v1. MBFP MOTOR I BEARING N0.2
v11. MBFP FLUID COUPLING BEARING NO. I
v111. MBFP FLUID COUPLING BEARING N0.2
1x. MBFP FLUID COUPLING BEARING N0.3
x. MBFP FLUID COUPLING BEARING N0.4
x1. MBFP FLUID COUPLING BEARING N0.5
xu. MBFP FLUID COUPLING BEARING N0.6
x111. MBFP BEARING NO. I
XIV. MBFP BEARING N0.2
J. For vertical pump (such as Condensate extraction pump) with vertical connection, the bearing is
name as follow: (refer figure 4.13)
Examples for figure 4.13:
1. [PUMP] MOTOR BEARING NO. I

11. [PUMP] MOTOR BEARING N0.2
(ii)
MOTOR
(i)
PUMP
Figure 4.13

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 301/765
Attachment-7.1
5. NAMING GUIDELINE FOR VALVE
Valve's name used for documents, drawings, nameplates etc. shall be based on the following
rules unless otherwise specified in each documents or drawing. Naming description guideline for
Main Stop Valve and Main Steam Control Valve are stated in clause 4.

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 302/765
Attachment-7 .1
NO. FORMATION VALVE NAME REMARKS

0 Unit name Unit name is not included in valve name.
Name of Control valve [General Function] CONTROL VAL VE For Inlet/Outlet or Drain/ Vent
Ex) valve around control valve,
DEAERATORLEVEL CONTROL VALVE abbreviation name is used. (See
item 3)

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 303/765
Attachment-7 .1

Valves those are installed around pumps
(i) ......... [Pump Name] INLET VAL VE Naming of (v)a (vi)a (ix)a (x)a is
(iv) (ii) ........ [Pump Name] OUTLET CHECK VALVE used in case of application of
Return to Source ~ - - - - - D < J - - - - - ,
(Minimum Flow)
(iii) ....... [Pump Name] OUTLET VALVE duplicate drain / vent valves.
(iv) ....... [Pump Name] MIN FLOW VALVE
(v )a ...... [Pump Name] VENT VAL VE 1
~
(v)b ...... [Pump Name] VENT VALVE 2
(vi)a ..... [Pump Name] DRAIN VALV
(vi)b ..... [Pump Name] DRAIN VAL VE 2
(i) I (vii) ...... [Pump Name] INLET VENT VALVE
t (viii) (viii) ..... [Pump Name] INLET DRAIN VAL VE
~vi)a (vi)b
~ l~~I (ix)a ..... [Pump Name] OUTLET VENT VAL VE I
'¥
(ix)b ..... [Pump Name] OUTLET VENT VALVE 2
(x)a ...... [Pump Name] OUTLET DRAIN VALVE I
(x)b ...... [Pump Name] OUTLET DRAIN VALVE 2
Ex)
CONDENSATE EXTRACTION PUMP OUTLET DRAIN
VALVE

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 304/765
Attachment-7 .1

2 Valves those are installed around other equipment
(Tanks, Heat Exchangers etc). (i) ......... [Equip.Name] INLET VALVE The same rule as Iteml (ix)&(x)
r r
(ii) ........ [Equip. Name] OUTLET VALVE shall be applied to duplicate vent
: : (iv) (iii) ....... [Equip. Name] BYPASS VALVE and drain valves;
: ~ (vi)
•.
-II -
- I r
(iv) ....... [Equip. Name] VENT VALVE DRAINNENT VALVE I for the
t (vii)
(i)
: ~ (x)
(v) ........ [Equip. Name] DRAIN VALVE
(vi) ....... [Equip. Name] INLET VENT VALVE
first valve.
~ _n
(vii) ...... [Equip. Name] INLET DRAIN VALVE
t" (""")ft
Ill I (xi)
~
(viii) ..... [Equip. Name] OUTLET VENT VALVE
: ~(viii)
(ix) ....... [Equip. Name] OUTLET DRAIN VAL VE
-II
""11 I --
~
(v)
r--M--
I
I t (ix)
(ii) (x) ........ [Equip. Name] BYPASS VENT VALVE
(xi) ...... [Equip. Name] BYPASS DRAIN VALVE
~
"' Ex)
LP HEATERN0.3 BYPASS DRAIN VALVE
3 Valves those are installed around Automatic Valves such as

CV, MV, PV and SV (i) ........ [Valve Name] INLET VALVE The same rule as Item2 shall be
[Automatic Valve] (ii) ....... [Valve Name] OUTLET VALVE applied to vent and drain valves.
:
(iii) ...... [Valve Name] BYPASS VALVE
t><J t><J )II
EX)
(i) (ii)
I I DEAERATOR LEVEL CONTROL VALVE OUTLET
(iii) VALVE

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 305/765
Attachment-7.1

4 Drain valves around general check valves
(i) .. [Check Valve Name] OUTLET DRAIN VALVE The same rule as Iteml (ix)&(x)
I [>I I ~
(ii). [Check Valve Name] INLET DRAIN VALVE shall be applied to duplicate vent
I I
(ii) * t (i)
and drain valves;
DRAINNENT VALVE I for the
~
"' first valve.
5 Drain / Vent valves around general valves

(i) ....... [Valve Name] INLET VENT VALVE The same rule as Iteml (ix)&(x)
)i) )ii) (ii) ...... [Valve Name] INLET DRAIN VALVE

(iii) ..... [Valve Name] OUTLET VENT VALVE
(iv) ..... [Valve Name] OUTLET DRAIN VALVE
shall be applied to duplicate vent
and drain valves;
I [><] I ~
I I first valve.
*(ii) * (iv)
I I
t t

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 306/765
Attachment-7.1

6 General drain/ vent valves
li) (i)
I .
(i) ....... [Line Name] VENT VALVE I
(ii) ...... [Line Name] VENT VALVE 2
(iii) ..... [Line Name] DRAIN VALVE I
(iv) ..... [Line Name] DRAIN VALVE 2
The same rule as Iteml (ix)&(x)
shall be applied to duplicate vent
and drain valves;
first valve.
t(iii)
~(iv)
'
7 MSV / CRV drain valves
(i) [Valve Name] BEFORE SEAT DRAIN VALVE The same rule as Iteml (x) shall be
(ii) [Valve Name] AFTER SEAT DRAIN VALVE applied to duplicate drain valves;
r::::::::J DRAIN VAL VE I for the first
-- ...--
..........
(
... - .........J > valve .
I L---,
(i) * I
I
(ii)
t *t I

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 307/765
Attachment-7.1

8 Valves around strainer in case of using three way valve
(i) ....... [Strainer Name] INLET VALVE
(ii) ...... [Strainer Name] INLET THREE WAY VALVE
(iii) ..... [Strainer Name] OUTLET THREE WAY VALVE
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (iv) .... [Strainer Name] OUTLET VALVE
9-1 Valves of pressure/ level detection pipe (1) Case-a : Single root valve
(i) ....... [Instrument Name] ROOT VAL VE For test point detection piping, the
(ii) ...... N/A same rule should be applied.
(iii) .... [Instrument Name] DRAIN VAL VE
(iv) ... [Instrument Name] INSTRUMENT VALVE
Case-b: Double root valve
(iv)
(i) ....... [Instrument Name] ROOT VAL VE I
(ii) ...... [Instrument Name] ROOT VALVE 2
Case-a: Single root valve Case-b: Double root valve (iii) .... [Instrument Name] DRAIN VALVE
(iv) .... [Instrument Name] INSTRUMENT VALVE

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 308/765
Attachment-7 .1

9-2
Valves of pressure / level detection pipe (2) Case-c: Common Taping Point For test point detection piping, the
(i) ....... [Instrument-1/2 Name] ROOT VALVE I same rule should be applied.
(ii)
(ii) ...... [Instrument-I Name] ROOT VALVE 2
(iii) .... [Instrument- I Name] DRAIN VALVE
(iv) .... [Instrument-I Name] INSTRUMENT VALVE
(v) ..... [Instrument-2 Name] ROOT VALVE
(vi) .... [Instrument-2 Name] DRAIN VALVE
(vii) ... [Instrument-2 Name] INSTRUMENT VALVE
Case-c: Common Taping point
Valve of level detection pipe (3)

9.3
(i) ....... [Instrument Name] ROOT VALVE I L
(ii) ...... [Instrument Name] ROOT VALVE 2 L
(iii)** (iv)**
(iii) .... [Instrument Name] ROOT VALVE I H ~
TANK
(iv) .... [Instrument Name] ROOT VALVE ~
(i)* (v) ...... [Instrument Name] DRAIN VAL VE
* Alphabetical suffix for upper side: H

** Alphabetical suffix for lower side: L

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 309/765
Attachment-7 .1

10 Valves of differential pressure detection pipe
Case-a : Single root valve
Low Press. Side
iii (i) ....... [Instrument Name] ROOT VAL VE H
(ii) ...... [Instrument Name] DRAIN VAL VE H
(iii) ..... [Instrument Name] ROOT VALVE L
, ............... , .......................1
Hig~drnc.................... , (iv) ... [Instrument Name] DRAIN VAL VE L

(v) .... [Instrument Name] INSTRUMENT VALVE
Case-a: Single Root Valve Case-b: Double Root Valve Case-b: Double root valve
(i) ....... [Instrument Name] ROOT VAL VE 1 H
Alphabetical suffix for high pressure side: H
Alphabetical suffix for low pressure side: L (ii) ...... [Instrument Name] ROOT VALVE 2 H
(iii) .... [Instrument Name] DRAIN VAL VE H ~
(iv) .... [Instrument Name] ROOT VAL VE ~

(v) ..... [Instrument Name] ROOT VAL VE 2 L
(vi) .... [Instrument Name] DRAIN VAL VE L
(vii) ... [Instrument Name] INSTRUMENT VALVE

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 310/765
Attachment-7.1

11 Valve around tap point of maintenance
(i) [Equipment Name/ Location (Column)] [Flow Name]
ISOLATION VAL VE
t><J
(i)
C

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 311/765
Attachment-7.1
6. NAMING GUIDELINE FOR INSTRUMENT
In general, naming description for instruments are based on equipment, piping, valve name
and also location of the instruments. The function of the instruments should be easy
understanding from the naming description.
Basically, general naming description guidelines for instruments are stated as follow: (*)
I. [EQUIPMENT] [LOCATION] [INSTRUMENT] [SUFFIX] (refer figure 6.1)

II. [ PIPE/SYSTEM] [LOCATION] [INSTRUMENT] [SUFFIX] (refer figure 6.2)
III. [VALVE] [LOCATION] [INSTRUMENT] [SUFFIX] (refer figure 6.3 & 6.4)
Description of location ( eg. Outlet, inlet, inner, upper and etc) of the instruments should be
stated if location is needed to be clarified for better understanding purpose. Otherwise, the
description of location can be eliminated. In case the instrument cannot be identified using only
'EQUIPMENT' in item I, further description 'FUILD/OBJECT' stated in item IV should be
added for clarification.
IV. [EQUIPMENT] [LOCATION] [FLUID/OBJECT] [INSTRUMENT] [SUFFIX]

(refer figure 6.5)
Example I: (refer figure 6.1) Valve A
1. [VAL VE A] OUTLET TEMPERATURE 1

11. [VAL VE A] OUTLET TEMPERATURE 2
111. [VAL VE B] OUTLET TEMPERATURE 1 Valve B
1v. [VAL VE B] OUTLET TEMPERATURE 2
Figure 6.1
Example II: (refer figure 6.2)
HRH: HOT REHEAT

BOILER
REHEATER
1. HRH A TEMPERATURE 1
11. HRH A TEMPERATURE 2
HRH PIPE B
111. HRH B TEMPERATURE 1
IV. HRH B TEMPERATURE 2
Figure 6.2

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 312/765
Attachment-7.1
Example III: (refer figure 6.3)
1. [VAL VE] POSITIONER

11. [VAL VE] POSITION
111. [VAL VE] AIR SUPPLY PRESSURE LOW
l
IV. [VAL VE] AIR SUPPLY VOLUME CHAMBER
( V) (iv)
V. [VAL VE] AIR SUPPLY REGULATOR
This figure shows typical configuration.

Actual valve accessories shall be referred to
[
valve specification
Figure 6.3
Examples III: (refer figure 6.4) (i)
1. [VALVE] OPEN (ii)

11. [VAL VE] CLOSE
111. [VAL VE] SOLENOID VAL VE
Figure 6.4
Example IV: (refer figure 6.5)
1. [HEATER] INLET CW TEMPERATURE

11. [HEATER] OUTLET CW TEMPERATURE
111. [HEATER] INLET CCCW TEMPERATURE
IV. [HEATER] OUTLET CCCW TEMPERATURE
CW-CIRCULATING WATER
CCCW-CLOSED CYCLE COOLING WATER
Figure 6.5

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 313/765
Attachment-7.1
Notes:
1. There is no priority in which the description should be used in case the instruments'
description can be named using more than one general description guideline stated. Either
one of the general guideline that can clearly describe the function of the instruments shall
be given priority.
11. Type of instrument's name (RTD, transmitter, gauge, element, test terminal and etc) is not
stated in description. For analog measurement instruments, only measurement (flow,
temperature, pressure, level, speed) description is stated. For example:
BFPT EXHAUST STEAM TEMPERATURE (II)

BFPT EXHAUST STEAM TEMPERATURE ELEMENT ( )()
111. Digital signal description also applied Note (ii). For instrument with switch, measurement
description (high, low, open, close, etc) is stated to describe the condition or command for
the switch. For example:
BFPT A STEAM PRESSURE HIGH ( II)

BFPT A STEAM PRESSURE SWITCH HIGH ( )()
1v. In case of naming description for heat exchanger (generally refer to main steam, lube oil or
close cycle water cooling system etc, whereby, both the working fluid are different type),
only fluid type (water, steam, oil, etc) description will be stated. For example: (refer figure
6.6)
HEAT EXCHANGER
LUBE OIL CLOSE CYCLE

COOLING WATER
Figure 6.6
1. HEAT EXCHANGER OIL INLET TEMPERATURE

11. HEAT EXCHANGER WATER INLET TEMPERATURE

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 314/765
Attachment-7.1
Special cases for instrument naming description:
a. Suffix description for vibration naming do not start with alphabet A, B, C and etc. The suffix
description is based on X and Y direction which stated on P&ID. For example: (refer figure 6.7)
Figure 6.7
Example:
1. BEARING NO. I VIBRATION Y

11. BEARING NO. I VIBRATION X
111. BEARING N0.2 VIBRATION X
1v. BEARING N0.2 VIBRATION Y
b. Suffix description for 3-Phase AC Motor Winding naming description will be stated as U,V and W
instead of suffix A, B and C. For example:
SEAWATER BOOSTER PUMP A MOTOR WINDING U TEMPERATURE

SEAWATER BOOSTER PUMP A MOTOR WINDING VTEMPERATURE
SEAWATER BOOSTER PUMP A MOTOR WINDING W TEMPERATURE
c. Symbol hyphen, ' - ' is allowed under the 2 situations stated:
Situation 1: To differentiate the signal's function under same instrument:
Example:
LUBE OIL PRESSURE LOW-MAIN OIL PUMP AUTO START

LUBE OIL PRESSURE LOW-EMERGENCY OIL PUMP AUTO START
* No space in between hyphen and words.
Situation 2: To specify the certain location of the instruments
Example:
IP TURBINE LOWER INNER METAL TEMPERATURE-GENERATOR SIDE

IP TURBINE LOWER INNER METAL TEMPERATURE-TURBINE SIDE
* No space in between hyphen and words.

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 315/765
Attachment-7.1
7. GENERAL NAMING GUIDELINE FOR SWITCHBOARD
In general, naming descriptions for switchboard/switchboard transformer are based on

voltage level, group name and equipment name (if transformer).
Basically, general naming description guideline for switchboard/switchboard transformer is

stated as follow:
I. [ VOLTAGE LEVEL] [ GROUP NAME] [ SUFFIX f)

II. [ VOLTAGE LEVEL ] [ GROUP NAME ] [ EQUIPMENT ] [ SUFFIX ] C*)
C*) If applicable
Compare with naming description for other equipment or instruments which stated in this
document, naming description for electrical equipment should emphasize on electrical measuring
unit or parameter (eg. 1OKV, 3KV/380V and etc). In other words, the naming description of
[VOLTAGE LEVEL][GROUP NAME] are similarly to the description of [MAJOR
EQUIPMENT] in clause 4 and [EQUIPMENT/SYSTEM/PIPE/VAL VE] stated in clause 6. With
this definition, the general description can be stated as follow:
1. [VOLTAGE LEVEL][GROUP NAME]= [MAJOR EQUIPMENT]

= [EQUIPMENT]
= [PIPE/SYSTEM]
= [VALVE]
Example:
1. 1OKV UNIT BOARD A

11. 380V STATION SERVICE BOARD B
111. 380V STATION SERVICE BOARD TRANSFORMER B
1v. 380V/220V STATION SERVICE DP
v. 380V/220V STATION SERVICE DP TRANSFORMER

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 316/765
Attachment-7.1
8. GENERAL NAMING GUIDELINE FOR ELECTRICAL INSTRUMENT
In general, naming descriptions for electrical instrument are based on equipment name and
location (if applicable)
Basically, general naming description guideline for electrical instrument is stated as follow:
I. [ EQUIPMENT ] [ INSTRUMENT] [ SUFFIX] C*)

II. [EQUIPMENT] [LOCATION] [ INSTRUMENT] [SUFFIX] C*)
C*) If applicable
Example:
1. GENERATOR CURRENT
11. 3KV UNIT BOARD A/B BUS VOLATEGE
(Two "3kV UNIT BOARDs" A&B and one voltage measurement adopted)
111. 3KV UNIT BOARD BUS VOLATEGE A/B
(One "3kV UNIT BOARD" and two voltage measurements A&B adopted)

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 317/765
Attachment-7.1
9. GENERAL NAMING GUIDELINE FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER
In general, naming description for circuit breaker is divided into three (3) categories, which
are:
- INCOMING CIRCUIT BREAKER

- OUTGOING CIRCUIT BREAKER
- TIE CIRCUIT BREAKER
First and foremost, definition for the term 'incoming' and 'outgoing' should be clarified. By
referring to electrical flow direction on Electrical One Line Diagram, Circuit breaker located
before the current input to switchboard is define as 'INCOMING CIRCUIT BREAKER', while
Circuit Breaker located at the output of the switchboard is defined as 'OUTGOING CIRCUIT
BREAKER'. Tie circuit breaker is the circuit breaker located in between two bus bars, where it
acts as connector between them. (refer figure 9. 1)
INCOMING INCOMING
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
BREAKER TIE CIRCUIT
BREAKER BREAKER
OUTGOING OUTGOING OUTGOING

CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
BREAKER BREAKER BREAKER
Figure 9.1

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 318/765
Attachment-7.1
a. Naming guideline for INCOMING CIRCUIT BREAKER
Generally, the electrical power source of the supply for incoming circuit breaker is not stated
in the description. The naming description for Incoming Circuit breaker is:
[VOLTAGE LEVEL] [GROUP NAME] [SUFFIX]* INCOMING CIRCUIT BREAKER
For examples:
1. 380V TURBINE UNIT BOARD B INCOMING CIRCUIT BREAKER
In case there are more than one (1) incoming circuit breakers for the same switchboard,
alphabetical suffix shall be added. The naming description is:
[VOLTAGE LEVEL][GROUP NAME] [SUFFIX]* INCOMING CIRCUIT BREAKER [SUFFIX]
For examples: (refer figure 9.2)
380V TURBINE UNIT BOAR
380V UNIT EMERGENCY BOARD
Figure 9.2
11. 380V UNIT EMERGENCY BOARD INCOMING CIRCUIT BREAKER A

111. 380V UNIT EMERGENCY BOARD INCOMING CIRCUIT BREAKER B
C*) If applicable
Notes:
1. For description on nameplate of switchboard, one line diagram, outline drawing and etc, since
the switchboard's name has been stated on the switchboard panel, diagram or drawings,
switchboard name ([VOLTAGE LEVEL] [GROUP NAME] [SUFFIX for switchboard]) and
the term 'CIRCUIT BREAKER' can be omitted from the full description of incoming circuit
breaker.

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 319/765
Attachment-7.1
b. Naming Guideline for OUTGOING CIRCUIT BREAKER
Generally, switchboard will feed to other switchboard, Motor Control Centers (MCC) and/or
distribution boards. In order to differentiate the destination of the feeders, further description for
outgoing circuit breaker shall be defined. The naming description is:
[VOLTAGE LEVEL] [GROUP NAME] [SUFFIX]* [GROUPNAME of destination] CIRCUIT

BREAKER
For examples: (refer figure 9.3)
1. 380V TURBINE UNIT BOARD A 220V UNIT SPACE HEATER DISTRIBUTION

PANEL CIRCUIT BREAKER
11. 380V TURBINE UNIT BOARD A 380V UNIT EMERGENCY BOARD CIRCUIT
BREAKER
380V TURBINE UNIT BOARD A
To 220V UNIT SPACE HEATER DP To UNIT EMERGENCY BOARD
Figure 9.3
Notes:
1. For description on nameplate of switchboard/MCC/DP, one line diagram, outline drawing and
etc, since the switchboard's name has been stated on the panels, diagram or drawings,
description of switchboard name ([VOLTAGE LEVEL] [GROUP NAME] [SUFFIX for
switchboard]) and the term 'CIRCUIT BREAKER' can be omitted from the full description of
outgoing circuit breaker.

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 320/765
Attachment-7.1
c. Naming guideline for TIE CIRCUIT BREAKER
For tie circuit breaker interconnecting between two busbars, the naming description will
generally follow the name of both the connecting switchboards together with the term 'TIE
CIRCUIT BREAKER'. The naming description is:
[VOLTAGE LEVEL] [GROUP NAME] TIE CIRCUIT BREAKER
For example, (refer figure 9.4 &Figure9.5)
1. 380V STATION SERVICE BOARD TIE CIRCUIT BREAKER

11. 380V TURBINE UNIT BOARD TIE CIRCUIT BREAKER
Figure 9.4
380V TURBINE UNIT BOAR 380V TURBINE UNIT BOARD
Figure 9.5
Notes:
1. For description on nameplate of switchboard/MCC/DP, one line diagram, outline drawing and
etc, since the switchboard's name has been stated on switchboard panels, diagram or drawings,
description of switchboard name ([VOLTAGE LEVEL] [GROUP NAME]) and the term
'CIRCUIT BREAKER' can be omitted from the full description of tie circuit breaker.

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 321/765
Attachment-7.1
d. In case Earthing Switch or Disconnecting Switch is applied with Circuit Breaker, the general
naming guideline is as follow:
[Circuit Breaker name] [EARTHING SWITCH/DISCONNECTING SWITCH
Examples:
GENERA TOR MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER DISCONNECTING SWITCH
e. For outgoing circuit breaker to pump motor, if the pump's description is enough to express the
meaning, the term 'CIRCUIT BREAKER' can be neglected.
1. CONDENSATE EXTRACTION PUMP A
SWITCHBOARDS
CEP A
Figure 9.6

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 322/765
Attachment-7.1
10. NAMING GUIDELINE FOR CUBICLE, PANEL, AND OTHERS
Major equipment under Mechanical field (stated in equipment list) are generally described
according to general naming guideline stated in figure 4.1. For equipment in rack or cabinet,
panels, instrument's stanchion, the terms 'CUBICLE', 'PANEL' 'STANCHION' and
'TERMINAL BOX' shall be clearly differentiated.
a. CUBICLE (refer figure 10.1)
This term will be applied in describing equipment in a rack or cabinet such as DCS cubicle
and etc., without indication or control function or push button on the surface of the cubicle.
General naming description is as follow:
[Equipment Name/System] CUBICLE [Suffixf)
(*) If applicable
For example,
BOILER FEEDWATER PUMP TURBINE A DIGITAL ELECTROHYDRAULIC CONTROL

CUBICLE
CUBICLE
(DCS,PLC etc)
Figure 10.1

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 323/765
Attachment-7.1
b. PANEL
This term is applied in describing a few categories of equipment such as instrument panel,
distribution panel, relay panel and control panel. The type of panel's description is determined
according to the function of the panels. Generally, this term is described as follow:
[Equipment/Instrument Name/System] INSTRUMENT PANEL [Suffixf)

[Equipment Name/System] DISTRIBUTION PANEL [Suffixf)
[Equipment Name/System] RELAY PANEL [Suffixf)
[Equipment Name/System] CONTROL PANEL [Suffixf)
(*) If applicable
For example,
MAIN STEAM A PRESSURE PANEL

380V/220V UNIT SPACE HEATER DISTRIBUTION PANEL
GENERA TOR PROTECTION RELAY PANEL A
GENERATORTRANSFORMERCONTROLPANEL
(eg. instrument) (eg. instrument) TERMINAL BOX
/.,,.--,\ /.,,.--,\ OO O o------+-e,g Indicator

I
\
, .... _,......, I
I I
\
, ..... _.........I
I
IO I Q ___ ---+-,eg.Control Switch
00 00
[g [Q]
\._____
y
_ ___ / \ ____y ,,__)
CONTROL PANEL
PANEL
Figure 10.2
For cubicles with control function or indication on the surface of the cubicle, the term
"CONTROL PANEL" shall be applied instead of "CUBICLE". (refer figure 10.2)

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 324/765
Attachment-7.1
c. STANCHION
Stanchion is located at various location depends on the arrangement and location of the
equipment. The term 'LOCAL' is applied in stanchion naming description since stanchion is
located at the local area of the plant. (detail definition and application of the term 'LOCAL' is
explained in item (e) )
[Equipment/Instrument Name/System] LOCAL STANCHION [Suffixf)
For example, (refer figure 10.3)
BFPT EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE LOCAL STANCHION
STANCHION
BFPT EXHAUST STEAM PRESSURE
~--
I
I
, '
\ __ ...
Figure 10.3

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 325/765
Attachment-7.1
d. TERMINAL BOX
This term will be applied in describing equipment in a cabinet without controller inside.
Generally the naming description is as follow:
[Equipment/Panel Name/System] TERMINAL BOX [Suffix f)
(eg. instrument) TERMINAL BOX
,,,-
/ \
I I
\
,,_~ .... I
I I
TERMINAL BOX
(No Controller) Figure 10.4
e. Term 'LOCAL' will be attached in naming description for the description in (a), (b), (c) and (d)
with the following condition:
Items in a, b, c and d, which located outside of Control Room (eg. Central Control Room, ,
500kV control room and etc.) and Electronics Room (eg. Control Equipment room, electrical
room at 2nd floor of Control building, FGD electrical room and etc.) are considered as 'LOCAL'
equipment. In general, the naming description is as follow:
[Equipment/Instrument name] LOCAL[**]
[**] represent all items stated in (a), (b), (c) and (d) such as 'LOCAL CUBICLE', 'LOCAL
CONTROL PANEL', 'LOCAL RELAY PANEL' and etc. which fulfil the definition stated above.
For examples,
BFPT EXHAUST STEAM TEMPERATURE LOCAL STANCHION

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 326/765
Attachment-7.1
f. In case further description (eg. different function of component in same cubicle, etc.) is needed in
describing the item (a), (b ), (c), and (d), symbol hyphen ' - ' is applied. In general, it can be
concluded as follow:
[Name in (a), (b), (c), (d)]-[Function, etc.]
For examples,
COMMON AUXILIARY CONTROL CUBICLE A-CONTROLLER UNIT

COMMON AUXILIARY CONTROL CUBICLE A-PROCESS IO UNIT
g. Switchboards, UPS and batteries considered as major equipment will not applied (a), (b), (c) and
(d) in the naming description.

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 327/765
Attachment-7.1
Special case for Cubicle, Panel and others naming description
a. In case there are more than one (1) instrument (eg. Redundant measurement and etc.) mounted on
a stanchion or panel, the common description for the instrument together with the name will be
stated in the description. For example,
For examples, (refer figure 10.5)
MAIN STEAM A PRESSURE LOCAL STANCHION
STANCHION
MAIN STEAM A PRESSURE
""' ~,
I
\
--- '
MAIN STEAM A PRESSURE B
b. In case the instruments mounted are measuring two different parameters, naming of the stanchion
or panels are stated base on either one of the mounted instrument name.
For example, (refer figure 10.6)
MAIN OIL STRAINER INLET PRESSURE LOCAL STANCHION
STANCHION
MAIN OIL STRAINER INLET PR
,-, MAIN OIL STRAINER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSU1

I
, '
I
\
' ,'
Figurel0.6

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 328/765
Attachment-7.1
c. For some systems, where equipment and instruments are located in one position (eg. In a cabinet,
on a panel and etc.), terms 'CUBICLE', 'PANEL' and etc. will be eliminated. Instead, system's
name will be applied. For example,
SAMPLING SYSTEM (II)

SAMPLING SYSTEM LOCAL INSTRUMENT PANEL( >C )
CONDENSER LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM ( II) (refer figure 10.7)

CONDENSER LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM LOCAL INSTRUMENT PANEL ( >C)
CONDENSER LEAK
DETECTION SYSTEM
Figure 10.7

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 329/765
Attachment-a : Environment Requirement
Attachment-8.1 : Green Procurement Guideline

Attachment-8.2 : Indonesia 83 Material.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 330/765
Attachment-8.1 : Green Procurement
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 331/765
Attachment-8.1
Gr n r r i
1
r~nn,1n,,itt,o1tto Pen~,le_
::nm1rn11t11¥t to the Future. TOSHIBA
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 332/765
Attachment-8.1
Contents
1. Foreword
2. The Toshiba Group's Basic Policy for the Environment
3. Objective of the Guidelines
4. The Toshiba Group's Green Procurement Concepts

4.1 Construction of the Environmental Management System (EMS)
4.2 The management of chemical substances in procurement items
4.3 The Toshiba Group Environment-Related Substance List
5. Requests to Suppliers
5 .1 Promotion of environmental protection by suppliers
5 .2 Supply of products, parts and components, materials, etc. with minimal environmental impacts
5 .3 Conclusion of agreements for assuring environmental quality of procurement items
5 .4 Cooperation in surveys
5.4.1 Survey of suppliers' environmental protection activities
5.4.2 Surveys of suppliers' chemical substance management systems
5.4.3 Surveys of chemical substances in procurement items
Attachment: The Toshiba Group Environment-Related Substance List

(Appendix 1) Rank A: Prohibited Substances
(Appendix 2) Rank B: Managed Substances
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 333/765
Attachment-8.1
1. Foreword
"Committed to People. Committed to the Future. Toshiba": inspired by its corporate slogan, the
Toshiba Group is vigorously promoting CSR (Corporate Social Responsibility) activities. Naturally,
environmental management is central to that drive. In accordance with the Toshiba Group's Basic
Policy for the Environment, we are working to protect the environment by stressing the "creation of
new value" and championing "symbiosis with the Eaith" throughout our business processes and
products.
Based on this idea, we have formulated Toshiba Environmental Vision 2050 and managed specific
environmental activity items and their target values by backcasting from the ideal state in 2050.
Environmental management involves tackling various issues. We believe that we have a
responsibility to perform a comprehensive assessment of the environmental impacts of our products
throughout their life cycles and in every phase, from product manufacturing and usage through to
recycling of end-of-life products. The Toshiba Group is promoting green procurement as a measure
during the manufacturing phase.
Green procurement involves procuring products, parts and components and materials, etc. with
minimal environmental impacts from suppliers that vigorously promote environmental protection.
To promote business in a way that reduces the environmental impacts and risks of hazardous
chemical substances, activities encompassing the entire supply chain are necessary, for which the
cooperation of suppliers, our business partners, is essential.
With this in mind, we have revised the Green Procurement Guidelines in line with contemporary
needs. In our endeavors to achieve a sustainable society, we invite our suppliers to share our
environmental goals and work hand in hand with us to make green procurement a resounding
success.
Procurement Div.
Corporate Environment Management Div.
Toshiba Corporation
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 334/765
Attachment-8.1
2. The Toshiba Group's Basic Policy for the Environment
Recognizing our responsibility to maintain the health of the global environment as an ineplaceable
asset for future generations, Toshiba contributes to the development of a sustainable society by
promoting environmental activities designed to achieve a world that is low carbon, recycling-based
and environmentally harmonious.
+ Promoting environmental management

1. Toshiba considers environmental stewardship to be one of management's primary responsibilities
and promotes environmental activities in hannony with economic activities.
2. Toshiba assesses the impacts of its business activities, products and services on the environment,
including with regard to biodiversity, and specifies objectives and targets concerning the reduction
of environmental impacts and prevention of pollution.
3. Toshiba strives to continuously improve environmental management through internal audits and
reviews of activities.
4. Toshiba complies with all laws and regulations, the industry guidelines it has endorsed, and its
own environmental standards.
5. Toshiba strives to enhance the awareness of all its employees concerning the environment and
requires that they make a practical contribution to the environment through their work.
6. Toshiba operates globally, and hence promotes environmental activities throughout the Toshiba
Group.
+ Providing environmentally conscious products and services and reducing their

environmental impact through business activities
1. Toshiba recognizes that natural resources are finite and implements vigorous environmental
measures to promote their effective and practical use, in terms of both products and business
processes.
2. Toshiba develops and provides environmentally conscious products and services, which help
reduce environmental impacts throughout their life cycles.
3. Toshiba strives to reduce the environmental impacts of all business processes, encompassing
design, manufacturing, logistics, sale, and disposal, with a particular focus on the prevention of
global warming, efficient utilization of resources and control of chemical substances.
+ As a corporate citizen of planet Earth

1. Toshiba contributes to society through its environmental activities, which include the development
and provision of excellent, environmentally conscious technologies and products in cooperation with
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 335/765
Attachment-8.1
society at large and local communities.

2. Toshiba is committed to maximizing disclosure and transparency in communication with
stakeholders and society at large to facilitate mutual understanding.
3. Objective of the Guidelines
In accordance with the Toshiba Group's Basic Policy for the Environment, we are working to protect
the environment by stressing the "creation of new value" and championing "symbiosis with the
Earth" throughout our business processes and products. As part of these efforts, Toshiba develops
and provides environmentally conscious products and services, which help reduce environmental
impacts throughout their life cycles. Green procurement is essential for that purpose.
The Guidelines show The Toshiba Group's Green Procurement Concepts, a basic concept of the
Group on green procurement, together with the specific contents of the Group's requests to our
suppliers concerning the supply of parts and components, materials, units, products, secondary
materials, etc. (hereinafter collectively referred to as "supply items").
The Toshiba Group is working with global environmental protection activities in cooperation with
our suppliers through the procurement activities under the Green Procurement Concepts described in
the Guidelines.
4. The Toshiba Group's Green Procurement Concepts
The Toshiba Group defines green procurement as procuring products, parts and components,
materials, etc. with minimal environmental impacts from suppliers that vigorously promote
environmental protection. For that purpose, the Toshiba Group establishes the Group's
common Green Procurement Concepts and promotes the Group's green procurement as
described below.
4.1 Construction of the Environmental Management System (EMS)

As part of its efforts to promote environmental management, the Toshiba Group has been operating
and constructing its environmental management system and obtaining IS014001 certification. In
procurement, suppliers positively engaged in environmental activities, including the construction of
EMS, etc., are prioritized.
4.2 The management of chemical substances in procurement items

The management of chemical substances in procurement items is implemented with emphasis on the
agreement in the JAMP (* 1) and in line with the "Guidelines on Chemical Substances Management
in Products" issued by the JAMP.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 336/765
Attachment-8.1
* 1: JAMP is an acronym for the Joint Article Management Promotion-consortium, a non-profit

organization established in September 2006 to promote the construction of a system for the smooth
disclosure and dissemination of information on chemical substances in products in the supply chain.
For details of its activities, please see the following URL:
JAMPURL:
4.3 The Toshiba Group Environment-Related Substance List

Toshiba Group has established the "The Toshiba Group Environment-Related Substance List,"
and manages chemical substances in procurement items by classifying them into the following two
categories:
Category Definition Substances

RankA Substances whose presence is prohibited Appendix 1
(Prohibited Substances) in procurement items (including
packaging) in the Toshiba Group.
Substances whose use in products
(including packaging) is prohibited or
restricted by domestic and foreign laws
and regulations.
RankB Substances whose environmental impact Appendix 2
(Managed Substances) should be reduced, based on their actual
usage, via reduction of use and
substitution, or recovery and detoxification
in a closed system
Due to circumstances such as industry trends, the contents of management (substances, management
levels, threshold values, etc.) may differ among Toshiba group companies.
5. Requests to Suppliers
To promote green procurement, the Toshiba Group requests suppliers, our business partners, to
positively engage in the "promotion of environmental protection by suppliers," "supply of products,
parts and components, materials, etc. with minimal environmental impact," "conclusion of
agreements for securing environmental quality of procurement items" and "cooperation in various
surveys." We request suppliers to understand our requests and survey objectives and cooperate with
us. Due to circumstances such as industry trends, details of our requests to suppliers may differ
among Toshiba Group companies and are described in the Green Procurement Guidelines issued by
the office in charge of procurement of Toshiba Group companies, Toshiba in-house companies,
divisions, establishments, factories, etc. (The contents described in the Green Procurement
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 337/765
Attachment-8.1
Guidelines issued by the office in charge of procurement in Toshiba Group companies, Toshiba
in-house companies, divisions, establishments, factories, etc. shall take precedence over those
described in this document.)
5.1 Promotion of environmental protection by suppliers

We request suppliers to vigorously engage in environmental protection (establishment of
environmental policy, implementation of system, provision of training and education, etc.)
5.2 Supply of products, parts and components, materials, etc. with minimal environmental
impacts
Suppliers from which we receive items are requested to implement thorough management of
chemical substances in products, including the following actions:
(1) Establishment of a system for management of chemical substances in products.
(2) Procurement of parts, components and materials with minimal environmental impacts (green
procurement), including a reduction in the use of hazardous chemical substances.
(3) Response to the Toshiba Group's survey on the usage of environment-related substances.
5.3 Conclusion of agreements for assuring environmental quality of procurement items

To ensure the environmental quality of procurement items, we request each supplier to conclude a
Quality Assurance Agreement prior to transactions. In addition, we may request a supplier to submit
an Agreement Concerning the Restriction of the Use of Specified Hazardous Substances as
necessary.
5.4 Cooperation in surveys

5.4.1 Survey of suppliers' environmental protection activities
To strengthen partnerships with suppliers that are vigorously engaged in environmental protection
activities, we conduct surveys of suppliers' environmental protection activities, mainly on the
following items:
<Survey items>
Situations regarding the following:
(1) Obtaining ofISO 14001 certification
(2) Green procurement activities
(3) Environmental protection activities
a) Environmental policy
b) Organizations and plans
c) Environmental aspects of the business and systems
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 338/765
Attachment-8.1
d) Infonnation disclosure and training and education

(4) Others
5.4.2 Surveys of suppliers' chemical substance management systems

We conduct surveys of suppliers' chemical substance management systems with the aim of having
them establish/maintain systems to manage chemical substances in products.
5.4.3 Surveys of chemical substances in procurement items

Prior to the approval of new procurement items and judgment as to whether existing procurement
items require substitution, we conduct surveys concerning the presence of the chemical substances in
procurement items. The survey contents may change according to the types and necessity of supply
items, with the main survey items as follows:
<Survey items>
(1) Confomation of the non-use of prohibited substances via the "Declaration of Use/Non-use of
Environment-Related Substances"
(2) Survey on the use/non-use and content of any substance of very high concern (SVHC, *2) to be a
candidate for authorization under the EU REACH Regulations (one of the regulations on chemical
substances) (MSDS plus, AIS form,*3)
(3) Survey on the analysis and evaluation results
(4) Other surveys necessary to ensure the matters requested as mentioned above
*2: A substance of very high concern (SVHC) is one meeting the criteria in Article 57 of the EU
REACH Regulations and selected as a candidate substance for authorization under the procedures
in Article 59 of the Regulations.
*3: MSDS-plus and AIS (Article Information Sheet) are basic information transmission sheets
recommended by JAMP to transmit information on the chemical substances contained in products.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 339/765
Attachment-8.1
Attachment: The Toshiba Group Environment-Related Substance List

(Appendix 1) Rank A: Prohibited Substances
Timing of prohibition Threshold of concentration to be
No. Substances in supplies to the prohibited in supplies to the
Toshiba Group Toshiba Group
AOl Asbestos Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition
A02 Certain azocolourants and azodyes (only Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
those that may release certain amines) addition
A03 Cadmium and cadmium compounds Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition, and 100 ppm(* 1, *2)
A04 Hexavalent chromium compounds Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition, and 1000 ppm (*1, *2)
A05 Lead and lead compounds Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition, and 1000 ppm (*1, *2)
A06 Mercury and mercury compounds Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition, and 1000 ppm(* 1, *2)
A07 Ozone depleting substances (CFCs, Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
HCFCs, HBFCs, carbon tetrachloride, etc.) addition
A08 Polybrominated biphenyls (PBBs) Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition, and 1000 ppm (* 1)
A09 Polybrominated diphenylethers (PBDEs) Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition, and 1000 ppm (* 1)
AlO Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition
All Polychlorinated naphthalenes Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
(more than 3 chlorine atoms) addition
A12 Radioactive substances Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition
Al3 Ce1tain short chain chlorinated paraffins Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
(with a carbon chain length of between 10 addition
and 13)
A14 Tributyl tin (TBT) and triphenyl tin (TPT) Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional addition
Al5 Tributyl tin oxide (TBTO) Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition
A16 4-Aminodiphenyl and its salt Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 340/765
Attachment-8.1

addition
A17 1,2,3,4,10,1 O-hexachloro-1,4,4a,5,8,8a-hex Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
ahydro - exo -1,4- endo -5,8 - addition
dimethanonaphthalene (also known as
Aldrin)
Al8 1,2,3,4, 10, 1O-hexachloro-6, 7-epoxy- l, 4, 4a Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
,5,6, 7 ,8,8a-octahydro-endo-l ,4-endo-5 .8-d addition
imethanonaphthalene (also known as
Endrin)
Al9 Yellow phosphor (e.g. contained in match Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
powder in some cases) addition
A20 Mixture of 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,8 -octachloro- Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
2,3,3a,4, 7,7a- hexahydro -4,7- addition
methano-lH-indene, 1,4,5 ,6, 7 ,8,8-
heptachloro-3a,4, 7, 7a-tetrahydro-4, 7-meth
ano-lH- indene, and their analogous
compounds (also known as Chlordane or
Heptachlor)
A21 N,N'-ditolyl-p-phenylenediamine, Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
N-tolyl-N'-xylyl-p-phenylenediamine addition
or N,N'-dixylyl-p-phenylenediamine
A22 Dioxins Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition
A23 1, 1, 1-trichloro-2,2-bis(4-chlorophenyl) Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
ethane (also known as DDT) addition
A24 1,2,3,4, 10, 1O-hexachloro-6, 7-epoxy- l, 4, 4a Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
,5 ,6, 7 ,8,8a-octahydro-exo-l ,4-endo-5 ,8-di addition
methano naphthalene (also known as
Dieldrin)
A25 Polychloro-2,2-dimethyl-3-methylidenebic Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
yclo[2.2.1] heptane (also known as addition
Toxaphene)
A26 2,4,6-tri-tert-butylphenol Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 341/765
Attachment-8.1

addition
A27 Beta-naphthylamine and its salt Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition
A28 4-nitrodiphenyl and its salt Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition
A29 Bis(chloromethyl) ether Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition
A30 Hexachlorobenzene Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition
A31 Benzidine and its salt Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition
A32 Benzene Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition
A33 2-(2H-1,2,3-benzotriazol-2-il)-4,6-di-tert-b Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
utylphenol addition
A34 Dodecachloropentacyclo Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
[5.3.0.0(2,6).0(3,9).0(4,8)] decane (also addition
known as Mirex)
A35 2,2,2-trichloro-1, I -bis(4-chlorophenyl )etha Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
nol (also known as Kelthane or Dicofol) addition
A36 Hexachlorobuta-1,3-diene (also known as Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
Hexachlorobutadiene) addition
A37 Perfluoro( octane-1-sulfonic acid) (also Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
known as PFOS) or its salt addition
A38 Perfluoro( octane-1-sulfonyl) fluoride (also Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
known as PFOSF) addition
A39 Polychlorinated terphenyls (PCTs) Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition
A40 Tri-substituted organostannic compounds Already Prohibited Prohibition of intentional
(excluding A14 and Al5) Addition, and 1000 ppm (*3)
A41 Dimethyl fumarate (DMF) Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
addition
A42 Pentachlorobenzene Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 342/765
Attachment-8.1

addition
A43 r-1,c-2,t-3,c-4,t-5 ,t-6-Hexachloro-cyclohex Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
ane (also known as addition
a-Hexachlorocyclohexane)
A44 r-1,t-2,c-3,t-4,c-5,t-6-Hexachloro-cyclohex Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
ane (also known as addition
P-Hexachlorocyclohexane)
A45 r-1,c-2,t-3,c-4,c-5 ,t-6-Hexachloro-cyclohe Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
xane (also known as addition
y-Hexachlorocyclohexane or Lindane)
A46 Decachloropentacyclo (5 .3 .o.02,6_03,9.04,s) Already prohibited Prohibition of intentional
decane-5-one (also known as Clordecone) addition
A47 Dioctyltin compounds (DOT) To be prohibited from Prohibition of intentional
July 1, 2011 onward addition, and 1000 ppm (* 3)
(*4)
A48 Dibutyltin compounds (DBT) To be prohibited from Prohibition of intentional
July 1, 2011 onward addition, and 1000 ppm (* 3)
(*4)
"Intentional addition" means using chemical substances intentionally in forming supply items to
bring about specific properties, appearance or quality.
(* 1) The threshold of concentration to be prohibited means no intentional addition and the rate of
content of each material/substance as an impurity. The denominator when calculating a threshold
value shall be for each homogeneous material. Only applications exempt from the EU RoHS
Directive shall be exempt from the prohibition.
(*2) For packaging materials, the threshold of concentration to be prohibited shall be 100 ppm by weight
for a total of four materials (cadmium and its compounds, hexavalent chromium compounds, lead and its
compounds, and mercury and its compounds) for each homogeneous material composing the package.
(*3) The threshold of concentration to be prohibited means no intentional addition and the rate of
content of each material/substance as an impurity. The numerator when calculating a threshold value
shall be an equivalent for metal tin (Sn), and the denominator shall be for each molded item or its
component (including mixtures only for DBT).
(*4) To be established half a year before the law enactment. However, only the applications allowed
for use covered by the exemptions and time limits specified in the Annex XVII of the EU REACH
Regulations shall be exempt from the prohibition of use.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 343/765
Attachment-8.1
(Appendix 2) Rank B: Managed Substances

No. Substances
BOI Antimony and its compounds
B02 Arsenic and its compounds
B03 Beryllium and its compounds
B04 Brominated flame retardants, other than PBBs (A08) and PBDEs (A09)
B05 Nickel and its compounds (only parts in contact with human bodies)
B06 Certain phthalates
B07 Polyvinylchloride (PVC)
B08 Selenium and its compounds
B09 Perfluorocarbons (PF Cs)
BIO Hydrofluorocarbons (HF Cs)
Bll Sulfur hexafluoride (SF 6 )
B12 Substances of Very High Concern (SVHC) under the EU REACH
Regulations (* 5)
(*) The Substances of Very High Concern (SVHC) selected under the procedures specified in the
Article 59 of the EU REACH Regulations. The denominator shall be the total mass of a supply item
or each component/material.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 344/765
Attachment-8.1
Table of revisions
Established on: December 1, 1999
Revised on:
March 1, 2003
November 1, 2006
April 1, 2011
Edition No. Date of establishment/ Reason and contents of

. . ..
rev1s10n rev1s10n
1 1999.12.1 Newly issued
2 2003.6.1 Review of contents and
coverage of the list of
environment-related
materials
3 2006.11.1 Reviewed and totally
revised the contents of the
list of environment-related
materials
4 2011.5.1 Totally revised by
rev1ewmg the list of
environment-related
materials and changing
the control of contained
chemical substances to the
JAMP
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 345/765
Attachment-8.1
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
1-1, Shibaura 1-Chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 105-8001, Japan

Procurement Div., Tel: +81-3-3457-2430
Corporate Environment management Div., Tel: +81-3-3457-2403
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 346/765
Attachment-8.2 : Indonesia 83 Material
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 347/765
Attachment-8.2
B Lampiran Peraturan Pemerintah Republik Indonesia Nomor74 Tahun 2001
}LaJ!l.PiranJ] : Peraturan Pemerintah Republik Indonesia

Nomor : 74 Tahun 2001
Tanggal : 26 November 200 l
DAFTAR BARAN BERBAHAYADAN BERACUN (B3) YANG DJPERGUNAKAN
No. No. Reg. NamaBahan Sinonim/Nama Dagang Rumus Mo1eku1

Chemical Kimia
Abstrack
Service
l 540-59-0 1.2- Acetylene dichloride; l ,2-dichloroethylene; C2H2Cl2

dik Joroetil ena 1,2-dichJoroethene; l ,2-dichloroethylcne;
sym-dichJoroethylene; Dioform.
2 79-06-1 Akrilamida Acrylylamide, 2-propenamide C 3HsNO
3 107-13-1 AkriJonitril Acry1onitrile; 2-propenitrilei vinyl cyanide; C 3H~
Cyanoethy1ene; Acritct; Fumigrain; Ventox
4 107-02-8 AkroJein Acrolein; 2propena1; AcriJic aJdehide; C3B40
Aery Ialdehyde; Acraldelhyde; Aqualin
5 107-18-6 AIHAlkohol Allyl alcohol; 2-propen-l-ol;1~propenol-3; C3H60
Vinyl carbinol.
6 ~7446-70-0 Aluminium Hexahydrate; Aluwets; Ahydrol; Drictor AlCl3
chloride
7 766441-7 Amonink Ammonia NH3
8 62-53-3 Anilin Anilenei Benzanamine; AniJine oil; C 6H 7N
Phenylamine; Amino benzene; Aminophen;
1yanol
9 '7440-37-1 Argon - Ar
10 1327-53-3 Arsen (III) Arsenous oxide; Arsenous acid; Arsenous As203
Oksida acid anhydrid; Arsenous oxide; Arsenic
sesquioxide white arsenic
11 7784-34-1 Arsen Triklorida Arsenic Trichloride; Butter of Arsenic; AsCI3
Fuming liquid Arsenic.
12 7784-42-1 Arsin Arsine; Arsenic tryhydride; Hydrogen AsH3
arsenide
13 79-10..7 Asam Akrilat Acrylic acid; 2-propenic acid vinylformic C3H4Qi
l4 64-19-7 - AsamAsetat Acetic acid; Aci-Jel CH:iCOOH
15 64-18-6 Asam Formiat Formic acid; Amefaensaure CH202
16 7664-38-2 Asam Posfat Phosphoric acid; Orthophosphoric acid H3P04
17 7647-01~0 Asam Klorida Hydrochloric acid; Hydrogen cloride; HCI
Anhidrous hydrocloric acid
18 79•1lw8 Asmn Kloroasetat Chloroacetic Acid; Chloroethanoic acid; C2H3CI02

Monoch1oroacetic acid; MCA.
19 144-62-7 Asam Oksalat Oxalic acid; Ethanedioic acid C2H204
Hlmpunan Pemturan di Bidfng Penge!o!aan Lingkungan Hidup
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 348/765
Attachment-8.2
Lamprran Peraturan Pemerintah Republik Indonesia Nomor 74 Tahun 2001 II
No. Reg. Nama Bahan Sinonim/Nama Dagang Rumus Molekul

Chemical Kimia
Abstrack
Service
79-21-0 Asam Pernsetat Pereatic acid; Ethaneperoxide bacid; peroxy C2H403

acetic acid; Aceti\y I hydroperoxide
7601-90-3 Asam Perklorat Perchloric Add. HCI04
I 88-89-1 Asam pikrat Picric Acid; 2A6-trinitrophenol; Pieronitric

acid; Carbazotic acid; nitroxanthic acid.
C6H3N3Ci
74-90-8 Asam Sinnida Hydrogen cyanide; Hydrocyanic acid;

t Blausaure, Prussic acid
HCN
7664-93-9 Asam Suifat Sulfuric Acid; Oi1 Vitriol H2S04

100-21-0 Asam Teraftalik Teraphtalic acid; l ,4- CsH604
benzenedicarboxyclic acid; p-pthalic acid,
Tepthol
Asbestos Amianthus; Chrysolite {M&,( Si4 Om}(OH)g}
74-86~2 Asetilen Acetylene; Ethyne; Ethine C2H2
75~05~8 Asetonitril Acetronitrile; 'Methyl cynide; C:iH3N
Cyanomethane; Ethane nitrite
7446-09-5 Be1erang Su]phure dioxide; Sulfurous anhydride; sai
dioksida Sulfurous oxide
100-44-7 Bensil Klorida Benzi l chloride; (ch loromethy 1)benzen ei C 7 H 7CJ
Alpha-chlorotoluena
71-43-2 Benzena Benzene; BenzoJ; CycJo hexatriene C6H6
7637-07-02 Boron Boron Trifluorida - BF3
Trifiuorida
7726-95-6 Brom Bromine Br2
106-97-8 Butana n-butane C4H10
19287-45-7 Diboran DiboraQe; Boroethane; B2H6
Diboronhexahydride
111-42·2 Dietanolamine Diethanolnmine; 2,2-iminobisethanol C4H 11 N
diethyl ol amine; bis(h ydrox yethy I)amine
60-29-7 Dietil Eter Diethy1ether; I , J-oxybisethane; C4HioO
Ethoxyethane; Ether; Diethyl ether; Ethyie
oxide~ Sulfuric ether; Anesthetic ether
109-89-7 Dietilnmina Diethy1amine; N-ethy lethanami nc C 4H 11 N
ill-46-6 Dietilaminu Glikol Dethy1ene glycol; Beryllium diethyl. C4H1oN
I
!
68-12-2 Dimentil
Fornamida
Dimethyl Fornamide; DMF;_DMFA. C~7NO
77-78-1 DimentiJ Sulfat Dimethyl sulphate; Sulfuric acid dimethyl C 2H604S

ester; DMS
505-22-6 Dioksana Djoxane C4Ha02
74-84-0 Etana Dirnethyl;Mehyl methane;Ethyl hidride C2H4
Hitnpunan Peraturan di Bidang Pef1{!efolean Lingk:ungan Hidup
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 349/765
Attachment-8.2
II Lampiran Peraturan Perr,erintah Republik Indonesia Nomor 74 Tahun 2001
No. No. Reg. NamaBahan Sinonim/Nama Dagang Rumus Molekul

Chemical Kimia
Abstrack
Service
44 i41A3-5 Atanolarnine 2-aminoethanol C2H1NO
I'
45 140~88-5 EtHAkrilat Athyl acryJate;2-propenoic acid ethyl ester; C5H802
acrylic acid ethyl ester
-l 46 64-17-5 Etil Alcohol Ethanol; Absolute alcohol; Anhydrous

alcohol;Dehydrated alcohol; Ethyl hidrate;
C2H60
Ethyl hidroxide :
' 47 75-00-3 Etil Klorida Ethyl chloride; Chloroethane;

Monochloroethane: chlorothyl; AethyJis
chloridum; Ether chloradus;
Etherhydrochloric; Ether muriatic; Ke)ene;
C2HsCl
Ch_elen; Anodhyno·n; Chlory anesthetic;

Narcoti1e
48 107M15~3 Etilena Diamina Ethylene Dfomine; 1,2-ethanediamine; 1,2- C2H&N2
diruninoethane.
49 I07-21-t Etilen Glikol Ethylene glycol; l.2-etahnediol C2H602
50 75-21-8 Etilen Oksida Ethylene oxide; Oxirane; Anprolene Cil1'0
51 74-85-1 Etilena Ethylene; Etahane; Elayl; OJefiant gas C2H4
52 108-95-2 Feno! Phenol; Carbolic acid; Phenic acid; Phenilic C~50H
acid; Phenyl hidroxide; Hidroxybenzene;
Oxybenzene
53 50-00-0 Formaldehida Formaldehide; Oxomettthane; oxymethyJene; CHiO
Methylene oxide; Formic aldehyde; Methyl
aldehyde
54 50-00-0 Formnlin (larutan) Formaldehyde Solution; Formalin; Formal; CH20
Morbicid; Veracur
55 75-44-5 Fosger Phosgene; Carbonic dichloride; Carbonyl CCI20
chloride; ChJoroformyl chloride
56 85-44-9 Ftalik Anhidrida Pthalic anhydride; l ,3-isobenzofurandione CaH403
57 98-01-1 Furfural FmfuraJ; 2~furoncarboxyaJdehide; 2- CsH402
furaldehide; Pyromuric aldehide; Artificial
oil of ants; Fulfurol
58. 7782-41 ..4 Gas Fluor Fluorine; F F2
59 56-81-5 Gliserol Glysero1; t ,2,3-propanetrioJ; Glycerin; C3Hs03
Trihydroxypropane; IFP; Opthalgan
60 lll-30-8 Glu taraldehyde Penthanediol CsHs02
6I 100-97-0 · Heksametilenate Hexamethylenetetramine; 2-methy1-J ,3r C6H 12N4
trnmina butadiene
62 110-54-3 Heksana Hexane- CJ-114
63 302-01-2 Hidrasin Hydrazine; Hidrazine anhydrous H4N2
64 1333-74-0 Hidrogen Hydrogen; Protium H2
65 7664-39-3 Hidrogen Hydrogen Fluoro add; Fluohydric acid HF
Flourida
Himpunan Peraturan di Blyang Pafl{le!olaan lingkungan Hld11p
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 350/765
Attachment-8.2
Lampiran Peraturan Pemerintah Republik Indonesia Nomor 74 Tahun 2001 B
No. Reg. NamaBahan Sinonim/Nama Dagang Rumus Molekul

Che~ical Kimia
Abstrack
Service
7722-84-1 Hidrogen Hydrogen peroxide; Hydrogen dioxide; H20i

Peroksida Hydroperoxide; Hioxy1
7783-07-5 Hidrogen Hydrogen Selenide; Selenium hydride. H2 Se -
Selenida
7783-06-4 Hidrogen Sulfida Hydrogen sulphide; sulfurated hydrogen; H2S
Hydrosulfuric acid
123-31-9 Hidrokwinon Hydroqui none; 1.4-benzodiol; p- ~~02'
dihydroxybenzene; Quinol; Aida; Black and
white bleaching cream; Eldoquine;
Eldopaque; Quinnone; TechquinoJ.
540.34.1 Isooktana Iso octane; 2,2,4-trimethylpentane; Ca.His
ISobut I trimethyJ methane
78-79-5 Isoprena Methanamine; HMT; HMTA~ Hexamine; CsHa
J,3,5,7-tetraazaadamantane; Aminororn;
Ammoform; Cystamin; Cytogen; Formin;
Uritore; Urotopin
67-63-0 Isopropil alcohol 2-propanol C3HsO
Ka1ium KA1(S04)i
Aluminium
Sulfnt
1310-58-3 Kalium Potash KOH
hidr9ksida
151-50-8 Kalium sianida KCN
124-38-9 Karbon dioxida Carbonic acid gas CO2
75-15-0 Karbon disuJfida Carbon disulfide; Carbon bisoulfide; Dithio -CS2
carbonic anhydride
744044-0 Karbon hitam Amorphous C
630-08-0 Karbonmonoksida Carbon monoxide co
7782-50-5 Klor Chlorine CI 2
67"-66-3 Klorofonn Chloroform; Trichloromethane CHCI3
123-73-9 Kroton Aldchida Croton Aldeyde C4H60
.,
106-42-3 Ksi1ena· Xylene~ Dimethylbenzene; Xylo1 CsH4(CH3)z
108-78-l Melamina Melamine; 1,3,5-triazine; 2,4,6-triamine; C 3H6Nti
2.4,6-triam ino-s-triazine; Cyanurotrianide.
7487-97 Merkuri klorida Mercuric Choride; Mercury bichloride; HgCl2
Corrosive sublimate; Mercury perchloride~
Corrosive mercury chloride
21908-53-2 Merkuri Oksida Mercuric oxide HgO
74-82-8 Methane CH4
67-56-·I Metanol MethylalcohoI; CarbinoJ; Wood spirit: CH30H
Wood alcohol
Himpunsn P&raturan di 8id8ng Pengelolaan Ungkungan Hidup
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 351/765
Attachment-8.2
ll Lampirnn Peraturnn Pamerintah Republik Indonesia Nomor 74 Tahun 2001
No. No. Reg. NamaBahan Sinonim/Nama Dagang Ramus Molekul

Chemical Kimia
Abstrack
Service
89 96~33~3 Meti 1Ak.ri lat Methyl acrilate; 2~propenoic acid methyl C4H602
ester; acrylic acid methyl ester
90 78~93~3 Metil EtiJ Keton Methyl ethyl ketone; 2-butanone; C4HaO
Ethylmethyl ketone; MEK; 2-oxobutane
91 624-83~9 Metil Iso Sianat Methyl isocyanatej Isocyanatornethane; CH3,NCO
ISocyanic acid methyl ester; MIC
92 74-93-1 Metil Merkaptan Methanethioi; Mercaptomethane; CH4S
Thiomethyl alcohol; Methyl sufhydrate
93 75-09-2 Metilen Klorida Dichloromethane; Me_thylene dichloride; CH2 CLz
Methy Jene bichloride.
94 108-10-l Meti lisobuti keton Isopropylacetone; 4 methy J-2-pen tano ne; C6Hn0
Methyl isobutyl ketone; Hexone
95 141-43-5 Monoetanolamina 2-aminoethanol; monoethanolami ne; beta¥ C2I-I1NO
aminiethyl alcohol; 2-hydroxyethylarnine;
Ethylolmine; Colamine
96 26628-22-8 Natrium Asida Sodium Azide; Smite NaN3
97 1330-43-4 Natrium borat Sodium biborate; Sodium pyro borat; Nn2B407
kristal Sodium tetra borat
98 13 I0-73-2 Natrium Sodium hydroxide; Caustic soda; Soda lye, NaOH
Hidroksida Sodium hydrate
99 7681-52-9 Natrium Sodium Hypochtorite - NaOCl
Hlpoklorit
100 7775-l l-3 Natrium Kromat Sodium chromnte(VI); Neutral sodium Na2Cr04
chromate
101 142-82-5 n-Heptana n-Heptane - C1H16
102 13463-39-3 Nike! Karbonil Nickel carbonyl; Nickel tetracarbonyl Ni(C0)4
J03 54-11-5 Nikotin Nicotine; Nicorette CJOH 14N2
104 98-95-3 Nitrobenzena Mitrobenzol; Essence of mirbane; OH of C6H5N02
mirbane
105 7727-37-9 Nitrogen Nitrogen N2
106 10)02-44-0 Nitrogen Nitrogen dioxide N02
Dioksida
107 71-23-8 n-Propil Alkohol n-propyl alcohol; 1-propanot popyHc C3HsO
alcohol; Optal
108 95-48-7 0-kresol Cresol-0; 2-methylphenol; o-cresylic acid; C1HsO
o-hydroxytoluene; Tolano1; Barnard; Meyer.
109 95-53-4 0-tuluidine 2-methyJbenzamine; 2-aminotoluena; 2- C7 H90
_. j me thy lanil ine
110 10028-15-6 Ozon Ozone; Triatomic oxygen 03
JI I 106-46-7 p-Diklorobenzena Paracide; PDB; Paradichlorobenzene; Para C6H4Cl2
zene; Di chloricide; Paramoth
Himpunan Peraturao di Bipang Pangelo!aan Lingkungan Hidup
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 352/765
Attachment-8.2
Lampiran Peraturan Pemerintah Republik Indonesia Nomor74 Tahun 2001 II
No. Reg. MamaBahan Sinonirn/Nama Dagang Rumus Moleku1

Chemical Kimia
Abstrack
Service
87-86-5 Pentnklorofenol Penta; PCP; Penchloraol; Santhophene 20 C6HCI50

109-66-0 Pentana n-pentana CsH12
7761-88 ..8 Perak nitrat AgN03
Petroleum eter
110-86-1 Piddin P ridine- CHN
1314-56-3 Posfor Phosphorouspentaoxide; Phosphoric P20s
Pentaoksirla anhydride; Disphosphorous pentoxide
- 7719-12-2 Posfor Triklorida Phosphorous trichtoride; Phosphoric PCI:i
chloride
74-98-6 Propana n-propana C2Hs
75-56-9 Propilen Oksida Propylene Oxide; Methyl oxirane; Propene C3H60
oxide.
i 108-46-3 Resornisol 1,3-benzenediol; m-dihydroxybenzene; C6H602
;£ Resorcin
I 7646-85-7 Seng Klorida Zinc Chlroride; Butter zinc. ZnCl2
lJ0-82-7 Sikloheksana Cyclohex.anone; Ketohexamethylene; C 6Hrn0

Hexamethylene; Hcx.anaptene
108-94-1 Sikloheksanon CycJohexanone; Ketohexamethylene; C6H12
Pimelic ketone; Hytrol; Hytro1 O; Anone;
Nadene
109-99-1 Tetrahidrofuran Dietbylene oxide; Tetra methylene oxide C4H80
127-18-4 Tetrakloroeti len a Tetrachloroethane; Perchloroethy Iene; C24Cl4
Ethylene tetrachloride; Tetra chloro
ethylene; Nema; Tetracap; Tetropil;
Perclene~ Ankilostin; Didakene
7439-92-J Timbal (timah Lead. Pb
hitam)
1309-60-6 Timbat dioksida Lead dioxide; Lead oxide brown; Lead PTJOi
peroxide; Lead suproxide
78-00-2 Timbal Tetraetil Tetraethyl Lead; Tetraethylplumbune; Lead CsHwPb
tetraethyl. TEL
108-88-3 Toluena Methylbenzene; Totuol~ Phen ylmethane; C 6HsCH1
Methacida
584-84-9 Toluena-2.4- Toluena-2,4-diisocyanate; 2,4- C 9H 6 N 2 0 2
diisosianat di isocy ana tol uena; 2,4-tol yl en a
di isocyanate; TDT; Nacconate 100.
118-96-7 Tri nitroto luena TNT; Alpha-trinitrotoluol; sym- C 7HsN306
tryni trotol uene; l-methy1-2.4,6-
trinitrobenzene; Troty1; Tolit; Trilit
1314-62-l Vanadium Vanadium Pentoxide; Vanadic anhydride. V 20 5
Pentoksida
108-05-4 Vi nil Asetat Acetic acid ethenyl ester; acetic acid vinyl ester C4H602
Himpunan Peraturan di Sidang Pengelolasn l.ingkungan Hidup
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 353/765
Attachment-8.2
Ill Lampiran Peraturan Pem_erintah Republik Indonesia Nomor 74 Tahun 2001
No. No.Reg. Nama Bahan Sinonim/Nama Dagang Rumus Molekul lI

Kimia
Chemical
Abstrack l
Service
Il
135 - HCFC-21 *) Dichlorofluoromethane CHFCl2 l
136 .. HCFC~22 *) Chlorodifluoromethane CHF2CI
i
I
!
137 - HCFC-31 *) Chlorof1uoromethane CH2FCJ ;
;
138 - HCFC - 121 *) Tetrach lorofluoroethane C2HFC1 4 ;
139 - HCFC_- 122 *) Trichlorod ifluoroethane C2HF2Cl3
140 - HCFC- J23 *) Dichlotrifl uoroethane Ci_HF3Cl2
141 ~
HCFC- 123 u Dich lotri fl uoroethan e CHFCICF3
*}
142 - HCFC- 124 *) Chlorotetratl uoroethane CiHF4CI
143 - HCFC-124 "'* Chlorotetrafluoroethane CHFCh
*)
144 - HCFC- 131 *) Trichlorofl uoroethane C2H2FCl3

145 - HCFC- 132 *) Dichlorodi fluoroethane C 2H2F2Cl2
146 - HCFC- 133 *) Ch lorotrifl uoroethane C2H2F3Cl
147 - HCFC- l41 *) D ichlorofl uoroethanc C2H3FCl2
148 - HCFC - 141 b0 Dichlorofluoroethane CH3CFC}z
*)
149 - HCFC- 142 *) Chlorodi luoroethane C2H~2Cl
150 - HCFC ~ l 42b** Chlorodiluoroethane CH3CF2C1
*)
151 - HCFC- 151 *) Ch lorofluoroethane ~llJFCI
152 - HCFC-221 *} HexachJorofl uoropropane C3HFCl6
153 - HCFC-222 *) Pentachl orod ifluoropropane C3HF2Cls
154 - HCFC-223 *) Tetrachlorotrifluoropropane C3HF3CJ4
155 - HCFC-224 *) -Trichl orotetrafluoropropane C3HF4CIJ
156 - HCFC-225 *) Dichloropentafl uoropropane C3HF5CJ2
157 - HCFC - 225ca** Dichloropentafl uoropropane CF3CF2CHCl2
*)
158 - HCFC - 225cb**' Dichloropentafl uoropropane CF2CICF2CHC1F
*)
159 - HCFC-226 *) Chlorohexatluoropropane C:3HF6CJ
l60 HCFC~231 *) Pentachlorofluoropropane C3H2FCl5
161 HCFC-232 *) Tetrachlorodifluoropropane CJli2F2Cl4
H\mpunan Peraturan di B14a,ng Pengeloloon linglrungan Hirlup
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 354/765
Attachment-8.2
Lampi ran Petaturan Pemerintah Republik Indonesia Nomor 74 Tahun 2001 II
No. Reg. Narna Bahan Sinonim/Nama Dagang Rumus MoJekul

Chemical Kimia
Abstrack
Service
HCFC-233 *) Tri chJorotri fluoropropane C3H1F3CI3

HCFC-234 *) Dichlorotetrafluoropropane C3H2F4Cl3
HCFC -235 *) Chloropentafluoropropane C3H2Fs.Cl
HCFC-241 *) Tetrachlorofl uoropropane C3H3FCl4
HCFC-242 *) Trichlomdifluoropropane C3H3F2C13
HCFC-243 *) Dichlorotrifluoropropane C3H3F3Cl2
HCFC-244 *) ChJorotetrafl uoropropane ~H3F4CJ
HCFC-251 *) Trichi orofluoropropane C3~FCl3
HCFC-252 *) Diehl orodi fluoropropane C3H.,F2Cl3
HCFC-253 *) Ch lorotrifluoropropane C3lJ.iF3Cl
HCFC-261 *) Dichlorofl uoropropane C3H5FCl2
HCFC-262 *) Ch lorodifl uoropropane C3HsF2C1
HCFC-271 *) Chlorofluoropropane C3H~CJ
HFBr2 *) Dibromofluoromethane
CHF2Br - HBFC Bromodifluoromcthane
-22Bl *)
CH2FBr *) Bromofluoromethane
C 2HFBr4 :t:) Tetrabromofl uoroethane
C:zHF2Br3 *) Tri bromodifl uoroethane
CzHF3Br1 *) Dibromotrifluoroetha ne
C2HF4Br *) Bromotetrafluoroethane
4H2FBr3 *) Tribromofluoroethane
CiH2F2Br2 *) Dibromodifluoroethane
C2H2F3Br *) B romotrifluoroethane
C2 H3FBr2 *) Dibromofluoroethane
~H3F2Br *) Bromodifluoroethane
C2IiiFBr *) Bromofluoroethane
C3HFBr6 *) Hexabromofluoropropane
C3HF2Brs *) Pentabr-0modifi uoropropane
C3HF3Br4 "') Tctrabromotrifluoropropane

C3 HF4Br3 *) Tri bromotetrafl uoropropnne
Hlmpumm Paraturan di Bidang Pangalofsan Ungkungan Hidup
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 355/765
Attachment-8.2
B Lampiran Peraturan Pemerintah Republik Indonesia Nomo, 74 Tahun 2001
No. No. Reg. NamaBahan Sinonim/Nama Dagang Rumus Molckul

Chemical IGmia
Abstrack
Service
192 - C3HFsBr2 *) Dibromopentatluoropropane
193 - C3HF<,-Br *) Bromohexafluoropropane
194 - C3H2FBr5 *) Pentabromofluoropropane
195 - C1H2F2Br *) Tetrabrornodifluoropropane
196 - C3~2F3Br :II) Tribromotrifluoropropane
197 ~
C3H2F4Br *) Dicbromotetrafluoropropane
19S - C3H2F 5Br *) Bromopentafluoropropane

~
199 - C3H3FBr4 *) Tetrabromofluoropropnne
200 - C3H3F2Br3 *) Tribromodifluoropropane
201 - C3 H3FJilr2 *) Dibromotrifluoropropnne
202 - C3 H3F 4Br *) Bromotetrafluoropropane
203 - C3H4FBr3 *) Tribromofluoropropane

204 - C3ll4F2Br *) Dibromodifluoropropa ne
205 - C3H4F1,Br *) Bromotrifluoropropane
206 - C 3H:;FBr2 *) Dibromofluoropropane
207 ~
C3HjF2Br *) Bromod ifluoropropane
208 - C3H~r *) Bromotluoropropane
209 - CH2BrCJ *) Bromochloromethane
Catatan: *) adalah B3 dengan batas waktu yang boleh dipergunakan sampai dengan tahun 2040
PRESlDEN REPUBLIK INDONESIA,

ttd.
MEGAWATISOEKARNOPUTRI
Salinan sesuai dengan aslinya
Deputi Sekretaris Kabinet

Bidang Hukum dan
Perundang-undangan,
;,. j
ttd
Lambock V. Nahattands
Himpunan Peraturan d'i Bldang Pengelolaan Ungkungan Hidup
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 356/765
Attachment-8.2
Lampiran Peraturan Pemerintah Republik Indonesia Nomor74 Tahun 2001 Ill
: Peraturan Pemerintah Republik Indonesia

: 74 Tahun 2001
: 26 November 200 l
-~ I : DAFTAR BAHAN BERBAHAYA DAN BERACUN (B3) YANG DILARANG DIPERGUNAKAN
No. Reg. NamaBahan · Sinonim!Nama Dagang Rumus Molekul

Chemical Kimia
Abstrack
Service
Aldrin HHDN C12l-IsC16
Chlordane CD68; VelsicoJ 1068; Toxichlor; Niran; C 10H 6Cl 8
Octachlor; Orthoclor; Synclor~ Belt;
Corodane.
DDT Dkhlorodiphenyltrichloroethane; D~58; C14H9Cls
Chlorophenothane; Clofenotane; Dicophane;
penthachlodn; p.p-DDT; Agritan; Gesapon;
Gesarex; Gesarol; Gueapon: Neocid.
Dieldrin Compound 497; ENT 16225; HEOD; C12HsCl60
lnsectiside No. 497~ Octalox
Endrin Compound 269; ENT 17251; Mendrin; C12H 8Cl60
Nendrin; Hexadrin
Heptachlor E3314, Velsicol 104; Drinox; Heptamul · C 10HsC11
Mirex C6-1283; ENT 25719; Dechlorane; C10Cl12
Hexachloropentadienedimer
Toxaphene Hercules 3956; Polychlorocamphene; C10HrnCls
Clorinatedcamphene; Campheclor; Altox;
Geniphene. Motox, Penphene; Phenacide;
Pheaatox; Strobane-T; Toxakil.
118-74~1 Hexachloroben- Po1ychloro benze; A nticarie; C 6Cl 6
zene Bunt~cure; Bunt-no-more; Julins Carbon
Chloride
1336--36-3 PCBs Po1ychlorinated Biphenyls; Chlorobiphenyls; CnX
Aroclor; Clophen; Fenclor; Kenachlor; X=HorCI
Phenochlor; Pyralene; santotherm.
Himpunan P-eratunm dl Bidang Pengelolsan Ungkungan Hldup
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 357/765
Attachment-8.2
R Lampiran Peraturan Pemerintah Re·publik Indonesia Noma..- 74 Tahun 2001
T0--~!L 2. (A!FE:To (jJf·fTKOL7f(G US/fl€,)

TABEL 2: DAFTAR BAHAN BERBAHAYA DAN BERACUN (B3) YANGTERBATAS DIPERGUNAKAJ
No. No. Reg. NamaBahan Sinonim/Nama Dagang Rumus Molekui

Chemical Kimia
Abstrack
Service
1. 93-76-5 2,4,5-T Esterone 245; Trioxone; Weedone. CsH 5Cl303

2 2425-06-1 Captafol Difolatan C 10H9Cl4N02S
3 6164-98-3 Chlordimeform (CDM) CDM; Ciba-8514; Schering 36,268; C10H13CIN2
spanon; Fund.al~ Gulecton
Ch1orophenamidine
4 510- 15-6 Chi orobenzilate Compound 338; 023922; Acaraben; C 16H 14Cl20J
Akar; Folbex; Ethyl 4,4-dichloro
benzilate; Ethyl 2-hydroxy-2,2bis(4-
ch1oropheni1)acetate.
5 gg:..35:..7 Dinoseb dan garam- DNBP; ENT 1122; WX-8365; Chemax - C10H12N20s
garam dinoseb (DNBP) PE; Dow General; Premerge; Subitex;
Caldonj Basanite
6 106-93-4 Ethylene Dibromida EDB, Dowfume WW.85; l,2- C2H4Br2

(EDB) dibromoethane; ethy Jeenebromide;
sym-dibromoethane;
7 640-19-7 Fl uoroacetamide 1081; Fluoroacetic acid amide; C2H.Jl'NO
Monofl uoroacetamide; Fussol;
Fluorakil J00;
8 608-73-1 Hexachlorocyc1ohexnne ENT 7796; Gama-HCH; Gama-BHC; C~6Cl6

(HCH) dan campuran Garna-Hexachlor; Apatasin; Aphtitin;
isomemya Esodem; Oammalln; Gamane; Ganniso;
Gammaxene; Gexane; Jacutfo; K-weJI
Lindafoa; Lindatox; Laroxane;
Quellada; Streuncx; Tri~6; Vitaou.
9 58-89-9 Lindane - C~6Ct6
10 - Senyawa Merkuri ~
-
termasuk:
I. Anorganik merkuri
2. Alkyl merkuri
3. Atkyloxyalkyl merkuri
4. Ary] merkuri
l1 87-86-5 Penthachlorophenol PCP; Ponta; Penchloroe; Santhophene C~ClsO
20
12 6923-22-4 Monocrotophos (terlarut 5D9129; ENT27129; Monocron; C 7H1,iN05P
dalam fommlasi Azodrin; Nuracron.
melebihi 600 gr active
ingredient/liter)
)3 10265-92-6 Methamidophos (terJarut Bayer; ENT 27396; Otrho 9006: SRA C:ifI8NOiJ>S
dalrun formulasi 5172; Monitor: Tamaron
melebihi 600 gr active
ingredient/1iter)
Himpunan faraturan di Sidang Pengelolium Lingkungan Hidup

f
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 358/765
Attachment-8.2
Lampiran Peraturan Pemerintah Republik Indonesia Nomor 74 Tahun 2001 Ill
':/ No. Reg. Nama Bahan Sinonim/Namn Dagang Rumus Molekul

Chemipal Kimia
Abstrnck
Service
13171-21-6 Phosphamidon (ter1arut Ciba 570; ENT 25515; Dimecron C 10H 19ClN05P
dalam formulasi
melebihi I000 gr active
ingredient/liter)
Methyl-parathion E 60 l; ENT 17292; Da1f(Obsolute) CsH1oNOsPS
(Emulsi dengan Dimethyl parathion; parathin-methy1;
kandungan 19,5%, 40%, Metron Penhcap M; Metron, Folidol- M;
50%, 60% active Metacide Metaphos; Ni trox 80.
ingredient. Debu dengan
knndungan 1,5%, 2%,
3% active ingredient)
Parathion (seluruh DNTP; 5NP; E-605; AC 3422; ENT C 1oH 14N05PS
-formulnsi: aerosol, 15108; Alkron; Alleron; Aphami1e;
dustable powder (DP)). Dii;thyl-p-nitmphenylmonothio
emuJsifiabie concentrate phosphate; Etilon; Folidol; Fosferone;
(EC). granular (GR) dan Nirnn~ Raraphos; Rhodiatox; Thiph~s
wettable powder (WP)
kecuali capsule
suspension (CS)
:.-12001-28-4 Crocidolite
36355-01-8 Polybrominated Brominated biphenyls; C12X
(hexa-) biphenyls (PBBs) polybromobipheny Is X=HorBr
- -27858-07-7
(octa-)
13654-09-6
Pol ychlori nated Chlorinatoo biphenyls~

terphenyls (PCTs) Chlorobiphenyls; Aroclor; Chlopen;
Fenchlor, Keneclor; Phenochlor,
Pyrulene; Santotherm
126-72-7 Tris-BP Tris (2,3-dibrornoprophyl) phosphate; C 9H 15Br604P
Apex 462~5; Flammex AP; Flammex T
23P; Fi remaster LV-T23P; Firemaster
23P; T 23P, Fyrol HB~32
7439-97-6 Mercury/Air Raksa Liquid Silver; Hydrargyrum; Liquid Hg
silver: QuicksJiver
107-06-2 Ethylene Dichloride 1.2-dichloroethane: Sym- C2H4Cl2
dichloroethane; Ethylene chloride;
EDC; Dutch liquid; Brocide
75-21-8 Ethylene Oxide Oxirane; Orixane, Amprolene C2H40
56-23~5 CCIA (Karbon Tetrachloromethane; CCI4
Tetraklorida) Perchloromethane; Necatori na;
Bezinoform
71-55-6 TCA(l,l,l Trikhloroethane Me thy lchloroform; Chorothene C2H3Cl3
Hlmpunan Peraturan di Bldang Peneetolaan Ungkungan Hidup
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 359/765
Attachment-8.2
Iii Lampiran Peratul'an Pamsrlntah Republik Indonesia Nomor74 Tahun 2001
No. No. Reg. NamaBahan Sinonim/Nama Dagang Rumus Molekul

Chemical Kimia
Abstrack
Service
26 75-69-4 CFC-II Trich Joromo nofluoromethane; CCI~

Fluorotrichloromethane; Freon I I;
frj gen 11; Are ton 11
27 75-71-8 CFC-12 Dichloroditluoromethane; Areton 12; CCl2F2
Freon 11; Fri gen 12; Genetron 12;
Halon; lsotron 2
28 - CFC-113 Trichlorotri fluoroethane C 2 Cl3F3
29 - CFC-114 Dichlorotetrafluoroethane; C2ChF4
Crytluorane; Freon 1l 4r; Frigen I J4~
Areton 114
30 - CFC-115 Chloropentafl uoroethane C2 CIFs
31 - CFC-13 Chlorotrifluoromethan e CCIF3
32 - CFC-112 Tetracblorodifluoroethane C2Cl4F2
33 - CFC-111 Pen tac hi orotluoroethane. C2ClsF
34 - CFC-217 Chloroheptatl uoropropane C 3 Cl 7 F
35 - CFC-216 Diehl oroheksafluoropropane C 3CI2F6
36 - CFC-2l5 Tric hloropentafluoropropane C 3Cl3P5

37 - CFC-2J4 Tetrachl orotetrafluoropropane C 3C14F4
38 - CFC-213 Pentachlorotifluoropropane C3Cl;5F3
39 - CFC-212 Heksachlorodifluoropropane C 3C16F2
40 - CFC-211 Heptach 1orofluoropropane C3ChF
41 - Halon-1211 Bromochlorodifluoromethane CBrCIF2
42 - Halon-1301 Bromotrifluoromethane CBrF3
43 - Halon-2402 Dibromotetrafluoroethane C2Rbr2F4
44 - R~502 (Campuran ~
-
mengandug turunan
..
perhalogenasi dari HC
Asiklik. rnengandung dua
atau lebih halogen
berbeda:
- Mengandung HC,
Asiklik
perhalogenasi hanya
fluor dan Kh!or
- Mengandung R-115/
HCFC-22
(Chloroditluoro
45 74-83-9 lvtt!OOJIB~omida Bromomethane; Monobromomethane; CH3Br
Ernbafume
Himpunan Penrturan di Biyang Pengalo!aan Ungkungan Hidup
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 360/765
Attachment-9 : Other General Requirement
Attachment-9.1 : Painting Specification
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 361/765
Attachment-9.1
Coating Systems
System-No: Surface· location Temp; Su.rfa.ce Coating No .. of Generic type Dry fitrn Total·DFT
oc preparation ·.· $ystem3 ·. coats ·. thi~kne$s EQFT) ·.· ·.· µm
·... .. ·•.· •·
·.
·. ·. ·. .·· .•. .f perqoat µm ... ...
1 Structural steel works, up to 120 SA 2.5, 45-65 Primer 1 Zinc-Epoxy 80 80

piping, vessels microns
(external shell), tanks Intermediates 2 Epoxy High Solid 150 150
(external shell), pumps,
motors, other Finish 1 2-Com p. Polyurethane 40 40
equipment
270
INDOOR
(external shell), pumps, Finish
motors, other
equipment including 2-Com p. Polyurethane 50 50
fasteners, bolts & nuts ( 1
380
OUTDOOR
3 Piping, tanks (external up to 120 SA 2.5, 45-65 Primer 1 High Build Phenolic 125 125
shell), etc. microns Epoxy
INDOOR and
OUTDOOR, Insulated Intermediate 1 High Build Phenolic 125 125
Epoxy
250
4 Piping, tanks (external 120-500 SA 2.5, 45-65 Primer 1 Modified Silicone 50 50

shell), etc. microns
INDOOR & OUTDOOR
Insulated
5 Steel surfaces 120 - 450 SA 2.5, 45-65 Primer 1 Zinc Ethyl silicate 75 75
Uninsulated microns
Finish 2 Modified Silicone 25 50
125
6 Steel surfaces 120 - 450 SA 2.5, 45-65 Primer 1 Modified Silicone 40 40
Insulated microns
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 362/765
Attachment-9.1
Coating Systems
oc preparation ·.· $ystem3 ·. coats ·. thi~kne$s EQFT) ·.· ·.· µm
·... .. ·•.· •·
·.
·. ·. ·. .·· .•. .f perqoat µm ... ...
7 Galvanized surfaces up to 120 Mechanical Primers 2 Epoxy High Solid* 75 150

(including galvanized cleaning from
handrails) contaminants Finish 1 2-Com p. Polyurethane 40 40
and zinc salts
by means of 190
washing or
steam jetting or
sweep-blasting
with fine grit
8 Steel surfaces Medium SA 3, 45-65 Primer 1 Zinc- Epoxy 75 75
permanently in contact temp. °C microns
with water, also up to 60 Intermediates 2 Epoxy High Solids 125 250
seawater splash zone
Top Coat 1 2-Com p. Polyurethane 40 40
265
9 Roof and side sheeting Ambient Galvanized iron Surface 1 Galvanised 25 25
cleaner
Coatings 2 2-Com p. Polyurethane 40 80
105
10 Floor plates (checker Ambient SA 2.5, 45-65 Primer 1 Zinc Ethyl silicate 75 75
plate) microns
Intermediates 2 Epoxy high solids 75 150
Finish 1 2-Com p. Polyurethane 40 40
265
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 363/765
Attachment-10 : List Format
Attachment-10.1 : Technical Data Sheet

Attachment-10.2 : (Not used)
Attachment-10.3 : Power Consumption List
Attachment-10.4 : Spare Parts List
Attachment-10.5 : Consumable List
Attachment-10.6 : Special Tool List
Attachment-10.7 : Lubricant List
Attachment-10.8 : 1/0 List - General Format (Refer Attachment 5.1)
Attachment-10.9 : Control Item-General Format (Refer Attachment 5.1)
Attachment-10.10 : Modbus data Link List. (Refer Attachment 5.1)
Attachment-10.11 : Instrument List (Refer Attachment 5.1)
Attachment-10.12 : Set Point List Format (Refer Attachment 5.1)
Attachment-10.13 : Terminal Point List
Attachment-10.14 : BOQ List formats.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 364/765
Attachment-10.1 : Technical Data Sheet
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 365/765
Attachment-10.1 :Technical Data Sheet
No Item Specification Remarks

1 Cartridge Filter Two(2) x 100% / 1STG
1.1 Number
1.2 Type of Filter
1.3 Material
1.4 Size
1.5 Life time
a Start lip GaFtFidge FilteF {QptieR} +we(~) * ~ QQ% t ~ S+G

44 ~Jl::IFfl9eF
~ +ype ef FilteF
~ MateFial
44 ~
~ bife tiFfle
3 Gati8R ~XGhaRgeF {QptieR}

~ ~J1::1Ff1eeF ePJessel t rn+Gs +i.01e(~) * aQ% t ~ S+G
~ +ype
~ Qesi§R S1::1Ffase i;:1e1,o,1 Rate
Qesi§R t ~JeFFflal epemtieR
M
+eFflpeFat1::1Fe
Qesi§R t NeFFflal epeFatieR
M
PFeSSl::IFe
~ Gapasity ef Vessel
Qesi§R PFeSSl::IFe Qmp (GleaRt
~
Gle€J€JeEI)
~ MateFial ef SRell t QisReEI EAEIS
~ +RiskRess ef taRk eeEly
J.:.40 Si~e g * l=lfFflFfll
4 Mixed Bed Ion Exchanger
4.1 Number of Vessel/ 1STGs Two(2) x 50% I 1STG
4.2 Type
4.3 Design Surface Flow Rate
Design/ Normal operation
4.4
Temperature
4.5 Design/ Normal operation Pressure
4.6 Capacity of Vessel

Design Pressure Drop
4.7
( Clean/Clogged)
4.8 Material of Shell / Dished Ends
4.9 Thickness of tank body
4.10 Size D x H [mm]
5 Air Blowers for GatieR Exchanaer

5.1 Number of Blower/ 1STGs Two(2) x 100% / 1STG
5.2 Type
1/7
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 366/765

5.3 Capacity
5.4 Head
5.5 Material
5.6 Suction Air Filter (Type)
5.7 Relief Valve and Accessories
5A.1 Service Air Tank (1)
6 Resin Traps
6.1 Number
6.2 Type
6.3 Material
7 Resin Separation Vessel
7.1 Number of tank/ 1ST Gs One(1) x 100% / 1STGs

7.2 Type
7.3 Design Capacity
Minimum Design Pressure
7.4
[kg/cm2(g)]
Design Pressure Drop
7.5
(Clean/Clogged)
7.8 Size D X H rmml
8 Anion Reaeneration Vessel

8.2 Type
8.3 Desiq n Capacity
8.4
rkci/cm2(a)l
8.7 Size D x H [mm]
9 Cation Reaeneration Vessel

9.2 Type
9.3 Desiq n Capacity
9.4
rka/cm2(a)l
9.7 Size D X H rmml
Air Blowers for External

10
Reaeneration Unit
10.1 Number of Blower/ 1STGs Two(2) x 100% / 1STGs
10.2 Type
10.3 Capacity
10.4 Head
10.5 Material
10.6 Suction Air Filter (Type)
10.7 Relief Valve and Accessories
10A.1 Service Air Tank (2)
11 Resin Make Up Hoooer

11.1 Number One(1) / 1STGs
11.2 Type
2/7
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 367/765

11.3 Capacity
11.4 Material
11.5 Size D X H rmml
12 Alkali Bulk Tank

12.1 Number of tanks/ 1STGs One(1)
12.2 Design Capacity
12.3 Type
12.4 Material of tank body
12.7 Required storage days
12A.1 CO2 Absorber
13 Alkali Preparation Tank (Option)

13.1 Number of tanks/ 1STGs
13.2 Desian Capacity
13.3 Type
13.7 Required storage days
Agitator for Alkali Preparation

13a
Tank
13a.1 Number/ 1STGs
13a.2 Type
13a.3 Material
13a.4 Motor
3/7
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 368/765

14 Alkali Unloading Pumps
Number of pumps with motors/
14.1 Two(2)x100%
1STGs
14.2 Type of pump
14.4 Head
14.5 Material of Body
14.6 ReNPSH [bar -
14.7 MotorPowerrk Wl / Pole -
14.8 MotorPowerrkWl / Pole/Speed -
14.9 Motor IP class
15 Alkali Measuring Tank

15.3 Type
16 Alkali Metering Pumps

16.1 Number of pumps with motors/ Two(2)x100%
16.2 Type of pump
16.4 Head
16.6 ReNPSH rbar -
16.7 Motor PowerrkWl / Pole / Speed -
16.8 Motor Volts / Phase / Hertz -
16.9 Motor IP class
17 N/A
18 N/A
19 Acid Bulk Tank

19.3 Type
19.7 Required storage days 30
19A.1 Fume Absorber
4/7
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 369/765

20 Acid Unloading Pumps
20.2 Type of pump
20.4 Head
20.6 ReNPSH rbarl -
20.7 Motor Power rkWl / Pole -
20.9 Motor IP class
21 Acid Measuring Tank

21.3 Type
2x100% of suitable capacity

22 Acid Metering Pumps
and head
22.2 Type of pump
22.4 Head
22.6 ReNPSH rbarl -
22.9 Motor IP class
23 Hot water tank

Electric heating coil
23.3 Type
50% x Two(2)
23.5 Heating Time
23.7 Electric Heater
24 N/A
25 DM water regeneration pumps

25.2 Type of pump
25.4 Head
25.6 ReNPSH [bar] -
25.8 Motor Volts / Phase /Hertz -
25.9 Motor IP class
26 Neutralization Eauipment
26.3 Type
5/7
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 370/765

Neutralized Effluent Transfer
27
Pumo
27.1 Number of pumps with motors Two(2)x100%
27.2 Type of pump
27.4 Head
27.6 ReNPSH [bar] -
27.9 Motor IP class
28 Platform & Gratina
29 Cvcle runtime for reaeneration

Required condensate water quality
to start Condensate Polishina
30 N/A
31 Pioina and valves

Material of inlet / Outlet / Bypass
31.1
pipina for CPP
31.1.a Material of Butterfly Valve/ Ball Valve
Material for Butterfly valve of
31.1.b
flanaeless water tvoe
31.2 Material of Resin transfer piping
Material of Back wash / Acid & Alkali
31.3
Reaeneration oioina
31.4 Material of Acid or Alkali transfer
31.4.a Material of Diaphragm Valves
31.5 Effluent transfer pipina
31.6 Instrument Air piping
31.7 Ejector
32 Liftina facility for maintenance
JJ Technical Specification for Elec

1 Electrical Eauioment
KK Technical Specification for I & C

1 Local Control Panel with PLC
1.1 Number
1.2 Size L X w X H rmml
1.3 PLC maintenance tool
1.4 Operator Work Station
2 Instrumentation
2.1 Temperature Indicator
2.2 Temperature Element
2.3 Pressure Indicator
2.4 Pressure Transmitter
2.5 Difference Pressure Transmitter
2.6 Level Switch
2.7 Level Indicator
2.8 Silica and Sodium Analyzer
2.9 PH Recorder for cation reaeneration
Conductivity indicators/Recorder for
2.10
Separation Tank
2.11 Sampling Rack
LL Resins
6/7
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 371/765

1.1 Cation resin
1.2 Anion resin
1.3 Inert resin
1.4 Volumetric ratio
Three (3) charges

- 50% capacity / each x 2 sets
1.5 Resin quantity
of vessels x 1 unit
- 1 spares for commissioning
1.6 Lifetime of Cation/ Anion resin
MM Utility Reauirement (Consumption) As reauired

M1 Electrical Load
M2 Instrument Air
M3 OM Water
M4 Chemical
MS Service Water
M6 Service Air
M7 Steam
NN Wate water aualitv

N1 Waste water quantity
N2 pH
Consist of SS, COD, NH 4 , T-N, Fe, Cl,
N3
Na, S0 4 , BOD, Si0 2
N4 Electrical Conductivity
7/7
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 372/765
Attachment-10.3 : Power Consumption List
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 373/765
Attachment-10.3
Legends and Instruction

Abbreviation Name Explanation
Rev Revision number Revision number of the line
Equipment No. Equipment number Equipment number corresponding to the consumer
Service description Service description Description of the consumer or name of feeder
Volt Rated voltage Rated voltage of the consumer (AC:11 kV, 415V, 240V, 220V (UPS), DC:220V)
AC 11000V 3-phase, large size MV motor above 200kW
AC 415V 3-phase, LV motor from 0.2kW up to including 200kW
AC 240V Single phase, small power, motor below 0.2kW
AC 220V Single phase, Uninturruptible Power Supply (UPS), essential AC lo~
DC 220V DC load
ACTRI : Alternating three phases
ACMONO : Alternating one phase (between phase and neutral)
NAT Voltage nature ACBI : Alternating one phase (between 2 phases)
ACTRIN : Alternating three phases + neutral
DC : Direct current
M : Motor
R : Resistor
Type Consumer type
V : Motorized Valve
T : Transformer
Power Rated power/Output
Unit Power unit Power unit : kW, kV A, MW, MVA
EFFICI. x P.F. Efficiency X power factor Rated efficiency X Power factor at the rated output of the load
Starting Current Starting Current Starting Current (A)
Starting Power Factor Starting Power Factor Power factor at the motor starting
Starting Time Starting Time Starting Time (sec)
C (Continuous) : This is a consumer which runs normally.
I (Intermittent) : This is a consumer which starts few times and in special cases.
D Duty
: This is a consumer which starts in emergency shut-down
E (Emergency)
operation of unit or plant safety.
: This is a consumer which works casually; The typical example is
S (Stand-by) a stand by motor which waits for the stop of the normal
(permanent) motor.
As actual load consumption power, the following Load Factors are basically applied;
Load Factor Load Factor
Motor-0.9, Resistor-0.8, Valve/Hoist/Receptacle-0.2, Lighting-0.4, etc.
Motor Space Heater Motor Space Heater Rating of motor's space heater that is directly fed from switchgear.
Remote controller that controls the contactor or circuit breaker; DCS, PLC,
Control Control
control-box, etc. NA means manual control at switchgear.
1/11
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 374/765
Attachment-10.3
AC 11kV (3-phase)
SWGRNAME:
EFFECI Starting starting Starting

Current Power Time
P.F (A) Factor (sec)
·~ Toshiba Corporation 2008, All rights Reserved "X" denotes the duty load under each Operation Mode
2/11
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 375/765
Attachment-10.3
AC 3kV (3-phase)
SWGRNAME:
EFFECI Starting starting Starting

Current Power Time
P.F (A) Factor (sec)
·~ Toshiba Corporation 2010, All rights Reserved "X" denotes the duty load under each Operation Mode
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 376/765
Attachment-10.4 : Spare Parts List
Bidder shall provide separate lists with fully itemized pricing for the following three (3)
types of spares;
1. Commissioning & Testing Spare Parts

- These are required for erection and commissioning periods.)
2. Mandatory Spare Parts

- These shall include spares anticipated to be used for the first two (2) yeas
operations and replacement parts for the first anniversary overhaul.)
3. Recommended Spare Parts

- These shall include the strategic spare (which need a very long lead time (more
than six (6) months), or which is whether used or not used in its life. But it is
better to keep for replacement), major parts, replace parts for
planned/unplanned maintenance.
As a guide, typical spare parts are listed in this attachment. Bidder shall quote spares
based on this list. If there are any excesses or deficiencies, they shall be reflected.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 377/765
TOSHIBA Attachment - 10.4a
CONSTRUCTION AND COMMISSIONING SPARE PARTS LIST

CUSTOMERS
EQ/SYS. USE
NO.
JOB.NO.
MANUF. COMP.
QUANTITY
NO. NAME OF PART OUTLINE REMARKS
SPA- WORK
RE
1
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 378/765
TOSHIBA Attachment - 10.4b
MANDATORY SPARE PARTS LIST (2 years operaf10n f rom COD)

CUSTOMERS
EQ/SYS. USE
NO.
JOB.NO.
MANUF. COMP.
REPLACEMENT
QUANTITY INTERVAL/
NO. NAME OF PART OUTLINE PRICE(US$) /
SPA- WORK
LEAD TIME
RE
(WEEKS)
1 Ball Bearing for 2pcs
Blower
2 V-Belt for Blower 4pcs
3 Z-Seal for Blower 2pcs
4 Diaphragm for Acid 4pcs

Transfer Pump
5 Valve Set for Acid 8pcs

Transfer Pump
6 Diaphragm for 4pcs

Caustic Transfer
Pump
7 Valve Set for 8pcs

Caustic Transfer
Pump
8 Maintenance Kit for 2pcs

Acid Unloading Pump
9 Maintenance Kit 2pcs

Caustic Unloading
Pump
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 379/765
TOSHIBA
10 Tank Manhole 1pcs
Gasket (1 lot)
11 Cartridge Filter 4pcs
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 380/765
TOSHIBA Attachment - 10.4c
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST

CUSTOMERS
EQ/SYS. USE
NO.
JOB.NO.
MANUF. COMP.
REPLACEMENT
QUANTITY INTERVAL/
NO. NAME OF PART OUTLINE PRICE(US$) /
SPA- WORK
LEAD TIME
RE
(WEEKS)
1
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 381/765
Attachment-10.5 : Consumable List
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 382/765
TOSHIBA Attachment - 10.5
CONSUMABLE LIST
CUSTOMERS
EQ/SYS. USE
NO.
JOB.NO.
MANUF. COMP.
QUANTITY
SPA- WORK
RE
1
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 383/765
Attachment-10.6 : Special Tool List
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 384/765
TOSHIBA Attachment - 10.6
SPECIAL TOOLS LIST

CUSTOMERS
EQ/SYS. USE
NO.
JOB.NO.
MANUF. COMP.
QUANTITY
SPA- WORK
RE
1
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 385/765
Attachment-10. 7 : Lubricant List
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 386/765
TOSHIBA Attachment - 10. 7
LUBRICANT LIST
CUSTOMERS
EQ/SYS. USE
NO.
JOB NO.
MANUF.COMP
Pour Points
Lubricants and Maker
Pouring Method
Quantity Per Once

Pouring Gal.
Term and
0) Procedure
C
.0)
C
ro
.c
(.)
Quantity Gal.
X
UJ
6 Remarks
Term and Procedure

a.
=>
I
(1)
~
ro Quantity Gal.
2;
0
Remarks
Outline
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 387/765
Attachment-10.8 : 1/0 List
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 388/765
1/0 List- General Format
Analog Signal Signal Purpose

No.of Input Input Input
Logic Signal Range- Range- Range Power Signal CN
Rev P&ID Controller Tag Number Full Description DCS Description chara Range- Range- Range IND INT ANN TRIP SOE Contents Notes
Sheet Type Start End Units Source Range T
cters Start End Units
I I
I I
I I
+ t
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Example
6 JEP-TSB-B6-LD-21630 TSQA 10LAB10CP001 KC103 SEAWATER BOOSTER PUMP OUTLET STRAINER A DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWBP OUTL STR A DP 18 Al 0 1.5 Bar DCS 4-20mA y y y
DI DCS y y
Description
2 Process and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) number
3 Controller name of DCS
4 Tao Number for DCS
5 Logic Sheet Number (Toshiba internal use)
6 Full signal description
7 DCS description (accordina to abbreviation list, maximum 40 characters)
9 Signal type (Al: Analog Input, AO: Analog Output, DI: Digital Input, DO: Digital Output, Pl: Pulse Input, PO: Pulse Output)
10 Measurement ranae of analoa sianal (Start) <Ea.: Differential Pressure of flow measurement shall be used>
11 Measurement range of analog signal (End) <Eg.: Differential pressure of flow measurement shall be used>
12 Measurement range of analog signal (Unit) <Eg.: Differential pressure of flow measurement shall be used>
13 Indication ranae of analoa sianal on DCS araPhic disolav (Start)
14 Indication ranae of analoa sianal on DCS araphic disolav (End)
15 Indication range of analog signal on DCS graphic display (Unit)
16 Power supply equipment for analoa sianal (DCS or Local, etc)
17 Signal type of analog input (4-20mA, mV Type E or K <for thermocouple, RTD>, etc)
18 Signal Purpose, IND: Indication signal (Please mark "Y" if applicable)
19 Sianal Purpose, CNT: Control sianal (Please mark "Y" if applicable)
20 Signal Purpose, INT: Interlock signal (Please mark "Y" if applicable)
21 Signal Purpose, ANN: Annunciation signal (Please mark "Y" if applicable)
22 Sianal Purpose, Trip: rip sianal (Please mark "Y" if applicable)
23 Signal Purpose, SOE: Sequence of Event signal, (Used for analysis of plant critical fault) (Please mark "Y" if applicable)
25 Notes
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
1> Toshiba Corporation 2014. All Rights Reserved
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 389/765
Attachment-10.9 : Control Item List
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 390/765
Control Items- General Format
No.of Logic Basic Running

Equip. Macro Seating Fail
f;ev Pl.ID TA( No. ACS Full De cription DCS Description chara Sheet lnterfac SWGR/MCC Location Inc ~ing Time Cortents Notes
Type Type Type Safe
cters Number e (Sec)
I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I
t t t t t T t t
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Example
14 JEP-TSB-B6-LD-21630 OOBHT11GS010 CES 11KV STATION BOARD A INCOMING BREAKER FROM 1A 11 KV STN BD A INCMR FROM 1A 31 CB JC501 3A SWGR 11 KV STATION BOARD A
Description

2 Process and Instrumentation Diaaram (P&ID number
3 TAG number of control items
4 DCS cabinet description (Toshiba internal use)
5 Full description of control items
6 DCS description (according to abbreviation list, maximum 40 character)
8 TvPes of control items. (MOTOR.FAN, CV: Control Valve, PV: ON/OFF Valve, MOV: Motor Operated Valve. SV: Solenoid Valve, CB:Circuit breaker)
9 Loaic sheet number !Toshiba Internal Use)
10 Basic Interface number (According to Basic Interface Concept Document)
11 Toshiba standard loaic description/number (Toshiba internal use)
12 Switchgear/MCC description
13 Inching operation of MOV (Please mark "Y" if applicable, "-" if not applicable)
14 Seatina tvPe of MOV Toraue. Limit)
15 Open to Close (Close to Open) running time for valve
16 Fail operation (FO:Open when Fail, FC: Close when fail, FL(O): Fail to Lock(Finally to Open), FL(C): Fail to Lock(Finally to Close))
18 Notes
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Ci Tnshih;:i Cnrpnn=itinn 2014. All Rights RP.;<;FH'Vf'H~
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 391/765
Attachment-10.10 : Modbus Data-Link List
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 392/765
Modbus Data-Link-Format&explanation
MODBUS PLC DCDAS
RANGE COUNT RANGE

REV ADDRESS BIT IDNO. Tag Number Signal Description/Service Description REMARKS DCS Description
LOW HIGH UNIT LOW HIGH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Example:(Analog from PLC)
2 30001 woooo 10LCM10BL001XQOO ECP SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATOR A INLET FLOW 0 200 m3/h 0 30000 CM350A
ECP NaCIO GEN A INL FLW
3 30002 W0001 10LCM10BL002XQOO ECP SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE STORAGE TANK A LEVEL 1.0 11.0 m 0 30000 CM350 D
ECP NaCIO STRG TNK A LVL
1 30003 SPARE
2 30004 SPARE
4 30005 W001D 10LCM10PL002XQOO ECP SEAWATER SUPPLY PRESSURE 0.00 2.00 bar 0 30000 CM356A ECP SEA WTR SPL Y
Description:
2 Signal mod bus address (input according to worksheets.signal type,direction of signal, eg : analog/digital to PLC.analog/digital from PLC)
3 Signal bit
4 Maker's ID number (if applicable)
5 Tag Number(Refer to KKS coding (JEP-ITHC-BO-GEN-25000) for signal numbering)
6 Description of signal
7 Actual Signal range (Low limit)
8 Actual Signal range (High limit)
9 Actual Signal range (Unit)
10 Count range of modbus data (Low limit), (Default is 0)
11 Count range of modbus data (High limit), (Default is 30000)
13 DCS description, abbreviation description from item No.6 (Abbreviation is according to Naming and Abbreviation Guideline(JEP-ITHC-BO-M-25002))
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
© Toshiba Corporation 2016. All Rights Reserved
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 393/765
Attachment-10.11 : Instrument List
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 394/765
Instrument List Format and Explanation
Example
LMA50ACW33/CD- 1GMH01455(1 /2 HEATER DRAIN AND VENT
LI HP HTR (6A) LVL 1200 KANEKO SANGYO WATER INDICATE mm 22 barg 220 degC ) 1-4 "SYSTEM-1
sew GEN OUTLET CONDUCTIVITY STATOR COOLING WATER
LATER
Example
TOSHIBA/
KA-IC 0
TOSHIBA/
LATER KA-IC 0
Description *Device Type List

1 Input is unncessary 31 : Input Signal PT: Pressure Transmitter
2 Device Type (Refer to :*:Device Type List) 32 Output Signal1 PS: Pressure Switch
3 Tag Nmber 33 Output Signal2 Pl: Pressure Indicator
4 Service Description 34 Input from FT: Flow Transmitter
5 Model Number 35 Outputto1 Fl: Flow Indicator
6 Manufacturer 36 Outputto2 FE: Flow Element
7 Medium (WATER, STEAM, AIR, FLUE GAS, OIL, etc.) 37 Power Supply type ex)DC24V FM: Flow Minitor / Ttalizer
8 Pourpose (ALARM/ INDICATE/ MONITORING/ CONTROL/ TEST/ INTERLOCK/ Tf 38 Power Consumption(W) LT: Level Transmitter
9 Range1 Start 39 Element Type LS: Level Switch
10 Range~ End 40 Element Material LI: Level Indicator
11 Range1 Unit 41 Element Connection Size Tl: Temperature Indicator
12 Range2 Start 42 Process Connection Size AT Analyzer
13 Range2 End 43 Conduit Connection Size PDT: Differential Pressure Transmitter
14 Range2 Unit 44 Maximum Condition Flow POI: Differential Pressure Indicator
15 Maximum Condition Pressure 45 Normal Condition Pressure BE: Burner Flame Element
16 Unit for Maximum Condition Pressure 46 Normal Condition Temperature TE: Temperature Element
17 -Maximum Condition Temperature 47 Normal Cndition Flow VE: Vibration Element
18 Unit for Maximum Condition Temperature 48 Other1 SE: Speed Element
19 P&ID Drawing Number 49 Other2 WT: Weight
20 Location in P&ID 50 Other3
21 P&ID Title 51 Other4
22 Location 52 Accessary
23 Set Point1 53 Enclosure: Protection Class (IP)
24 Set Point2 54 Cnnection Junction Box
25 Set Point3 55 Instrument Supplier
26 Set Point4 56 Connection Size to Equipment
27 Differential 57 Equipment Supplier
28 Contact Form 58 Serial Numer
29 Contact Number 59 Instrument Pressure to Bear
30 Contact Capacity 60 Remarks
61 Revision Number
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 395/765
Attachment-10.12 : Set Point List
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 396/765
Format Explanation
SET POINT
NO. PAGE TAG NO DESCRIPTION PURPOSE SET VALUE RESET VALUE UNIT SET AT ALARM LEVEL LIST ALARM LIST REV
1 CF101 OOM U-LIXOO 1B MKUP WTR TK B LVL Senser Abnormal DCS 2 y
2 CF101 OOM U-LIXOO 1B MKUP WTR TK B LVL Alarm(HIGH) 200 mm DCS 2 y y
3 CF101 OOM U-LIXOO 1B MKUP WTR TK B LVL Alarm(LOW) -3700 mm DCS 2 y y
4 CF101 OOM U-LIXOO 1B MKUP WTR TK B LVL Alarm(LOW LOW) -9500 mm DCS 2 y y
l l 13
14
1 1 l l l 8
1
10
1 11
l l
12 13
1 NO. : Item number

2 PAGE : Page number of logic diagrams or reference drawing number (see page 4 for details of reference drawing)
3 TAG NO : Tag number of the signal (If applicable)
4 DESCRIPTION : Signal description
5 PURPOSE : Purpose of the signal to be used or alarm definition
6 SETVALUE : Set value (if applicable)
7 RESET VALUE : Reset value (if applicable)
8 UNIT : Unit of set/reset value
9 SET AT : Location of set point (Eg. DCS, PLC, AVR, EHC Local etc]
10 ALARM LEVEL : Alarm level set at DCS or electrical panel (refer TSB Dwg. SPC-GCH-XIT3-0002 Alarm System Concept of Turbine Portion (Except for Fire Fighting System
11 SET POINT LIST : If signal has set point value, 'Y' is Input
12 ALARM LIST : If signal has alarm indication, 'Y' is input
13 REV : Revision number
Note: 11
-
11
for not applicable items
3 © Toshiba Corporation 2014, All Rights Reserved
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 397/765
Attachment-10.13 : Terminal Point List
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 398/765
Attachment-10.14: BILL OF MATERIALS
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 399/765
Attachment-10.14
Equipment Outline & Static Load
quantity Static Load Dimension(mm)

No. EQUIPMENT NAME REF.DRAWING Rev. Remarks
/1 unit (kg)
L w H
1 000000000000 2 Unit5
2 xxxxxxxxxxxx 3 Common
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 400/765
Attachment-10.14
Panel Outline & Static Load

/1 unit (kg)
L w H
1 000000000000 2 Unit5
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 401/765
Attachment-10.14
Lightning Outline & Static Load

/1 unit (kg)
L w H
1 000000000000 2 Unit5
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 402/765
Attachment-10.14
TJB5,6 Piping BQ
BILL OF MATERIAL
LEGEND S-H: SEAMLESS HOT LINING: LINED PIPE LENGTH: PIPE TOTAL LENGTH SPECIAL ELBOW: FLANGE: FLANGE RATING: BR: BRANCH PIPE RT: RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTION
S-C: SEAMLESS COLD BRANCH: BRANCH PIPE 90EL/SW90E: go· ELBOW 88EL: 88" 50' ELBOW NF: WELDED NECK FLANGE 300: ANSI 300LB CA: CAP MT/PT: MAGNETIC PARTICLE OR LIQUID PENETRANT INSP
H-F: HOLLOW FORGING BP: BLIND PLATE 45EL/SW45E: 45· ELBOW 60EL: 60° ELBOW BF: BLIND FLANGE 10K: JIS 10K CO: COUPLING VT: VISUAL INSPECTION
F.B: FORGED BORE T/SWT: TEES 30EL: 30° ELBOW SO: SLIP-ON FLANGE WELD TYPE: FC: FULL COUPLING Yes: TO BE APPLIED PWHT/SR
SEAMED: SEAMED WELDED PIPE CR/SW R: REDUCER SF: SOKET WELDED FLANGE BW: BUTT WELD RP: REDUCING PIECE No: DON'T NEED IT
RG: RING TYPE FLANGE SW: SOCKET WELD 3DR: RADIUS OF 3 TIMES OF DIAMETER
6DR: RADIUS OF 6 TIMES OF DIAMETER
DESIGN PIPE SPECIFICATION MATERIAL SPECIFICATION BILL OF QUANTITY SHOP PWHT SHOP SITE SHOP SITE TOTAL
PIPE SIZE Z'
Rev
(:>,CiDN ;,-,(;()
o: WELD WELD BEVEL WELD WELD WELD WEIGHT WEIGHT
REFER ITEM SYSTEM NAME PRESS. PRESS. TEMP. Q WALL THICK. cii:MANUFAC P- MATERIAL TYPE CLASS LENGTH 90EL 45EL SPECIALE Tor SWT CRorSWF FLANGE BENDING OTHERS NOT SR REMARKS
No. ::i ~\ METHOD No. GRADE SW90E SW45E TYPE PT NPS Q'T'r NPS PT TYPE RATING O'TY TYPE Q'TY TYPE NPS Q'TY TYPE Q'TY LING O'TY D-inch D-inch (KG) (KG)
bar(g) MPa(g) oc .J
LJ.. NPS mm SCH.NO. mm o; m ASME ASME
UNITS
-
From-To 400 S/40 A106Gr.B 37.2 17 3 so 300# 6 BW 54 864 5,491
- 1
-
2 From-To 80 S/40 A106Gr.B 3.2 6 so 300# 6 BW 26 77 43
-
- 400 S/40 A106Gr.B 28.4 15 3 3 so 300# 12 BW 65 1032 4.184
3 From-To
-
-
From-To 80 S/40 A106Gr.B 5.4 6 so 300# 15 BW 42 126 73
- 4
UNITl-1
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 403/765
Attachment-10.14
TJB5,6 Piping BQ
BILL OF MATERIAL
S-C: SEAMLESS COLD BRANCH: BRANCH PIPE 90EL/SW90E: go· ELBOW 88EL: 88" 50' ELBOW NF: WELDED NECK FLANGE 300: ANSI 300LB CA: CAP MT/PT: MAGNETIC PARTICLE OR LIQUID PENETRANT INSP
H-F: HOLLOW FORGING BP: BLIND PLATE 45EL/SW45E: 45· ELBOW 60EL: 60° ELBOW BF: BLIND FLANGE 10K: JIS 10K CO: COUPLING VT: VISUAL INSPECTION
F.B: FORGED BORE T/SWT: TEES 30EL: 30° ELBOW SO: SLIP-ON FLANGE WELD TYPE: FC: FULL COUPLING Yes: TO BE APPLIED PWHT/SR
PIPE SIZE Z'
Rev
(:>:CiDN -i,-,r;()
o: WELD WELD BEVEL WELD WELD WELD WEIGHT WEIGHT
REFER ITEM SYSTEM NAME PRESS. PRESS. TEMP. Q WALL THICK. cii:MANUFAC P- MATERIAL TYPE CLASS LENGTH 90EL 45EL SPECIALE Tor SWT CR orSWF FLANGE BENDING OTHERS NOT SR REMARKS
No. ::i ~\ METHOD No. GRADE SW90E SW45E TYPE PT NPS Q'T'r NPS PT TYPE RATING O'TY TYPE Q'TY TYPE NPS Q'TY TYPE Q'TY LING O'TY D-inch D-inch (KG) (KG)
bar(g) MPa(g) oc .J
UNITS
-
From-To 400 S/40 A106Gr.B 37.2 17 3 so 300# 6 BW 54 864 5,491
- 1
-
2 From-To 80 S/40 A106Gr.B 3.2 6 so 300# 6 BW 26 77 43
-
- 400 S/40 A106Gr.B 28.4 15 3 3 so 300# 12 BW 65 1032 4.184
3 From-To
-
-
From-To 80 S/40 A106Gr.B 5.4 6 so 300# 15 BW 42 126 73
- 4
---
UNIT2-1
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 404/765
Attachment-10.14
TJB5,6 Piping BQ
BILL OF MATERIAL
S-C: SEAMLESS COLD BRANCH: BRANCH PIPE 90EL/SW90E: go· ELBOW 88EL: 88. 50' ELBOW NF: WELDED NECK FLANGE 300: ANSI 300LB CA: CAP MT/PT: MAGNETIC PARTICLE OR LIQUID PENETRANT INSP
H-F: HOLLOW FORGING BP: BLIND PLATE 45EL/SW45E: 45· ELBOW 60EL: so· ELBOW BF: BLIND FLANGE 10K: JIS 10K CO: COUPLING VT: VISUAL INSPECTION
F.B: FORGED BORE T/SWT: TEES 30EL: 30' ELBOW SO: SLIP-ON FLANGE WELD TYPE: FC: FULL COUPLING Yes: TO BE APPLIED PWHT/SR
PIPE SIZE Z'
Rev o: WELD WELD BEVEL WELD WELD WELD WEIGHT WEIGHT
REFER ITEM SYSTEM NAME PRESS. PRESS. TEMP. Q (:>:CiDN -lj-4;() WALL THICK. cii:MANUFAC P- MATERIAL TYPE CLASS LENGTH 90EL 45EL SPECIAL EL TorSWT CR or SW R FLANGE BENDING OTHERS NDT SR REMARKS
No. ::i ~\ METHOD No. GRADE SW90E SW45E TYPE Q'T'y NPS P'T, NPS Q'T'y TYPE RATING Q'TY TYPE Q'TY TYPE NPS Q'TY TYPE Q'TY LING Q'TY D-inch D-inch (KG) (KG)
bar(g) MPa(g) oc .J
COMMON
-
201 From-To 125 A53 Type F (PEL) 21.6 23 5 so #150 72 395
-
-
202 From-To 125 A53 Type F (PEL) 7.3 3 8 5 so #150 26 133
-
- 125 A53 Type F (PEL) 12 12 so #150 15 219
203 From-To
-
-
204 From-To 80 A53 Type F (PEL) 24.8 12 so #150 33 262
-
-
205 From-To 100 A53 Type F (PEL) 8.5 5 5 3 so #150 26 125
-
- 80 A53 Type F (PEL) 2.1 3 2 2 so #150 12 22
206 From-To
-
-
COMMON-1
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 405/765
Attachment-10.14
Cable List
Cable
Facility To Facility
Cable Number From Description Description Type of Cable Length Drum Number Routing Number Rev
Code Code
(m)
Item No. IIOPANEL 21 ltemNo. PANEL TERM BOX 21 600V EPRN-S 1 x 2C 14 AWG 100
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 406/765
Other Elec.
Attachment-10.14
No. Description Dimension Numbers Unit Weight
CABLE TRAY (FOR CONTROL CABLE,INSTRUMENT CABLE)
1) CABLE TRAY
STRAIGHT LADDER
400Wx100Hx3000L 65 PCS 100kg
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 407/765
Attachment-11 : Price schedule for CPP
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 408/765
Attachment-11 ·Price Schedule for CPP

Unit/
No. Item Description Remarks
lot Amount
(BP & OP are Cost Code) A
ffi
~
I All mechanical items including piping, valves, gaskets etc.

\
A Condensate Polishing Service Unit Service vessels, Catridge filters etc. 1 BPl
(*1) The cost of PLC panel shall be submitted separately.
Common External Regeneration Unit Exchanger vessels, Acid, Caustic Bulk
B 1 BP2 All mechanical items including piping, valves, gaskets etc.
including Chemical Injection Unit Storage Tank, Unloading Pump etc.
C Transportation Fee DDP or CFR or FOB 1 BP3
aa) Normal hour rate (weekdays (Monday to Saturday), within 8

hours)
Technical Advisory Services
bb) Overtime hour rate (weekday (Monday to Saturday), exceeding B
D (Supervisory services for Erection, Pre 1 BP4
hours)
commissioning, Commissioning and Testing. )
cc) Holiday hour rate (Sunday and holiday, within 8 hours)
dd) Holiday overtime hour rate (Sunday and holiday, exceeding 8
E Commissioning and Startup Spare parts For items A, B, C, D, E, F 1 BPS
F Special Tools For items A, B, C, D, E 1 BP6
G Consumables. For items A, B, C, D, E 1 BP7
H Training 1 BP8
Total BS= Sum of BPl to 810
!Optional Sub Items.
(Including all of the required test equipment and man power)

1 Pre Commissioning and Commissioning 1 OPl
(Lumpsum Cost)
2 Recommended Spare Parts 1 OP2
3 Interconnecting Piping Between A and B 1 OP3
4 Interconnecting Cabling. Between A and B 1 OP4
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 409/765
Attachment-12 : Special Conditions of Supervisory Services
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 410/765
Attachment-12: Special Conditions of Supervisory Services
Special Condition of Vendor's Supervisory Service and Supervisor
1.1 Responsibility of Vendor
The supervisor shall act professionally in the interests of the Sub-Contractor regardless of the
source of equipment and material supplied under the Contract.
Vendor shall provide supervisory services for installation, commissioning and training at the site to
put equipment and/or system up to the completion of the equipment and/or system under this
Contract.
The services shall commence at the installation/commissioning period of equipment until the
equipment and/or system are completed so as to make sure in to satisfactory operation.
The supervisor shall be knowledgeable in the services for supplied equipment and/or System that
are required and have the expertise and authority to approve of installation and commissioning
work.
The supervisor shall follow the direction of Sub-Contractor's installation and commissioning team
at site, however responsibility of Vendor will not exempt from the Contract.
The supervisory services for installation and commissioning shall include the work to maintain the
plant overall schedule under the management and assistance of Sub-Contractor's installation and
commissioning team at site.
The Vendor shall submit for approval by the Sub-Contractor the resume and license(s) of the
nominated supervisor.
The supervisor shall be highly knowledgeable in the required services for the supplied equipment
and systems and have the expertise and appropriate trade, license(s) for the installation and
commissioning work.
The Sub-Contractor reserves the right to accept or reject any supervisor proposed to be assigned
to the Project.
Upon receipt of a written request from the Sub-Contractor, the Vendor shall remove any employee
deemed unsuitable from the jobsite and provide replacement personnel acceptable to the
Purchaser at the Vendor's expense.
All necessary equipment and tools for supervisory service including their transportation and
custom clearance shall be provided by Vendor. Necessary preparation by Sub-Contractor at site
shall be informed from Vendor to Sub-Contractor by attaching with the required specification before
Contract.
Vendor and the supervisor shall have a responsibility to follow his company compliance program
and the law of Indonesian government.
1.2 Condition of Supervisory Services
The condition of services shall include but not limited to;
1.2.1 Once assigned to the project, the supervisor may not be changed without reasonable
written notice to the Sub-Contractor and any overlapping time as the result of such change will
not be summed up against the allotted service time.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 411/765
The supervisor shall work a nominal eight (8) hours per day (Monday to Saturday), but shall be
available as required to expedite the installation and/or commissioning.
When, in the judgment of the Sub-Contractor and/or Owner, supervisor's time is required for
the purpose of correcting design or manufacturing errors solely and expressly, no payment
from Sub-Contractor shall be made.
Vendor shall be responsible for, and shall hold Sub-Contractor harmless from, the reporting,
filing, and payment of any all taxes, duties, charges, or fees (including related fines, penalties,
or interests) imposed directly on Vendor as a result of the supply of services.
Vendor shall indemnify and save Sub-Contractor harmless from Vendor's failure to file timely
tax returns or pay or withhold any taxes or other charges, related to the service provided by
Vendor.
For international travel, all passports, visa (all personnel shall have the proper work permit by
the Indonesian government for conducting site work) and inoculations shall be arranged by the
Vendor on their own account.
Worker's accident compensation insurance shall be arranged by the Vendor on their own
account.
Daily working report including time sheet and detail-working contents shall be submitted by the
Supervisor to the Sub-Contractor's site staff for his review or approval.
1.2.2 The supervisor shall be capable of English language skill to perform supervisory work at
the Construction site.
1.2.3 The supervisor shall hand with mobile PC for his use in his work including English
correspondences by E-mail at the site.
1.3 Supervisory Services.
1.3.1 Inspect the accuracy (dimension, bill of quantity, specification etc.) of delivered
equipment/materials as per drawings. If any differences are confirmed, the supervisor shall
report them to Sub-Contractor and also, (at the same time) report them to Vendor directly in
order to solve the problem with the minimum time.
1.3.2 Inspect the quality of delivered equipment/materials. If any defects are confirmed, the
supervisor shall report them to Sub-Contractor and also, (at the same time) report them to
Vendor directly in order to solve the problem with the minimum time.
1.3.3 Provide supervisory service during the installation of the equipment and/or systems and
to do any remedy work if there are punch items. Also, provide correspondence in timely
manner if the Sub-Contractor and/or Owner requests technical explanation and clarifications.
1.3.4 Inspect the installation and assist Sub-Contractor in determining that the equipment is
ready for commissioning.
1.3.5 Support the calibration, testing and commissioning of the controls and instrumentation, if
required by Sub-Contractor.
1.3.6 Support setting-up, calibrating and adjusting including sequence check for control
systems including PLC, with rectification.
1.3. 7 Support setting-up, calibrating and adjusting including sequence check for electrical
equipment, relay devices, monitoring equipment, protection equipment etc. which are included
2
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 412/765
in the Contract scope.
1.3.8 Support electrical testing before commissioning.
1.3.9 Support start-up service from initial operation to hand over to Sub-Contractor's
commissioning team of the equipment and/or systems.
1.3.10 Prepare and maintain all the latest documents and drawings for supervisory service
work by the supervisor himself.
1.3.11 Provide required special testing equipment and tools with their traceability records
including their transportation and custom clearance. Required equipment and tools for PLC
set-up, calibrate and adjustment shall be provided by the supervisor.
1.3.12 Provide "Classroom Training" and "On the Job Training" in the proper operation and
maintenance of the equipment to the operating/maintenance personnel during the installation
and/or commissioning period. The supervisor shall instruct all safety precautions, operation,
maintenance and troubleshooting procedures and requirements of the equipment.
1.3.13 Provide the appropriate support of the training to the Owner/Sub-Contractor.
1.3.14 The supervisor shall prepare and hand over the following documents to the
Sub-Contractor, but not limited to.
1.3.14-1 Field-test/inspections procedures for any field tests/inspections which will be

conducted by the Sub-Contractor
1.3.14-2 Pre-operational instructions regarding Vendor's equipment and/or system interlock

test, etc. Pre-checklist shall be· included in the pre-operational instruction of Vendor's
equipment and/or system
1.3.14-3 Review and judge of the measurements and field tests/inspections conducted by the
Sub-Contractor and report them to the Sub-Contractor. Necessary documents and drawing
including judgment criteria shall also be provided by vendor
1.3.14-4 Daily working report including time sheet and detail-working contents
1.3.14-5 Inspection report for damage and malfunction of the Vendor's equipment or system
and proposal of countermeasures and instructions standing on the Vendor's representative
1.3.14-6 Outstanding and action items list related to the Vendor's equipment and/or system
that are caused by the Vendor's defect.
1.3.14-7 Study the optimization in the system operation and propose the recommended
operating condition and method
1.4 Supplied by Sub-Contractor
1.4.1 Site Office and warehouse

The site office including required facilities such as copy machine, desk chair, telephone,
facsimile, cabinet.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 413/765
Annexure A Guidance document
The Annexure A is comprised of the relevant extract of the following documents which make the
final contract between Purchaser and Employer/Owner.
a) Contract Discussion Agreement or CDA ( 3 Series, CDA 1, CDA 2, CDA 3)

b) Request for Proposal (RFP, issued by Owner to Purchaser)
Their order of precedence is as follows,

1) CDA 1
2) CDA 2
3) CDA 3
4) RFP
The Purchaser has herewith attached the relevant CDA and RFP Extract relating to Condensate
Polishing System.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 414/765
Tanjung Jati B Expansion Project - TJB5&6
Contract Discussion Agreement No. 1 Index

CDANo.
GENERAL
G-001 Not Used
G-002 Not Used
G-003 Not Used
CDA3-Ll-M-007
G-004 Drawing approval by Owner B0.8.2.1, Approval by SC Later
CDA3-Ll-M-008
CDA3-L4-C-006
G-005 Laydown Area NIA Later
CDA2-PS-002
G-006 Not Used
L l -M-00 4 ~o~d test ~or all cranes, hoists and other Part BO, Section B0.12.9.1, General CDA3-Ll-M-040 Attachment CDAI-Ll-M-004-1
hftm e m ments
Ll-M-OOS Critical Speeds of the Turbine and Attachment CDAI-Ll-M-005-1
Part B 1, Section B 1.1.3 .2, Steam turbine CDA3-Ll-M-048
Generator Rotor Attachment CDAI-Ll-M-005-2
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 415/765
Attachment-CDAI-Ll-M-007-1
Ll-M-007 Welders qualification Part BO, Section B0.12.4.2, Welders qualification CDA3-Ll-M-028I029 Attachment-CDAI-Ll-M-007-2
Attachment-CDAI-Ll-M-007-3
Ll-M-008 Basis of lant lifetime calculation Part BO, Section B0.4.3.3 Unit start-u NIA NIA
Ll-M-011 Not Used

L 1-M-O 12 Maximum flow velocities for steam lines Part BO, Section B0.12.2.1, Desi n criteria CDA3-Ll-M-0241025 Attachment CDAI-Ll-M-012-1
Ll-M-Ol3 Fire Fighting/Fire Detection System for
Part B 1, Section B 1.5.2, Scope of Supply and Services CDA3-Ll-M-059 NIA
Condensate and Booster Pum Area
Ll-M-014 Confi uration of turbine oil um s CDA3-Ll-M-061 NIA
Ll-M-015 Indonesian Grid Code CDA3- Ll-M-063 NIA
Attachment CDAI-Ll-M-020-2
CDA3-Ll-M-052 Attachment CDAI-Ll-M-021-1
Part BO, Section B0.4.2.2, Definition and conditions CDA3-Ll-M-003 NIA
Part B 1, Section B 1.4.2, Scope of Supply and services CDA2 C-009

Attachment CDAI-E-001-1
E-001 Hydrogen generation system Part B 1, Section B 1.4.3, Special technical requirements CDA3-Ll-E-
Attachment CDAI-E-001-2
Part BI Section B 1.11 Technical Data Sheets 03510361037103810391041
Part B 1, Section B 1. 7.2.2 Main scope of supply and
services
E-002 Single Line Diagram CDA2-E-002I003
Part B 1, Section B 1.7.3.1.2 Unit auxiliary transformer
Part Bl, SectionBl.7.3.4.1 General
Attachment CDAI-Ll-E-001-1
Ll-E-001 Test and Inspection Plan for Generator Part BO, Section B0.10.2.5, Electrical equipment CDA3-Ll-E-007 Attachment CDAI-Ll-E-001-2
Attachment CDAI-Ll-E-001-3
Ll-E-00 Detaile? Specification of Tests for 500kV Attachment-CDAI-Ll-E-002-1
2 Part BO, Section BO. I 0, Drawings CDA3-Ll-E-059
Substation Attachment-CDAI-Ll-E-002-2
Ll-E-00 Specification of details for connection of Part B 1, Section B 1. 8. 5. Option I : Interface connection
3 NIA later
Dead End Tower and 500kV transmission existin I new 500kV switch ard
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 416/765
CDA3-L3-IC-005
IC-001 DCS remote panel in FGD electrical house Part C, Annex Cl-IOI Attachment CDAI-IC-001-1
CDA2-I-002
Attachment-CDAI-Ll-IC-001-1
Ll-IC-001 PI System connection to DCS Part B 1, Section B 1.9.1. General NIA Attachment-CDAI-Ll-IC-001-2
Attachment-CDAI-Ll-IC-001-3
CIVIL
Part B4, Section B4.3.3.12. l Seawater Intake System
Part B4, Section B4.3.3.12.2 Seawater Screening and
Pumping Station
C-001 Seawater Intake System CDA2-C-004 Attachment CDAI-C-001
Part B3, Section B3 .4 .1 General
Part B3, Section B3 .4.2 Scope of Supplies and Services
Pre-Bid Clarification List No.C6-D5
Part B3 Section B3.5.2.6 Waste water treatment system

Part B3 Section B3.5.3.6 Waste water treatment systems
C-004 Air Receiver in Run-off WWTP PartB4, SectionB4.3.3.6.3 Coal YardRun-OffBasin CDA2-C-003-l Attachment CDAI-C-004-1
Part C, Annex C-G21, Section IV, item no.14, Water
PLOT.PLAN
CDA2-PP-001
CDA2-PP-008
PP-002 Laborato
PROJECT··SCHEDULE
Attachment CDAI-PS-001-1
PS-00 I Data Exchange between Owner and EPC NIA CDA2-PS-007
Attachment CDAI-PS-001-2
PS-002 Overall Pro· ect Schedule NIA NIA Later
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 417/765
Technical CDA Documents
Category General
CDANo. CDAl
Item No. Ll-G-001
Item Description Submission of Testing Documents
Reference Specification , Part BO, Section B0.10.1.2. Test certificates
Reference CDA , CDA3-Ll-M-010
Discussion/clarification With regard to the submission oftest certificates required in RFP Part BO,
Section B0.10.1.2., it was confirmed and agreed between the Owner and EPC
that the test certificate shall be submitted within 30 days after the completion of
the test unless otherwise required/stipulated in PPA which shall be notified by
the Owner to EPC.
Conclusion Owner and EPC agreed as above "Discussion/clarification".
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 418/765
Category General
CDANo. CDAl
Item No. Ll-G-003
Item Description Shop test and inspection schedule
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.10.1, General
Reference CDA CDA3-L 1-M-008
Discussion/Clarification 1. EPC(L 1) clarified following points.
i ) EPC(Ll)'s base offer is that manufacturer's instructions will be approved

without any avoidance of its offered project schedule.
ii) EPC(Ll) will submit Fundamental Quality Plan, Shop Inspection and Test
Plan and relevant major International Standard of Test and Inspection
three (3) month after the Notice to Proceed.
iii) With respect to document submittal schedule including testing document,

only the test report for customer witness test in factory will be submitted
within 10 days after the completion of witness test, and all other test reports
within 30 days of the test date, unless otherwise required by PPA.
Content of this test reports shall be discussed and agreed during execution
stage.
Test reports of shop tests for major items, related to the equipment
components, shall be attached to equipment when dispatched.
Four copies of all shop test reports related to the equipment will be submitted
30 days after equipment testing date.
iv) Equipment shall be dispatched with manufacturer's own discretion based

on the shop test and inspection document which format will be approved
by Owner prior to the test, as in (ii) above.
Above i ) - iv) are always subject to PPA requirements.
2. Owner understood above explanation.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 419/765

Conclusion Owner and EPC agreed as per "Discussion/Clarification" above.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 420/765
Category General
CDANo. CDAl
Item No. Ll-G-004
Item Description Application of GB code
Reference Specification , Part BO, Section B0.11.2, Standards and codes
Reference CDA , CDA3-Ll-G-003
Discussion/Clarification 1. Equipment/components to which GB code is planned to be applied is listed
as per Attachment CDAl-Ll-G-004-1.
2. In the event that GB code is to be applied to other equipment/components

during detail engineering stage, it should be subject to Owner's prior
approval.
Conclusion Owner and EPC agreed as per "Discussion/Clarification" above.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 421/765
CPP is not considered in this list for Attachment CDA 1-L 1-G-004-1 (1 /6)
application of GB Code
Application of GB code
Part A: Mechanical
Applied GB code Equivalent code
System / Equipment Component Design Material ISO JIS ASTM
GB Q235A JIS SS400 ASTM A283 Gr.D
LP outer & inner casing N/A
GB Q235B JIS SS400 ASTM A283 Gr.D
LP outer casing support pipe N/A GB20 JIS STPT370 ASTM A106 Gr.A
Bearing standard body N/A
Bearing standard sleeve N/A GB 0Cr19Ni9 JIS SUS304 ASTM A276 Type 304
GB 35CrMo JIS SCM435 ASTM A29 Gr.4137
Bearing standard bolts N/A
Steam Turbine GB25 JIS S25C ASTM A29 Gr.1025
Bearing standard center pin N/A GB 42CrMo Toshiba material ASTM A193 Gr.B16
Lifting beam (Special tools) N/A GB 0460 JIS SS400 ASTM A283 Gr.D
Lifting device for bearing cap (Special tools) N/A GB 20Cr JIS S25C ASTM A29 Gr.1025
Rotor support (Special tools) N/A
Sole plate N/A
LP Casing N/A
CV Base Plate N/A
BFPT
Oil Tank N/A
Same with Main turbine
Bearing Standard N/A - - -
Bearinq standard
Manifold N/A GB 45-55 JIS S45C ASTM A29 Gr.1045
Cylinder body N/A GB 45-55 JIS S45C ASTM A29 Gr.1045
Piston N/A GB 42CrMo 4 42CrMo 4 JIS SCM440H
Actuator for
Shaft N/A GB 42CrMo 4 42CrMo 4 JIS SCM440H
Main steam valves
Spring Box N/A GB Q235B JIS SS400 ASTM A283 Gr.D
GB25 JIS S25C ASTM A29 Gr.1025
Oil Reservoir N/A GB 1Cr18Ni9Ti JIS SUS304 ASTM A276 Type 304
Pipe N/A GB 1Cr18Ni9Ti JIS SUS304 ASTM A276 Type 304
EHC Oil unit
Bolts N/A GB 35CrMo JIS SCM435Q AISI 4137
Structure (Base plate) N/A GB Q235B JIS SS400 ASTM A283 Gr.D
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 422/765
Category General
CDANo. CDAl
Item No. Ll-G-006
Item Description Inspection Test Procedure
Reference Specification , Part BO, Section B0.10.1 General
, Part BO, Section B0.10.2 Testing during manufacturing
Reference CDA , CDA3-Ll-G-009
, CDA3-Ll-M-008
, CDA3-Ll-M-011
, CDA3-Ll-M-065
I Discussion/Clarification EPC (Ll)-'s proposal oflnspection Test Procedure is as per Attachment
CDAl-Ll-G-006-1~7, which include proposal of tests to be witnessed by
Owner.
Owner provided the list which indicates candidate tests to be witnessed by

Owner/PLN as per Attachment CDAl-Ll-G-006-8.
Owner further stated that notwithstanding the contents of the Attachment

CDAl-Ll-G-006-8, Owner still has the right to add the to the
Attachment CDA 1-Ll -G-006-8.
EPC(Ll) agreed to Attachment CDAl-Ll-G-006-8 and also Owner's above

statement.
Conclusion Owner and EPC agreed as per above "Discussion/Clarification".
Approval on PDM
LEGENDS:
SHOP TEST & INSPECTION SCHEDULE X TEST REPORT TO BE SUBMITTED
(ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT) T TYPE TEST DAT A TO BE SUBMITTED
I MANUFACTURER'S INTERNAL RECORDING ONLY
W WITNESS TEST
COMPONENT TEST ITEM UNIT6 REMARKS
14. ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANEL (GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL/ AUX RELAY PANEL)
1. VISUAUDIMENSIONAL INSPECTION X X
2. FUNCTION/OPERATION TEST OR WIRING INSPECTION X X
3. INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT X X
15. BATTERY CHARGER (RECTIFIER)

'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''' '''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
1. VISUAUDIMENSIONAL INSPECTION X X
2. LIGHT LOAD OPERATION TEST X X
4. WITHSTAND VOLTAGE TEST X X
16. BATTERY (CELL)

'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''' '''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
1. MANUFACTURER'S ROUTINE TEST X X
17. HYDROGEN GENERATOR

1. VISUAUDIMENSIONAL INSPECTION X
2. FUNCTION/OPERATION TEST X
18. HYDROGEN GAS COMPRESSOR

1. VISUAUDIMENSIONAL INSPECTION X
2. FUNCTION/OPERATION TEST X
1~ HYDROGEN/CO2 GAS CYLINDER

1. PRESSURE TEST X
1. VISUAUDIMENSIONAL INSPECTION w X
2. WINDING RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT X X
3. INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT w X
.............................................................~.: .......~1.T~.~T~~.~.Y?..~!.~?.~. !.~~!...........................................................................'!Y...............................~ ................ WITNESS TEST IS CONSIDERED TO BE PERFORMED

5. NO-LOAD TEST w X ON ONE OF 10KV MOTOR FOR CONDENSATE
'''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''' ''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''
6. VIBRATION MEASUREMENT w X BOOSTER PUMP OR MBFP.
7. ROTOR OVERSPEED TEST X X

8. CHARACTERISTICS MEASUREMENT w
9. HEAT RUN TEST w
10. NOISE MEASUREMENT w
21. LV MOTOR
1. VISUAUDIMENSIONAL INSPECTION
2. WINDING RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT
4. WITHSTAND VOLTAGE TEST X X
5 NO-LOAD TEST
6/6
Approval on PDM
361T s fi
DATE ISSUED 24 Sep, 2015
~~/JUI~%
JOB/QUOT .NO.
~~~
OWNER Sumitomo Corporation
TJB 5&6
,17,{)-;v
TITLE Site Inspection and Test Plan
The document is available under

Attachment 3 of the Purchase note.
The information in this material is confidential and contains

For Information Toshiba's intellectual property including know-how. It shall
not be disclosed to any third party, copied, reproduced,
used for unauthorized purposes nor modified without prior
written consent of Toshiba.
Toshiba Corporation
3
z
0
ci5 2
5
w
0:::
1 07-0ct-'15 Revised as per customer's comment. (Page 6/12) Y.Nakata T.Suzuki M.Noguchi
IS{
~ 0 24-Sep-'15 First Issue for CDA-1 discussion purpose. Indicated in below.
@]~ B ft !2. $ Bl ): t.§ 3

REV.NO
i§2. 1n" ~
DATE CONTENTS
§E fi
*
APPROVED BY
Bl
RJIJ
CHECKED BY

REVISED BY
DISTRIBUTION (Karyoku-Hin) C (Ka-PU) C (Ka-CV) C ISSUED BY Field Engineering Dept.

Bl
Client A (Henden-Gi) C (Ka-EX) C (PJ-2) *
C APPROVED BY Yuji Nakata
RJIJ ):
(Ka-IX) C (Kai-Ei-1) C CHECKED BY Yuji Nakata
t.§ 3
(Ka-IC) C (Ka-FP) }~ PREPARED BY Toshikazu Suzuki
A: Anem1on, v i...;aroon 1...,0 PY11r<ererence
**it~i±iliE 1/12
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 425/765
§tfiBf;j" 22 Jan. 2016

DATE ISSUED
M211995
tJ.!Ji/JUUt~
M211996
JOB/QUOT.NO.
~ :$t ~
CUSTOMER SUMITOMO CORPORATION
SHOP INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN FOR

PUMPS, PIPINGS, AND HEAT EXCHANGERS
The document is available under

Attachment 3 of the Purchase note.

Toshiba Corporation
U)
z
Q
U)
>
w
0:::
fm,{
K.Tanaka
-l€R( 0 22 Jan. 2016 First issue. Superseded PCD-GMH-XIT5-0002. H.Tao Y.Umemoto
T.Miyazaki
@I
REV.NO.
~ B
DATE
ft !c.
CONTENTS • * ~E
APROVED
BY
~ ~
CHECKED
BY
t§
REVISED
BY
3
~c. 1i1"
DISTRIBUTION
*' (PJ2) 1 (Ta-A) 1 (Ka-Chohin) 1
§E fi ~, Utility Power Plant
Engineering Group
ISSUED BY
SC 1 (Ka-EX) 1 (Seigyo) 1 (Hin2) 1 Plant Engineering Dept.
51< ~f
(Ka-IX) 1 (P-setsu) 1 (Hin3) 1 H.Tao
APPROVED BY
~Jll ~
(Ka-FP) 1 (Netsusetsu) 1 K.Tanaka / T.Miyazaki
CHECKED BY
(Ka-IC) 1 (Ka-PU) 1
rn. 3
Y.Umemoto
PREPARED BY
1/13
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 426/165
Attachment ·cu A 1-L 1:.G-OG6-5l I lt J
TOSHIBA LST-GCH-XITS-0004 Rev. 0
22-August-2013
DATE ISSUED
~5i/ JUiffl:~ NWP000047, 48
JOB/QUOT. NO.
~ 9c ~
:15 ~ "~
PLANT Tanjung Jati B Re-Expansion Project TJB 5&6
Shop Test & Inspection Schedule

(C&I Portion)

FOR PROPOSAL contains Toshiba's intellectual property including
know-how. It shall not be disclosed to any third party,
copied, reproduced, used for unauthorized purposes
nor modified without prior written consent of Toshiba.
Toshiba Corporation
3
C/J
:z:
2
C/J 2
>
LJ.J
c::
1
Im,{
@I
0
~
22.Aug .. 2013
B f;j"
First Issue
~ ~
/ ~f
/ ~ ~
/m 3
REV.NO. DATE CONTENTS *
APROVEDBY CHECKED
BY
REVISED
BY
12. 1jj" 9c
DI STR !BUT ION ~ fi ~
Systems Eng. Dept.
ISSUED BY Plant Eng. Group
Customer 1 PJ-2 1
if
Ka-PU 1 *
APPROVED BY
M.Takashima
~ ~
Ka-EU 1 M.Takashima
CHECKED BY
Ka-IC 1 Ka-lU 1
m 3
H.Saito
PREPARED BY
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
©) Toshiba Corporation 2013, All Rights Reserved
Approval on PDM
Contents
1. Scope .................................................................................................... 3
2. Codes and Standards .......................................................................... 3
3. Scope of Inspection and Test ............................................................. 3
4. Inspection and Test ............................................................................. 4
4.1 Material Inspection and Test Record ...................................................... 4
4.2 Dimensional Inspection and Visual Inspection ....................................... 4
4.3 Hydrostatic Pressure Test ...................................................................... 4
4.4 Seat Tightness Test. ............................................................................... 5
4.5 Electrical Test ......................................................................................... 5
4.6 Functional Test of Safety Valves, Pneumatic Control Valves and
Pneumatic ON-OFF Valves ................................................................... 5
4.7 Calibration Check and Function Test of Instruments .............................. 5
4.8 Factory Test for DCS and D-EHC ........................................................... 6
2/6
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
1. Scope
This Quality Control Plan (hereinafter "QC Plan") proposes Inspection and Test
Items of l&C portions provided by Toshiba (herein after "the Contractor") for
Tanjung Jati B Re-Expansion 2 x 1OOOMW Coal-Fired project during shop
manufacturing processes. Further details shall be explained in Inspection and Test
Plan (ITP) documents in details design stage.
2. Codes and Standards

Inspection and Test shall be carried out in accordance with relevant technical
codes and standards listed in mentioned basic requirements, Part 80.10.2.6
except otherwise separately stated in Contractor's document/ drawings, or base
on Contractor and their subcontractor's standards.
3. Scope of Inspection and Test

Inspection and Test shall be carried out for equipments supplied by the Contractor
and the inspection and test results shall be recorded as QC records, and
submitted to Marubeni Consortium (hereinafter "the Owner") in accordance with
attached QC Plan Table.
1) Distributed Control System (DCS)
2) Main Turbine Digital Electro Hydraulic Control System (MT D-EHC)
3) BFP Turbine Digital Electro Hydraulic Control System (BFPT D-EHC)
4) Training Simulator
5) CMMS (Computerized Maintenance Management System)
6) Turbine Supervisory Instruments (TSI) I Vibration Monitoring System (VMS)
7) Sampling system
8) Condenser Tube Leak Detection System
9) Local Instrument
10) Local Instrument Rack & Stanchion
11) Control Valve
12) Pneumatic On-Off Valve
13) Safety Valve
3/6
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
4. Inspection and Test

4.1 Material Inspection and Test Record
The materials shall be supplied from the qualified vendors with the qualification
system of the Constructor/Subcontractor to comply with requirements. The
material tests, chemical compositions and mechanical properties check shall be
conducted for the valve bodies, bonnets etc. in accordance with the applied
material specifications.
4.2 Dimensional Inspection and Visual Inspection

Dimensional Inspection shall be conducted for main structure parts, interfaced
portions and main critical portions after fabrication, machining and assembling to
confirm that they should comply with design / drawing requirements. Visual
Inspection shall be conducted for finished components to confirm that they should
be free from any mechanical damage.
4.3 Hydrostatic Pressure Test

The hydrostatic test shall be conducted for instrument piping and valve body. The
pressure and duration will be followed with the applied Specification requirements
or manufacturer's standards.
4/6
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
4.4 Seat Tightness Test
The seat tightness test shall be performed for the safety valves, control valves and
pneumatic ON-OFF valves. The pressure and duration will be followed with the
applied Specification requirements or manufacturer's standards. The leakage from
the sealing seat shall conform to the acceptance criteria specified in the standards.
4.5 Electrical Test

The electrical test such as sequence test and wiring check, insulation resistance
measurement and dielectric test shall be performed for cubicles, panels,
instruments and so on.
4.6 Functional Test of Safety Valves, Pneumatic Control Valves and Pneumatic
ON-OFF Valves
The function test shall be conducted for the following components, and their
correct and smooth operation shal I be confirmed. For the safety valves and
pressure relief valves, the setting points shall be checked and the correct
settings shall conform to the design requirements. When necessary, the
operation stroke shall be checked and recorded.
a) Safety Valve and Pressure Relief Valve

b) Pneumatic Control Valve
c) Pneumatic ON-OFF Valve
4. 7 Calibration Check and Function Test of Instruments

The calibration check and function test shall be performed for instruments, which
are isolated one and are not installed on the system units. These instruments will
at least, but not limited to the followings:
a) Pressure and Differential Pressure Transmittal, Gauge and Switch
b) Temperature Transmitter, Gauge and Switch
c) Thermocouple and Resistance Temperature Detector
d) Level Transmitter, Gauge and Switch
e) Flow Transmitter, Gauge and Switch
f) Flow Element (only dimentional inspection and visual inspection)
g) Position Transmitter
h) Limit Switch
i) Analytical Instruments
5/6
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
4.8 Factory Test for DCS and D-EHC
Hardware test and inspection by structural inspection, hardware circuit test,

input/output circuit test follow by system diagnostic function test shall be
implemented. The test is performed individually for Main Turbine D-EHC, BFP
Turbine D-EHC, and DCS controller such as electrical system, turbine/turbine BOP,
boiler/boiler BOP without combination test.
For DCS, factory acceptance test (FAT) will tested for selected items and test
criteria shall be define in detail ITP. Despite the test criteria, demonstration such as
the processing performance for the selected test items, showing control
functionality from the graphical display can be performed as well. Performance and
efficiency calculation of plant operation is excluded from FAT but the sample output
of report can be explained. Boiler control and burner management system can be
conducted using plant simulator, and signal generator shall be prepared for proper
interface signal during factory test replacing actual field instruments input.
Comprehensive test including interface with other control system such as PLC etc
shall be performed at project site.
6/6
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 432/765
Attachment-1 Attachment CDA 1-L 1-G-006-5 (7 /7)
TOSHIBA
Inspection and Test during Shop Note I Remark
Abbreviation
"E -;
w : Inspection and Test to be witnessed by the OWNER 0
(J :I
s : Inspection and Test Records to be submitted to the OWNER a., Ill
W/S : WorS
0:::
.... >
"CJ
For several units or many parts, "W" will be applied to the first
Ill
a.,
I-
C
I'll
....
Ill
a.,
one only except otherwise noted. "CJ C
C 0 I-
VENDOR NAME I'll
C
~a., f!
:I
....
Ill
0 Ill a., .:,:
C. I- (J
~a., Ill
.5
Ill
f! Ill .... ....
Ill
a.,
.c
C. -; a. Ill
a., Ill
a., .2! (.)
Ill
C C
(J
.s I- -; C
.5
-; .!:! .!:!
Ill .... E
Ill
.c
Cl
-;
(J
C
0
~
0
·;: C CJ
e i= ·;:
~
a., a.,
tia., :e
~ E ~ "CJ
>,
1u
a.,
C -;
:ii:: C C ::c rn w :I
LL. (.)
EQUIPMENT NAME/ PART NAME Unit .... N M II) (0 r,...

""'
l&C SYSTEM
5 W/S W/S W/S
1 DISTRIBUTE CONTROL SYSTEM (DCS)
6 s s s
5 W/S W/S W/S
2 MAIN TURBINE DIGITAL ELECTRO HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM (MT D-EHC)
6 s s s
5 W/S W/S W/S
3 BFP TURBINE DIGITAL ELECTRO HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM (BFPT D-EHC)
6 s s s
4 TRAINING SIMULATOR Common W/S W/S W/S
5 CMMS Common s s s
6 TURBINE SUPERVISORY INSTRUMENTS (TSI) / VIBRATION MONITORING SYSTEM (VMS)
5 s s s s
6 s s s s
7 SAMPLING SYSTEM
5 s s s s s
6 s s s s s
8 CONDENSER TUBE LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM
5 s s s s s
6 s s s s s
9 LOCAL INSTRUMENT
5 s
6 s
10 LOCAL INSTRUMENT RACK & STANCHION
5 s s s
6 s s s
11 CONTROL VALVE
5 s s s s s
6 s s s s s
12 PNEUMATIC ON-OFF VALVE
5 s s s s s
6 s s s s s
13 SAFETY VALVE
5 s s s s s
6 s s s s s
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 433/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDAl
Item No. Ll-M-001
Item Description Testing and commissioning equipments
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.10.1.1, Test instruments and equipment
Discussion/Clarification 1. Owner and EPC discussed basic rule/mechanism for test instrument and
equipment and following comments was made by the Owner:it is not
necessary for EPC to seek Owner's approval for the test instruments and
equipment used in the manufacturing works;
2. Owner expects that test instruments and equipment will comply with EPC's
sub-contractors company QA manual as regards calibration and so on; and
3. RFP requirement should be adhered to as it is clear, and in any case design
and manufacturing codes shall apply.
Conclusion The test instruments and equipment for commissioning can be selected by EPC
without Owner's approval as long as approved code in RFP Documents is
applied.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 434/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDAl
Item No. Ll-M-003
Item Description Welding procedures
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.12.4.3, Welding procedures
Reference CDA CDA3-L 1-M-030/031
Discussion/Clarification EPC(L 1) clarified that all the welding procedures will be submitted to Owner
for their review.
Conclusion Owner and EPC agreed to revise the part of conclusion ofCDA3-Ll-M-030 as
below.
<Before>
2. Welding procedure for (a) pressure parts as defined in "ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code" and (b) alloy steel to be welded at the Site shall be
subject to SC's approval__
<After>
2. Welding procedure for (a) pressure parts as defined in "ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code" or (b) alloy steel to be welded at the Site shall be
subject to SC's approval__
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 435/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDAl
Item No. Ll-M-006
Item Description Configuration of Condensate Polishing Plant
Reference Specification Part B 1, Section B 1.l/FD-22,
Description of Primary Equipment and Systems
Discussion/Clarification Owner confirmed alternative configuration of Condensate Polishing Plant (incl.
Regeneration Facility) proposed by EPC under CDA3-Ll-M-064 as per
Attachment CDAl-Ll-M-006-1.
Conclusion It was agreed between the Owner and EPC that configuration of Condensate
Polishing Plant (incl. Regeneration Facility) will be as per Attachment
CDAl-Ll-M-006-1.
Approval on PDM
TOSHIBA DSC-GMG-XITS-0009 Rev.1
CONTENTS
CLAUSE NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE

NO.
1 INTRODUCTION 3
2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 3
3 OPERATION PHILOSOPHY 5
**:ttiH±-~ 2/6
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 437/765
Attachment CDA 1-L 1-M-006-1 (2/6)
SYSTEM DESIGN DESCRIPTION OF

1. Introduction
One (1) Condensate Polishing Plant (CPP) of the naked mixed bed type is provided for
the 1000 MW STG unit. The CPP will be provided in the steam water cycle at down
stream of the Condensate Pumps (CP) to maintain purity of condensate and feed water.
The CPP is used to purify condensate water from the condenser by removing solids
and dissolved salts with the intent of reducing corrosion and deposits in the steam
water cycle. Strong acid cation and strong base anion resins will be used to maintain
stringent water quality of condensate and feed water according to JIS 88223.
2. System Description:
2.1 Layout Information
The Condensate Polishing Plant consists of two major facilities and they are located as
below;
a. Service Vessel Unit is located along the condensate water path between the CP
discharge and Gland Steam Condenser in Turbine House.
b. External Regeneration Facility is located outside of the Turbine House, which is
located approximately 10 m away from the Service Vessel Unit.
2.2 CPP Service Vessel Unit

The CPP consists of 2 x 50% capacity Service Vessels trains complete with the influent,
effluent and rinse water headers, connections for resin transfer and integral bypass line.
Capacity is based on CP pump discharge flow at Boiler MCR condition. Resin traps are
provided at the outlet of each Service Vessel.
The CPP shall be designed to operate on the following cycles.

&.
i.
ii.
During start-up
Cycle runtime for regeneration is minimum
During normal operation
08
Cycle runtime for regeneration is minimum
iii. During condenser tube leakage condition
**:ttiH±-~ 3/6
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 438/765
Attachment CDA 1-L 1-M-006-1 (3/6)
The common influent headers of each polisher service unit are connected to bypass
line. When there is excessive pressure difference between the condensate inlet and
outlet headers, a motorized bypass valve opens under such conditions to bypass the
required quantities of condensate in order to prevent exceeding a preset limit when two
vessels/ one vessel/ no vessel are in operation.
2.3 External Regeneratio

1
OOOMW STG
units. The backwash and regeneration cycles are executed in process of resin transfer,
e regeneration of e exhausted resins in the Resin Separation Vessel is

semi automatically controlled. The exhausted resin is first backwashed in the Resin
Separation Vessel, the cation and anion beds thus getting separated. Once this is done
the anion resin and cation resin are separated to each regeneration vessel. The cation
resin is air scrubbed, backwashed and regenerated with acid. The crud on the resin is
thus removed. The anion resin is similarly regenerated with caustic in the anion
regeneration vessel. When regeneration of both cation and anion resin is complete, the
anion resin is transferred from the Anion Regeneration Vessel to Cation Regeneration
Vessel, where it is mixed with the cation resin and rinsed. The mix of regenerated resin
is then stored in the Cation Regeneration Vessel before it is transferred into the empty
Service Vessel.
The OM Regeneration Pumps shall be provided for water supply from the
Demineralized Water Storage Tank for chemical preparation or dosing and transfer of
resin from the service vessel to the regenerating vessel and vice-versa.
Plant service air or air from air blower is used for air scrubbing and resin transfer.
Acid or caustic for chemical preparation and dosing shall be supplied from the chemical
storage and supply system. Acid, caustic solutions are dosed by the dilution and dosing
equipments.
Instrument air for the CPP and the External Regeneration Facility will be tapped from
the main instrument air header.
**:ttiH±-~ 4/6
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
The wastewater from the External Regeneration Facility is led to the Neutralizing Pit
located near the External Regeneration Facility. The required amounts of acid/caustic
are dosed for neutralization.
3. OPERATION PHILOSOPHY:
The Condensate Polishing Plant will be controlled by PLC in the local control panel with
Operator Work Station (OWS). A group alarm is to be sent from the PLC to the DCS.
It will be possible to select each of the Service Vessels for the following operations:
a) Service
b) Resin transfer from the Service Vessel to the External Regeneration Facility.
c) Resin transfer from the External Regeneration Facility to the Service Vessel.
d) Isolation from service.
e) Rinse recycle.
A manually initiated automatic sequence for physical cleaning and chemical

regeneration of the resin shall be implemented in the PLC based control system.
Control for chemical dosing system is also provided in it.
Manually initiated automatic sequences will be provided for transferring resin from a
Service Vessel to the External Regeneration Facility for physical cleaning and chemical
regeneration and for returning fresh resin to that vessel. The transfer of resin from the
Service Vessel will include isolation of the service vessel, hydraulic transfer of the resin
to the Resin Separation Vessel and drain down of the Service Vessel to the hot well or
effluent line.
The control and operation requirements of the External Regeneration Facility will be
implemented in the PLC based system. It will be possible to operate the External
Regeneration Facility in Auto/ Semi auto/ Manual mode.
Following operations will be possible for the regeneration control from the OWS:
a) Complete regeneration
**:ttiH±-~ 5/6
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 440/765
Attachment CDAl-Ll-M-006-1 (5/6)
b) Resin transfer from the Service Vessel to the External Regeneration Facility.
c) Resin transfer from the External Regeneration Facility to the Service Vessel.
**:ttiH±-~ 6/6
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
Approval on PDM
~-::;-~,---1_ _ _ __!__
11 1 _ _ _ _2_ _ _ __j__
, _ _ _ _3
_ _ _ __]_
, _ _ _ _4_ _ _ __l__ _ __:s::__ _ __l_ 1 _ _ __'.8=-.__ _ _1f<_:::__ __:9'.__ _ _J_l_ _ __2_1~o_ _ __J_l_ _ __21~1_ _ __J_1_ _ __21~2_ _ __J_1_ _ __21~3_ _ __J_1_ _ __21~4_ _ __J_1_ _ ___2_:1·Attachment
1 _ _ __'6:'.__ _ _J_l_ _ _ _7'.__ _ __l_ " PNGM~q,2121 (6/6)
CDAl-Ll-M-006-1 Rev. 2 441 /765
~
IS'l
G-J 8
A ~
NOTES: A
f-C) ~D ,--------------------------------------------------------------------------- TURBINE HOUSE.GROUND FLOOR
::s:
l
0
;o 1. THE DIAGRAM SHOWN IS INDICATIVE ONLY.
>
lI IH-1411GMH01149 -:, • _; UNITS POLISHING SYSTEM
0
"'
z
G)
z
1
I
FROM CONDENSATE PUMP ' uOGCFIO
AAOIO
' v ~ ' N ~ ,
I
2. REGENERATION IS UNDERTAKEN IN EXTERNAL VESSEL.
3. ALL VALVES ARE NOT SHOWN FOR SIMPLICITY.
-
,:, DISCHARGE ,i''5;; 7
C:2'i -
~ ~ :.E V-: . :. ~ ~
r1'
,0 '1
u0GCF10 u0GCF10
I
I
AA020 AA030 ~
G-J ~ ~ ~
--p. v I
TURBINE HOUSE:GROUND FLOOR
,---------------------------------------------------
uOGCFIO MT030
~
N I
I i UNIT6 POLISHING SYSTEM :
uOGCFIO uOGCFIO
~
B B
M04Q M05g
,, I
I
I I
I I
uOGCFI OAT040 I
I I
I
I I
CARTRIDGE FILTER I OGCFI OBBO I 0 IOGCFIOBB020 I
I I
2x100%
I I
V ~
(A) '
"~
(B) I I
uOGCF31 uOGCF31 I I
AA030 M020
j (SAME AS UNIT 5) !
C C
/ I I
~
POLISHER MIXED BED VESSEL I I
~ b8 7
2x50%
_9_ , ~ ~:f
I
I
I
- POLISHER MIXED BED VESSEL POLISHER MIXED BED VESSEL I I
RESIN TRAP ==:::;::: RESIN TRAP ==::::i I ~ I
~
(A) (B) I I
.
~
• . • - ' ! i
,.,S;=;
N
1OGCF1 OAT020
D TO GLAND STEAM (1 '7b;; 10GCFIOAT010 (1
L-------------------------------------------1---I--------_J D
CONDENSER INLET v-: '"l::f V--;,"l:;i;
1GMH01149 I H - 1 5 J . . - : - - t - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . l ' . . ._ _J"L--l---l---i------1---------_j''
. r - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -....-J
'
- -
r
AIR BLOWER FOR LJ
y ,. y POLISHER MIXED
BED VESSEL
1 ___________________________________ CPP EXTERNAL REGENERATION FACILITY

2x100%
E r-------------.....;;.i 10GCF10AN010 E
u0GCF12
5~ - M
!A010
10GCF10APIOO -,
SERVICE AIR AIR-;;:""==-(
(A)
'- I
-" .
uOGCF11 ~
uOGCF50
AA020
~
Y u0GCF50 1
AA020 V '/ \ AAOIO I

-
10GCF10AN020
M uOGCFl 1
u0GCF50
M030
,g
(A V)~ I
-
M010
AIR-;;..cs:::::::::e-{ " ~ .
u0GCF50
IOGC.~F10APl 10
M .
~ CAUSTIC FROM TANKER I I
1
(B) u0GCF12 111 •I\ I
• AA050 uOGCF50
F
L_____ -_____________________________________________ _ ------ ----------------------------
AA020
__ J '
v
"~6~~0
I/
Q
\ AA040
(Bf , ·· i
F
--~--- CAUSTIC \ I
,r-----------------------------------t----!-------;J UNLOADING I
INSTRUMENT AIR CAUSTIC PUMPS CAUSTIC BULK I
~ I OGCF10AP060 DAY TANK 2x 100% STORAGE TANK(A) v ,:; I

~(u M 10GCF10BB070 u0GCF51 1
r----~-------------------1-----1--------------------------------------------------------------------0' uOGCF50 uOGCF50 10GCF10BB040 AAOIO " I

I
M080
A
(A)
1!070
~
/~-~-~w__ y I
EXTERNAL REGENERATION FACILITY (COMMON) V

-
- I OGCF1 OAP070 '
CAUSTIC BULK I
- STORAGE TANK(B) -+----,XAf-
I
uOGCF50 M uOGCF50 I OGCFIOAP080 -;,.i

.
M100 AAD90 uOGCF60 ~ 10GCF1 OBB080
, ~
uOGCF52
I
G I G
~~ AA010
CAUSTIC
(B) ,..-{;><'.1:AA;::;0;,,2ql---{:-y~
V :._:. /
u0GCF60
~ \_
o
u0GCF60
~
~01_9 y I
I
(A)
' METERING PUMPS
M030
,._,;;-----<: ACID FROM TANKER I

. 2x100% uOGCF60
10GCF10AP090
~
I I
-
AAosq y u0GCF60
L..f,x
vj·~;::;/7}---C-L...._\_ ~04~ I
/ G.J HEATER u0GCF60
I
uOGCF34 uOGCF99 u0GCF50 IOGCF10BB060 'O

(B) ,
/ !?o '
AA010
.9 /
AA110
.?
==f~
==f~ ACID
METERING
'
M060
ACID ( \
I
I
10GCF10BB030 f-;o, 10GCF10BB010 f,,,_e-lc-X~1----- ' " . 10GCF10BB020 ==f~ UNLOADING ACID I
H r-. u0GCF97 PUMPS ACID BULK STORAGE TANK(A) H
TO ATM RESIN '? CATION T . ==f~ 2X I 00% PUMPS A
I
0 0
MD10 r-. ANION DAY TANK 2x100%
v~c,----,~
-1--+--G:
AIR BLOWER ' ,, • I_ SEPARATION ' " • I. :iEGENERATlm v ' .T. :iEGENERATION V ~
I
FOR REGENERATION .--{,>'<.,I-~- VESSEL u0GCF96
MOID .--lv>'<~i-;~ VESSEL
r-, u0GCF33
.T_., AA020 .---,,>'<,·H-~ VESSEL u0GCF98
AA010
I OGCF10AP030 10GCFBB090 u0GCF61
AA010 ,. I
HOT
FACILITY
2x100%
u0GCF32 u0GCF42
AA010 v
u0GCF42
M010
WATER
u0GCF60 M u0GCF60
10GCF10BB050
y I
-
I OGCF10AN030
AAO~
.9. .9 TANK
M080
. .
M070
.
\
I
-
u0GCF40 V '
M
M020.
v ~ / , ~
(A) ACID I
Al R-;;.""'==-(
.
-.._ I
-...__~_,...,,/ u~GC~O uOGCF95
v
-...__~_,.. u0GCF95
M010
" BULK STORAGE TANK(B) A
I
~ M030 M020
(A) uOGCF40
M010
['.2~/1 \
u~~
?S~
7
."l.
, ,mo
bo
N
- I OGCFIOAP040
'
10GCFBB100
-+--l><,~1--~
uOGCF62
I
I
::, L 8::l:
I OGCF10AN040 M AAOIO "
" uOGCF60 uOGCF60
y I
y' y'
M uOGCF41 M100 M090
M010 ~ - I
AIR'+<=J>-{ -.._ I '-J

(B) ' "
(B) uOGCF41 -
I
M020 SERVICE AIR I
,,
-
C ' ,. ',.
'
,---------------------------------J
I
I ___)
'
uOGCF34 " ' ~
uOGCF34 I
OM REGENERATION ' AA010 AA020 CPP REGENERATION I
_ _ _ , FACILITY DRAIN PIT

PUMPS uOGCF42 I
2x100% M010 I
J 10GCF10APOIO J
uOGCF30 - '' I
uOGCF30
AA01Q f
[¥] !,A020
............_ I
-
r-; I
FROM MAKE-UP I., 'I Q' (A) ----;;/iccGo (}- 7 S ;; I

M030 . ..i ~~
WATER PUMP
- C-11 I 1GMH01256-3/:tJ>-~t----+I
1OGCF10AP020
~ uOGCF30
'1
I FOR PROPOSAL I
9 M050_
~
1
I A f - ..... I The information in this material is confidential and

1 uOGCFJO O ( B) u0GCF30 contains Toshiba's intellectual property including
I M040 M060 I
know-how. It shall not be disclosed to any third
I I party, copied, reproduced, used for unauthorized
K L K
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ J I
purposes nor modified without prior written consent
of Toshiba. Toshiba Corporation
2 i2 -ll- MARK r,R\_E3- jf,N APPROVED BY "'1:lr CHECKED BY

c?,~ TITLEFLOW DIAGRAM FOR
24.Dec.'13 27.Aug.'13 's'J'lEl DATE '--~----' H.Shiraishi A.Kinoshita
-
H.Shiraishi H.Shiraishi jf WAPPROVED BY RJ/! SCALE 18. Jun. '13 18. Jun. '13 CONDENSATE POLISHING PLANT -
A.Kinoshita A.Kinoshita /l!I :l,: CHECKED BY -- <.ltat DESIGNED BY ;.t[]] DRAWN BY 2 x 1OOOMW
T.Miyazaki T.Kaneko Jl:ll':'!f REVISED BY VJ Jll.iJ[ UNITS T.Kaneko T.K , Tanjung Jati B Re-Ex~ansion Project _
Revised os per Revised os per design
6 SI 18. Jun. '13 TJB 5&6
en
engineering Progress. Progress. ,a ,Ja: CONTENTS GJ []]iliHl'-ll- DRAWING NO. 'l\" REV.MARK
TOSHIBA
,3,GIM,H0,0,3,4,21® I@
L Q' U'<t,H±-~
f - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - 1 - - - - - - - - ' fm.( TOSHIBA CORPORATION
L
ii( 'ffi' REGISTERED t1I
I I I I I I
2
I
3 4
I
5 6
I
7
I
8
I
k
I
9
I I I
I
10 11
I
12
I
13
I
I Iii( g REGISTERED
14
I PR~:N~TO OOO0 16 Approva I on PDM
15
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 442/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDAl
Item No. Ll-M-010
Item Description Welding qualification
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.12.11.2, Welding and machining
Reference CDA CDA3-Ll-M-044
Discussion/clarification 1. Owner clarified that CDA3-Ll-M-044 is acceptable with the exception of
the part related to the turbine stop valves and control valves. There are
critical pressure retaining welds and therefore the WPSs, PQRs and welder
qualification reports shall be submitted to the Owner for approval.
2. EPC(Ll) confirmed that EPC(Ll) submit the WPSs, PQRs and welder
qualification reports of site welding.
Conclusion Owner and EPC agreed to CDA3-Ll-M-044.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 443/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDAl
Item No. Ll-M-016
Item Description Thick of tolerance (+/-10% for 3mm nominal thickness) for Hard rubber linings
Reference Specification , Part BO, Section B0.10.2.3.3, Testing of corrosion protection
Discussion/Clarification With regard to applicable code and standard for measurement of the thickness of
linings specified in CDA3-Ll-M-014, Owner commented that the applicable
code shall be EN 14879.
Conclusion With respect to the RFP conditions of "The thickness of linings shall be
measured in accordance with EN 14879 or equivalent. A tolerance of+ /-10% is
permitted for rubber coatings of 3 mm nominal thickness", it is agreed that such
RFP conditions shall be changed as follows .
./ The thickness of linings shall be measured in accordance with EN 14879 or

equivalent. A tolerance of+ (Manufacture standard)% and- 0% is
permitted for rubber coating of 3mm or less nominal thickness"
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 444/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDAl
Item No. Ll-M-017
Item Description Internal labeling
Reference Specification , Part BO, Section B0.11.4,Plant and equipment identification
Reference CDA , CDA3-L 1-M-020
Discussion/Clarification Owner and EPC discussed based on CDA3-Ll-M-020 and confirmed as follows:
1. The respective RFP conditions shall remain unchanged.

2. In case EPC (L 1) needs to apply the other materials, the details shall be
discussed between EPC and Owner for Owner's approval, provided that in
any case, adhesive stickers for outdoor installation or in dusty environment shall
not be allowed.
Conclusion The Owner and EPC agreed as per Discussion/Clarification above.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 445/765
Category Electrical
CDANo. CDAl
Item No. Ll-M-019
Item Description Gray cast iron casting
Reference Specification , Part BO, Section B0.11.15,Materials Part BO, Section B0.12.1.3,Material
, CDA3-Ll-M-023
Discussion/Clarification 1. EPC (L 1) confirmed that gray cast iron will be used only for the casing for
the oil pumps for turbine lube oil system.
2. Owner requested EPC (L 1) to provide the QA/QC clarification material for
gray cast iron.
3. EPC (LI) clarified as follows.
1) Test and inspection for gray cast iron casting casing for turbine oil
pump as a QA/QC is hydrostatic test only.
2) EPC (Ll)'s standard test pressure of hydrostatic test is 1.5 times of
maximum discharge pressure of pump (same as JIS B8301 "
Rotodynamic pumps -- Hydraulic performance acceptance tests").
3) EPC (Ll)'s standard holding time of hydrostatic test is 30 minutes (3
minutes or longer according to JIS B8301 ).
4) JIS B8301 does not require any other test for pump casing such as
NDE test.
5) For Owner's reference, EPC (LI) provided EPC (Ll)'s sample of
inspection record for MOP (performance test record are not included)
as per Attachment-CDAl-Ll-M-019-1.
Conclusion Owner understood EPC's clarifications as per "Discussion/Clarification" above

and agreed to CDA3-Ll-M-022 and CDA3-Ll-M-023.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 446/765
Category Civil
CDANo. CDAl
Item No. C-002
Item Description Cable entry / Cable glands
Reference Specification ',- Part BO, Section B0.13.24, Requirements for local cubicles and local
housings for e.g. switchgear, control, measurement and signaling
equipment
Reference CDA ',- CDA3-LI-E-017/018
',- CDA3-L3-E-004
',- CDA2-C-007
Discussion/Clarification 1. Owner commented that top entry should really be excluded as Owner's
experience shows that even with carefully designed cable entries, glands,
covers and other means of protection, water ingress remains a problem.
2. EPC (LI and L3) confirmed to comply with RFP requirement (i.e. bottom
entry).
3. Owner clarified to EPC(L 1) that;

1) As for the indoor floor mounted panels with fire seal at the floor entry,
the cable grounds is not mandatory conditions, provided that cable
support shall be installed just before floor entry to hold the cable
property since it is required to have access from bottom as well as
from top (through the panel cubicle).
2) CDA3-L 1-E-O 17 can be accepted in case of control and instrument

cable, whereas power cables in the switchgear should be mounted
using cable glands. However overloading of cables in the panels,
without cable glands, shall be avoided.
4. In reply to the above 3, EPC (LI) explained as follows.

1) In general, cables will be terminated first and followed by fire
sealing material will be filled from both bottom and top side of the
floor opening.
2) If the cables are glanded at gland plate with cable gland, it is not
possible to remove gland and gland plate for filling fire sealing
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 447/765

material from top side of the floor, and thus fire sealing material
cannot be filled.
3) Cable gland need open space at both bottom and top side of the gland
plate for fastening work. If the fire seal materials are filled as per the
requirement in RFP, then cable gland cannot be provided at the panel
base plate.
4) Therefore cables are bunched and properly fastened to suitable

supports provided at the floor entries of the panels. This supports
will provide sufficient mechanical support to the cable and will relive
any strain / overloading at the equipment terminal.
5) It is not possible to make available both gland and fire sealing

material. Therefore EPC (L 1) recommended control, instrumentation
and also power cables with floor support but no cable gland and with
proper fire sealing.
5. Regarding the cable gland, the further to be discussed and agreed in detail
engineering stage.
Conclusion Owner and EPC agreed as follows;

1. Regarding cable entry as discussed item 1 and 2 in
"Discussion/Clarification" above, EPC follow RFP requirement and,
therefore, CDA3-Ll-E-018 shall not be applied.
2. Regarding cable gland as discussed item 3, 4 and 5 in
"Discussion/Clarification" above, CDA3-L 1-E-O 17 shall not be applied.
Further to be discussed and agreed between the Owner and EPC during the
detail engineering stage.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 448/765
CDA 2 for Civil and Architectural
Sign/ PDF File in
CDA 2 Attachments TSBDoc. No. Rev. Title
Hard Copy PJ Server
MEM-GMH-XITS-0001
Part B3, Section B3.l.l General

C-002 Coal Unloading Jetty and Causeway 1-----------------------1Attachment-CDA2-C-002-l
Part B4, Section B4.3.3.6.l Coal Unloading Jetty and
Causeway
Part B3 Section B3.5.2.6 Waste water treatment system
Part B3 Section B3.5.3.6 Waste water treatment systems

Coal Yard Run-Off Basin and Coal Run-Off Waste
C-003 Part B4, Section B4.3.3.6.3 Coal Yard Run-Off Basin Attachment-CDA2-C-003-l
Water Treatment Plant
Part C, Annex C-G21, Section IV, item no.14, Water
Treatment Equipment
Part B4, Section B4.3.3.12.l Seawater Intake System
Part B4, Section B4.3.3.12.2 Seawater Screening and Pumping

Station Attachment-CDA2-C-004-l
C-004 Seawater Intake System Attachment-CDA2-C-004-2
Part B3, Section B3.4.l General Attachment-CDA2-C-004-3
Part B3, Section B3.4.2 Scope of Supplies and Services
Pre-Bid Clarification List No.C6-D5
Part B3, Section B3.7 Ash Handling System
Part B4, Section B4.3.3.5.4 Bottom Ash Silos

C-005 Bottom Ash Silo 1-----------------------<Attachment-CDA2-C-005-l
Part CO-G21, Section IV POWER STATION EQUIPMENT
Part CO-G21, Section VI CIVIL & ARCHITECTURAL

WORKS
C-008 Facility information Part B4, Section B4.2.2 List of Building and Structures Attachment-CDA2-C-008-l
Part Bl, Section Bl .4 Hydrogen Generation System
Part B4, Section B4.3.3.2 Buildings and Structures for H2 H2 Generation Plant Building
C-009 H2 Generation Plant Building Attachment-CDA2-C-009-l 3GEH00781
Generation System Layout
Part C, Annex C4-C01, Short Description of Main Buildings,

H2 Generation Plant Building (B4-FD-02)
1/ 2 Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 449/765
CDA 2 for Civil and Architectural
Reference Technical Specification in the RFP Sign/ PDF File in
CDANo. Item Description CDA 2 Attachments TSBDoc. No. Rev. Title
(Item No.15.(3) of the EPC Proposal) Hard Copy PJ Server
Assembling and Erection Work of Template and Part C, Annex CO-G2l SECTION IV Chapter 41. CIVIL-
C-010 Attachment-CDA2-C-O I 0- l
Anchor Flame PLANT INTERFACE
Part C, Annex CO-G2l SECTION IV Chapter 41. CIVIL-

PLANT INTERFACE Item No. (8) Box Out, a. Box Out
C-Oll Box Out
Part C, Annex CO-G2l SECTION IV Chapter 41. CIVIL-
PLANT INTERFACE Item No. (8) Box Out, b. Grouting
Part C, Annex CO-G2l SECTION IV Chapter 41. CIVIL- Civil Design Requirement
PLANT INTERFACE Item No. (IO) Floor Grating in T/G Attachment-CDA2-C-O 12- l OGMH00293 0 (Basemsnt Floor FL.-8600 to -
House 2500)
Civil Design Requirement ofTG House and Central Civil Design Requirement
C-012 Part C, Annex CO-G2l SECTION VI Chapter 20. POWER
Control Building (CCB) Attachment-CDA2-C-Ol2-2 OGMH00293 0 (Basemsnt Floor FL.-8600 to -
HOUSE Item No. (II) Grating floor (removal)
2500)
Part C, Annex CO-G2l SECTION VI Chapter 20. POWER

HOUSE Item No. (15) Checker plate floor (removal)
Attachment-CDA2-C-O 13- l
Part C, Annex CO-G2l SECTION IV Chapter 14. WATER
TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
Attachment-CDA2-C-Ol3-2 LST-GMG-XIT5-0007 3 Waste Water and Drain Blow List
Oily Waste Water Drainage/ Non-oily Waste Water
C-013
Drainage (Process Waste Water Drainage)
Part C, Annex CO-G2l SECTION IV Chapter 32. PIPING
Attachment-CDA2-C-Ol3-3
(INCLUDING VALVES, FITTINGS, INSURATION,
LAGGING AND PLANT) Item No. (5) Equipment Drain
piping & Overflow Piping
Part C, Annex CO-G2l, Section IV, Item No.14 (6) Others
Part C, Annex CO-G2l, Section IV, Item No.42.(5), f

C-014 Sewage Water Attachment-CDA2-C-O 14- l
Part C, Annex CO-G2l, Section IV, Item No.32. (21) Waste
Drainage Piping
Part C, Annex CO-G24, "Sanitary Waste Water"
storm water piping from coal unloading jetty to coal

C-015 Part C, Annex CO-G2l, Section IV. No.14.(6) & No.32 (22)
run-off pond
Part C, Annex CO-G2l, Section IV, Item No.42, Building

Facility for Indoor and Outdoor, (I) Lighting
C-016 Interface Point for Lighting between Lot 3 and Lot 4
Part C, Annex CO-G22 Item No. l. Lighting
C-017 Short Description of Main Buildings Part C, Annex C4-COI, Short Description of Main Buildings Attachment-CDA2-C-Ol 7-l
2/2 Approval on PDM

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 450/765
Category Civil and Architectural

CDANo. CDA2
Item No. C-001
Item Description Bar Reinforcement
Reference Specification , Part BO, SectionB0.15.23.7Reinforcement
Discussion/Clarification , Discussion was made (i) whether or not any special treatment for bar
reinforcement other than specification stipulated in RFP document is
required by Lot 1, Lot 2 and Lot 3 and (ii) location/facility for such special
treatment, if any.
Conclusion , Lot 1, 2 and 3 confirmed that there will be no mandatory requirement to
apply special treatment for bar reinforcement, such as epoxy coating, other
than specification required in RFP document to reinforced concrete ("RC")
structure to be constructed by Lot 4. Lot 4 shall design RC structure based
on the required design criteria of characteristic / condition to be provided
by Lot 1, 2 and 3.In relation to the above, Lot 1 provided the preliminary
data of 1) waste water data for drain from pit inside Condenser Pit (Refer to
Attachment-CDA2-C-001-1) and 2)outline drawing of CPP Regeneration
Plant (Refer to Attachmen-CDA2-C-001-2). Notwithstanding the above,
the required specifications described in Section BO .15 .23. 7 shall remain
unchanged.
Approval on PDM
MEM-GMH-XIT5-0001 Rev.1
TOSHIBA
2015 Aug. 18
Preliminary waste water data from Lot1
Following preliminary waste water data are provided for response of "Clarification for All Lot" No.1 and 4, "Clarification for Lot1"
No.2 and "Clarification from Lot3" No.2
A. Drain from dain pit inside condenser pit
1. Sea water drain

3
Approx. 50m considering drain
Pit size L 3.5m x W 2.6m x H 5.5m
discharae at circulatina water pipe
Sea water drain will be pumped up to
Terminal Point N/A circulating water piping inside of
condenser oit.
Seawater is to be considered for pit coating (if required).
2. Oily drain
3
Approx. 25m considering drain
Pit size L 1.8m x W 2.6m x H 5.5m
discharQe at CCCW system draininQ.
from Lot1 to Lot 4
Terminal Point Inlet of Oil separator located
near TG Buildina
3 To complete drain discharge at CCCW
Discharge flow rate 50 m /h by 1 pump
system draininQ for approx. 6 hours.
Property
PH 8.8-9.8
Total Dissolved Solids < 15 mg/litter
Total Suspended Solids < 10 mg/litter
Oil and Grease < 10 mg/litter
Above properties are to be considered for pit coating {if required).
3. Chemical drain
3
Approx. 75m considering drain from
Pit size L 5.3m x W 2.6m x H 5.5m condensate polishing system (CPP
Area).
from Lot1 to Lot 3
Terminal Point
1m outside of TG BuildinQ
l o discharge drain tram condensate
3 polishing system (CPP Area) during

Discharge flow rate 50 m /h by 1 pump
regeneration as maximum discharge
fln\AJ
Property : Please ref
Pro erties shown o
1/ 1
Approval on PDM
PNG\tlt!OOfltarerReCv D2\al-520lffi5 2
CPP Regeneration Plant Outline for Reference
3GMH00427 Rev.1
for response to Clarification to Lot1 No.1 TOSHIBA
2015Aug.18
_1?Q_Q_O
_ ______c120DO,_,_ _
~PP(!JN> Vffi3F~f'iffiMI
~------------- ,
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 453/765

CDANo. CDA2
Item No. C-006
Item Description Site level (Ground Level)
Reference Specification ', Part B4, Section B4.3.l.3 Site Filling
Discussion/Clarification Ground Level (GIL) for Power Plant was discussed.

Conclusion The required design site level for "Power Plant Area TJB 5&6" is changed as
follow;
', Power Plant Area TJB 5&6

<Before> +3.5m above MSL
<After> GL = +3.0m ~ 3.2m above MSL
FL= +3.5m above MSL (regardless of final GL)
', In consideration of terminal point elevation among all Lots in this CDA2,
the site level is tentatively set as + 3 .2m above MSL.
For areas other than "Power Plant Area TJB 5&6", the design site level and
other conditions stipulated in Section B4.3 .1.3 shall remain unchanged.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 454/765

CDANo. CDA2
Item No. C-007
Item Description Cable entry
Reference Specification , Part BO, Section B0.13.24 Requirements for local cubicles and local
housings for e.g. switchgear, control, measurement and signalling
equipment
Discussion/Clarification RFP original requirement that "Cable entry to all outdoor located cubicles,
cabinets, panels, switchgear etc. shall be from bottom." was discussed.
1
Conclusion It was agreed that the description of 11 h paragraph in Section B0.13.24 is
revised as follow;
<Before>
Cable entry to all cubicles, cabinets, panels, etc. shall be from bottom, only.
Cable entries to cubicles, cabinets, panels, etc. from top, even if provided with
cable glands, are not acceptable.
<After>
Cable entry to all cubicles, cabinets, panels etc. shall be basically from bottom.
Cable entries to cubicles, cabinets, panels etc. from top, even if provided with
cable glands, are basically not acceptable unless otherwise agreed by SC and
the Owner.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 455/765
CDA 3 for General
Re Sign/ PDF File in
CDANo. Item Description CDA 3 Attachments TSBDoc. No. Title
V. Hard Co PJ Server
Ll-G-001 Technical CDA Documents Part A-5, Form of Deviation List
Part BO, Section B4.3. l .2, Noise emissions

Ll-G-002 Noise emissions
Part B 1, Section B 1.11, Teclmical Data Sheets
L l-G-004 Civil interface for template Part CO, Section CO-G21, Division of Works (DOW)
Ll-G-005 Grouting work Part CO, Section CO-G21, Division of Works (DOW)
Ll-G-006 The required grating and checker plate to be supplied Part CO, Section CO-Gll, Division of Works (DOW)
by Lot 4 Bidder
List of Proposed
Attachment-CDA3-L l-G-007-
Ll-G-007 List of proposed designers and manufactures Part-AS (Form for) 0l LST-GPH-XITS-0003 2 Designers and
Manufacturers
L l-G-008 Latest FG/FD Data Sheet by Lot 1 Bidder Bl.11 Technical Data Sheet 01
Ll-G-009 Witness Test and Procedure Part BO, Section BO. I O,QA/QC System
Part B4, Section B4.2.2 List of Buildings and Structures
Channel Bridge over Existing TJB 1&2 CW Outfall

Ll-G-010 Part B4, Section B4.4. l .6 Roads and Paved Area
Channel
Part C, Annex CO-G 10 Plant Access Road
Ll-G-011 Access Road repair and maintenance Part B4 Section B4.3. l.6. Roads and paved Areas
Attachment-CDA3-Ll-G-013-
Ll-G-013 The location of CPP Regeneration Plant NIA
0l
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 456/765
Category General
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-G-003
Item Description GB code
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.11.2, Standards and codes
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 457/765

Conclusion Based on Attachment No.Ll-G-003-0I prepared by Lot I for the
discussion of GB code application, the systems/components where GB
code can be applied shall be discussed and agreed with the Owner and
reflected into CDA No. I (Refer to Item NO. **** of CDA No. I).
For discussion with the Owner, Lot I shall prepare and provide sufficient
explanation of "equivalency".
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 458/765
Category General
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-G-012
Item Description Design Load (Wind)
Reference Specification Part BO Section B0.2.4.5 Wind Loads/velocities
Part BO Section B0.15.5 Design loads
Conclusion With regard to Wind load under Part.BO, Section B0.15.5 "Design loads"
ofRFP, it was agreed that the RFP conditions shall be replaced as below.
===Quote===
The wind loads and factors to be applied to the design wind velocity of
---~=~=~ for the calculation of wind pressure shall comply
with the Indonesian Standard or the latest edition of;
BS 6399 Part 2 "Wind Load"

DIN 1055 "Design Loads for Constructions"
or equivalent
===Unquote===
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 459/765
Tanjung Jati B Expansion Project - T JB5&6
CDA 3 for Mechanical
Rev Sign/ PDF File in
CDANo. Item Description CDA 3 Attachments TSBDoc.No. Title
Hard Co PJ Server
Part BO, Section B0.4.1.2, Mode of operation

Ll-M-001 Start up of Unit 5 and Unit 6
Part BO, Section B0.4.3.3, Unit start-up
L l-M-002 The calculation formula of Turbine Gross Heat Rate Part BO, Section B0.4.2.2, Definitions and conditions
Attachment-CDA3-Ll-M-003- Correction Curves for Steam

Ll-M-003 Correction curve for Lot 1 : Turbine & Generator Part BO, Section B0.4.2.2, Definitions and conditions 0l LST-GMG-XITS-0012
Turbine and Generator
Ll-M-004 Lot 1 Bidder's Technical Data Part BO, Section B0.4.3, Other guarantees and performance data
Ll-M-005 Start-up curve Part BO, Section B0.4.3.3, Unit start-up
Ll-M-006 Two English-speaking engineers Part BO, Section BO. 7.6, Training
Ll-M-007 Drawing approval by the Owner Part BO, Section B0.8.2.1, Approval by SC
Ll-M-008 Shop test and inspection schedule Part BO, Section B0.10.1, General
Ll-M-009 Testing and commissioning equipments Part BO, Section B0.10.1.1, Test instruments and equipment
L 1-M-O 10 Document submittal schedule for test certificates Part BO, Section B0.10.1.2, Test certificates
Part BO, Section B0.10.2.1, Factory acceptance test

Ll-M-011 FAT approval
requirements
Attachment-CDA3-Ll-M-012-
Ll-M-012 Non-destructive testing Part BO, Section B0.10.2.2.2,Steel castings
0l
Shop Test and Inspection

. . . . Attachment-CDA3-Ll-M-016-
Ll-M-016 Balance test for Rotors Part BO, Section B0.10.2.4.1, Balance testmg ofrotatmg umts LST-GMG-XITS-0008 0 Schedule for Steam Turbine
01
and Auxiliaries
Assemble works of Turbine with their stop ad
Ll-M-017 Part BO, Section B0.10.2.4.4,Steam turbines
governing valves
Ll-M-018 Performance test for steam turbine Part BO, Section B0.10.4.1, Performance tests
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 460/765
Hard Co PJ Server
Ll-M-019 Conditions of Reliability Run Part BO, Section B0.10.4.2,Reliability run
Ll-M-032 Thermal Insulation Part BO, Section B0.12.5, Thermal Insulation
Ll-M-033 Design Pressure of pump discharge line Part BO, Section B0.12.6, Vessel and tanks
Ll-M-034 Minimum wall thickness Part BO, Section B0.12.6, Vessel and tanks
Ll-M-036 Safety valves and pressure release valves Part BO, Section B0.12.6, Vessel and tanks
Ll-M-037 Design Pressure of pump discharge line Part BO, Section B0.12.7, Heat Exchangers
Plugged operation and overdesign for Condenser,

Ll-M-038 Part BO, Section B0.12.7, Heat Exchangers
Grand Steam Condenser, and Feed Water Heaters
2/4 Approval on PDM

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 461/765
Hard Co PJ Server
Ll-M-039 Removal end cap Part BO, Section B0.12.7, Heat Exchangers
Load test for all cranes, hoists and other lifting

Ll-M-040 Part BO, Section B0.12.9.1, General
equipments
Ll-M-041 Additional tests to be done and certified Part BO, Section B0.12.9.1, General
Ll-M-042 Micrographic examination for P92 material Part BO, Section B0.12.11.1, General
Ll-M-043 Welding qualification Part BO, Section B0.12.11.2, Welding and machining
Ll-M-044 Welding qualification Part BO, Section B0.12.11.2, Welding and machining
Ll-M-045 Duplex oil filter Part B 1, Section B 1.1.2.2, Turbine oil plant
Opening for connection of an external dehumidifier

Ll-M-047 for BFPT Part B 1, Section B 1.1.2.12, Feed water pumps
Attachment-CDA3-L l-M-048-
Ll-M-048 Critical Speeds of the turbine and generator rotor Part B 1, Section B 1.1.3.2, Steam turbine
01
Ll-M-049 Lubrication oil pipes Part B 1, Section Bl.1.3.3, Lubricating and control oil system
Ll-M-050 Oil drain points in high pressure lines Part B 1, Section Bl.1.3.3, Lubricating and control oil system
Ll-M-052 Pressure gauge down stream of each bearing orifice Part B 1, Section Bl.1.3.13.1, Measurements
Ll-M-053 Overspeed limit function Part B 1, Section B 1.1. 3 .13. 3, Turbine Governor
Ll-M-054 TRIP Items Part Bl, Section B 1.1.3.13.5, Turbine Protection
Ll-M-055 Deaerator spray nozzles and the nozzle strainers Part B 1, Section Bl.1.3.16, Feed water tanks and deaerators
Ll-M-056 The deaeration area lined with stainless steel. Part B 1, Section Bl.1.3.16, Feed water tanks and deaerators
Part B 1, Section B 1.2.2.2, Auxiliary cooling water system

Ll-M-057 ACW duplex filter
(ACW)
Ll-M-058 Fire Fighting/Fire Detection Systems Part Bl, SectionBl.5.2, Scope of Supply and Services
3/4 Approval on PDM

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 462/765
Hard Co PJ Server
Fire Fighting/Fire Detection System for Condensate
Ll-M-059 Part B 1, Section B 1.5.2, Scope of Supply and Services
and Booster Pump Area
Ll-M-060 Continuous operation period Part B 1. Section B 1.0/FG-l, Performance Guarantees
Configuration of main oil pump for Turbine Oil

Ll-M-061 Part B 1, Section B 1.1.2.2.2
Plant
Part BO, Section B0.9.1, Manufacturing and Construction

Ll-M-062 Project Schedule
Schedule
Part BO, Section B0.4.4, Description of Primary Equipment

Ll-M-063 Indonesian Grid Code
and Systems
Ll-M-065 Shop Test & Inspection Schedule PartBO, B0.10, Any other documents and information
4/4 Approval on PDM

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 463/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-M-013
Item Description Test temperature chart
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.10.2.3.1,Welding
Conclusion With respect to RFP condition of "Copies of temperature charts

referenced with load items shall be included in the test certification
supplied for the relevant items", it is agreed that such RFP condition shall
be interpreted as follows .
./ Copies of temperature charts for PWHT referenced with load items

will be included in the test certifications supplied for the relevant
items. Regarding Welding Pre-heating, the temperature charts will be
shown in relevant welding procedures with criteria, such as acceptable
temperature deviation. And the quality records will show results of
Welding Pre-heating.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 464/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-M-014
Item Description Thick of tolerance (+/-10% for 3mm nominal thickness) for Hard rubber
linings
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.10.2.3.3, Testing of corrosion protection
Conclusion With respect to the RFP conditions of "The thickness of linings shall be
measured in accordance with EN 14879 or equivalent. A tolerance of
+/-10% is permitted for rubber coatings of 3 mm nominal thickness", it is
agreed that such RFP conditions shall be changed as follows.
~ The thickness of linings shall be measured in accordance with EN

14979 or equivalent. A tolerance of+ (Manufacture standard)%
and- 0% is permitted for rubber coating of 3mm nominal thickness"
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 465/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-M-015
Item Description Test voltage to be applied to sparking test
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.10.2.3.3,Testing of corrosion protection
Conclusion With respect to the RFP condition of "The absence ofpores shall be
proved by the induction sparking test method. The potential used shall be
5000 Volts for each mm of thickness plus an additional 5000 Volts
(i.e.potential of 20,000 Volts for 3 mm thick lining)", it is agreed that such
RFP conditions shall be changed as follows according to the test voltage
recommended by The Japan Rubber Manufacturers Association.
,/ The potential used shall be 2,000 to 3,000 Volts for each mm (i.e.
potential of 6,000 to 9,000 Volts for 3mm thick lining).
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 466/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-M-020
Item Description Internal labeling
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.11.4,Plant and equipment identification
Conclusion With respect to RFP conditions of "All equipment within panels and desks
shall be individually identified by satin or mat finish stainless steel or
aluminium labels", the following points are agreed.
1. The RFP conditions shall remain unchanged.

2. In case Lot 1 need to apply the other materials, the details shall be
discussed between Lot 1 and SC for SC's approval, provided that in any
case, adhesive stickers for outdoor installation or in dusty environment
shall not alllowed.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 467/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-M-022
Item Description Grey cast iron
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.11.15,Materials
Conclusion With regard to RFP conditions of"Grey cast iron will not be accepted. If
there should be grey cast iron con-tained in a series-manufactured
small-part which is under consideration, approval ofSC is necessary", the
following points are agreed.
1. Grey cast iron for pump casings will be accepted if they are proven.
2. Gray cast iron will be used for the casing for the oil pumps for turbine
lube oil system.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 468/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-M-023
Item Description Grey Cast Iron
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.12.1.3,Material
Conclusion With regard to the RFP conditions of "Grey cast iron for pump casings will
not be accepted", it is agreed that Grey cast iron for pump casings will be
accepted if they are proven.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 469/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-M-025
Item Description The maximum flow velocities for Water lines (Feed water, cooling water,
condensate etc.)
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.12.2.1, Design criteria
Conclusion The following points are agreed.

1. The following max. velocities shall be applied instead those stipulated in
the RFP .
./ Feed water pump suction lines: 4.5 m/s
./ Feed water pump discharge lines: 8.0 m/s
./ Other pump suction lines: 2.0m/s
./ Other pump discharge lines :6.0m/s
./ Seawater lines:J4.0m/s
2. In case there are any impacts on Lot 2, 3, and 4 due to the change of
max velocity in the above. I, Lot 1 shall manage and settle the impact
with Other Lots without additional cost to SC.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 470/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-M-027
Item Description Valves
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.12.3.1, Valves
Conclusion With respect to RFP conditions of"All valves shall be positioned so as to

be readily accessible for operation and maintenance from permanent
floors, catwalks or platforms. Where required, valve spindles shall be
lengthened to have the hand-wheel at a height approximately 1 meter
above the operation level. All underground valves shall be installed in
concrete culverts", the following points are agreed.
1. RFP conditions shall be changed as follows.

"Unless otherwise agreed, all valves shall be positioned so as to be
readily accessible for operation and maintenance from permanent floors,
catwalks or platforms. Where required, valve spindles shall be
lengthened to have the hand-wheel at a height approximately 1 meter
above the operation"
2. All underground valves shall be installed in concrete culvers.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 471/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-M-028
Item Description Welder's qualification
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.12.4.2, Welders qualification
Conclusion With respect to RFP condition of "The first 2 production welds of each
welder shall be examined 100% by volumetric NDE and only if the results
are acceptable, will the welder shall be released for production welding",
it is agreed that the RFP conditions shall be changed as follows;
'1" The first 2 maior site welds of the welders who will be in charge
of maior welds at the Site shall be examined 100% by volumetric
NDE and only if the results are acceptable, will the welder shall be
released for production welding at the site.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 472/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-M-029
Item Description Welders qualification
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.12.4.2, Welders qualification
Conclusion With regard to the RFP conditions of "Each welder/operator shall

permanently mark the welds he performed with the identification mark
assigned. Low stress stamps shall be used except for materials with wall
thickness below 5mm, where an alternative method for permanent marking
may be used (engraving, paint or computerised system)", it is agreed that
the RFP conditions shall be changed as follows.
~ In place of welder's identification mark on weld, the assigned

welders on welding record shall be provided by Lot 1.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 473/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-M-030
Item Description Welding procedures
Conclusion With regard to the RFP condition of "WPS shall be prepared in accordance
with EN 15609 or equivalent and submitted to SC for approval for pressure
parts and attachments to it, the following points are agreed.
1. ASME standard cab be applied to the preparation of welding procedure

specifications ("WPS"),
2. Welding procedure for (a) pressure parts as defined in "ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code" and (b) alloy steel to be welded at the Site
shall be subject to SC's approvaL
3. Welding procedure for nun pressure parts shall be submitted by Lot 1
for reference (i.e. not for SC's approval)
4. The above 1~3 shall be subject to Owner's approval and shall be
discussed and finalized with the Owner (Owner's Engineer) and be
reflected in CDA No. I ( Refer to Item No. ***** of CDA No. I).
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 474/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-M-031
Item Description Welding procedure
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 475/765

Conclusion With regard to the RFP condition of "No welding shall be undertaken until
the applicable WPS and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) are
approved by SC", the following points are agreed.
1. No welding shall be undertaken until the applicable WPS and PQR are
approved by SC for (a) the pressure parts as defined in "ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code" and (b) alloy steel to be welded at the site.
2 Above 1 is subject to the discussion with the Owner and Owner's
Engineer and to be reflected into CDA No. I (Refer to Item No. **** of
CDANo.1)
3. As for the steam turbine including MSV/CV, CRV and OLV, WPS will
not be prepared since those are not pressure parts according to relevant
ASMEcode.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 476/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-M-035
Item Description Tanks/vessels to be replaceable
Reference Specification Part BO, Section BO. 12. 6, Vessel and tanks
Conclusion With regard to the RFP conditions of "all tanks/vessel internals must be
replaceable through the manhole unless approved by SC. For insulated
tanks/vessels, provision shall be made for fixing and supporting the
insulation", the following points are agreed.
1. RFP conditions shall remain unchanged.

2. During the detail engineering stage, Lot 1 and SC shall discuss and
identify the specific internal equipments where such RFP conditions
should not be applied (such as piping installed inside the turbine lube oil
tank) for SC's approval.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 477/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-M-046
Item Description Condensate Polishing Plant
Reference Specification Part B 1, Section B 1.1.2. 6, Condensate polishing plant
Conclusion The RFP conditions shall be changed as follows;
1. "Two (2) 100% star-up cartridge filter start-up cartridge filters for
condensate polishing, complete with by-pass, associated piping,
pneumatically operated valves, differential pressure gauge with
adjustable high alarm and cartridges" shall be omitted.
2. Cation exchanger shall be omitted and 2 x 50% of mixed bed ion

exchangers shall be provided instead.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 478/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-M-51
Item Description Condensate Polishing Plant
Reference Specification Part B 1, Section B 1.1. 3. 11, Condensate polishing plant
Conclusion With respect to the RFP conditions of" The condensate polishing plant
shall include, but limited to start-up cartridge filters, cartridge filters,
cation exchanger, mixed bed ion exchanger, all auxiliaries required for
regeneration and operation. The start-up cartridge jilter and the cartridge
jilter shall be able to be operated alternately. The cation exchanger shall
be upstream of the mixed bed ion exchanger and both shall be equipped
with full bypass facilities", it is agreed that the RFP conditions shall be
changed as follows.
1 The "start-up cartridge filter" is not required and to be omitted.

2 Cation exchanger" is not be required and "mixed bed ion exchanger"
shall be provided instead.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 479/765
Category Mechanical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-M-064
Item Description Configuration of Condensate Polishing Plant
Reference Specification Part Bl, Section Bl.1/FD-22,
Description of Primary Equipment and Systems
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 480/765

Conclusion Based on Attachment-CDA3-Ll-M007-01, Lot 1's proposed alternative
configuration of CPP (incl. Regeneration Facility) shall be discussed and
agreed with the Owner (incl. Owner's engineer) and reflected into CDA
No. I. (Refer to Item No.*** of CDA No. I).
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 481/765
CDA 3 for Electrical
Sign/ PDF File in
CDANo. Item Description CDA 3 Attachments TSB Doc. No. Rev. Title
Hard Co PJ Server
Ll-E-001 Power Factor at BMCR Part BO, Section B0.4.1.1, Load cases
Ll-E-002 Grid Frequency variation Part BO, Section B0.4.4.1, Grid frequency variations
1) Rated voltage of Generator

2) On/Off load tap changer for Generator Transformer Part BO, Section B0.4.4.3, Grid voltage variation
Ll-E-003 and Unit Auxiliary
Transformer
Part Bl, Section Bl.7.3.11 Generator Transformer
Sudden short circuit test at reduced voltage (30%,

Ll-E-005 Part BO, Section BO. I 0.2. 5, Electrical equipment
50% and 70% of rated voltage)
Part BO Section B0.10.2.5, Electrical equipment

Ll-E-006 Open-circuit heat run test at 105% at rated voltage
Type Tests on assembled Generator
Attachment-CDA3-Ll-E-007-
Ll-E-007 Test for Generator Part BO, Section BO. I 0.2. 5, Electrical equipment
0l
Ll-E-008 Applicable codes for stationary lead-acid batteries Part BO, Section BO. I 0.2.5, Electrical equipment
Ll-E-009 Rated voltage of Generator Part BO, Section B0.13.1, Voltage levels
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 482/765
Ll-E-019 Rated voltage of generator Part Bl, Section Bl.1.3.12.1, Generator
Ll-E-020 Part Bl, Section Bl.1.3.12.1, Generator Part Bl, Section Bl.1.3.12.1, Generator
Ll-E-021 Internal gas pressure for stator casing Part Bl, Section Bl.1.3.12.1, Generator
Attachment-CDA3-L l-E-022-
Ll-E-022 Earthing Brush Part Bl.l, Section Bl.1.3.12.1, Generator
01
Ll-E-023 Insulation check Part Bl, Section Bl.1.3.12.1, Generator
Ll-E-024 Bearing temperature monitoring and alarming Part Bl, Section Bl.1.3.12.1, Generator
Ll-E-025 The elements/couplers for the partial discharge test Part Bl, Section Bl.1.3.12.1, Generator
Ll-E-026 Type of excitation system Part Bl, Section Bl.1.3.12.2, Excitation system
Ll-E-027 Excitation system Part Bl, Section Bl.1.3.12.2, Excitation system
Ll-E-028 Local control of the excitation system Part Bl, Section Bl.1.3.12.2, Excitation system
Ll-E-029 Droop compensation Part Bl, Section Bl.1.3.12.2, Excitation system
Ll-E-030 Grinder Part Bl, Section Bl.1.3.12.2, Excitation system
Part Bl, Section Bl.1.3.12.5,

Ll-E-031 Anti condensation heaters or pressuring systems
Generator main connections and circuit breaker
Part Bl, Section Bl.1.3.12.5,

Ll-E-032 Generator line side cubicle
Generator main connections and circuit breaker
The redundancy for the protection relay of Part Bl, Section Bl.1.3.12.6,
Ll-E-033
Transformes Generator unit protection, synchronizing, measuring
Ll-E-034 The capacity of cylinder Part Bl, Section Bl.3.2.2,Carbon Dioxide Supply System
2/4 Approval on PDM

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 483/765
CDANo. Item Description CDA 3 Attachments TSBDoc.No. Rev. Title
Attachment-CDA3-L l-E-035- Hydrogen Generation
Part Bl, Section Bl.4.2, Scope of Supply and services 3GEH00780 0
01 System Diagram
SYS lEM lJESlGN
DESCRIPTION
Attachment-CDA3-L l-E-035- DSC-GEH-XITS-
Ll-E-035 Hydrogen generation system Part Bl, Section Bl.4.3, Special technical requirements 1 OF HYDROGEN
02 0003
GENERATION
SYSTPM
Attachment-CDA3-L l-E-035-
Part Bl, Section Bl.11, Technical Data Sheets
03
Ll-E-036 Type of Dryer Part Bl, Section Bl.4.3, Special technical requirements
Ll-E-037 The Location of Hydrogen Compressor and its motor Part Bl, Section Bl.4.3, Special technical requirements
Ll-E-038 Automatic duty /standby operation Part Bl, Section Bl.4.3, Special technical requirements
Ll-E-039 Valve location Part Bl, Section Bl.4.3, Special technical requirements
Ll-E-040 Air pressurized tank Part Bl, Section Bl.5.2, Scope of Supply and Services
Ll-E-041 CO2 flooding system Part Bl, Section Bl.5.2, Scope of Supply and Services
Ll-E-042 Type of battery Part Bl, Section Bl.7.1.4, Basic electrical design criteria
Ll-E-043 1Ok V feeders Part Bl, Section Bl.7.2.2, Main scope of supply and services
Ll-E-044 The capacity of Generator Transformer Part Bl, Section Bl.7.3.1.1, Generator transformer
Ll-E-045 BIL of Generator Transformer Part Bl, Section Bl.7.3.1.1, Generator transformer
The elements/couplers to enable a Partial Discharge

Ll-E-046 Part Bl, Section Bl.7.3.1.1, Generator transformer
test
Ll-E-047 The capacity of Unit Auxiliary Transformer Part Bl, Section Bl.7.3.1.2, Unit auxiliary transformer
Ll-E-048 Station service transforers Part B 1, Section BI. 7.3 .1.3, Station service transformers
Ll-E-049 Earhing swithch Part Bl, SectionBl.7.3.2.1, General
Ll-E-050 Switchgear components Part Bl, Section Bl.7.3.2.2, Switchgear components
3/4 Approval on PDM

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 484/765
CDANo. Item Description CDA 3 Attachments TSBDoc.No. Rev. Title
Ll-E-051 Low voltage switchgear Part Bl, SectionBl.7.3.3.1, General
Ll-E-052 The capacity of battery charger Part Bl, SectionBl.7.3.4.1, General
Ll-E-053 Domestic power outlets Part Bl, Section Bl.7.3.6.1, Lighting system

Rated generator output
Ll-E-054 Section B 1.1: Steam turbine generator plant
Rated voltage at generator terminals
l(Bl.1./FB Performance and Desi!m Criteria)
Changes of the conditions in B 1. 7/FB Performance
Ll-E-055 Section Bl.7: Electrical system
and Design criteria
. B 1. 7/FB Performance and Desi!m criteria
Ll-E-056 Test voltage for 0.4kV Switchgear Part Bl, Section Bl.7/FB-4, Technical Data Sheet
OUTLINE OF UNIT
Attachment-CDA3-Ll-E-057-
Ll-E-057 Dimensional drawing of Unit Auxiliary Transformer Part BO, Section B0.9.1.3, Drawings 3GEH00810 0 AUXILIARY
01
TRANSFORMER
Attachment-CDA3-L l-E-058- Key One Line
Ll-E-058 Single Line Diagram for Generator Main Circuit Part Bl, Section Bl, Annex C-E02, Drawings OGEH00048 2
01 Diagram
!ZUUTlNE TESl
Attachment-CDA3-L l-E-059- Ref. No. KG1-Tl3- PROCEDURE FOR
Ll-E-059 Detailed specification of tests for 500k V Substation Part BO, Section BO. I 0, Drawings
01 298 525kV GIS
lmlirTnRV TP'-!T,
4/4 Approval on PDM

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 485/765
Category Electrical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-E-004
Item Description Protection for minimum 10 years storage
Reference Specification Part BO., Section B0.7.7, Spare parts, tools, appliances and consumables
Conclusion The following points are agreed:

1. Original RFP conditions of Section BO. 7. 7 of "the protection shall be
sufficient for a minimum of 10 years storage in dry weatherproof'
shall remain unchanged.
2. In case there are the items which have storage life time cycle of less
than 10 years for electrical/electronic spares, Lot 1 will submit the list
of such items for SC/Owner's approval in the execution stage.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 486/765
Category Electrical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-E-010
Item Description LV system
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.13.4,
Protective measures for installations up to 1000 V
Conclusion It is agreed that the RFP requirements of"IT-type" shall be changed to

"TN-S" type. In this regards, RFP condition ofB.0.13.4 Low Voltage Net
Work shall be revised as follows.
===Quote===
B.0.13.4 Low Voltage Network
L V network for power supply of consumers shall be or,+-+~ _ _ _ _ ,
i.e. the L V neutral of the transformer shall
therefore aerra1flfeffi:ic-st:1r winding transformer shall be used for L V power
supply. ~~~.!..!!.!~~~~~~~~!.!!!!~~~:!..L-~~~- +He-!~
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 487/765
===Unquote===
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 488/765
Category Electrical 1
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-E-011
Item Description Applicable standards for medium and low voltage motors
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.13.8.1, General
Conclusion The following points are agreed:

1. RFP conditions shall remain unchanged;
2. In case JEC 2137 and/or JIS 4034 need to be applied to some parts of
Lot 1 scope of works in addition to IEC 60034, Lot 1 will consult with
SC for SC's approval;
3. In case of the application of JEC 2137 and/or JIS 4034 based on the
above 2, its official English version shall be provided by Lot 1.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 489/765
Category Electrical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-E-012
Item Description The conditions of Class B temperature rise
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.13.9.1, Ratings
Conclusion It is agreed that Class B temperature rise for Lot 1 scope of works shall be
assured only at the rated condition of power, voltage and frequency.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 490/765
Category Electrical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-E-013
Item Description Class B temperature rise
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.13.10.1, Ratings
Conclusion It is agreed that class B temperature rise for Lot 1 scope of works shall be
assured only at the rated condition of power, voltage and frequency.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 491/765
Category Electrical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-E-015
Item Description Terminal Arrangement
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.13.12, Terminal arrangement
Conclusion It is agreed that the power terminal of the stud type or lugged wire type
will be applied for L V motors under Lot 1 scope of works, which is Lot 1's
well proven standard.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 492/765
Category Electrical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-E-016
Item Description EMC measures
Reference Specification Part BO, Section B0.13.23, EMC measures
Conclusion The following points are agreed for Lot 1 scope of works:
1. Lot 1 shall comply with the following standards for EMC measures:
· IEC 61000-6-2 EMC Part 6-2 regarding immunity;
· IEC 61000-6-4 EMC Part 6-4 regarding emission;
· IEC 60364 series regarding earthing.
2. In case Lot 1 needs to apply the code other than aforementioned
standards, Lot 1 shall consult with SC for SC approval by explaining
the equivalency.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 493/765
Category Electrical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-E-017
Item Description Incoming and outgoing cables to be fixed by suitable metallic cable glands
Requirements for local cubicles and local housings for e.g.
1. As for the indoor floor mounted panels with fire seal at the floor entry,
the cable grounds is not mandatory conditions, provided that cable
support shall be installed just before floor entry to hold the cable
property since it is required to have access from bottom as well as
from top (through the panel cubicle); and,
2. As for all other panels, the RFP requirements shall remain unchanged.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 494/765
Category Electrical
CDANo. CDA3
Item No. Ll-E-018
Item Description Cable entry from the bottom
Requirements for local cubicles and local housings for e.g.
1. RFP conditions shall remain unchanged; and,
2. In case that the cable entry from cubicle top is unavoidable as some
special case, Lot 1 shall consult with SC for its approval.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 495/765
Customer Specification Extract
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 496/765
Table of Contents
Part - BO General Technical Specification
Part - 81 Technical Specification of Turbine & Generator and Associated
Systems
Part - 82 Technical Specification of Boiler and Associated Systems
Part - 83 Technical Specification of Balance of Plant
Part - 84 Technical Specification of Civil Works
Part - C Annexes
Table of Contents AO - 1
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 497/765
Tanjung Jati B Re-Expansion Project - T JB 5&6
TJB 5&6
Part BO - General Technical Specification
BO - General Technical Specification

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 498/765
Table of Contents
Part BO General Technical Specification
Table of Contents
80.1. General project conditions and background 2

BO.I.I Background of the Project 3
B0.1.2 TJB Existing 4 Units 3
B0.1.3 TJB 5&6 4
80.2. Site conditions 6
B0.2.1 Location and accessibility 6

B0.2.2 Site conditions 6
B0.2.3 Seismic zone 7
B0.2.4 Climatic conditions 7
B0.2.4.1 Ambient temperatures 7
B0.2.4.2 Relative humidity 7
B0.2.4.3 Air pressure 7
B0.2.4.4 Rainfall 7
B0.2.4.5 Wind loads / velocities 7
B0.2.5 Marine conditions 8
B0.2.5.1 Seawater temperature 8
B0.2.5.2 Seawater data 8
B0.2.5.3 Tide levels 8
80.3. Plant configuration and general layout 10

B0.3.1 Existing installations 10
B0.3.2 Plant configuration 10
B0.3.3 Layout 10
80.4. Basic design requirements 13

B0.4.1 Overall plant performance 13
B0.4.1.1 Load cases 13
B0.4.1.2 Mode of operation 14
B0.4.1.3 Facility load following capability 15
B0.4.1.4 Fuel 15
B0.4.2 Heat rate and power output guarantee 15
BO - General Technical Specification BO - I

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 499/765
B0.4.2.1 General 15
B0.4.2.2 Definitions and conditions 16
B0.4.3 Other guarantees and performance data 19
B0.4.3.1 Emissions 19
B0.4.3.1.1 Air emissions 19
B0.4.3.1.2 Noise emissions 19
B0.4.3.2 Effluent discharge 20
B0.4.3.3 Unit start-up 20
B0.4.3.4 Ramping rates 21
B0.4.4 Electrical network connection 21
B0.4.4.1 Grid frequency variations 21
B0.4.4.2 Reactive power 22
B0.4.4.3 Grid voltage variation 22
B0.4.5 Performance standards and operating guidelines 22
B0.4.5.1 Voltage and reactive power control 22
B0.4.5.2 Speed governor 22
B0.4.5.3 Protection system of the facility 23
B0.4.5.4 Disturbance recorders 23
80.5. Time schedule 26

B0.5.1 Overall time schedule 26
B0.5.2 Time Schedule to be prepared by each Lot Bidder 26
B0.5.3 Coordination and adjustment of time schedule after Bid
submission 27
80.6. Scope of supplies and services 29

B0.6.1 Division of work and limits of supply 29
B0.6.2 Interface handling and coordination 30
B0.6.2.1 Interface handling during design 31
B0.6.2.2 Interface handling during erection 31
B0.6.3 Interface handling during commissioning and testing 31
B0.6.4 Options 31
BO. 7. General supplies and services 33

B0.7.1 General 33
B0.7.2 Engineering services 34
B0.7.2.1 Permit engineering 34
B0.7.2.2 Basic and detail engineering 34
BO - General Technical Specification BO - II

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 500/765
B0.7.3 Common equipment and services 34

B0.7.3.1.1 General 34
B0.7.3.1.2 Mechanical 35
B0.7.3.1.3 Electrical, instrumentation and control 36
B0.7.3.1.4 Civil 37
B0.7.4 Packaging and transportation 38
B0.7.5 Erection, commissioning and testing 38
B0.7.6 Training 39
B0.7.7 Spare parts, tools, appliances and consumables 39
B0.7.8 Population of CMMS 41
80.8. Supervision and approval of design and supplies 44

B0.8.1 General 44
BO. 8 .2 Approval of design 44
B0.8.2.1 Approval by SC 44
B0.8.2.2 Approval by suppliers of other Lots 46
B0.8.3 Workshop inspections 46
B0.8.4 Approval of site work 46
B0.8.5 Approval of documentation and O&M manuals 46
80.9. Data and documents to be provided 48

B0.9.1 Data and documents to be provided with bid 48
B0.9.1.1 General 48
B0.9.1.2 Mechanical 49
B0.9.1.3 Electrical 49
B0.9.1.4 500 kV substation 50
B0.9.1.5 Switchgear type 50
B0.9.1.6 I&C 50
B0.9.2 Data and documents to be provided after award of contract 50
B0.9.2.1 Electronic formats 52
B0.9.2.2 Drawing numbering system 52
B0.9.2.3 Drawing border and title block 52
80.10. Detailed inspection and test requirements 54

BO.IO.I General 54
BO.IO.I.I Test instruments and equipment 56
B0.10.1.2 Test certificates 56
B0.10.1.3 Punch item definition 56
BO - General Technical Specification BO - Ill

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 501/765
B0.10.2 Testing during manufacturing 56

B0.10.2.1 Factory acceptance test requirements 56
B0.10.2.2 Material tests 57
B0.10.2.2.1 Steel forgings 57
BO. I 0.2.2.2 Steel castings 58
BO. I 0.2.2.3 Steel plates and sections 59
BO. I 0.2.2.4 Reinforced thermosetting resin pipes 60
B0.10.2.2.5 Thermal insulating materials 61
B0.10.2.3 Manufacturing tests 61
B0.10.2.3.1 Welding 61
B0.10.2.3.2 Pressure testing 66
B0.10.2.3.3 Testing of corrosion protection 67
B0.10.2.4 Mechanical equipment 68
BO. I 0.2.4.1 Balance testing of rotating units 68
BO. I 0.2.4.2 Vibration testing of rotating units 68
BO. I 0.2.4.3 Pumps 68
BO. I 0.2.4.4 Steam turbines 68
B0.10.2.4.5 Air compressors 69
B0.10.2.4.6 Cranes and hoists 69
B0.10.2.5 Electrical equipment 69
B0.10.2.6 Control and monitoring equipment 75
B0.10.3 Testing at Site 77
B0.10.3.1 Civil construction tests 77
B0.10.3.2 Erection Test/ Construction completion tests 78
B0.10.3.3 Pre-commissioning tests 79
B0.10.3.4 Commissioning tests 80
B0.10.3.5 Optimization of overall plant operation 82
B0.10.3.5.1 Predicted performance tests 82
B0.10.3.5.2 Benchmark testing 84
B0.10.4 Completion tests 84
B0.10.4.1 Performance tests 84
B0.10.4.2 Reliability run 87
B0.10.4.3 Station criteria tests 88
80.11. General Technical Requirements 90

BO.I I. I General requirements 90
B0.11.2 Standards and codes 91
BO - General Technical Specification BO- IV

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 502/765
B0.11.3 Standardisation 92
B0.11.4 Plant and equipment identification 92
BO .11. 5 Marking and labeling 94
BO .11. 6 Corrosion protection, coating and galvanizing 94
B0.11.6.1 General 94
B0.11.6.2 Surface preparation and cleaning of surfaces in the shop 95
B0.11.6.3 Cleaning to be performed on site 96
B0.11.6.4 Cleaning of prime and intermediate coats 96
B0.11.6.5 Application procedure for coating 96
B0.11.6.6 Galvanizing 98
BO. I 1. 7 Vibration 102
B0.11.7.1 Steam turbine generator 102
B0.11.7.2 Other rotating equipment 102
B0.11.8 Standardization of makes 103
B0.11.9 Accessibility 103
BO.I I. IO Signs 103
B0.11.11 Units of measurement 105
B0.11.12 Ways, stairs, ladders, balustrades 106
B0.11.13 Hazardous areas, fire protection provisions 108
B0.11.13.1 Hazardous areas 108
B0.11.14 Maintenance isolation 109
BO .11.15 Materials 110
B0.11.16 Pre-service cleaning and protection of plant equipment 111
B0.11.16.1 Cleaning/ steam blowing of pressurized equipment 112
B0.11.17 Quality Assurance and quality control (QA/QC) 113
B0.11.1 7.1 QA/QC during design 113
B0.11.17 .2 QA/QC during construction and erection 114
B0.11.17 .3 QA/QC relating to inspection and testing 114
BO .11.18 Method statement and risk assessment for the execution of works 115
BO .11.19 SHEW requirements 115
B0.11.19.1 General SHEW targets and objectives 115
BO .11.19 .2 Environmental Management Plan 118
B0.11.19.3 SC's Monitoring 119
80.12. General Mechanical Requirements 121

B0.12.1 Pumps 121
B0.12.1.1 General 121
BO - General Technical Specification 80-V

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 503/765
B0.12.1.2 General design and construction 121

B0.12.1.3 Material 122
B0.12.1.4 Bearings 123
B0.12.1.5 Pumps characteristics 123
B0.12.1.6 Fittings 124
B0.12.1.7 Suction strainers 124
B0.12.2 Piping and accessories 125
B0.12.2.1 Design criteria 125
B0.12.2.1.1 Guidelines for the design and construction of pipework
and accessories 127
B0.12.2.2 Noise abatement measures 129
B0.12.2.3 Pipe supporting elements 129
B0.12.2.4 Protection of buried pipework systems 130
B0.12.3 Valves, steam traps, condensate drainers, safety valves 130
B0.12.3.1 Valves 130
B0.12.3.2 Steam traps and condensate drainers 134
B0.12.4 Welding 134
B0.12.4.1 Quality control 134
B0.12.4.2 Welders qualification 134
B0.12.4.3 Welding procedures 135
B0.12.5 Thermal Insulation 137
B0.12.6 Vessel and tanks 140
B0.12.7 Heat Exchangers 142
B0.12.8 Fire fighting and protection system 144
B0.12.8.1 General 144
B0.12.8.2 Fire fighting equipment 145
B0.12.8.3 Smoke and heat removal systems 149
B0.12.8.4 Fire detection and alarm Systems 150
B0.12.8.4.1 General 150
B0.12.8.4.2 Fire alarm station 151
B0.12.8.4.3 Fire alarm central station 152
B0.12.8.4.4 Layout display board 152
B0.12.8.4.5 Display board at gate house 152
B0.12.8.4.6 Detection systems 152
B0.12.9 Cranes, hoists and elevators 153
B0.12.9.1 General 153
B0.12.9.2 Cranes 154
BO - General Technical Specification BO-VI
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 504/765
B0.12.9.3 Hoists 155

B0.12.9.4 Elevators 156
B0.12.10 Compressed air system 158
B0.12.11 High temperature austenitic and ferritic/ martensitic steels 159
B0.12.11.1 General 159
B0.12.11.2 Welding and machining 160
80.13. General Electrical Requirements 165

B0.13.1 Voltage levels 165
B0.13.2 Installation conditions and protection class for electrical
operational equipment and control and monitoring equipment 165
B0.13.3 Protective measures, earthing and lightning protection 166
BO .13. 4 Protective measures for installations up to 1000 V 167
BO .13. 5 Protective measures for installations over 1000 V 168
BO .13. 6 Earthing and lightning protection 168
B0.13.6.1 Earthing and potential equalization system 168
B0.13.7 Lightning protection 171
B0.13.8 Technical conditions for motors 172
B0.13.8.1 General 172
B0.13.9 Medium voltage motors 173
B0.13.9.1 Ratings 173
B0.13.9.2 Starting 173
B0.13.9.3 Insulation Class and Temperature Rise 173
B0.13.9.4 Enclosure Type 173
B0.13.9.5 Connections, star-point terminal boxes etc. 173
B0.13.9.6 Bearings 174
B0.13.10 Low voltage motors 175
B0.13.10.1 Ratings 175
B0.13.10.2 Starting 175
B0.13.10.3 Insulation class and temperature rise 175
B0.13.10.4 Enclosure type 175
B0.13.11 Bearings 176
B0.13.12 Terminal arrangement 176
B0.13.13 Actuator drives 176
B0.13.14 Frequency converters 176
B0.13.15 Cable and cable trays 180
B0.13.15.1 Cable laying and routing requirements 180
BO - General Technical Specification BO-VII
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 505/765
BO .13 .16 General Cable construction requirements 181

B0.13.17 Medium voltage (MV) power cables 181
BO .13 .18 Low voltage (L V) power cables 182
BO .13 .19 Current carrying capacity of power cables 182
BO .13 .20 Measuring and control cables above 60 V/ instrument transformer
cables 182
B0.13.21 Measuring and control cables below 60 V 182
BO .13 .22 Cable supporting structures 183
B0.13.23 EMC measures 184
switchgear, control, measurement and signaling equipment 185
B0.13.25 Local control points and level control cabinets 186
B0.13.25.1 General 186
B0.13.26 Construction requirements 186
B0.13.27 Local control points 187
B0.13.28 Level controls 187
BO .13 .29 Terminal boxes and terminal cabinets 187
80.14. General Instrumentation and Control Requirements 190

B0.14.1 Main design criteria 190
B0.14.2 Transmitters 191
B0.14.3 Binary sensors 191
B0.14.4 Temperature measurements 192
B0.14.5 Pressure measurements 193
B0.14.6 Flow measurements 194
B0.14.7 Level measurements 195
B0.14.8 Vibration measurements 196
B0.14.9 Analyses 196
B0.14.10 Electrical value measurements 197
B0.14.11 Control valves 198
B0.14.12 Actuators 199
B0.14.13 Indicators 200
B0.14.14 Programmable logic controller 200
B0.14.15 Power supply and fusing 201
B0.14.16 Cubicles, panels, control desks 202
B0.14.17 Racks and junction boxes 203
B0.14.18 Erection works 203
BO - General Technical Specification BO-VIII
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 506/765
80.15. General Civil Requirements 206

BO .15 .1 General 206
BO .15 .2 Purpose 206
B0.15.3 Lines and grades 207
BO .15 .4 Codes and standards 207
B0.15.5 Design loads 207
B0.15.6 Grounding/ earthing and lightning protection 211
B0.15.7 Foundation design 212
B0.15.8 Piled foundations 212
B0.15.9 Direct foundations 213
BO .15 .10 Special foundation design criteria 213
BO .15 .11 Foundation material design characteristics 214
B0.15 .12 Earthworks 214
B0.15.12.1 General 214
B0.15.12.2 Fill materials 214
B0.15.12.3 Execution 215
B0.15.12.4 Safety precautions 216
B0.15.12.5 Over excavation 216
B0.15.12.6 Stockpiles and disposal 216
B0.15.12.7 Preparation of foundations 216
B0.15.12.8 Backfilling 217
B0.15.12.9 Soil replacement 217
B0.15.12.10 Groynes, existing pipework etc. 218
B0.15.12.11 Pipe bed preparation 218
B0.15.12.12 Blasting 218
B0.15.12.13 Protection of existing utilities and services 219
B0.15.12.14 Dust control 219
BO .15 .13 Testing and control of earthworks 219
B0.15.13.1 General 219
B0.15.13.2 Testing of select fill 220
B0.15.13.3 Testing of ordinary fill 220
B0.15.14 Landscaping 221
B0.15.15 Foundations 221
B0.15.15.1 General 221
B0.15.15.2 Dewatering 222
B0.15.15.3 Waterproofing 222
BO - General Technical Specification BO- IX

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 507/765
B0.15 .15 .4 Pitwall stability 222

B0.15.15.5 Settlement and expansionjoints 222
BO .15 .16 Foundation material design characteristics 223
B0.15.16.1 Foundations at different depths 223
B0.15.16.2 Settlement observation 223
B0.15 .16.3 Safety against uplift 223
B0.15 .16.4 Shallow foundations 223
BO .15 .16. 5 Replacement 223
B0.15 .16.6 Piling Works 224
B0.15 .16. 7 Applicable standards and recommendations 224
B0.15.16.8 Soils characteristics 224
B0.15 .16.9 Piles characteristics and design criteria 225
B0.15.16.10 Scope of work for piling 225
B0.15 .16.11 Documents 225
BO .15 .1 7 Measurements 226
B0.15.17.1 Pile measurements 226
B0.15.17.2 Materials 226
B0.15.17.3 Qualification 226
B0.15.17.4 Program 226
B0.15.17.5 Staking out tolerances 227
B0.15.17.6 Cut-off 227
B0.15.17.7 Working platform 227
B0.15.17.8 Rejection 227
B0.15.18 Bored cast-in-situ piles 228
B0.15 .18.1 Drilling 228
B0.15 .18.2 Anchorage in the rock 228
BO .15 .19 Driven piles 228
B0.15.19.1 Equipment 228
B0.15.19.2 Damages to neighboring piles during driving 229
B0.15.19.3 Driving procedure 229
B0.15.19.4 Concreting- cast in situ piles 229
B0.15.19.5 Steel reinforcement for piles 230
B0.15.20 Concrete for piles 231
B0.15.20.1 Composition 231
B0.15.20.2 Concreting 231
B0.15.20.3 Concrete control 232
BO - General Technical Specification 80-X

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 508/765
B0.15.20.4 Piling records 232

B0.15.20.5 Test piles/ static loading tests 233
B0.15.20.6 Sheet Piling 234
B0.15 .20.6.1 Work included 234
B0.15.20.6.2 General requirements 234
B0.15.20.6.3 Execution 234
B0.15.20.6.4 Coating 235
B0.15.21 Special Requirements for Off-Shore Works 235
B0.15 .21.1 Rock material 235
B0.15 .21.1.1 General requirements 235
B0.15 .21.1.2 Special requirements 236
B0.15 .21.1.3 Placing of rock and armor material 236
B0.15.22 Synthetic filter fabrics 236
B0.15 .22.1 Description 236
B0.15 .22.2 Work included 236
B0.15 .22.3 General requirements 237
B0.15.22.4 Testing frequency 237
B0.15.22.5 Jointing of filter fabrics 238
B0.15.22.6 Placing of filter fabrics 238
B0.15 .22. 7 Placing of armor blocks 238
B0.15.22.8 Execution of the dredging and/or excavation works 239
B0.15.22.9 Execution ofre-filling 239
B0.15.23 Structural concrete works 240
B0.15.23.1 General 240
B0.15.23.2 Cement 240
B0.15.23.3 Aggregate 241
B0.15.23.4 Water for mixing 241
B0.15.23.5 Admixtures and special cements 241
B0.15.23.6 Batching and mixing 241
B0.15.23.7 Reinforcement 241
B0.15.24 Structural steel works 242
B0.15 .24.1 General 242
B0.15.24.2 Steel Sections and plates 242
B0.15.24.3 Steel quality 242
B0.15 .24.4 Connections 242
B0.15.24.5 Corrosion protection 242
BO - General Technical Specification BO-XI

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 509/765
B0.15.24.6 Erection requirements 244

B0.15.24.7 Painting works 244
B0.15.25 Metal siding and roofing 244
B0.15.25.1 Metal cladding 244
B0.15.25.2 Requirements for walls and roofs 246
BO .15 .26 Architectural requirements 246
B0.15.26.1 General 246
B0.15 .26.2 Principal functional requirements 247
B0.15 .26.3 Equipment space and access requirements 247
B0.15.26.4 Construction principles 247
B0.15.26.5 Colour concept 247
B0.15.27 Roads and surfacing 248
B0.15.27.1 General 248
B0.15.27.2 Compaction of sub-grade 248
B0.15.27.3 Tests for sub-grade 249
B0.15.27.4 Sub-base 249
B0.15.27.5 Wet mix road base 250
B0.15.27.6 Chlorides and sulphates 251
BO .15 .2 7. 7 Placing of road base 251
B0.15.27.8 Hard shoulders 252
B0.15.27.9 Tests on sub-base and road base 252
B0.15.27.10 Frequency of testing 253
B0.15.27.11 Bitumen macadam 253
B0.15.27.12 Design of bitumen macadam 255
BO .15 .2 7.13 Mixing and laying 256
BO .15 .2 7.14 Testing of bitumen macadam 259
B0.15.27.15 Final surfacing 260
B0.15.27.16 Jointing new to existing pavement 260
B0.15.27.17 Overlays 260
B0.15 .2 7.18 Interlocking paving blocks 261
B0.15.27.19 Site surfacing 261
B0.15.27.20 Sampling and testing of materials used in the construction
of roads 262
B0.15.27.21 Kerbs 262
B0.15.27.22 Traffic signs 263
B0.15.27.23 Carriageway markings 263
B0.15.27.24 Guard rails 264
BO - General Technical Specification BO-XII

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 510/765
B0.15.27.25 Concrete paving slabs 264

B0.15.27.26 Temporary traffic signs and carriageway markings 264
B0.15.28 Water supply system 265
B0.15.28.1 Design criteria 265
B0.15.28.2 Scope of works 265
B0.15 .28.3 Quality assurance 265
B0.15 .28.4 Applicable codes and standards 265
B0.15.28.5 Pipe work and fittings 267
B0.15.28.6 Plumbing fixtures 273
B0.15 .28. 7 General specification plumbing 274
B0.15.28.8 Quality of fixtures 275
B0.15 .28.9 Quality of fittings 275
B0.15 .28.10 Installation 275
B0.15.28.11 Storage 275
B0.15.29 Cooling water system piping 275
B0.15.29.1 General 275
B0.15.29.2 Seawater intake and return pipes 276
B0.15.29.3 Standards 276
B0.15.29.4 Design requirements 276
B0.15.30 Drainage systems 281
B0.15.30.1 General 281
B0.15.30.2 Design features 281
B0.15.31 Materials 281
B0.15 .31.1 Quality and standards 281
B0.15 .31.2 Vitrified clay pipes 282
B0.15 .31.3 Fibre cement pipes 283
B0.15.31.4 Glass fibre reinforced plastic pipes (GRP) 283
B0.15.31.5 Structures of drainage systems 288
B0.15.31.6 Pump stations 289
B0.15.31.7 Supports and fixing 290
B0.15.31.8 Expansion and contraction 291
B0.15 .31.9 Pipeline identification 291
B0.15 .31.10 Soil, waste water, vent pipe installation 291
B0.15.32 Construction facilities 295
B0.15.32.1 Testing 295
B0.15 .32.2 Quality control procedure 295
BO - General Technical Specification BO-XIII
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 511/765
B0.15.32.2.1 Civil works quality plan 295

B0.15.32.2.2 Nominated person 295
B0.15.32.2.3 Review procedure 295
B0.15.32.2.4 Laboratories 296
B0.15.32.2.5 Notifying and informing SC 296
B0.15.32.2.6 SC to instruct 297
B0.15.32.2.7 SC to inspect and test 297
B0.15.32.2.8 Approval process 297
B0.15 .32.2.9 Rejection 298
B0.15.32.3 Transport, handling and storage 298
BO - General Technical Specification BO -XIV

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 512/765
•
Site Conditions

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 513/765
80.2. Site conditions
80.2.1 Location and accessibility
Near the plant site the bituminous access road is about 1.2 km long and is standard in size
and quality. The good condition at present shall be kept by all Lots and any damages to the
existing road are subject to repair to reinstate its condition on account of the respective
Lots.
A barge unloading ramp for TJB 5&6 shall be built by Lot 4 including necessary dredging
works so as for a barge to berth to unloading ramp.
All Lots are requested to assess the access situation to the site, incl. bridges, roads,
unloading ramp etc. and account for any improvement measure required in their proposal.
Each Lot shall specify the improvement works it considers necessary in its proposal and
shall provide the cost, if applicable respectively, it has included in its price to account for
such improvement works. Notwithstanding this assessment, any improvement work
required shall be on the Lots account and shall be covered by the Contract price.
Any additional requirement identified by Lot 1, 2 and 3 after award of Contract shall be
executed by Lot 4 with cost to be borne by the each Lot requiring such improvement.
80.2.2 Site conditions
The site has been prepared for the erection of TJB Existing 4 Units. Major buildings and
structures from TJB Existing 4 Units are located in the center of the TJB site, requiring the
arrangement of the TJB 5&6 as shown in Annexes CO, i.e. the new coal yard on the west
side of the existing TJB 3&4 coal yard and the main power block and general buildings to
the east ofTJB 3&4 power block.
The elevation of the existing plant is + 4.0 (3.5) to 5.0 m above MSL (according to the
National Elevation System), with the elevation of the plant boundary between+ 1 m and+
5.50m.
Lot 4 has to determine the final elevations of the site, taking into account the amount of
backfill required and the project schedule.
• Unit 1&2:
• Power Block +5.00 m above MSL
• Balance of Plant +4.00 m above MSL
• Unit 3&4:
• Power Block +5.00 m above MSL
• Balance of Plant +4.00 m above MSL
• Coal Yard +3.50 m above MSL
It must be anticipated that the majority of buildings for TJB5&6 shall have to be founded
on piles.
Each Lot has to take the existing operating plant into consideration, including safety and
security requirements.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 514/765
80.2.3 Seismic zone
According to Indonesian Code:

SNI03-l 726-2002; respective revision 2010.
" Tata cara perencanaan ketahanan gempa untuk bangunan gedung"
Seismic zone Area2
80.2.4 Climatic conditions
Refer also to the weather data for 2012 in Annexes CO, which shall be additionally taken
into account for the design ofTJB 5&6.
80.2.4.1 Ambient temperatures
• Reference site temperature 29.0°C

• Minimum 22°c
• Maximum 35°c
• Annual average temperature 27.0°C
(at Ujung Watu 1983 - 1984)
• Monthly average temperature 25.4 to 3 l.9°C
(at plant site Sept. - Dec. 1988)
80.2.4.2 Relative humidity
• Reference site humidity 75%

• Minimum 50%
• Maximum 92%
• Mean yearly relative humidity at 7.00 hours = 85.0%

13.00 hours = 57.0%
18.00 hours = 76.0%
Mean = 76.3%
80.2.4.3 Air pressure
Reference site air pressure 100.78 kPa
80.2.4.4 Rainfall
• Annual average 2,650 mm

• Maximum 4,615 mm
• Average monthly 740mm
• Maximum monthly 1,178 mm
80.2.4.5 Wind loads / velocities
Maximum 30 mis

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 515/765
80.2.5 Marine conditions
Refer also to the seawater design analysis in data sheet B3/FG and the bathymetric survey
(attached in Annexes CO), which shall be additionally taken into account for the design of
TJB 5&6.
80.2.5.1 Seawater temperature
• Reference site seawater temperature 30.0 °C

• Maximum 32.1 °C
• Minimum 27.7 °C
80.2.5.2 Seawater data
• Max. conductivity 54.6 mS/cm

• Min. conductivity 51.5 mS/cm
• Max. current 70.4 cm/s
• Min. current 1.0 cm/s
• Design tidal current 150 cm/sec.
• Resultant direction of current North to South - West
• Significant wave height (Hs) 2.50m
• Max. salinity 34.03%
• Min. salinity 31.40%
80.2.5.3 Tide levels
• Design + 1.30 m
• Highest + 1.36 m
• Mean high +1.30 m
• Mean sea water level (MSL) 0.00 m
• Mean low -1.20 m
• Lowest -1.26 m

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 516/765
•
Basic Design Requirements

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 517/765
80.4. Basic design requirements

This Section defines basic design requirements, which shall be considered for the design of
TJB 5&6, but without excluding other design requirements to be applied not mentioned
herein after.
The general and specific technical requirements are comprised in the respective Sections
for this BO-Part as well as in the Lot specific B-Parts.
Parts Bl, B2, B3 and B4 or other Section of this BO-Part, the contradictions shall be
clarified by mutual consent before Contract signature. In case contradictions have been not
clarified the more stringent requirements shall apply.
The basic design requirements with respect to mode of operation, guarantee and
performance data, emissions and effluents as well as electrical grid connection related
conditions are described below. Furthermore, this Section includes the fuel specification
for auxiliary fuel as well as the coal specification to be considered for the design of
TJB 5&6.
Overall plant performance
Load cases
t power output of each unit shall be 1000 MW, to be calculated from the
gross generator tput, subtracting all own power consumption of the unit itself, the unit-
related common fa · ities and transformer losses as well as half of the common load of
TJB 5&6.
uous Rating
100% nominal output with sign cooling water temperature of 30°C and with zero
make-up water to the condense Net power output of each unit at ECR shall be
l,OOOMW
• CMCR: Contractual Maximum Con · uous Rating

Defined as the maximum rating of the plan The gross output shall be the same as under
ECR, but with maximum cooling water temp ature of 33 °C and with 2% make-up
water to the condenser.
• TMCR: Turbine Maximum Continuous Rating

Defined as the maximum rating, at which the turbine is c able of operating under
normal, continuous operating conditions. The HP steam flo shall be the same as under
CMCR, but with design cooling water temperature of 30°C an ith zero make-up to
the condenser.
• VWO: Valves Wide Open

Defined as the maximum rating, at which the turbine is capable of operatin
normal, continuous operating conditions, when the governor valves are fully
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 518/765
CR: Boiler Maximum Continuous Rating

ed as the maximum rating, at which the boiler is capable of operating under
norm continuous operating conditions. The HP steam flow shall be 4.5% above
TMCR earn flow (=VWO).
• 75% ECR
Defined as load se with 75% power output at turbine generator terminal after
deducting excitatio power that at 100% ECR.
• 50% ECR
Defined as load case with % power output at turbine generator terminal after
deducting excitation power t t at 100% ECR.
• 40% ECR
Defined as minimum load case whic an be operated on coal only.
A summary of the different load cases is pro ·ded in the table below:
Load case Conditions Remarks

Cooling water Make-up water
temperature
in% of HP
in °C steam flow
ECR 30 0 0.85
CMCR 33 2 0.85
TMCR 30 0 0.86 HP steam ow same as
under CMC
BMCR, 30 0 0.89
vwo
BMCR 30 0 0.85
50%ECR 30 0 0.85
75%ECR 30 0 0.85
80.4.1.2 Mode of operation
The plant and its units shall be designed for base load operation and is expected to
participate in the system frequency regulation by free governor operation.
All the equipment and the facilities shall be suitable for continuous and also for short-time
operation under the average and the extreme ambient and seawater conditions present on
site and stated in Section B0.2.
The design of the plant shall be based on the following operation and dispatching
requirements:
• the power units shall be capable of following the daily and seasonal demand profile of
the electrical network
• full compliance with the conditions of the admissible air pollution is required within
each power unit's power range
• the power generation shall be fully dispatchable within the technical limits of the plant,
but at least between 40% ECR and BMCR.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 519/765
Facility load following capability
The ant shall be designed to be capable of:
• follo ·ng a general schedule,

a Dispatch Instruction,
• performi Automatic Generation Control (AGC) duties for the purpose of load
regulation 1 the grid system. The details on the control facilities to affect this capability
shall be in ccordance with the requirement stipulated in the specification for the
The use of AGC sha not cause any restriction whatsoever on the operation of governors
or equivalent control d vices on the facilities and vice versa.
The facilities shall be ab to maintain the net electrical output of each unit to within
±3 MW at stable grid freque cy.
80.4.1.4 Fuel
The plant shall be operated with ha: d coal as the principle fuel according to Annexes CO.
Coal shall be supplied via approx. 8 000 DWT bulk carrier vessels (Panamax type) to be
unloaded at the coal jetty.
For start-up, low-load operation and shut- wn, light fuel-oil (LFO) shall be used. Truck
unloading facilities shall be provided. A typ1 al analysis for LFO is given in Annexes CO.
80.4.2 Heat rate and power output
80.4.2.1 General
Guarantee data and performance guarantees shall be pro

• net unit heat rate at 100% I 75% / 50% ECR
• net unit power output at TMCR.
The requirements for guarantee and performance data consider e fact, that the scope of
supply and services is divided into four Lots.
Requirements and standards to be used are provided in this BO-Part well as in the
respective Lot B-Parts.
The net heat rate at 100% I 75% / 50% ECR and the power output at TM of the each
unit shall be derived from:
• the heat rate of Lot 1 and the Lot 1 unit related and auxiliary power cons um tion
• the heat rate of Lot 2 and the Lot 2 unit related and auxiliary power cons um pt n
• the Lot 3 unit related and auxiliary power consumption
• the Lot 4 unit related and auxiliary power consumption.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 520/765
e guarantee values and guaranteed performance data shall be provided by each Lot in
the espective FG data sheets of the specific Lot B-Parts.
The g rantee test for net unit power output at TMCR and net unit heat rate at 100% /
75% / 5 % ECR shall be carried out under specific conditions provided in the specific B-
Parts oft Lots as well as based on the definitions, standards and conditions provided in
this BO-P
e operated under steady state conditions. An opportunity to tune up the

unit and optimiz its operation including pre-testing shall be provided, if required, prior to
the test. The guar tees shall be based on the design condition as stated under B0.2.
After selection of the referred Lot Contractors the power balances shall be reassessed
based on the individual · formation and guarantees provided by the Lots.
Based on the guarantees o he Lots the overall plant heat rate shall be calculated by SC in
its proposal towards the Ow r.
80.4.2.2
Net unit heat rate at 100% / 75%
Net Unit Heat Rate at 100% I 75% / 50 ECR shall be calculated by the following formula.
HRN = HRr / [(11B / 100) x (1-11A / 100)
where:
HRN = Net Unit Heat Rate at 100% I 75% 50% ECR [kJ/kWh]
HRr = Turbine gross heat rate at 100% I 75 / 50% ECR [kJ/kWh]
PGE = Gross output power at 100% / 7 5% / 5 °o ECR [MW]
(Output power at the generator terminal er deducting excitation power.)
11B = Boiler Thermal Efficiency based on high H ating value [%]
11A = Auxiliary Load Rate= (PAuxrn + PAuX2E + UX3E+ PAuX4E) I PGE [%]
PAUXIE = Auxiliary Power Consumption at 100% I 75% 50% ECR of Lot 1 [MW]
p AUX2E = Auxiliary Power Consumption at 100% / 7 5% / 0% ECR of Lot 2 [MW]
p AUX3E = Auxiliary Power Consumption at 100% / 7 5% / 5 % ECR of Lot 3 [MW]
PAUX4E = Auxiliary Power Consumption at 100% ECR of Lo 4 [MW]
Net unit power output at TMCR

The Net Unit Power Output at TMCR shall be calculated by the follow
PN T = PGr-P AUxlT- P AUX2T - P AUX3T - P AUX4T
whereas:
PNr = Net Unit Power Output at TMCR [MW]

PGr = Gross output power at TMCR [MW]
p AUXIT= Auxiliary Power Consumption at TMCR of Lot 1 [MW]
PAux2r= Auxiliary Power Consumption at TMCR of Lot 2 [MW]
p AUX3T= Auxiliary Power Consumption at TMCR of Lot 3 [MW]
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 521/765
P ux4T = Auxiliary Power Consumption at TMCR of Lot 4 [MW]

Gu rantee values
Net it heat rate at 100% / 75% / 50% ECR: to be filled in later
to be filled in later
Load case Unit 100% I 75% I 50% ECR TMCR
Auxiliary power MW to be filled in to be filled in

consumption Lot
consumption Lot 2
consumption Lot 3
(Auxiliary power MW to be filled in to be filled in
consumption Lot 4
Lot 1: Turbine & generator
Definition and standards

ASME PTC 6-2004 standard shall e the basis for the guarantees provided by Lot 1. The
Alternative Method with Condensate low Measurement shall be applied.
Turbine gross heat rate

The turbine gross heat rate is calculated b the following formula.
HRr = [ M1 H1 -(M1 + Mmu)hf + M2(H3 - )+Mis(H1 -his)+ Mir(H3 -hir) + Mmuhmu)

I PG [kJ/kWh]
whereas:
HRr = Turbine gross heat rate [kJ/kWh]

M1 = Main steam flow at MSV inlet [kg/h]
H1 = Main steam enthalpy at MSV inlet [kJ/kg]
Mmu = Make up water flow [kg/h]
hmu = Make up water enthalpy [kJ/kg]
hf = Final feed water enthalpy at confluence with fe water heater bypass
M2 = Cold reheat steam flow from HP exhaust to rehea r with mixed seal
steam[kg/h]
H2 = Cold reheat steam enthalpy from HP exhaust to rehe er with mixed seal
steam [kJ/kg]
H3 = Hot reheat steam enthalpy at CRV inlet [kJ/kg]
Mis = Spray water flow to superheater [kg/h]
his = Spray water enthalpy to superheater [kJ/kg]
Mir = Spray water flow to reheater [kg/h]
hir = Spray water enthalpy to reheater [kJ/kg]
PG = Gross output power [kW]

(Output power at the generator terminal after deducting excitation p iWer)
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 522/765
G arantee conditions
The eneral design conditions, which shall be taken in to account as general guarantee
cond1 ·ons, are provided in Section B 1.
The spec· ic guarantee condition shall be agreed on before signature of contract. The Lot 1
Bidder sha provide with his Bid a proposal for the specific guarantee conditions and heat
balance dia ams.
Correction of arantee values

The correction o uarantee values shall be agreed on before signature of contract. The Lot
1 Bidder shall prov· e with his Bid a proposal for the correction of guarantee values.
Guarantee and perfo ance data

Refer to Bl-FG data she t.
Lot 2: Boiler
Definition and standards

The boiler efficiency (11B) is calc lated as Fuel Efficiency in accordance with ASME PTC
4, 1998, Energy Balance Method. e boiler efficiency is defined as follows:
whereas:
11B Boiler thermal efficiency base on higher heating value (fuel efficiency)
Heat loss due to heat in dry gas J/kg-fuel

Heat loss due to moisture in fuel J/kg-fuel
Heat loss due to moisture from burni of hydrogen in fuel J/kg-fuel
Heat loss due to moisture in air J/kg-fuel
Heat loss due to combustible in refuse J/kg-fuel
Heat loss due to surface radiation and con %
(according to ABMA chart)
Manufacturer's margin %
Fuel High heating value J/kg-fuel

Heat credits (Entering air, sensible heat in fuel, mo J/kg-fuel
entering with inlet air)
Pulverizer, boiler circulation pump and air preheater J /hr
drive power consumption
Boiler heat output J /hr
Guarantee conditions
The general design conditions, which shall be taken into account as general g
conditions, are provided in Section B2.
The Lot 2 related guarantee values and efficiency shall be based on design coal ace
to Annexes CO.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 523/765
The speci 1 rantee condition shall be agreed on before signature of contract. The Lot 2
Bidder shall provi e · their tender a proposal for the specific guarantee conditions.
Correction of guarantee values

The correction of guarantee values shall be agre before signature of contract. The Lot
2 Bidder shall provide with within their tender a proposa
values.
Guarantees and performance data

Refer to B2-FG data sheet.
80.4.3 Other guarantees and performance data
80.4.3.1 Emissions
The emissions shall comply with the requirements as stated below and stipulated in the
respective Lot B-Parts.
The emissions shall be guaranteed in the FG-data sheets in the respective B-Parts of the
Lots.
Furthermore any further requirements stipulated in the following shall also be met (latest
editions):
• World Bank (WB) guidelines for new plants

• Applicable Indonesian Standards on air emissions
• Japan Bank for International Cooperation (JBIC) guidelines for confirmation of
environment and social considerations.
80.4.3.1.1 Air emissions
Flue gas emissions at the Chimney:
• Nitrogen oxide (NOx, given as N0 2 ) 400 mg/Nm3

• Carbon monoxide (CO) 125 mg/Nm3
• Sulfur dioxide ( S0 2 ) 300 mg/Nm3
• Particulates: 50 mg/Nm3
• Opacity 20%.
Values refer to dry exhaust gas conditions, 6% 0 2 , Nm3 at 0°C and 1,013 mbar.
80.4.3.1.2 Noise emissions
Refer also to the noise testing procedure in Annexes CO.
Limitation of far field noise levels

At the Tanjung Jati B site boundaries the aggregated noise levels ofTJB Existing 4 Units
and TJB 5&6 on land during normal operation shall not exceed:
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 524/765
• 70 dB (A) during daytime between 6:00h and 22:00h

• 60 dB (A) during night time between 22:00h and 6:00h.
Limitation of near field noise levels

Noise levels during normal operation shall be limited as follows:
• 90 dB (A) at Im distance and 1.5 m above floor level during normal operation for
following equipment:
all boiler feed water pumps, cooling water pumps, condensate and booster pumps,
pulverizers, coal crusher, coal vibrating screen, bulldozers, stacker reclaimers, conveyer
and ship unloaders
• 85 dB (A) at 1 m distance and 1.5 m above floor level:
for all other equipment
• 60 dB (A) for the Central Control Room
Background noise is not included in the above equipment noise level.

During start-up and shut-down as well as during emergency conditions special
requirements shall apply.
80.4.3.2 Effluent discharge
The effluent discharge parameters shall comply with the requirements as stated below and
stipulated in the respective Lot B-Parts.
The effluent discharge parameters shall be guaranteed in the PG-data sheets in the
respective B-Parts of each of the Lots.
Furthermore the effluents discharges shall comply with the effluent discharge parameters
as stipulated in the latest edition of the appropriate Indonesian regulations.
Unit start-up
units shall be a joint undertaking of all Lots.
Accordingly this apter fixes the total available start-up time for a unit as well as the
required number of s -ups in a 30 years period the Bidder shall consider.
The start-up times marked "ap " provide an indication on the individual start-up time
requirement allocated to a certain of the start-up sequence. Since the individual
requirements at the interfaces of each p of the start-up sequence might vary from Bidder
to Bidder, each Bidder is requested to prov1 with his proposal and for his scope the
following information:
start-up curves, which reflect the different types of s -up, showing temperature, pressure,
mass flow, power output, etc. (as applicable) for Lot 1, :C 2 and Lot 3
or start of turbine run-up the corresponding requirements at t ·nterface to Lot 2 boiler
island.
The total start-up times marked in bold numbers shall not be exceeded afte mt
assessment and later-on development of joint start-up curves for Lot 1, Lot 2 an
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 525/765
St -up time of a unit after an outage shall be as follows:

(ple se note these data are preliminary and shall be confirmed I adapted by the Lot
Bidde :
Total
number of
Start-up time in minutes starts in 30
years
Boiler firing Turbine Synchroniza Total start-
to turbine run-up to tion to full up time
run-up synchroniza load
tion
Cold start appr. 220 appr. 20 appr. 200 440 appr. 200
Warm start >8h appr. 10 appr. 150 250 appr. 2000
Hot start <8h appr. 10 appr. 110 175 appr. 4500
80.4.3.4
Each unit shall be able to achieve the ollowing minimum ramping rates during start up:
Load range Warm start Hot start

%/min %/min
0-40%ECR 0.5 0.5

40% ECR - 75% ECR 0.5 1 1
75%-90%ECR 1 1 1
90% - 100% ECR 1 1 1.5
For load changes the following ramping rates shall be
40% - 75% ECR: 3%/min

75%- 90% ECR: 5%/min
90% - 100% ECR: 3%/min.
80.4.4 Electrical network connection
The plant shall comply with all the latest edition of the Indonesian
Beside the IGC requirements, the following Sections describe further m ·

requirements regarding the facility.
80.4.4.1 Grid frequency variations
The facility shall de-synchronize itself from the grid system under the following
conditions:
• at 48.3 Hz de-synchronize with 30 sec. delay

• at 48.0 Hz de-synchronize with 10 sec. delay
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 526/765
t 4 7. 5 Hz de-synchronize instantaneous
SC re uires Lot 1 to demonstrate the responses and capability of the facility under the grid
system frequency variation stated above by using the disturbance recorders of which the
ts are stated under "Disturbance Recorders" below.
80.4.4.2 Reactive power
Each generator u it shall be capable of generating reactive power to supply the grid system
at all times in acco dance with the reactive power capability curve of the generator, which
shall be provided to C.
SC may require Lot 1 t demonstrate the generator reactive power capability stated above
by using the disturbance carders.
80.4.4.3 e variation
Voltage at the Interconnection p ·nt shall be within± 10% of nominal voltage.
Voltage in the 500 kV grid systems 11 vary during normal and abnormal operations in
normal operation ± 5% nominal, in ab ormal operation ± 10% nominal. The facility shall
be capable of operating continuously w1 in this range of grid voltage variation.
The generator transformer high voltage rati shall be 525kV with ±2x2.5%V off load-tap
changer and generator can be operated 27kV 5%V as one alternative or to meet this
requirement the generator transformer high vo age rating shall be 525kV with on load tap
changer ±lOx-1.1% and generator can be operat d 27kV ± 5%V.
80.4.5 Performance standards and opera ·ng guidelines
80.4.5.1 Voltage and reactive power co trol
Each unit of the facility shall be equipped with an excitation ystem capable of automatic
voltage regulation to provide constant terminal voltage contra at all times in responding to
deviation in interconnection voltage, as per Indonesian grid cod stable over the entire
operating range of the facility. At all times, the automatic voltage egulation shall not be
removed or disabled from service, neither to operate the facility un r constant power
factor mode unless with prior consent of SC.
The excitation system shall also be equipped with delta P(power) Power ystem Stabilizer
(PSS) for damping of power system oscillations over the frequency range
The PSS is to be tuned for damping local and inter area power oscillation.
of inter area power oscillation is currently 0.4 Hz.
80.4.5.2 Speed governor
Each turbine of the facility shall be fitted with the fast acting proportional turbine spe d
governor and unit load controller or equivalent control device. The governor shall enal:i e
the facility to contribute in restoring the grid system's frequency to normal (close to
BO - General Technical Specification BO- 22
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 527/765
n inal frequency) following a change in the generation-load balance. Under such

dyn mic response, the governor and the facility shall operate stable throughout the entire
opera ·ng range of the facility over the whole range of grid system frequency variation as
per IG .
The speed overnor droop must be adjustable and capable of being set with an overall
speed droop f any value between 0% and 5%.
The speed gove or dead-band shall be adjustable and capable of being set to a minimum
value no larger tli 0.05 Hz (that is± 0.025 Hz).
At appropriate times rior to the initial operation of each unit, Lot 1shall seek a written
advice from SC in rela ·onto the values of speed governor droop and deadband for the
final setting of the devic s.
80.4.5.3 system of the facility
The facility shall have sufficien rotection systems to prevent or limit damage to its
generation and auxiliary equipme t. The protection systems shall guard the safety of the
facility and the grid system from d age or instability arising from inappropriate
operations, faults, disturbances or co ingencies both within and external to the facility.
Faults on the facility shall be cleared by protection system within the fault clearing times
stipulated in the "Electrical and Associate Works" of the Section B 1.
The Bidder shall ensure that the facility's prot ction apparatus are in service whenever the
facility is connected to or is operated in paralle with the grid system. No deviation for any
period of time for an emergency or maintenance all be permitted without prior approval
of SC.
80.4.5.4 Disturbance recorders
Disturbance recorders capable of recording slow response low recorder) and fast
response (fast recorder) of the facility and the interconnectio facilities shall be provided.
The recorders shall be Global Positioning System (GPS) based ·me synchronized and must
be remotely accessible. IEEE COMTRADE Data Format shall be sed as the standard data
exchange format.
The slow recorder output resolution shall be between 10 to 50 Hz. It s 11 be used to record
responses of the facility. It shall be an event triggered and capable of rec rding up to 20
input signals per generator. The recorder shall also be able to record the o put of each
generator in the facility. Power Station SCADA shall be used for this functi n if it satisfies
the requirement and with prior approval from SC.
The fast recorder is to be used to record electrical transient events in the grid sys
recorder is to be installed in the substation control room and is connected to each l:i y of
the interconnection facilities. The sampling rate shall not be less than 5 kHz. It shall
minimum of 8 analogue channels and 16 digital channels for each bay of the
interconnection facilities.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 528/765
Det il requirements as per IGC are IGC to be considered.
Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 529/765
•
General Supplies and Services

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 530/765
80.7. General supplies and services
80.7.1 General
The scope of supplies and services for each Lot shall cover all supplies and services within
the limits defined in the Annexes (cf. to Annexes CO):
• Division of Works (DOW)

• Interfaces and Terminal Points.
as well as defined by the scope of supplies and services in the respective Lot B-Parts
following this BO-Part, even if these are not expressively mentioned in the following.
It is to be emphasized, that not all the materials and equipment to be supplied and all the
services to be performed are enumerated or described. However, the supplies and services
shall be complete in every respect and shall ensure safe and reliable operation of the plant.
This means, all material and equipment shall be provided as required to make a complete,
properly functioning installation.
All equipment, expertise and services including documents and certificates necessary to
allow the Lot Contractors to deliver and install their equipment shall be included.
Within the specified limits of supply, the obligations of the Lot Contractors include all the
works, supplies and services that are needed to fully meet the requirements of the specific
Lot.
The scope of services and supplies include among others, but not be limited to: studies,
engineering, manufacture, erection and commissioning, tests in the factories/ workshops
and on site, packing, dispatch, the transport to site, unloading, customs clearance and
storage of equipment, as well as the supply of information related to plant layout, civil
works, electrical power requirements, central control system, sewage, interfaces, etc., all
documents required for operation and maintenance of the equipment.
The erection and commissioning include the transport on site, the assembly, the adjustment,
the testing, the cleaning and blowing/dumping, the training of the operators and
maintenance personnel, supply of all documents including Operation and Maintenance
manuals, documents and certificates required by local regulations and the services during
the warranty period.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 531/765
80.7.2 Engineering services
The engineering services shall include inter aha, but not be limited to:
80.7.2.1 Permit engineering
All Lot Contractors shall actively participate in drawing-up of all required licensing
applications.
The Lot Contractors have the obligation to prepare and receive all permits necessary for
the works they are going to perform within their specific Lot.
All services shall be performed by the Lot Contractors to affect the required permits to
commence the works and operate the systems and components within his scope of supplies
and services, including but not be limited to:
• preparation of all documents as required according to Indonesian law
• clarifications with authorities
• active participation in the clarification of all activities and for all permits with all
involved parties
• participation in all clarification meetings
• construction permits
• boiler and pressure vessel approvals
• water/waste water permits
• operation permits
• all other services as required.
80.7.2.2 Basic and detail engineering
All required engineering services schedule shall be executed.
80.7.3 Common equipment and services
All required common equipment and services shall be provided by the Lot Contractors,
including at least, but not be limited to:
80.7.3.1.1 General
Including at least, but not be limited to:

• participation at meetings with SC or representatives or sub-contractors,
• coordination with other Lot Contractors, including participation at coordination
meetings,
• material and personnel costs for tests and inspections,
• material costs for site inspections,
• coordination of all efforts within the limits of supply to ensure that the engineering is
completed within the schedule time constraints. Each Lot Contractor shall coordinate
the efforts of his sub-Contractors,
• declaration of conformity with Indonesian requirements and markings for all equipment,
• engineering and design of complete supplied equipment including interface
coordination,

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 532/765
• all as-built documents (hardcopies and electronic version) as set out in the specification
below; electronic version needs to provide details and inter-links for each component,
system and part according to the Computerized Maintenance Management System
(CMMS) or the Building Management System (BMS) requirements to be defined by
SC), including at least but not be limited to:
• operating manual in summary form,
• detailed operating and maintenance program for all systems.
80.7.3.1.2 Mechanical

• all necessary pipelines, valves, actuators
• all required line warm-up systems
• all connection and adaptation works for tie-in into general supply systems
• all necessary vents, drains and rinsing connections as well as tundishes with covers, as
far as possible aggregated to common groups of an operating level
• all connection elements, screws, bolts, nuts, including gaskets and seals as necessary
• all temporary installations required for tie-in measures including post-weld heat
treatment complete etc.
• all temporary pipework as required during connection measures
• all necessary support structures, hangers etc.
• all necessary base frames, mounting plates, grouted in parts, rag bolts, covers etc.
• all required steel parts embedded in concrete
• all required couplings and coupling guards for electric motors and other drives
• all necessary lifting equipment and hoists (hooks to be provided for regular repair work
where loads exceed 50 kg, hoists to be provided for regular repair work where loads
exceed 200 kg)
• all required safety equipment, pressure relief valves etc.
• all thermal and noise insulation including cladding as well as any other noise
attenuation measures
• stairways, ladders, platforms, galleries and walkways to all plant components, including
escape routes as necessary
• all necessary steel structures, stairs, ladders on platforms
• weather protections
• all required ventilation or air conditioning equipment for safe operation of mechanical
and electrical equipment
• all necessary corrosion protection measures for plant components and equipment stored
or mounted on Site up to the time of trial operation
• complete primer and top coatings conforming to colour code
• necessary noise abatements measures
• if required trace heating - based on used equipment and process technology
• complete labeling of all plant components
• all fire protection measures
• all necessary lubrication systems
• initial lubricant filling and sufficient lubricants up to COD
• provision of all connections and temporary pipework for steam purging of the steam
cycle
• flushing of all other lines including disposal of the effluents; protection with wood
and/or plastic of all instrumentation and appendages to be in-stalled during construction,

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 533/765
• all standard accessories and auxiliary equipment which normally form part of the scope
of supplies
• all necessary tests, inspections and works acceptances as well as all certificates and
reports of these
• exchange of filter elements following trial operation.
• valve trims for purging and subsequent exchange
• removal of any unused material
• scaffolding for all work above ground level
• necessary connection points for on line condition-based monitoring equipment
• informing the appropriate authorities of any identified ammumt1on
material/archaeological discoveries, however the actual removal of such discoveries is
excluded from the scope
• temporary fire fighting facilities for the construction and erection phase.
80.7.3.1.3 Electrical, instrumentation and control

• all local measurements and field control loops (thermometers, pressure gauges, local
regulating devices, etc.) as well as all instruments for reliability test and check
• all necessary electrical drives
• complete installation material, that is wiring, cabling and piping material, all needed
fastenings, conduits, brackets and other supports
• all field control boxes
• all instruments mounted on instrumentation racks
• all cubicles, junction boxes, marshalling racks, terminal boxes, etc.
• signal exchange between local control system and DCS as well with instruments/control
systems of other Lots
• complete labeling of electrical and l&C-equipment (also inside of control cabinet
• lightning protection
• earthing of the equipment
• surge arrestors
• clarification of all logic interconnections: sequence, interlocking, protection,
safeguarding for coordinated operation/start up/shut down of individual items of
equipment
• all necessary cable trays, cables and wires for power, AC and DC instrument
transformers, control, measuring, signals, etc.
• all necessary number plates for identifying the cables (numbering code to be
determined)
• all necessary fixing materials
• all necessary plastic or metal protecting tubes for the cable runs
• all necessary materials for laying the cables in the ground
• all necessary cable connections including compression cable lugs, fixing and clamping
materials, etc.
• all necessary cable sealing ends and cable connecting sleeves including fixing materials
• all necessary compression connectors
• all necessary fire protection materials for sealing the cable openings through walls and
ceilings as well as between switchgear and control, measuring, recording and
switchgear cubicles, operating panels and desks, etc.
• temporary utilities such as telephone

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 534/765
• temporary area lighting

• temporary earthing and lightning protection systems
• temporary construction power system (each Lot shall produce his own electricity
required at any time during the construction period) including
• all required transformers and switchgear substations and all cabling
• noise measures following standard limits to avoid any disturbances of the respective
local community
• maintenance and running costs
80.7.3.1.4 Civil

• design, engineering and all necessary calculations
• site supervision and management
• all necessary surveying works (onshore and offshore)
• all necessary geotechnical investigations (onshore and offshore)
• execution and interpretation of soil bearing tests
• preparation of site, clearing trees and bushes, demolition works, removal of
underground obstacles
• removal of existing fences
• earthworks, drainage, excavation and refilling works
• storm water and sewage drainage systems
• roads and other paved areas
• bridges
• external and internal fencing
• offshore works.
• dewatering during construction and erection
• piling and sheet piling
• concrete and reinforced concrete works, pre-cast concrete, earthing systems
• masonry, mortar, plaster, render
• water proofing works for pressing and non-pressing water
• fire protection during construction
• roofing (non asbestos)
• facade works/siding: (non asbestos)
• windows and glazing works
• non-load bearing walls/installation partitions suspended ceilings
• structural steel
• metalwork and blacksmith work/raised flooring/ doors and gates/sheet metal work
• flooring work
• tiling
• Jomery
• furniture
• plumbing
• Sanitary installation
• fire protection systems; fire extinguishers
• painting and coating systems
• heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC)
• site installation and demobilization
• housekeeping during construction

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 535/765
• staff facilities during construction

• transport of all waste material to dump locations
• temporary fencing and gates of construction Sites
• Site offices for SC and/or SC's representatives
• Contractor's Site offices
• temporary installations such as laboratory, workshops, stores, gate houses etc.
• temporary roads, car parks etc.
• temporary security installations
• temporary first aid and medical services
• temporary utilities such as potable water, storm water drainage of the areas and sanitary
sewage disposal
• temporary cranes and lifting devices
• temporary connection to potable water, service water and waste water.
80.7.4 Packaging and transportation

• suitable packaging, dispatching and transportation I delivery free construction site,
including transport insurance, inspections and, if necessary, ensuring the prerequisites
for transportation
• obtain all necessary authorizations for the transport of heavy equipment to the site and
to define the route taking into account bridges, height and allowable loads, inclusive via
railway or barge
• customs clearance
• on-site transportation to installation place and temporary storage (in case the equipment
cannot be installed on its place as soon as it arrives on site)
• secure and adequately sound temporary storage facilities
• disposal of packing and transportation material
• crane or hoisting / lifting facilities for unloading, storage and installation
• guarding, temporary fencing.
80.7.5 Erection, commissioning and testing

• complete erection of the scope of supplies up to operational readiness. This includes
mobilization and provision of the required supervisory staff, skilled and unskilled
personnel, as well as installation of scaffolding, cranes, hoists, equipment and materials,
personnel accommodation, prescribed tests and inspections
• commissioning and optimization of all components as well as conducting all necessary
measurements
• supervision of erection, commissioning and acceptance / reliability test run of complete
supplied equipment
• all required health & safety & environmental measures
• inspection and testing during manufacturing
• test on completion
• all inspections and tests to be carried out in order to obtain all consents.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 536/765
80.7.6 Training
Each Lot Contractor shall provide comprehensive set of Operation and Maintenance
manuals, on which training for the entire operation and maintenance staff of the power
plant will be based, with respect to his scope of supply and services, including the
operational aspects of his supplies on the overall plant level.
The training shall include at least, but not be limited to:

• operation and maintenance training at manufacturer's works during the assembly of the
major items
• on the job training for O&M staff during erection, commissioning and reliability test
run. Each Lot Contractor shall train, instruct and supervise the O&M staff to an
adequate standard for safe and efficient commercial operation of the plant as stipulated
under the plant performance guarantees
• classroom and hands on training for plant maintenance staff. Each Lot Contractor shall
train, instruct and supervise plant maintenance staff to an adequate standard of
knowledge and capability for good trouble shooting, repair and of the plant equipment
• two (2) English-speaking engineers (mechanical and electrical/I&C), who are to remain
at site during the first two years of period. They shall be competent to advise and lead
SC's staff as well as O&M staff on all aspects of operation and maintenance
• Each Lot Contractor shall submit the training plan including schedules, place, content of
lectures etc. approval no less than six (6) months in advance of cold commissioning.
80.7.7 Spare parts, tools, appliances and consumables
Spares as well as wear-and-tear parts shall cover those parts recommended by the Lot
Bidder to enable the plant to be operated effectively and efficiently for a period of 24
months from COD. These parts shall be offered and listed on separate sheets.
All items shown in these schedules shall form part of the Contract Price and for the
operation and maintenance of TJB5&6 the Owner may order all or any of the parts at its
discretion. If the spare parts are found to be inadequate within the above period, the Lot
Contractor shall furnish additional spare parts as required at no additional cost to SC.
Each Lot shall furthermore provide a list of "Recommended Spare Parts", complete with
full description, Plant Item Code Number, current List Price, and lead time for delivery.
Each Lot shall name 3 vendors with complete address for each of all required and
recommended spare parts. The list of spare parts including drawings, location, normal
delivery periods and price shall be submitted to SC for approval no later than twelve (12)
months prior to the target COD of the 181 unit.
The Owner reserves the right to purchase spare parts directly from the respective OEM.
For each spare part service life and quantity ofrequired parts shall be included in the spare
parts list.
All spare parts required for commissioning and testing of his scope of supply up to COD
form part of the principal scope of supply and shall be not be included in the spare parts list.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 537/765
Major items of spare parts must be priced individually but minor items can be grouped
together.
Each Lot Bidder shall segregate in the schedule those "consumable" spares necessary for
the efficient day to day maintenance of any items of his scope of supplies and those
"strategic" spares which, in his opinion SC should hold to minimize the outage of his scope
of supply.
Each item shall be labeled in English and be separately packed against damage and sealed
to prevent deterioration through corrosion or perishing. The protection shall be sufficient
for a minimum of 10 years storage in a dry weatherproof building.
The spare parts shall be placed in bins, racks, drawers, shelves, cabinets, etc. to be
provided by the Lot Contractor.
Lot Contractors shall not use any of the spare parts without written permission from SC.
All parts so used shall be replaced by the Lot Contractors prior to COD.
Spare parts shall be identified, specified and documented according to the same
requirements laid down for the principal scope of supply and as required by the CMMS or
BMS finally decided and approved by SC. Each Lot Contractor shall deliver and store the
spare parts according to the CMMS requirements in the spare parts store.
Tools and appliances

The following tools and appliances shall be supplied by each Lot Contractor for use by SC:
• special tools and gauges required for the maintenance of the scope of supply.
• one set of special lifting and handling appliances required for the maintenance of the
scope of supply.
Each tool or appliance is to be clearly marked with its size and/or purpose.
Each set of tools and gauges required for the maintenance of the scope of supply shall be
suitably arranged in fitted boxes of mild steel construction, the number of boxes being
determined in relation to the layout of the component and equipment in question. If the
weight of any box and its contents should be such that it cannot conveniently be carried, it
shall be supported on maneuverable rubber-tired wheels.
Each cabinet and box shall be painted, fitted with a lock and clearly marked in white letters
with the name of the item of equipment for which the tools and appliances contained are
intended.
Suitable storage racks shall be provided for all portable lifting tackle in this contract.
Suitable lifting lugs, ears or ring bolts, or tapped holes for lifting rings shall be provided on
all equipment items where the weight exceeds 15 kg.
All lifting tackle shall be stamped with a unique identification number and safe working
load. A test certificate from an approved authority shall be supplied for each item of lifting
tackle.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 538/765
Each Lot Contractor shall provide a schedule of all lifting tackle and tools and appliances
being supplied, for the approval by the SC.
Each Lot Contractor shall provide all runway beams, trolleys, lifting blocks, special slings
etc. necessary for the safe and efficient handling and maintenance of the works. Particular
attention shall be paid to high level equipment such as deaerators. Electrically operated
hoists and runway trolleys shall be provided for all lifts in excess of 5 tons.
The tools and appliances with the appropriate storage racks, cabinets and boxes shall be
properly stored and handed over to SC at the time of COD.
Where the Lot Contract includes site erection, any special tools or appliances required
solely for erection, and shall NOT be required for maintenance during the life of the
equipment, shall be provided by the Lot Contractor for his own use and shall remain the
property of the Lot Contractor.
Consumables
The Lot Contractors' scope of supplies shall include the supply of all chemicals, reagents,
resins, lubricants, grease and consumable items required for operation up to COD. All
lubricants proposed for operation shall be suitable for all operating and environmental
conditions that will be met on site consistent with good maintenance procedures as
instructed in the operation and maintenance manuals.
All types of lubricants and grease shall be readily obtainable locally and a number of
different types and variants shall be kept to a minimum. For each type and grade of
lubricant recommended, the Lot Contractor shall list at least three equivalent lubricants
manufactured by alternative companies.
Each Lot Contractor shall submit to SC a list and schedule of lubricants, greases, chemicals
and consumables items including items qualities and quantities required per month of the
plant operation approval.
80.7.8 Population of CMMS
The electronic data and documentation provided by the Lot Bidder shall include at least the
following, but not be limited to:
• location of device (process location)

• data (general data and technical data) for all equipment and devices at one process
location (for example all installed equipment, for example pump, motor, gear box),
including applicable drawing numbers.
• items, for example itemized part lists and materials of each device
• lists of spare parts provided by the Lot Contractors linked to items above, as well as the
Recommended Spare Parts, even though they may NOT have been supplied, as yet.
• routine and preventive maintenance programs and schedules (works, instructions, tools,
spares, safety etc.) and other relevant documentation and
• supplier data (device supplier, manufacturer, forwarder, Contractor data) with business
addresses and local agent.
In order to allow proper population of the CMMS the documentation to be supplied by the
Lot Contractor shall include among others, but not be limited to:

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 539/765
• P&I diagrams with systematic and comprehensive coding according to the applied plant
numbering system covering all process locations
• coded P&I and other diagrams for all sub processes e.g. feed water pump lubrication
system
• system descriptions
• operation and maintenance manuals, in searchable PDF format, containing sufficient
information on:
• coding, positions, type identification markings, serial numbers and technical data of
each device interlinking the manuals with the equipment and devices at the plant
• assembly drawings with part lists in readable scale
• part list information facilitating procurement
• drawings for devices if modified from standard stock construction.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 540/765
•
Data and Documents to be
provided

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 541/765
.9. Data and documents to be provided
Data and documents to be provided with bid
ing data and documents shall be submitted by the Lot Bidder with his Bid, as
applicable t the respective scope of supplies and services.
It includes fo the purpose of completeness documents also listed in the relevant Lot B-
Parts.
80.9.1.1
List of deviation from e request of proposal, indicating the Part, Section, chapter, page,
requirement and Lot Bi er's deviation. The list shall be split according to the structure of
the RFP. Individual devia ·ons shall be numbered. Such individual deviations shall be
accompanied by detailed e lanation of motivation for deviation.
• Completely filled in data sc edules for guarantee and design data (FG and FD)
• Confirmation of the interface limits of supply/ DOW
• Any other information requeste in the specification
• List of proposed makes and vend rs.
• Reference lists for delivery and ins llation of plants /equipment of similar type and size
• Detailed time schedule, showing design, manufacturing, shipping, erection and
comm1ss10nmg
• A detailed schedule showing the design · terface dates between each Lot
• A detailed pre-testing, commissioning, st -up and testing time schedule, with interface
dates
• Complete description of the systems and co ponents offered including description of
the process and the equipment
• Schematics of the principal plant systems
• General descriptions of individual systems and descriptions of operation including
description of start-up, shutdown and emergency sh down procedures
• Auxiliary power requirement of the individual plant u ·ts
• Degradation curves for main guarantee values for the fi t 6 years.
• Detailed layout drawings for the relevant scope of supplie
• Dimensioned drawings and sectional views of the principal lant components
• Dimensions of foundations and main loads to be considered i Lot 4
• Preliminary building requirements, incl. dimensions and spec l requirements for each
individual building / structure to be erected / built by Lot 4
• Information about build-in parts into foundation, e.g. cable ch nels, pipe channels,
drain pipes (material, diameter), dimensions of pits
• Space requirement for laydown area, construction site and equipment
• Description of road improvements for site access outside the plant 1 its considered
necessary by the Lot
• Documents on the quality assurance system
• List of major workshop inspections
• Training program and schedule for O&M personnel
• Lists of recommended spare parts including minimum three vendor addresses
spare part
• Spare parts storage and supply policy

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 542/765
quipment routine and preventive maintenance schedules for major equipment

• ·st of recommended personnel to operate the relevant systems and to perform day-to-
da maintenance
• A p liminary list of documents and information to be submitted by the Lot Bidder in
case o Contract award, incl. those documents and information the Lot Bidder expects to
receive rom the other Lots. Each Lot Bidder shall adjust the list as required in terms of
adding d uments or changing submission dates for preliminary and final documents to
account fo the required coordination with the other Lots
• All other do ments necessary for comprehension of the offered equipment.
80.9.1.2
• Process flow diagr s (PFDs) for all systems

• Preliminary piping d instrumentation diagrams (P &IDs) for all systems, showing
piping materials and op ating pressures.
• Performance diagrams o ain equipment (i.e. pumps, fans)
• Start-up curves for cold, w m, hot and very hot start up
• General outline of installatio
• List of consumers as well as co sumption for all media to be supplied from other Lots
• Graphs showing the performanc characteristic versus the load (flue gas temperatures,
steam temperatures etc., including -p-diagram)
• Correction curves for ambient cond1 ·ons and fuel variations
• Detailed description of the equipment ffered
• Material diagram showing material, imensions, highest flue gas temperature and
highest steam temperature, design ma rial temperature and maximum admissible
material temperature and design pressure £ components of the steam/water system.
• Heat cycle calculations
• For start-up of turbine run-up the corres nding requirements at the respective
interfaces
• Description of means to accomplish primary freq ncy control according to grid code
• Description of means to accomplish secondary freq ncy control according to grid code
• Loads and forces from start-up, running and shutdow
80.9.1.3 Electrical
• Preliminary motor and consumer list including power deman figures

• Electrical single line diagram including 500, 10, 3 and 0,4 kV
• Electrical single line diagram for the DC / UPS / emergency po r system
• Technical documentation/ description ofMV and LV switchgear
• Type test certificates for MV and LV switchgear
• General arrangement of main electrical equipment within the relevan
etc. including cross sectional drawing
• Dimensional drawings of main transformers
• Arrangement of generator bus duct up to generator transformer,
• Performance diagrams (circle diagrams) of generator, saturation
load diagrams.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 543/765
500 kV substation
ical single line diagram of the 500 kV switchgear

• Arran ment of connection from generator transformers to 500 kV substation
• General rangement, of the 500 kV sub-station
• Brochures d catalogues containing outline dimensions, main electrical data and
installation d ails of every major piece of GIS equipment
• Detailed speci 1 ation of tests to be performed
• Reference list
80.9.1.5
• rated operation voltage, m ·mum

• insulation level, impulse and wer frequency
• rated nominal current
• rated short circuit current
• type of operating mechanism.
80.9.1.6 l&C
• Temporary instrument list containing analog binary signals

• Temporary list of all drives, such as unidir tional motors, MOV's, SOV's and
remotely operated control valves.
• List of all modulating controls
• Data sheets, descriptions and brochures of the offered
• Data sheets, descriptions and brochures of the offer local control systems, m
particular PLC
• Main control loops
• DCS configuration drawing
• Data sheets, descriptions and brochures of the DCS
• Reference list for the DCS with indication of plant type, system arcli" ecture and size of
the system
• Data sheets, descriptions and brochures of the CEMS including common
evaluation devices
• Data sheets, description and brochures of the CCTV system
• Data sheets, descriptions and brochures of all plant communication systems
• Description of the interface to the boiler protection system and the steam t
generator protection system.
80.9.2 Data and documents to be provided after award of contract
The documents required for design, construction, installation, operation and maintenance
of supplied equipment shall be submitted by the Lot Contractors within the stipulated times
as to permit the plant as a whole to be erected in compliance with the agreed milestones in
the project time schedule.
All documents, including the installation and operation and maintenance manuals as well
as the related software shall be in fluent, legible English.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 544/765
Documents shall be submitted sufficiently in advance, so that corrections as well as

resubmission of the documents will not result in any delays with respect to the agreed time
schedule.
Corrections as well as resubmission of the documents will not result in any delays with
respect to the agreed time schedule. SC reserves the right to request from the Lot
Contractors additional drawings, documents, etc. as may be required for proper
understanding and definition of the design and engineering, and where applicable,
Operation and Maintenance.
The overall responsibility with regard to completeness, correctness and suitability for the
permit application process remains with the respective Lot Contractor. In no case shall any
comment correction, amendment or approval (if any) by SC relieve the Lot Contractors
from their responsibility.
Annexes CO shows the major documents to be provided by the Lot Contractors after award
of Contract.
It is to be emphasized that only the most important documents are listed. The list shall be
extended by the Lot Bidder as required to cover all aspects considered relevant for his
specific Lot and in order to ensure timely completion of permit application documents and
performance of the works according to the project's requirements and in accordance with
the specified project time schedule. The time in weeks after the notice to proceed provided
in this list is preliminary and shall be reviewed by the Lot Bidder. During Contract
negotiations this list will be coordinated and finalized between all Lots.
Before submittal of any such drawing or other document, each Lot Contractor shall submit
a detailed list comprising all drawings or other documents the Lot Contractor will produce.
Based on this list SC will decide which drawings or other documents will have to be
submitted for approval, information or other purpose.
As required to cover all design aspects as well as design interfaces between the different
Lots, SC may require and the Lot Contractors shall provide further drawings, documents
and information than those listed.
SC reserves the right to require detailed information on the progress of drawing and
document preparation from the Lot Contractors at any time.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 545/765
80.9.2.1 Electronic formats
The following standards shall be considered:
Text documents (MS Word 2007/2010) .docx
Data tables (Excel 2007/2010) .xlsx
Presentations (Powerpoint 2007/2010) .ppt
Drawings (CAD drawing Autocad 2011) .dwg
Time schedule (Microsoft Project-Latest .mpp

edtion
View formats (Adobe Acrobat) .pdf
Photos .jpg
engineering bit map .tif, .pdf

(line) drawing
Minimum resolution 300 Dpi
Max Size 18000 x 18000 pixels
Video .mpg (.avi)
Sound .wav (.mp3)
Compressed files .Zlp
Functional diagrams .pdf
80.9.2.2 Drawing numbering system
To be clarified before Contract signature.
80.9.2.3 Drawing border and title block
To be clarified before Contract signature.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 546/765
•
Detailed Inspection and Test
Requirements

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 547/765
80.10. Detailed inspection and test requirements
80.10.1 General
This Section contains general requirements for inspection of material, parts, equipment and
workmanship of the plant during manufacture, assembling and erection and upon
completion to demonstrate compliance with specification, codes and standards and to
ensure overall reliability of plant operation and performance.
The test procedures for the construction inspection, start-up and performance testing and
capacity demonstration of the power units and of the plant shall be developed and
implemented by each Lot.
Each Lot Contractor shall produce an overall test and inspection plan at an early stage of
the contract following which SC will indicate which inspections may be witnessed.
Development and implementation of test procedures for the construction inspection, start-
up and performance testing and capacity demonstration of the power units and of the plant
shall be the responsibility of the Lot Contractors.
Each Lot Contractor shall be responsible for providing all supplies required for carrying
out such tests, except to the light fuel oil and coal used during performance tests, reliability
trial and station criteria tests.
All tests shall be carried out in accordance with approved standards and/or manufacturers'
instructions, regulations of the appropriate authorities and in compliance with the
stipulations of SC's Requirements. Any deviations from approved standards shall have
prior agreement with SC before the test is carried out.
The overall-testing program for the project shall consist at least of the following:
• testing during manufacturing
• workshop inspections and testing,
• factory acceptance tests (FAT)
• testing at site
• construction inspections and testing
• erection / mechanical completion
• pre-commissioning and commissioning tests (cold and hot commissioning)
• optimization of overall plant
• final inspection and testing
• Bench mark testing
• completion test
• performance tests
• reliability test run
• station criteria tests.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 548/765
SC reserve the right to visit the workshops or the construction site at any reasonable time
to familiarize with the progress made and the quality of the work to date and shall have the
right to be present during inspections and tests of all equipment and systems in the
workshops and on site. The presence of SC or SC' s representatives during any inspection
or test shall in no way relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for supplying the
equipment or systems in accordance with the milestone dates and technical requirements.
No approval of nor omission to approve or comment on any inspection or test shall relieve
the Contractor from any of its obligations under the Contract.
Three (3) months after the notice of proceed, each Lot Contractor shall submit to SC all
relevant test documents, which shall at least include:
• test program
• test standards
• type of inspection and tests
• tests which are to be witnessed by SC/ SC's representatives/ third parties
• quality control procedure.
Six (6) months prior to the proposed start of cold commissioning each Lot shall submit to
SC:
• commissioning test program
• commissioning procedures
• final inspection and testing.
Six (6) months after the notice to proceed, each Lot shall submit to SC /SC's Engineer for
the Performance Tests:
• test program
• test standards
• manpower and deployment schedule of each Lot for performing the tests, forms of test
records and report.
• description of instrumentation to be used, including accuracy, and calibration test results
shall be informed before the test due to the validity of calibration.
• method of data recording
• method and equations/correction curves used for adjustment of recorded data to the
design conditions.
The results of all tests shall be certified by the manufacturer, each Lot or an Independent
Agency as appropriate.
If SC insists to use any Independent Agency in addition to requirements caused by

law/regulation then all costs for such evaluation shall be borne by the Lot Contractors.
Document files containing material certificates, welding procedures, test report etc. shall
be compiled for each item of the plant and shall be suitably identified (including equipment
classification reference) and bound.
Each Lot shall, within 10 days after the completion of any test, submit to SC the testing
documents containing material certificates, welding procedures, all principal test records,
test certificates, correction curves and performance curves for each item of plant. The
testing documents shall be presented in approved form bound in volumes. Four copies of

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 549/765
each volume shall be supplied to SC complete with index and suitably identified (including
equipment classification reference).
No equipment shall be dispatched from the manufacturer's works without SC's approval of
its testing and overall quality.
SC shall be notified as soon as possible of all test failures and corrective measures. This
shall take the form of abbreviated reports which shall, upon request, be supported by more
detailed reports. It is desirable that SC be notified of test failures to allow in situ inspection
if desired.
80.10.1.1 Test instruments and equipment
The testing and commissioning equipment shall be approved by SC. The respective Lot
Contractors shall ensure that each test instrument and equipment has a valid calibration
certificate. Where required, instruments shall be re-calibrated by an agreed independent
body at the expense of the respective Lot Contractors.
All equipment shall be arranged and operated with due regard to the safety of personnel
and so as to minimize damage to the test object in case of breakdown.
80.10.1.2 Test certificates
Copies (as agreed) of test certificates in English shall be supplied to SC within 10 days of
the completion of the works tests.
A copy of the test certificate shall be incorporated into each maintenance/operating manual.
80.10.1.3 Punch item definition
A punch item is considered a deviation from approved for construction drawings or

specifications, poor workmanship, a missing component or document or construction test
certificate.
During checkouts of equipment and systems by SC, punch items will be recorded on
standard punch list forms, which will be submitted to the Lot Contractors for correction.
All punch items shall be corrected by the Lot Contractors as soon as possible.
However, as some punch items shall be considered more serious than others, each punch
item shall be assigned a category according to its severity.
80.10.2 Testing during manufacturing
80.10.2.1 Factory acceptance test requirements
Pre-conditions for the commencement of the factory acceptance test (FAT) by SC are:
• completion of all internal tests and checks by the Lot Contractors / manufacturers
• submission of all test results of the internal tests and FAT dossier conducted by the Lot
Contractors /manufacturers

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 550/765
• notice from the Lot Contractors that the equipment is ready for factory acceptance
testing by SC.
Prior to commencement of the FAT by SC, the Lot Contractor shall prepare and submit a
dossier to SC for approval. The dossier shall as a minimum contain the following:
• method description of the tests performed
• equipment test certificates (routine test certificates, type test certificates)
• instrument & measurement tool list and calibration certificates
• drawings
• data sheets; (motor, fan and pump datasheets)
• check lists
• test record sheets (i.e. Torque records, Insulation resistance test, pressure tests, high
potential tests)
• setting and configuration sheets (protection and control)
• measurement protocols
• punch lists.
Additionally, for the DCS, the FAT dossier document shall also include:
• detailed Functional Design Specifications of the whole plant
• 1/0 lists that shall include all digital inputs, digital outputs, analogue inputs and
analogue outputs of the whole plant
• all related approved drawings of the DCS (including all wiring of cabinets)
• all mimics of the SCADA system
• lay-out or list of all instrumentation, valves, etc. integrated to the DCS
• list of intelligent motor control devices.
Once the FAT dossier has been reviewed, a factory acceptance test is to be arranged during
which SC may require some or all of the tests be repeated to demonstrate the
accuracy/validity of the Lot Contractor's tests.
All components that are shrunk together shall be tested as a unit/system prior to
balancing/run-out at the factory.
FATs shall only be conducted on assembled equipment and not on sub-component

equipment (i.e. a fully assembled panel with all IEDs and other components mounted and
wired shall be tested and not the IEDs individually; however the IED will be tested at the
panel FAT).
80.10.2.2 Material tests
80.10.2.2.1 Steel forgings
Maj or steel forgings

Purchase specifications shall clearly state the quality and inspection requirements and shall
at least include, but not be limited to:
• chemical composition range
• heat treatment
• mechanical test specimen locations
• mechanical properties
• magnetic properties (when applicable)

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 551/765
• non-destructive testing
• methods and procedures
• stage and extent of application
• recordable indication size
• allowable indication size
• thermal stability test (HP and reheat turbine shafts only).
Each forging shall be suitably marked with an identification number which shall transfer
throughout all machining stages. The identification number shall be indicated on all
documents relating to the forging.
Repair welding will not be permitted on rotating parts. On other components the proposal
will be subject to approval by SC.
Rotor forgings
The profile of forgings at the stage of final ultrasonic inspection should be such as to
minimize the regions where complete coverage is not possible.
Ultrasonic indications should be measured by the equivalent flat bottomed hole or A VG
(DGS) method.
The toughness of rim and core (where applicable) material shall be evaluated by testing
chirpy V impact specimens over a range of temperatures and thus determining the 50%
fibrosity fracture appearance temperature (F ATT).
Allowable indication size and material toughness are interdependent design related criteria
Each Lot shall be prepared, if necessary to justify his proposals by reference to fracture
mechanics calculations.
Bores, when provided, shall be magnetic particle inspected and a suitable intrascope used
for examination.
80.10.2.2.2 Steel castings
Purchase specifications shall clearly state the quality and inspection requirements and shall
at least include, but not be limited to:
• chemical composition range
• heat treatment
• mechanical test specimen locations
• mechanical properties
• non-destructive testing
• methods and procedures
• stage and extent of application
• recordable indication size
• allowable indication size
• other tests
• standard weld repair-procedure.
Each casting shall be identified by hand stamped or cast-on reference numbers which shall
be indicated on all documents relating to the casting.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 552/765
If the supplier of the equipment provides standard certificates which reasonably cover the
above mentioned points these standard certificates are acceptable.
Non-destructive testing
Minimum requirements are as follows:
• crack detection of critical areas of castings which in the case of castings to operate at
high temperature or high pressure shall consist of 100% of all accessible areas.
Magnetic particle inspection shall be used for ferritic steel castings.
• ultrasonic inspection of all surfaces of castings to operate at high temperature or high
pressure.
• ultrasonic thickness check of critical areas.
• radiographic examination adjacent to future butt weld regions (Acceptance Standard
Level 1 of ASTM E446 or EI86 as appropriate or JIS or equivalent codes and
standards).
• radiographic examination shall also be used to assist in defining defects indicated by
ultrasonic inspection.
In addition to being applied as necessary quality control on as cast items, inspections

outlined above shall be applied to the finally heat treated casting.
Prior to non-destructive testing all surfaces shall be satisfactorily prepared and visually
examined.
Repair Welding
Unacceptable defects observed by visual examination or indicated by nondestructive
testing shall be excavated by chipping or thermal gauging and grinding and their complete
removal proved by crack detection.
In the case of excavations which penetrate more than 25 mm or 50% of the wall thickness
or cover more than 10,000 mm2 area SC written approval of the proposed repair must be
obtained.
Only welders qualified by performance tests on similar cast materials shall be used.
On completion of repair, welded areas shall be ground smooth and carefully blended into
the surrounding material. The repaired areas shall be surface crack detected, magnetic
particle inspection being used for ferritic steel castings and in addition ultrasonic
inspection shall be used on castings to operate at high temperature or high pressure.
80.10.2.2.3 Steel plates and sections
The following requirements, which may be supplementary to the applicable material

standards, shall be considered when selecting material grades:
• impact testing of plate or Sections over 50 mm thick (impact requirements to be

dependent on application)
• ultrasonic testing of plate where the presence of non-metallic may interfere with the
interpretation of ultrasonic testing of future welds
• ultrasonic testing and through thickness ductility measurement, where the application
involves the risk of lamellar tearing in the material at regions of high restraint (e. g. at
set-on nozzle locations or cruciform joints)

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 553/765
• ultrasonic testing clad materials to detect lack of bonding (Proposed rectification

procedures shall be submitted for the approval of SC).
80.10.2.2.4 Reinforced thermosetting resin pipes
Checks shall be made on all raw materials to ensure that they comply with the relevant
AS TM Standard.
All deliveries of resin shall be checked for consistency by viscosity and reactivity. Any
resins deviating from the manufacturer's published figures shall not be used.
Testing of reinforced thermosetting resin pipes:

Long term hoop strength (type test for pressure pipes only)
In accordance with AS TM D2992 Procedure B with the exception that the test results shall
be extrapolated to determine the stress which the pipe can withstand for a period of 60
years without failure. The lower 95% confidence limit at 60 years shall also be calculated.
Hydraulic test
100% of the pipes shall be subjected to an internal hydraulic pressure test at the
manufacturer's works prior to delivery. The test shall be applied to a pressure equal to 1.5
times the maximum working pressure stated for each classification of pipe. The test
pressure shall be applied for a minimum period of 5 minutes without signs of leakage.
In addition to the above the first pipe and every thirtieth thereafter of each class and
diameter shall be maintained at test pressure for a minimum of 4 hours without signs of
leakage.
Each pipe and fitting shall be subjected to an internal low pressure air test at the
manufacturer's works prior to delivery. The test pressure shall be an overpressure of 0.1 bar
and this shall be applied for a minimum period of 5 minutes without signs of leakage or
distress. Fittings which are of mitered construction shall be manufactured from pipes
which have successfully passed the tests defined above.
Dimensions
The dimensions and tolerances of all pipes shall be determined in accordance with
ASTM-D2122
Stiffness
A minimum of one pipe, selected randomly, for every 30 pipes manufactured shall be
tested for stiffness in accordance with ASTM-D 2412 "Method of Test for External
Loading Properties of Plastic Pipe by Parallel Plate Loading". A minimum of one pipe of
each class and diameter of pipe shall be tested.
Longitudinal and hoop tensile strength

The tensile strength properties of a minimum of one pipe for every 100 pipes manufactured
shall be measured in accordance with ASTM-D 638. A minimum of one pipe of each class
and diameter of pipe shall be tested.
Cure
Curing, to be tested by the Barco! Hardness test determined in accordance with ASTM-D
2583 standard: 100% of the produced pieces. Minimum acceptable hardness is 90% of the

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 554/765
value recommended by the resin manufacturer of the particular resin used, when
non-reinforced.
The sample pipe shall also withstand a commercial acetone test on the internal portion of
the laminate.
Loss on ignition
A minimum of one pipe for every 30 pipes manufactured shall be tested in accordance with
ASTM-D 2584 "Standard Method of Test for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins".
Joint tests
A minimum of two pipes in every 100 pipes manufactured shall be jointed and tested in
accordance with the requirements of section 7.2 of ASTM D 3262.
Visual inspection
Each pipe and fitting shall be subjected to a complete visual inspection before shipment in
accordance with ASTM-D 2563.
Vacuum test
Vacuum test of pipe shall be carried out for each diameter once at beginning of production.
The vacuum to be applied shall be equivalent to the condition which occurs during full
vacuum. The corresponding derated vacuum for this test shall be proved by the pipe
manufacturer.
Failure of tests on completed pipes

In the event of a specimen not fulfilling the minimum requirements for strain corrosion
resistance, all pipes of that class and diameter which have been manufactured shall be
rejected and shall be replaced entirely.
Any pipe or fitting which fails any of the quality control tests which are to be carried out on
each and every pipe or fitting shall be rejected. In the event of any pipe failing any of the
remaining tests outlined above that pipe shall be rejected and the relevant test shall be carried
out on a further ten pipes of that class and diameter.
80.10.2.2.5 Thermal insulating materials
Each Lot shall prepare the manufacture's report for main insulation material such as
Rockwool which is based on ASTM, but shall not newly test the materials particularly for
this project. The manufacture's report shall include the test results for bulk density, specific
heat, fire resistance under pressure and service temperature limit.
80.10.2.3 Manufacturing tests
80.10.2.3.1 Welding
Contractor quality control program for welding testing and inspection will be examined
and commented by SC.
SC will specify the tests he will attend to or execute himself, as well as the documents he
wants to examine (certificates, radiographic films, etc).

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 555/765
In case of findings during a regular inspection, SC has the right to extend the number of
inspections at the charge of the manufacturer.
The following document shall be available on site or in the workshops as a minimum to SC

prior to the beginning of welding, inspection and testing:
• fabrication, testing and inspection procedures

• Welding Book: WPS, PQR's, and WI
• welder qualifications
• NDE operator qualifications
• welding material certificates and storage records.
Welding procedures shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements of the

construction code/specification for the item of plant concerned and in the case of critical
plant items the tests shall be witnessed by an internationally recognized inspection
authority.
Welders shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements of the construction

code/specification for the item of plant concerned for all types/positions of welding he may
perform.
A system of positively identifying the work of each welder shall be maintained and any
welder whose work is the subject of multiple rejections shall be required to undergo a
requalification test. Any welder failing the retest may be disqualified from further welding
on items.
Welded fabrications shall be stress relieved when specified by the applicable standard or
for dimensional stabilization prior to machining.
Copies of temperature charts referenced with load items shall be included in the test
certification supplied for the relevant items.
All welds shall be visually examined and shall be free from cracks, undercut and other
significant defects. Wherever possible the interior of tubes etc. shall be examined using a
suitable optical device where necessary.
Fillet welds shall be checked for size using suitable gauges which shall be available for use
on request by SC' s representative during an inspection visit.
Welds inspection
All welds shall be visually examined and shall be of smooth contour, free from cracks,
undercut and other significant defects. Wherever possible the interior of tubes etc. shall be
examined using a suitable optical device where necessary.
In addition stainless steel welds shall be cleaned and be without annealing colour.
Fillet welds shall be checked for size using suitable gauges which shall be available for use
on request by SC during an inspection visit.
Welded fabrications shall be stress relieved when specified by the applicable standard or
for dimensional stabilization prior to machining. Relevant reports are to be provided.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 556/765
Copies of temperature charts referenced with load items shall be included in the test
certification supplied for the relevant items.
Non destructive examination of pressure and vacuum containment welds

Welds shall be non-destructively tested in accordance with the construction standard
applicable to the item of plant. In addition the requirements of the following table shall be
observed. The table shall also apply in cases where the standards used for design and
construction of an item of plant does not specify the quality requirements for welds. Fault
limitations to be subject of agreement with SC' s representative prior to fabrication.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 557/765
Type of Steel Design Wall Inside Type and Extent qf non Remarks
factor thickness t"tiam destructive testing .·· ...
.··
·. (shelf) (mm) ·.· (mm) Butt Nozzle Fillet

C and C-M n steels with C content not ::;; 0.85 ::;; 10 all - - - Only applicable to:
exceeding 0.25% Atmospheric systems (excluded systems, which
handle chemicals, toxics or inflammable media).
::;; all 10% R - -
> 40 all 100% R 10% M 10% M
> 0.85 ::;; 40 ::;; 100 10% R - -
> 100 100% R 10% M 10% M
> 40 all 100% R 100% M 100% M Test after stress relief
C-Mn steels with C content 0.25 to ::;; 30 all 10% R 10% M 10% M Applicable below 50 bar
0.35% and C 1/2 Mo steels
All > 30 all 100% R 100% M 100% M Test after stress relief
Low alloy steels except CrMoV and 2 All all all 100% R 100% U 100% M Test after stress relief
CrMo
CrMoV and 2CrMo steels and 12% Cr All all ::;; 100 100% R 100% M 100% M Test after stress relief
ferritic/martensitic steels > 100 100% R* 100% M 100% M Test after stress relief
100% U 100% U
* Radiographic examination may be omitted if done on as-welded joint
Austentic Stainless Steels ::;; 0.85 ::;; 15 all - - - Not applicable to:
Butt welds made from one side only
Operating temperatures exceeding 200 °C
::;; 30 all 10% R - -
> 30 all 10% R 10% D 10% D
::;; 100 10% R - -
> 0.85 ::;; 30
> 100 100% R 10% D 10% D
> 30 all 100% R 100% D 100% D
Legend: R = Radiographic examination
u = Ultrasonic examination
M = Magnetic particle examination
D = Dye penetrate examination
Note:
Where 10% examinations are shown for pipework under 100 mm diameter bore this shall be the circumference of 10% of the welds by each welder selected at random with a minimum
of one per welder.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 558/765
Where 10% examinations are shown for vessels or large diameter pipework this shall be 10% of each weld length and must include all intersections of longitudinal and circumferential
welds.
Where partial examinations reveal rejectable defects, adjacent welds or areas of weld shall be examined. In the event of rejectable defects being found welds shall be subject to 100%
examination.
Welds in clad materials shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of the base material and the surface of the overlaid welds shall be dye penetrant tested throughout their
length.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 559/765
Non-destructive examination of structural welds

Welds shall be non-destructively tested in accordance with the construction standard
applicable to the item of plant. Where appropriate, the following requirements shall also be
observed:
• Magnetic particle testing of the tension side welds in major fabricated girders and
Sections.
• Ultrasonic examination of heavily restrained welds (e. g. cruciform joints) where there
is a risk of lamellar tearing in the parent material.
Weld repairs
Unacceptable defects observed by visual examination or indicated by nondestructive
testing shall be completely removed by chipping or thermal gouging and grinding. The
resulting excavation shall be crack detected prior to re-welding.
Details of the original defects and repair shall be recorded.
Repaired welds shall be subjected as a minimum requirement to the same inspection

requirements as the original welds and test records should indicate that a repaired weld is
referred to.
80.10.2.3.2 Pressure testing
All items subjected in service to internal pressure or vacuum shall, except for pressure
parts typically not completed in manufacturer's works, be pressure tested in the
manufacturer's works and prior to any internal or external coating. Pressure test in
manufacturer's works shall be carried out on completed shell in accordance with applicable
standard and code.
Pressure parts (boiler, piping, etc.) typically not completed in manufacturer's works shall
be tested only after completion at site.
Hydrostatic testing
Suitable water shall be used as the test media unless otherwise agreed and test pressures
shall be in accordance with the applicable construction standard.
Power boilers shall be hydrostatic pressure tested in accordance with applicable ASME
PBaPV, Section I and VII whatever is applicable.
The same is valid for power piping in accordance to ASME 31.1.
Piping in accordance with ASME 31.3 - Process piping shall be tested with a pressure
determined in accordance to Chapter 345.4.2 of the code mentioned above considering the
difference between the design and test temperature and the stress limitations of the material
The test pressure shall in any case - not less than 3.5 bar overpressure.
Test pressure of vacuum containment items shall be close to full vacuum subject to
approval by SC

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 560/765
The test pressure shall be maintained for sufficient time to permit complete visual
examination of all surfaces and joints, not less than 1 hour and in no cases less than
specified in the applicable construction standard.
The chloride content of water used for testing austenitic stainless steel items shall not
exceed 30 ppm unless immediate flushing with water of suitable quality is done after the
test.
Pneumatic testing
Pneumatic testing in cases where hydrostatic testing is impractical or undesirable shall be
applied. Safety precautions, test pressures/duration and degree of prior non-destructive
examination of the subject items shall be agreed by SC'.
Pneumatic or gas leak testing supplementary to hydraulic testing shall be applied in

appropriate cases where specified by the applicable construction standard.
80.10.2.3.3 Testing of corrosion protection
Surface coatings
The following tests have to be performed before, during and after coating:
• visual inspection of blasted surfaces according to JIS, DIN EN ISO 12944-1/2/3/4/5/7/8
part 4, annex 1
• test the blast profile with a profile gauge
• checking of coating material
• measurement of air humidity, air temperature and coating substrate temperature and
determination of dew point
• visual inspection of coating
• checking of dry film thickness (DFT)
All zinc rich paint used for such repairs must contain a minimum of 81 % by mass of
zinc in the dry film
• checking of adhesion with a dolly pull adhesion tester in accordance with ASTM
D454I-09 type Al
• Weber Reilly test for soluble salts on substrate after washing.
• wet sponge testing at 90V for all applications in submerged duty, buried pipe or other
aggressive conditions.
Galvanized zinc coatings

Surfaces shall be visually inspected. Bare patches, lumps, blisters or inclusions of foreign
matter exceeding the allowable limit shall be cause for rejection.
Zinc coating thickness shall be determined non-destructively in accordance with JIS, DIN
EN ISO 2178 or coulometrically in accordance with JIS, DIN EN ISO 2177. For coatings
with a weight exceeding 900 g/m2 the coulometric test method specified in JIS, DIN EN
ISO 2177 shall be used.
Hard rub her linings

Surfaces shall be visually inspected. Uneven surfaces, splits, blisters or inclusion of foreign
matter shall be cause for rejection.
The thickness of linings shall be measured in accordance with EN 14879 or equivalent. A

tolerance of+/- 10% is permitted for rubber coatings of 3 mm nominal thickness.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 561/765
Hardness tests shall prove compliance with the rubber manufacturer's standards.
The absence of pores shall be proved by the induction sparking test method. The potential
used shall be 5000 Volts for each mm of thickness plus an additional 5000 Volts (i.e.
potential of 20,000 Volts for 3 mm thick lining).
80.10.2.4 Mechanical equipment
80.10.2.4.1 Balance testing of rotating units
Each rotating unit shall be first statically and then dynamically balanced according to ISO
1940 (in the case of impellers this shall be done before and after mounting of the service
rotor shaft). A check balance of items that have undergone over speed test shall also be
made.
80.10.2.4.2 Vibration testing of rotating units
The vibration characteristics of rotating units shall be measured during performance tests.
Locations of measurement and standards to be achieved shall, be subject to agreement by
SC.
80.10.2.4.3 Pumps
Running tests and performance tests shall be conducted on all pumps. Performance tests
shall be conducted through the full operation range of the pump to closed valve conditions.
Graphs indicating flow/head, flow/power absorbed, flow/efficiency, flow/NPSH and speed
shall be produced. Results for feed pumps shall be assessed with reference to JIS, DIN EN
ISO 9906 class 1 (without construction tolerances), and results for other pumps to class II
or III as agreed.
The lubricating oil used in the test shall be of the same brand and grade as that
recommended by the manufacturer for service use.
Dismantling of the pump for visual examination of parts for damage following test shall be
done when required by the inspection standard, when considered necessary by the
manufacturer, or when requested by SC witnessing the running or performance tests.
Replacement of parts following test shall necessitate repeat testing.
Steam turbines
be completely assembled with their stop and governing valves on a

suitable erection rig a e manufacturer's works and shall be carefully inspected and
measured for manufacture ssembly tolerances. Functional tests shall be performed on
the safety equipment (running wit mis not requested).
Important items of turbine control equipment wli1 annot be adequately tested during the
main tests shall be separately bench tested.
Furthermore, testing shall comprise:
• balancing and over speed test of the assembled rotor (over speed tes
Rotor only)

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 562/765
• measurement of radial clearan,.~--

• assembling inspection.
80.10.2.4.5 Air compressors
Air compressors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 1571, class C.1
part 1, ISO 1217, ASME PTC-9 or VDI 2045 - sheets 1, 2 and 3 or similar standards.
Any request for deviation from the test conditions shall be accompanied by the
manufacturers' proposals for the adjustment of the correction factors contained in the
standard.
Tolerances shall be allowed according to ISO/R 541.
80.10.2.4.6 Cranes and hoists
Where size permits cranes and hoists shall be completely assembled at the manufacturers
works and functional tests without load conducted.
80.10.2.5 Electrical equipment
All electrical equipment shall be type and routine tested in the factories. Type tests shall
not be repeated if type test certificates of identical or similar equipment are available.
The electrical equipment shall be tested in accordance with the following

recommendations.
Generators
IEC 60034, IEEE 115, ISO 1680 and ISO 10816
General
All type tests on assembled generator shall be performed on at least one typical generator
(one of each type) and all routine tests shall be performed on all generators and offered for
SC/Engineer witness.
In case the Bidder/Contractor declares in his Offer/Contract, that some of the type tests, as
specified in below sub-paragraphs, are already performed by him on identical or similar
generators and that after award of Contract he will provide relevant commented tests
reports instead of carrying out the requested type tests, this may be acceptable only if
provided test reports of identical or similar generators are accepted by SC.
Irrespective whether some type tests may have been carried out before already or will be
carried out under this Contract, each generator test report shall include:
• Description of the test method, equipment used and any limitations of the test plant.
• Copies of the oscillographs recorded with appropriate calibration data.
• Open-circuit saturation-, short-circuit- and loss-curves for the generator.
• A performance chart of the generator (being a diagram of constant stator and rotor
current curves plotted on rectangular axis of MVar and MW load). The recommended
loading, stator core end heating and stability limits shall be shown on the chart.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 563/765
• Calculations of full load temperature rise for the stator, rotor and exciter. Any correction
factors used to allow for different voltage, current and cooling conditions shall be
justified by reference to published literature or to previous type tests.
• Calculations of the efficiency of the complete generator at 100%, 75% and 50% load.
Any correction factors for losses which could not be directly measured shall be justified
by reference to published literature or to previous type tests.
• Calculations of machine parameters such as transient reactance and transient time
constant, sub-transient reactance and sub-transient time constant, short-circuit ratio,
synchronous reactance, negative-phase sequence reactance, zero-sequence reactance,
generator capacitance, harmonic analysis of the neutral current.
• Calculation of full-load excitation of the machine at specified nominal lagging power
factor (p.f.) and at unity p.f., excitation V-curves to show excitation levels appropriate
to other loads.
• All type test certificate results of a modular production line of generators shall clearly
be transfered to the contracted generator. All calculations to adjust the previous type test
results including curves, shall be easy to follow/reproduce.
outine Tests on Generator Stator

A r assembly of generator stator the following electrical tests shall be made for each
gene tor in the factory:
• EL (or equivalent) test (test on interlaminar insulation of stator core sheets),
• Measur ents of winding resistances,
• Measurem t of impedance,
• Phase seque e check,
• Check of curre and voltage symmetry,
• Measurement of i ulation resistances before high voltage test,
• High voltage test,
• Measurement of insulat · n resistances after high voltage test,
• Electrical check of embed d RTD' s in the stator winding,
• Check of rating plate and vis 1 inspection of stator.
Routine Tests on Generator Rotor

After assembly of generator rotor the fo owing electrical tests shall be made for each
generator in the factory:
• Rotor over-speed test (120%),
• Measurement of vibration (bearing and shaft
• Turn to turn insulation test,
• Measurement of insulation resistances before diel
• Dielectrical test,
• Measurement of insulation resistances after di electrical
Routine Tests on assembled Generator

After assembly of generator the following electrical tests shall be
( at site, before final taking-over):
• Shaft voltage measurement,
• Verification of phase sequence and appropriate terminal marking,
• Measurement of vibration,
• Bearing temperature rises and losses,
• Measurement of insulation resistance and dielectric test,

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 564/765
easurement of excitation response time (overall characteristics coupled with generator

d A VR cubicle at no-load).
• P ial discharge test
e Tes on assembled Generator

The genera or shall be type tested. The type test (one of each generator type) shall include
the followin tests (latest at site, before final taking-over):
• Sudden sho circuit test at reduced voltage (30%, 50% and 70% of rated voltage) with
determinatio of transient and subtransient reactances and time constants extrapolated to
rated voltage. the manufacturer does not have the equipment to execute sudden short
circuit test with 0% of rated voltage the test shall be performed with following reduced
voltage levels ofr ted voltage (30%, 40%, 45% and 50%),
• Temperature rise te
• Equivalent heat run te t consisting of
• windage and friction he t run,
• open-circuit heat run at 1 5% rated voltage,
• short-circuit heat run at rat line current,
• open-circuit heat run at rate ine voltage,
• Measurement of open-circuit · ect-access transient time constant,
• Noise measurements,
• Measurement of vibration (bearin and shaft),
• Unbalanced load test for negative-pha: e sequence reactance,
• Determination of the zero-sequence rea tance,
• Oscillographing of verified voltage wave orm and harmonic analysis,
• Generator retardation test.
Routine Test on each Exciter

• Resistance of windings,
• insulation resistance,
• high voltage tests,
• short circuit characteristic,
• no-load characteristic,
• quadrature-field voltage test.
Irres ective of the availabilit t e test certificate the followin s all be carried out for
each generator before shipment to site:
• Three phase short circuit characteristic test and current balance c
• Open-circuit characteristic test and voltage balance,
• Segregation of mechanical loss and core loss,
• Segregation of stray load loss,
• Efficiency calculation,
• Verification of phase sequence and appropriate terminal marking,
• Measurement of vibration,
• Bearing temperature rises and losses,
• Measurement of insulation resistance and dielectric test,
• Partial discharge test

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 565/765
G erator test re ort:

Co rehensive test reports for the generators shall be compiled and submitted by each Lot,
whic shall include:
• Descr· tion of the test method, equipment used and any limitations of the test plant.
• open ci uit saturation, short circuit and loss curves for the generator
• a perfor ance chart of the generator (being a diagram of constant stator and rotor
current cu es plotted on rectangular axis of MVar and MW load) The recommended
loading, stat core end heating and stability limits shall be shown on the chart.
• calculations o ull load temperature rise for the stator, rotor and exciter. Any correction
factors used to llow for different voltage-, current- and cooling-conditions shall be
justified by refere ce to published literature or to previous type tests.
• calculations of the fficiency of the complete generator at 100%, 75% and 50% load.
Any correction facto for losses that could not be measured at routine tests shall be
justified by reference t published literature or to previous type tests.
• calculations of machine arameters such as transient reactance and time constant, sub-
transient reactance and ·me constant, short circuit ratio, synchronous reactance,
negative phase sequence re ctance, zero sequence reactance, capacitance and also the
harmonic analysis of the neut 1current.
• calculation of full load excitatl n of the machine at rated power factor lagging and at
unity power factor, excitation V
HV motors
IEC 60034, ISO 1680, ISO 10816
• Type tests (each motor type) as far as ty e test certificates are not available
• measurement of starting current and torqu
• efficiency measurement
• heat run test
• noise measurement
• Routine tests (each motor)
• measurement of winding resistances
• no-load test
• dielectric tests
• measurement of insulation resistances
• over-speed tests
• check of motor vibrations
Emergency diesel sets

All relevant routine and type tests according to
JIS Standard
ISO 3046 Reciprocating internal combustion engines - Per rmance
DIN 6280 Generating sets with reciprocating internal combus ·on engines
DINVDEOI00-718 Installation of gathering people
DINVDE-0100-516 Selection and erection of electrical equipment
or equivalent
Power transformers
IEC 6007 6 Power transformers
IEC 60214 On-load tap-changers
IEC 60404-2 Magnetic materials

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 566/765
• asurement of winding resistance

• Me urement of voltage ratio and check of voltage vector
• Meas rement of impedance voltage, short circuit impedance and load loss
• Measu ment of no-load loss and current at Ur, 1. 05 x Ur and 1.1 x Ur
• Dielectri routine tests in accordance with IEC 60076-3.
• Tangent delta m asurements on the insulation

• Partial discharge easurements for windings of 30 kV rating or above
• Gas in oil analysis
• partial discharge mea urement for Generator transformer
• Transformer tanks, c servators, oil pipework and air cooled cooling plant shall
withstand without leaki or permanent distortion, the application for 24 hours of a
pressure which is such th the test pressure at any point in the equipment is twice the
working pressure at that po· tor 0.7 kg/cm2 plus the working pressure at the point or
0.3 kg/cm2 plus the pressure exerted at that point when the pressure relief is opened
slowly by oil pressure whichev is the greatest.
All above tests shall be carried out on 11 transformers.
The followin tests in accordance with I C to be carried out as t e tests:

• Temperature rise test
• Measurement of the harmonics of the no- ad current
• Dielectric type tests in accordance with IE 60076-3
• Measurement of zero sequence impedance
• Noise measurements
• Measurement of the power taken by the fan and ·guid pump motors
• Measurement of no-load loss and current at 90% a d 110% of rated voltage
500 KV GIS switchgear

Following standards or equivalent shall be used:
IEC 62271 High-Voltage switchgear and controlgear
IEC 60060 High-Voltage test
IEC 60137 Insulated bushing for alternate voltage above 1000
IEC 60099 Surge arresters
AC Switchgear for voltages above 1 kV

Following standards and regulations or equivalent shall be used.
JEM 1425 AC. metal-enclosed switchgear and control gear for rate
lkV and up to and including 52kV
IEC 62271 High-voltage switchgear and control gear -ALL PARTS
IEEE C37.0I3IEEE standard for AC-High-Voltage generator circuit breaker
symmetrical current
High voltage fuses

Following standards and regulations or equivalent shall be used:
IEC 60282-1, IEC 60282-2 High voltage fuses

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 567/765
Current transformers
IEC 61869-2 Current Transformers
Voltage transformers
IEC 61869-3 Inductive Voltage Transformers
IEC 60168 Voltage Transformers
Low voltage switchgear

Fallowing standards and regulations or equivalent shall be used:
IEC 60439 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IEC 6094 7 Low-voltage switchgear and control gear
Capacitors
Fallowing standards and regulations or equivalent shall be used.
IEC 60143 Series capacitors for power systems
IEC 603 58 Coupling capacitors and capacitor dividers
IEC 603 84 Fixed capacitors for use in electronic equipment
IEC 60831 Shunt power capacitors
IEC 60871 Shunt capacitors for AC. power systems
IEC 60931 Shunt power capacitors
Batteries, charging equipment and inverters

IEC 60086 Primary batteries
IEC 60119 Recommendations for polycrystalline semiconductor rectifier stacks and
equipment
IEC 60146 Semiconductor converters
Lamps and accessories

IEC 60081 Tubular fluorescent lamps for general lighting service
IEC 60155 Starters for fluorescent lamps
IEC 60188 High-pressure mercury-vapor lamps
IEC 60192 Low-pressure sodium vapor lamps
IEC 60400 Lampholders and starter holders for tubular fluorescent lamps
IEC 60598-1 Luminaries for tubular fluorescent lamps
IEC 60662 High-pressure sodium vapor lamps
IEC 60901 Single-capped fluorescent lamps
IEC 61347 Ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps
IEC 60921 Ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps
MV- and LV-cable

IEC 60228 Conductors of insulation cables
IEC 60331 Test for electric cables under fire conditions
IEC 60332 Test on electric cables under fire conditions
IEC 60502 Power Cables with extruded insulation and their
accessories for rated voltage from lKV (Um= 1.2KV) up to 30KV (Um=
36KV)
Power installations up to 1000 V

IEC 60364 Electrical installations of buildings
IEC 60439-4 Particular requirements for assemblies for construction sites (ACS)

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 568/765
Power installation above 1000 V

IEC 60060 High-voltage test techniques
Protection equipment
Equipment for modular static protection systems (e.g. generator, distance, bus bar,
protection, etc.) pre-assembled in the relevant standardized boards / cubicles etc. shall be
tested in the manufacturers' workshops according to IEC 6025 5 as far as wiring and proper
function is concerned. Simulated inputs (binary signals, current and voltage inputs from
test power supplies) shall be used.
Fire alarm system

NFPA (USA) National fire code, Vol 7, Codes no. 71 and 72A-E
Telecommunication installations
IEC 60215 Safety requirements for radio transmitting equipment
Aerials
IEC 60169 Radio-frequency connectors
EN 50083-1 Regulations for aerial installations
Each Lot shall perform individual test of electrical/instrument apparatus mounted or

equipped on the switchgears and distribution boards at factory. Individual tests, such as
relay tests, including settings and sequence tests, as well as calibration tests shall be
performed at the factory
Miscellaneous
Materials:
Raw materials (such as bolts, nuts, etc.) shall be in accordance with JIS (Japanese
Industrial Standards) or equivalent international standard.
Threads, Pipes and Standardized Devices:

Generally the metric threads and pipes shall be used according to ISO (International
Organization for Standardization).
Pressure Vessel:
Pressure vessel shall be designed, fabricated and tested according to the requirement of the
national Standard PVCC "Pressure Vessel Construction Code of Japanese Government
(Ministry of Labor)", which is equivalent to ASME.
80.10.2.6 Control and monitoring equipment
For all control and monitoring equipment manufacturers' specifications shall be provided,
which indicate that the equipment operates correctly within the specified temperature and
humidity range. In case such specifications are not available, the type test data of
equipment shall be issued or the equipment shall be tested at the manufacturers' works
before dispatch to site.
Certificates shall be issued for

• synchronizing units
• flow evaluators

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 569/765
Electrical measuring instruments

All electrical measuring instruments shall be tested in accordance with the following rules
and regulations or equivalent standards.
• IEC 60051 Recommendations for direct-acting indicating electrical measunng
instruments and their accessories
• IEC 60258 Direct acting recording electrical measunng instruments and their
accessones
• IEC 61010 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and
laboratory use
• IEC 61036 Alternating current static watt-hour meters for active energy
Electrical remote indication

Meters for active power, reactive power and similar remote indication equipment:
• IEC 60338 Telemetering for consumption and demand
Calibration tests
Each Lot shall conduct calibration tests of the following instruments and equipment:
all local indicators over the full range of the indicator
• all transmitters over the full range of the transmitter
• all binary transmitters over the full range including initial setting
• all remote indicators over the full range of the indicator
• all recorders over the full range of the recorder
• all superheated steam thermocouples
• one of each type of thermocouple or resistance element
• all kinds of analogue transmitters over the full measuring range
• all modules and subassemblies for measuring and control e.g. analogue limit monitors,
flow evaluators, function generators
• all quantity meters
• all synchronizing units according to IEC standards
• the actual dimensions of all orifices, nozzles, Venturi nozzles have to be measured and
certified by an independent authorized specialist.
Closed-loop control systems

All main closed-loop control systems shall be tested for polarity and function in
accordance with the applicable standards. Control valves shall be tested in accordance with
mechanical functional tests on control valves and shall be performed with the actuator
mounted (open to closed position and vice-versa). Actuators shall be subject to mechanical
and electrical function tests.
Sequence logic equipment

All sequence logic equipment shall be tested using simulated inputs.
Alarm annunciator and fault printing system

The alarm annunciator and fault printing system shall be tested using simulated inputs.
DCS system
The system shall be thoroughly tested at the manufacturers' workshops before dispatch to
site. Test programs shall be devised and these shall subsequently be made available to SC.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 570/765
80.10.3Testing at Site
Civil construction tests
The espective Lot Contractor shall carry out all required civil construction tests. Thereby
part o the test like concrete and earthwork tests have to be carried out at site, other tests
have to e performed in the manufacturer workshops.
The respecCve Lot Contractor shall submit all test certificates of materials subject to
approval by and shall arrange for tests of all materials to be carried out in laboratories
on site or else ere. The cost of all test equipment, samples, tests and transport to the
laboratory shall borne by the respective Lot Contractor.
The testing operatio shall be performed in accordance with the relevant codes or
standards and under tH supervision of SC.
Where in the specificatio materials are specified to be approved by the SC, samples shall
be submitted for approval a the earliest possible date and strictly before any purchasing or
delivery to the site is made. e individual tests and inspection for the materials, supply
and execution shall be carried t in compliance with the requirements of the individual
technical specifications. In the ca: e of rejection, further samples of the rejected materials
shall be submitted to SC until they e approved or the material is replaced. SC may reject
any material which in his opinion is ot in accordance with the approved standard. All
samples shall be submitted free of cha e to SC.
The characteristics as determined in the s ples which are approved shall indicate the
standard to be maintained in the materials u ed in the execution of the works.
The test samples of materials subject to approv by SC shall be kept in a safe place and
protected against damage or deterioration until c pletion of the works.
For materials (e.g. steelwork, pipes, ducts, etc.) to be anufactured in workshops

respective manufacturer test certificates including test esults shall be submitted to SC
subject to approval.
After final completion of certain civil structures/ parts to be eady for erection of further
equipment individual "Civil Completion Certificates" shall b issued by the respective Lot
Contractor under the following conditions:
• Except for minor items of work that would not affect the fety, all civil works for
applicable parts, structures or buildings have been carried out an tested
• All such civil works are in a manner that does not void any su contractor or vendor
warranties or violate any applicable law or applicable permit
• Punch List has been agreed upon by SC and respective Lot Contracto
• Contractor warrants that all necessary works have been undertaken
parts, structures or buildings are ready for erection.
If SC is satisfied that the pre-conditions for the issuance of the Civil ompletion
Certificate for the respective civil structures/ parts have been met the Civil Co
Completion Certificate shall be signed off by SC.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 571/765
80.10.3.2 Erection Test/ Construction completion tests
During erection all required Construction Completion Tests (including mechanical

completion checks, electrical and I&C checks and tests of individual systems) shall be
performed, but not be limited to:
The activities necessary for construction completion shall include at least the following:
checking of complete installation of all systems
• completion of buildings and structures as required for commissioning
• test of ventilating and air-conditioning units
• alignment of rotating equipment coupled on site (submission of the respective
inspection records by the respective Lot Contractors)
• safety audit (checking of safety valves, safe erection of equipment, etc. by respective
inspection records submitted by the respective Lot Contractors)
• submission of testing documents of site welds (non-destructive examinations)
• pressure testing, leak tests, tightness tests (submission of the respective inspection
records by the respective Lot Contractors)
• checking of pipe hangers, supports, guides, etc. (submission of the respective inspection
records by the respective Lot Contractors)
• pipe line and equipment flushing and cleaning (submission of the respective inspection
records by the respective Lot Contractor)s
• chemical protection of piping systems (submission of the respective inspection records
by the respective Lot Contractors)
• checking of coating, insulation (submission of the respective inspection records by the
respective Lot Contractors)
• checking of access to equipment for operation & maintenance
• testing of cranes and hoists
• tests on the 500 kV equipment:
• sufficient number of spare parts available for all delivered devices and components.
During the erection period and before the associated plant item shall be put into operation.
All instrumentation and control equipment shall be tested by the respective Lot Contractors
in close collaboration with the other Lot Contractors wherever any interconnection exists.
Furthermore the following checks and tests for the electrical & I&C equipment shall be
made to prove the erection completion (some checks shall be based on test records
submitted by the respective Lot Contractors):
• screwed connections for correct assembly
• terminals and terminal connections for correct assembly
• checking of earthing connections and testing of earthing resistances
• measurement of insulation values
• fire-proof partitioning
• marking, inscription, provision of designation plates
• rotating-field measurement
• phase coincidence with 2 half-busbars
• voltage checks
• polarity checks in the case of D.C. voltages
• fuses, overcurrent trips, short-circuit trips, time settings, relay settings
• switchgear and transformer oil levels
• safety signs and warning signs

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 572/765
• setting indicators, revertive (check-back) signals to the central control room etc.
• checks on wiring and cabling for conformity with the constructional circuit-drawings
and plans
• checking and functionality testing of electrical systems according to EN/IEC standards
• tests on the generator main busbar: checking for the gas-tightness of individual main
connections system
• tests on the earthing and lightning protection system: acceptance tests and
measurements of the earthing installations in accordance with HD 63751 and of the
lightning protection systems IEC 62305
• tests on the lighting system: proof of the minimum new value of lighting densities by
measurement, checking of correct operation.
• the Distributed Control System is operational and the CEMS has been installed, tested
and is fully functional.
Visual checking of relay settings and interlock testing as well as adjustment of settings
after installation shall be performed at site.
Apart from the completeness of the installed plant, the plant's proper condition in terms of
safety and the proper removal of all wastes, residual materials and erection aids from the
construction site by the Lot Contractors shall also be precondition for commencement of
Test on Completion.
After successful completion of each system, individual "Application for Construction

Completion Certificates" shall be issued by the Lot Contractors under the following
conditions:
• except for minor items of work that would not affect the safety and/or performance or
operation, all materials and equipment have been installed and tested
• all such equipment and systems have been installed in a manner that does not void any
subcontractor or vendor warranties or violate any applicable law or applicable permit;
• the commissioning manual have been received with SC' s written approval
• punch lists has been agreed upon by SC and Lot Contractors
• the Lot Contractor warrant that all necessary work has been undertaken and that the
plant is ready for pre-commissioning
• work package for each system has received SC' s written approval.
• draft operating manual has received SC' s written approval.
80.10.3.3 Pre-commissioning tests
The pre-commissioning tests (cold commissioning) shall cover mainly the functional tests
of the individual items of all mechanical, electrical and I&C systems including their alarm
and tripping systems.
Preconditions for pre-commissioning are inter aha: the mechanical completion of the
systems and the part thereof (i.e. all relevant punch points shall be rectified), the
availability of the accepted commissioning test program and commissioning procedures.
Should SC decide that the preconditions for commencement of pre-commissioning have

not been adequately met; SC will advise the respective Lot Contractors accordingly and
withhold the commencement of the pre-commissioning until the outstanding work is
completed.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 573/765
The below mentioned tests shall be included in the pre-commissioning tests, but not be
limited to:
Mechanical equipment
Individual pre-commissioning runs of all rotating equipment such as pumps, compressors,
dosing equipment etc.
Functional tests of the mechanical equipment
Testing and adjustment of safety devices
Electrical equipment
As far as not already covered by the erection tests the pre-commissioning tests shall cover:
• voltage tests
• trip tests
• functional tests of the equipment.
Control equipment
Calibration tests of instrumentation, loop checking, functional testing of control equipment,
interlocks, protection inputs, etc.
Any additional tests

Any other functional tests required.
80.10.3.4 Commissioning tests
If SC is satisfied that the preconditions for commencement of the commissioning (hot

commissioning) test have been met (inter aha all relevant punch points shall be rectified)
and the successful completion of all pre-commissioning tests have been achieved the
commissioning tests shall commence.
Should SC decide that the preconditions for commissioning have not been adequately met;
SC will advise the respective Lot Contractors accordingly and withhold the
commencement of the commissioning until the outstanding work is completed.
The main goals of the commissioning tests are the following:
• demonstration that the plant is prepared and adjusted to ensure the correct functioning
of the individual components and of the complete plant
• demonstration that the equipment items are capable to operate properly in a reliable
manner
• demonstration that the plant systems comply with the different operating modes as
contractually agreed
• demonstration that the equipment and the plant systems are safe and that the personal
safety is ensured.
The commissioning tests shall cover at least following tests, but not be limited to:
• startup and operational test of common and auxiliary systems such as:
• water and effluent treatment systems
• primary and start-up fuel system
• cooling water systems
• compressed air system
• chemical treatment systems

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 574/765
• material handling systems

• waste handling and treatment systems
• flue gas emission systems
• startup/auxiliary boiler system
• UPS/emergency power systems
• other systems as provided in the design
• protection tests
operation of selected turbine train protection devices including the following as a

mm1mum:
• fire protection
• boiler protection
• steam turbine protection
• generator protection
• transformer protection
• fine tuning of all closed control loops
• co-operation of the different function groups and other control loops
• method of alarm/trip condition reset for subsequent starting
• proof of safety valves settings
• operation of fire protection systems
• isolation procedure tests - proof of isolation procedures of plant equipment for safe
shut-down and maintenance including as a minimum:
• HV station and unit supplies
• LV supplies
• fuel oil systems
• coal handling systems
• ash handling systems
• fire protection systems
• demonstration of operating stability of unit(s )/plant when operated between 30% and
100% nominal load conditions with load variations by increasing or decreasing the
electric load
• verification of start-up/main fuel change-over:
• semi-automatic change-over from fuel oil operation to coal operation
• semi-automatic change-over from coal operation to fuel oil operation
• operation of auxiliary systems
• method of changeover of main equipment to stand-by equipment prior to plant
starting for fuel oil, coal handling, ash handling, oil lube and cooling systems
• start-up tests:
• normal semi-automatic start to preset load
• staged semi-automatic including start to synchronous speed, manual synchronizing
(including synchronizing checks), automatic synchronizing, manual and automatic
loading
• operation of all auxiliaries
• demonstration of changeover of main equipment to stand-by equipment prior to plant
starting for fuel oil, coal handling, ash handling, oil lube and cooling systems
• load change tests
• demonstration of partial and full-load rejection:
• verify control systems, turbine governor operation, automatic voltage regulation
system, etc.
• full-load rejection tests to measure transient maximum speed and steady state speed
at normal governor droop setting

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 575/765
We infmm of the deletion of below stated test from start-up tests listed in
Tanjung Jati B Re-Expa Section B0.10.3.4. For the avoidance of doubt, house load operation is not
required .
•
eapetl9ility
• avoidance of HP safety valves lifting at any load rejection
• verification of switch-over of redundant equipment in automatic mode
• demonstration of the capabilities of the power units to operate at rated voltage and
frequency, in accordance with the generator capability curves, if the grid permits for
these situation.
• demonstration of proper controlling, monitoring and recording according to the
requirements of the Grid Code
• protection systems/settings, in accordance with agreed design and the requirements
of the transmission system
• verification of active power response and voltage control response according to the
requirements specified in the network connection conditions
• verification of thermal heat loss of entire insulation by infra-red measurement
• verification of vibration and noise emissions of major equipment.
• environmental monitoring equipment, water quality monitoring equipment,
functioning tests.
• demonstration of the teledispatching and telemetering systems
• verification of completeness of scope of supply by issuance of the Mechanical
Completion Certificate.
• Completion of classroom and/or hands on training in accordance with the training
requirements.
• Commissioning of 500kV GIS switchyard as per section B3.start-up tests:
80.10.3.5 Optimization of overall plant operation
The optimisation of the overall plant shall be carried out once all the commission tests
have been successfully completed.
Optimisation of operation shall be performed at stable operation conditions at various loads

under consideration of steady state and transient i.e. load changing and capable load cases
shall be demonstrated, but not be limited to:
Simulated malfunctions to be mutually agreed shall be demonstrated.

The following activities shall be carried-out by the Lot Contractors among others during
this period:
the optimization of the process requirements with the entire I&C-equipment, especially all
functional groups, open and closed control loops, alarm annunciation, etc. shall be done
the Lot Contractors shall prove ability to obtain the minimum performance level with
regard to net heat rate and net power output.
the Lot Contractors shall prove ability to obtain the guaranteed values of emissions
verification of start-up times and loading rates at various downtime conditions and
verification of unloading rates.
80.10.3.5.1 Predicted performance tests
Predicted performance tests shall be carried out to verify the capacity and capability of
major plant items using permanent plant instruments. These tests shall be carried out to
verify that the units / plant can be operated in accordance to the Contract conditions and
that the completion tests which shall follow later may be passed successfully.
The predicted performance tests shall include the following:

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 576/765
a) Steam Generator and Auxiliaries (without any manual adjustment during the test)
• Attainment of predicted output using pulverized coal from any five of the six
pulverizers provided.
• Verification of start-up time from cold start to full load, and hot start to full load.
• Keeping of the main steam pressure at rated value from 90% of ECR to MCR.
• Keeping ofrated value of main steam temperature from 50% ofECR to MCR.
• Load rejection test at loads of 50%, 75%, 100% of ECR shall be tested. No
malfunction or endangering of the equipment shall take place and all controls shall
operate safely.
• Rapid reduction of load when the load is above 50% of ECR due to failure of either
forced draft fan or induced draft fan
• Excess air at various loads.
• Air leakage in the air heaters.
• Verification of flue gas temperature at air heaters outlet.
• Automatic change-over of standby equipment (if any)
• Correct operation of soot blowing system.
• Operating at minimum load firing pure coal.
b) Steam Turbine and Auxiliaries (without any manual adjustments during the test)
• Correct de-aerating effect of condenser and deaerator.
• Load rejection.
• Capability to sustain rapid reduction of load arising from failure of turbine
auxiliaries.
• Automatic change-over of standby equipment, (if any).
• Capability to sustain rapid reduction of load arising from failure of boiler and its
auxiliaries.
• Full load rejection test
• Rapid reduction of load when the load is above 50% of rated output due to failure of
boiler feedwater pump without intervention of the standby pump or turbine load
reduction due to turbine auxiliary failure or HP Heater Cut.
c) Coal Handling Plant

• Verification of the capacity of coal unloader, conveyors, stacker/reclaimer and
crusher.
• Verification of power requirement of coal unloader, conveyor, stacker/reclaimer and
crusher.
d) Ash Handling Plant

• Verification of the predicted capacity.
• Verification of automatic change-over of standby equipment. Verification of power
requirements of blowers, pumps, etc.
e) Water Treatment Plant (including Desalination Plant)

• Verification of demineralised and desalinated water quality.
• After successful completion of the Final Inspection and Testing Sub-Contractor shall
be authorized to start with the Completion Tests.
• Verification of plant capacity.
f) Auxiliary equipment
• Load test of overhead crane.
• Load test of other cranes and hoisting equipment.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 577/765
• Operation of fire fighting equipment.

• Load test of air conditioning system.
• Verification of chlorination system.
g) Flue gas desulphurization system

• Verification of pump function
• Verification of power consumption with FGD in service.
• Verification of automatic change-over of standby equipment.
• Verification of automatic operation of the FGD plant.
• Verification of outlet S0 2 emissions utilizing plant instrumentation.
• Verification of oxidation compressor function.
80.10.3.5.2 Benchmark testing
Benchmark testing of the performance of the plant at 50% and 75% rated capacity shall be
carried out to provide a base comparison datum for SC' s subsequent use during the life of
the plant. This testing shall be performed after completion of applicable plant tuning in
accordance with the test procedure to be prepared by the respective Lots and shall be
conducted utilizing the permanent plant instrumentation.
80.10.4 Completion tests
Requirements specified below are for one unit if not stated otherwise.
Completion tests consist of:

• performance tests
which is conducted to verify the performance guarantees
• reliability run
which is scheduled for 30 days to test the reliability of a unit and its related systems
• station criteria tests
which is performed to verify the plant performance, the emission limits (air and noise)
as well as all other limits (i. a. effluent discharges) imposed on the plant.
80.10.4.1 Performance tests
After successful completion of the commissioning tests, successful completion of the plant
optimization, rectification of all relevant punch point and after relevant test protocols have
been received by SC the performance tests shall be commenced.
Prior to the tests a detailed procedure covering the testing to be undertaken and the
methods to be employed shall be provided by the respective Lot Contactors. The test
procedure shall also detail areas of responsibility and the items that specifically require
preparation and agreement before the tests can be carried out. SC / SC' s representatives
shall have the right to witness the tests.
All test instrumentation is to be supplied by each Lot and is to be retained by each Lot
upon the satisfactory conclusion of all such tests at site, unless otherwise specified in the
contract.
Instruments employed for the performance tests shall be pre-calibrated once by each Lot
(i.e. prior to first Unit performance test), except for instruments which are calibrated and

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 578/765
certified at the certified laboratory or manufacturer's shop before shipment holding the
authorized traceability certificate.
The Lot Contractors shall supply and install all instrumentation needed to conduct the tests.
They shall also remove all temporary instrumentation installed for test purposes only.
Metering used to record fuel consumption and electrical output shall be of suitable
accuracy for performance testing according to the appropriate test code. The meters
recording net output shall be capable of displaying kilowatt hours for the duration of the
test.
Performance guarantees applicable are provided in the PG-data sheets of the B-Parts of this
request for proposal as well as in B0.4.
Performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with following standards:

• steam generator ASME PTC 4
• steam turbine ASME PTC 6
Test program
For the performance tests the respective Lot Contractors shall submit a test program
covering the following documents but not be limited to:
• test procedure and standards (including proposed formulae/ curves and standards)
• test schedule
• type of test
• manpower and deployment schedule of the Contractor for performing the tests forms of
test records and report
• description of instrumentation to be used, including accuracy, and calibration test results
• method of data recording
• list of all auxiliary loads that will be operating during the tests. The list of auxiliary
loads shall be provided with the test program and agreed in the Test Procedure.
• method and equations/correction curves used for adjustment of recorded data to the
design conditions.
Test conditions
Performance tests shall be conducted at conditions close to the conditions of the guarantees.
Thereby the boiler and steam turbine cycle shall be adjusted to the conditions of the
corresponding heat balance diagram. Since the accuracy of the test results highly depend
on the exact water-steam cycle arrangement respective cycle isolation is required to avoid
any unknown cycle leakages. The valve position list has to be provided by the Lot
Contractors prior to the performance test. This cycle arrangement shall fully remain during
the whole testing period. Any changes of the performance conditions during the tests are
not allowed.
The performance tests can be started after steady operating conditions have been reached
for at least two hours.
All electrical consumers (with the exception of the stand-by consumers) shall be in
operation during the performance tests, including but not be limited to:
• coal handling system
• bottom ash & fly ash handling system
• water and waste water treatment plants
• HVAC and lighting

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 579/765
• All office and administrative consumers.
The Lot Contractors shall provide a load list with the performance test procedure for
approval by SC.
If for any reason some consumers are not in operation during the tests, the respective
auxiliary power demand shall be determined separately and included in the test results.
This includes especially the power demand for the coal unloading and storage system.
Prior to the performance tests the coal bunkers shall be filled.
The only consumers (other than standby consumers) that shall not be in operation during
the tests are the workshop machines, cranes, hoists and the on-load boiler cleaning system
(water lances, soot blowers).
The test duration shall be in accordance with the standards and codes but at least four hours,
during which the operating conditions shall remain steady.
The method of measuring all quantities and qualities and the measurement tolerances shall
be in accordance with ASME PTC for the respective system. All instruments to be used for
the performance test shall be strictly controlled and calibrated. Each measuring instrument
used shall be provided with a valid calibration certificate.
Readings shall be taken via an electronic data acquisition system (to be provided by the
Lot Contractors). The electronic data shall be recorded every 30 seconds.
The test shall be carried out by Lot Contractors' personnel with the assistance of the
operating staff normally appointed to operate the units. SC shall also be present during the
tests.
At the end of the test run, test log sheets and records will be jointly signed by SC and the
Lot Contractors, reproduced and distributed to the parties.
SC reserves the right to award a third party (e.g. technical inspection agency) to be present
and check the performance tests results at his own expense.
Scope of performance tests

The following guarantees defined shall be tested by means of official Performance Tests:
• Net power output guarantee at TMCR
• Net heat rate guarantee at ECR
Test evaluation
The curves required for the correction of the net power output and net heat rate shall be
applied.
The margins required for instrument inaccuracies and for all other reasons shall be deemed
to be included in the guarantee figures. The actual figures determined during performance
tests shall hence not be corrected with any margins due to instrument inaccuracies prior to
comparison with the guarantee figures.
Degradation and fouling during commissioning and other operation prior to Completion
shall be deemed to be included in the guarantee figures. The actual figures determined
during performance tests shall hence not be corrected for any degradation or fouling effect
prior to comparison with the guarantee figures.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 580/765
Procedures for measurement of other parameters such as ambient temperature, barometric

pressure, relative humidity etc shall be fully detailed in the performance test procedure.
A Performance test report shall be submitted by the lot contractors. This report shall
include, as a minimum, the following:
• description of the test procedures
• instrumentation details and calibrations (not older than six months)
• full process flow diagrams for fuel, air and flue gas and water and steam with indication
of instrument position
• standards that were used
• test logs and summary (arithmetic average) of test readings used for performance
calculations
• full set of correction curves
• calculations
• instrument calibration certificates
• list of all auxiliary loads that were operated during the tests
• performance tests results for the "As-run" condition and for the "Corrected as-run
conditions"
• conclusions of performance tests: test passed or not.
80.10.4.2 Reliability run
The main objectives of the reliability run are to prove the operability and reliability of units
and to demonstrate that the 181 unit or the 2nd unit, as applicable, is fit for commercial
operation at acceptable performance levels.
The duration of the reliability run shall be thirty (30) days for each unit.
The main preconditions for the start of the reliability run are at least as follows, but not be
limited to:
• O&M personnel have been trained.
• All necessary authorities' inspections and expert appraisals have been completed
successful and respective reports are available.
• All necessary permitting conditions from the permit notifications are fulfilled.
No modifications or adjustments of the plant are allowed during the Reliability Run.
During the reliability run the O&M staff shall operate the units/plant under the full
supervision and the responsibility of the Lot Contractors' personnel and according to the
O&M manual as supplied by the Lot Contractors.
The plant shall be operated according to the requirements by SC (e.g. base load or load
variations) and/or in accordance with the prevailing power requirements of the grid.
No shut downs are permitted during each reliability run, except if owing to causes beyond
the Lot Contractors' responsibility or control, which must be proven by the Lot Contractors.
A shut down is defined as any reduction in net output or increase in net heat rate,
regardless of duration. This also includes the shut-down of a component that causes a

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 581/765
reduction in net output or increase in net heat rate of the unit or facility, as applicable.
The use of and/or switch over to stand-by equipment shall be allowed, provided that the
Lot Contractors inform SC immediately of such actions and of the reasons therefore and
provided that the cause for the use of the stand-by equipment is removed within twenty
four (24) hours. Non-availability of a component for longer than twenty four (24) hours
will be considered as an interruption and the reliability run must be restarted.
The reliability run shall be deemed successful under the following conditions:
Except for minor items of work that would not affect the safety and/or performance or
operation, the reliability run has been carried out successfully
Punch lists have been agreed upon by SC and Lot Contractors
The reliability run has been performed according to acceptable performance levels
80.10.4.3 Station criteria tests
During the Reliability Run, or after the Reliability Run is successfully completed and
the Lot Contractors have notified that the unit(s )/plant is ready to commence testing
station criteria tests shall be carried out at ECR load subject to the Test conditions in
Section B0.4.
Prior to the commencement of the station criteria tests the Lot Contractors shall submit to
SC, for approval, a detailed procedure covering the testing to be undertaken and the
methods to be employed. The test procedure shall also detail areas of responsibility and the
items that specifically require preparation and agreement before the tests can be carried out.
SC shall have the right to witness the tests.
All test instrumentation is to be supplied by the Lot contractors and is to be retained by the
Lot Contractors upon the satisfactory conclusion of all such tests at site, unless otherwise
specified in this Contract. All costs associated with the supply, calibration, installation and
return of the test instrumentation are deemed to be included in the Contract price.
For the second unit, such test shall be carried out on condition that the first unit shall be
maintained and operated properly.
Station criteria applicable are provided in the respective FG schedules and include the
following guarantee values:
• emission and noise guarantees
• effluent and seawater outfall guarantees.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 582/765
•
General Technical Requirements

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 583/765
80.11. General Technical Requirements

B0.11.1 General requirements
The following directions, information and technical requirements for design, engineering,
layout, erection, installation and testing shall be observed as far as they are applicable for all
equipment to be delivered. The requirements stated in this Section "General Technical
Requirements" shall be valid for all parts and Sections of this specification.
Any changes on the design of any part of the plant, which may become necessary after
signing of the Contract, have to be submitted by the Lot Contractor in writing to SC for
approval, being sufficiently substantiated and justified.
The plant shall be new and clean and designed, manufactured and arranged so that it shall
have a functional design and a pleasant appearance. All parts of the plant shall be arranged
in such a manner as to facilitate surveillance by the operator and to ease maintenance,
operation and control.
The parts of the plant shall be designed and arranged so that they can be easily inspected,
cleaned, erected and dismantled without necessitating large scale dismantling of other parts
of the plant. They shall be designed, manufactured and put into operation in accordance with
the latest recognized rules of workmanship, modern engineering practice and with good
standards of prudence applicable to the international electricity generation industry which
would have been expected to accomplish the desired result at the lowest reasonable cost
consistent with reliability, safety and expedition.
The degree of shop pre-fabrication /fabrication shall be maximized. Shop pre-fabricated/

fabricated equipment shall be preferably transported by barges via the unloading ramp (refer
to Part B4) to site.
The regulations, standards and guidelines listed in the Specification as well as all applicable
laws and governmental decrees, regulations, orders, etc. shall be observed in the design,
calculation, manufacture, erection, installation, testing, commissioning and start-up of all
parts of the plant.
The following shall be considered in the design and engineering of the plant facilities:
• All parts of the plant shall be suitable in every respect for continuous operation at
maximum output as well as part loads and expected transient operating conditions
peculiar to the site and shall be able to safely withstand the stresses arising from the
operating conditions without any reduction in its planned life which shall be at least equal
to 200,000 full load operating hours, provided timely proper maintenance shall be carried
out by the Owner.
• Suitable and automatically acting protection and safety measures shall be provided for
automatic load reduction or shut down of equipment in case of abnormal operating
conditions.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 584/765
• Switchover to stand-by units shall be conducted automatically, as far as required for

continuous plant operation without interruption of plant operation.
• Major equipment which, in case of failure would cause a failure of a power generation
unit and/or the plant is to be provided with a stand-by facility in order to ensure further
operation of the power generation unit or the plant.
• All live, moving and rotating parts shall be provided with appropriate effective protection
in order to avoid danger to the operating staff. All metal parts shall be electrically
grounded.
• All equipment shall be designed to ensure start-up from any condition, i.e. from long term
shut-down, cold, warm or hot condition without necessitating special or preparatory
measures.
The project language shall be English.
B0.11.2 Standards and codes
The work shall be performed based on the latest relevant codes, standards, accident
prevention regulations and legal regulations available at the time of Bid submission. If any
modifications/amendments to codes, standards, etc., take place and it becomes obligatory,
then the offered design, performance, delivery schedule, price, etc., shall be adjusted
appropriately.
All materials and equipment supplied and all work carried out as well as calculation sheets,
drawings, quality and class of goods, methods of inspection, specific design features of
equipment and parts and acceptances of partial plants shall comply in every respect with the
applicable standards, codes and regulations, to be chosen from the following:
• American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASME

• American Institute of Steel Construction AISC
• American Iron & Steel Institute AISI
• American National Standards Institute ANSI
• American Petroleum Institute API
• American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM
• American Welding Society AWS
• Architectural Institute of Japan AIJ
• Heat Exchanger Institute HEI
• International Electrotechnical Commission IEC
• International Organization for Standardization ISO
• National Fire Protection Association NFPA
• Steel Structure Painting Council SSPC
• British Standards Institute BS
• Deutsches Institut fur N ormung DIN
• European Norm EN
• Japanese Industrial Standards JIS
• Japan Cable Manufacture's Standards JCS
• Japanese Electrical Manufacture's Standard JEM
• Japan Fire Service Law JFSL
• Japan Society of Civil Engineers JSCE
• Standards of Japanese Electrotechnical Committee JEC

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 585/765
Indonesian Standard and Code may apply for the equipment and the material procured in
Indonesia. As for the offshore procurement equipment and material, the manufacture may
apply the relevant applicable Standards and Codes of the country of origin of the
manufacture, which are internationally recognized Standards and Codes, subject to the prior
approval of SC.
Each Lot shall state the codes and standards to which the Works shall be performed.
Generally, all internationally and nationally recognized standards as above shall be applied,
except if specific standards called for authorities in Indonesia.
All steam boilers and unfired pressure vessels together with associated pipe work and
fittings shall comply with the laws and regulations of Indonesia. Any code such as JIS
(Japanese Industrial Standard), ASME, or equivalent codes shall apply for all steam boilers
and unfired pressure vessels together with associated pipe work and fittings. In case that
ASME Code is considered, stamping is not carried out.
It is each Lot's responsibility to provide sufficient evidence that any national or other
standard each Lot proposes (other than those mentioned above) shall ensure an equivalent or
higher standard for SC' s prior review and its sole discretion to decide whether such standard
may be applied or not.
Immediately after effective date of the Contract each Lot shall supply an indexed list of all
standards, codes and associated standards referred to, to which the work is to be performed.
80.11.3 Standardisation
The equipment must be standardised as far as possible.
All equipment performing similar duties shall be of the same type and manufacture in order
to limit the stock of spare parts required and to maintain uniformity of plant and equipment
to be installed. Especially the number of types and manufacturers of actuators, valves and
instruments shall be reduced to a minimum.
If a piece of equipment is present several times, then all of these pieces shall be identical.
All their constituting parts must be inter- exchangeable.
Further refer to Chapter B0.11.8 Standardization of makes.
80.11.4 Plant and equipment identification
The Contractor shall apply a plant identification system showing the name and number of
each item of plant and its respective arrangement drawing number and add any additional
items necessary to fully identify the plant.
The identification and numbering of equipment, systems, items, etc. of supply, as well as of
all documents (e.g. manuals and drawings) shall be in accordance with the guideline RDS-
pp (Reference Designation System for Power Plants - KKS system). The Contractor shall
submit a list of all equipment and the associated RDS-PP numbering.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 586/765
All design submissions shall include a detailed labelling list indicating the label text, size of
the lettering and fixing details for the approval of SC.
There is to be only one approved description for any one item of plant and this must be used
consistently for plant, electrical and instrumentation designations throughout.
Each Lot shall supply all labels (Plant and Equipment Identification Plates), nameplates,
manufacturer's equipment nameplate, instruction and warning plates necessary for the
identification and safe operation of the plant, and all inscriptions shall be in the English
language.
All labels, nameplates, instruction and warning plates shall be securely fixed to items of
plant and equipment with stainless steel rivets, plated self-tapping screws or other approved
means. The use of adhesives will not be permitted.
Nameplates for plant and equipment identification and record purposes shall be
manufactured from stainless steel or aluminium with a mat or satin finish, and engraved with
black lettering of a size which is legible from the working position.
Warning plates shall be manufactured from stainless steel or aluminium engraved red
lettering on a white background and sited in the position where they afford maximum safety
of personnel.
All equipment within panels and desks shall be individually identified by satin or mat finish
stainless steel or aluminium labels.
Each circuit breaker panel, electrical control panel, relay panel, etc. shall have a circuit
designation label on the front as well as on the rear panels engraved with black lettering in
accordance with the circuit designation system. Circuit designations must be precise and
convey complete information. There should be no doubt whatsoever for the operation as to
which area of the plant a particular feeder is supplying with power. Labels such as
"interconnector 1", "feeder 2" are not acceptable. Corridor type panels shall in addition have
circuit designation labels within the panels.
Pipework systems shall be identified with a color identification systems in conformity with
the colors according to SC' s specification, with colors at the nameplates and, if necessary by
color bands and with numbering according to Annexes CO and plain language. The direction
of flow shall be shown.
Each valve/instrument shall be fitted with a stainless steel or aluminium nameplate

indicating the valve/instrument service and reference number in accordance with the
selected equipment coding system.
Where possible valve nameplates shall be circular and shall be fitted under the handwheel
captive nut. They have to be of such a diameter that there is no danger for persons operating
the valve or that they do not prevent lock-off of this valve; on check valves and small valves
the Contractor may provide rectangular nameplates fitted to brackets on the valve or
attached to a wall or steelwork in a convenient position adjacent to the valve.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 587/765
80.11.5 Marking and labeling
Each crate or package is to contain a packing list in a waterproof envelope. All items of
material are to be clearly marked for easy identification against the packing list.
All cases, packages, etc. are to be clearly marked on the outside to indicate the total weight,
where the weight is bearing and the correct position of the slings and are to bear an
identification mark relating them to the appropriate shipping documents.
All stencil marks on the outside of cases are either to be made in waterproof material or
protected by shellac or varnish to prevent obliteration in transit.
80.11.6 Corrosion protection, coating and galvanizing

The following sentence shall be added at the end of 80.11.6.1
80.11.6.1
This specification shall be used for the corrosion protection of steel structures, tanks,
components, piping and equipment in general which are installed in confined areas (indoors)
or outdoors.
Surface preparation, as well as protective coatings and coating systems shall be based on this
specification in order to ensure that all structural parts of different suppliers will get a
corrosion protection of similar and high quality. Each Lot Contractor shall ensure that a
QA/QC process is followed for all work, and that the QA/QC inspections are recorded
Coating material shall only be supplied by manufacturers with international experience and
their products can be obtained locally. Exceptions to the above are only possible where this
is deemed to be necessary to provide the required corrosion protection and approval has
been obtained from SC.
Where a coating product consists of a 2-packs or multi-packs, only the same batches of
product may be used between the different packs.
Regarding maintenance work (storage), application and supervision of coating work, choice
of coating suppliers should be minimised. At any rate, similar parts of
structures/components (such as structural steel, containers, piping, etc.) shall only be coated
with products of one individual manufacturer. Exceptions to the above are only possible
where this is deemed to be necessary to provide the required corrosion protection and
approval has been obtained from SC.
The specifications of the corrosion protection system, materials and equipment used, the
methods of application and the quality of work shall at all times be subject to the inspection
and approval of SC.
To mitigate crevice corrosion, the designs and construction of structures and equipment shall
ensure that no collection of water occurs in crevices which could lead to crevice corrosion.
The designs and construction of structures and equipment shall be such to prevent / contain
spillages such that unwanted corrosion is avoided.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 588/765
It is the responsibility of each Lot Contractor to ensure that, for all supplied equipment
(including that from sub suppliers):
• The protection system is perfectly suitable for the extremely corrosive, coastal type site
conditions and for the specific purpose.
• The shop paints provide a sufficient protection during transport, storage and erection.
• The shop paints are suitable for handling and erection conditions (slinging, Site welding
works etc.) and are compatible with the Site finishing coats
• All necessary precautions are taken in order to prevent damage to paints during storage,
handling, welding.
• The necessary repairs are carefully executed as soon as possible
• The colour RAL number of the finishing coat has been approved by SC, including
identification code for piping.
• Standardised equipment will be painted according to the manufacturer's standard.
• All corrosion protection and coating on site shall be done in a workshop specifically for
the purpose of the application of corrosion protection and coating. This area shall be
classified as a hazardous area and comply to the requirements stipulated in SANS 1010.
Each Lot Contractor shall provide a corrosion control plan for approval to SC for approval.
Each Lot Contractor shall give consideration in the corrosion control plan to adjacent
structures, especially reinforced concrete.
Each Lot Contractor shall take all steps required to prevent galvanic corrosion caused by
contact of dissimilar metals. Corrosion protection and/or coatings shall prevent corrosion
under insulation.
80.11.6.2 Surface preparation and cleaning of surfaces in the shop
Prior to blasting, areas have to be cleaned from oil, grease, paint residues, splatters, welding
splashes and welding slag using a suitable aqueous degreaser, or solvent for more severe
grease contamination. The cleaning should be to provide a "water break free surface".
Sharp edges have to be rounded off.
Contaminations caused by salts, acids and alkali solutions shall be eliminated by rinsing
with water up to a pH value of 6-8. Soluble salt contamination is to be tested using the
Weber Reilly test method (or similar approved) and pH is to be tested using universal
indicator paper strips prior to continuation with the blasting.
The preparation of substrates shall be carried out on the basis of the specifications of JIS,
DIN EN ISO 12944 part 4 and ISO 8501. The preparation of steel before application of paint
and related products shall be in line with JIS, DIN EN ISO 11124 for metallic blast cleaning
abrasives and JIS, DIN EN ISO 11126 for non-metallic blast cleaning abrasives. No
recycled blast grit may be utilised.
After blasting, an anchor profile of 25 - 50 µm shall be achieved. Blasted surfaces have to be

provided with a prime coat of the approved coating system immediately within 4 hours of
blasting. All blasting and priming must take place outside of the high humidity periods of
the day (i.e. maximum relative humidity of 80%).

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 589/765
80.11.6.3 Cleaning to be performed on site
Steel work protected by shop primer after arrival on site must be cleaned of salt, sand, oil,
etc. before the first coat of paint is applied on Site. Shop primer damaged during transport
must be rectified by blast-cleaning and coating before application of the site coats, using the
appropriate primer for the specific paint specification to be used.
Wood surfaces shall be sanded clean. All nail holes shall be puttied and sanded before
pnmmg.
If a protective coating of concrete is required, concrete shall be cured before painting, unless
the specific coating system allows for coating onto damp concrete, in which case only with
approval from SC.
Transport and erection damages, as well as damages which result out of additional welding
shall be repaired as soon as possible. The damaged areas have to be de-rusted with rotating
or steel brushes, abrasive wheels or, abrasive blasting according to JIS, DIN-ISO 8501-1.
80.11.6.4 Cleaning of prime and intermediate coats
As far as required, areas with prime and intermediate coat have to be treated with suitable
cleaning agent in order to prevent contamination by mineral oil products.
Cleaning has to provide a surface free of residues, e.g. with alkaline detergents and thorough
washing done with fresh water until a "water break free" surface is achieved. Rusty spots
have to be removed. Metallic areas which are provided with temporary corrosion protection
have to be cleaned. No oxidation products shall remain on the surface.
80.11.6.5 Application procedure for coating
The table below depicts typical coating system requirements. Each Lot Contractor shall
prepare a similar table for submission to SC for approval prior to application of any coating
on any equipment.
When using the provided coating material, strict adherence to all application instructions
given in the product data sheet of the coating manufacturer is necessary. To obtain the
maximum performance, technical data as well as application instructions for the individual
coating material have to be strictly followed. The applicable data sheets and specification
should be available on site during the work, together with the quality control plan, to allow
for speedy resolution of any issues that may arise, and must be supplied to SC on request.
The quality control plans should be considered a summary of the requirements of the
specification and data sheets, and are to reflect the more stringent requirements in the event
of any inconsistency between these sources.
Where inorganic zinc (zinc ethyl silicate) primers are to be used, spray equipment that
allows for continuous agitation must be utilised. These coatings may only be applied in a
single application and cannot be built up if the DFT is not adequate - in this case it will be
necessary to re-blast the item and recoat. These coatings are moisture cured and as such
should not be applied in dry environments (humidity ofless than 50%) unless special
arrangement is made to elevate the humidity levels or keep the surface wet during cure and
relative humidity should be monitored over the duration of the cure period to ensure

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 590/765
adequate cure. Over thickness should be avoided as this will significantly impact cure times
due to the moisture cure mechanism, and in addition these coating systems are prone to mud
cracking. Final cure should be confirmed prior to overcoating using the MEK 30 double rub
procedure (coating should not be removed with 30 double rubs).
For a multi-layer coating system each layer has to have a different colour shade in order to
clearly identify number of coats applied.
The last finish coat has to be applied in the specified colour shade. Cognisance shall be
taken of the tone of the final coat to avoid "show through" of the undercoat (i.e. avoid using
a dark undercoat under a light topcoat). Any show through will need to be made good with a
subsequent application of top coat.
The interval between applying the different coats shall be according to supplier's
specification and will take into account the temperature profile experienced over the
duration of the cure period. Each layer shall be cleaned and released from spray dust before
the next layer will be applied. Prior to applying a further layer, the last one has to be
repaired. All coatings have to be applied without retarding.
Following application procedures are allowed:

• prime coats by airless spray (areas like disconnections, angles, corners, etc. which are
difficult to be reached can be applied by brush or roller)
• repair of prime coat by brush
• finish coats at works: by airless spray, roller or brush
• finish coats at site: by roller or brush or airless spray.
When applying coating systems by roller, rollers have to be of kind and quality which make
an appropriate application possible, and brushes should provide for a "bristle free" coating.
Control areas in accordance with the coating supplier's instructions have to be applied. For
this procedure, a schedule for control areas has to be prepared by the Contractor and coating
supplier which corresponds with the requirements of the warranty agreement.
Number and performance of the control areas have to be done in accordance with JIS, DIN
EN ISO 12944 part 7 and have to be documented in writing.
No application may take place either when the relative humidity will not be within the given
limit nor in case of fog, dust, rain, snow or hail or when it can be assumed that such
conditions of poor weather within 2 hours after application may arise. In particular, unless
specifically allowed for in the data sheet of the specific product, no coatings work shall take
place if the relative humidity exceeds 80%.
Temperature of the coated parts has always to be above 5°C and 3 K above dew point.
All specified dryfilm thicknesses (DFT) are proven to satisfy minimum thicknesses required.
Welding seams mounted at site have to be taped with an adhesive tape of approximately 30 -
50 mm after surface preparation (blasting or manual derusting) and prior to application in
the manufacturing plant and to be coated with stripping coat.
Chequered plates, nap plates, etc. have not to be covered with adhesive tape, but have to be
coated with stripping coat in a dryfilm thickness of at least 150 µm.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 591/765
Edging lines on steel structure have to be taped prior to application and after blasting in
sufficient width or have to be protected with varnish before application. Thickness of prime
coat may be 50 µm max.
During repairing works at site on shop-primed structures, it is important that different coats
will have different colour shades. The number of layers have to be the same as the original
coating system to be used. All areas to be patch repaired should be "feathered back" so as to
avoid a step transition from the patch repair to the adjacent existing coating system (existing
coating system sanded down to the steel substrate over a transition perimeter around the area
to be repaired).
Application of temporary primer on structures which have to be insulated has to be in

accordance with a sufficient corrosion protection for the period of storage respectively and
erection time.
80.11.6.6 Galvanizing
Galvanizing work shall conform in all respects to JIS, DIN EN ISO 1461 or equivalent
standards and shall be performed by the hot dip process unless otherwise specified.
It is essential that details of steel members and assemblies which are to be hot-dip
galvanized should be designed to suit the requirements of the process. They shall be in
accordance with JIS, DIN EN ISO 12944.
Vent holes and drain holes shall be provided to avoid high internal pressures and air locks
during immersion and to ensure that molten zinc is not retained in pockets during
withdrawal.
Careful cleaning of welds to remove all slag is necessary before welded assemblies are
dipped.
All defects of the steel surface including cracks, surface laminations, laps and folds shall be
removed. All drilling, cutting, welding, forming and final fabrication of unit members and
assemblies shall be completed, where feasible, before the structures are galvanized.
The minimum average coating weight shall be as specified in Table 1 of DIN ISO EN 1461,
JIS or equivalent. Structural steel items shall be first grit-blasted according to EN 8501
PART I/EN 8503 PART 1 - 4, JIS or equivalent, second quality, (Sa 2 1/2) or pickled in a
bath, and the minimum average coating weight on steel sections 5 mm thick and over shall
be 900 g/m2, on steel sections 2 - 5 mm thick 600 g/m2.
Galvanized contact surfaces to be joined by high-tensile friction-grip bolts shall be

roughened before assembly so that the required slip factor is achieved. Care shall be taken to
ensure that the roughening is confined to the area of the mating faces.
Protected slings must be used for off-loading and erection. Galvanized work which is to be
stored at the works or on Site shall be stacked so as to provide adequate ventilation for all
surfaces to avoid wet storage staining (white rust).
Small areas of the galvanized coating damaged in any way shall be restored by:
Cleaning the area of any weld slag and thorough wire brushing to give a clean surface.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 592/765
The application of two coats of zinc-rich paint, or the application of a low melting point zinc
alloy repair rod or powder to the damaged area, which is heated to 300 °C or the treatment
with suitable cold galvanizing paint, such as ORAPI n.z.a.b 706. All zinc rich paint used for
such repairs must contain a minimum of 81 % by mass of zinc in the dry film
Connections between galvanized surfaces and copper, copper alloy or aluminium surfaces
shall be protected by suitable tape wrapping.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 593/765
Coating Systems
oc preparation ·.· $ystem3 ·. coats ·. thi~kness EQFT) ·.· ·.· µm
·... .. ·•.· •·
·.
·. ·. ·. .·· .•. .f perqoat µm ... ...

(external shell), pumps,
motors, other Finish 1 2-Com p. Polyurethane 40 40
equipment
270
INDOOR
(external shell), pumps, Finish
motors, other
equipment including 2-Com p. Polyurethane 50 50
fasteners, bolts & nuts ( 1
380
OUTDOOR
3 Piping, tanks (external up to 120 SA 2.5, 45-65 Primer 1 High Build Phenolic 125 125
shell), etc. microns Epoxy
INDOOR and
OUTDOOR, Insulated Intermediate 1 High Build Phenolic 125 125
Epoxy
250
4 Piping, tanks (external 120-500 SA 2.5, 45-65 Primer 1 Modified Silicone 50 50

shell), etc. microns
INDOOR & OUTDOOR
Insulated
5 Steel surfaces 120 - 450 SA 2.5, 45-65 Primer 1 Zinc Ethyl silicate 75 75
Uninsulated microns
Finish 2 Modified Silicone 25 50
125
6 Steel surfaces 120 - 450 SA 2.5, 45-65 Primer 1 Modified Silicone 40 40
Insulated microns

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 594/765
Coating Systems
oc preparation ·.· $ystem3 ·. coats ·. thi~kness EQFT) ·.· ·.· µm
·... .. ·•.· •·
·.
·. ·. ·. .·· .•. .f perqoat µm ... ...
7 Galvanized surfaces up to 120 Mechanical Primers 2 Epoxy High Solid* 75 150

(including galvanized cleaning from
handrails) contaminants Finish 1 2-Com p. Polyurethane 40 40
and zinc salts
by means of 190
washing or
steam jetting or
sweep-blasting
with fine grit
8 Steel surfaces Medium SA 3, 45-65 Primer 1 Zinc- Epoxy 75 75
permanently in contact temp. °C microns
with water, also up to 60 Intermediates 2 Epoxy High Solids 125 250
seawater splash zone
Top Coat 1 2-Com p. Polyurethane 40 40
265
9 Roof and side sheeting Ambient Galvanized iron Surface 1 Galvanised 25 25
cleaner
Coatings 2 2-Com p. Polyurethane 40 80
105
10 Floor plates (checker Ambient SA 2.5, 45-65 Primer 1 Zinc Ethyl silicate 75 75
plate) microns
Intermediates 2 Epoxy high solids 75 150
Finish 1 2-Com p. Polyurethane 40 40
265

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 595/765
80.11.7 Vibration
80.11.7.1 Steam turbine generator
The steam turbine and generator have to be statically and dynamically balanced in the
workshop such that the following levels of vibrations can be achieved:
• For the steam turbine and the generator the vibration level, measured on the rotating parts
at each main bearing, shall not exceed the upper limit of the zone "A " as defined in ISO
7919 at steady conditions;
• For the steam turbine and the generator, the vibration level, measured on the rotating
parts at each main bearing, shall not exceed the upper limit of zone "B'' as defined in ISO
7919 for transient operation at rated speed.
• In no case (except alarm condition), the vibrations measured on the rotating parts shall
exceed 0.5 of the minimal clearance of the bearings, for the measurements installed near
the bearings. This requirement is valid for all speed ranges and load conditions. If
conflicts exist between the different specifications, the more restrictive value shall be
applied.
80.11.7.2 Other rotating equipment
Unless otherwise stated or agreed by SC all rotating equipment must have statically and
dynamically balanced in the workshop such that the following levels of vibrations can be
achieved:
• For large rotating equipment (main feed water pump, main cooling water pumps, fans
(PAF,FDF, IDF), condensate pumps, etc.) the vibration levels, measured on the non-
rotating parts, shall not exceed the upper limit of zone "A" as defined in ISO 10816 at
steady conditions. For other areas e.g. min flow or run out flow, zone limit "B" shall be
maintained.
• For standard pumps, other rotating equipment and reciprocating pumps, the vibration
levels, measured on the non-rotating parts, shall not exceed the zone limit "B" as defined
in ISO 10816 at steady conditions. For equipment which is not covered by ISO 10816,
the manufacture' s standard shall be applied.
• For all rotating equipment at transient conditions, the vibration levels, measured on the
non-rotating parts, shall not exceed the zone limit "C" as defined in ISO 10816.
• For all motors, the vibration levels, measured on the non-rotating parts, shall not exceed
the limit as described in the relevant sections for MV and L V motors.
• The vibrations measured on the rotating parts may not exceed 0.5 of the minimal
clearance of the bearings. This requirement is valid for all speed ranges and load
conditions. If conflicts exist between the different specifications, the more restrictive
value must be applied.
Whenever necessary, equipment shall be put on vibration dampers.
Impermissible transmission of vibrations shall be prevented, or at least reduced, by

mounting equipment on vibration isolators and, as far as possible, by decoupling pipelines to
and from the equipment.
Moreover, all plant components shall be so designed that impermissible high vibrations
cannot be caused by flowing media.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 596/765
80.11.8 Standardization of makes
The works shall be designed to facilitate access and facility for inspection, cleaning,
maintenance and repair. Continuity of supply is a prime concern. The design shall
incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all those concerned
in the operation and maintenance of the works. The plant shall be designed to operate
satisfactorily under all variations of load, pressure, and temperature.
Corresponding parts throughout shall be made to gauge and be interchangeable wherever

possible.
Equipment performing similar functions shall be of the same type and manufacture, to limit
the stock of spare parts required and maintains uniformity of plant and equipment to be
installed.
No prototype shall be permitted. Continuity of operation and lowest maintenance

requirements are of prime concern. The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution
and provision for the safety of all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the
equipment and plant.
Equipment performing similar duties shall be of the same type and manufacture in order to
limit the stock of spare parts required and maintain uniformity of plant and equipment to be
installed. SC reserves the right to advise each Lot of preferred type and manufacture to
secure the above-mentioned requirements. If SC specify the type or manufacturer of
equipment after the Contract award, the cost and schedule adjustment shall be required.
Each Lot shall make an effort to uniform the equipment (or parts, instrument etc.), however,
it shall be very difficult to uniform the equipment (or parts, instrument etc.) for the auxiliary
systems, because the equipment shall be prepared by the auxiliary system manufacturer.
There shall be a case not to adopt same equipment (or parts, instrument etc.) for throughout
each Lot.
80.11.9 Accessibility
Each Lot shall supply and erect sufficiently large safe platforms, galleries, stairways or
ladders and access ways necessary for providing safe and easy access to all the plant items
for operation and maintenance.
Each Lot shall ensure that the whole of the access ways is of uniform design and pattern
throughout the works.
The design of all stairways, access ways etc. shall conform to the requirements of B0.11.12.
80.11.10 Signs
General
Safety colours, safety symbols and safety signs must comply in construction, geometrical
form, colour and meaning with the ISO 3864ofthe ISO committee TC 80 'Safety Colours'.
Signs for plant identification during the erection period must be to SC's approval.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 597/765
The signs should be of a material which is weather-resistant and of sufficient durability for
the conditions prevailing on Site.
Mounting and installation

The positions for the signs must be chosen so that they are within the field of vision of the
persons to whom they apply. The signs should be permanently attached. Temporarily
dangerous areas (e.g. construction sites, assembly areas) may also be marked by movable
signs.
The safety signs must be mounted or installed in such a manner that there is no possibility of
misunderstanding.
Information signs
Information signs should supply the necessary information to acquaint personnel with the
physical arrangement and structure of site, buildings and equipment, e.g. floor numbers,
load-carrying capacities including marking of floor areas, working loads of cranes, lifting
gear and lifts, room identification, etc.
In the choice of information signs in situations not covered by ISO Draft Recommendation
507 the possibility of using pictograms should be considered. Pictograms are particularly
suitable for the identification of rooms, areas and buildings in the non-technical areas of the
plant, sanitary and amenities buildings, etc.
Emergency signs
In the event of accidents, all necessary information should be available immediately to those
affected. Thus, a sufficient number of signs of appropriate size should be installed, e.g.
escape routes (including marking of floor areas), emergency exits, fire alarms, fire
extinguishers, instructions for special fire-extinguishing agents, warnings against fire-
extinguishing agents (CO 2 ), first aid equipment, first aid points, accident reporting points,
telephones, etc.
Mandatory signs
Signs indicating obligatory actions must be provided installed wherever certain action is
necessary, e.g. do not obstruct the entrance; keep right, etc.
Signs should also indicate when the wearing of protective clothing and equipment is
necessary and obligatory, e.g., protective goggles, protective clothing, helmets, head guards,
breathing equipment, ear muffs, etc.
Warning signs
Warning signs should refer to the existence or possible existence of danger, e.g., flammable
substances, explosive substances, corrosive or noxious substances, suspended loads, general
danger, width/height restriction, steps, risk of trapping, slipping, falling, etc.
In addition to warning signs, appropriate black-yellow strip markings should also be used
where necessary.
Equipment and piping color code

SC's color code shall be applied (cf. to Annexes CO).

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 598/765
B0.11.11 Units of measurement
The Contract shall be conducted in the Systems International Units (SI) system of units in
accordance with the provisions ofISO 80000-.
In all correspondence, technical schedules, drawings and instrument scales, the following
units shall be used:
Quantity Name of Unit Symbol
Length Millimeter mm
Mass Kilogram kg
Time Second s
Temperature Degree Celsius oc
Temperature Difference Kelvin K
Electric Current Ampere A
Luminous Intensity Candela cd
Area Square meter m2
Volume Cubic meter m3
Liter 1
Force Newton N
Pressure Bar bar
Pascal MPa,kPa,Pa
Pressure below 1 bar Millibar Mbar
Pascal kPa,Pa
Stress Newton per square millimeter N/mm2
Velocity Meter per second mis
Rotational speed Revolutions per minute rpm
Flow Cubic meter per day m 3/d
Cubic meter per hour m 3/h
Kilogram per hour kg/h
Liter per second 1/s
metric ton per hour t/h
For gaseous substance: standard Nm3/h
cubic meter per hour (referred to
0 °C and 1013 mbar)
Density Kilogram per cubic meter kg/m 3
Kilogram per standard cubic meter kg/Nm 3
Torque, moment of force Newton meter Nm
Moment of inertia (mr2) Kilogram square meter kgm2
Work, energy or heat Joule J
Heat capacity, entropy Joule per Kelvin J/K
Specific heat capacity, specific Joule per kilogram Kelvin J/kgK
entropy
Calorific value Joule per cubic meter J/m3

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 599/765
Quantity Name of Unit Symbol
Joule per gram Jig

Power, radiant flux Watt w
Heat release rate Watt per square meter Wlm 2
Thermal conductivity Watt per meter Kelvin WlmK
Dynamic viscosity Newton second per square meter Nslm 2
Kinematic viscosity Meter squared per second m2ls
Surface tension Newton per meter Nim
Concentration Parts per million ppm
Electrical conductivity Microsiemens per meter at 25 °C µSim
Frequency Hertz Hz
Electric charge Coulomb C
Electric potential Volt V
Electric field strength Volt per meter Vim
Electric capacitance Farad F
Electric resistance Ohm Q
Conductance Siemens s
Magnetic flux Weber Wb
Magnetic flux density Tesla T
Magnetic field strength Ampere per meter Alm
Luminous flux Lumen Im
Illuminance Lux Ix
Thermal resistivity Kelvin meter per Watt KmlW
Energy Kilowatt hour kWh
For the thermodynamic properties of steam and water, "The IAPWS Industrial Formulation
1997 for the Thermodynamic Properties of Water and Steam" or the latest version thereof
shall be used.
B0.11.12 Ways, stairs, ladders, balustrades
Each Lot shall supply all platforms, galleries and stairways necessary for providing safe and
proper access to the plant for operation and efficient maintenance.
Each Lot shall ensure that the type of flooring, stair treads and handrails conform to a
uniform pattern for the plant.
The loads for the design of platforms, galleries etc. shall be in accordance with the Section
'Design Loads' of the special civil part (B4-Part) of this specification.
The following requirements shall be met at least, but not be limited to:
• all the platforms are provided with hand-rails, plinths and access stair-cases
• rotating parts which are accessible by the personnel are protected by grids or covers, in
accordance with applicable regulations

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 600/765
• wherever appropriate, fixed points for hoisting or lifting equipment are provided, in order
to facilitate the dismantling of equipment
• wherever possible ladders shall be avoided and stairways installed
• Platforms in grating or corrugated sheet metal, gangways and stairs and auxiliary
installations such as ladders, hydraulic lifts shall be installed, giving safe access to the
valves, instruments and equipment used in daily operation and maintenance and for
planned maintenance or dismantling. The access should be adequate for safe and
ergonomic operation and maintenance
• Type of flooring:
• stair treads and handrails shall have a uniform pattern all over the plant.
• Horizontal clearance:
• All gangways and stairways shall be at least 1000 mm wide. Stair landings in the
direction of the stairway shall be 1100 mm. 7 5 mm clearance will be kept from any
part, pipe, valve, etc.
• Headroom:
• Minimum clearance over platforms, walkways, work areas man holes shall be 2200
mm on the whole width. Exceptions shall be limited and have to be agreed with SC
during the detail design stage.
• Minimum clearance over roads shall be 7 m.
• Working areas:
• Platforms serving vessel manholes with vertical faces shall be 900 mm below the
centre-line, have 1000 mm horizontal clearance and have a total length centred on the
manhole of 1200 mm plus the diameter. Platforms for manholes with horizontal faces
shall be located below the flange and shall be 1000 mm wide.
• A minimum clearance above rotating equipment and valves underside of supporting
steel or flooring is foreseen.
• Platforms serving horizontal heat exchangers shall have at least 1200 mm horizontal
clearance at both ends and 300 mm clearance from edges of flanges. Platforms for
vertical heat exchangers shall have at least 1000 mm clearance of flanges above
platforms; channel and bonnet flanges shall be at least 1200 mm, but not more than 1800
mm, above platforms
• The step dimensions shall be d = 260 mm x w = 1000 mm with a vertical spacing of h =
185 mm (based on a step dimension of 630 mm). For stairs of representative character
(administration building, CCR, canteen etc.) the steps shall be in the range of h/d =
170/290 mm. Within one building the vertical spacing of the steps shall preferably be the
same. Stairways higher than 4.8 m shall have an intermediate platform. All stairs shall
have a railing on both sides. The total height of railing shall be at least 1000 mm from the
line of the thread nosing.
• Instruments to be read, control gear and valves (operating height) to be operated shall be
positioned at maximum 1.80 m and minimum 1.1 m above floor level
• Lifting facilities shall be provided (accessibility and capacities) for all pieces of
equipment heavier than 50 kg to be dismantled and transported for maintenance and
repair to the workshop. Sufficient clear height shall be left to allow dismantling with
pulleys and monorails. Trolleys and hoists are included in the scope of supply
• Where necessary, an overhead sliding beam shall be provided for pumps, fans, motors
and valves weighing more than 50kg, which need to be removed for maintenance
• Special attention shall be paid to the concept of ergonomics. Accessibility and easy
operation of all equipment shall be ensured (e.g. O&M works outside
walkways/platforms shall be avoided).
• Manholes shall have a minimum diameter of 600 mm. Tools and maintenance equipment
would be introduced through the bottom of the boiler. Wherever necessary for

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 601/765
introduction of tools or maintenance equipment in other areas respective bigger manholes

shall be considered.
• The clear passage around machines shall be at least 800 mm
• It shall be possible to empty and ventilate confined areas prior to inspection.
• The general layout and routing of piping will be such that accessibility for operation and
maintenance including dismantling is possible
• The piping or ducting passing through the machine hall or rising to the roof shall not
interfere with passages, maintenance zones or the travelling crane operating zone
• Sufficient accessibility for valves, dampers and expansion bellows shall be foreseen
• All aspects of platforms, stairways, ladders and other access ways shall comply with the
requirements of applicable JIS standards or equivalent.
• Facilities shall be provided for the erection of swing scaffolds where O&M activities (i.e.
painting, replacement of parts) on high vertical surfaces will be required etc.
80.11.13 Hazardous areas, fire protection provisions
80.11.13.1 Hazardous areas
Each Lot shall take full account of any special requirements concerning the nature, handling
and storage of all fuels, flammable gases and chemicals etc., and provide plant, equipment,
buildings and other services accordingly, including all facilities to ensure the safety of the
operating and maintenance personnel.
Each Lot shall provide drawings to define all the hazardous zones taking account of all
sources of hazards under normal and abnormal operating conditions (regardless of whether
or not these areas are specifically listed in the specification).).The zoning philosophy shall
be subject to the approval of SC. All equipment necessary for mounting in these areas shall
meet the requirements of EN 60079-14.
In particular, equipment directly concerned with plant which may give rise to a hazardous
situation shall be designed to IEC 60079 Zone 1 or 2 requirements with electrical connection
safety barriers or intrinsically safe equipment equivalent to VDE O171 Type Exi. Where
required by SC, certification shall be provided to confirm the suitability of the equipment
and devices.
Each Lot shall be responsible for ensuring that all electrical equipment installed in any
hazardous zone is designed and tested to suit the relevant zone classification and shall be to
the approval of SC. Cables shall not be laid in trenches etc. with fuel pipework.
All electrical equipment associated with any part of a system within the following areas
shall be of flame/explosion proof type:
• Fuel oil handling systems

• Burner operating floors
• Turbine lubrication oil tank area
• Generator sealing oil tank area
• Diesel generator area
• Hydrogen bottle house
• Others required by the above standards.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 602/765
All equipment offered for use in the above areas shall have the necessary certification by the
appropriate National Certification Bureau and its proposed application shall fully comply
with all conditions of the certificate.
All electrical equipment associated with any part of a system within the following areas
shall be of dust explosion proof type:
• Station bunker rooms

• Conveyor transfer towers
• 3 meters radius from coal feeders, pulverizers and the center point of pulverized fuel
pipes.
• Coal crusher buildings.
Fire protection provisions

Unless otherwise specified, the following design principles should be observed as minimum
fire prevention requirements:
Pipeline insulation and the infills of cable and pipeline wall penetrations are to be of non-
combustible material.
All pipelines or vessels with internal temperatures of more than 180 °C shall be so arranged
as to avoid any contact with flammable liquids if fuel or lube oil lines should leak. Sufficient
physical separation shall be ensured.
Particular care should be taken to eliminate any risk of hot pipeline-insulating material
becoming impregnated with flammable liquids in the case of fuel or lube oil line leakage.
The insulation is to be covered in its entirety, with an oil resistant sheet, over which the
cladding is to be fitted.
Cable and pipeline ducts must be so arranged and sealed as to avoid any risk of flooding
with fuel oil, lube oil or any other flammable liquid. In addition to sealing the cable and
pipeline ducts, the cable basements must be completely sealed against leakage from above
as well, in order to preclude the ingress of lube oil or other flammable liquids.
Covered floor ducts must be easily accessible for inspection and cleaning.
All parts of plant and equipment are to be arranged so that no corners or pits that would be
difficult to inspect and clean and in which flammable matter could collect are formed.
Fuel preheating temperatures should be limited to a margin of at least 10 K below the fuel
flash point.
Lubricating oil lines in the turbine-generator lube oil system are not to be connected with
compression-type joints but rather with welded or screwed-type points.
Non-combustible materials which do not give off noxious or toxic fumes must be used for
wall and ceiling paneling, for floor covering, and for cubicles and cabinets.
B0.11.14 Maintenance isolation
All major equipment shall be arranged to facilitate safe isolation from all hazards for
practical maintenance purposes. Critical valves, which may be accidentally closed or opened
by the operator, are provided with a chain and padlock. Chains and padlocks shall be
provided on gate valves and globe valves to lock them either in the open or closed position.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 603/765
Non return valves are not acceptable as a means of isolation.
B0.11.15 Materials
All materials shall be new and of the best quality for use in the conditions and the variations
in temperature and pressure that will be encountered in service without undue distortion or
deterioration or the setting up of undue strains in any part that might affect the efficiency
and reliability of the plant.
All materials shall correspond either to the approved standards and the respective code
number or to exact analysis data, and full information concerning properties and applied
heat, chemical and mechanical treatment shall be submitted.
Special attention must be paid to eliminating the possibility of corrosion resulting from
galvanic effects. Design, selection of materials and all methods of erection shall be such as
to keep these effects to a minimum.
Materials complying with codes and standards listed below shall be used for the design and
construction work.
Unless the materials meet these codes and standards, they shall be subject to SCs's approval.
Special consideration shall be taken for material fatigue during cyclic loading e.g.:
• selecting materials with higher (creep) strengths in order to lower wall
• thicknesses
• specific design for avoiding header ligament cracking
• avoiding location of welds in high stress areas or high restraint
• avoiding dissimilar welds as far as possible.
Tubes material shall be selected by the Lot Contractors taking into account:
• the material sensitivity to the flue gas corrosion and to the steam oxidation
• the consequence of fouling and slagging.
All tube to tube, tube to branch and branch to header connections shall be butt welded (full
penetration welds).
Grey cast iron will not be accepted. If there should be grey cast iron con-tained in a series-
manufactured small-part which is under consideration, approval of SC is necessary.
Any use of asbestos is prohibited.
All materials subject to pressure, as well as all alloyed materials whether or not subject to
pressure, are provided with factory test certificates giving the complete chemical analysis,
physical properties, test and heat treatment (certificates min. EN 10204 3.1. B). Exceptions
have to be limited and shall be mutually agreed with SC during detail engineering stage.
During the entire fabrication process all components must remain traceable by well managed
marking records, and the original certificates must be available.
The selection of the austenitic/ferritic/martensitic steels according to their maximum

operation steam temperature shall ensure the safe formation of oxide layers on the steam

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 604/765
side, so that the materials shall not present excessive oxide layer thickness growth during
their lifetime period.
High Strength Bolts complying with ASTM A325, JIS B 1186 FIOT, JSS II 09 SIOT or
equivalent shall be used for the design and construction work. Connection shall be of
bearing-type. High strength bolt shall be supplied to the site without any painting, but shall
be painted after tightened for corrosion protection. In addition, anchor bolt shall be also
supplied without any painting, but the surface not embedded in concrete shall be painted
after installation.
The kind of welding material and electrodes shall comply with the requirements of AWS or
equivalent.
The specification of raw steel materials shall be in accordance with JIS SS400 or ASTM
A36 or ASTM A572 Gr50 or Chinese Standard (GB: Q235B, Q345B) or equivalent.
Structural steel complying with ASTM A36 or equivalent shall be mainly used for the
design and construction work, while high strength steel complying with ASTM A572.Gr50
or equivalent shall be partially used for heavy members.
B0.11.16 Pre-service cleaning and protection of plant equipment
This clause covers mechanical and pre-service cleaning and protection of the plant items and
equipment at the Manufacturer's workshop and at site that are not subsequently to be
painted.
Cleaning of fabricated component items shall be carried out after fabrication and final heat
treatment or welding at manufacturers' works or at site, as appropriate.
In the event of the equipment surfaces not being cleaned to SCs' s satisfaction, the respective
Lot Contractor shall overcome the deficiencies at his sole expense.
Mechanical cleaning as opposed to alternative chemical cleaning is the preferred method for
workshop cleaning except where this is precluded by design or access considerations.
Machined surfaces shall be protected during the cleaning operations. For recleaning small
areas, hand cleaning by wire brushing may be permitted. Wire brushes used on austenitic
materials shall have austenitic steel bristles.
Austenitic stainless steels, copper and aluminum alloys, cast iron, bimetallic and
metallic/plastic items, and components fabricated by spot welding or riveting shall not be
chemically cleaned. All weld areas shall be suitably stress-relieved before chemical cleaning.
At an appropriate time, each Lot shall submit drawings of temporary pipework necessary to
carry out the pre-service cleaning simultaneously with a list of works to be carried out on the
pipelines, heaters, feed water tanks, vessels etc. to connect the temporary pipework with the
parts of equipment to be cleaned.
Further, each Lot shall submit at the same time the basic draft of the cleaning procedure and
of the treatment of wastes.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 605/765
Not less than six months prior to the commencement of any site cleaning, each Lot has to
submit programs covering all procedures, lists of chemicals, calculations which quote the
velocities, temperatures and pipework forces and movements imposed during site cleaning.
All necessary equipment, provisions, chemicals etc. are to be provided by each Lot.
All tests, analysis, etc. as required are to be performed by each Lot.
Besides this, each Lot shall take over all responsibility for the treatment and disposal of
wastes according to the local law.
Each Lot shall take all necessary precautions to ensure that the internal surfaces of all plant
are kept clean and free from injurious matter during erection
When all plant parts have been erected and insulated or at an appropriate time as may be
agreed with SC for sub-assemblies, the installation shall undergo a procedure for site
cleaning proposed by the Contractor and subject to the approval of SC.
80.11.16.1 Cleaning / steam blowing of pressurized equipment
During the erection period the Lot Contractors shall take care that the internal parts of
pressurized equipment will be kept clean and without corrosion. During the erection and
after finalization of erection the pressure part shall be, if required, cleaned mechanically,
water flushed and/or blown out by air prior to the connection/closing by the Lot Contractors.
All these checks shall follow a procedure approved by SC and shall be an integral part of the
erection completion works.
After finalization of erection activities each steam generator and related pipework shall be
cleaned according to the regulation set out in the VGB-R 513 or equivalent by chemical
cleaning and steam blowing.
Inaddition the following shall be performed by the respective Lot Contractors:

• flushing of condensate pipework and condenser
• degreasing of condensate pipework and condenser
• acid cleaning of the steam generator and the main pipe work
• steam blowing of the high, intermediate and low pressure steam mams to meet
acceptance criteria of the steam turbine manufacturer.
• visual inspection and mechanical cleaning (if required) of pipes between HP by-pass and
HP steam turbine and between LP by-pass and LP steam turbine
• flushing of auxiliary pipe work with water or steam.
The respective Lot Contractors shall be responsible for the appropriate handling of used
fluids and treatment of the waste water in accordance with the local requirements. The Lot
Contractors are responsible for appropriate disposal of the waste water in accordance with
local requirements.
The Lot Contractors shall provide all required temporary installations (installation, operation
and removal) for cleaning and steam blowing e.g. pipe work, valves, silencers, the
dismantling and reinstatement of the stop valve and by-pass control valve internals and the
supply and fitting of blanking plates to prevent debris damage during blowing etc.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 606/765
80.11.17 Quality Assurance and quality control (QA/QC)
The quality assurance and quality control (QA/QC) requirements as stipulated in this chapter
cover engineering, procurement, construction, commissioning and start-up of the units/plant.
These reflect the general requirements to be complied by the Lot Contractors.
The Lot Contractor shall provide a quality assurance and quality control manual applicable
to the engineering, procurement, construction, commissioning, testing and start-up of their
scope of supplies and evidence of accreditation to a national or international assurance
standard equal to ISO 9001.
The Lot Contractors shall prepare an integral project specific quality assurance and control
plan(QA/QP) which, after approval by SC, shall be used to prepare detailed QA/QC
procedures addressing specific quality requirements during engineering, procurement,
construction and commissioning. After approval by, those procedures shall also apply to
subcontractors and suppliers of the Lot Contractors.
The Lot Contractor shall ensure that the responsibility for quality control is effectively
assigned to the respective key project team members, each for his/her respective area of
responsibility.
SC reserves the right to carry out by himself or by third parties quality audits at Lot
Contractor's, Subcontractor's and Supplier's facilities to ensure compliance with the
Contract, plans, procedures and specifications.
80.11.17.1 QA/QC during design
Each Lot shall establish document distribution arrangements and ensure that records of
document distribution are maintained within the document control system.
Each Lot shall ensure that prior to issue, each design deliverable is re-viewed and approved
by competent personnel. Responsibilities for review and approval shall be clearly identified.
Each Lot shall ensure that the product is identifiable and traceable to its origin, history and
other source, and that product is provided with a unique identification number and is
registered during the design and engineering phase. Changes to documents shall be clearly
identified.
Each Lot shall ensure that changes to the design are executed under the same design control
criteria as applied during the original design.
Each Lot shall ensure that design drawings and documents are revised to reflect the "as-built"
status of the works.
In case a Lot Contractor subcontracts design and engineering work, the Lot Contractor will
remain ultimately responsible for the work and shall ensure that
•engineering subcontractor management systems satisfactorily meet ISO 9001 requirements
or equivalent
•interfaces between the Lot Contractor and engineering subcontractors are formalized and
controlled.
Documents produced are entirely legible, in pdf format and searchable.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 607/765
80.11.17.2 QA/QC during construction and erection
Each Lot Contractor shall ensure that subcontractor management systems satisfactorily meet
ISO 9001 requirements or equivalent.
Each Lot Contractor shall ensure that subcontractors are required to prepare a construction
execution plan outlining controlled execution of the subcontract. Subcontractor's
construction execution plans shall be reviewed and approved by Each Lot Contractor prior
to commencement of work.
Each Lot Contractor shall ensure that qualifications of subcontractor personnel are verified
as appropriate and prior to commencement of work.
Each Lot Contractor shall ensure that subcontractor capabilities, work methods, tools and
equipment are assessed prior to commencement of work. Validation/certification of special
processes shall be verified. Records shall be maintained for qualified special processes,
equipment and personnel.
Each Lot Contractor shall ensure that all products received by him at the construction site
are inspected. Receiving inspection shall be limited to checking for quantity, damage and
deterioration. Shipments to site shall be accompanied by final inspection reports or
certificates of compliance as evidence of quality.
Each Lot Contractor shall ensure that designated storage areas and stock rooms are used to
prevent damage or deterioration of product pending use or delivery. Appropriate methods
for preservation and segregation of product shall be applied. The condition of product in
stock and adherence to storage procedures shall be assessed at appropriate intervals.
Each Lot Contractor shall ensure that subcontractor in-process and final inspection and
testing are verified as the work progresses up to and including completion. Final inspection
and testing shall be performed on the completed plant to achieve mechanical completion.
Each Lot Contractor shall ensure that the authority responsible for release of plant or part
thereof will be identified in relevant inspection and test records.
Each Lot Contractor shall ensure that only products will be used which has successfully
passed the required inspections and tests and that no product or part thereof will be turned
over to SC unless all verification activities have been satisfactorily completed and the
associated data and documentation are available and authorized.
During the application of coatings, each Lot Contractor shall conscientiously measure and
record the climatic conditions (measurement of air humidity, air temperature and coating
area substrate temperature and determination of dew point) during the application and curing
of the coatings.
80.11.17.3 QA/QC relating to inspection and testing
All shop/factory test activities shall be separately indicated in each Lot Contractor's
inspection and test plan.
The general approach shall be that all equipment and materials are tested and inspected in
the shop or factory to the maximum extent possible and where technically feasible.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 608/765
Each Lot Contractor shall indicate in his quality plan the extent of testing in the shop and on
site.
SC I SC's representatives shall have the right to identify witness and hold points for each
piece of equipment in the QA/QC plan at any stage of the Project.
80.11.18 Method statement and risk assessment for the execution of

works
Each Lot shall prepare a detailed method statement for approval by SC for each of the
major/primary/critical erection and/or construction activities required during the
construction phase of the Project.
The method statement shall also include an assessment of the work related risks to both
employees and the environment arising out of the activity. The risk shall be evaluated in
terms of the combination of frequency or probability of occurrence and the consequence of
the specific activity.
Methods to eliminate the identified risks shall be proposed and implemented. Where it is not
reasonably practicable to eliminate the risk, all efforts shall be made to minimize and
manage it.
80.11.19 SHEW requirements
80.11.19.1 General SHEW targets and objectives
The, Safety, Health, Environmental and Wellness (SHEW) targets of SC are zero accidents
(injuries, vehicle accidents, etc), no spills harmful to the environment, promote wellness
issues (HIV/Aids, substance abuse, etc.) develop a sound social environment and integrate
the local community, as far as is reasonably possible.
Considering the defined SHEW targets, the SHEW objectives to be fulfilled by each Lot are
at least:
• to develop, implement and operate an Environmental Management Plan (EMP) that
provides a maximum contribution to meet the SHEW targets, meet the Indonesian
legislation requirements, satisfy the ESEIA (European Sustainable Energy Innovation
Alliance) framework EMP requirements and ensure the success of the project. This EMP
shall be submitted to SC, who will forward it to local authority for approval, id required
• to develop, implement and operate an Health and Safety Plan that provides a maximum
contribution to meet the SHEW targets and the success of the Project.
• to design a plant that is inherently safe, a healthy place to work in and minimize, and
where possible avoid, a negative impact on the environment and humans in receptor
community
• to execute the erection, construction and commissioning and to initiate the start-up of the
unit(s )/plant without health or environment related incidents
• to comply with the Indonesian and international laws and regulations.
Each Contractor and his sub-contractors shall, upon start of the Project, define Risk
Acceptance Criteria to be met in close cooperation with and subject to the approval of SC.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 609/765
Each Contractor's SHEW organization and responsibilities shall include (but not be limited
to):
• Project Manager (or equivalent)

• The Project Manager shall be responsible for the overall execution and shall be
accountable for SHEW issues on the project. The Project Manager shall provide the
drive and resources necessary to ensure that SHEW targets are achieved.
• SHEW Manager (SHEW Officer)

• The SHEW Manager/Officer must be qualified and knowledgeable in local safety and
environmental regulations. If qualified, the SHEW officer may also serve as the safety
officer.
• The SHEW Manager shall be responsible for the implementation of the EMP and the
Health and Safety Plan. The SHEW Manager shall further be responsible for
implementing regulations, each Lot Contractor's SHEW policies and procedures in
meeting the technical requirements in the project deliverables. This shall include the
management of subcontractors, visitors and suppliers.
• The SHEW Manager shall ensure that all compliance to the SHEW requirements, the
relevant laws and regulations and EMP, are adhered to by each Lot Contractor's and
subcontractor's team and personnel.
• The SHEW Manager shall be responsible for the implementation of the EMP and for
day-to-day SHEW matters on site.
• The SHEW Manager shall undertake environmental site inspections to ensure
compliance with the EMP.
• The SHEW Manager shall provide SHEW induction training for all staff and sub-
contractors in addition and conjunction with SC's SHEW induction training).
• The SHEW Manager shall advise the Project Manager on the actions to be taken
arising from audits of the project and project site.
• The SHEW Manager shall recommend solutions to SHEW problems as they are
foreseen or encountered.
• The SHEW Manager shall provide on-site advice, reporting and investigation of all
environmental incidents.
• The SHEW Manager shall regular liaise with SC's designated SHEW officer.
• The SHEW Manager shall initiate the elections of SHEW representatives for the Lot
Contractor and sub-contractors
• The SHEW Manager shall initiate the Lot Contractor's SHEW meetings where the
Project Manager is responsible for chairing the meeting.
• SHEW Representatives
• SHEW Representatives shall support the SHEW manager/officer in the execution of
its tasks, including monitoring compliance, reporting incidents and taking remedial
actions.
• SITE Supervisors
• Supervisory personnel shall be responsible and accountable for their commitment to
SHEW and their participation in the management of subcontractor SHEW programs.
The main focus of SHEW during the design phase is to design a plant that is inherently safe,
is a healthy place to work and has minimal negative impact on the environment. This shall
be reflected executing the following project key tasks:.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 610/765
Each Lot Contractor shall:

• Compile a detailed Construction EMP and Health and Safety Plan to implement of the
SHEW targets and objectives as well as the framework EMP.
• Prepare a Risk Assessment Plan for the project and participate/prepare risk assessments
for method statements on specific project activities as and when required
• Implement measures to meet all risk acceptance criteria and SHEW objectives defined for
the project
• Set-up and maintain a SHEW evaluation and Decision Making System
• Identify and implement relevant environmental protection permit requirements m all
phases of the project
• Draft procedures on the purchasing, handling and disposal of hazardous substances.
• Keep records of all hazardous substances as well as its Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS).
• Compile and implement an Office Safety Policy (as part of the Health and Safety plan)
• Compile and implement an Emergency Preparedness Plan
• implement SHEW requirements in all requisitions / subcontracts
• Conduct SHEW team building with all project team members as part of coordination
meeting(s)
• Conduct SHEW training presenting all relevant governing documents and applicable
legislative requirements related to SHEW
• Ensure that all operations of equipment such as lifting equipment, bulldozers, front end
loaders, etc. are trained and authorized to operate these equipment.
The Construction EMP and Health and Safety Plan shall to be prepared by each Lot
Contractor and shall be submitted to SC for approval. On approval SC shall submit the
Construction EMP to the local authorities, if required, for final approval. All approvals will
be required prior to mobilization.
The Health and Safety Plan shall provide all procedures required for performing safely tasks
that are inherently hazardous, like, for example, performing excavations and trenching and
working in them, confined space entry, work at elevations, lifting/hoisting operations, etc.
Any deviation to the EMP requirements must be reported in writing to SC for approval.
The Construction EMP and Health and Safety Plan and all other plans/assessments required
shall cater for the full scope of each Lot Contractor's work, inclusive of what is executed by
its subcontractors.
Each Lot shall be responsible for promoting SHEW awareness among its employees, those
of its subcontractors, visitors, supplier representatives and persons delivering materials and
equipment.
The Project SHEW policy will be prominently displayed in conspicuous places that are
frequented by the project personnel.
At appropriate, conspicuous places each Lot Contractor shall display posters to promote
awareness and importance of safety, health and the environment among the work force.
These posters must be changed out on a regular basis and must, in as far as is possible, be
relevant to the type of work being done at the time. Poster stations shall be located in both
office/temporary facilities as well as in the project work site.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 611/765
To ensure good dialogue and bi-directional SHEW communication, at least the following
meetings shall be held:
• Daily toolbox talks with personnel on site
• Each week all project SHEW professionals shall meet to discuss past performance and
determine ways of further enhancing the project safety performance.
• Monthly Project SHEW Steering Committee Meetings shall take place to evaluate the
project SHEW performance and devise new strategies to consolidate good performance
and enhance the program where required
• Ad Hoc meetings to address specific issues related to SHEW, risk and relevant issues.
Regular SHEW inspections and audits shall be carried out: by each Lot Contractor:
• Construction Management SHEW Audits: Site management shall perform site SHEW
inspections at a frequency of at least once per calendar month.
• Over and above the audits to be conducted by the Contractor, SC shall conduct regular
audits on the Contractor's SHEW management systems
• SHEW inspections by Supervisory Personnel: Each superintendent and supervisor shall
perform a SHEW inspection of his/her area of responsibility at least once per week.
• Each foreman shall perform daily SHEW inspections in all the areas in which he/she has
personnel working.
80.11.19.2 Environmental Management Plan
Each Lot shall be responsible for environmental management for the Works.
Each Lot shall submit his own Construction Environmental Management Plan (EMP). While
SC may comment on any inadequacies of the Construction EMP, the ultimate responsibility
for non-compliance with the standards in this document lies solely with the Lot Contractors.
The purpose of the Construction EMP is to specify clear environmental management actions
to ensure that negative environmental impacts are managed in such a way that they are
prevented or, where they do occur, that their severity is minimised. The Construction EMP
shall be a dynamic document to be updated, responsive to changes in project circumstances,
unforeseen events, and as a result of monitoring, throughout the du-ration of construction by
the Contractor staff responsible for implementing the Construction EMP.
In particular the Construction EMP shall include but not be limited to:
• Identify sources of potential harm, the risk they represent and the response that will
control the risk. A qualitative risk analysis using a "probability and impact" methodology
should be made.
• Describe the measures that will be taken to prevent and mitigate environ-mental negative
impacts from the construction operations.
• Specify responsibilities with respect to implementation, monitoring and reporting.
• Define elements such as performance indicators, targets, or acceptance criteria that
environmental performance can be measured against.
• Outline routines for reporting and investigation of incidents and non-conformities, and
the implementation of preventive actions. Reporting on the Construction EMP
implementation should be included in the monthly progress reports.
• Outline routines to internally measure and monitor the performance in respect of the
Construction EMP objectives. Outline the protection and preservation of all heritage sites
on the site.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 612/765
80.11.19.3 SC's Monitoring
During the course of the Project, SC will monitor the implementation of each Lot
Contractor's environmental performance, including that of the subcontractors. Each Lot shall
be open to periodic environmental compliance audits by SC, and should provide the
necessary information for such purposes.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 613/765
•
General Mechanical Requirements

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 614/765
80.12. General Mechanical Requirements

80.12.1 Pumps
80.12.1.1 General
All pumps shall be designed for continuous operation unless otherwise specified.
Pumps shall be of proven design, not prototypical and must have been used in applications
similar to the Works outside of the country of manufacture and be backed by acceptable
technical support services outside of the country of manufacture in fluent, legible English.
Pumps shall be installed in positions convenient for operation and servicing. Where multiple
pump installations are required, each pump and its associated equipment shall be arranged in
such a manner as to permit easy access for operation, maintenance and pump removal
without interrupting plant operation.
Pumps installed for parallel operation or as stand-by sets are to be of identical design, i.e.
interchangeable.
Lifting lugs and eyes and other special tackle shall be provided as necessary to permit easy
handling of the pump and its components.
80.12.1.2 General design and construction
As for general pumps or mass-produced pumps such as submerged pump, pressure test shall
not be carried out for each pump.
If a pump can operate at sub-atmospheric suction conditions, the entire pump shall be
designed for full vacuum
All pump shafts shall be of ample size to transmit the maximum possible output from the
prime mover. The pump shaft and couplings are to be so dimensioned that the maximum
permissible torque of the shaft is higher than the maximum transmissible torque of the
coupling. Directly coupled pumps shall preferably be used.
Renewable wear rings shall be provided at points of running clearance and shall be made
from appropriate materials.
Provisions of service water flushing lines and drains are to be supplied for CWP,
chlorination and desalination areas to avoid corrosion if the pump is out of operation for
extended periods.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 615/765
All pumps and accessories in contact with the pumped fluid shall be constructed of materials
specifically designed for the conditions and nature of the pumped fluid, and be resistant to
erosion and corrosion.
The pump glands or mechanical seals shall be so arranged that repackaging or fitting of
replacement seals can be carried out with the minimum of disruption to plant operation. In
case of operating under vacuum conditions, liquid sealing is to be provided.
The pump casing shall preferably be split for ease of maintenance and be designed such that
the impeller and shaft are capable of being withdrawn from the casing without disturbing
any of the main pipework and valves carrying the pumped fluid. In general, all horizontal
pumps with draw-out-rotors are to be fitted with a coupling to facilitate disassembly without
removing the motor. Pull-out design of the shaft shall be applied to vertical wet pit and dry
pit pumps as well.
Each horizontal pump shall be mounted with its drive on a common base plate of rigid
construction. Vertical pumps are to be provided with foundation frames. In case of
submersible pumps suitable frames shall be provided in the pump sump. It shall however be
possible to remove these pumps without entering the sump.
A spacer coupling shall be used unless otherwise specified. The spacer length shall permit
the removal of the coupling, bearings, seal and/or rotor without disturbing the suction and
discharge piping.
Pumps must be carefully set to ensure that the net positive suction head available under all
operating conditions will be adequate for the type of pump employed. The NPSH values are
to be referred to the least favourable operating conditions - lowest atmospheric pressure,
lowest level of water on the suction side of the pump, and highest temperature of the
pumped fluid. An adequate safety margin of greater than 1 m above the maximum required
NPSH shall be provided.
Pumps shall operate smoothly throughout the speed range up to their operating speeds. The
first coupled critical speed must be at least 20% higher than the maximum operating speed.
The determination of the shaft diameter and the distance between two consecutive bearings
must include a sufficiently large safety margin to satisfy this condition.
Where necessary, the pumps are to be fitted with devices to ensure a mini-mum throughput.
80.12.1.3 Material
Pump materials are specially chosen to resist cavitation, erosion and corrosion (especially
electrochemical corrosion), significant wear and seizure or other destructive influences
which they may be subjected to in service.
If the pump impeller and impeller shaft are of different materials, any portion of the impeller
shaft which could be in contact with the fluid must be encased in a protection sleeve which
is electrochemically compatible with the impeller.
The pump casings are manufactured from materials of suitable and approved composition to
satisfactorily withstand the service conditions over the full design life without the need for
protective paint and/or other corrosion/erosion protective measures.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 616/765
Grey cast iron for pump casings will not be accepted.
80.12.1.4 Bearings
All bearings shall be designed for a calculated design life of at least 50,000 hours.
All bearings shall be so arranged as to facilitate the removal of, or repairs to, the pump
impeller.
For small pumps, grease-lubricated anti-friction bearings shall be provided for the pumps.
Antifriction guide bearings shall be ball or roller bearings designed for the rated life of the
unit under the design operating conditions.
For large pumps (typically for feed water, condensate pumps) the bearings shall be of self-
lubricating white metal bearing, unless not possible or otherwise specified. Bearings on
vertical shaft pumps shall be so spaced to prevent shaft whipping or vibration under any
mode of operation.
On the areas of the shaft on which the pump gland seal and bearings run, there shall be a
replaceable shaft sleeve to protect the shaft from wear.
Bearings housings on horizontal shaft pumps shall be designed to enable the bearings to be
replaced without removing the pump or motor from its mounting. Bearing housings on
horizontal shaft pumps shall be effectively protected against the ingress of water, pumped
fluid and dust by suitable nonferrous deflectors.
Non-pressure-oil lubricated bearings shall be equipped with constant level oilers.
All bearing oil wells shall be provided with, but not be limited to the following:
• visual oil level indicators
• means of checking oil flow
• means to fill the oil well and
• means to drain the oil well.
Thermometer pockets shall be provided on each sleeve bearing with a dial type thermometer
with RTD alarmed to DCS in CCR to provide warning of excessive oil return temperature.
On all pumps greater than 1 MW or other-wise specified, online vibration monitoring shall
be also provided.
Suitable precautions shall be taken against harmful flow of shaft currents by the provision of
insulation (and where required the necessary shorting/binding straps) on all bearings where
necessary.
80.12.1.5 Pumps characteristics
When several pumps are installed for the same service, they shall be suitable for unrestricted
parallel operation.
The pump flow/head characteristics shall be such that within the operation range the head
will continuously increase with decreasing flow, maximum head (shut off head) being at
least 10% higher than the duty point head.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 617/765
Unless otherwise specified all pumps shall be capable of operating at 110% of the rated
capacity at the rated delivery head. The performance of the drive motor is to be determined
according to the above mentioned technical requirements and to the requirements as
specified in the electrical part.
Any pump with a constant speed driver, requiring a maximum or minimum diameter
impeller to meet the rated pumping conditions is not acceptable. The impeller diameter shall
be such that at least a 5% increase in head at the rated capacity can be obtained by installing
a larger diameter impeller of the same pattern. Minimum allowable impeller diameter shall
be 105% of the vendor's minimum catalogue diameter. Alternative proposals for pumps
with a 5% increase in head will be considered.
80.12.1.6 Fittings
All pumps shall be installed with isolating valves, a non-return valves and suction and
discharge pressure gauges unless otherwise stated. Accessible couplings shall be supplied
with removable type guards.
Coupling halves shall be machine matched to ensure accurate alignment. Couplings as well
as gears must have a rated capacity of at least 120% of the maximum potential power
transmission requirement.
Venting valves shall be fitted to all pumps at suitable points on the pump casing unless the
pump is self-venting, due to the arrangement of the suction and discharge nozzles. Drainage
facilities shall be provided on the pump casing or adjacent pipework to facilitate the
dismantling of pumps.
All positive displacement pumps shall be fitted with a discharge relief valve capable of
passing the maximum pump delivery flow.
80.12.1.7 Suction strainers
All pumps other than submersible pumps shall have temporary strainers fitted in the suction
pipework during all initial running and commissioning phases. Permanent strainers shall be
provided where specified.
If a pump has to be secured by a suction strainer it shall be as follows:
Where no standby pump is supplied and a permanent strainer is required then the duty pump
is fitted with a duplex strainer capable of easy change over on load. (this refers to pumps
which are in continuous operation).
Permanent strainers are fitted with a differential pressure transmitter or similar device to
monitor differential pressure and transmitted to CCR giving indication when alarm set-point
is reached.
Strainer elements shall be manufactured from a suitable material (stainless steel) and should
be fitted so as to minimize the risk of electro-chemical/crack corrosion. They should be
easily removable for cleaning and inspection.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 618/765
80.12.2 Piping and accessories
80.12.2.1 Design criteria
The pipework shall be designed, fabricated, erected, inspected and tested on the basis of the
applicable standards and codes, and the additional requirements as set out below.
All pipes shall be installed above-ground unless approved by SC.
All high pressure oil pipes shall be manufactured from stainless steel and welded.
The applicable fouling factor data sheets and calculations for the piping designs shall be
provided to SC for approval.
Tapping points for instrumentation shall be provided where required. Manholes, vents,
drains, safety devices and any platforms necessary for safe operation and easy maintenance
shall to be included in the design and supply.
The maximum flow velocities for the individual media must not be exceeded at maximum
throughput (unless expressly specified in the documents or proven by each Lot):
Type of Pipework Max. Velocity
Steam lines:
High-pressure live steam lines (PN .:2:_ 63) 60 mis
Including Hot reheat steam lines
Cold reheat 45 mis
HP turbine bypass lines 100 mis
Intermediate-pressure steam lines (PN 25140) 60 mis
Low-pressure steam lines above 5 bar 35 mis
Low-pressure steam lines < 5 bar 25 mis
Vacuum lines 80 mis
BFP Turbine exhaust steam lines 35 mis
Saturated steam lines 30 mis
Water lines (Feed water, cooling water, condensate etc.):

Feed water pump suction lines 1.5 mis**
Feed water pump discharge lines 4.0 mis
Other pump suction lines 1.0 mis
Other pump discharge lines 3.0 mis
Seawater lines 3.0 mis
Fuel lines:
Fuel oil pump suction lines 1.0 mis
Fuel oil pump discharge lines 2.0 mis
Air Lines:
Compressed air lines 20.0 mis
** The design and routing of the feedwater suction lines must be optimized considering the allowable
velocity of depressurization caused by load changes.
Nominal diameters (DN), nominal pressure (PN) and wall thicknesses shall be standardised.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 619/765
All piping larger DN 50 mm diameter shall be shop fabricated, if possible.
Nominal diameters ofDN 25 may only be used for instrument lines, control oil, chemical
dosing, sealing water and analysis pipelines.
For the design of safety valves installed downstream of reducing stations, high pressure
bypass valves or equivalent control valves, the maximum throughput of the fully open
reducing or bypass valve including injection water quantity shall be taken as the basis for
calculation. All cross sections and lines for safety devices that protect against excess
pressure (safety valves, rupture discs and similar items) must be designed to ensure the
necessary blow-off rate and fault free functioning.
The design pressure is equal to the response pressure of the devices protecting the piping.
In the case of pump discharge lines a pressure corresponding to 1.2 times of the shut-off
head (zero flow) of the pump at the ambient temperature, or 1.2 of the maximum operation
pressure, as applicable, is to be taken as the minimum design pressure.
The main cooling water and seawater supply systems must be designed according to the
water hammer calculation.
For main steam pipes the factor 1.1 shall be used, if balanced safety valves are installed.
The test pressure for the pipes shall be according to ASME Code.
For live steam lines the design pressure of the boiler shall be taken as the design pressure of
these lines up to the inlet of the turbine main stop valves.
Pressure loss calculations shall be performed for main lines.
The design temperature for pipes shall be not less than the highest possible fluid temperature
occurring in the concerned line. Tolerances of the temperature control system and any
temperature allowances provided by the requirements of the standards shall be considered.
In addition to the required wall thickness in accordance with calculations, sufficient

corrosion allowances shall be added. The chosen corrosion allowances shall be provided and
justified by the Lot Contractor during the detail design stage. A corrosion allowance of
minimum 3 mm shall be added for unprotected carbon steel However a minimum corrosion
allowance of 1.5 mm shall be obligatory for all carbon steel, low alloy and high alloy piping
wall thickness calculations (except if it is specifically mentioned otherwise in other
Chapters). The wall thickness selected shall be the next higher available wall thickness
schedule or standard size, from the value resulted from the relevant calculations.
For the piping systems with a nominal pressure specified as PN > 40 the isolation, drainage
and ventilation facilities shall be fitted with double valves.
Vents, drains and dump points with more than 10 bar/I 00 °C operating pressure/temperature
which are used during operation including start-up and shutdown shall be lead to the boiler
blown down tank or condense or to the flash tanks and into funnels at visible points with
covers.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 620/765
The others shall be connected to nearby floor drain lines or discharged to the atmosphere.
80.12.2.1.1 Guidelines for the design and construction of pipework

and accessories
Design and construction of all parts of the pipelines and accessories shall be state of the art
and shall be based on the latest standards. Pipe materials, bends and fittings shall be tested in
accordance with the material codes and standards specified
Each Lot Contractor shall provide suitable empty conduits and cover plates where pipelines
pass through floors and walls. Empty conduits through floors shall be installed to provide 90
mm projection above the finished floor surface.
A flexibility analysis must be performed for all piping systems DN > 80 with an operating
temperature > 120 °C. The piping stress and flexibility analysis shall be based on the
relevant standards. Recalculation must be done, taking into consideration the as-built
conditions, actual weight and dimensions.
The welding of the pipes should follow the requirements as specified.
The pipework and its accessories shall be designed and arranged such that all parts subject to
operation and maintenance can be operated, inspected, maintained and replaced without
difficulty and with a minimum of effort. All important parts must be accessible.
None of the forces and moments transmitted by the pipes to connected machines, apparatus
and other components must exceed the maximum permissible values, given by the
manufacturers of these items. Attachments to turbine foundations shall be carried out only as
agreed with the turbine manufacturer.
All steam traps shall be provided with a bypass and lines which open to a funnel.
As far as expansion joints and other parts of pipework are concerned it shall be borne in
mind that differential settlement can occur. The reaction forces and moments of the piping
system to be withstood by fixed points, walls, foundations and other civil structures shall be
reduced to the utmost minimum by suitable means (e.g. expansion joints shall be provided
where required).
Pockets in pipelines shall be avoided. All lines are to be provided with fittings, valves and/or
traps arranged in such a way that the pipes can be completely drained and easily protected
against freezing.
As far as expansion joints and other parts of pipework are concerned it shall be borne in
mind that differential settlement can occur. The reaction forces and moments of the piping
system to be withstood by fixed points, walls, foundations and other civil structures shall be
reduced to the utmost minimum by suitable means (e.g. expansion joints shall be provided
where required).
The pipe support structures shall be designed to minimize heat transfer.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 621/765
Pipe spools for HP steam, feed water piping and all steel pipes 2: DN 400 shall be cleaned
prior to delivery by shot blasting at the work-shop with iron particles to SA2 1/2 or by acid
cleaning, and shall be properly protected against corrosion.
The pipe spools shall be cleaned by steam or water flushing after piping installation at site.
Pipe ends and branch connections of underground piping shall be sealed temporarily during
installation if the connecting pipe is not immediately installed.
The Contractor shall furnish, install and dismantle all temporary pipes, hangers, anchors, etc.
required for cleaning all piping systems.
To the extent that hot fluids can accumulate in pipe sections isolated for maintenance
purposes (including control valves with injection water), drains with hand-operated shut-off
valves are to be provided for the safety of the personnel (block and bleed systems).
Furthermore the Contractor shall safeguard the piping systems against over-pressurisation
caused by thermal expansion of blocked-in fluids by adequate means.
A detailed description of proposed cleaning procedures for all pipelines shall be provided.
Temporary silencers shall be provided.
All temporary pipes, hangers, anchors, etc. required for cleaning all piping systems shall be
furnished, installed and dismantled.
Pipework shall be sized and route to ensure minimum pressure losses throughout the system
All take off connections from horizontal headers shall be from the top of the main
(instruments air systems).
The installed pipework with its supports and other components shall not obstruct gangways
(min. 1000 mm wide), maintenance, escape routes etc. Overhead piping shall have a
minimum vertical clearance of 2.2 meters and 7 meters above roadways. Some exceptions
shall be applied after approval by SC to the places where the space is not physically
available.
The suitable thimbles and flashing where pipelines pass through floors and walls shall be
provided. Floor thimbles shall be installed to provide 90 mm projection above the finished
floor surface
A flexibility analysis must be performed for all piping systems DN > 80 with an operating
temperature :2:_ 120 °C.
The piping stress and flexibility analysis shall be based on the relevant standards.
Recalculation must be taken into consideration as built condition, actual weight and
dimensions, if significant changes are incorporated in the design.
Pipe materials, bends and fittings shall be tested in accordance with the applicable material
standards.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 622/765
80.12.2.2 Noise abatement measures
Each Contractor shall take all necessary measures to limit noise in accordance with the
requirements stipulated in the applicable B-Parts, Sections, chapters and schedules.
If this requirement cannot be met by adequate construction of the pipework and valves
concerned, sound absorbing housing or insulation shall be provided.
Where pipework and valves are installed outdoors, the above mentioned requirement shall
be fulfilled, by providing silencers at the safety valve outlets and at the blowing out lines.
Design basis of silencers for safety valves and the blow down tank is 110 dB(A) at Im from
each silencer's surface. Silencers shall not be installed directly alongside walkways and
personnel work areas.
80.12.2.3 Pipe supporting elements
As used herein, the term "hangers and supports" shall include all hanger assemblies, support
assemblies, constant support hangers, anchors, guides, sway braces, vibration dampers, trays,
brackets, attachments, miscellaneous structural steel and other items required to support the
p1pmg m a proper manner.
Constant support type spring assemblies shall be provided at all locations where it is
necessary to avoid transfer of stress from that support to another support or to an equipment
terminal, and at other support locations where vertical movements of the piping are too large
to be properly handled by variable support springs. Constant support spring assemblies shall
be of a design that shall compensate for the normal variation in the supporting force of the
helical coil springs, thus providing constant supporting force throughout a total travel range
which shall be at least 20 mm greater than the actual maximum movement of the piping.
Constant support assemblies shall be equipped with a means of locking the spring(s) against
movement during erection, hydrostatic testing etc. The use of counterweights in substitution
for support spring assemblies shall not be permitted.
Support spring assemblies shall be of the enclosed spring type, and shall have an embossed
on factory load indication scale showing the hot (operating) and cold (ambient) positions.
Each spring assembly shall incorporate an adjustable hanger rod coupling to permit load
adjustment. All support springs shall be designed to permit at least ±10% field load
deviation from the factory calibrated load.
The supporting force provided by variable support type spring assemblies shall not change
by more than 20% between the cold and hot positions, and supports of this type shall not be
used at any point where such a change in supporting force cannot be safely permitted.
Variable support spring assemblies shall incorporate springs with maximum working range
length in order to reduce the overall length of the assembly.
All pipe hangers and support stands shall be attached to the piping and structural supports
such that they shall be vertical when the piping is at operating condition. So far as
practicable, hangers and supports shall be of the same type and component assembly.
All hangers shall be carefully adjusted. After plant start-up checks shall confirm that all
hangers and supports are in the correct position.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 623/765
A complete documentation of all pipe hangers and supporting elements shall be prepared.
These documents shall contain at least the following information:
loads, forces and moments, and their directions at all supports, hangers at normal operating
conditions, etc.
magnitude and directions of the movements at the loading points
measurements of the loading points referred to the axes of the buildings
item No. of the supports, hangers etc. according to the piping group
material specification for the supporting parts.
80.12.2.4 Protection of buried pipework systems
All buried pipework of steel or cast iron or other materials prone to corrosion shall be
protected from corrosion by cathodic protection or concrete casing.
The design of the cathodic protection system(s) shall be executed by a specialist and
authorised company. The designed cathodic protection shall be an impressed current, state
of the art and a completely functioning system in all respects and shall also include the
appropriate equipment for measurements. Where the Contractor proposes a sacrificial anode
system, this will be subject to the approval of SC
80.12.3 Valves, steam traps, condensate drainers, safety valves
80.12.3.1 Valves
All valves and their accessories required for the safe, efficient and sound operation and
maintenance of the plant shall be designed and supplied based on the appropriate standards.
They shall comply as a minimum with the design criteria of the relevant piping.
For reasons of plant standardization, each Lot shall c-ordinate types and makes of all valves
in his supply as much as possible respectively. Valves directly purchased by each Lot shall
be coordinated and those purchased as package (as supplied by sub-supplier) shall be left for
their normal practice and standard.
Design, construction, fabrication and testing of the valves shall be in accordance with the
approved standards.
All valves shall be suitable for the media and for the service conditions and those performing
similar duties shall be interchangeable.
Acceptance certificates for valves shall follow EN 10204 or approved equivalent.
All valves excluding butterfly valves shall be conform as a minimum to Class 1251b pressure
rating as in ANSI.
The following types of valves are recommended:
• globe valves up to and including DN 50

• gate valves DN 65 and above
• butterfly valves DN 400 and above for LP steam and exhaust steam
DN 80 and above for waterlines (cooling water,

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 624/765
process water, drainage line etc., operating temp. max.

180 °C)
• lift check valves up to and including DN 50
• swing check valves DN 65 and above
• Globe or gate valves (fuel oil, DN 25 and above
compressed air)
In vacuum service and wherever otherwise necessary to prevent the entry of air, valves shall
be provided with suitable sealing facilities. Where applicable, the valves must be suitable for
outdoor installation under consideration of the special climatic and environmental conditions
of the site.
Unless otherwise agreed, all valves shall be fitted with the spindle in upright position. The
valves shall have rising spindles and non-rising handwheels.
All valves shall be positioned so as to be readily accessible for operation and maintenance
from permanent floors, catwalks or platforms. Where required, valve spindles shall be
lengthened to have the hand-wheel at a height approximately 1 meter above the operation
level. All underground valves shall be installed in concrete culverts.
All valves shall be closed in a clockwise direction when looking at the face of the hand
wheel. The valves shall have rising spindles and non rising hand wheels. Small valves are
accepted with rising hand wheels. Plastic valve hand wheels shall not be accepted.
Where valves are exposed to weather, sufficiently protective covers shall be provided for the
spindles.
Motorized valves' actuator shall be designed in consideration of full differential pressure. As

for manual valves, hand wheels shall be provided
For control valves the position is indicated between closed (0%) and open (100%) in 1%
steps. For automatic shut-off valves open or close is to indicate with limit switches.
All globe valves shall be designed to minimize erosion of the valve seats when the valves
are operated in a partially open position. Globe valves with throttling characteristic shall be
equipped with throttling cones with parabolic characteristic.
In general, LP safety valves, butterfly valves, ball valves and orifices as well as all control
valves shall be flanged. All valves for steam, feed water and condensate, HP safety valves
(inlet side) shall have welded ends, corresponding to the connected pipes.
Design of valves and materials used must comply with the relevant standards. They shall be
chosen in accordance with the requirements to be met and to corresponding pipework.
For limiting hand wheel forces, for control and operation purposes it may be necessary to
install gears and drives.
The max. hand wheel force of 500 N shall not be exceeded.
The steam traps at each low point shall be furnished and installed, if required due to fluid
condition. Each steam trap installation shall include upstream and downstream globe valves
and a globe valve as free drain. Steam traps shall be supplied with weld ends.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 625/765
Steam traps shall preferably be of the thermodynamic or bimetallic type with multistage
nozzles selected to suit the service conditions.
No traps which incorporate internal screens or check valves shall be used unless specifically
required.
Each trap shall be sized to provide ample capacity at the minimum working differential
pressure, and to open the orifice at maximum working differential pressure. Since steam
usually does not include impurities which are trapped by a steam trap, a permanent strainer
shall not be provided. When the steam line is cleaned up by blowing, the blow drain is
discharged through the bypass line of the steam trap.
Condensate drainers such as used on LP saturated steam or compressed air lines shall be of
the ball-float type.
All valves of the HP piping systems shall be suitable for pickling.
Forged steel or cast steel shall be used for valves. Valves made of gray cast iron are not
acceptable. The following materials shall apply to valves regardless of systems:
• Valve size less than DN 65 : Forged steel
• Valve size DN 65 and above : Cast steel
Acceptance certificates for piping components and valves shall follow the general standards.
HP- and large size gate valves to be opened under differential pressure shall be equipped
with pressure equalizing valves (globe valves).
All valves shall be fitted with indicators to determine the valve position. In the case of
valves fitted with extended spindles, indicators shall be fitted both to the extended spindle
and to the valve spindle.
HP gate valves shall be equipped with self-sealing lid covers. The self-sealing lid covers
shall be equipped with a safety device at the body with a shut-off valve and interlocking
system. This system must be approved by an Authorised Independent Authority (AIA).
The valves for live steam, HP feedwater and HP injection water shall be made of forged
steel. Forged steel or cast steel shall be used for the remaining systems. Valves made of grey
cast iron are not acceptable.
Check valves
The check valves shall be constructed to allow the internal parts to be examined and/or
renewed without the need to remove the valve from the pipeline.
Check valves in vertical pipe runs shall, wherever required for proper drainage, be provided
with drain valves, material and arrangement.
Pressure reducing valves

All pressure reducing valves shall be perfectly stable, quiet and free of vibrations in
operation, when working at all flows up to the maximum flow. They shall be suitable for
continuous use at all operating conditions. Special precautions shall be taken to avoid or
withstand cavitation.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 626/765
The piping downstream of pressure reducing valves shall be protected by means of a

pressure relief valve if that piping could be damaged when the pressure reducing valve
should fail. The pressure relieve valve shall be capable of exhausting to atmosphere the
maximum discharge of the reducing valve without undue build-up of pressure on the low
pressure side. The pressure relief venting shall be such to avoid any danger to personnel in
this area. Pressure gauges and thermometers shall be provided upstream and downstream of
the reducing valve.
Pneumatic operated valves

Pneumatic valves shall be fail safe with a spring loaded closing mechanism. If needed for a
safe and stable or fail safe operation, the pneumatic valve shall, with approval of SC, be
provided with a local pressure vessel.
Pneumatic operators shall be designed for operation using instrument air which may vary in
pressure from 3 bar to 9 bar.
Unless otherwise indicated or required by the nature of the valve's operation, closing and
opening travel speed shall be in accordance with manufacturer's standard.
Gas system valves

Valves for instrument air and nitrogen shall be of the ball valve type. Valves for fuel gases
shall be of the fire safe ball valve type.
Safety valves
The maximum throughput of the fully open reducing or bypass valve including injection
water quantity is to be taken as the basis for calculation for the design of safety valves
installed downstream of reducing stations, high pressure bypass valves or equivalent control
valves.
All cross sections and lines for safety devices that protect against excess pressure (safety
valves, rupture discs and similar items) must be designed to ensure the necessary blow-off
rate and fault free functioning.
The safety valves shall be of the full lift spring load relief angle valve, (for reheater
hydraulically assisted) type. Air services shall be restricted to the open spring casing type
valves. Liquids, saturated steam and high pressure steam shall be relieved by encased relief
valves.
All safety valves shall be certified by the designated AIA, if required by local laws and
regulations.
Steam safety valves shall be fitted with a drain pipe connected to the discharge water system
through a funnel and a vent pipe equipped with a silencer. The steam pipe upstream of the
safety valve shall be insulated and maintained warm through a recirculation line if required.
It is each Lot Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all safety relief valves are 100% tight
during operation.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 627/765
80.12.3.2 Steam traps and condensate drainers
Each Lot Contractor shall furnish and install steam traps at each low point. Each steam trap
installation shall include a permanent strainer, upstream and downstream globe valves and a
globe valve as free drain. Steam traps shall be supplied with weld ends.
Steam traps shall preferably be of the thermodynamic or bimetallic type with multistage
nozzles selected to suit the service conditions. All steam traps shall be provided with lines
and a bypass which open to a funnel.
No traps which incorporate internal screens or check valves shall be used unless specifically
required.
Each trap shall be sized to provide ample capacity at the minimum working differential
pressure, and to open the orifice at maximum working differential pressure.
Condensate drainers such as used on LP saturated steam or compressed air lines shall be of
the ball-float type.
80.12.4 Welding
80.12.4.1 Quality control
Each Lot shall ensure that an adequate quality control system exists to uniquely record the
complete history of each weld, including base and filler material specifications, properties,
qualifications and certification, WPS(s) and PQR(s) used, welder or welding operator
certification, NDE operator certifications and results of all NDE and production tests.
Each Lot's quality control system shall ensure that any repair and rectification work,
including design changes, is recorded and that all necessary NDE and production tests have
been performed. The quality control system shall provide traceability of production welds
and weld repairs to individual welders or welder operators and date of production.
SC reserves the right to review and approve the quality control system of the Lots.
80.12.4.2 Welders qualification
Welders/operators shall be qualified according to JIS, EN 287/EN 1418 or equivalent.
Welding at workshops or at site shall be performed by welders certified by a qualified

independent testing authority engaged by the Lots and approved by SC prior to execution of
the works. Each Lot shall be able to prove the quality of work of the welder or welding
operator. Original certificates shall be presented to SC and a copy endorsed after conformity
check.
Welder tests shall be carried out in accordance with approved standards within each Lot's
scope. Test results shall be available for review in the workshops.
If at any time in the opinion of SC the work of any welder appears questionable, such welder
is required to pass additional qualification tests to determine his ability to perform the type
of work on which he is engaged. Any welder failing the retest may, at the discretion of SC
be disqualified from further welding.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 628/765
The first 2 production welds of each welder shall be examined 100% by volumetric NDE
and only if the results are acceptable, will the welder shall be released for production
welding.
Every welder/operator shall be identified by a unique numbering system. A qualified

welders list shall record the welder/operator's qualification(s) according to the applicable
welding procedure specifications (WPS) and base materials.
Progressive examination in accordance with EN 12952-6 (par. 9.1.5)/EN 13480-5 (par.

8.1.3), as applicable, is required for inspection extents below 100% (random inspection).
Each welder/operator shall permanently mark the welds he performed with the identification
mark assigned. Low stress stamps shall be used except for materials with wall thickness
below 5mm, where an alternative method for permanent marking may be used (engraving,
paint or computerised system).
80.12.4.3 Welding procedures
Welding work and related heat treatment as well as inspections and test shall be performed
in accordance with the specific and approved welding procedure specifications (WPS) and
the respective material specifications.
WPS shall be prepared in accordance with EN 15609 or equivalent and submitted to SC for
approval for pressure parts and attachments to it.
Welding plans have to be prepared by each Lot for his scope of work.
No welding shall be undertaken until the applicable WPS and Procedure Qualification
Record (PQR) are approved by SC.
The PQR shall be qualified in accordance with JIS, EN ISO 15614-1 or equivalent. Welding
procedures must be certified by a qualified independent testing authority engaged by the
manufacturer.
For structural steel welding qualification shall be in accordance with JIS, DIN 18800 or
equivalent.
Before welding, weld edge preparations shall be cleaned both internally and externally over
a distance of at least 25 mm on either side of the weld edge.
For pressure parts, the misalignment for butt welds or groove welds shall not exceed 2. 0 mm
and the maximum internal protrusion of the root weld shall be in accordance with JIS, EN
ISO 5817 class B.
For single side butt welds, all root passes shall be welded using a TIG welding process.
Preheating shall be in accordance with the applicable WPS and the respective material
specification. The preheat temperature shall be in function of welding process, wall
thickness, type of welding consumables (HOM-Hydrogen Deposited weld Metal), ambient
temperature and climatic conditions. Guidance can be given by JIS, EN 1011-2 or equivalent.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 629/765
Welding performed outside a workshop may be authorized if an approved wind and rain
protection (welding bay) is installed around the working place.
When ambient temperatures falls below 5°C, preheating is required for all ferritic materials
and thicknesses. Gas burners or oxy-fuel torches can be used for pre-heating. Preheat shall
be maintained over a distance of not less than 4 times the nominal thickness with a
minimum of 7 5mm on either side of the weld. The same preheat procedure shall be used for
oxy-fuel or plasma cutting.
Welding consumables for pressure containing parts shall be of the low hydrogen type
(HDM<=:S5 ml/I 00 g) and storage, distribution and re-baking to be carried out in
accordance with the instructions of the consumable manufacturer/supplier. Vacuum packed
electrodes are recommended, taking into account that once the packages are opened they
shall be used within a maximum time frame specified by the consumable
manufacturer/supplier.
All consumables for pressure parts butt welds may be certified in accordance with JIS, EN
10204 type 2.2 as long as the manufacturer/supplier is certified and approved by SC.
Welding consumables such as TIG-rods, electrodes and wires shall be clearly marked in
order to avoid any mix-up of material grades. Positive material identification shall be carried
out where doubt about the consumable's type exists.
Welding shall not be interrupted until at least 1/3 of the weld is complete and a controlled
cooling under insulation is carried out. Preheating, if applicable, shall be resumed before
welding is continued.
Clamps or attachments welded on the pressure containing parts shall be of the same nominal
composition as the base metal and welded by a qualified welder with the same process,
consumables, preheat and heat treatment as the applicable WPS for the base metal. The
removal shall be carried out by grinding and a surface examination by PT/MT shall be
performed immediately after.
Socket weld shall have a minimum gap of 1.5 mm before welding and require a minimum of
2 passes.
Single pass fillet welds on pressure retaining parts may be authorized provided that the
qualification according to JIS, EN 15614 has been done.
Any post welding heat treatment (PWHT) shall be performed in accordance with an
approved procedure. The procedure shall describe the method, the heat treatment parameters
(e.g. holding temperature and time, heating/cooling rates, heated/insulated band), the
number and location of thermocouples, records and calibration. The procedure shall be
available on Site and or in the workshops.
Before welding and/or heat treating valves, valve-manufacturer instructions shall be taken
into consideration.
Welding of dissimilar metals shall be avoided as far as possible. Dissimilar welds (e.g.
stainless steel to martensitic steel) may only be carried out with the approval of SC under
shop conditions. Piping components with materials that cannot be welded directly to each

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 630/765
other shall be provided with connection pieces of adequate size in the shop such that
welding and heat treatment at the construction Site can be performed.
If subsequent heat treatment is required in the case of alloyed materials, small parts like lugs,
support brackets and sockets shall be welded on in the shop. If possible, PWHT shall be
performed on the complete unit. These small parts may be subsequently welded on at the
construction Site only in special cases with the approval of SC.
A stress of greater than 5% on the outer surface/layer (external fibre) of welded cold-formed
parts is not permissible.
In the case of sensitive materials, grinding of the welds or other grinding work may only be
carried out with special grinding wheels so as to avoid overheating or an increase in the
hardness of the material.
Welding defects of all kinds must be documented and be available to SC on site or in the
workshops.
B0.12.5 Thermal Insulation
General
The thermal insulation shall be designed and installed in accordance with JIS, AGI, VDI and
DIN or equivalent standards, considering the following minimum requirements:
• Insulation shall be provided for personnel protection, heat conservation, noise reduction
and for prevention of the formation of condensation on all pipework and equipment
whose external surface temperature exceeds 60 °C.
For only personnel protection, insulations are provided for the exposed surface of
exceeding 60°C with the basic concept and limit of
• where personnel may access closely such as
• within 750mm space from walking area and access way.
• within 1800mm above each floor
Mills and pulverized coal piping shall not be insulated, because of the safety reasons (for
prevention of fire).
• The insulation design shall ensure an outer surface of not greater than 60 °C during
normal operation.
• All insulation material has to be made from non-asbestos materials.
• All insulation material has to be made from non-cancer-causing materials.
• All insulation materials intended to be used, shall be subject to SC's approval.
• The use of ceramic material is subject to SC's approval on a case by case basis.
• A detailed specification including typical design shall be developed by the each Lot for
all thermal insulations.
• A specification including typical designs shall be developed by each Lot for noise and
vibration insulation.
• Where insulation is provided for heat conservation it shall reduce the heat loss to an
economical acceptable level,

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 631/765
Type of insulation materials

the following insulating materials may be used:
• piping DN ~ 25 0 preformed shape blankets
• piping DN > 250 blankets.
The mats shall be stable in shape, chemically inert, free of sulfur and alkali, resistant to
water and steam, non-flammable and capable of withstanding continuous exposure to the
pipe design temperature. The mats used for insulation of stainless steel equipment shall have
a chloride content of less than 0.15%. Under no circumstances may asbestos or asbestos
containing materials be used.
The material shall have the following physical/chemical properties (± 10% allowance):
• service temperature up to 600 °C

• density 120 kg/m 3
• water absorption 0.5% weight
• specific heat capacity 0.84 kJ/kg °C
• compressive strength 20 kPa
• conductivity versus temperature (conductivity allowance is limited to+ 5%.)
AV,erJge tern per,ture . (°C) .·.. ·.

m1t(W/mPC)
·.
0 0.034
50 0.040
100 0.048
110 0.058
200 0.070
250 0.083
300 0.100
The manufacturer's name and the material properties shall be labelled on each package of
insulation material.
The insulating mats shall be stitched to stainless steel wire mesh using stainless steel wire.
The mesh size shall be approximately 19 mm.
For special purposes such as for turbines, boilers, etc spray type insulation or insulation
brickwork (for example calcium silicate) may also be applied. Special insulation materials
shall be stated by the respective Lot and approved by SC and the design shall match the
overall design and guarantee the requirements stated in the specifications.
Type of insulation setting materials

All cladding shall be pre-fabricated and rolled to the final dimensions and form prior to
assembly.
Surface cladding shall be made of aluminium sheets, manufactured in sheets with the
following minimum thickness:
• Outer insulation diameter up to 150 mm Sheet thickness: 0.7 mm

• Outer insulation diameter up to 450 mm Sheet thickness: 0.9 mm
• Tanks and other large equipment Sheet thickness: 1.2 mm

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 632/765
If tank tops shall be walkable the insulation shall be strong enough to allow maintenance and
repair work without deformation.
The sheets shall be secured and connected at the longitudinal seams with at least five
stainless steel self-tapping screws per meter run.
Plain sheets for flat surfaces shall not exceed 1 meter square and shall be stiffened by
cnmpmg.
At the longitudinal and circumferential joints, the sheets shall overlap by at least 50 mm so
as to drain off the liquid and not to trap the liquid in the insulation. On longitudinal joints,
the joints shall be on the bottom side.
Places at which the metal sheets are penetrated for pipe hangers, thermometer sockets, etc.
shall be sealed with funnel-shaped recesses or sheet metal rims.
The seams and penetrations of any sheet metal insulating jacket installed outdoors as well as
in the boiler and turbine house in areas with risk of water spray etc., shall be sealed against
penetration of water by means of a suitable silicon based sealant.
In the case of pipe insulation thicknesses greater than 60 mm, where insulation blankets are
used, spacers shall be provided at maximum intervals of 950 mm to ensure a uniform
insulating thickness on all sides and a perfectly circular shape of the sheet metal jacket. No
patch work or deformation of the sheet metal jackets will be accepted.
The sheet metal jacket shall be supported by support webs (for pipe diameters below 100
mm) and enclosed support rings (for pipe diameters 100 mm and above). If the enclosed
support rings are not provided with ceramic spacers, the spacers made of steel shall be
insulated with one heat insulation strip in the case of operating temperatures of up to 200 °C,
and with two heat insulation strips where the operating temperature exceeds 200 °C.
To provide protection against contact (galvanic) corrosion, the external circumference of the
support ring shall be fitted with heat insulation tape 1 mm thick with two woven edges.
Insulation of flanges, valves and fittings

All flanges, valves and fittings shall be provided with two-piece or multi-Part caps made of
aluminum sheet of the specified thickness. Each piece or part shall be double jacketed and
the various parts shall be held together by quick release clamps or lever hooks to facilitate
assembly and disassembly.
All caps of the welded-in fittings shall be made longer by approximately twice the insulation
thickness so that the welding seams shall be exposed after removal of the cap.
All manholes shall be provided with heavy duty hinged insulated covers wherever possible.
Such covers shall be secured with easily accessible clamps.
Insulation of tanks and process equipment

Tanks and process equipment shall be insulated in the same way as pipes, except that the
insulating material shall not be attached by wire but by using strong galvanized steel bands.
Spacers shall be welded to process equipment only if this is essential for satisfactory
retention of the insulation. Welding of spacers to process equipment is subject to approval
by its manufacturer in writing.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 633/765
Insulation for personnel protection

Wherever insulation is necessary only for the protection of personnel, it shall be applied
around that portion of the pipeline length or to that surface of the equipment that is located
within 2.50 m above the passage way floor, or within 1.20 m horizontally to the side or at
the end of any floor, platform, walkway, stair or ladder.
Where necessary, drain lines and valves shall be provided with a contact guard of minimum
30 mm thickness against accidental contact, and this shall be installed in the same way as the
other insulation.
For personnel protection all surfaces with a temperature above 50 °C and which are within
the reach of personnel shall be provided with protection insulation. The maximum insulation
surface temperature shall be 60 °C.
For intentional touching of metallic and non-metallic surface the temperatures shall be
applied as stated in the JIS, DIN EN ISO 13732 considering the contact period but not less
than 1 min.
Additional requirements for cold insulation

The insulation of cold temperature services is required for:
• cold conservation
• preventing vapour condensation on the outside surface of the insulating system of piping
and equipment having a temperature below the dew point of the surrounding atmosphere
• personnel protection from cold surfaces.
All piping and equipment shall be insulated as a unit with a vapour stop at each interruption,
including but not be limited to valves, flanges, elbows, tees, supports, hangers and other
protrusions. All pipe supports shall incorporate a multi-layered cold insulation including
vapour barrier and protection shield.
The used cold insulation shall allow labelling/marking according to the relevant section of
this specification.
Cold insulation at valves, flange connections or instrumentation shall be easily removable.
Self-adhesive cold insulation mats may be used as cold insulation for pipes.
B0.12.6 Vessel and tanks
All vessels/tanks shall be designed in accordance with the applicable standards and
regulations.
Tanks/vessels shall be provided as required for the safe and efficient operation of the plant.
Each Lot contractor shall be responsible for the correct design and dimensioning of the
apparatus.
Connections shall be provided for all pipework, together with connection and tapping points
for instrumentation. Manholes, vents, drains, safety devices and any platforms necessary for
safe operation and easy maintenance have to be included in design and supply.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 634/765
All tanks/vessels shall be designed to withstand all operating conditions and be protected or
suitably designed against risk of depressurisation and over-pressure. If under any operation
conditions vacuum can occur in the pressure vessels, they shall be designed for max.
pressure and full(= 100%) vacuum.
Unless otherwise specified, all pressure vessels shall be designed to withstand all operation
conditions including water hammer and not less than 1.2 times the zero flow pressure of the
relevant pump at cold conditions, or 1.2 times of the maximum positive operating pressure,
as applicable.
The minimum wall thickness of tanks/ vessels shall not be less than 6 mm plus an
appropriate corrosion allowance based upon the particular material, but not less than 2 mm.
All nozzles shall be provided with flanges (with the exception of HP tanks/pressure vessels)
and shall so be arranged that practical pipe connections are possible. The stub length for all
stub pipes shall be at least 200 mm, measured from the tank wall to the flange sealing
surface. In the case of insulated vessels, the length shall be chosen so that there will be a
clear space of at least 100 mm between the cover of the insulation and the underside of the
flange. Nozzles of nominal bore DN 50 and less shall be reinforced by two ribs at different
planes. Nozzles below DN 25 are not acceptable.
The tanks/vessels shall be of welded construction, manufactured from mild steel plate of
approved quality and thickness, adequately stiffened and stayed where necessary. The edges
of all stiffeners and cover straps and the ends of all stays shall be continuously welded to the
main tank plates. Chain welding is not permitted. All bolted pipe connections shall be made
to welded-on pads, the thickness of which is not less than one and one half times the
diameter of the joint studs. Joint stud holes shall be not drilled through the pads. Bolted pipe
connections shall be made with studs and not tap bolts and the connections are provided on
the sides of the tanks so as to permit maintenance from the tank floor.
Provision shall be made on all tanks and vessels for a minimum of 2 earthing tags, whereby
the tank or vessel shall be connected to the earthing system via two separate earthing cables.
Instrumentation and control equipment shall be provided according to the safe service
requirements. A minimum requirement is to equip each vessel with a local level indicator, a
temperature and a pressure indicator, if required.
Manholes/handholes shall be provided as follows:
• handholes (minimum size 200 mm) for vessels/tanks below 1.0 meter diameter.
• manhole (minimum nominal bore 600 mm) for vessels/tanks of 1.0 meter to 2.0 meter
diameter
• manhole (minimum nominal bore 800 mm) for vessels/tanks of 2.0 meter diameter and
above
Manhole covers of nominal weight above 20 kg shall be provided with hinged arms.
All tanks/vessel internals must be replaceable through the manhole unless approved by SC.
For insulated tanks/vessels, provision shall be made for fixing and supporting the insulation.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 635/765
Prefabricated vessels must as a minimum have a coat of primer applied before transport.
They shall be cleaned and internally dry. All openings must be secured closed before
transport.
All tanks/vessels shall be complete with all necessary accessories for their safe, efficient and
stable operation. Fittings include, but are not be limited to, the following:
• filling, overflow, drain and vent connections
• safety valves
• pressure release valves
• level controls or level indication, valves, pipework, instrument lines and gauges
• level switch for high and low level monitoring
• overfilling interlock
• temperature and pressure indicators (for pressure vessels).
• caged ladders, stairs and hand rails to ensure safety of personnel.
The welding factor for all vessels is fixed to v = 1.0.
The tanks/vessels shall be designed, constructed, painted (coated) and lined in such a
manner that internal and external corrosion and especially contamination of the stored
medium by rust and/or by other material is entirely prevented.
Each Lot shall ensure that for all embedded steel tanks or tanks resting on a concrete base,
adequate protection measures are implemented to prevent corrosion of the base of the tank.
B0.12.7 Heat Exchangers
Heat exchangers are to be designed, manufactured and erected in accordance with the
applicable standards.
The applicable fouling factor data sheets and calculations for the heat exchanger designs
shall be provided to SC for approval.
Only proven products shall be delivered. No cast iron components are permitted.
It must be possible to install and remove the heat exchangers without undue difficulty.
Lifting lugs, eyes, and other special tackle or other provisions shall be provided to permit
easy handling.
Depending on the operating conditions, tubular heat exchangers, plate or frame type heat
exchangers are acceptable. Where necessary the tubes are to be protected by impact shields.
An adequate number of visual inspection ports are to be provided in critical areas to
facilitate condition monitoring.
Design pressure of all heat exchanger tubes and casings shall be same as that of the
connecting piping.
Unless otherwise specified, all heat exchanger tubes, plates and casings must be designed to
withstand all operation conditions including water hammer and not less than 1.2 times the
zero flow pressure of the relevant pump at cold conditions, or 1.2 times of the maximum
positive operating pressure, as applicable. All heat exchangers (tubes, shell, plates) shall be

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 636/765
designed such that all pressurized parts can be hydrostatically pressure tested according to
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
The test pressure for pressure parts of pressure vessels shall be in accordance with
conditions listed in the latest edition of applicable ASME codes.
The heat exchangers shall be designed for the maximum temperature incurred plus 20 K.
The feed water heaters shall be designed for the maximum temperature given by maximum
extraction pressure.
Exchangers shall be designed for the most severe coincident conditions of pressure and
temperature, as provided in this specification.
The highest operating pressure shall be located on the tube side. SC's approval is required if
the highest pressure is located on the shell side.
Heat exchangers must be capable of continuous unrestricted operation with up to 10% of the
tubes plugged, and a corresponding 10% overdesign in the heat transfer areas must be used
in the design of the heat exchangers.
Heat exchangers must be capable of continuous unrestricted operation. In the design of the
heat transfer areas a factor of conservatism shall be added.
Where any heat exchanger part in contact with liquid can be isolated, and there is a
possibility of being heated from the other side, safety valves are to be provided for pressure
relief.
Pipes from drains, vents and safety valves are to be grouped together, and routed to easily
observable points equipped with covered funnels or to the flash tanks.
The overall design and conception of the heat exchangers and accessories is to be such that
they are suitable for the degree of automation envisaged for the individual system.
Considerable importance shall be attached to the ease of cleaning the heat exchangers.
For the cleaning of the heat exchanger, the Contractor must take the following issues into
consideration:
• Accessibly of the heat exchangers i.e. walk ways etc.

• End caps to be removable to allow access to the tubes
• Heat exchanger shall not be located in the proximity of any electrical equipment to allow
safe cleaning with water
• Design of the heat exchangers shall allow cleaning with a high pressure water spray
and/or chemical cleaning agent
• If there is a possibility that any of the medium could be contaminated, inlet strainers of a
suitable filtration size shall be provided.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 637/765
80.12.8 Fire fighting and protection system
80.12.8.1 General
Independent of special fire fighting and protection systems requested by NFP A for
equipment or systems supplied by the Lots the following general requirements and design
guidelines shall be followed.
Any building or areas, which are protected by "wet" fire fighting installations, must have an
"external fire brigade connection". They shall be placed in such a way that free access for
fire brigade tankers and trucks is possible anytime.
Upstream of those fire brigade connections, suitable non-return valves in the main - and
branch line shall be provided, in order to facilitate pressurization of the installation from the
second independent source (Fire truck).
A dedicated two (2) hour fire water supply shall be ensured to cover the system design flow
rate for each protected area or facility in accordance with NFPA 850.
The fire fighting pump house including equipment shall be part of the scope of Lot 3.
Lot 1 and Lot 2 shall determine the fire fighting water demand for their lots in accordance
with NFPA 850 and design the internal systems accordingly.
Lot 3 shall design and erect the overall fire fighting water distribution system based on the
fire fighting water demand required by NFPA in close coordination with Lot 1 and 2. The
base line for the design of the fire main shall be NFPA 24. Accordingly the fire main shall
be designed as a ring main and equipped with sectional valves to separate faulty section for
maintenance purpose without supply interruptions to other consumers. The main fire ring
shall be provided to serve outdoor-hydrants and supply water to the indoor hose reel and
sprinkler/spray system at strategically placed locations.
The compliance with all relevant local and NFPA standards (whatever is more stringent)
shall be ensured. The system shall incorporate also any additional features or enhancements
required by relevant national, regional or local fire authority guidelines.
A fire risk assessment according to NFPA 850 or ISO 31000, whichever is more severe,
shall be performed by all lot suppliers to analyze the likelihood of fires. Special attention
shall be given to:
• Fire prevention
• Control of ignition sources
• Identification of hazards and hazardous areas
• Construction precautions
• Fire detection and alarm systems
• Smoke extraction and separation
• Fire water supply and distribution
• Portable fire extinguisher
• Escape routes/ emergency exit
• Symbolic safety signs
• Emergency response plans for both during construction and operation

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 638/765
• Others wherever necessary.
80.12.8.2 Fire fighting equipment
Water sprinkler system

Water sprinkler systems shall be provided in accordance with NFPA Code No. 13. The
design density and area of operation shall be determined to suit the risk.
The sprinkler systems shall normally be "wet" installations.
Each sprinkler system connected to the fire water distribution system shall start delivering
water automatically when high temperature causes the break of a sprinkler bulb. The manual
closing of the related valve shall stop the water release.
Sprinkler heads shall either be fusible or quartzoid bulb type.
The operating temperature shall be at least 30°C above the maximum anticipated ambient
temperature. Higher temperature ratings shall be used where flammable liquids are present.
Wax covered sprinklers shall be used in areas with a corrosive atmosphere; in office spaces,
etc., epoxy coated sprinklers shall be used.
Flushing connections shall be provided on all sprinkler systems located on the ends of cross
mams.
Any inspector test connections shall be provided. Its discharge shall be directed at a safe
place; its control valve shall be located less than 2 m (6.6 ft) above ground level, wherever
possible.
A local alarm shall be provided by a water motor alarm gong connected to the sprinkler
system alarm check valve.
Each system shall be provided with a pair of voltage free contacts, operated by a pressure
switch in the alarm gong pipework only, a flow switch in the discharge pipework to indicate
operation of the system to remote fire detection and alarm control unit for that Fire Safety
Section.
Spray water deluge system

Spray and water systems shall be provided in accordance with NFPA Code No. I 5, latest
edition.
Each spray water deluge system shall be equipped with one or multiple pressurized pilot
pipes. If high temperature breaks one or more of sprinkler bulbs, the deluge valve shall be
initiated to release the water discharge.
The system shall stop only if the deluge valve has been manually closed. Operating the
manual emergency release may also actuate the water discharge.
In addition the system shall have also the possibility to be initiated upon receipt of an
electrical signal from the fire detection and alarm system control unit for that fire safety
section or manually adjacent to the deluge valve itself.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 639/765
The system shall be provided with a pair of voltage free changeover contacts, operated by a
pressure or flow switch in the discharge pipework to indicate successful operation of the
system to the fire detection and alarm control unit for that Fire Safety Section.
Foam-water extinguishing system

Foam water sprinkler systems shall be provided in accordance with NFPA Code No. 16.
Each foam-water extinguishing system shall have its individual foam chamber, proportioner
and injector. Basically it shall consist of one or multiple pilot lines with sprinkler bulbs
breaking by a determined release temperature.
If the release temperature has been reached bulks will break. Because of the decreasing
pressure downstream of the deluge valve - it is opening and release the foam-water mixture.
The system stops only manually after closing the deluge valve station by hand.
Where required foam monitors shall be installed to cover large areas like fuel or lube oil
retention basins.
Each foam-water system shall contain two (2) x 100% foam pumps, which shall pump foam
concentrate from the concentrate storage tank to foam proportioner skids. Pressurized water
connection shall be provided to the injector of each foam proportioner skid.
The system shall be provided with a pair of voltage free changeover contacts, operated by a
pressure or flow switch in the discharge pipework to indicate successful operation of the
system to the fire detection and alarm control unit for that Fire Safety Section.
Fire hydrants
Hydrants shall be of the wet barrel type with DN 150 barrel. Each hydrant shall be equipped
with two 65 mm instantaneous coupling with caps and chains to suit local fire brigade
requirements. If required, pressure reducing valves must be installed to reduce the hose
nozzle outlet pressure to prevent hose whipping and injury to personnel operating the hose.
Each hydrant shall be fitted with a stop valve in the supply pipe from the main.
In accordance with NFP A the distance between hydrants shall be approximately 45 - 50

meters. But the maximum distance shall not exceed 90 m.
Fire hose reels and equipment cabinets

Indoor hydrants for instant intervention shall be provided for all buildings following the
survey of fire protection systems in such a number that all portions of each floor can be
reached by a hose stream. Cabinets installed outdoors shall be of a suitable material or be
suitably protected against climatic conditions to prevent corrosion. Door hinges shall be of a
corrosion resistant material.
Hose reels shall normally be located on each floor adjacent to the exit routes from the
buildings.
The indoor hydrant and equipment cabinets follow the NFP A standard.
Inert gas system (e.g. INERGEN)

Each inert gas system shall consist mainly of:

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 640/765
Standard storage rechargeable inert gas cylinders of nominal size of approx. 50 kg shall be
rated for the maximum ambient temperature for safety reasons.
Distribution and discharge manifolds and nozzles;
Pressure switches for signaling;
Local control panel.
The inert gas system shall the possibility to be actuated either automatically or manually.
The automatic intervention shall take place upon receipt of the actuating signal from the fire
detectors (i.e. smoke, heat, UV).
In the event of fire, the fire detectors shall initiate an alarm with coincidence (double-knock)
principle (to limit false alarm gas release) in the local panel and main fire alarm panel. With
the required time delay for evacuation of staff the detection signal shall open the deluge
valve automatically and the protected area shall be filled up by rapid injection of required
quantity of inert gas through the pipe network and discharge nozzles to create a homogenous
air/inert gas atmosphere. The activation of the inert gas system shall automatically
deactivate the HVAC system for the protected area.
The pipe network shall be connected to a gas manifold, through the above mentioned
automatic deluge valve with manual override. The manifold shall be connected to a group of
inert gas cylinders.
The system design and sizing shall follow NFPA 12 - Standard on Carbon Dioxide
Extinguishing systems, which is also applicable for the design of other Inert gas
extinguishing systems.
In case of gas release, personnel alarm system by way of bells and strobe lights above doors
shall be activated.
The access to inert gas protected areas shall be allowed only when the system is switched off.
For that each main entry doors of protected areas shall be open only with special keys,
which are kept at special docking station of the related panel. This system shall be activated
when the related key is placed therein. If the key is outside of the docking station the system
shall be deactivated. In addition the activation key cannot be removed from the entry door if
this latter is not closed and locked.
The inert gas system status shall be indicated by means of signal lamps fitted on the local
control panel and above the entrance doors to the protected area.
Portable and mobile extinguishers

Portable fire extinguishers shall be sized, rated and placed in accordance with NFPA 10.
The following typical portable and mobile (wheeled) fire extinguishers shall be supplied:
Portable extinguishers
The following types of portable extinguishers shall be considered:
• Dry chemical fire extinguishers, capacity: 6 kg

• Foam spray AFF fire extinguisher, capacity: 10 It.
• Carbon dioxide fire extinguisher, capacity: 5 kg

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 641/765
Where extinguishers are exposed to outdoors conditions or in areas where they may be
subjected to extensive dust or other harmful conditions, they shall be kept inside a protective
cabinet.
The extinguishers shall be operated by means of levers provided with safety pins, which
allows also a partial discharge.
Mobile extinguishers
The following types of wheeled extinguishers shall be considered:
• Dry chemical fire extinguisher, capacity: 20 kg

• Carbon dioxide fire extinguisher, capacity: 30 kg
• Foam spray fire extinguisher capacity: 130 It.
Dry chemical extinguishers:

• Wheeled dry chemical extinguisher shall be provided and shall consist of a powder
container to which shall be attached a cylinder or nitrogen gas for use as the propellant of
the extinguisher. The powder shall be fed from the container to the discharge nozzle
through a flexible hose. This equipment shall be mounted on a metal frame with wheels
and handle to make it mobile and manoeuvrable.
• The pressurizing cylinder shall be externally attached to the powder container.
• The hose conducting powder to the discharge nozzle shall be 10 m long and made of
braided synthetic flexible hose which shall be permanently connected to the dry powder
container and shall be stored in a manner allowing easy removal for use.
• The unit shall have two wheels which shall have rubber or synthetic tyres and a minimum
overall diameter of 300 mm. The overall width of the unit shall not exceed 800 mm.
• The controls shall be a single, easily accessible, valve used to release the pressurizing gas
into the powder container. The nozzle shall control the discharge of powder and shall be
designed for controlled delivery.
Carbon dioxide extinguishers:

• Wheeled carbon dioxide extinguishers shall be provided where stated in the Specification
for electrical risks.
• The container(s) shall be of steel construction and provided with a siphon tube, valve and
pressure relief device, a suitably rated discharge hose and a horn.
• It should be ensured that complete discharge of such extinguishers within the space
protected shall not produce a concentration dangerous to personnel.
Foam spray fire extinguisher:

• Mobile foam extinguishers shall consist of one container of fluoreoprotein foam liquid to
which shall be attached a cylinder of nitrogen gas for use as the propellant. The foam
making liquid shall be fed to a discharge nozzle through a flexible hose. The equipment
shall be mounted on a metal frame with wheels and handle. The foam agent container
shall be of steel construction and shall have been tested to at least twice the operating
pressure.
• The unit shall have at least two wheels which shall have rubber or synthetic tyres and a
minimum overall diameter of 300 mm.
• All steel components of the extinguisher shall be galvanized or protected against

corrosion by an equally effective method.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 642/765
• The hose conducting the extinguishing foam to the discharge nozzle shall be 15 m long
and shall be permanently connected to the foam container. The pressurized cylinder shall
be externally attached to the foam container.
• The hose shall be stored in a manner allowing easy removal for use. The nozzle shall be
such that foam making liquid is released in a jet. A single easily accessible valve shall be
used to release the pressurized gas into the container.
80.12.8.3 Smoke and heat removal systems
Smoke and heat removal equipment shall be installed to enable fire fighting by the fire
brigade and to decrease the thermal stress of the structural elements. Requirements on the
design and dimensioning shall be specified in accordance with applicable standards (NFPA
204 and 92A or equivalent).
Two principles shall be applied for the use of smoke and heat venting devices:
• Smoke and heat removal devices using natural venting and thermal lifting forces
• Mechanically operated smoke and heat removal equipment using electrically driven
exhausters.
In each building, where smoke and heat venting devices are installed, a sufficient effective
area for the air intake shall be provided. Generally the area of air intake shall be at least 1.5
times the effective release area of the venting devices.
Actuators for smoke venting devices have to be placed beside doors on the outside wall and
labeled accordingly. The devices shall be actuated either manually or automatically.
Air intakes areas shall be opened immediately after activation of the smoke and heat
removal devices (normally done by the fire brigades). At least one smoke and heat removal
device has to be installed per 200 m2 of the roof top area. Distances between them shall be in
the limits between 4 m and 20 m. Distances to outside walls shall be within 5 m to 10 m.
However deviations in particular cases shall be permitted.
Mechanically operated smoke and heat venting devices shall be serviceable in case of a fire
for a sufficient time span.
In areas with gaseous fire extinguishing systems, the smoke ventilation system should be
properly interlocked to ensure the effective operation of the gaseous fire extinguishing
system.
The necessity and scope of the installation of smoke and heat removal devices shall be
evaluated by single assessment of each building and in compliance with the above
mentioned standards and guidelines.
In the turbine hall and boiler house naturally operating smoke and heat removal devices
shall be installed with release area of at least 1% of the ground area.
All staircases shall be equipped with naturally operating smoke vents at the highest position
and a minimum venting area of 5% of the ground area, but at least 1 m2 . Staircases, which

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 643/765
are enclosed by outside walls, shall be furnished with windows to be opened to the outdoors
on each floor or stage and with a minimum opening area of 0.5 m2 .
Each elevator shaft shall be equipped with a smoke vent at the top of the shaft.
80.12.8.4 Fire detection and alarm Systems
80.12.8.4.1 General
The purpose of the fire alarm system is to guarantee a reliable and fault-free early-warning
system in the event of fire by means of automatically activated detectors, so that orders for
extinguishing the fire can be issued from a central point.
The fire alarm system shall be designed in accordance with the relevant NFPA guidelines,
and shall conform to the latest state-of-the-art in the field of fire alarm system engineering.
Push-button actuation must be provided for manually operated fire alarms in staircases, next
by exits and on all escape routes.
Sirens for indoor and outdoor installation must be provided for warning the operating
personnel.
The whole of the plant area to be monitored is to be divided into individual alarm sections,
the latter being so arranged as to enable rapid and positive identification of fires.
Local fire alarms, automatic fire detectors and fire annunciator panels shall be designed and
supplied in accordance with NFPA 72 for each individual fire zone.
Detectors installed in false floors, suspended ceilings, cable ducts, air-conditioning or
ventilation systems are also to be combined to form separate alarm sections.
Detectors belonging to a particular alarm section are to be incorporated in alarm lines, the
automatic and manual fire alarms being connected via separate alarm lines to the common
fire alarm central station in the central control room.
The arrangement and number of detectors is determined by the type of fire detector used, by
the room configuration (size, height, form of floor and roofing, etc.) as well as by the
ambient conditions in the rooms to be monitored.
In the central control room the necessary automatic fire detectors are to be incorporated in
the luminous ceiling.
Detectors installed in inaccessible points such as cable ducts, false floors, cable basements,
etc. are to be connected in parallel to external optical alarm indicators installed close by and
in readily visible positions.
No restrictions on the proper functioning of fire alarm by reason of movement of air, optical
radiation, smoke, dust, vibration, high humidity, etc. are acceptable. Moreover, fire alarms
shall be located in the outgoing airflows of air-conditioning and ventilation systems.
The alarm signal receiving units must be so designed that by use of a standardized alarm
unit socket, any of the types of detector may be used with equal facility on any of the fire
alarm circuits.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 644/765
The fire alarm central station must be housed in sheet-steel enclosed cabinets and located in
the central control room or nearby in an appropriate location. Both optical and audible
signals must be given when a fire alarm or fault alarm occurs.
Power supply for the fire alarm system shall be taken from the AC busbar, However,
emergency supply shall be provided internally for each fire alarm subsystem by a
rectifier/battery set (1 (one) x 100%), designed for 4 (four) hours discharge time.
Each Lot shall provide complete functional fire detection and alarm system covering the
individual scope of supply. These subsystems are then connected to a fire alarm central
station.
80.12.8.4.2 Fire alarm station
All fire alarm stations are to be implemented in all-electronic technology using plug-in units
and assemblies on the modular construction principle, and shall be accommodated in metal
clad enclosed panels with type IP 31 enclosure for wall-mounted/free standing installation.
The arrangement and functioning of the fire alarm station shall be such as to permit as a
minimum the following:
• The fire alarm and fault annunciation system shall be designed with optical and audible
alarms. Whereas the audible alarm must be resettable, the optical indication shall persist
until the annunciation is finally extinguished or the fault cleared. If a fault warning is
followed by a fire alarm annunciation, the fault indication must be stored and suppressed
until the fire alarm condition has been cancelled.
• Provision shall be made for clear audible identification of the alarm/fault signal.
• Furthermore, fire alarm signals and fault signals shall be strictly segregated.
• fire alarm signals shall be transmitted to the central fire alarm station at control room or
to the local fire brigade. The alarm line to the fire central fire alarm station shall be
continuously monitored.
The individual fire alarm stations, lines and function lines of the fire-fighting equipment and
facilities, as well as important functional groups of the fire alarm central station shall be
continuously monitored for faults and breakdowns e.g. for:
• wire breakage of each alarm line
• short-circuit of each alarm line
• earth fault of the fire alarm system
• power supply system faulty
• main fuses and MCB's failure
• alarm modules disconnected from plug-in frame.
All fault signals shall be optically and audibly indicated and transferred to the DCS.
For checking out the functioning of the complete fire alarm system including the fire alarm
lines and fire alarm devices, testing facilities shall be provided. When testing a circuit,
initiation of fire alarm warnings in external facilities shall be prevented. After testing, the
tested circuit shall automatically reset to normal operation.
Simulation (e.g. test pins) of all relevant fault signals as listed above as well as of all fire
alarms shall be possible in order to check-out the externally connected fire fighting facilities.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 645/765
The fire alarm central station shall be provided with potential-free change-over contacts
wired to a central terminal board as follows:
• contacts to control the fire protection doors
• contacts to control the air-conditioning and ventilation equipment
• contacts for spare.
Activation of fire protection doors shall be signaled as a group annunciation to the fire alarm
central station and included in the alarm annunciation system.
80.12.8.4.3 Fire alarm central station
The fire alarm central station shall be supplied by Lot 1. Lot 2-4 supplier shall connect their
lines to the fire alarm central station.
For recording all fire alarm and fault annunciations, control instructions and operator actions,
a line printer shall be provided and this shall have facilities for printing out the alarm line
number, date and time of day in hours and minutes.
80.12.8.4.4 Layout display board
For indicating fire alarm and fault annunciations from the central fire alarm system, a layout
display board has to be provided in the panel in the central control room by Lot 1. This
board shall include a graphic display to show a simplified ground plan of the power plant
and of the individual buildings and shall feature signal lamps for the separate optical
indication of the alarm line, and shall include the annunciator with alarm test, reset and
acknowledge buttons.
Preferably a separate monitor with appropriate graphics etc. shall be supplied.
80.12.8.4.5 Display board at gate house
For information and guidance of fire brigade a simplified graphic display board shall be
installed in the power plant gate house. The Display board shall be supplied by Lot 1 and
installed by Lot 4.
80.12.8.4.6 Detection systems
The fire detector system elements and the associated mountings are to be provided with
sturdy, corrosion-proof plastic housings.
The fire alarm detectors are to be provided with optical means for signaling their activation
(e.g. light-emitting diode), and are to be suitable for the connection of an additional optical
external alarm indication.
The fire alarm detectors shall reset ready for operation following each alarm, without
outside intervention, and shall plug-in and be provided with suitable means to prevent
unauthorized removal or disconnection and for connection to the fire alarm central station.
The following detector types as a minimum shall be used for fulfilling the requirements for
the power plant as a whole:

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 646/765
80.12.8.4.6.1 Ionization detectors
For the early identification of visible and invisible fire aerosols, consisting of ionization
chamber, alarm electronics, optical alarm indication, response delay presettable to suit
ambient conditions, detector socket, variable response sensitivity.
80.12.8.4.6.2 Optical smoke detector
For early identification of visible smoke generation, consisting of photoelectric unit, alarm
electronics, optical alarm indication, detector socket.
80.12.8.4.6.3 Flame detector
For early identification of fire outbreaks and open flames, consisting of optical unit, alarm
electronics, optical alarm indication, detector socket, variable response sensitivity
80.12.8.4.6.4 Thermo-differential and thermo-maximum detector
For early identification of fires as they break out with rapid temperature rise and little smoke
generation, consisting of temperature sensor, alarm electronics, detector socket.
80.12.8.4.6.5 Manually operated push buttons
Consisting of push-button, only operable after smashing the replaceable glass window fitted
in the housing, painted red, interlocking mechanism, to be reset by key,
80.12.8.4.6.6 Sirens
The protection degree of the sirens for indoor and outdoor installation must be at least IP 54.
The outdoor sirens are to be arranged on the boiler houses, transformer area, tank farm etc.
The arrangement of the indoor sirens must meet the requirements at site for satisfactory
warning of the operating personnel, e.g. mounting in the turbine hall, pipe ducts etc. The
control of the sirens shall be performed automatically by the fire alarm system, but manual
operation from the central control room must also be possible.
80.12.9 Cranes, hoists and elevators
80.12.9.1 General
Cranes and hoists shall be provided for installation and maintenance of heavy equipment or
loading/unloading of chemicals and goods like spare parts, filter elements and supporting
tools during construction and maintenance.
Elevators shall carry goods, operating and maintenance personnel to various floors of the
buildings where these are required.
All cranes, hoists and other lifting equipment shall be load tested by a certified and
authorized testing company/authority to a load of 25% above the nominal lifting load in

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 647/765
accordance with BS 7121-2 -2003/04, JIS or equivalent. The load testing shall be done prior
to the shipment of equipment to site.
Additional tests must be done and certified after erection and before release for operation.
80.12.9.2 Cranes
The lifting equipment must be designed, constructed and tested according to the
international standards such as FEM 1.001 "Rules for the Design of Hoisting Appliances"
and local standards, whatever is more stringent.
The nominal lifting capacity of cranes must be such that the heaviest object to be lifted can
be transported with safety.
Cranes with a span of more than 8 m and/or a nominal lifting capacity of more than 5 tons
shall be in the form of double-girder cranes with the crab running on top.
Smaller cranes shall be in the form of single-girder cranes with the crab running on the
lower flange or in the form of suspension cranes.
Cranes with a nominal lifting capacity of 3 0 tons and above shall be fitted with an auxiliary
hoist.
The end-carriages of all cranes shall generally be of welded box-girder construction. Buffers
shall be provided at the faces on the end-carriages. The end-carriages shall also be fitted
with wheel-breakage supports designed to prevent derailment as well.
The maximum deflection of the main bridge with the crab and rated load at the center of the
bridge should not exceed 1/750 of the span in accordance to BS7121-2 -2003/04 JIS or
equivalent.
The crab assemblies shall be of rigid steel construction. Buffers shall be provided at the
faces of the crabs. The crabs shall as far as possible be covered with smooth metal sheets.
The crane and crab running wheels shall be made of cast or forged steel and shall have
double flanges. The wheels should have rolling bearings lubricated for life. For cranes used
for the removal and installation of pump rotors in vertical pumps (e.g. cooling water pumps),
it is important to ensure that there is no lateral drift of the hook during lifting and lowering.
The turbine hall cranes shall be equipped with a radio control unit, while all other cranes
shall be equipped with pendant control units. The pendant control units shall be suspended
on the bridge so that they can travel along it independently of the crab, and shall be
detachable.
Radio-controlled cranes shall be able to be controlled remotely at a maximum radius of 20 m

away from the crane at floor level.
All pendant and radio control units shall be fitted with rocker-type or push-button switches
for the crane functions. A key switch and an emergency stop switch shall also be provided
on each panel. Additional switches or push buttons shall be provided as required.
The crane and crab drives are to be designed according to manufacturer standard.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 648/765
All travelling and traversing drives are to incorporate pole-reversible squirrel-cage gear
motors with sliding armature and brake. Frequency regulated motors are also acceptable
The lifting gear may consist of standard electric hoists with sliding armature motor and cone
brake or disc brake.
The precision speed control shall be provided for all crane and lifting gears.
All monorail beams, cranes and lifting equipment shall be painted in a specific color, which
shall be approved by SC.
All parts of the plant shall be provided with a convenient arrangement for slinging or
handling during erection and overhaul. Any item of plant normally stripped or lifted during
maintenance shall be permanently marked with its weight.
All main equipment that is not capable of being lifted by permanently installed cranes/lifting
equipment shall be suitable for jacking into and out of position by means of appropriate
jacking facilities. Such solutions require SCs approval.
Anyway the Bidder shall demonstrate that the lifting/jacking equipment is satisfactory for its
intended purpose.
The safe working load shall be clearly marked on all cranes and lifting equipment.
All hooks shall be equipped with safety catches and punch marks to measure the deformity
of the hook.
80.12.9.3 Hoists
Hoists shall be provided throughout the entire installation where machines or other
components are to be installed, removed, repaired, serviced or transported and these parts
are not in the working area of a crane.
The final number of hoists to be supplied shall be proposed by the Bidder according to the
requirements of supplied equipment and final arrangement. Any necessary change of hoists
must not lead to any price change of the contract price.
Hoists of lifting capacity up to 5 tons shall be manual hoists (chain hoists). Hoists of lifting
capacity above 5 tons shall be electrical hoists.
Hoisting effort for hoists up to 3 tons capacity shall not be more than 20 kg. Hoisting effort
for hoists above 3 tons capacity shall not be more than 25 kg.
Effort for trolley motion for hoists up to 3 tons capacity shall not be more than 15 kg. Effort
for trolley motion for hoists above 3 tons capacity shall not be more than 20 kg.
For electric operated hoist both hoisting and trolley motion shall be motor operated.
All hoists provided shall be standard products.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 649/765
The nominal or rated lifting capacity of hoists and of their attachment points shall be such
that the heaviest object to be lifted can be transported with safety.
Manual hoists shall take the form of chain tackle blocks with load and drive chains. The
crabs shall be fitted with a drive also operated by a chain.
Electrically driven hoists and crabs shall be equipped with squirrel-cage motors. An inching
control shall be provided on all electrically driven hoists and crabs.
The crab power supplies shall be in the form of sheet-steel-enclosed safety power tracks,
which can be easily bent to follow the form of the hoist runways.
Electrical switchgear and control gear shall be mounted directly on the hoists in cabinets.
Pendant control units, fitted with pushbutton or rocker-type switches, shall be provided to
operate electric hoists. The pendants shall be fixed to the hoists in such a way that safe
operation is guaranteed.
Limit switches shall be fitted to all lifting and travel gear.
The electrically operated hoists shall be permanent installed. Each hoist shall have a definite
parking position equipped with easy access for maintenance personnel.
Where hoists are not easily accessible by simple means such as ladders or mobile scaffolds,
maintenance platforms with means of access shall be provided.
80.12.9.4 Elevators
The elevator equipment must be designed, constructed and tested according to international
standards such as ISO 4190 or local standards, whatever is more stringent.
The elevator installations shall be designed as cable-operated lifts with traction machine.
During the construction period, sides (without doors) and floor of the cars shall be provided
with protective coverings (hardboard panels or similar).
Motors and switchgear must be designed for at least 180 starts/stops per hour. The type of
enclosure of switchboards and motors shall comply with special electrical requirements of
this Part BO.
The lifts shall be of heavy-duty industrial construction types - suitable for outdoor
installation. Where the lift shaft and machinery room are of steel construction, metal
cladding sheets and heat insulation shall be provided.
The cars shall be made of stainless steel. An anti-drumming substance is to be applied on the
outer surface. On the inside, the car shall be provided with skirting strips, a handrail made of
anodized aluminum and two protecting strips made of hardwood.
The floors shall be made of steel sheets. Personnel lifts shall be equipped with plastic floor
covering in addition to the steel sheets. Maintenance lifts, including those for combined use
(maintenance and personnel) - shall be provided with steel floors only.
A fan and illumination shall be fitted in the car ceiling.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 650/765
The car shall have one (1) entrance each, provided with fully automatic telescope-type
sliding doors, made of stainless steel.
Landings for each platform shall be provided.
Photoelectric light barriers are to be fitted at the car entrance.
A floor indicator with floor symbols 'Up' and 'Down' arrow shall be provided inside the car.
The car roof shall be fitted with three-sided, twist-resisting railing. A mounting plate fixed
to the railing must be fitted with all equipment and power sockets required for inspection
rides, repair works, etc. Each of the maintenance lift must be equipped with a protective rail
around on the floor to protect the side sheets of the cage.
The lift shall be equipped with an adjustable overload protection device with a visual and
audible signal in the car. Only the manufacturer shall be able to adjust the overload
protection device.
The car control panels shall contain floor selector buttons, an alarm pushbutton, door-
operating buttons, visual and audible overload indication, and "out-of-service" indication, a
priority control key switch and a fan switch.
All floor selector buttons - including the lift call buttons on the outside panels - shall be
designed in the form of pushbuttons with call acknowledgement.
At every landing - call acknowledgement buttons and an "Out-of-Order" sign shall be

provided.
Door and locking contacts shall be of fully enclosed design, dust-proofed as far as possible
and with additional safety contacts to prevent operation of the lift if the door is not properly
closed. It shall be not possible to reopen doors after the lift has departed. An emergency
unlocking device must be fitted to each door.
Lift shaft illumination shall be provided at each landing and at intervals of no more than 3 m.
In the pit of the lift shaft - illumination must also be provided as well as power sockets. At
minimum one switch shall be provided in the machinery room and in the pit of the lift shaft.
The cabin and counterweight guides shall be designed in the form of roller guides.
The lift pit shall be equipped with hydraulic dampers for the car and counter weight. The
dampers shall be equipped with a sight glass or dipstick to check the oil levels. Additionally
they shall be fitted with an electric safety device. This device must prevent the lift from
operating if the buffers are not fully extended and/or out of operation.
The safety gears shall be of the progressive type.
Instantaneous types of safety gear are not permitted.
The control voltage shall be 220 V AC. A control transformer provided by the supplier shall
produce the control voltage. The entire switchgear shall be installed in separate lift
machinery rooms provided for this purpose above the shafts.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 651/765
In the event of failure of the main voltage for car illumination, alarm equipment and
ventilation, the emergency power supply must be able to keep the alarm equipment and
ventilation operational for at least four hours.
During that period, emergency illumination must be effective in the car, too.
For telephone lines, screened telephone cable shall be used.
In the car, a telephone shall be placed in recesses next to the car panel. Telephones shall be
of a wall-mounting design. The make and type of telephone shall be subject of approval by
SC.
Controls shall be provided with a fine adjustment facility, which automatically compensates
the rope elongation occurring during loading and unloading.
The fastening of the lift machinery shall be provided with sound absorbing elements to
prevent resonance excitation caused by mechanical vibrations.
The machinery rooms shall have forced ventilation in order to keep the temperature inside
below the ambient temperature plus 5 K. Dust filters must be fitted at the forced ventilation
air intake.
Brakes shall to be designed as double-shoe brakes with magnetic brake motor.
Gears shall be completely enclosed and run in an oil bath.
Drives shall be equipped with electronic control units ensuring absolutely continuous and
load-independent control of acceleration and deceleration. During the latter, mechanical
brakes shall not start to operate before complete standstill has occurred.
The elevator control system shall be of direction-sensitive two-button collective controller

type.
The controls for the lift shall be supplemented by a priority control in the car and an external
priority control on the main service platform. Operation of the priority controls shall be
achieved by means of key switches.
In that operation mode the lift shall stop at the main service platform. If priory control is set
the lift must always return to the service platform automatically.
Cage roof shall be provided with an escape hatch electrically interlocked with hoist control
system.
B0.12.10 Compressed air system
A common compressed air system shall be supplied by Lot 3 (see Section B3). The
compressed air system shall contain two independent distribution systems for:
• Instrument air (dry)

• Service Air

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 652/765
The air distribution up to the consumers shall be done by each Lot (see also terminal point
list in Annexes CO)
The design pressure for any compressed air equipment shall be~ 1Obar(g). Any pneumatic
actuator, control valve or maintenance tool shall by safely operable in a pressure range of 6
to 8 bar(g). This is the supply pressure at the tie-in point of each branch.
Service air demands for impulse jet filters (if applicable), fly ash transportation systems etc.
shall be provided by separate compressed air systems as part of Lot 2 or Lot 3 scope.
In regard to procurement and supply - special attention shall be given also to the
requirements listed is Part BO: Standardization of makes to avoid incompatibilities of
equipment and spare parts.
80.12.11 High temperature austenitic and ferritic/ martensitic steels
80.12.11.1 General
The purpose of this chapter is to provide the additional requirements for the purchase,
manufacturing and fabrication of:
• austenitic stainless steels used for Superheater and Reheater tubing of type: Super304H -
TP34 7H FG - TP3 l ON/HR3C.
• ferritic/martensitic steels used for high temperature pressure parts: T/P23
(7CrWVMoNb9-6)-HCM2S-T/P24 (7CrMoVTiB10.10)-T/P91 (Xl0CrMoVNb9-l)-
T/P92 (Xl0CrWMoVNb9-2)-E911 (X11CrMoWVNb9-l -1 )-T/P 122-HCM12(A)-
VM12.
Those requirements are supplementary to the Codes, Standards and relevant reference
documents and specifically to EN 12952 and/or EN 13480 in function of their scope and
applicability. (SC) Material for pressure parts to be followed ASME code.
All Manufacturers and Suppliers of base metals, from raw materials until finished products,
shall be ISO 9001 :2000 certified for the duration of the contract or being renewed during the
duration of the contract as appropriate.
Only seamless tubes in accordance to EN 10216-5 and VdTUV Werkstoffblatt nos. 546, 547,
or 550 (only for mechanical properties) are acceptable. All essential safety requirements of
PED shall be fulfilled and satisfied. All materials shall be accepted by a Notified Body
either as an harmonized European standard, an EMDS or a particular material appraisal.
Other international recognized standards are acceptable when they can meet the essential
requirements of PED, are accepted by the Notified Body and fulfill requirements at least
equal or more stringent than the European Standards (EN).
The effectiveness of heat treatment of ferritic/martensitic steels shall be demonstrated by

micrographic examination of the final microstructure over the total section, including
hardness tests. The minimum hardness for 9-12% Cr-steels shall be 190 HVlO as an
absolute minimum.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 653/765
A supplementary test coupon of approximately 200mm shall be delivered for critical

components, in order to allow for subsequent investigation of properties at a later stage by
SC. The pieces will be directly delivered to SC.
:~. f;~~~~a~~a~[ be 12% Cr-steel type HCM12 (if any) is only acceptable as HCM12A (Cu-content of about
revised as follows: 0.9%) and limited to wall thicknesses below 10 mm.
- Special treatment
such as infernal The modified 2 'A% Cr-steels type T/P23-HCM2S (if any) are known for reheat cracking
shot blasting/
sensitivity. Freedom of reheat cracking sensitivity shall be demonstrated and documented in
the final data package.
shall be considered
for Superheater/
Reheater tubing to 80.12.11.2 Welding and machining
minimize steam
oxidation/exfoliation Bending/Hot Forming
only for the
materials Cold bending shall be carried out in accordance with JIS, EN 12952-5 and V dTUV
Super304H/ Werkstoftblatt nos. 546, 547, or 550 or equivalent.
TP347HFG and
medium
The hot bending and hot forming operation shall be done according to a procedure qualified
temperature larger
than 550°C. according to JIS, Annex A of EN 12952-5 or equivalent.
_ _ _ _ ______. Qualification bends in case of cold bending are required in order to demonstrate the quality
and mechanical properties of the bends. Non-destructive and destructive testing are per
dimension and per smallest bending radius.
In production the bended portion of the tube bends shall be examined by PT as follows: 2%
of the first 100 bends per bending machine and unfavourable RID. No cracks are acceptable.
Cutting and bevelling

The type of bevel as well as the dimension shall be chosen in function of the thickness to be
welded in order to reduce as much as possible the amount of deposited material.
The bevelling shall be carried out by machining or plasma cutting.
Welding qualification
Manufacturers performing welding shall be certified in accordance with JIS, EN 729-2 (ISO
3834-2). Subcontractors shall be certified to the same requirements, independent whether
welding is co-ordinated and supervised by sufficient and competent resident welding
coordination personnel (see EN 729-2/IS03834-2, par.7.3) from the main Contractor.
Production welding, monitoring and supervision shall be carried out in accordance with JIS,
EN 729-2/ISO 3834-2. All applicable WPS/PQR's shall be submitted to SC for review
before start of any welding.
The essential parameters described in the code JIS, EN ISO 15614-1 or equivalent are
applicable. Repair qualification shall be carried out in case of the combination of welding
process and filler metals are not yet simulated in already qualified PQR (for butt welds only).
The welding of the qualification coupons as well as the testing of specimens shall be done in
presence of a qualified independent testing authority engaged by the Manufacturers.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 654/765
Welder qualification
Only welders who are approved by SC and the Owner are authorized to weld. For
martensitic steel, welders have to be qualified an the same group of material. In case of
GMAW solid wire, bend tests and non destructive examinations are required.
The welding of the qualification coupons as well as the testing of specimens shall be done in
presence of a qualified independent testing authority engaged by the Manufacturers.
Welding process
Fallowing welding processes are allowed for production welding:
TIG welding (GTAW-141)
MAG welding (only for attachment fillet welds) (GMAW-135 and FCAW-136)
Manual electrode/stick welding (SMAW-111)
Submerged arc welding (SAW-12)
Only GT AW process shall be used for root pass welds. Each weld shall be identified by the
welder's symbol.
Where required, backing gas consisting of pure argon shall be used until at least 6 mm of
weld metal is deposited.
Thin wall (<I0mm) T23/24 tubes welded without PWHT, should be welded with a heat
input range of 1.5-2.5 KJ/mm.
Welding consumables
Consumables shall be certified at least according to JIS, EN 10204 type 2.2 for suppliers as
per Vendor list. Where required EN 10204 type 3 .1 certificates shall be provided.
Filler metal manufacture/supplier shall provide VDTUV material sheet for the selected
welding material.
Tack welding
Tack welds used to secure alignment shall either be removed completely (temporary tacks)
or their stopping and starting ends (permanent tacks) shall be properly prepared by grinding
in order to be incorporated in the final weld. When tack welds are to become part of the
finished weld, they shall be visually and PT examined. Defective tack weld shall be
removed.
Tack welds shall be made by qualified welders.
All the preheating and post weld heat treatments required for the welding on the final weld
shall be applied for the tack welding.
For local non-permanent tack welding, using gas burners, the preheat temperature shall be
increased to ensure that the material temperature is above the minimum preheat temperature
at starting welding (50°C recommended).
Filler metal (welding consumables) used for tack welding shall be the same than for the final
joint. Material used for round bars (temporary tack welds) welded to the bevel surface shall
be of the same nominal composition than the Base metal of the pressure containing part.
Welding of clamps on the surface in order to align or tack weld components is not allowed.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 655/765
Welding of temporary attachments

The welding of temporary attachments shall be done with the same requirement than for the
main welds. The removal of these attachments shall be carried out by grinding for the last
part attached to the pressure boundary. PT/MT examination of the area is required.
Temporary welds, even when removed afterwards, shall be post weld heat treated on
ferritic/martensitic 9 and 12% Cr-steels.
Welding Interruption
If, for any reason, the welding has to be stopped before completion of the welding joint, one
of the following methods shall be applied:
short stop: maintaining of the preheat temperature during the course of the interruption;
long stop: cooling down under insulation. The maximum acceptable cooling speed shall be
in accordance with FDBR 18. Preheat shall be resumed before welding is continued.
However, welding shall not be interrupted until at least 1/3 of the weld is complete. The
only exception can be granted for the welding ofroot passes (minimum 2 layers) in
rotational shop welding and after approval by SC.
Ferritic contamination of austenitic steel

Ferritic contamination by dust deposit and metallic deposits or incrustations shall be avoided
at all prefabrication, fabrication and erection steps. Special care shall be taken during storage
and handling (e.g. separated storage and fabrication place). Tools, such as saws, grinding
discs, brushes ... shall be restricted for use an stainless steel.
Preheat and postweld heat treatment of ferritic/martensitic steels

Preheat, interpass temperatures, cooling before PWHT and the heat treatment are critical
factors for successful welding of 9 and I2%Cr-steels:
the minimum preheat temperature shall not be below I80°C for thin wall (<I0mm) or 200°C
for wall thicknesses above 10mm. The maximum resulting hardness levels shall remain
below 350HV10 and need to be demonstrated by the procedure qualification.
Preheating shall be done by electric resistance equipment except for tubes less than OD
63. 5mm where flame heating is authorized. In case of local flame heating, the preheat
temperature shall be increased to ensure that the material temperature is above the minimum
preheat temperature at starting welding (50°C recommended).
Control of minimum preheat temperature shall be done with calibrated thermocouples and/or
digital thermometers (local gas burner preheating). When one thermocouple only is used it
shall be located at the bottom of the pipe. Use of one thermocouple only is to be limited to
exceptional cases.
Absolute maximum interpass temperature shall be 350°C for P9I and 7CrMo and shall be
controlled during welding by calibrated digital thermometers an top of the weld layers.
The weld need not to be heat treated immediately alter the intercooling. The maximum
duration however before final heat treatment shall be limited to 1 week under the condition
that the components shall be stored in a covered area in order to avoid condensation or
rain/snow in direct contact with the surface. Low temperatures and manipulation shocks are
to be avoided.
No welds shall be left without heat treatment. PWHT is required for all thicknesses only for
9 and 12% Cr steel.
PWHT shall be recorded.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 656/765
The way the heat treatment will be performed shall be described, completed by the specific
PWHT instruction which will be submitted for acceptance by SC. The description shall
define as a minimum:
the method used: furnace and/or local by electric resistance;
the holding temperature and times that are most appropriate for the mechanical properties.
The type of thermocouples used, number and location as well as calibration. All the
thermocouples shall be duly calibrated before being used;
temperature gradients between inner and outer surface for heavy wall components;
heating and cooling rates;
heated and insulated band width and height, when applicable The number and dispositions
of electric elements, during PWHT, shall be such that the width of the controlled band on
each side of the weld, on the face of the greatest weld width, shall be the thickness of the
weld or 2 inch, whichever is less. The temperature of the component from the edge of the
controlled band outward shall be gradually diminished so as to avoid harmful thermal
gradients.
Recommended holding temperatures/times:
9-12% Cr-steels
Normally the temperature shall be between 740°-780°C depending on the recommendations
from the steel manufacturer. When holding temperatures selected are above 760°C, Aci
temperatures from the welding consumables need to be verified in order not to heat treat
above the Aci temperature. Advised holding times are 1h/25mm with a minimum of 2h for
SMAW and 4h in case of SAW and thickness above 45 mm. Care shall be taken for
overtempering! When the holding temperature is higher than 760°C, the filier material
manufacturer shall be consulted.
2 1/4%Cr-steels
Thin walled (<10 mm) tubes can be welded without PWHT, but shall be in accordance with
EN 12952 and a PQR shall demonstrate hardness levels are below 350HV10.
P23/P24 heavy wall components require a PWHT at minimum 740°C/2h to guarantee a
minimum toughness level.
Weld cap
Weld caps HP piping shall be notch free (undercuts are not acceptable). The minimum
design thickness shall be guaranteed at any time.
Dissimilar welds
Dissimilar welding shall be avoided wherever possible. Locations of high stress are to be
avoided. In case dissimilar welding is required, the welding procedure shall take all
mechanical, thermal and metallurgical phenomena into consideration and be submitted to
SC for approval.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 657/765
•
General Electrical Requirements

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 658/765
80.13. General Electrical Requirements

80.13.1 Voltage levels
The following voltage levels shall apply:
• 500 kV, 50 Hz connection voltage to the public EHV transmission grid

• 27 kV, 50 Hz generator rated voltage, voltage for the generator main
circuit and generator circuit breaker, depending on
manufacturer standard
• 380/220 V + 10/-10%, 50 Hz standard voltage for power
supplies to small electric power
consumers and motors below
150 kW, lighting and domestic
power outlets
• 220 V DC+ 10%/-15% voltage for emergency loads of
electricity, like turbine emergency
oil pumps, circuit breaker control, etc.
• 380/220 V, + 10/-10%, 50 Hz uninterrupted voltage supplies to
loads, which require
uninterrupted infeed like DCS components,
burner control panels, VDU s, etc.
• 24 V + 10/-10%, 50 Hz for maintenance/repair work in enclosed plant
items of metal, if any.
The general arrangement of the particular voltage level for each part of the plant within the
scope of the Contract and the connections of the power supply systems can be seen from the
general single line diagram.
80.13.2 Installation conditions and protection class for electrical

operational equipment and control and monitoring equipment
If not specified otherwise the electrical operational equipment must be designed to meet
protection classes stated below.
Switchgear, housings for electrical equipment and electrical equipment itself must be
designed at least to:
• Class IP 21 if located in air-conditioned area

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 659/765
• Class IP 31 if located indoors (electrical rooms) but also in non-air-conditioned/ventilated

areas
• Class IP 54 if located indoors but in non-air-conditioned/ventilated areas
• Class IP 55W with additional measures if located outdoors in accordance with IEC 60529
or equivalent (general protection requirements for enclosures). The additional measures
shall consist of sunshades, protection covers against splashing water and sand, additional
sealing's, special acid resistive coating etc., depending upon the particular site conditions.
Electrical operational equipment which must be installed in areas exposed to danger from
explosions must have the required explosion-proof design appropriate to the flash-point
group classification of the explosive mixture as laid down in IEC 60079, IEC 61241 and
VDE 0170/0171 (EN 50014 to EN 50020). Attention must be paid to IEC 60079, IEC 61241
and VDE 0165 or equivalent with respect to the use of electrical operational equipment in
workshops and storage premises exposed to the risk of explosions.
In all rooms and areas where the local and operational conditions and surroundings can lead
to the accumulation of gases, vapors, mists or dusts which, in combination with air, form
explosive mixtures, the operational equipment and installations to be used in these
circumstances must be of explosion-proof design. All operational equipment must be
designed to comply with the class of protection dictated by the ignitable mixture (e.g.
compression-proof casing, external ventilation, inherent safety, etc.).
Electrical operational equipment should be located outside rather than inside buildings or
other structures exposed to the risk of explosion. Whenever operational equipment has to be
installed within areas liable to the risk of explosion, protection against explosion must, in
general, be applied wherever explosive mixtures can arise. In this connection, the ignition of
explosive mixtures must be reliably prevented by adopting the correct choice of design and
construction of the operational equipment and the incorporation of supplementary
safeguards where applicable.
Electrical, chemical, thermal and mechanical influences must on no account impair, in any
way, the protection afforded against explosion. In particular the high ambient temperatures
and the influence of nearby heat sources at the installation point must be taken fully into
account.
B0.13.JProtective measures, earthing and lightning protection
In view of the potential dangers of electrical power, the following measures are required for
the protection of life, equipment and materials. Basically, all 'live' parts, i.e. all parts of
electrical, operational equipment at an electrical potential above or below earth potential
when in operation, and with a rated voltage over 24 V, must be insulated or covered so that
they cannot be touched accidentally.
In addition, measures must be taken by each Lot to prevent the occurrence or persistence of
excessively high contact potentials on conductive parts of electrical operational equipment
(frames etc.) brought about by faults in insulation respectively.
For installations up to 1000 V, voltages over 50 V are considered to be excessive contact

voltages. Within enclosed electrical installations, with voltages over 1000 V, the contact
potential shall be according to the values given in VDE O101 (HD63 7S 1, Power installations
exceeding AC lkV): enclosure C.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 660/765
The following rules and regulations are to be observed in carrying out protective measures
and in earthing procedure:
IEC 60079 and 60364 for installations up to 1000 V,
VDE 0101 (HD 637 SI) for installations above 1000 V.
In areas exposed to the hazard of explosion, the protective measures outlined in IEC 60079
and IEC 61241 are to be adhered to in the erection and installation of electrical plant and
equipment.
B0.13.4Protective measures for installations up to 1000 V
Protection against direct contact

All 'live' parts of electrical operational equipment that can be reached by hand must be
protected against direct contact either by means of insulation or through constructional
design, position or arrangement, or by means of special devices. If, in the case of enclosed
switchgear or control cabinets, access is required in the course of normal operation (e.g. for
replacing fuses), protection against direct contact must still be ensured when the switchgear
or control cabinet has been opened up.
Protective insulation
Protective insulation is to be provided by means of additional insulation over and above the
insulation provided for operational purposes. This measure must prevent the occurrence of a
dangerous contact potential.
Use of low voltages as a safety measure, if applicable

This safeguard applies to all equipment, which is required to operate in metal enclosures,
boilers, tanks etc. The operational voltage of lighting equipment must not exceed 24 V AC.
Each Lot shall provide 24 V isolating low voltage transformer for the purpose of lighting for
maintenance and repair work inside metal enclosures. A separate 24 V system shall not be
provided.
Use of Isolating transformers

Isolating transformers shall be provided by each Lot for the purpose of protective voltage
supply of tools for maintenance and repair work inside metal enclosures.
Low Voltage Network

LV network for power supply of consumers shall be ofIT type, i.e. the LV neutral of the
transformer shall be isolated, therefore delta/delta winding transformer shall be used for LV
power supply. The LV networks shall be provided with continuous monitoring for ground
faults. The system shall include an automated ground fault location solution for the
individual outgoing feeders. Fault detection and location shall occur while the system stays
online. Remote communication to the DCS shall ensure immediate notification when a fault
occurs and indicate the fault feeder.
For lighting and small power LV network shall be of the TN type, i.e. the LV neutrals of the
station service transformers are earthed directly. For Lighting and small power a transformer
with neutral connection shall be provided.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 661/765
Neutralization (protective multiple earthing) is intended to prevent the persistence of an

excessively high contact potential on conductive parts of the installation which do not form
part of the actual operating circuit.
The LV system for symmetrically as well as unsymmetrical connected power consumers

shall generally be of the TN-S type, i.e. a five wire system. The separation ofN and PE shall
be carried out at the feeding transformer. Because of the clear demarcation between the
neutral conductor N, carrying operational current, and the protective earthing conductor PE,
which - under non-fault conditions - carries no current, NO connection between either N
and PE is permissible beyond the point of separation into PE and N.
The neutral conductor is to be insulated in the same manner as the phase conductors. The
use of constructional parts of the switchgear as a neutral conductor is not permitted.
B0.13.5Protective measures for installations over 1000 V
Protection against contact

At least the following measures are to be taken for all parts that are 'live' when in operation:
• Outside of closed electrical operating areas
• complete protection from all sides against contact, degree of protection shall be at least
IP23D according to IEC 61330.
• protective devices may only be removed by means of tools
• Inside of closed electrical operating areas
• protection against contact with 'live' parts within reach of personnel
• protection against accidental contact outside the reach of personnel.
The above-mentioned measures for protection against contact are also to be applied to 'dead'
parts of the plant where, in the case of a fault, a dangerous contact potential might arise,
however, where the parts must not be connected to the protective earthing system for
operational reasons.
Protection against contact voltages

Protective earthing is to be used as a safeguard against excessively high contact potentials
for conductive parts of the installation, which do not form part of the operational circuit.
Here, all normally 'dead' parts equipment and apparatus shall be earthed if it is possible for
them to come into contact with 'live' parts as a result of faults due to the occurrence of
surface leakage paths, arcs or direct connections to a 'live' part of the equipment.
In considering the dimensioning of the protective earthing system, the thermal loading and
voltages on the earthing equipment are decisive factors and these should be based on the
maximum possible earthing current, which can arise.
B0.13.6Earthing and lightning protection
80.13.6.1 Earthing and potential equalization system
The earthing system and potential equalization shall comply with the following standards:
• EN50522 (VDE 0101-2)
• IEC 60364-4-41, IEC 60364-5-54
• IEC 61643EN 50310

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 662/765
• VDE 0845, Part 1.
For earthing, protective earthing, functional earthing, potential equalization and lightning
protection-potential equalization, a common system shall be established.
Within all electrical rooms, transformer boxes and technical process areas and
buildings/rooms internal earthing rings shall be installed. These shall be linked by way of
connection tags to the foundation ground and outdoor earthing system. Additionally the
internal earthing rings shall be connected to each other to form a meshed earthing grid.
No framework parts or other structural components shall be used for the earthing bus.
All system and plant components that are to be grounded as well as electrical components,
like protection and control cubicles, subdistribution boards, control systems, motors and
transformers, shall be connected to the ground bus.
All steel structures within a welded Section shall be connected to the main earthing system.
At pipelines for flammable liquids or gases, earthing tags shall be provided at each flange.
All bolted flanges shall be bridged using a flexible braided copper conductor. Each pipe
shall be connected at least once to the main earthing system.
Tanks and vessels containing flammable liquids or gas shall be earthed by a connection to
the earthing grid or by bonding to earthed metal structures.
The earthing installations shall be designed and constructed in accordance with approved
standards.
Generally, underneath the power station and switchgear buildings an earthing grid of
stranded copper conductor shall be installed. Lot 1 must choose the size of the stranded
copper conductor and the size of mesh according to the maximum occurring earth currents.
The size of the stranded copper conductors used must be uniform throughout the area under
Contract as far as possible.
Inside the power station buildings encircling, galvanized steel strips must be installed on the
walls. From the inner earthing ring the connections to the switchgear, high voltage motors,
cable trays, vertical cable runs, steelwork, etc. are to be made using bare plain copper
conductor. All the electrical equipment, frames and mechanical apparatus must be fitted
with earthing screws and studs.
The copper conductors can be laid and fixed on the cable trays and vertical runs for AC
power cables. Where this is not possible, earthing conductor supports are to be provided.
The earthing rings in the power station buildings (switchgear, turbine hall, water treatment,
etc.) are to be connected to one another.
The cable trays and vertical runs are to be connected to a separate earthing conductor at
intervals of 20 m max. in such a way as to give good connection. This earthing conductor
must likewise be connected to the earthing ring.
At a maximum distance of 20 m the inside earthing ring of the buildings must be connected
with the outdoor earthing system. These connections must be provided with flexible PVC
single-core cables which are to be laid through the concrete walls above the ground water
level.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 663/765
In buildings without a basement the internal earthing ring is to be connected to the outer
earthing ring at maximum intervals of 20 m.
The crossing-point connections of the earthing cables underneath the buildings and outside
the buildings must be made by compression connectors. Connections by Cadweld system
shall also be acceptable. All other earthing conductor connections and junctions must be
made in the same way to ensure secure, lasting connections having good contact.
In the case of installations without an earthing ring above ground (e.g. boilers), all parts to
be earthed are to be connected to the earthing ring which must be laid 1 m away from the
foundations at a depth of 0. 7 m.
The earthing installations of all the power station buildings must be interconnected with
stranded copper cables. The earthing system of unit 5 and 6 shall be interconnected to the
existing earthing system of units 1 to 4 in order to generate a global earthing system as
called for in EN 50522.
The lighting columns of the external lighting system are to be connected with separate
copper conductors to the earthing grid.
The generator housing is to be connected at two points to the earthing ring according to the
requirements.
The star points on the 500 kV side of the generator transformers must be connected to the
central earthing installation where they are earthed directly. Also, the protective and neutral
conductors to the electrical apparatus, the frames of the latter and the lightning installations
for all the buildings, stacks, fuel depots, etc. must be connected to the central earthing
installation
Foundation earthing
All buildings, including those with a steel skeleton, shall be equipped with foundation
earthing. The foundation earthing shall be installed in addition to reinforcement that is
likewise connected together with braided conductors.
The foundation earthing shall be used in connection with the other earthing systems like
protective, operational, functional and lightning protection earthing, and shall be designed in
accordance with JIS, DIN 18014 "Foundation earthing" or equivalent.
In the case of pile foundations, earthing rods of the same length as the piles shall be installed
along with the foundation piles at intervals of around 10 m and connected at around every 2
m to the pile reinforcement using braided conductors. The earthing rods shall project beyond
the top of the piles and then be connected to the earthing system of the ring foundation.
In addition to the closed ring of the foundation earthing system, a net of mesh size around
10 x 20 m shall be embedded in the bottommost concrete layer. The foundation earthing
shall be connected to the reinforcement by a braided conductor at intervals of about 2 m.
At intervals not exceeding 20 m, and with at least two in every room, connection tags from
the foundation earthing shall be foreseen for connecting the internal earthing ring.
Connection tags shall likewise be foreseen for connection to the external earthing system
and to the lightning rods. Optionally, lighting rods can be connected to the external ring

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 664/765
ground, with connections then made from this ring ground to the foundation ground by way
of the internal earthing ring at intervals not exceeding 20 m.
Earthing material
Stranded copper conductor is to be used as earth conductor for laying in the ground.
Stranded copper conductors shall be used for the internal earthing ring inside the buildings,
on cable trays and for the earthing of HV motors, steel frames, etc.
Screening
The measures described in the following serve for screening and potential control and for
lessening overvoltage's.
For reinforced concrete buildings, at each corner of the building including the bottom slab,
an additional mesh of re bars, of approximate mesh size 10 x 10 m, shall be provided at the
topmost reinforcement. The meshes shall be produced by welding. This additional
reinforcement, connected so that it is electrically conducting, may be dispensed with if it is
ensured that the existing reinforcement is so connected by welding at appropriate points that
it is electrically conducting.
At intervals corresponding to the mesh width, earthing wires from the reinforcement shall be
incorporated into the building pillars, rising from the foundations to the roof, and so welded
that they are continuous. These earthing wires shall terminate at the roof parapet. The
meshes and earthing wires shall be welded to each other.
For steel skeleton buildings, equivalent measures shall be taken. Framework Sections shall
be welded to make up a defined, electrically conducting connection or shall be bolted
together so that they are electrically conducting.
Metal fa~ades and coverings shall be preferred over non-conducting materials and at their
topmost and bottommost points shall be connected at an adequate frequency to the lightning
protection system.
Reinforcement of cable ducts of reinforced concrete shall be connected to parallel running

earthing cables. These earthing cables shall be connected to the screen of the building
earthing system or to the foundation earthing system.
B0.13.7 Lightning protection
All buildings and structures shall be equipped with a lightning protection system (LPS). LPS
protection level I according to IEC 61024-1 shall be considered.
The building lightning protection system is to be executed to, among other standards,
according to IEC 62305 and IEC 61024 and alongside protection of human life, shall
prevent damage not only to buildings, but also to electrical and electronic installations.
All buildings and structures are to be protected against lightning strikes by means of
lightning collectors and conductors. The collectors are to be arranged in such a way that, as
far as possible they collect all lightning strokes without these directly striking the parts to be
protected. This condition is considered to have been fulfilled if no point on the roof surface
is more than 5 m away from a collector. Collector lines suffice as collectors, e.g. along the
ridge and at gables and eaves.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 665/765
Ridge conductors must be taken right to the end of the ridge. Moreover roof conductors
should run as natural continuations of all main conductors. Conductors at the gable
extremities or eaves must be laid in the closest possible proximity thereto. In the case of
steel-framed structures the ridge conductors must be connected to the roof supporting
structure at least every 20 m. Lower level annexes are also to be provided with collectors.
Roof lines and other conductors are to be laid and fixed in such a way that they can
withstand the stresses expected from storms, lightning strokes, roof work etc.
One main conductor between the lightning collectors mounted on the top of the building and
the potential grading ring laid in the ground is to be provided every 20 m of the before-
mentioned lightning collector. The max. spacing between conductor fixings may not exceed
1 m for horizontal runs and 1.2 m for vertical runs.
All main and secondary conductors which are connected to an earthing conductor must be
provided with an accessible isolating point in order to be able to measure the earth resistance.
All isolating points must be numbered consecutively in the drawings and at the buildings.
Nuts and bolts at isolating or other points, which are to remain detachable, must be made of
copper-nickel-silicon-bronze.
All main and secondary conductors are to be connected, using compression connectors, to
the earthing ring running around the buildings and tanks.
The connection points are to be protected against corrosion by wrappings or bitumen.
Lightning protection material

In case of buildings with steel structures and sheet steel cladding, the steel columns and the
sheet steel cladding shall be used as lightning conductor. In case of buildings with concrete
structure, galvanized round steel embedded in the concrete columns shall be used as
lightning conductor. In case of masonry buildings, external lightning conductors made of
copper or stainless steel shall be used. Lightning arrestors (arrestor tips and roof conductors)
or Lightning air terminal shall also be made of copper or stainless steel rods. The conductor
supports of the lightning protection system must be copper or bronze. Nuts and bolts at
isolating or other points which are to remain detachable must be made of copper-nickel-
silicon-bronze.
80.13.8 Technical conditions for motors
80.13.8.1 General
The design of equipment shall ensure that all operating and maintenance activities can be
performed safely and conveniently.
Medium and low voltage motors shall be suitable for driven equipment. In general, motor
shall be 3 phase, squirrel cage, induction type, with F class insulation and B class
temperature rise, an ambient temperature of 40°C, suitable for direct-on-line starting method,
location in non-hazardous and non-seismic area with an altitude not greater than 1000m, and
a continuous duty with a service factor of 1. 0 in accordance with IEC 60034 standards or
equivalent.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 666/765
80.13.9 Medium voltage motors
80.13.9.1 Ratings

Voltage rating AC Motors
Above 150 kW to 1000 kW : 3kV
Above 1000 kW lOkV
B (F class insulation and B class temperature rise).
3 Phase, 3 Wires
Phase System AC Motor
80.13.9.2 Starting
Starting Method
voltage drop level)
Motor Starting
80.13.9.3 Insulation Class and Temperature Rise

80.13.9.4 Enclosure Type

and terminal box)
Indoor motor IP44 with terminal box IP54
Outdoor motor IP54
80.13.9.5 Connections, star-point terminal boxes etc.
For all motors with a rating of 2000 kW or above a differential relay for winding protection
shall be provided and installed in the associated switch-gear. In that case the star-point

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 667/765
connection shall be brought out separately to terminals. The differential current

transformers are to be designed to class 5 P 10 with a rating matched to the protection system.
The CT's shall be accommodated in the star-point terminal box.
80.13.9.6 Bearings
Motors with ratings below 2000 kW shall be provided with roller bearings and with a
lubricator and lubricant supply regulator fitted with solid brass cages, that can be refilled
while the machine is running.
Large motors with rated outputs greater than 2000 kW shall be fitted, as far as possible, with
sleeve bearings. Motors with sleeve bearings and smaller than 4000 kW shall preferably be
provided with a constant level gravity fed type oil lubrication system with reservoir and oil
breather, whereas for larger motors oil supply to the bearings must be ensured by means of
an lubrication oil pump.

lubrication oil pump type: 2000 hours.
Coupling
The motor shaft halves of the couplings, finish-bored, balanced, and complete with key
ways are to be drawn on to the motor shaft and balanced out together with the rotor.
Cooling
Air cooling for the motors is the preferred method. Where water-cooling is applied,
conditioned and treated, water shall be used.
Running quality
The running quality must be within the classification of "Class C, Zone A" according to the
ISO 10816-1 or equivalent, i.e. the vibration velocity must be not greater than 1.8 mm/s
(rms).
Reverse speed
If reverse running can occur in the case of equipment driven by a motor (e.g. cooling water
pump), the motor must be designed for maximum possible reverse speed.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 668/765
80.13.10 Low voltage motors
80.13.10.1 Ratings

Voltage rating
AC Motors up to 150 kW 380 V AC
DC Motor - Voltage rating 220V DC
B.
Phase System
AC Motor 3Phase, 3Wires
DC Motor 2wires
80.13.10.2 Starting
Starting Method
voltage drop level)
Starting current Max. 350%ofthe rated current
Motor Starting
80.13.10.3 Insulation class and temperature rise

80.13.10.4 Enclosure type

and terminal box)
Indoor motor IP44
Outdoor motor IP54

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 669/765
80.13.11 Bearings
All bearings for motors except sealed ball bearing shall be accessible for inspection,
maintenance and replacement.
The type of bearing such as sleeve, roller or ball shall be applied as per motor
manufacturer's standard, which shall be of proven design and well experienced.
Motors that have a forced oil lubrication system shall have oil rings that provide for a short
time operation without the lubrication system in operation.
To prevent shaft-circulating currents, one or both bearings shall be insulated from motor
frame.
80.13.12 Terminal arrangement
Terminal box shall be made of cast iron or sheet steel, suitable to accommodate termination
of motor lead and located on the motor appropriately. Cable connection to the terminal shall
be stud type unless otherwise specified.
Terminal housing shall have the IP degree equal to or exceeding the motor's IP degree.
Cable entry shall be explosion-proof packing type if explosion- proof enclosure is required.
Motor shall be provided with the earthing terminals of sufficient size and conveniently
located on the motor frame and inside of the terminal box.
80.13.13 Actuator drives
As far as applicable the above "Technical conditions for low voltage motors" shall apply.
In addition actuators for valves, dampers etc. are to be fitted with socket and plug ofwell-
established make to IEC 60309 or equivalent for the power cable connection, or cables are
to be connected to terminal block through cable gland.
For the control cable connection separate socket and plug shall be provided, or cables are to
be connected to terminal block through cable gland.
Self-cooling at respective ambient temperature conditions is mandatory. Fan cooling is not

accepted.
80.13.14 Frequency converters
General
On the basis of the requirements of the driven equipment, Lot 1,2,3 and 4 shall design,
supply, install and commission a complete, fully operative, variable-speed converter drive
(frequency converter and motor, for motors up to 400 kW, for motors 400 kW and above in
addition to the converter a converter transformer shall be provided).
Converters made by reputable manufacturers are to be used.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 670/765
Technical requirements
The design of the converter (maximum continuous rating) is to be based on the maximum
shaft output required by the equipment assembly.
Maintenance work and cable connections must always be possible from the front of the
converter cubicles.
The terminals on the input and output sides are to be rated such that parallel cables can be
connected.
The converter allows the speed of three-phase asynchronous motors to be adjusted steplessly.
It must be fully equipped for remote control and monitoring in the control room.
An on-load dis connector and a power contactor are to be provided at the power input of the
converter.
For motors with a rating up to 400 kW the frequency converter shall be designed in at least a
six-pulse circuit on both the line and motor sides.
Frequency converters using Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs) should preferably be
provided on both the line and the motor sides.
For motors with a rating above 400 kW the converter should preferably be designed in a 12
pulse circuit supplied via converter transformer.
The converter is to be disconnected if the voltage drops to less than 80% of the rated voltage
or if one or more phases of the line voltages are missed. When the line voltage is restored,
the converter is to be connected again automatically, providing the break in the power
supply did not last longer preferably than 5 seconds. The plant check back signals (floating
change-over contacts) must continue to be received during this period, while alarms are to
be suppressed. It must be possible for the converter to be connected at any coasting-down
drive speed and with in-phase voltages. The specified frequency set point is to be resumed
automatically.
If the voltage reduction or the power failure lasts for a long time, the drive must remain
switched off~ in this case, it must subsequently only be possible to switch it on again either
manually or by means of the higher order control.
The converters are to be designed for 10% more than the maximum power output required
by the system. The purpose of regulating the converter is to ensure that the indirect current
and voltage remain within the permissible limits during all control processes. This should
apply both when the motor is started up and when the speed is adjusted during operation.
Forced ventilated converters are to be equipped with redundant fans (two double fans).
Flow monitors (not air vanes) are to be used to monitor the fans. Positive control is to be
provided for fan drives with a master drive.
Converter transformers
The converter transformers for supplying the frequency converters are to be designed and
the auxiliary equipment to be provided in accordance with IEC 60076-11.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 671/765
The transformers are to take the form of cast-resin transformers for indoor installation and
are to be installed in protective casings made of sheet steel, cooling method AN, type of
protection IP 21.
The transformer output shall correspond to the power requirement of the frequency
converters.
It should be possible to vary the high-voltage side within a range of 2 x ± 2. 5%, by means of
reversible clamp connectors.
The connections on the high-voltage side have to be carried out using cables.
Busbar connections with short-circuit protection are to be provided to the current converters
on the low-voltage side.
Suitable earthing studs are to be provided for maintenance purposes (earthing and short-
circuiting).
All accessories - especially sensors and terminal connections - must be arranged so that they
are readily accessible.
The windings must be flame-retardant and self-extinguishing. The cast-resin mixture must
not contain any flame-inhibiting additives which develop toxic vapors or gases either under
the influence of secondary fires or in the electric arc. A report on this subject has to be
enclosed with the Bid.
Moisture-proof design:
It must not be necessary to dry the winding after shut-off periods. The protection against
voltage surges and short circuits, the noise levels and the freedom from partial discharges up
to twice the rated voltage must be verified by means of type tests.
The windings are to be protected by means of a temperature monitoring system, comprising

the following minimum components:
• 3 PTC resistors (1 for each phase)
• 1 tripping unit with isolated change-over contacts for remote signaling (alarms).
Instrumentation and control

The instrumentation is subdivided into a local Section in the converter cubicle and into a
"remote" Section in the control room. All the measures necessary to enable the drive to be
remote-controlled and remote-monitored must be implemented, i.e. all the 24 V DC
interposing relays which are required to convert the on/off commands from the
instrumentation and control system, signal transducers, etc.
A suitable automatic compensation facility is to be provided, to ensure that the transfer

between LOCAL mode and REMOTE mode is bumpless in both directions. The emergency
shutdown function of the equipment must act on the converter directly, regardless of
whether 'local' or 'remote' mode is set.
Local instrumentation and control

The following are to be provided as a minimum in the converter cubicle:
Controls
• Local/remote converter control (key-operated switch)

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 672/765
• "On" and "off' converter controls

• Set point adjuster (speed)
• Incoming master switch, "on-off'
• All the controls necessary for internal converter settings and adjustments, as specified by
the manufacturer
Indications, signals, monitoring

• Line voltage indicator
• Output frequency
• Output current
• Operating status signals, in accordance with the specifications of the instrumentation and
control supplier, though at least "Ready", "Drive running" and "Zero and set speed
reached"
• Motor temperature monitor - alarm Motor temperature monitor - shut-down
• Signals concerning internal operating states of the converter, in accordance with the
manufacturer's standards, though at least:
• Overtemperature
• Line voltage monitoring
• Line undervoltage
• Overcurrent
• Control voltage monitoring
• Converter protection
• Fan monitoring
• Incoming air temperature
• Motor feeder interruption
• Motor feeder short circuit
• Earth fault
• Motor blocked
• Other faults.
Remote control and remote indications

• Account must be taken of the following types of remote control and indication in the
control room, and suitable interposing relays, transducers and switchgears are to be
provided in the cubicle:
• Converter "on/off' and "local/remote"
• Set point adjuster for speed (4 - 20 mA)
• Remote indication for speed as 4 - 20 mA standard signal
• Motor current as 4 - 20 mA standard signal
• Combined fault
• Remote indication of the set speed potentiometer as a 4 - 20 mA standard signal
• Other controls and indications.
All event signals and check back signals must be made available on the terminal strip as
floating change-over contacts.
System perturbation
The perturbation caused by the voltage harmonics in the feeding three-phase system, which
are a result of the converter drives, must not exceed the specified limit values, i.e. 5% for the
5th harmonic voltage, 4% for the 7th and 2% for each of the 11th and 13th. IEC 61000 and
EN 50160 are to be considered in this connection. The system perturbations are to be curbed

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 673/765
by means of suitable measures if necessary. each Lot is responsible for demonstrating

conformance with the above-mentioned limit values.
80.13.15 Cable and cable trays
80.13.15.1 Cable laying and routing requirements
The Lot Contractor responsible for cable routing and laying has to observe a strict unit
separation. The cables must be routed in different cable channels or, as the minimum
requirement, on different cable trays, so that in case of a fire or any accident in a cable
channel or tray two units shall not be affected.
On vertical cable risers, walls and ceilings the cables must be secured with corrosion-
resistant cable clips (e.g. cable clamps with cable protecting cable sleeves).
Cable risers near gangways or in electrical rooms that are exposed to possible mechanical
damage are to be protected up to 1 meter from ground by suitable metal cover.
Tray cover shall be provided on highest cable trays where damage is likely to occur due to
objects fallen.
All holes in ceilings, floors and wall made for cable routing must be sealed fire-resistant,
when the cables have been laid. This also applies to switchgear panels and cubicles,
passages between cable ducts, at vertical risers etc. As there is an increased danger of fire
during the construction period the holes shall be fire-resistant sealed at that stage already.
This applies especially to vertical runs.
When the cables are no longer supported on cable trays or risers etc. the power, DC and
instrument transformer cables must generally be run singly in plastic conduit, at ambient
temperatures above 60 °C in galvanized steel conduit. With lighting cables, measuring and
control cables and telephone cables, several similar cables can be run in one conduit.
Surface-mounted conduits must be secured every 1.5 m.
The control and communication cables must be laid sufficiently apart from the power cables
so that no interference shall occur and the transmission of fault signals is excluded. For this
purpose the following minimum separations are to be observed:
• 300 mm between low voltage power cables and measuring and control cables at voltages
of 60 V and below,
• 300 mm between power cables and measuring and control cables at voltages above 60 V,
• 600 mm between medium voltage power cables and measuring and control cables at
voltages of 60 V and below.
The laying of cables outside of buildings should be preferably on cable bridges that
preferably are to be naturally ventilated.
If the cables are laid in the ground, after excavating the trench a layer of sand must be
introduced. On the sand the cables are laid separately from each other according to voltage
systems. The cables must be laid at a depth of 0.8 mat least. The trench is filled with sand
and covered with concrete covers or bricks. The thermal resistance of the backfilling shall
not exceed 150 Kcm/W. A ground temperature of 25 °C to 40 °C according to the project

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 674/765
requirements has to be considered. Where cables have to pass under streets cable duct blocks
with a suitable bore(s) should be provided. The marking of cable routes by cable warning
tapes must be provided.
When laying the cables on cable trays, cable risers, cable channels, etc. and when choosing
the size of the cables care must be taken that sufficient ventilation is available and that there
is no possibility of thermal overheating, or strain on the cables.
Cables that must move with connected apparatus owing to thermal expansion (e.g. boilers)
must be provided in a flexible form or they must have sufficient slack at the location.
All the ends of the cables must be prepared according to the particular requirements of the
manufacturers and connected to existing terminal strips, terminal screws, apparatus
terminals, etc.
The necessary cable sealing ends and the stripped and fanned-out cable ends, where no
sealing ends are provided, must be fixed to the appropriate supporting structures.
80.13.16 General Cable construction requirements
The medium and low voltage cables shall be plastic-insulated copper cables. For cables that
are exposed to ambient temperatures above 60 °C, teflon or silicone cables are to be
provided.
The cables must be suitable for laying indoors, in the open (director indirect sunlight), in
ducts, on trays, in the ground and in water. The cables must be resistant to solar radiation,
the effect of oil, seawater and bacterial action,. Outer sheaths are to be manufactured from
non-combustible or flame retardant material in accordance with IEC 60332-3 cat. C.
Cables shall be armoured if directly buried. Non-armoured cables shall be used if installed in
conduits, cable trays or underground cable trenches.
All cables must be provided at both ends with identification in the form of numbered labels
corresponding to the coding system. The individual cores shall be numbered or identified by
color-coding.
The cables must be laid to ensure that they can be replaced or renewed in a simple manner.
80.13.17 Medium voltage (MV) power cables
The design of the MV cables shall be screened, stranded, single-core or three-core cables
preferably with XLPE insulation. Three-core cables shall be designed with individually
screened cores.
The MV power cables must be designed for the thermal and short-circuit characteristics of
the electrical systems, taking into consideration a actual short circuit duration of the actual
operation time of protection relay.
The cables must be terminated and connected to the indoor metal-clad switchgear or the
sealing ends are installed in cable connection hoods mounted on the power transformers.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 675/765
In the event of outage of the air-conditioning plants of the switchgear buildings the internal
and external conditions shall become the same. Therefore, sealing ends are to be used which
shall be suitable for the maximum conditions at site.
80.13.18 Low voltage (LV) power cables
The low voltage power cables shall be standard single and multi-core cables with copper
conductor and PVC or XLPE insulation.
To ensure the elimination of excessive contact potentials on any object, effective earthing
must be carried out as a safety measure and suitable 3-core, 4-core and 5-core low voltage
power cables must be provided. The minimum conductor cross-Section of the low voltage
power cables is 2.5 mm2. If 3 1/2-core cables are used, the reduced conductor for protective
earth (PE) must have a cross-Section of at least 16 mm2.
Depending on the site conditions the DC cables must be single-core, 2-core or 4-core.
Between batteries or rectifiers and the DC switchgear single-core power cables should in
general be used.
The L V power cables must be designed for the dynamic and thermal characteristics of the
electrical system and for continuous operation.
80.13.19 Current carrying capacity of power cables
The ratings for continuous loading of the cables shall be calculated according to the relevant
IEC regulations. each Lot must submit corresponding tabulations for all cables to be used
respectively. The maximum voltage drop under normal conditions shall not exceed 2.5% for
MV cables and 5. 0% for L V cables
80.13.20 Measuring and control cables above 60 V/ instrument

transformer cables
For voltages above 60 V the cables must have PVC insulation and a mini-mum conductor
cross-Section of 1. 5 mm2 .
For instrument transformer cables inside buildings the minimum conductor cross-Section
must be 2.5 mm2 .
Instrument transformer cables leading to outlying buildings must have a minimum size of
4mm2 .
80.13.21 Measuring and control cables below 60 V
For voltages up to 60 V, measuring and control cables shall have stranded or solid copper
conductors of minimum 0.8 mm diameter. Multi-pair control cables with paired lay-up of
the leads and lay-up of the pairs themselves shall be used.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 676/765
Wherever necessary, e.g. for all cables leading outside the relay rooms and/or control rooms,
the control cables shall have a non-shield (digital circuit) or overall screen (analog circuit :
Al-foil or Cu-foil).
Cables must generally have appropriate electrical protection against inductive/resistive

influences and lightning.
The required compensating wires for temperature measurements must be at least 1.5 mm2 .
The individual cores of the multi-pair control cables shall be identified by numbers or a
color coding system.
80.13.22 Cable supporting structures
Construction requirements
Basically, pre-fabricated cable trays, cable risers, hanger rods, screws, clamps and all fixing
material of corrosion-resistant finish, hot-dip galvanized, shall be used. If in certain Sections
the use of trays and risers is not possible, cable racks are to be provided in such places.
These shall be made of corrosion-resistant, steel angle Sections, hot dip galvanized.
The steel angles must be cut to size on site and exposed cut surfaces must be suitably treated
on the spot to prevent corrosion before being fitted. The minimum requirement for this
treatment is the application of an anti-corrosion layer of zinc coating.
All cable tray T-junctions, cross-overs, vertical and other shelving, bends, etc. must consist
of pre-fabricated tray elements so that crushing of the cables at these transition points is
avoided.
The cables laid on the trays must be carefully arranged and ordered. Sun-shade which
combine with tray cover made of the material as described for the cable tray equipment shall
be provided on the top layer of cable tray Sections that are located outside buildings and
exposed to the sunlight. Proper Clamping arrangement shall be considered for the covers of
cable tray installed outdoor, considering the wind speed in the plant area.
Generally trays and risers must be installed in such a way that in accessible manways an
escape route at least 800 mm wide by 1950 mm high is available for the personnel.
However at several locations where keeping the specified space is very difficult such as in
cable trench under switchgear room, ladder and manhole penetrating floor with cover escape
route shall be provide at a smaller but maximum practicable size.
For safety reasons the lower parts of the hanger rods and all other exposed parts in manways
and escape routes must be fitted with plastic covers.
For the minimum safety of personnel, appropriate safety goods such as hazard indication
tape shall be provided for exposed parts of cable tray support systems at escape routes.
For both indoor and outdoor installations hot dip galvanized material with an average
coating thickness according to JIS, ASTM Al23 or EN ISO 1461 is to be used.(i.e., under
2.0mm thickness: 47microns, under 3.2mm thickness: 65microns).

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 677/765
The cable trays must be designed to ensure that there is 5% spare space on all trays when
commissioning and handing-over is complete.
The fixing materials for the cable trays and risers must be corrosion-resistant or at least be
hot-dip galvanized. The rods, brackets and risers must be fitted with appropriate support
brackets to be fixed to anchor rails or fixed by dowels and screws in walls and ceilings.
Welding to steel structures and the welding together of hot-dip galvanized cable-laying
accessories is not permitted.
After completion of the cable-laying work the maximum deflection of the cable trays shall
not exceed 2.5 mm per 1.5 m (specified distance between two hanger rods).
B0.13.23 EMC measures
All EMC measures shall ensure that during subsequent operation, no impermissible
malfunctions or damage to equipment occurs due to violating electromagnetic compatibility.
The description of the measures is not be limited to this chapter, but also forms a part of
other chapters, in particular "Protective measures", "earthing and lightning protection"
and "Cabling".
The EMC requirements are set out in the following.
Under consideration of the conditions and constraints, the equipment used shall emit the
lowest interference signals and exhibit the highest immunity to interference.
All equipment items shall operate properly when connected to networks with a power supply
corresponding to the maximum permissible tolerances as laid down in EN 50160 (as regards,
harmonics, voltage fluctuations etc.).
6th paragraph of
B0.13.23 shall be Priority is given to reducing sources of interference.
revised as follows:
- In line with general
EC regulations for
Add.1t1ona
· ll y, by means o fh.1gh-capacity
· screenmg,
· generat10n
· o f overvo Itages due to
EMC and German inductive or capacitive coupling shall be reduced. Influencing by electrical and magnetic
EMC legislation, fields shall be lessened.
only equipment
bearing the "CE"
mark of EC Earthing and potential equalization systems designed for low-impedance shall reduce
generation of overvoltages due to ohmic coupling.
If EMC resulting from the measures named above is still not adequate, further measures
shall be taken within buildings, for example by isolation and suppressor circuits.
Thanks to the lightning protection and screening measures taken at the buildings, within
them an EMC protection zone is formed.
All installations penetrating this protection zone, that is where they pass through the external
walls of buildings, shall be incorporated into a lightning protection-potential equalization
system as close as possible to the points of entry and exit of the building. This applies also

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 678/765
for conductors carrying a potential. At entry or exit, these shall be included in the lightning
protection-potential equalization system by way of suppressor circuits.
Cable runs to outdoor plant components and between buildings may also be screened by
appropriate measures, and so form a part of the protection zone. If this is done, the
suppressor circuit can be dispensed with.
A suppressor circuit shall be provided at all low-voltage main distribution boards.
Overvoltage protection shall be foreseen within the power supply for both central and
distributed power supplies to electronic cubicles.
All conductive parts of the structures and installation within the scope of the Contract must
be connected to the main earthing system.
The switchgear cubicles must be partitioned off and incorporate a busbar system, the
necessary instruments, control switches, switch panels of the individual switch and
apparatus chambers. The main busbars are to be installed on the rear face, top side of the
switchgear cubicle in a lockable shuttered compartment.
Connections to switching devices, MCB's fuses etc. are to be made from these busbars.
The lower part of the cubicle shall house the terminal strips and connecting blocks, the
clamps for the cable terminals and, if required parallel connection copper straps for the
connection of more than 2 cables in parallel. An adequate number of ball studs must be
provided within the switchgear cubicle suitable for earthing the main and distribution
bus bars as well as the switchgear itself by means of portable earthing and short circuiting
equipment (to be provided once per switchgear panel row).
The space in the interior of the cubicles must be divided into a Section with 'live' parts, 'live'
switching elements etc. and a Section with control and measuring equipment. The Sections
are to be separated by reinforced sheet-steel.
Care must be taken that in the event of arcing hot gases shall not escape to the front of the
cubicles (the operational side).
Ammeters are to be provided on the cubicle front panel for the cubicle feeders and the
supply outlets for motors particularly important for the process. A single voltmeter with 4-
position voltmeter changeover switch must be provided for measurements of bus bar voltage
between each phase and neutral. Measuring instruments should, in general, be square in
shape.
All cubicles, cabinets, panels, etc. shall be designed for the ambient temperature according
to the project requirements of 40 °C (outside the enclosure) in non-air conditioned areas.
Special precautions shall be taken in the design of electronic devices for protection and
control systems housed in the cubicle in order to allow for these conditions.
Heating elements are to be provided generally in each local cubicle or cabinet and shall be
humidity controlled.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 679/765
MCCB's or fuse switches shall be provided as per the existing plant.
PVC-insulated, copper stranded conductors must be used for wiring within the switchgear
cabinets, which must be numbered at each end with special tabs so that change by mistake is
impossible.
Preferably plug-in type auxiliary relays are to be used. Apparatus being sensitive to impact
must be protected against shock and vibration.
Incoming and outgoing cables have to be fixed by suitable metallic cable glands.
Cable entry to all cubicles, cabinets, panels, etc. shall be from bottom, only. Cable entries to
cubicles, cabinets, panels, etc. from top, even if provided with cable glands, are not
acceptable.
The electrical and control panels which have a large amount of cables shall not be provided
with cable glands, however cover plate for cable entry and sealing shall be provided
appropriately.
All local control/switchgear panels and "black boxes" shall be provided with duplicate
supplies for control and alarm signaling purposes. Such duplicate supplies shall be derived
from separate power sources as far as practical.
80.13.25 Local control points and level control cabinets
80.13.25.1 General
Any electrical consumer unit, which is not controlled automatically or from the central
control room, is to be fitted with a suitable local control cabinet. The local control cabinets
are to be installed in the immediate vicinity of the motor drive to be controlled.
Pump motors, which are level controlled locally, shall be given an automatic and manual
control. The respective level control cabinets are to be fitted in the immediate vicinity of the
pump motors, gauge glasses or level monitoring instruments.
80.13.26 Construction requirements
In general local control cabinets and level control cabinets with plastic casings resistant to
impact, sand, light and seawater, mounted on walls or hot-dip galvanized supporting
constructions, are to be provided. Hot-dip galvanized casings shall be acceptable.
Protection class must be IP 54 if installed indoors and IP 55W with additional measures if
located outdoors. The necessary earthing terminals must be provided for earthing purposes.
The cabinets must be equipped with the necessary mini circuit breakers, fuses, auxiliary
relays, power contactors, terminal blocks and cable attachment components.
For motors with pre-selection control (operation/stand-by) operation hours counters are to be
provided.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 680/765
The stipulation of clause "Reg. for local cubicles and local housing for e.g. switchgear,
control, measuring and signaling equipment" shall be applied too.
In hazardous areas, the necessary explosion proof control cabinets and level control
equipment must be provided in accordance with IEC 60079and IEC 61241.
80.13.27 Local control points
The local control points are to be equipped as the minimum requirement with:
• ON button
• OFF button
• Running lamp
• FAULTLAMP
• TRIP HEAL THY indication
• Lamp test.
When two motors are installed, serving as operation and stand-by unit, then in addition to a
double set of the above items, the following equipment has to be installed as the minimum
requirement:
• MOTOR 1 - MOTOR 2 (running motor/stand-by motor)pre-selection switch,

• automatic transfer to the stand-by motor in case of failure of the running motor.
80.13.28 Level controls
In the case of pump motors controlled by levels, except for drainage pump, control of
individual pump motors may be effected as follows:
• level control with maximum and minimum contacts
• low level contact on motor - OFF
• bottom maximum contact on motor - ON
• local control point with ON and OFF button, running and fault lamp.
When two pump motors are installed for the same purpose the control may be effected as
follows:
• PUMP 1 - PUMP 2 (running pump/ stand-by pump) pre-selection switch
• level control with three high level contacts:
• first (1 ): high level contact for pre-selected ON
• low level contacts for pumps OFF
• local control and lamps as listed above for local control cabinets, for each motor.
80.13.29 Terminal boxes and terminal cabinets
In order to minimize the amount of cables and distribution of signals and to centralize
connections in the plant, terminal boxes or, wherever necessary, by larger amounts of
terminals, terminal cabinets shall be fitted on all the necessary
• cable crossover terminal points
• collecting points for individual analog and binary signals and local transmitters
• signal collecting and distribution points for fire alarm, telephone, loudspeaker and clock
system

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 681/765
• distribution points for local signals.
Terminal boxes and cabinets must at least have class of protection IP 54 if installed indoors
and IP 55W if installed outdoors and must be equipped with the necessary terminal strips,
cable glands and fittings components for the connection of the cables. Cable entry will be
from the bottom for any outdoor installation.
The necessary earthing terminals are to be provided for the earthing of the boxes and
cabinets. In any area subject to the danger of explosion, the necessary explosion-protected
terminal boxes and cabinets are to be provided in accordance with IEC 60079 and IEC
61241.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 682/765
Tanjung Jati B Re - Expansion Project - T JB 5 & 6
Tanjung Jati B Re - Expansion Project
TJB 5 & 6
Part 81 -Turbine & Generator and Associated

Systems
B 1 - Turbine & Generator and Associated Systems

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 683/765
Table of Contents
Part 81 - Turbine & Generator and Associated Systems

81.1. Turbine & Generator Plant 2
Bl.I.I General 2
Bl.1.2 Scope of Supplies and Services 2
Bl.1.2.1 Steam turbine 2
Bl.1.2.2 Turbine oil plant 3
Bl.1.2.3 Downtime ventilation plant 3
Bl.1.2.4 Condenser 3
Bl.1.2.5 Condenser sponge ball cleaning system 4
Bl.1.2.6 Condensate polishing plant 4
Bl.1.2.7 Synchronous AC generator 5
Bl.1.2.8 Generator connection 5
Bl.1.2.9 Unit Protection and synchronizing equipment 5
Bl.1.2.10 Control and monitoring equipment 5
Bl.1.2.11 Condensate and Feedwater heaters 6
Bl.1.2.12 Feedwater pumps 6
Bl.1.2.13 Combined deaerator/storage feedwater tanks 7
Bl.1.2.14 Auxiliary steam piping system 7
Bl.1.2.15 Piping, valves and accessories 7
Bl.1.2.16 Sampling system 7
Bl.1.2.17 Insulation 8
Bl.1.3 Special Technical Requirements 8
Bl.1.3.1 General 8
Bl.1.3.2 Steam turbine 8
Bl.1.3.3 Lubricating and control oil system 10
Bl.1.3.4 Insulation 11
Bl.1.3.5 Turbine cladding (enclosure) 12
Bl.1.3.6 Downtime ventilation 12
Bl.1.3.7 Condenser 12
Bl.1.3.8 Continuous condenser cleaning equipment 13
Bl.1.3.9 Evacuation units 13
Bl.1.3.10 Main condensate pumps 13
Bl.1.3.11 Condensate polishing plant 14
Bl.1.3.12 Electrical 16
B1 -Turbine & Generator and Associated Systems 81 - I

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 684/765
Bl.1.3.12.1 Generator 16
Bl.1.3.12.2 Excitation system 18
Bl.1.3.12.3 Generator cooling equipment 21
Bl.1.3.12.4 Generator temperature measurement 22
Bl.1.3.12.5 Generator main connections and circuit breaker 22
Bl.1.3.12.6 Generator unit protection, synchronizing, measuring 24
Bl.1.3.13.1 Measurements 26
Bl.1.3.13.2 Steam Turbine Control 27
Bl.1.3.13.3 Turbine Governor 28
Bl.1.3.13.4 Condenser Level Control 30
Bl.1.3.13.5 Turbine Protection 30
Bl.1.3.14 Feedwater pumps 31
Bl.1.3.15 Feedwater heaters 32
Bl.1.3.16 Feedwater tanks and de aerators 33
Bl.1.3.17 Piping, valves and accessories 33
81.2. Cooling Water Systems 36

Bl.2.1 General 36
Bl.2.2.1 Circulating water system (MCW) 36
Bl.2.2.2 Auxiliary cooling water system (ACW) 36
Bl.2.2.3 Closed circulation cooling water system (CCCW) 37
Bl.2.3 Special technical requirements 37
Bl.2.3.1 General 37
Bl.2.3.2 Pumps 38
Bl.2.3.2.1 CCCWpumps 38
Bl.2.3.2.2 ACWpumps 38
Bl.2.3.3 Motor operated isolation valves 38
Bl.2.3.4 CCCW coolers 38
81.3. Auxiliary Gas Supply (H2, CO2) 41

Bl.3.1 General 41
Bl.3.2 Scope of Supply and Services 41
Bl.3.2.1 Hydrogen Supply System 41
B1 -Turbine & Generator and Associated Systems 81 - II

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 685/765
Bl.3.2.2 Carbon Dioxide Supply System 41
81 .4. Hydrogen Generation System 43

Bl.4.1 General 43
Bl.4.2 Scope of Supply and services 43
81 .5. Fire Fighting System 48

Bl.5.1 General 48
81 .6. Cranes and Hoists 52

Bl.6.1 General 52
B 1. 6. 3 .1 Turbine hall crane 54
Bl.6.3.2 Hoists 55
81. 7. Electrical and Associated Works 57

Bl.7.1 General 57
B 1. 7.1.1 Electrical system design 57
Bl.7.1.2 Mode of operation 59
Bl.7.1.3 Arrangement of electrical equipment 60
B 1. 7.1.4 Basic electrical design criteria 61
Bl.7.2.1 General 62
B 1. 7.2.2 Main scope of supply and services 62
B 1. 7 .3 Special technical requirements 66
Bl.7.3.1 Transformers 66
B 1. 7. 3 .1.1 Generator transformer 66
Bl.7.3.1.2 Unit auxiliary transformer 67
Bl.7.3.1.3 Station service transformers 68
Bl.7.3.1.4 Tap changer 69
B 1. 7.3 .1. 5 Transformer high pressure spray water system 69
Bl.7.3.1.6 Automatic voltage regulator 69
B 1. 7. 3 .1. 7 Neutral earthing resistors 70
B1 -Turbine & Generator and Associated Systems 81 - Ill

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 686/765
Bl.7.3.2 Medium voltage switchgear (10 kV, 3 kV) 70

Bl.7.3.2.1 General 70
Bl.7.3.2.2 Switchgear components 71
Bl.7.3.2.3 Automatic high speed transfer equipment 74
Bl.7.3.3 Low voltage AC switchgear 74
Bl.7.3.3.2 Switchgear components 75
Bl.7.3.4 DC and Safe AC systems and associated equipment 78
Bl.7.3.4.2 Switchgear (DC, safe AC) 79
Bl.7.3.4.3 Battery charging equipment 80
Bl.7.3.4.4 Batteries 80
Bl.7.3.4.5 DC/DC Converters (if applicable) 81
Bl.7.3.5 Cables and cable supporting structures 82
Bl.7.3.5.1 Cables 82
Bl.7.3.5.2 Cable supporting structures 82
Bl.7.3.5.3 Terminal boxes and local control boxes 82
Bl.7.3.6 Lighting and small power installations 82
Bl.7.3.6.1 Lighting system 82
Bl.7.3.6.2 Power socket combinations 86
Bl.7.3.6.3 Portable insulating transformers 87
Bl.7.3.6.4 Earthing and lightning protection installations 87
Bl.7.3.6.4.1 Earthing Installations 87
Bl.7.3.6.4.2 Lightning protection system 88
81.8. 500 kV Switchyard 90

Bl.8.1 General 90
Bl.8.2 General design criteria 90
Bl.8.3 Scope of supply 91
Bl.8.4.1 Enclosures, compartments, bus-bars 94
Bl.8.4.2 Circuit Breakers 95
Bl.8.4.3 Disconnectors- and earthing switches 96
Bl.8.4.4 Substation protection System 97
Bl.8.4.5 Instrument transformers 98
Bl.8.4.6 SF 6-air bushings 98
Bl.8.4.7 Lightning arresters 99
B1 -Turbine & Generator and Associated Systems 81 - IV

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 687/765
Bl.8.4.8 Local control panels 99

Bl.8.4.9 Corrosion protection 100
Bl.8.5 Option 1: Interface connection existing/ new 500 kV switchyard 100
81 .9. Instrumentation and Control Systems 103

Bl.9.1 General 103
B 1. 9 .1.1 General operation and control philosophy 104
Bl.9.1.2 Function and arrangement of control centers 104
Bl.9.1.3 Operation of the main units 105
Bl.9.1.4 Principles of boiler automation 106
B 1. 9 .1. 5 Principles of steam turbine generator (S TG) automation 106
B 1. 9 .2.1 General 107
B 1. 9 .2.2 Scope of supplies 107
Bl.9.2.3 Scopeofservices 110
Bl.9.2.4 Erection, cabling, wiring, labeling 110
Bl.9.2.5 Commissioning 111
Bl.9.3.1 General 112
Bl.9.3.2 Structure of control functions 112
Bl.9.3.3 Field equipment 113
Bl.9.3.4 Burner management system (BMS) 114
Bl.9.3.5 Boiler protection system (BPS) 115
Bl.9.3.6 Distributed Control System (DCS) 115
Bl.9.3.6.2 Availability and redundancy 116
Bl.9.3.6.3 General hardware requirements 116
Bl.9.3.6.4 Process station 117
Bl.9.3.6.4.1 General 117
Bl.9.3.6.4.2 Signal input and output processing 117
Bl.9.3.6.4.3 Modulating controls 119
Bl.9.3.6.4.4 Open-loop controls 120
Bl.9.3.6.5 Protection and safety interlocks 122
Bl.9.3.6.5.1 General 122
Bl.9.3.6.5.2 Interlocks for alarm annunciation 123
Bl.9.3.6.5.3 Data highway communication 123
Bl.9.3.6.6 Operator station 123
B1 -Turbine & Generator and Associated Systems 81 - V

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 688/765
Bl.9.3.6.6.1 General 123

Bl.9.3.6.6.2 Software requirement 124
Bl.9.3.6.6.3 Human-Machine-Interface (HMI) 125
Bl.9.3.6.6.4 Alarm annunciation/Sequence of Event Recording functions
(SER) 129
Bl.9.3.6.6.5 System diagnostics and configuration 131
Bl.9.3.6.6.6 Communication with power plant systems 131
Bl.9.3.6.6.7 Data exchange with the Load Dispatch Center (LDC) 132
Bl.9.3.7 Cyber Security 133
Bl.9.3.9 Plant Simulator and Training facility for Operators 135
Bl.9.3.9.2 Description of operation and functions 136
Bl.9.3.9.3 Plant components models 136
Bl.9.3.9.4 Extent and scope of simulation of plant system 136
Bl.9.3.10 Clock system 137
81.10. Computerized Maintenance Management System 140

Bl.IO.I General 140
Bl.10.2.1 Hard- and Software 140
Bl.10.2.2 General Services 141
Bl.10.3.1 Software formats 142
Bl.10.3.2 Numbering system to be applied 142
Bl.10.3.2.1 Work order (WO) component 142
Bl.10.3.2.2 Preventive maintenance (PM) 143
Bl.10.3.2.3 Job plans component 143
Bl.10.3.2.4 Resources component 143
Bl.10.3.2.5 Labor component 143
Bl.10.3.2.6 Calendars component 143
Bl.10.3.2.7 Purchase requisitions (PR) 143
Bl.10.3.2.8 Purchase orders (PO) component 144
Bl.10.3.2.9 Inventory component 144
Bl.10.3.2.10 Safety component 144
Bl.10.3.2.11 Anti-viruses software 144
Bl.10.3.2.12 Integration with DCS 145
B1 -Turbine & Generator and Associated Systems 81 - VI

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 689/765
81 .11. Technical Data Sheets 147
B1 -Turbine & Generator and Associated Systems 81 - VII

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 690/765
•
Turbine & Generator Plant
B1 -Turbine & Generator and Associated Systems

PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 691/765
81 .1. Turbine & Generator Plant
81 .1.1 General
This specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply, transport, erection,
commissioning and handing over of the steam turbine & generator plant with their
associated condensate, water and steam systems and all other associated equipment,
complemented by Section BO, but without excluding other necessary components and
services not mentioned herein.
It is to be emphasized, that this specification does not enumerate or describe all the materials
and equipment to be supplied and all the services to be performed. However, the steam
turbine & generator plant shall be complete in every respect and shall ensure safe and
reliable operation of the plant. This means, all material and equipment shall be provided as
required to make a complete, properly functioning installation.
Two (2) complete steam turbine generator units - each with its associated condensate, feed
water and water steam system and all other associated equipment - shall be supplied.
It shall be emphasized, that the following technical specification as well as the requested
supplies and services refer to one unit, unless otherwise mentioned.
Each steam turbine shall be connected to the associated Steam Generator (SG). This means
the steam shall be only delivered from the SG. Interconnections between the condensate and
water steam systems of the another power unit shall not be provided, except the auxiliary
steam system, auxiliary cooling water and in case such systems are needed for start up,
heating and shutdown heating purposes.
81 .1.2 Scope of Supplies and Services
This section covers the scope of main equipment covered by this technical specification as
well as requested supplies and services without excluding other necessary components and
services not mentioned herein. Lot 1 shall specify all the equipment necessary for the scope
of supplies and services.
Steam turbine
ine shall be complete in every respect, including at least:
mplete, including those necessary for blow-out / acid cleaning

prov1s10ns
• steam strainers for installation int ·ve steam and reheat emergency stop valve casing
• electro-hydraulically operated control/em ency stop valves at the inlet part of the HP
section of the turbine
• electro-hydraulically operated combined
before the IP section of the turbine
• check valves and motorized isolation valves for all bleeds (except c
• motorized turning device, complete, with manual turning equipment
• gland steam system complete with gland steam condenser
B1 -Turbine & Generator and Associated Systems 81 - 2

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 692/765
• complete noise and heat insulation

• t bine enclosure, complete
• fir rotection equipment
• Com lete connecting piping, fittings, safety devices, fastenings, etc.
• Desig arameter for static and dynamic calculations of the turbine foundation (including
deflecti calculation due to occurring forces and moments)
• Complete rainage system including flash tanks
81 .1.2.2 bine oil plant
1 (one) lubricating a d control oil system for each unit, each complete in every respect,
including at least:
• oil tank including oil st iners

• 2 (two) x 100% main il pump with AC motor drive with prov1s10n for back-up
automatic starting or acco ing supplier standard (1 x direct driven, 1 x AC motor driven,
1 x DC driven pump)
• 2 (two)jacking oil pumps
• 2 (two) x 100% oil vapor extra ion fans with AC motor drive with oil separation in the
p1pmg
• oil coolers
• duplex oil filter for the complete lubr ating oil flow
• complete connecting piping, fittings, non return valves, safety devices, fastenings,
supports of the oil system.
• lube oil piping system shall be preferable cated in drained channels or according to the
manufacturer's standard subject to approval
• 1 (one) oil purification plant for each turbine il systems with 1 x booster pump and 3 x
coalescing filters
• control oil unit with 2 x 100% oil pumps and dupl
81 .1.2.3 Downtime ventilation plant
• N2 seal connections for condensate and feed water heat s and deaerator, including N2
cylinder storage racks. The consumable (N2) are to be supp ·ed by SC.
81 .1.2.4 Condenser
Condenser system for each unit, each complete in every respect, with ring supports or
expansion compensators on the exhaust steam duct, with hotwell, conde
with level gauges, etc., including at least:
• vacuum breaking device (if not by Turbine)

• automatic venting of the cooling water chambers (trip of cooling water pum
• complete connecting piping, safety devices, fastenings, etc.
• calculation of the cooling water siphon effect
• evacuation system for the steam side, complete with piping, valves, fastenings, et
• evacuation unit for water chambers, complete as for steam side
• main condensate pumps including sufficient redundancy, complete each with motor
strainers, check valves, minimum flow device, isolating valves, etc.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 693/765
IP /LP Flash tanks or pipe headers

• condensate serve tank (if applicable)
81 .1.2.5 e ball cleaning system
• For each cooling water stream one a atically controlled independent sponge ball
cleaning system shall be installed, each inclu at least:
• automatic sorting and counting of the balls
• screens
• ball circulating pumps
• ball recirculation monitoring
• connecting piping, fittings, fastenings
• local control, monitoring and switchgear equipment, etc.
81.1.2.6 Condensate polishing plant
Condensate polishing plant (CPP) for both power plant units shall include at least, but not
limited to:
• Two (2) x 100% cartridge filters for condensate polishing, complete with by-pass,
associated piping, pneumatically operated valves, differential pressure gauge with
adjustable high alarm and cartridges.
• Two (2) x 100% start-up cartridge filters for condensate polishing, complete with by-pass,
associated piping, pneumatically operated valves, differential pressure gauge with
adjustable high alarm and cartridges.
• Two (2) x 50% ion exchanger lines, each containing:
• Cation exchanger
• Two (2) x 50% working cation exchangers, complete with filling and all associated
piping, pneumatically operated valves and instrumentation for automatic operation and
regeneration
• Two (2) x 100% air blowers for resin mixing
• Two (2) x 100% regeneration water pumps
• Mixed bed ion exchanger
• Two (2) x 50% working mixed bed ion exchangers, complete with filling and all
associated piping, pneumatically operated valves and instrumentation for automatic
operation and regeneration
• One (1) HCl regeneration station for the regeneration of the working mixed bed ion
exchangers plus the above specified cation exchanger, complete with dosing tank,
dosing pump flow control, injector, and all associated piping and instrumentation
• One (1) NaOH regeneration station for the regeneration of the working mixed bed ion
exchangers, complete with dosing tank, dosing pump flow control, injector and all
associated piping and instrumentation
• Drain system for waste water from CPP into collection and neutralisation basin (made of
concrete- part of Lot 4) for further treatment in the waste water treatment plant
• Piping system from regeneration stations up to ammonia waste water holding tank ((part
of Lot 4 if made by concrete)
• Two (2) x 100% air blowers for resin mixing
• Two (2) x 100% regeneration water pumps

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 694/765
• Automatically operated bypass over the CPP plant for condensate flow from the
condenser.
• Complete set of measuring instruments like manometers, level controls and pH- analyzers
for the complete system The following sentence shall be added at the end of 81 .1.2.6 and 81 .1.3.11 respectively.
Synchronous AC generator
• syn ronous AC generator complete with water/hydrogen internal cooling system and
extern water/hydrogen to water cooler
• complete t of excitation system including power system stabiliser (PSS)
• digital type a tomatic voltage controller (AVR)
• measuring and onitoring equipment
• Generator auxiliar like hydrogen supply, seal-oil plant, stator cooling water purifying
set.
81 .1.2.8
• generator single-phase insulated p se bus system (IPB) up to the generator transformer

(or two generator transformers) an two unit auxiliary transformers including IPB to
excitation transformer
• generator circuit breaker of SF6 or air blas pe
• all required components along the generator nnection like surge arrestors, capacitors,
earthing switches, CT' s and VT' s
• IPB generator star point (including CT's, if not inte ted in generator bushing)
• Star point panel including transformer, resistor and a required components for 100%
generator earth fault detection/protection.
81.1.2.9 Unit Protection and synchronizing equip
• numeric generator protection in redundant design

• generator transformer(s) and unit auxiliary transformers protection
• duplicate 500 kV connection protection up to 500 kV substation terminals
• overall differential protection covering generator, generator transformer(s) unit
auxiliary transformers
• dual channel type synchronising unit, instruments for manual including synchro c
relays.
81.1.2.10 Control and monitoring equipment
Complete set of all control, governing, measuring and monitoring equipment for each unit
with all instrumentation necessary to match particular design arrangements of the apparatus
and units, including at least:
• electro-hydraulic turbine governor

• jump and rate limiter
• monitoring and protection system complete
• Instrumentation for protection, monitoring and metering.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 695/765
Condensate and feed water heaters
• Fe d water heaters shall be provided in line with the optimization of Lot 1

• Nu er of heaters according to data sheets and preliminary heat balance diagrams
• Safet Yalves at the heaters shells and/ or tube sides
• Conden te level control and drain systems complete
• Piping, dr inage
• Condensate umps
• Instrumentati n
• Emergency aut matic by pass drain system complete with control valves in accordance
with ASME reco mendation for turbine water induction protection, etc.
81.1.2.12
• 2 x 50% feed water p ps units for normal operation driven by condensing steam
turbines connected to the ain turbine condenser
• 1 x 35% feed water pump s standby and start up, driven by AC motor, soft start or
speed regulated by a variable eed hydraulic drive
• Supply in line with ISO 1295 part 7, or another equivalent international recognized
standard, and additional requirem nts as described herein.
• Each pump set shall be equipped w · h at least:
• One (1) lubricating oil system an one (1) control oil system with fire resistant fluid,
one jacking oil system, each compl e in every respect, including as far as applicable:
• Common oil tank including oil str ·ners
• 1 x 100 % main oil pump, either tur ·ne or AC motor driven
• 1 x 100 % auxiliary oil pump with A otor drive
• 1 x 100 % emergency oil pump with D motor drive
• 1 x 100 % jacking oil pump, if necessary
• Control oil pumps with AC motor drive (if eparately necessary)
• Oil vapor extraction fans with AC motor dri with oil separation in the piping
• oil coolers
• Duplex oil filter for the complete lubricating oil ow
• Duplex oil filter for the complete control oil flow
• Connections for mobile purification plant
• 1 (one) complete minimum-flow system including mim
etc.
• Flow measuring device
• Safety valves at the pump suction side
• Suction strainers
• Necessary booster pump, complete with drive
• All flow control devices, electrical drives, check valves, couplin base plates, drive
motors, etc.
• Necessary control equipment for pump protection and plant single a d three element
control.
• Complete set of all control, governing, measuring and monitoring equip ent with all
instrumentation necessary to match particular design arrangements of th apparatus
and units
• Drive turbine, each complete with at least:

• Emergency stop valves complete with steam strainer
• Electro-hydraulically operated control valves at the inlet of the turbine

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 696/765
• Motorized turning device, complete, with manual turning equipment

land steam system complete with gland steam condenser
• Sp y water system at the turbine exhaust side for start up if required
• Com ete noise and heat insulation
• Turbine nclosure, complete
• Static an namic calculation of the turbine foundation
• Spring supp as far as required
• Opening for co ection of an external dehumidifier (e.g. long term standstill during
• Drive AC Motor, comple

• Cooling equipment
• Control, measuring and mo ·toring incl. appropriate instrumentation
• Lubrication system (possibly c mmon with pump)
81 .1.2.13 Combined deaerator/ orage feed water tanks
1 (one) feed water tank with deaerator for each nit, each complete with supporting structure,
stub pipes, stiffeners, baffle plates, steam heated s nd pipe, separate warming up steam line,
strainers upstream the deaerator spray nozzles, vapo xtraction system, etc.
81 .1.2.14 Auxiliary steam piping system
Auxiliary steam piping system for unit start-up, complete in eve respect.
At start up the system shall be fed by "Auxiliary Steam Generatin ystem", in normal
operation the supply is by cold reheat.
The system is common for both units and includes, at least, but is not h
• piping, fittings, fastenings

• valves, check valves, safety valves, steam traps
• control valves
• Instrumentation and monitoring.
81 .1.2.15 Piping, valves and accessories
All pipes and piping systems including all accessories such as drains, vents, valves, safety
devices, steam traps, condensate traps, strainers, actuators, pipe supports, anchor points,
expansion joints, nozzles for instrumentation and control fixtures, flanges, gaskets,
connection elements, calibrated pipe pieces for expansion measurements, lines and bypasses
for start-up lines, etc.
It is understood that "piping, valves and accessories" specified under this section includes all
piping as far as these are not included in the other sections.
81.1.2.16 Sampling system
The monitoring system for the water-steam-cycle shall be complete, including at least, but
not limited to:

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 697/765
• complete sampling system, including sampling coolers with racks, connections, nozzles,
valves, fittings and pipes shall be provided to obtain representative separate samples of
• live steam, hot reheat steam
• various condensates
• feedwater
• demineralized water
• cccw
• Condensate polishing plant
• online analyzers and accessories for conductivity, pH, dissolved oxygen, silica, sodium,
roe
• measurement and recording for all sample points
• sample piping system including racks back to the process (water & steam system)
• Online transmission of chemical parameters and alarms to DCS
81 .1.2.17 Insulation
Insulation shall be supplied where required for

• reduction of heat dissipation
• personnel protection
• avoidance of condensation on the piping surface with temperature less than dew-point
• noise insulation to the extent necessary.
81 .1.3 Special Technical Requirements
81 .1.3.1 General
The requirements specified in Section BO shall apply and, where applicable, further
regulations from the other Sections of this specification.
Each turbine and generator unit, including the associated condensate steam system and the
respective associated other equipment shall be able to be operated without any restriction
and any limitation in time at each load between no-load and maximum load.
Materials for steam turbine and auxiliaries shall be of quality to ensure conforming to the
international standards preferably ASTM.
Steam turbine
shall be designed as reheat condensing turbine.
Casing
The steam turbine shall be designe nsure a very good and rapid adaptation of the
turbine to alterations in load and alterations ·
The nozzle ducts shall be supported separately in the cas1

shall not be accepted.
In order to be able to check the condition of the turbine blading without openin
horoscope openings shall be provided at suitable points on the casing.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 698/765
The casing and their built-in features shall be supported centrically as far as possible. The
desig and surface preparation of the supports shall be such that thermal expansion is not
hinder in any way. Packing plates shall be provided to enable good alignment to be
achieve .
and outlet connections shall be arranged symmetrically.
All the casing j ·nts shall be designed to remain steam tight for a minimum operation period
of 45,000 hours ·thout the need for bolt re tightening or gasket replacement. The required
tightening equipme t shall be supplied by Lot 1 and handled over to the SC.
Blading, nozzle segm ts

Rotor and stator blades, ozzle segments and control parts shall be produced in erosion and
corrosion resistant materi .
For all rotor blades, only full machined or pre-forged and mechanically machined designs
are permissible. For the rotor b de stage of HP 1st, LP 1st, 2nd ,and 3rd only milled shrouds
are permitted (shroud band integ 1to the blade and formed by machining). The low
pressure rotor blades shall be prov ed with additional edge protection, where necessary.
The turbine stages operating in the s am region shall be provided with sufficient water
drains.
The blading shall be designed and constr ted to avoid vibration damage when the unit is
running continuously at any speed between 8.5 Hz and 50.5 Hz of the synchronous speed.
Rotor
The coupled critical speeds of the turbine and ge erator rotor shall lie outside the range from
90% to 110% of the nominal speed. The rotor sha be statically and dynamically balanced
in the factory.
It shall be possible to re-balance the rotors on site with t particular difficulty. The fixed
parts of the steam turbine generator unit shall be free of y resonance which might disturb
the operation.
In the design of the rotor, all notches, sharp inner edges or exc ssively small radii shall be
avoided so that fatigue failures are excluded. All internal radii s all be provided with a high
quality surface finish.
Bearings
Bearings shall be designed as horizontally split plain bearings. Thrust arings shall be
capable of taking load from both sides and be self aligning. They shall b axially adjustable.
It shall be possible to check the thrust position and bearing metal temperatu
operation.
Earthing brushes shall be provided at the turbine side bearing of the generator to
bearings. Similarly the necessary bearing and pipe insulation shall be provided to ve
protection against eddy currents. In order to prevent oil leaks, suitable bearing seals
oil thrower rings shall be provided.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 699/765
It hall be possible to dismantle the bearing shells without removing the turbine casings or
dis anding the generator.
All bea: ing oil wells shall be provided with visual oil level indicators and ready means of
checkin oil flow, filling and draining.
Thermocou es shall be provided on each sleeve bearing to provide warning of excessive oil
temperature.
Gland seals
Gland steam shall t be discharged into the turbine hall. It shall be possible to inspect the
outer labyrinth throu h a removable cover without having to open the turbine.
Emergency stop valves, governor valves, reducing valves

Spindles, fittings and con ol parts shall be manufactured in stainless steel material. The
guide surfaces shall be man factured in hard wearing materials or they shall be armored.
Spindle leakage losses shall 8 avoided by suitable seals.
In order to facilitate the safe and eliable shut-down, the emergency stop valves and
governor valves shall be arranged ith easy access as near as possible to the appropriate
turbine casings.
Turning device
Hydraulic or electrically driven turning d Yices may be employed. The turning device shall
disengage automatically as soon as the turo · e speed exceeds the turning speed. Automatic
engaging of the turning device shall be provi ed remotely, from the central control room,
and manually from local position.
Couplings
If toothed couplings are employed, these shall be pr vided with forced oil lubrication. All
parts of toothed couplings shall be fully machined. C piing hubs and sleeves shall be
individually balanced, statically and dynamically, at as eed corresponding to the operating
speed. For the design the short circuit shock shall be ass ed at least 8 times the nominal
torque on the drive coupling for at least 100 times. If nece ary, this value shall be corrected
upwards after the torsional critical speed calculations for the otal plant and the actual
generator short circuit torque are known.
Gland steam
The gland steam system shall be provided with at least, but not be r
Piping, control valves, attemperators, stop and check valves, as well gland steam
condenser and suction fans. The condenser shall be cooled by condens 1e. The tube material
to be used for the gland steam condenser shall be of stainless steel mater" 1.
Other turbine equipment

The LP turbine bleed shall be provided with bleed steam shut off or check va
81 .1.3.3 Lubricating and control oil system
The lubricating and control oil system serves to supply the lubrication points and the
equipment of the steam turbine generator unit.
The oil supply equipment shall be arranged in an oil compartment.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 700/765
temperature rise of the bearing oil in the bearings shall not exceed 30 K, and the oil
dra1 temperature of the bearings shall not exceed 79 °C.
Theo· tank shall be dimensioned to not exceed volume change more than 7.8 times per
hour.
Oil vapour uction fans and oil separators shall be provided. The possibility of unacceptable
concentratio of the oil vapour shall not exist at any point of the oil system.
All oil-carrying arts shall be separated from equipment subjected to hot steam so that
premature ageing f the turbine oil and the danger of fire is excluded. The lubricating oil
pipes shall be adop d the double pipe system which shall be run the supply oil piping
within the returned o · piping of un-pressurization.
The pressurized oil pipe shall be seamless and connections between oil-carrying parts shall
be welded or flanged. The astening of the oil pipes shall be such that excessive vibrations
are excluded. Oil drain poin in high pressure lines shall be equipped with double stop
valves. It shall be possible to ut off the control oil circuit separately.
The oil pumps shall be arranged the oil tank. The redundancy oil pump shall be able to
start automatically in the case of a rop in oil pressure. If positive displacement pumps are
employed, the DC emergency oil pu p shall be connected electronically in a failsafe way. It
shall be ensured by proper means sot t the pump is always working in emergency cases.
Off-command from the control room sh 1only be possible in case of turbine standstill.
The oil coolers shall be provided with a wif drawable tube bundle or plate type. If two
coolers are installed, they shall be switchable uring operation without interruption of the oil
flow and shall be easy to clean. The coolers sh 1be connected to the closed cycle cooling
water system (CCCW). The materials used fort oil coolers shall be equivalent to the
materials specified for the gland steam condenser.
The oil filters in the lubricating oil main circuit and · the control oil circuit shall be
arranged as duplex filters, which can be switched ove without interruption.
An oil cleaning system consisting of coalescer filter with 11 auxiliary equipment shall be
provided for at least 2.2% (for BFP- Turbine 3.44 % is ace ted) of the circulating oil flow.
The separators shall be capable of being used both in operat1 n and standstill as well. Those
parts of the oil separator in contact with fluid shall be manufa ured from carbon steel
material.
Dirt and all solid particles greater than 5 microns shall be remove in the oil filters.
However, oil additives of any type should not be removed from the il. If necessary, oil
vapour extraction shall be provided for this equipment.
The different oil systems shall be made easily distinguishable by a cle
different coloring.
A suitable sampling point shall be provided to take oil samples.
81.1.3.4 Insulation
In order to avoid a possible penetration of oil, insulation with an oil-tight hard co

provided for the turbine. Damaging heat radiation on to the foundations shall be av ·ded.
Asbestos insulating material shall not be accepted.
Hot sections which cannot be insulated such as for example observation openings, shal
provided with a corresponding contact protection.
Otherwise the requirements of the Section BO shall be applied.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 701/765
Turbine cladding (enclosure)
The t rbine cladding shall be designed as a sheet ding with noise insulation and provided
withs ficient corrosion protection. It shall cover the complete turbine area including the
turbine o ter bearings. Heat build-up within the turbine cladding shall be avoided by
suitable v tilation.
The turbine ladding shall be accessible and shall be provided with doors. It shall be easy to
dismantle.
81.1.3.6
N2 seal connections r feed water heaters and deaerator shall be provided, including N2
cylinder storage racks. he consumable (N2) are to be supplied by SC.
81.1.3.7
The design of the condenser sH 11 comply with the design data of the steam turbine. Under-
cooling of the condensate shall avoided. The pressure design on the steam side shall at
least cover the range from full vac um to 1 bar gauge and, on the water side, at least 3 bar
gauge.
The water side of the condenser (one tr sverse type condenser per LP turbine, both
connected on steam side or one axial typ condenser per LP turbines) shall operate on the
double pass or the single pass system. The esign shall allow uninterrupted turbine operation
while a half condenser seawater stream is in ork clearance for repair.
The condenser shall meet the requirements of e main cooling water system with respect to
material and it shall be assumed that sand shall e contained in the sea water.
For LOT 1 information only:

To reduce biofouling in the cooling water system to ossible minimum, a highly
sophisticated, state of the art and high efficient cooling water intake screening system
completed by chlorination dosing system, shall be supph d.
The condenser tubes shall be made of titanium. For tube pla a well-matching material to
tube and condenser shell materials shall be used.
Dangerous vibrations of the condenser tubes shall not occur duri operation. Therefore a
corresponding number of carbon steel tube support plates shall be ployed. If necessary,
baffles shall be provided to protect the tubes. The holes in the tube p tes and tube support
plates shall be accurately drilled, reamed and chamfered on both sides o facilitate assembly
of the tubes. The inlets of the tubes shall be so designed that the erosive ffect of the sand in
the seawater is avoided as far as possible. Sufficient space shall be provid d for withdrawal
of the condenser tubes.
Each of the water chambers shall contain venting and water drain connections adequate
size. Sufficient and automatically actuated venting at the cooling water side in ca e of main
cooling water pumps trip shall be provided. The water side of the condenser shall
designed for satisfactory operation of the continuous condenser cleaning equipment.
The water box design shall allow uncomplicated chemical cleaning of the tubing.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 702/765
T e arrangement of the condenser shall be such that no unacceptable forces can be exerted
due o thermal expansion, over-pressure or the filling of the steam space with water.
In addi ·on, the condenser shall be suitable for accepting all drains occurring during start-up,
normal d emergency operation.
A suitable n mber of manholes (at least two well accessible manholes both per each water
chambers and team shell) with internally held covers shall be provided on the steam and
water sides oft condenser having at least a nominal bore of 600 mm (refer also to Section
BO). Furthermore, means of observing the vulnerable condenser tube regions shall be
provided.
The capacity of the ho ell shall correspond to a condensate flow of at least 2. 5 minutes
during ECR operation. e complete control loop for controlling the hotwell level including
minimum condensate flo and control valves is part of the condenser. Local control loops
are not accepted.
Piping directly connected to co denser shall be welded.
81 .1.3.8 Continuous con enser cleaning equipment
The condenser shall be equipped with highly sophisticated, state of the art and highly
efficient sponge ball condenser cleaning ystem. This equipment shall be controlled by DCS,
from the CCR.
Besides the cooling water screening, the me anical condenser cleaning system shall be the
primary measure to keep condenser tubing fre of deposits.
A continuous and shock operated chlorination sy em shall be provided by LOT3.
81 .1.3.9 Evacuation units
Water ring pumps shall be employed for maintaining the acuum in the condenser and for
hogging, as well. They shall be designed sufficiently large o maintain the vacuum in the
condenser even with small leaks. The start-up vacuum (hog ·ng) shall be obtained by
operation of two evacuation units.
81.1.3.10 Main condensate pumps
pumps 2 Jr 100%
vertical reentry design is acceptable.
The design rate of the pumps shall consider the highest operating condensate de
condensate flow for attemperator.
Highest pump set efficiency shall be at ECR.
The operating pressure of booster pumps shall consider the condensate polishing proces
The sentence of" The main condensate pumps shall be provided as vertical can pit multistage centrifugal
pumps 2 x 100%. The condensate booster bumps shall be likewise provided as centrifugal pumps 2 x
100%. 11 shall be revised as 11 The main condensate pumps shall be provided as vertical can pit multistage 81 - 13
centrifugal pumps 2 x JOO% or 3 x 50%. The condensate booster bumps shall be likewise provided as
centrifitzal vumvs 2 x JOO% or 3 x 50%. ". Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 703/765
The imp of the pumps shall be manufactured in stainless steel material type. The sleeve
of the pumps s be manufactured in stainless material type. Casings and rotors shall be
provided with wear rm ·n order to permit easy replacement of the parts subject to wear.
The pumps shall be provide · h roller bearings. Condensate from the discharge pipe shall
be used as sealing water.
The pump motors shall be so designed that a suit overload is possible before the pumps
shall be switched off. Pumps and driving motors shall lied on a common base plate
as far as applicable.
The installation level and the NPSHreq of the pumps and the NPSHavail shal
one another so that no cavitation occurs even under the most extreme condenser op
conditions.
81 .1.3.11 Condensate polishing plant
A condensate polishing system shall be provided to meet the stringent water quality
according to JIS B 8223.
The design capacity of the CPP shall be based on the maximum condensate flow at
maximum continuous rate (MCR) with 100% condensation. This shall also apply for the
cartridge filters. The condensate polishing plant shall include, but limited to start-up
cartridge filters, cartridge filters, cation exchanger, mixed bed ion exchanger, all auxiliaries
required for regeneration and operation.
The start-up cartridge filter and the cartridge filter shall be able to be operated alternately.
The cation exchanger shall be upstream of the mixed bed ion exchanger and both shall be
equipped with full bypass facilities.
The operation of the cation exchanger should be designed to optimize the concentration of
ammonia in the waste water.
The specific amount of waste water during regeneration should be as low as possible.
Sampling equipment shall be installed in all places where required for local and remote
supervision of the operation for early recognition of disturbances and for the clarification of
The sampling coolers shall be fitted with stainless steel coils and stainless steel piping
connections up to the take-off point. The position of each sampling point shall ensure
representative samples and shall led to one common sampling station or shall be combined
in a minimum number of groups (if because oflong sampling pipe length the danger of
falsification of analysis would exist).
All sample coolers shall be provided with stainless steel trays. The drain of these trays shall
be led to the condensate collecting tank.
The sample coolers shall be so designed that no detrimental consequences shall occur in
case of interruption of cooling water supply.
The throttle valves shall be located downstream of the sample coolers in order to avoid
steaming of the sample.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 704/765
Owing to the elevated temperature of the cooling water, all measurements for which a
temperature correction is not possible (e.g. 0 2 measurement) shall be cooled by a cooling
aggregate or separate electric sample cooler shall be provided for each measuring point.
On components where the steam or water flows in parallel streams, the tapping connections
shall be provided in each of the streams.
Ion exchangers
The exchangers shall be protected internally against corrosion by a 3 mm layer of tough
rubber. All rubber lining shall be manufactured by the so-called hot process, which means
real vulcanization.
The downstream-operated mixed bed exchangers shall be equipped with three (3) sight-
glasses, one (1) at the upper resin level, one (1) in the upper section at the exchanger vessel
and one (1) at the level of the resin interface.
The exchanger resins selected shall have a high resistance to fouling.
The number of nozzles in the exchangers shall be at least 80 per m2 . All nozzles shall be of
adequate corrosion resistant material.
The ion exchangers shall be equipped with a fully automatic system enabling the
regeneration cycle to be started and to run fully automatically in response to operation by the
water treatment operator.
The control system shall provide the following programs:
• Starting
• Stopping
• Selection of a particular step and
• Repeat of each step of the program.
The individual steps of the program e.g. backwashing, introduction of acid, rinsing acid shall
be indicated on the Local Control Room (LCR) by means of process graphic displays
The correct position and actual position of the various valves for each stage of the program
shall be monitored automatically. In the event of a fault, the program shall stop and the fault
indicated on the Local Control Room (LCR). An alarm shall also be given, if the operating
program is not completed within a given time. Suitable precautions shall be taken to ensure
that no switching errors can occur and no critical situation may arise in the case of voltage or
compressed air failures.
The operation of the demineralization plant shall be controlled by continuously measured,

indicated and recorded conductivity readings downstream of the anion and mixed bed
exchangers.
The mixed bed exchangers shall also be controlled by continuously measured indicated and
recorded silica readings downstream of the mixed bed exchangers.
Regeneration (end of the service cycle) of the mixed bed exchanger shall be initiated based
on first occurrence of any one of the following:
• High conductivity in the effluent

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 705/765
• High silica in the effluent

• Preset volume or time has been reached
• High differential pressure across the resin bed
Sampling facilities shall be provided at all requisite points, upstream and downstream of the
ion exchangers.
Resin traps with by-pass and associated shut-off valves, shall be installed downstream of
each ion exchanger.
Special consideration shall be given to the corrosion protection of all surfaces coming into
contact with HCI.
The dilution (regeneration) water lines shall be equipped with flow meters.
Waste water, chemicals spillings and leakages

The waste water output of the ion exchanger plant and leakage from the regeneration station
shall be fed into the neutralization basin. In addition, any chemicals escaping from the
indoor or outdoor chemical preparation and storage plant in the event of leakages are also to
be led to the neutralization basin.
-
The- - - -sentence
following - - -shall-be-added
- -at-the-end
-- -.1.2.6
of 81 - -and-81-.1.3.11
- -respectively.
----
81 .1.3.12 Electrical
Generator
In gen 1 the generator-turbine set characteristics shall be selected by the Bidder to fulfill
the requir ents given in Section BO, however, Bidder shall be able to propose optimum
generator vo e in his proposal.
At rated speed the erator shall have sufficient capacity such that it does not limit the
capability of the steam rbine over the whole range of ambient conditions as mentioned in
Section BO.
The generator shall operate satis ctorily as a single unit and in parallel with all or any of the
other units and the grid system un all normal working conditions and shall be designed
for continuous operation and shall be s constructed as to withstand sudden change in load
and any short circuits at the terminals.
The connections of the generator and the auxilia ·es are indicated in the drawing "Key One
Line Diagram - Grid Connection Unit 5 & 6" and' ey One Line Diagram -Unit 6" (see
Annexes CO).
The generator shall be of the 2 pole cylindrical rotor type.
The heat of the generator internal closed-cooling system shall be tr sferred by suitable heat
exchangers to a closed circuit secondary cooling water system. The he exchangers shall
comply with IEC 600-34.
B1 -Turbine & Generator and Associated Systems
on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 706/765
Pr ferably hydrogen cooled generators shall be provided. Hydrogen cooled generators with
stat water cooling shall also be accepted if it is the manufacturer standard equipment.
The su ly includes all associated systems including CO2 purging, hydrogen storage plant
and all p1 ework, seal oil systems, etc.
Stator
The casing of e stator shall be of fabricated steel construction and to be designed for at
least an internal as pressure of 10 bar (g).
The stator core sha be made up of high permeability low loss stampings, tightly clamped
together to reduce no· e and vibration to a minimum. Attention shall be given to prevent
excessive vibration at ice rated frequency being transmitted to the generator foundations,
pipes or associated equi ent.
The stator winding shall be ar connected and shall be so designed such that the
replacement of a damaged po ion is a relatively simple matter.
The winding shall be effectively aced and blocked to withstand,without being permanently
disturbed, the forces set up by sing -phase or three-phase short circuits at the terminals. The
general construction of the stator an the bracing of the winding overhang shall be such as to
provide adequate cooling surfaces an he avoidance of hot spots.
A Generator gas control system shall be p ovided.
Rotor
The cylindrical rotor body shall be of forged st el, comprising one solid forging. Damper
windings or damper wedges shall be fitted as ne ssary to prevent cyclic irregularities and
as a precaution against local overheating of the rot r surface.
The design of the rotor cooling system shall ensure th t no hot spots develop. The packing
blocks used in the rotor winding shall be of approved m terials and suitable for the high
temperatures and mechanical forces which exist in the ro r.
Particular attention shall be given to the insulating and secur g of the rotor winding and its
connections to avoid vibration and the possible failure of eithe conductors or its insulation.
Rotor retaining rings should be thoroughly tested before applica ·onto the generator rotor
An earthing brush shall be fitted at a suitable position on the shaft, which is free from
contamination by oil etc. Brush changing shall be possible safely a easily while the
generator is operating.
Where necessary, suitable precautions shall be taken against harmful flo of shaft currents,
by the provision of insulating bearings. Insulation provided for this purpos
designed to withstand a test voltage of 2 kV AC.
Bearings
The bearings shall be of the metal sleeve type and designed so as to be readily ac
and replaceable without the removal of the rotor.
All bearing oil wells shall be provided with visual oil level indicators and ready means
checking oil flow, filling and draining.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 707/765
ermometer pockets shall be provided on each sleeve bearing with a dial type thermometer
wit adjustable alarm contacts to provide warning of excessive oil temperature.
Bearin s dependent on lubricating oil shall be provided with a complete and approved
lubricati oil system capable of maintaining the continuous operation of all parts of the
machine, ithout undue heating, at all loads, together with the necessary equipment to
provide suit ble lubrication during normal start-up and shut-down, emergency shut-down,
barring and a other conditions. The system for the generator shall be part of that for the
automatically maintained.
Provision for Par ·al Discharge measurement

The generator shall provided with elements/couplers to enable a Partial Discharge test
(same elements/coup! as for the generator transformer). The Bidder shall provide
mounting positions for f e UHF sensors for the PDM system including details of the
mounting positions and tH design of the fixings for the sensors. A Partial Discharge test
shall be possible in the futu at the generator.
81.1.3.12.2
A terminal-fed, or external source- d, static or brushless excitation system may be supplied.

The Bidden shall prove that this is h standard system and there is proven and extensive
experience on installations in similar I cations to the Site.
The equipment shall be complete in every espect and designed for the highest degree of
reliability and minimum maintenance requi ments.
A block diagram of the complete excitation sys em shall be supplied together with the
constants of the transfer functions for the control nd stabilising circuits. The time constant
of the exciter shall also be included.
The nominal exciter response shall not be less than 0.
The continuous rated current and voltage of the main exc er shall not be less than 110% of
the generator excitation current and voltage required to ma tain rated output at the
terminals of the generator.
The ceiling voltage shall not be less than 200% of maximum co
The thyristor converter shall incorporate a number of three phase fu wave bridges, and
shall be arranged so that a minimum of 20% reserve capacity is incor orated. The converter
should be of modular construction so that a minimum of one bridge ma be removed on line
for maintenance, whilst maintaining full load excitation, without any rest ·ctions.
In the event that the converter derives its AC power requirements from the in generator
terminals, the excitation supply transformer shall be capable supplying full fie
voltage at 80% of rated generator output voltage. In addition a permanent DC c
for electronic circuits shall be provided.
Suitable surge suppression equipment shall be provided across the input of the conve
to ensure overall protection of the converter if required by design.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 708/765
P vision shall be included for the detection and annunciation of excess heat sink
The th istors shall be continuously rated such that generator full load, field forcing and
fault con itions can be carried with one failed device per bridge section.
In case fore air cooled thyristors will be applied, cooling fans shall be dual (main and
backup). Bae up fans shall start automatically when the main fan system is stopped.
Alarms shall be ·nitiated when cooling fans stop and/or filter pressure differential is large
(loss of air coolin function).
Voltage regulation
The excitation control quipment shall consist of automatic voltage regulator of the
duplicated digital type ·th a manual control function. The manual control shall be used
only for test and commiss ning purpose.
The system shall include su able limit control features, fault detection and protection
features.
The standby AVR channel shall continuously monitored, and system operation and
protection shall be unaffected by t nsfer of control from one channel to another (hot
standby and bumpless transfer).
Automatic voltage regulator

The automatic voltage regulator shall be the continuously acting type with no dead bands
enabling control of the excitation over the ole generator operating characteristics.
The AVR shall be capable of maintaining the nerator terminal voltage within± 0.5% of
the set value for any voltage deviation over the ole load range of the generator.
The voltage response characteristic shall be given b the Bidder for A VR damping control at
normal, maximum and minimum settings.
Power system stabilizer

The excitation system shall be equipped with a power syst stabiliser (PSS) for damping
of power system oscillations over the frequency range of 0.1 o 2.0 Hz. The PSS is to be
tuned for damping local and inter area power oscillations. Sett g of PSS system values shall
be made in close collaboration with SC and PLN.
Excitation limiter
A minimum excitation limit device shall be incorporated to prevent t A VR reducing the
generator excitation below a value which might endanger power syste stability limits. The
limit unit shall be arranged to provide an alarm and interlock in the even
excitation when operating under either automatic excitation control.
The characteristic of the var-limiter shall be adjustable and facilities shall be ovided so
that the var-limiter operating characteristic can be adjusted to any setting within the
specified range.
Over-excitation protection shall be incorporated to ensure that if excessive excitation ·s

sustained beyond an adjustable present current/time limit, the A VR is either tripped or he
excitation is automatically ramped down. The current/time setting shall be such that no
damage shall be caused to any part of the AVR or to the excitation rectifiers.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 709/765
VR shall also include the following protective devices
a. VR failure protection
b. J\:WR power supply failure protection.
Over-fluxin protection shall be provided and shall be part of the excitation control system
and shall be erative during automatic modes of excitation control. The protection shall
prevent the tran former magnetic flux from rising to a value at which the voltage/frequency
ratio, pre-set wittt·n the range 1.00 to 1.25, would be exceeded.
Control
An approved means o manually controlling the excitation shall be provided primarily for
generator commissioni and maintenance purposes. Control shall be possible from
approximately Oto 110%
Means for both local and emote operation of the manual control shall be provided. An
auto/manual balance indicato and changeover contactor shall be provided at the cubicle and
in the central control room; h ever, remote changeover shall be inhibited when the local
control is in use.
A follow-up device shall be provid to automatically adjust the standby manual excitation
control so that in the event of a chan over from automatic to manual control there shall be
a minimum change in the level of excit ion.
An automatic limiter shall stop the auto atic follow-up device or the manual voltage
controller from reducing the manual volta regulator setting below the prescribed safe
limits of excitation for the generator when un er manual control. The characteristics of the
limiter shall have the same range of adjustmen as the var-limiter of the A VR channel, but
when commissioned shall be set for less leading c ditions than the var-limiter.
Droop compensation
Quadrature droop compensation shall be provided to sure correct sharing reactive power
in accordance with generator rating.
The compensation shall have an adjustable compensation nge of ±10% and shall be so
connected that the compensation can readily be taken out of s
Generator and exciter field suppression equipment

The exciter field suppression equipment shall be provided and be commodated within the
A VR cubicle.
The field switches shall be capable of making and breaking the circ its under the most
onerous fault conditions. The switches shall be suitable for local and emote as well as
automatic operation. The generator field switch shall also be suitable for ma ual operation.
Means shall be provided on the cubicles for indicating locally and remote!
switches are in the 'open' or 'closed' position.
The field suppression resistor shall be non-inductive and rated to suppress maxim
current as quickly as possible.
Sliprings and commutators

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 710/765
ere sliprings, commutators, and associated brushgear are provided, they shall be
des ned to operate without injurious sparking or excessive wear and it shall be possible to
r at least four months without replacements of the brushes. The brushgear housing
designed to provide maximum visibility via inspection windows. Guards of
insulatin material shall be mounted between the sliprings and between brushholders of
opposite p larity.
Approved arr gements shall be made for locating and operating a grinder for grinding
surfaces. The g ·nder shall be supplied under this contract.
Sliprings and com utators shall be in a separate cooling medium circuit so that dust from
brushgear shall note ter the exciter generator windings.
81.1.3.12.3 Ge erator cooling equipment
General
The generator cooling syste shall include all necessary coolers, fans, pumps and control
apparatus as appropriate.
The cooling system shall comply ·th the requirements of IEC 600 34-3 and IEC60 842 for
hydrogen cooling equipment. The co ling classification shall be IC7(8)Hl W7.
The system shall be complete with al ecessary equipment for safe and efficient operation
of the plant.
Closed cooling system

The hydrogen shall be circulated by fans mo nted on the generator shaft in a closed circuit
system incorporating H 2 to water coolers.
The coolers and isolating valves shall be arran ed to permit isolation and cleaning of
individual sections whilst the generator is on load.
The cooler tubes shall be mounted and supported to a w for the effects of expansion and
vibration. Any necessary apparatus required to withdra the air coolers or permit repair
shall be provided.
A water leak detector shall be provided for the generator stato which shall initiate an alarm
in the event of a leak occurring.
The hydrogen system shall be installed in such a way that no unac ptable accumulation of
hydrogen can occur in the event of hydrogen leaks.
Natural ventilation and turbine hall extraction suitable for this purpose sH 11 be provided.
A visible isolating section shall be incorporated between the compressed ai

H2 system.
The seal oil system shall be equipped with the necessary facilities for removing g s from the
seal oil. The seal oil system shall have an emergency connection to the lube o · system
which enables the generator to be further run even at outage of both seal oil pumps.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 711/765
Generator temperature measurement
Tern rature measurement at generator

In gen al, Pt 100 temperature detectors and indicators of approved type or Thermocouple
shall be ovided for measuring the maximum internal temperature of the generator and the
cooling m di um temperatures. The positions shall be of the manufacturer standard design,
which shall · elude, but not be limited to:
• stator windi s, between coils in slot (RTD)

• stator core (TH rmocouple)
• cooled hydroge as from coolers (per cooler section) (RTD)
• hot hydrogen gas om generator (per cooler section) (RTD)
• collector cooling air ·nlet (RTD)
• collector cooling air o tlet (RTD)
• bearings (generator an xciter) (Thermocouple Type E)
The temperatures shall be mo ·tared through the DCS and shall be indicated in the CCR
The leads from the temperature d tectors shall be brought out to a terminal box on the
generator in a position which is ace ssible during normal operation of the set. All
temperature detectors shall have the e characteristics.
81 .1.3.12.5 Generator main onnections and circuit breaker
The generator main connections shall be des· ned as isolated-phase bus-bar system
protected against contact and designed for ind or and outdoor installation.
The complete generator main connection system all be provided with the necessary
current and voltage transformers, earth switches, st point connections for the generator,
overvoltage capacitors, isolating links for the generat rand unit auxiliary transformer, and
auxiliary equipment for ventilation and cooling with tli required technical fittings and
instruments.
All the necessary controls, regulating, measuring and monit ing facilities, including meters
shall be provided locally and/or in the central control room. mplete supervision shall be
possible from the central control room.
The generator main connections shall be designed for the thermal a d dynamic maximum
short-circuit currents occurring.
All supporting and other constructions both inside and outside the gen ator main
connection, where not made of aluminum, shall be made in a hot-dip ga anized design.
In the generator bus-bar branch and in the branch bus to the unit auxiliary t
isolating links shall be provided in the single-phase bus-bars.
Anti condensation heaters or pressuring systems shall be provided in each separa e bus-bar
section.
Star point on generator

The star point is to be made directly behind the bushing type current transformers provi
for the purpose.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 712/765
S arate earthing transformer cubicle shall be provided.
Gene ator line side cubicle

Along e indoor run of the generator bus-bars, all further ancillary items such as voltage
transfor ers, overvoltage capacitors, earthing isolators, etc. shall be housed in steel sheet
cubicles.
Generator ci cuit breaker

The generator c · cuit breaker shall fulfill the requirements according to IEEE C37.013.
The near short-circ it faults shall be switched off without any delay of the generator circuit
breaker (i.e. by dela of the tripping command).
Circuit breakers of the 6 type with DC motor-driven stored energy mechanism shall be
provided. Also air-blast t e generator circuit breakers of proven design and operating
history shall be considered.
Mimic diagram with symbols d actuating components for:
• Generator symbol
• Earthing switch with position ind· ator and actuating components
• Generator circuit breaker with posi ·on indicator
• Generator main connections
• shall be provided in front of the genera r circuit breaker cabinet.
All signals indicated locally shall be transmi d to the central control room.
Current and voltage transformers

All current and voltage transformers shall be prov1 ed in accordance with IEC 60-044-part
1-(CT) and IEC 60044 part-3 (VT).
A final tripping time is considered to be taken as a basi or the thermal stability (i.e. short-
time thermal current withstand capacity) of the current tr sformers shall be considered. The
current transformers shall be of the toroidal type, cast resin ·nsulated.
Transformer and cubicle connections

The generator transformer and unit auxiliary transformer shall b connected in a way that, in
the event of any short-circuit forces, no harmful deformations can ccur.
The distances between the individual transformer bushings and ther ore the spacing and
height of the main connection ducts shall be selected so that both rep ·r and maintenance
work can be carried out without any difficulty.
In the case of three-phase terminal cubicles arc-proof partitions shall be pr vided between
the phases for both the generator and the transformer connections.
Earthing switches
Motor-driven earthing switches of short-circuit-proof design shall be used. Then essary
interlocks with the 500kV circuit breaker, generator circuit breaker etc. shall be pro
Protective capacitors

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 713/765
T reduce the overvoltage stress, three protective capacitors shall be installed in the
gen rator C.B. at the generator transformer side. Additionally three protective capacitors
shall e installed in the generator C. B. cubicle at the generator bus-bar side.
Generator unit protection, synchronizing, measuring
Unit protect n system

For the genera r and unit protection, digital protection relay type shall be used.
The individual rel s or relay groups shall be installed on the plug-in principle in
standardized steel s eet cubicles.
The following protecti devices shall subject to manufacturer standard with the followings
as the minimum:
Overall
(87) Overall Differential P
Generator
(87G) Gen. Differential Protection
(40) Excitation Loss Protection
(32) Reverse Power Protection
(46) Negative Sequence Protection
(59) Overvoltage/ Undervoltage Protec ·on
(64F) Rotor Earth Fault Protection
(59N) Stator Earth Fault Protection 90 %
(64G) Stator Earth Fault Protection 100 %
(51 V) Voltage Control Over current Protection (
(81) Over-/ Underfrequency Protection
(21) Impedance Protection (Back up)
(25) Synchrocheck relay (Generator circuit breaker
(50BF)Breaker failure protection
(60FL) Fuse failure protection
(49G) Stator temperature protection
Generator transformer
(87T) Transformer Differential Protection
(50/5I)Overcurrent Protection
(5IN) Earth Fault Protection (on the neutral)
(Tl) Buchholz Protection Tank (which has at least two output cont
(63PT)Pressure Relief Device Tank
(63PO)Pressure Relief Device OLTC (if provided with OLTC)
(59PN)Earth Fault Protection
(87N) Restricted Earth Fault Protection (differential)
(23) Temperature Supervision (oil and winding)
(24) Overfluxing
Unit Auxiliary Transformer

(87TA)Transformer Differential Protection
(51) Overcurrent Protection
(Tl I) Buchholz Protection (which has at least two output contacts)
(63PT)Pressure Relief Device Tank

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 714/765
(6 O)Pressure Relief Device OLTC (if provided with OLTC)

(22) Temperature Supervision
500 kV co ections
(87L) Dupl ated pilot wire Differential Protection
(50/5I)Overcu ent Protection
(49) Thermal o erload
The protective relays s all be redundant microprocessor type. The protection relays for
generator and 500 kV co ection shall be divided into two relay groups with the relays in
group 1 representing the ba -up protection for the group 2 and vice versa. The two relay
groups shall have independen ower supply sources.
The subdivision of the protective r ays into groups shall be associated with fully automatic
self-check facilities (watch dog) ena ·ng the protective relays self-test during operation
without imposing any operating restricf ns.
The Bidder must co-ordinate the aforementi ed protection equipment with the protection
system of the new 500kV GIS switchgear prov· ed by Lot 3 and with the protection system
of the PLN 500kV grid. The Bidder shall provide he overall protection schema drawings
and prepare detailed drawings for the necessary inte
Synchronizing
The general synchronizing point shall be the generator circ
For each unit a separate plug-in type, double channel, electronic arallel-switching apparatus
shall be provided.
The generator circuit breaker shall be synchronized by means of the au matic program.
Circuit breaker selection shall be done manual. Automatic synchronizing all be possible
from the CCR All required equipment for conventional manual synchroniz ·on shall be
provided. For this purpose, the parallel-switching measuring instruments such twin
voltmeters, synchroscope and twin frequency meter shall be integrated in the cen al control
room.
In case of manual synchronising, this shall only be possible when switching- ON comm
is released by a separate synchro-check relay.
81 .1.3.13 Control and monitoring equipment
The stipulations in Section BO "General Technical Requirements" shall be considered.
The system shall be remotely and fully automatically controlled by the Distributed Control
System (DCS). The turbine controls shall be an integrated part of the plant DCS. Remote
supervision and manual interaction, when required shall be done from the CCR operator
workstations.
A sufficient number of field sensors and local/remote indicators shall be provided to secure
a reliable and safe operation, monitoring and protection of the turbine generators and its
auxiliaries. Wherever possible, local indicators, transmitters, analysers, junction boxes, etc.
shall be mounted in groups to allow an easy operation, monitoring and maintenance.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 715/765
The regulation, control, supervision and protection equipment to be delivered must

guarantee the fully automatic operation of the turbine.
All the necessary switching operations for turbine start-up and shut down together with
operation of its associated auxiliaries shall be carried out automatically and in the
technologically correct order.
Both the start-up and shutdown and normal operation of the turbine generators shall be
initiated and supervised continuously from the operator stations of the DCS within the CCR.
The control equipment for the generator cooling and sealing oil plants may be housed locally,
but it shall be connected to DCS by serial connection for monitoring purpose. It shall be
possible to carry out the switching operations - normally carried out automatically -
individually manual from the DCS in the CCR. It shall also be possible to start and stop the
turbine generators by local manual operation. To this end, the necessary instruments and
operating devices shall be provided locally with a good visual display.
The regulation equipment supplied shall control rapid changes in load. Operation in the
frequency support mode, constant electrical power output mode and speed control mode
shall also be possible.
The protection system supplied shall protect the turbine generator plant in every phase of
operation from overload and damage. It shall be continually ready for operation and capable
of being checked even during operation and shall not be capable of being switched off even
acci dentally.
The controllers in D-EHC (Digital Electro-Hydraulic Control System-Electric Turbine

Governor) shall be dual redundant. Turbine protection logic shall be implemented in triple
redundant system.
81.1.3.13.1 Measurements
urbine casing metal temperature lower/upper half

• Other evant absolute and/or differential values of the HP turbine casing and/or rotor
metal temp ture
• Position of the ve cone of each control valve (live steam, HP bypass steam reducing
station)
• End position of each stop Ive (live steam, HP bypass steam reducing station) and of the
extraction steam control ands t-offvalves
• All temperature measurements req · ed for the Thermal Stress Evaluator (TSE)
Lube Oil/Control Oil

• Lube oil tank level high/low
• Lube oil temperature before and after coolers
• Lube oil outlet temperature of each bearing
• Sleeve metal temperature of each journal bearing, lower segme
• Pad metal temperature of thrust bearing
• Lube oil drain flow: Sight glasses shall be provided for each bearing.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 716/765
• ·fferential pressure measurement for oil filters and strainers for lube oil and control oil
sys m. However, no differential pressure measurement shall be provided for submerged
pump trainers.
• Pressure auge down stream of each bearing orifice to check the oil pressure
• As applica e, pressures in control and safety system
Special measurem ts
• Differential expans · n of ST shaft versus casing(s)
• Turbine shaft position t thrust bearing
• Shaft vibrations measure ents
Also in the scope of supply shall e all additional remote and local measuring equipment
required for:
• Final acceptance and performance tes at site

• Controls and interlocking of individual a iliary systems
• Actuation of functional group sequence co ols
If deemed necessary, the engineer during project fo w-up may recommend additional
instrumentation.
Condenser Hotwell
The condenser pressure shall be limited to a predetermined va
Triple redundant transmitters shall be considered for the following

condenser:
• Condenser pressure
• Condenser temperature (single transmitter)
• Condensate level in the condenser hotwell.
To detect any circulating water leakage into the condenser system the conductivity of the
condensate shall be measured on the discharge side of the main condensate pumps.
Steam Turbine Control
The start-up the turbine from standstill condition to nominal speed under cold/warm/hot
start-up condition , nchronizing the generator to the grid and loading the turbine to any
pre-set load shall be fu utomatic, without operator actions locally. Provision shall be
made for the operator in the m · control room to take control for manual operation of the
turbine start-up, synchronization an ading.
Start/stop of any auxiliary system such as, turnm ear, drain system, etc. during the start-
up/shut-down of the turbine shall be operated automa ·
after operators command.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 717/765
T e start-up/shut-down sequences of the turbine and its auxiliary systems shall be

con gured in a hierarchy system of Functional Group Control (FGC), Sub-Group Control
(SG and Sub-Loop Control (SLC) in a coordinated manner.
The ope tor shall initiate the start-up/shutdown of the steam turbine from the DCS operator
station in CR
A Thermal St ss Evaluator (TSE) shall be provided. The monitoring of thermal stress shall
be performed in -EHC. As to the auto-run-up and loading program, the temperature miss-
match between tu bine rotor and steam temperature shall be calculated before start-up of
turbine, and run-up peed and loading rate shall be determined automatically in D-EHC.
On-load testing shall e provided for the following equipment/systems:
• HP Steam Stop Valve HP Steam control valves

• IP Steam Stop Valves / Steam control valves
The test shall not cause a trip o the turbine. The result of each test shall be indicated. The
test program shall be initiated nually by the operator from the DCS operator station.
The control system shall monitor he live steam conditions, IP and LP extraction steam
pressure status of turbine generato auxiliaries and turbine thermal stresses and shall provide
the plant monitoring system with da necessary for turbine performance calculations.
The control system shall be capable of s utting down the turbine generator and its
auxiliaries in a safe manner.
The control system shall have maximum and inimum adjustable load limits and a rate of
change load limit.
The control system shall have the capability of aut matically controlling the turbine speed to
prevent the unit from reaching the overspeed trippin point in the event of an instantaneous
change in load from full load to not load or to mainta1 the grid frequency during normal
operation.
Provision shall be made for on-line testing of all stop valve .
81.1.3.13.3 Turbine Governor
The turbine governor shall be provided with high-pressure hydrau · fast response control
valve actuators. The governor equipment shall be complete in all res ects and shall be
capable to carry out the following control tasks:
• Speed/frequency regulation
• Electrical power regulation
• Live steam pressure limitation.
The description below contains the regulation tasks and a framework proposal fo
solution of these tasks.
The scope of supply shall include the range of equipment, which makes possible the s e
fulfillment of the tasks as outlined as well as to maintain the necessary regulation accur
and the fully automatic operation of the turbine.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 718/765
In a dition, the regulation circuits shall help stable operation of the turbine generator at all
load ints.
All featu s of the governing system shall be demonstrated during plant commissioning.
An electro-H draulic turbine governor system, preferably, shall be employed with the
hydraulic part apable by itself of providing safe operation of the turbine. Using the electro-
hydraulic regul ion, precise frequency-power characteristic shall be possible with a high
response sensitiv1 and fine adjustment of the frequency-power characteristic even during
operation. Further re, control of load shedding shall be ensured while avoiding running up
on the static characte ·stic. In addition, the governor equipment shall meet the following
requirements:
• In case of load reject n from rated conditions and rated speed, an overspeed limit
function shall limit the s eed to not more than 8% of nominal speed. The overspeed trip
shall not be activated in t ·s case. Overspeed after load rejection shall have no harmful
influence on the turbine g erator and its auxiliaries. For the speed triple redundant
measurements with 2 out of voting shall be provided. In case that speed control and
overspeed protection are locate in the same control system, these triple sensors can also
be used for overspeed protection, therwise separate redundant sensors shall be provided
for overspeed protection. The devi es shall be readily accessible for adjustment purpose
and on load testing when the unit i operating at rated speed at any load without load
reduction and without tripping the unit.
• It shall be possible to set the proportional nd within the limits O - 8.0%.
• It is also required that the governor shall op ate over the full regulation range without
hunting.
• As far as the turbine generator is synchronized w· h power grid and in 'free Governor
mode', D-EHC (turbine governor) shall vary the rbine load according to governor
droop (e.g. 5 %) according to the change of grid freq ency. In case of lack of steam to
avoid that the live steam pressure decreases the turbin control shall be switched over
automatically and bumpless to steam pressure control, i order to keep the live steam
pressure constant at a minimum value to be determin d together with the boiler
manufacturer. The limitation shall ensure that the available oilers take no more steam
from the live steam header that can be produced. The s oint shall be remotely
adjustable from the control room. The limited operation shall be nounced in the CCR
• The condensate level control shall be implemented in the turbine con ol system.
The generator voltage regulation has the task of maintaining the voltage su lied by the
generator at the required value by adjustment of the exciter. It shall ensure th 1 even with
rapid changes in load or possibly load shedding, the voltage does not vary bey d the
permitted tolerance.
The generator regulation shall be designed to ensure successful parallel operation w · h

different load points of the individual units within the framework of the voltage and
frequency tolerances.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 719/765
Condenser Level Control
A qui acting hotwell level control executed by a level control valve in the main
conden ate pump discharge shall be provided to maintain a constant condensate level in the
hotwell ring all balanced and transient operating conditions.
Turbine Protection
The protection i erlock chain turbine protection shall be executed in particularly safe and
high quality techn ogy and shall be introduced into the control as interlock criterion so that
the turbine shall be otected from overload and damage throughout the complete operating
range. The following rotection criteria shall be considered as a minimum:
• Turbine speed greate than maximum (at least two (2) independent speed checks for
110/112%, with the pos ·bility of testing during continuous operation)
• Bearing metal temperatur (thrust and journal) greater than maximum
• Shaft positions not correct.
• Turbine shaft vibrations great than maximum
• Wall temperature difference of rbine casings greater than maximum
• Wall temperature difference of m in stop valves greater than maximum
• Control oil pressure low
• Lubricating oil pressure low
• Lube oil level low low
• Rapid steam temperature decrease
• Water ingress protection
• Condenser vacuum low
• Shaft eccentricity
• Generator protection operated
• Unit trip operated
• Local turbine trip operated.
Operating personnel shall be made aware of any danger b re-alarms before the initiating
of the protective mechanisms.
Suitable release interlocks (passive protection) shall protect the

faulty operation.
All the mechanical-hydraulic and electrical protective circuits on the

designed in such a way that faults at protective interlocks do not caus any erroneous release.
The protective signals shall initiate closing of all turbine emergency sto valves and, where
appropriate, on the bleed and extraction emergency shut-off valves. It sha be possible to
check the functional correctness of the emergency stop valves during opera ·on.
The minimum range of automatic controls required for the turbine operation is
• Turbine oil supply and oil vapor removal

• Turning device
• Heating at control valve
• Turbine draining
• Sealing steam supply and vapor suction fan

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 720/765
• Turbine starting and run up automatic devices (including synchronization and loading).
Each f the automatic sub-group controls shall put all the associated auxiliary equipment, in
the cor ct technological and time order, into or out of operation by means of a start or stop
order.
ontrols shall act automatically to bring the speed governor into action by
slowly increa ·ng the speed-desired value. It shall bring the turbine up to the nominal speed
dependent on r iable limiting curves and shall finally synchronize it. The run-up equipment
shall help that th turbo generator is loaded to a minimum load by means of further
adjustment of the s eed setpoint.
All drives shall be o rable in manual or automatic mode initiated manually from the CCR.
The steps of the indivi ual programs and missing criteria shall be shown on the operator
station in the CCR.
81.1.3.14
The required number and arran ment of the feed water pumps shall be in line with
international recognized standard and additional requirements as described below.
The minimum requirement is 2x50% team turbine driven pumps plus lx35% electrical
motor driven pump per unit.
The feed water pump shall perform succes fully in supplying required feed water flow and
flow rate during start up, shutdown, normal eration, peak load, turbine VWO, BMCR and
emergency operation such as load rejection.
Not more than two types or sizes of boiler feed ter pumping sets shall be provided. The
boiler feed water pumping sets of each unit and be een the units shall be identical in design
and all replacement parts shall be interchangeable.
Special emphasis is placed on a high resistance to corro ·on of the equipment. The feed
water pumps with all parts coming into contact with the £ d water shall be constructed in
chromium steel of the 13% chromium. The materials shall s tisfy without restriction the
requirements of erosion and corrosion resistance resulting fro operation with
demineralized water and water conditioned with volatile alkali ·ng agents having a pH-value
greater than 8.0. Protective sleeves on the shafts shall be hard ch mium plated, cooling
sections and bearing mountings of cast steel.
Check valve shall be provided to the pump preventing reverse flow.
The pumps shall have generously dimensioned plain bearings (only for b ster pumps ball
bearings can be offered as an alternative) and forced feed oil lubrication. T total axial
thrust of the pump shall be neutralized by a hydraulic balancing device. A th st bearing
shall be provided, which is so dimensioned that even in the event of short-dura ·on
cavitation no damage to the pump shall occur. The bearing metal shall have eme
running properties.
The bearings shall be designed to accommodate displacement of the pump impeller d e to

thermal expansion.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 721/765
shaft seals shall be of the soft-packed stuffing box type in the case of booster pump and
me anical seals for main feed water pumps. The stuffing box and corresponding gland
cover hall be cooled; the seal chamber at mechanical seals shall be cooled as well.
Remova e wearing rings shall be installed on the casing and impeller at the running joints.
Rotor assem ly shall be dynamically balanced. Each impeller shall be statically balanced
and carefully achined and polished and where it is impossible to machine, a smooth
surface shall be btained by manual work.
It shall be possible start the pumps safely from cold with or without prior warming up or
other preparatory me sures. Automatic changeover to the load point previously in use shall
be possible without de y.
The minimum-flow devic shall be automatically actuated. They shall include a hand start
bypass. The minimum flow ·nes and balancing lines shall be run separately for each pump
to the feed water tank.
Strainers shall be included in the uction lines to protect the pumps from damage under all
operating conditions. The strainer esh size is 20 mesh. The strainer and strainer body shall
be matched so that the full area of th strainer is utilised. The free area of the strainer shall
be at least equivalent to 4 times the er s-section area of the corresponding suction pipe.
The rotor design shall be subcritical.

The pumps casing shall be properly insulat
The design pressure of the feed pumps shall be t least 1.05 times the pump zero flow
pressure at the highest possible pump speed at c d conditions and under maximum suction
pressure conditions.
Oil supply
A closed oil system having separate internal working a lubricating circuits shall be
provided for the feed pump and motor bearings.
Each feed pump set shall have at least two oil coolers, one r the working oil and one for
the lubricating oil circuit. Each circuit has its own oil pump.
The lubrication oil system shall also be equipped with an auxili lubricating oil pump
which starts automatically in the event of a fall in lubricating oil p essure. An adequate feed
of oil shall be ensured under startup and run-down conditions.
The oil systems shall be equipped with all necessary filters (duplex filt s), strainers, pipes,
valves necessary for safe operation. Changeover of the filters during ope
possible without interruption and they shall be easy to clean.
81 .1.3.15 Feed water heaters
Lot 1 shall propose the required number and type of LP and HP Feed water heater
differential temp of inlet/outlet shall not be a hindrance in achieving the required lo
changing rate.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 722/765
Feed water tanks and deaerators
The ma functions of the system shall be to:
• condition edwater for start up

• Provide rese e to compensate for fluctuating feed flows, preferably 5 minutes of feed
water supply at CR
• Ensure feed wate ump suction requirements are met at all times.
• Removal of oxygen ·a a steam heating/deaerating process.
The deaerator connected to e feed water tank should preferably be of the spray type.
Cascade-type deaerators and s1 ilar types shall also be accepted but they shall incorporate
re-evaporation. In all cases the fe water tanks shall have a warming-up steam line supplied
with steam from the auxiliary ste ystem.
The size of the deaerator shall be suffici t for a water flow of at least 1.1 times the
maximum boiler feed water flow plus the imum feed water injection quantity.
If the feed water tank pressure falls, a suppleme tary steam supply is taken from the cold
reheat manifold. The supply from the cold reheat anifold is also taken during start-up/shut-
down operation, in order to maintain the required mi ·mum feed temperature.
The deaerator spray nozzles and the nozzle strainers shal e of stainless steel.
The deaeration area shall be lined with stainless steel. The entl vapour extraction system
shall be manufactured from stainless steel.
To allow for possible slopping of the contents of the feed tank, a ho ·zontal impact force of
10% of the maximum vertical load shall be assumed.
In order to avoid the danger of corrosion, diverter plates shall be fitted in t dead corners of
the feed tank to improve circulation. The wall thicknesses for the feed tank a deaerator
shall have a corrosion allowance of at least 1.6mm. The tank shall be suitably s · fened to
safely withstand full vacuum.
All valves and fittings directly above the feed water tank shall be accessible from plat
Lot 1 shall describe the protection of the system from condensate surging and vessel
vibration.
81 .1.3.17 Piping, valves and accessories
Pipe and valve specification

The pipe systems shall conform to the requirements defined in Section BO as a minimum
requirement.
Interconnection work
Interfaces between the Contractors of battery limits shall be at anchor points of piping
systems, if possible. Piping systems> DN 80 and ~D12G° Cshall be stress analyzed from
anchor point to anchor point, regardless of battery limits of individual contracts.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 723/765
81.1.3.18 Sampling system
Sampling equipment shall be installed in all places where required for local and remote
supervision of the operation, for early recognition of disturbances and for the clarification of
The sampling coolers shall be fitted with stainless steel coils and stainless steel piping
connections up to the take-off point.
The position of each sampling point shall ensure representative samples and shall be led to
one common sampling station or shall be combined in a minimum number of groups (in case
of long sampling pipe lengths which may lead to falsification of the analysis).
All sample coolers shall be provided with stainless steel trays. The drain of these trays shall
be laid to the waste drain system.
The sample coolers shall be designed so that no detrimental consequences shall occur on
interruption of cooling water supply.
The throttle valves shall be located downstream of the sample coolers in order to avoid
steaming of the sample.
Owing to the elevated temperature of the cooling water, all measurements for which a
temperature correction is not possible (e.g. 02 measurement) shall be cooled by a cooling
aggregate or separate electric sample coolers, which shall be provided for each measuring
point.
On components where the steam or water flows in parallel streams, the tapping connections
shall be provided in each of the streams.
The condensate of all sampling points shall be reused in the plant.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 724/765
•
Cranes and Hoists

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 725/765
81 .6. Cranes and Hoists
81 .6.1 General
This specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, supply, transport, erection,
commissioning and handing over of cranes and hoists within the steam turbine generator
area, complemented by Section BO, but without excluding other necessary components and
services not mentioned herein.
It has to be emphasized, that this specification does not enumerate or describe all the
materials and equipment to be supplied and all the services to be performed. However, the
cranes and hoists shall be complete in every respect and shall ensure safe and reliable
operation of the plant. This means, all material and equipment shall be provided as required
to make a complete, properly functioning installation.
This Section sets out the scope of equipment covered by this technical specification as well
as requested supplies and services, but without excluding other necessary components and
services not mentioned.
The Bidder shall design and supply any crane and lifting equipment required for
construction and maintenance inside the entire lot, considering also support beams and rails
including all necessary components for fixing, spare parts and services.
At least the following cranes and hoists shall be provided for installation and maintenance of
heavy equipment within the steam turbine generator area.
Location/equipment Type of cranes/hoists Manual/electrical operated;

controlled
One for each Steam Turbine Double girder overhead Electrical operated with wireless
generator traveling crane(s) (OHTC), remote control unit
main + aux. hoist
Turbine driven and motor Turbine hall crane or hoist Electrical operated with pendant
driven boiler feed water (depending on layout) control unit
pumps/motors
Boiler feed water Booster Hoist Electrical operated with pendant
pumps control or manual
Condenser Water box Hoist or turbine hall crane Electrical operated with pendant
control or manual
CCCWpumps Hoist Electrical operated with pendant
control or manual
CCCW heat exchanger Hoist Electrical operated with pendant
control or manual
ACWpumps Hoist Electrical operated with pendant
control or manual
Condenser tube cleaning Hoist Electrical operated with pendant
system control or manual

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 726/765
Location/equipment Type of cranes/hoists Manual/electrical operated;

controlled
Condensate and condensate Hoist Electrical operated with pendant
booster pumps control unit
Generator circuit breaker Hoist Electrical operated with pendant
control or manual
Other installations Hoists Electrically operated with pendant
> 5 ton* control unit
Other installations Chain hoist Manual operated

:S 5 ton*
* .. The weight means the weight of the heaviest part at erection and maintenance.
Cranes
The crane system shall be complete with all accessories and ancillary equipment, comprising
essentially, but not limited to:
• Crane bridge with traversing gear

• Trolley with traversing gear
• Main and auxiliary hoists, complete with ropes and hook tackle
• Complete electrical equipment as from and including the all-pole, lockable line
disconnect or for the main power supply:
• All installations for inching control
• Motor protection by means of positive temperature coefficient (PTC) thermistor with
all associated equipment and installations
• Electro-hydraulic equipment for brakes if needed
Limit switches for the lifting gear
• Limit switches for the traversing gear, including any needed approach scales
• Two (2) 230 VAC socket outlets on or at the crane bridge (for two girder overhead
travelling cranes)
• Pendant, radio control unit, complete with power supply system and all control elements
for the crane and its ancillary equipment
• Overload cut out for the lifting gear
• Crane track with rails and end stops, including crane rail attachment systems.
• Rope lengths shall be sufficient to reach the ground floor.
Hoists
The hoists shall comprise as a minimum:
Chain hoists:
• Trolley with traversing gear and drive chain
• Pulley block complete with load chain, lifting hook and drive chain
• Running track girder and rail if applicable.
Electrically powered hoists:

• Pulley block complete with inching lift motor, ropes and hook
• Trolley, complete, with electrically powered drive
• Complete electrical equipment as from and including the all-pole, lockable line
disconnect or for the main power supply:
• All devices for inching control
B1 -Turbine & Generator and Associated Systems B1 - 53

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 727/765
• Motor protection by means of PTC sensor with all associated equipment and
installations
• Limit switches for lifting and traversing gear
• Pendant, radio control unit, complete with power supply system and all control
elements for the hoist and its ancillary equipment
• Running track girder and rail if applicable.
81 .6.3 Special Technical Requirements
81 .6.3.1 Turbine hall crane
An electric, overhead bridge crane shall be provided for installation, dismantling and
maintenance of the turbine house equipment. The crane shall be capable of lifting and
accurately positioning all loads within their specified rating.
The crane switchgear shall be accommodated in switchgear cabinets (IP 55) to be arranged
on the crane bridge.
The rated capacity of the crane main hoist shall be suitable to cater for the heaviest single
piece for maintenance plus 20%. The crane shall also be fitted with an auxiliary hoist with a
capacity of 20 tons.
The crane hook approach shall cover the entire turbine and generator area and overhang the
side of the foundation block to the lay-down area.
The Bidder shall state details of crane span and minimum required height of the hook for
safe transport of load to the laydown area with the biggest/heaviest part to lift. The hoist
travel shall be sufficient to lift or lower equipment from the turbine operating level to the
ground level.
The operating speed under full load shall be:
Hoist (main hoist): 0.25 m/minute and 1.5 m/minute

Hoisting (auxiliary hoist): 0.8 ml minute and 5.0 m/minute
Trolley travel: 3.3 ml minute andlO.O m/minute
Bridge travel: 5 ml minute and 20.0 m/minute.
The response time of any operation command must be instantaneous.
The crane shall also be capable of creeping at approximately 5% of operating speed in all
directions of motion.
The turbine hall crane shall be fitted with gangways on the crane bridge or with gangways
fitted to the sides of the crane. The Bidder shall give all details regarding access platforms,
walkways and ladders used for maintenance, escape or inspection necessary for proper
handling, operation and testing.
Turbine cranes shall be controlled from a radio remote control unit. The control unit shall be
high impact resistant multi-button type. The safety margin for the braking system shall
permit a static overload until 140% and a dynamic overload until 125%.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 728/765
A frequency converter shall be used to control the lifting speed.
Indicators confirming the status and integrity of the braking system shall be installed (e.g.
advance brake wear indicator, brake temperature indicator, etc.) to allow the crane operator
to see that the braking system is working properly.
An integrated system that gives a visual indicator of the weight of the load being handled
shall be installed on the overhead bridge crane.
81 .6.3.2 Hoists
The special technical requirements for hoists are specified in Section BO.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 729/765
•
Instrumentation and Control Systems

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 730/765
81 .9. Instrumentation and Control Systems
81 .9.1 General
This Section covers the design, manufacturing, supply, erection and commissioning of the
instrumentation and control and communication works for TJB5&6.
The following main equipment is covered in this Section:
Distributed digital control system (DCS) for the performance of measuring, monitoring,
modulating controls, open loop controls, interface with
• Turbine -Monitoring, -Control and -Protection System

• boiler protection and burner management (BPS and BMS - Equipment in scope of supply
by Lot 1)
• interfacing with local control systems,
• interfacing with Maintenance Management System (MMS), etc.
The specifications of and requirements for proprietary control systems or black box and TV
systems that do not belong to Lotl - can be found in:
LOT: 2
• Soot Blower System (*)
• Flame Detector System
• Furnace TV System
• FGD System (operation and control of FGD is included in DCS scope. Lot 2 will provide
all necessary inputs to Lot 1 for designing logics in DCS)
• ESP or Fabric Filter System (*)
• Precipitator Control System (in case of Fabric Filter Type "n/a" (*)
• Fly Ash Handling System (*)
• Flue Gas Continuous Emission Monitoring System(*)
• Bottom Ash Handling System
LOT3:
• Coal Handling System(*)
• Water Treatment Plant (WTP) -(*)
• Electro-Chlorination Plant (ECP) -(*)
• Waste Water Treatment Plant (WWTP)-(*)
• Seawater Intake System-(*)
• Compressed Air Plant System
• Condensate Polishing Plant System(*)
• Deminiralisation Plant System (*)
• EDG System
and
LOT4:
• Plant Communication systems

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 731/765
• CCTV system
The control systems with(*) shall be installed within Local Control Rooms (LCR's)/ Local
Electronic Rooms (LER). Data Exchange with main DCS shall be ensured by serial links
(see Appendix Cl-I01, 'DCS Configuration').
The control and monitoring equipment to be provided shall be suitable for faultless and safe
control and supervision of the entire plant during all phases of operation in every respect and
shall be suitable for the location in which they shall be mounted.
Lots 2-4 must adhere to the functional requirements, design criteria and system
configuration contained in this document. Where there is a conflict between the
requirements of this specification and Lots 2' s- 4' s current standard system/technology, this
must be clearly defined in writing as a deviation to the specification. Lots 2 - 4 may propose
alternative improved performance features as long as the system is made up of power plant
proven equipment and components, hardware and software modules.
81 .9.1.1 General operation and control philosophy
The control and instrumentation systems shall be provided to enable each unit of the power
plant for safe, reliable and efficient operation under all operational conditions without
invoking plant or system operational limits and provide the quality of control to support the
overall performance guarantees.
The control and instrumentation system shall minimize the power station personnel in
operation and maintenance.
To maximize availability, the design of the control system shall be on an independent block
basis such that failures in one block cannot reflect on to the operation of the second block.
Single failures within one block shall not result in a reduction of availability. Single failures
in the automation system shall not cause a failure of the complete unit.
The malfunction of any component or loss of supply shall lead to fail safe condition. All
equipment shall be designed that in all conditions, which occur in electrical, pneumatic or
hydraulic supplies, there shall be no damage to plant and personnel.
Common makes and types of control and instrumentation shall be used in order to simplify
operation and maintenance of the power plant.
The automation system shall consist of DCS for each unit and one DCS for the common part.
The modules shall be separated from each other, but they are all connected to the redundant
data highway.
81 .9.1.2 Function and arrangement of control centers
Remote manual controls, automatic sequence and modulating controls, protection systems,
alarms and indications shall be provided in a single CCR utilizing the hierarchical functions
of the DCS.
Plant operation including start-up, loading and shut down of Boiler and Turbine units under
normal operational condition is basically done from CCR.
BOP system (except FGD) shall be controlled from local area but not from DCS.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 732/765
The following systems if not configured on the DCS but using own microprocessor based
system, shall be able to communicate with DCS for operator monitoring and/or control from
CCR.
Common
• Coal Handling System
• Lime Stone handling System
• EHV Control System
• Water Treatment System
• Waste Water Treatment System
• Electro-Chlorination System
• Intake Screen System
• Air Compressor System
• EDG System
• Condensate Polishing Plant System
• Deminiralization Plant System
Unit
• ESP System
• Soot blower System
• Fly Ash Handling System
• Bottom Ash Handling System
• CEMS
• cccws
• Condenser Tube Leakage Det. System
For the power plants major auxiliary systems which are stand-alone and not directly related
to the load dispatch, shall have their own control panels and Local Control Rooms (LCR) as
per Lot 2's - 4's design. However, the equipment status, process parameters, and alarms
should be available via DCS in the CCR. Monitoring of these auxiliary systems, which are
essential for plant on-line coordination shall also be possible from the operator stations in
the CCR.
The specification of the local control system of the following system is in Technical
Schedules included
• Closed cycle cooling water system (CCCWS)
81 .9.1.3 Operation of the main units
Operation that can be done from CCR is as follows:
• Starting of plant auxiliaries to full load for plant start up (operation of Plant Auxiliaries
startup before boiler light off, like CWP / BFP / air & flue gas path etc, is also from
CCR)
• from the current load to boiler shutdown and stopping of plant auxiliaries for plant shut
down.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 733/765
The control system design of the human machine system, indication, alarm and control
equipment shall be based on minimization of the incidence of operator error and
maximization of the plant and operators' efficiency.
Normal operation shall require a minimum of attendance by field operators local to plant
and shall be done mainly from the CCR
The facility shall be designed to be capable of:
Operating in sliding pressure modes. Lot 1 shall propose and design the most efficient plant-
operating mode.
Performing Automatic Generation Control (AGC) duties for the purpose of load regulation
within a range of output agreed by the load dispatch center (LDC). The use of AGC shall not
cause any restriction whatsoever on the operation of the governor or any other equivalent
control devices on the facilities or vice versa.
Principles of boiler automation
loading and transfer to range pressure control of the steam generator (SG) shall
be done in hier hical control functions utilizing breakpoints.
The automation sha eet the following objectives:
• Consistent start-up and shu - wn of the plant under all operational conditions
• To minimize fuel consumption · g start-up, shut-down and normal on load operational
cycle
• To maximize plant life expectancy
• To simplify operation.
• To ensure safe and efficient operation
Engineering i.e. elaboration and supply of logic diagrams for open controls (for all
control levels specified hereinafter) as well as of function descriptions an
for all modulating controls shall be done by Lot 2.
Further, Lot 2 shall attend the factory test ofDCS and take part of the site commiss·
work.
81 .9.1.5 Principles of steam turbine generator (STG) automation
The operation of the STG's shall be fully automated. The complete start-up and shut down
shall be remotely supervised and conducted in an automatic mode from the CCR The
Turbine shall be automatically started and accelerated to its rated speed and after
synchronization loaded with its initial load.
The automation shall meet the following objectives:
• Consistent start-up and shut-down of the plant under all operational conditions
• To achieve minimum Turbine run-up time consistent with thermal stress limits
• Operation that can be done from CCR is as follows:
• from Boiler light off to target load for plant start up
• from the current load to vacuum break for plant shutting down

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 734/765
Some group sequential control function for Turbine equipment are applied as follows, but
not limited to.
• 1st BFP start and stop master

• 2nd BFP start master
• Extraction system start and stop master
• Condenser vacuum up master
• To maximize plant life expectancy
• To simplify operation.
Each auxiliary equipment, such as pumps, fans, e.g., shall be controlled by sequence control
(sub-group level up to group-level). The sequence controls are partitioned together into
some groups (unit co-ordination level), where the equipment is controlled in automatic
sequence manner.
81 .9.2.1 General
This section sets out the scope of installations covered by this specification as well as
requested supplies and services, but without excluding other necessary components and
services not mentioned.
The indicative control system architecture is shown in Annexes Cl, 'DCS Configuration
General requirements related to I&C equipment and materials are specified under Section
BO, General I&C Requirements. The material used for all equipment shall fully meet the
requirements regarding safety and operational conditions of the media to be measured.
81 .9.2.2 Scope of supplies
This section of the specification includes all control and monitoring equipment within the
CCR, LCR's, the electronic rooms (ER's) and associated field mounted equipment. In
addition, the equipment to be supplied under this section shall be able to fulfill the task
descriptions of all related sections of this specification.
The instrumentation and control equipment and the control functions specified in the various
sections shall be supplied as a minimum requirement. It shall be emphasized, that this
specification does not enumerate or describe all the materials and equipment to be supplied
and all the services to be performed. Further instrumentation shall be provided as far as
required for the fulfillment of the specified degree of automation and for a safe and
satisfactory operation and supervision of the plant.
The scope of supply within this section comprises at least, but not limited to:
Field equipment
• Field equipment, such as transmitters, sensors, control valves with actuators, etc. for
steam turbine generator and their associated systems
All measuring and signal conditioning equipment

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 735/765
• Necessary field junction boxes and marshalling cabinet(s)

• All necessary local instrumentation shall be provided including at least the following:
• Pumps • Pressure gauges on suction and discharge

side.
Gland sealing pressure gauges (if
applicable)
• Strainers and filters • Differential pressure gauges
• Heat exchangers • Temperature indicators upstream and
downstream, both tube side and shell side.
• Lubrication and cooling • Pressure gauges indicating system pressure
systems at appropriate locations to enable correct
system functioning to be confirmed.
• Tanks and vessels • Level indicators.
Distributed Digital Control System (DCS)

Complete digital control system in accordance with the technical requirements specified
under this Section, including:
• All necessary 1/0 processing equipment in compliance with the technical requirements
specified under this Section
• All necessary equipment for serial and/or hardwired communication with turbine
protection and control system (if not integral part ofDCS).
• All necessary equipment for serial and/or hardwired communication with the EHV
substation and other control systems of local auxiliary plants included in the scope of this
Lot.
• Serial and/or hardwired communication links to local PLC's for the control of auxiliary
systems and BMS provided by Lot 1, Lot 2 and Lot 3, such as:
• Modulating controls for all systems as specified in this Section. In addition to the task
description included in this Section the task description in the specifications of the
relevant Sections for the mechanical equipment shall be considered.
• Complete control equipment for all manually remote or automatically controlled drives in
accordance with the operating conditions described under this Section, including all
necessary safety interlocking and protections. The extent of the supplied open-loop
control system shall fulfill the specified control philosophy and degree of automation.
• Engineering station in accordance with the technical requirements specified under this
Section.
• Alarm Annunciation and Sequence of Events Recording (SER)
• Coverage of SER of DCS is limited to BTG plant only and it does not cover the other
facilities not related to tripping of main plant. (signals related to 525kV CBs are
connected to SER as opening of these breaker may result to tripping of de-
synchronisation of plant)
• Process Information Data Archive, to provide any kind of current or historical process
information for plant operation analysis or plant operation optimization systems.
• All necessary data highway equipment in accordance with the technical requirements.
• Signal exchange with EHV-switchgear control system
• For Load Frequency Control mode (LFC) the plant status and load condition signals are
send to Grid operator (PLN) for remote control. Therefore both way communication with
SCADA.}.
• Data interfaces to existing SCADA system

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 736/765
• Data interface to existing SCADA is via hardwired only.

• Maintenance equipment and special tools e.g. portable programming devices for SMART
transmitters, for each brand of supplied PLC controller, etc., for Lot 1-Lot4.
Central control room/ engineering room equipment
The CCR as shown schematically in the overview screen: Appendix: Cl-I02,

yout_of_CCR_Central_Control_Room_Unit5 and 6.
Th control room shall mainly contain the following equipment:
• Oper r desks (one for each unit, one for common equipment or as per the Bidder
recomm dation). The operator desks shall accommodate the VDU's, the keyboards,
mouse an he conventional control elements, such as emergency stop push buttons as
well as comm nication facilities.
• One ( 1) operato esk for shift supervisor
• One ( 1) operator d k for engineering station
• Five (5) operator sta ·ons each equipped with two VDU s, workstation, keyboard, and
mouse per unit.
• Two (2) operator stations r common systems, equipped with two VDU s, workstation,
keyboard and mouse.
• One (1) operator station for the ift supervisor, equipped with two VDUs, workstation,
keyboard and mouse. This shall b imited to plant monitoring function only. Operation
shall be inhibited from this station.
• One (1) remote operator station in the M manager room, equipped with two VDU s,
workstation, keyboard and mouse. This sh be limited to plant monitoring function only.
Operation shall be inhibited from this station.
• Operator stations for engineering and diagn tic station for the different systems,
equipped with two VDU s, workstation, key ard and mouse. ( as per Bidder
recommendation)
• One (1) large screen display panel (LSDP) with Specs
• Two (2) A4 size black/ white laser printers
• One (1) A3 size color laser printer
• Three (3) A4 size color laser printer
• One (1) set of furniture of filing cabinets and side boards with slid1 doors for CCR and
engineering room (ER).
• One (1) multi-layer board for drawing display.
• One (1) White board approx.2.0 x 1.2 m. (Non print-out function)
• Six (6) Operator chairs (365d/ 24h office chair)
• The CCTV monitors with associated cables as well as the phone equipment wi
should be supplied by Lot 4th
• The Furnace monitors with associated cables should be supplied by Lot 2th
Local control room equipment

The local control rooms (LCR's) of the auxiliary systems forming part of this turbine related
equipment shall be equipped with operator desk with operator station, operator chair, filing
cabinet for documentation, writing desks with drawers, operator chairs.
Spare capacity after completion of commissioning

At least 15% free space shall be available in all cubicles, junction boxes and marshaling
racks after final commissioning. This free space shall be distributed inside the cubicles in

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 737/765
such a way that additional terminals, equipment or modules may be added to any group of
controls. At least 5% free space of installed channels of 1/0 modules distributed in the
different function areas shall be available for further modifications.
At least 15% spare cores shall be provided in each control and monitoring cable. All spare
cores shall be terminated.
At least 10% spare capacity shall be available for defining new analog signals in long term
data storage under fast and slow scanning time
81 .9.2.3 Scope of services
All services required for a safe, reliable, efficient and trouble free instrumentation and
control equipment shall be provided by Lot 1.
These services shall include, but not be limited to:
• Design of all equipment to be supplied

• Documentation of all equipment to be supplied, including the data storage medium
• Programming of all digital equipment
• Testing in the Contractors/vendors workshop and on site (FAT and SAT)
• Packing, transportation to site, unloading and proper storing
• On time delivery of all documents needed for proper erection works
• Handling from site storage to the point of final installation
• Erection of all parts to be supplied.
Lot 1 is responsible for the co-ordination of the interfaces and overall design of all package
control equipment or other control equipment supplied by the Contractor and for the design
of this equipment. The submitted documentation shall be in line with the General I&C
Requirements and with the technical requirements specified in this Section.
As far as the final execution of the work is concerned, all design data, interlocking
conditions, control loops and logic diagrams supplied by the Contractor shall be checked,
verified and closely coordinated with the Contractor of the corresponding equipment. For
this purpose close collaboration with Contractor supplying control equipment shall be
ensured.
Lot 1 shall submit a detailed time schedule for the drawing approval procedure at the
beginning of the design phase.
81 .9.2.4 Erection, cabling, wiring, labeling
The scope of this contract covers complete erection, cabling and wiring of all control and
monitoring equipment and shall comply to the stipulation of Section BO 'General I&C
Requirements'.
All local instrumentation shall be mounted at locations, accessible for operation and
maintenance personnel. Grouping of instruments on local racks or control boards shall be
preferred.
Lot 1 shall be fully responsible for the correct installation and erection with regard to the
measuring and control functions of all the supplied equipment.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 738/765
Lot 1 shall make all necessary provisions for the site testing and commissioning of the
control and instrumentation systems which include, but not limited to the following:
• The test calibration of all transmitters prior to installation

• The functional test of transmitters once installed
• The loop testing of all measurement and control loops
• The site demonstration test required confirming that all control and supervisory function
conform to their respective functional specification.
All tests performed on site, including the results and deficiencies, have to be recorded and
the test protocols have to be submitted to the SC.
All cabling for the field equipment in the scope of this contract, shall be supplied, laid and
terminated. Over-voltage protection devices shall be installed, where necessary.
All field equipment including local instruments, transducers, valves, actuators, sensors,
junction boxes, cabinets shall be provided with nameplates with instrument tag number and
English text in clear. The nameplates shall be fixed to the mounting plate, the mounting
brackets or junction box. Loosely attached nameplates by wires are not acceptable. Label
material and writing shall be selected to withstand the environmental conditions where they
are mounted. The label size and fixing place shall be selected to allow easy reading.
Labeling inside of cabinets shall be done based on the standard procedure of each
manufacturer. The label of local instruments and valves shall be of hanging type by stainless
wire.
81 .9.2.5 Commissioning
Lot 1 shall be entirely responsible for the commissioning of his scope in conjunction with
the plant system. Commissioning shall be carried out in accordance with the commissioning
procedures prepared by Lot 1 and approved by the SC.
The scope includes:
• Pre-commissioning cleaning, if needed, of all equipment

• Commissioning of all parts i.e. 'cold and hot' function tests
• Complete coarse and fine adjustment of all analog and binary transmitters, instruments
and other equipment supplied
• Adjustment of control parameters, alarm limits and other adjustable parameters
• Optimization of closed-loop control systems
• Modification or correction of control functions during optimization, if necessary, VDU
displays, logs, etc.
• Optimization of alarm annunciation and SER functions and the associated printing
functions
• Correction of any latent errors found within the DCS.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 739/765
81 .9.3 Special technical requirements
The requirements specified in Section BO General I&C Requirements shall apply and, where
applicable, further stipulations specified in other Sections of this specification.
81 .9.3.1 General
The I&C systems shall be designed in such a way that the power plant units can be remotely
controlled and monitored exclusively from the CCR
The control system making up the scope of supply shall permit complete and centralized
monitoring of plant operations as well as automated operation under the following aspects:
• Normal operation of the plants, for example during changes in the boiler or turbine load,
shall be in automatic mode.
• All protection functions shall be reliably and shall proceed without manual intervention.
Protection systems shall prevent the unit from reaching impermissible loading conditions
and, should any faults arise, shall keep their consequences within the specified limits. The
same applies for switch-on and switchover functions of redundant and reserve equipment
with the possibility for pre-selecting the operating equipment.
• The plant shall be put into and taken out of operation by manual initiation of the
functional group controls of all subsystems. All drives required for start-up and shutdown
of the unit in accordance with the specified control philosophy shall be remotely
controlled from the CCR
81 .9.3.2 Structure of control functions
In order to meet the requirements of plant safety, availability and transparency of plant
operations, the automation equipment shall be hierarchically structured into automation
levels.
The components of the subordinate level shall be so designed and configured within the
system, that they can fulfill their intended actions without requiring the control function of
their supervisory level. The defined process variables (set-point conditions) shall be
achieved and maintained by means of the control installations assigned to this automation
level.
For this plant the individual drive level, sub-group level, functional group level, unit co-
ordination level and Plant Automatic Start-up/Shutdown (PAS) mode shall be provided:
• Drive level
• Start, stop, protection and manual operation for individual drives. Position control for
regulating actuators.
• Sub-group-level
• The combined or sequential control of associated drives such as main pump drives and
associated discharge/suction valve drives. Auto standby functions. Closed-loop control
functions.
B1 -Turbine & Generator and Associated Systems 81-112

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 740/765
• Functional Group level

• Sequential control co-ordination of sub-group controls
Co-ordination of sub-ordinate regulating function operating in a cascade configuration.
• PAS mode
• Sequential Start-up and Shutdown of Plant from starting the Air and flue gas path to
pre-set load and vice-versa at the single click of PAS start and PAS stop button with
option of operator intervention during progress of process.
Some group sequential control function, but not limited to, for major equipment are applied
as follows.
• Turbine Automatic run up control

• 1st BFP start and stop master
• 2nd BFP start master
• Extraction system start and stop master
• Condenser vacuum up master
The philosophy of redundancy for plant equipment and control loop is shown on
Appendix Cl-I01, 'DCS Configuration Diagram'.
In general the operators shall have direct access to all four control levels through the
operator interface located in the CCR
81 .9.3.3 Field equipment
All field equipment supplied under this contract shall comply with the General I&C
Requirements specified in Section BO.
For protection of the generation units and the following items, triple redundancy of field
sensors shall be applied.
For major controls, double redundancy shall be supplied. Major controls means control loop
to prevent the major equipment from the critical damage if control valve does not control the
process well.
The philosophy of redundancy for plant equipment and control loop is shown on
Appendix Cl-I01, 'DCS Configuration Diagram'.
For minor control, alarm, interlock and monitoring, redundancy is not required.
Purging anti-blocking systems for measurements of air, flue gas and pulverized coal shall be
provided.
Local direct reading instrumentation and controls not forming part of the central control and
supervisory system shall be provided only for the following cases:
For local plant supervision, testing and maintenance

Where required for the convenient checking of other instrumentation (e.g. pressure switches).

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 741/765
Burner management system (BMS)
Com lete burner management system (BMS) for the oil and pulverized fuel burners
includ g boiler-purging program
Function requirements
Burner start up and shutdown of the combined pulverized fuel/ light oil burners shall be
initiated from perator stations in the CCR The start-up program is required to run
automatically d without further manual intervention, following initiation by a manual or
automatic start c mand. Boiler purging logic's shall be implemented in the start-up
program.
The shutdown progr likewise shall run automatically without further manual intervention
following initiation b a stop command (manual or automatic), through all the control steps
necessary to shutdown operating burner.
The automatic control of ampers, gate valves, emergency shut-off valves, ignition devices
etc, shall be effected via th BMS.
All signals necessary for rem te operation and monitoring from the CCR shall be made
available for true analysis off; Its/trips by the DCS, supplied by Lot 1. Mode of signal
transmission may be by hardwir g or by serial transmission using standard protocols
matching with the DCS e.g. MOD US. However, important trip functions shall be
hardwired to the DCS and/or to trip ushbuttons on the control desk in the CCR
Design requirements
Each boiler shall be provided with a sep ate BMS. The design of the equipment shall be in
compliance with NFPA 85 standard "Boile and Combustion System Hazard Code, 2011
edition".
It shall be possible to operate and to keep the bo · er in service with its protection system
operational if the fuel oil firing equipment is swit ed off and/or out of service. BMS
tripping shall not trip the boiler and shall not cause loss of the boiler protection totally or
partially.
The sequence of operation and safety requirements shall e incorporated in logic diagram.
The basic design criteria shall be provided by boiler suppl r. The programming device shall
be used to create the application program. It shall be capabl of connecting to the system and
monitor it on-line. The software shall provide off-line and on- ine self-diagnostic facility for
fault detection and identification, which shall then be displaye t the operator stations.
The flame scanners shall be capable of differentiating between the ame of its associated
burner and extraneous lights caused by other burners or by the hot fi nace wall. The
radiation or temperature of the refractory shall not affect them. Adjust· g facilities for flame
monitor sensitivity shall be installed locally. Loss of flame and system ilures due to
reasons other than flame failures shall be separately annunciated in the C R
The BMS system for each boiler shall be supplied as fully assembled and fun tional, pre-
wired, programmed and tested, in lockable steel cabinets, fully accessible fron and rear,
complete with all technical and operational documentation.
The cabinets shall be installed in the Central Electronics Room (CER). The powers
for the BMS control cabinets shall be derived from the UPS system.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 742/765
Gene requirements related to I&C equipment and materials are specified under Section
BO, Gene I&C Requirements. The material used for all equipment shall fully meet the
requirements arding safety and operational conditions of the media to be measured.
Signal exchange with DCS of Lot 2 shall be performed either by hardwiring or by dual
redundant serial communi ion links, using standard protocol e.g. MODBUS.
81 .9.3.5
The design of the BPS shall be in compliance ith NFP A 85 standard "Boiler and
Combustion System Hazard Code, 2011 edition".
All transmitters/sensors involved in the boiler protect1 shall be provided dual or triple
redundant.
It shall be possible to operate and keep the boiler in service with it rotection system
operational if supplementary firing equipment is switched off and/or o f service. A trip of
fuel oil burners initiated by the BMS shall not trip the boiler and shall not c
boiler protection totally or partially.
The equipment for the BMS of each boiler shall be housed in the corresponding control
cabinet of the BMS.
81 .9.3.6 Distributed Control System (DCS)
81 .9.3.6.1 General
The plant shall be monitored, controlled and safeguarded by a distributed control system.
In case of proprietary control system, they shall be connected and communicated via DCS
from the CCR to form the integrated control system. For communication, Ethernet network
protocol shall be used.
This subsection covers the minimum requirements for the design and fabrication of the DCS.
Lot 1 shall be responsible for all hardware, software, interface to other systems, system
testing, documentation, delivery, installation, supervision and field support and any other
services as required for the procurement of the system as defined within this specification.
The design of the DCS shall conform to the state of the art, and shall already have been
proven in other similar plants. Prototype equipment shall not be accepted.
If possible, a local back up and after-sales technical and spare parts support have to be
provided to perform all necessary service.
For the system offered, a guarantee shall be given that spare parts shall still be available at 5
years after taking over and maintenance period as 15 years after delivery.
The DCS shall achieve the functions of data acquisition, signal conditioning, closed-loop
control, open-loop control, calculation, alarm processing and annunciation, sequence of
event recording, historical and real time trend recording, graphic display of process and
communication with other devices/systems.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 743/765
It shall be suitable for control and monitoring of all main plant processes.
System configuration shall be user friendly, i.e. simple and flexible with regard to re-
configuration of loop connection and display formats to suit changes in operational
requirements. Different level of user access shall be foreseen. Each level shall be password
protected.
Comprehensive status information recording and reporting capability shall be provided for
all systems allowing for efficient fault detection and tracing.
All requirements are minimum requirements and the rules of good engineering practice and
the relevant approved standards and regulations shall be observed.
The specifications other than being described to this specification shall be according to the
vendor's standard.
81 .9.3.6.2 Availability and redundancy
The highest demands are placed on the control and monitoring equipment with regard to
availability, plant safety and reliability. All central components that can affect large part of
the plant operation shall be redundant with hot standby, which shall be duplicated with
automatic switchover and fault reporting and diagnostic facilities. The redundant
components shall be available for on-line replacement.
The data highway system shall be single fault tolerant and separated for the different units of
the plant (see Annex Cl-IOI). One failure in the data highways shall not reduce the
availability of any of the system components or degrade system performance. Failure
recovery shall be smooth, bumpless and automatic. Connection of additional equipment
shall be possible on line without disrupting operation. Any data communication failure shall
not disrupt process control.
Connection of additional equipment shall be possible on line without disrupting operation.

Any data communication failure shall not disrupt process control.
The human machine interface controllers shall be redundant and support all the VDUs. In
the event of a controller failure, all VDU s shall be available for control and monitoring
functions. The assignment of the various displays on the VDUs shall be flexible and simple,
so that in case of failure of a VDU, any remaining VDU can take over its function.
In case of power failure ofDCS, the output shall be "O", and fail safe position shall be
implemented at local side. Usually, the rotating machines shall be still running because of its
self-hold circuit in MCCs or SWGR and CV or Damper of modulating control loop shall be
turn to predetermined side by actuator (e.g. or reverse action) or retain the position where
applicable.
81 .9.3.6.3 General hardware requirements
The DCS shall mainly consist of process stations, data highway and operator stations.
In the interest of a neat and clear space-saving layout of installation, easy maintenance,
simple starting-up, operational checking and fault-recognition, a control and monitoring
B1 -Turbine & Generator and Associated Systems 81-116

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 744/765
system made up of a small number of matched standard subassemblies with plug-in modules
shall be provided. The instruments and components used shall be made of high-grade
materials and their data shall be based on the most unfavorable design conditions (worst-
case design), in regard to temperature, voltage, RF interference etc. To a large extent, it shall
be possible to replace individual modules with dual redundant during plant operation.
81 .9.3.6.4 Process station
81 .9.3.6.4.1 General
The process stations shall consist of a redundant microprocessor based system or

multifunctional controllers with the appropriate process interfaces. They shall contain all
functions, which are necessary to keep the process running without operator's intervention
and independent of the availability of a workstation or the state of data highway.
The main functions of the process stations shall be acquisition of digital and analog signals
from the process, signal conditioning and processing, output of digital and analog signals,
closed-loop control and open-loop control.
The data in DCS shall be retained in case of data highway transmission failure.
In order to ensure high availability, the hardware shall be functionally decentralized, i.e. a
limited number of inputs and outputs per module and individual modules for closed-loop
control, functional group control and drive control, so that any failure shall have limited
effect.
Failures shall be indicated by alarms and logged, including the hardware address of the
failed module.
81 .9.3.6.4.2 Signal input and output processing
Dedicated hardware modules for input and output signal conditioning shall be provided. The
process 1/0 shall be able to accept signals from commercially available signal sources.
Conversion into engineering units and linearization of the signals are performed in CPU of
controller in DCS by software.
The system 1/0 shall be designed to meet the following general requirements:
The process 1/0 operation shall not be affected or damaged by ground faults of field
equipment. Ground-faults shall be detected and reported on the individual 1/0 card level.
The process 1/0 operation shall not be damaged by a short circuit in the field wiring.
When assigning occupancies to modules process redundancies shall not be nullified, i.e. I/Os
from redundant process equipment shall be accommodated in different modules, preferably
in different process stations.
Redundant signals from or to redundant control equipment shall not be connected to the
same input or output module and preferably from a different rack.
In order to ensure high availability, the hardware modules shall be functionally distributed,
i.e. a limited number of inputs and outputs shall be connected to one module, so that any
failure shall have limited effect. This limitation may be disregarded if the 1/0 modules are in

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 745/765
a redundant configuration and it is assured that defective modules can be detected and
replaced without limitation.
The outputs of analog and binary output cards shall be short-circuit proof. To compensate
for possible hardware failure on testing, an 'override function' shall be available to allow
'forcing' of the measurement associated with a specific hardware input point (analog or
digital) or to mask changes to an output (digital).
The 'override function' shall be available only on Engineering Tool ofDCS or on HMI with
proper level of access password protection, but not on hardware of DCS such as 1/0
modules.
The requested availability may be achieved either by employment of redundant 1/0 modules
or by decentralized and process orientated arrangement of the 1/0 modules.
If decentralized design is chosen the maximum number of channels used per 1/0 module
shall be indicated in the offer. The redundant design shall be preferred.
The resolution time for parameter scanning and updating of DCS shall be as follows,
• Transmission rate > 100 Mb/sec

• SOE: lmsec
• Digital signal : < 100 msec
• Analog signal : < 100 msec.
Analog 1/0
The following minimum requirements shall be considered for the analog 1/0 modules:
• For the analog inputs the system software shall check for signal integrity and if the input
signal exceeds ±5% of the specified range the measurement shall be declared invalid.
• The analog output modules shall provide 4 - 20 mA DC, capable of driving up to max
500 ohms total loop resistance.
• Each analog output shall be short-circuit proof.
• Normal thermocouple linearization shall be possible with an accuracy of 0.25 °C of the
measured temperature. For thermocouple signals automatic compensation of cold
junction temperature shall be provided. Compensation in cold junction compensation
boxes outside the DCS shall also be acceptable.
• Linearity shall be within 0.2% of all inputs.
• For analog 4-20 mA inputs, the input resistance shall not remain under 250 ohm, due to
the requirements of SMART -Communication.
• Analog inputs shall contain over-range protection circuits to protect the equipment from
ground faults or high voltage either in common or normal mode. Ground fault detection
alarm shall be provided.
• Analog signals shall be programmable per channel.
Binary 1/0
The following minimum requirements shall be considered for the binary 1/0 modules:
• Inputs shall be individually isolated.

• The binary input modules shall be able to supervise the circuit integrity and they shall
ensure that the current through the closed contacts of binary transmitters shall be at least
3 mA.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 746/765
• Input modules for pulse inputs shall be available.

• The digital output modules shall provide dry contacts rated at 2 amperes, 24 V DC.
• The system shall have the capability to provide faster scan rates for some selected digital
points (Sequence of Event Recording), a scan rate of 1 milliseconds per point or better
shall be possible.
81 .9.3.6.4.3 Modulating controls
General equipment design guidelines

Either pneumatically or electrically actuation shall be used, provided the actuators are the
manufacturers proven standard.
DCS shall be provided with the function to detect the high deviation between MV
(manipulated value) and position feedback signal. Further, as to the detection of feedback
signal and output signal, reasonable limit check function is available in DCS.
Positioners for electrically driven actuators shall be of solid state type (no contacts), plug in
units and shall be accommodated in cubicles or housed in the actuator control box in case of
actuators with integral control.
The closed-loop control system shall permit control actions from the open-loop control
system, such as automatic MANUAL/AUTO switchover and controlled OPEN/CLOSED
actions of the control valve, and shall issue corresponding check-back signals to the open-
loop control systems. The normal modulating control function shall be guaranteed also
independently of the open-loop control system.
Control loop gain shall be automatically adjusted through parameter control when the
number of effective final control elements changes, e.g. with one or two pumps in
modulating control mode.
Positioner of pneumatically operated actuators shall be with standard electro-pneumatic

conversion. Any adjustment of the position set-point of serial valves shall be made in the
control system.
Besides the modulating control function PID, the controllers shall contain facilities for
bumpless transfer, anti-reset windup, auto/manual switching, cascading, feed-forward
control, signal exchange with open-loop controls, etc.
The following selection shall be available for triplicated sensors for DCS,
• Medium
• Average
• One of any sensor
• 2 out of 3 voting.
In the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply or withdrawal of a plugin element, the
control valves shall be remain their position, or if necessary traverse to a position which is
safe for the process. Faults in the power supply shall not result in any unwanted or
dangerous switching actions.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 747/765
Cascade control
Tracking of cascade loops shall be done automatically so that the manual balances and
bumpless operation can be achieved at any time without having to specially configure the
signal tracking.
When a controller in a cascade hierarchy is turned off (cascade open) or get to manual mode,
the upper level controllers shall sense the mode change of the controller. The output signal
of the upper level controller shall then track the set-point of the controller at the next lower
level automatically.
When a controller output reaches a maximum or minimum limit the primary (master)
controller shall sense the condition (set point limits) of the secondary (slave) controller and
shall stop the adjustment of the set point of the secondary controllers.
Feed-forward control
The modulating control system shall allow implementation of feed-forward control
applications and ratio-control applications. Standard algorithms like lead/lag logic, ratio
control and free programming capability shall be provided. Moreover, facilities to activate
and deactivate feed-forward and ratio controls shall be provided.
81 .9.3.6.4.4 Open-loop controls
General
The control levels the protection and safety interlocks of the drives shall be provided by the
open-loop control system.
As far as possible the design shall be decentralized such that a disturbance in the control
system shall not affect more than one sequence (e.g. one feed water pump). In the case of a
higher degree of centralization a redundant configuration is mandatory so that the controller
shall automatically switch to a back-up controller in case of failure.
To allow for the process redundancies 'functional distribution' shall be foreseen i.e. the
grouping of the functional subgroups controlled by one common redundant microprocessor
shall be done in such a way that the loss of the controller shall not cause any dangerous
operational conditions or plant shutdown. For example, if the control of feed water pump 1
is disturbed, the control of feed water pump 2 shall be still available.
Sequential drive group and functional group control

Sequential Group controls shall be provided for start-up, operation and shut-down of
associated functional units and drive groups, i.e. it shall be possible to start or stop main
aggregates (e.g. feed water pumps, ID-fans, FD-fans, main cooling water pumps, etc.) with
all associated equipment by issuing one command.
To indicate the sequence progress special sequence displays shall be provided. Via these
displays the sequential steps within the individual sequential programs and 'missing criteria'
(error condition) shall be displayed on the operator station. Sequences including time related
events should include a time-out alarm indication.
The group control shall be as follows:

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 748/765
When ON or automatic is selected, the relevant auxiliaries shall be controlled by group

sequence control and when OFF or manual is selected, each auxiliary is controlled one by
one by operator manually.
Any faults in the control system, which could cause the control sequence to stop, shall be
confined to one control sequence basically, however, it depends on faults and plant
condition.
The redundant equipment of power plant shall lead to an automatic change over a faulty unit
to an appropriate stand-by unit. As to the DCS, this automatic change over shall be available
for modules in dual redundant configuration.
The philosophy of redundancy for plant equipment and control loop is shown in
Appendix Cl-I01, 'DCS Configuration
The sequence control can be resumed automatically, in the prevailing plant condition with
operator's kick action if a sequence control is stopped for any reason.
For this reason jump conditions shall be foreseen. Before entering in the step the sequence
logic shall check the status of the jump condition. If the jump conditions are not fulfilled the
respective step commands shall not be executed and the control sequence shall be continued
with the next step of the sequence.
Drive control
Every remote operated drive or circuit breaker shall be controlled by means of a software
drive control module in DCS.
To this module all orders i.e. from the operator station via the keyboard, step signals of the
control sequences, interlocks or protection as well as all check-back signals of the drive or
switchgear shall be connected. The control module shall issue the order to the switchgear via
interposing relays after the processing of these signals.
Drive control modules (Software Modules) shall meet the following minimum requirements:
• Inputs for manual, automatic and interlock signals. Protection signals shall have priority
over other commands.
• The display of blocking action by activated protection signal is not available on OPS of
DCS, however, it can be checked by "Logic Monitor" function on OPS.
• Dedicated outputs for ON and for OFF commands.
• This is not applicable for single solenoid valve that shall be energized by ON and de-
energized by OFF signal of one digital output signal.
• In the event of on/off command arising simultaneously or commands repeating
alternately, provisions shall be made to lock out these commands.
• Power supply and signal conditioning for the binary transmitters, such as limit switches,
connected to the module.
• Stop command of the actuator upon triggering of the stroke or torque limit switch.
• Signaling of drive position and operation status (e.g. local operation).
• Selection of local or remote operation mode.
• Monitoring of any changes in status not brought about by the drive control module.
• Selective fault annunciation for drive connected faults such as differential signals, i.e. the
position of the drive is in opposition to a given command, or trip by fault in the
switchgear.
The annunciation function shall be included in DCS.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 749/765
Tripping and electrical failure status shall be displayed on alarm summary of operation
display individually. Individual alarm shall be displayed on faceplate of the relevant element.
For unidirectional motor drives (pumps, fans) the issued command shall be an impulse (e.g.
reset by switchgear feedback signal) which shall be memorized in the switchgear by self-
holding, so that the interposing relays shall not be permanently energized.
The control command for reversing drives (actuators for valves, dampers), shall be reset by
stroke end or by torque switches. Drives/actuators with intermediate positions shall be
designed either with a stop command or for inching operation.
Interposing relays housed in the motor control centers of the switchgear shall be considered
as part of the open-loop control system. Solenoid valves that do not exceed the drive control
module power limit may be energized directly from the drive control module.
Individual controls of reversing drives shall be so designed that upon withdrawing of the
control cable plug connector the drive actuator shall stop and it shall not be possible to set it
in motion.
The control commands from the drive control module to the switchgear shall be transmitted
to the switchgear through two interposing relays, one for the ON and one for the OFF
command. The coils of the interposing relays shall be connected with free wheeling diodes.
81 .9.3.6.5 Protection and safety interlocks
81 .9.3.6.5.1 General
To protect individual units or parts of the plant, interlocks shall be formed in accordance
with process criteria, which can be either active or passive depending on their functions.
Active interlocks shall automatically disconnect units or parts of the plant before they reach
a critical operating condition or shall start certain units (e.g. stand-by) in order to avoid a
critical operating condition. In addition, such dangerous conditions shall be immediately
indicated to the operating personnel by means of an alarm.
Passive interlocks are intended to prevent operational errors or wrong commands from being
carried out in the event of selective faults in the automatic control.
Active and passive interlocks shall not be capable of being ineffective by any operation from
the operating stations in the CCR All protections shall act in automatic mode and shall be
independent of operator actions. They have to be always effective for all procedures (manual,
partial automatic).
After a stop or close action by protection, the restart of the equipment shall be possible only
after the fault is rectified and the protection signal is reset. Simple cancellation of protection
signal by start command shall not be possible. The protection action and the operator reset
shall be recorded by the DCS.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 750/765
81 .9.3.6.5.2 Interlocks for alarm annunciation
DCS shall be so designed as much as possible using signals that are available in DCS that
alarms are not indicated when the relative equipment is out of operation.
That means the alarms shall be configured in such a way that they appear only for the
system which are under operation. Alarms related to system under maintenance, during
start-up or not related to operation should not appear. The alarm list shall be empty under
normal plant running conditions.
81 .9.3.6.5.3 Data highway communication
The distributed controller modules shall communicate with the workstations and with each
other through a data highway. The data highway shall be dual redundant coaxial, twisted
pair or fiber optic cable capable of data transmission for the power plant requirement.
The communication system shall have all necessary fault diagnostics. Any errors shall be
alarmed and recorded in the CCR
Operation of dual highway system shall be such that failure of one highway shall not affect
the operation of the plant and control shall be automatically switched from failed highway to
the functioning one.
In case of loss of data highways communication, the individual controllers shall remain in
operation. Under no circumstances shall one single failure lead to an outage of the complete
data system.
The data protocol used shall safeguard against erroneous data transmission and allow for
error detection, recovery and initiate switchover to the redundant data highway.
81 .9.3.6.6 Operator station
81 .9.3.6.6.1 General
The operator interface shall be provided by operator stations, which permit the operator to
control and monitor the plant. It shall be possible to display the process with corresponding
graphic displays, control loop displays, electrical single line schematics, group displays, on-
line and historical trend curves, alarm lists, all with dynamically updated process parameters
on the VDU's.
All analogue signals from field equipment shall be shown on the VDU s, in the dynamic
graphic displays or/and other displays. It shall be possible to provide a historical and real
time trend display for analogue and status signals.
For high availability of the plant redundant operator stations have to be provided. In case if
one operator station should fail, operation of the plant shall still be possible using the
remaining operator stations.
Each operator station shall be equipped with:
Two VDU s as Thin Film Transistor (TFT) type with size of 21 inches

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 751/765
Functional keyboard and mouse
Emergency Push Buttons on operator desk to Trip the Turbine and boiler in case of both the
redundant communication data-highway of DCS fails or all HMI go dead/Hang.
The operator desks shall also be equipped with communication e.g. subscriber phone,
intercom devices, etc.
Shift Supervisor operator desk equipped with:

Operator station with two VDU s (TFT type with size of 21 inches)
Functional keyboard and mouse
Laser printer, Phone and Fax.
Large screen display panel (LSDP)

For plant overview display one (1) modular a large screen projection systems shall be
provided and installed within the CCR in front of the control desks.
The projection system shall be state of art and the overall size shall be at least 70 inch.
The display shall be aesthetically integrated in a panel and into the CCR environment in a
manner that maximizes operator ergonomics. The system shall be capable of displaying any
graphic screen available in the DCS and special graphic displays created for the large screen
projection system. The system shall be supplied with dedicated keyboards and mouse.
The independent system shall be seamlessly integrated in the DCS providing the same basic
functionality as any other DCS display.
It shall be possible to use the systems as one screen or as multi-screen system.
81 .9.3.6.6.2 Software requirement
The DCS system software shall contain functional software modules that shall perform the
basic control, monitoring and calculations. Function blocks in the form of standard software
modules shall be available.
The function blocks shall be linked to build the required control functions.
On-line modification of graphic display, logic diagram and set point is possible unless any
additional hardware such as 1/0 board shall be required.
The library of software modules shall contain all the functions required for:
Closed-loop control, such as PID, analog and step output, multivariable control, bias,
cascade control, adaptive gain, etc.
Open-loop control, such as AND, OR, EXCL OR, NOT, memory, time delay, counter, etc.
Standard software modules for motor/actuator control logic shall be available, covering the
functions described under 'Drive control' in Section 'Open-loop control'
Standard software modules for sequence control, such as sequence header and step modules
Standard software module for the selection of the operating and stand-by units and
automatic change-over from a faulty unit to the selected standby unit

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 752/765
Calculating functions such as function generators, min/max. selector, high/low limiter,

square root, summation, multiplication, average, delay, dead time, ramp, integration, limit
value monitor, conversion to engineering units, etc.
The configuration control software shall include provisions for setting each loop's scan rate.
The configuration software shall also be able to be implemented by means of fill in the
blank templates or other user friendly approaches that allow the user to easily create and
modify control strategies by lining the predefined algorithms.
The DCS system shall have provision to develop sequences and shall be capable of being
programmed directly using Engineering tool ofDCS.
The system shall be furnished complete with working programs. All software design,
development, debugging and reprogramming tasks, which are required to achieve operation
in accordance with this specification, shall be Lot 1's responsibility.
81 .9.3.6.6.3 Human-Machine-Interface (HMI)
The HMI of the DCS shall include a hierarchic visualization concept tuned to the
requirements of plant operation. Through it the operator communication and monitoring
shall be performed.
For this purpose graphic elements (plant displays, curves, loop displays, alarm displays,
operating windows etc.) arranged in hierarchic order shall display easily, quickly and
transparently the status of the plant, of the control equipment and of the control loops.
The highest demand in the designing of the HMI shall be placed on user friendly displays.
For the control room operator displays for monitoring, information and control functions
shall be provided. The displays shall present process sequences and statuses in a functionally
related manner.
The access to operator stations shall be protected by password (or access card, etc.) for at
least four different levels like monitoring only, monitoring and commands; control loop
tuning (incl. forcing) and administrator level.
HMI update
The system shall be capable of processing all inputs in such a manner that all displayed data
shall be updated within maximum 1 sec. for analog inputs and within maximum 1 sec. for
digital inputs. The system shall be capable of accepting spontaneous events from the process
with a time resolution of 1 ms (SER function), independent from the above mentioned
scanning cycle times. The system shall however be capable of inhibiting any nuisance
alarms during the period when the equipment is out of service.
Alarm summary display

Alarms shall be displayed on alarm summary.
When any alarm status occurs, this is indicated by red flickering or steady of "ALARM"
indicator on Operation display ofDCS. Alarm summary shall be displayed by clicking this
point.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 753/765
Process graphic display

Dynamic interactive graphics of different Sections of plant shall be able to be displayed on
the operator stations. Graphic displays shall be configurable only through engineering
environment (i.e. from a console via password access) and use symbols from a library of
standard/user defined graphic symbols. Different plant sections shall be displayed on
different pages. Any graphic available at the Units screen for any of the common systems,
shall identically to graphics used at the common system screens.
A graphics package shall be available on the system. This shall be able to create user defined
symbols and store them in user defined libraries. In addition standard industrial symbols e.g.
for heat exchangers, pumps, compressors, tanks, etc. shall be provided.
Graphic displays shall be of the interactive type with the possibility of integrating process
parameters ('live' points) through which it shall be possible to control the process. It shall be
possible to send motor start/stop and valve (MOV) open/close commands, from this display,
by 'touching' the target for selection.
MV (Manipulated Value), PV (Process Value) and SV (Set Value) shall be displayed on
each faceplate of modulating control loop. The change of any parameters shall be possible
on Engineering Tool (IES) or Logic monitor mode of OPS only.
Alarm summary display

All activated alarms shall be listed in chronological order. Alarms not yet acknowledged
shall be distinguishable by flashing annunciation. The VDU shall display the message of
occurrence and of disappearance.
All new alarm messages shall be displayed on the next available line and shall flash until
acknowledged from the operator. Every new alarm shall activate a bell to call the attention
of the operator. There shall be dedicated bell annunciation for alarm, fault and trip status. If
more alarms are detected than are to be shown on the VDU, more recent ones shall be
displayed and the earlier messages shall be shifted to the alarm backlog memory. In this case
a special message on the screen shall indicate presence of messages in the backlog memory.
A key facility to recall the backlog messages on the VDU display shall be provided.
Group alarm summary can be available using filtering function for general alarm summary.
Control system checkpoints such as temperature of the critical hardware, power supply
voltages etc. shall be provided for accuracy checks. The system shall automatically check its
accuracy and shall initiate alarm if not within the specified limits.
Loop display
The loop display shall contain all detail information of the individual control or
measurement loop, including:
• Configuration of the loop

• Control signals
• Control parameters
• Transmitter range
• Alarm set values
• Output limits
• Actuator loop with status of release and protection signals.
Sequence control status display

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 754/765
This display shall indicate the status of a sequence control logic, indicating the actual step
with the corresponding process criteria.
Trend display
The system shall be capable of displaying both real time and historical trends as follows:
Real time trend. The minimum real time trend shall be 15 minutes based on 1 second
sampling rate and up to the maximum of 2 days with 5 minutes sampling rate.
Historical trend.
The period of on line trend graph shall be approx. one week.
The period of the historical trend on hard-disc drive ofLTDS shall be at least. one(l) year.
Provision shall be there to store and retrieve the data older than 1year.
Historical data shall be stored on a non-volatile memory device such as hard disk. It shall be
able to be archived for recall.
The long term Data Storage system shall have a facility to cater 30% of AI at 1sec scan rate,
50% at 3sec scan rate and 100% at 5sec scan rate for the life cycle of Power Plant.
Real time and historical trends shall be possible on any parameter or variable like measured
variable, set point, output, calculated value, etc. The trend display shall be single line type
and bar graph type. It shall also display information like loop tag, engineering units, span,
current value, alarm status, etc. of the trended variable. It shall be possible to display by
scrolling or expanding the time base all of the trend data available on the system. Selection
of the tag for real time and historical trending shall be possible from operator keyboard. The
critical signal shall be connected by hardwired from the BOP to the DCS so that the time
delay shall not happen.
The system shall also have a multi-trend feature from which it shall be able to display the set
point, measured variable and output of any combination of variables on the same trend
variable.
Operator input windows (Face plate)

For operator actions operator input windows shall be provided. It shall be possible to select
operator-input windows from any of the displays and to open various operator control
windows simultaneously on the screen.
When particular operator input has been accepted by the DCS, this condition shall be
indicated to the operator by a change of color.
Process control operations shall be performed in two steps:
Entering/setting of value
Confirmation /execution of the entry.
Except for those of "INCrease/DECrease" and "AUTO/MAN" selection.
In all cases the current and the entered data shall be shown separately.
A standard display shall be used for adjustment of drives with open/closed loop controls. All
relevant values of the open loop or the closed-loop controller (actual value, manipulated
variable, etc.) shall be displayed. All operator inputs shall be transferred to the automation
system only after the confirmation key has been pressed (two-stage commands).
Logging
The system shall be able to assemble data and print various kinds of standard reports, all of
which shall be also available on demand keystroke. The system shall provide the following
basic types of reports as a minimum:

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 755/765
• Event lists
• Operator action reports
• Custom reports with fixed and variable formats.
The above reports shall use real time data, historical data, or calculated data generated, by
any node in the system or any connected device to the system such as PLC's or process
computers. All points in the system shall be available for logging.
A report generation function shall be available at the engineering workstation for free-
format reports generation of text and data. The report types shall be:
• On demand
• At a predefined time (hourly, shift, daily, etc.)
• Event triggered (Post trip record shall contain all events 3 minutes before and 10 min.
period after the trip.)
• Real time events shall be possible in SOE (Sequence of Event record) in DCS.
The data of 20 events before and 100 events or 10 min. period after trigger is available in
SOE
The report is generated calculating only current value available in DCS but it is not possible
to make the report using historical data. Performance calculation function is available as
more complex reports.
Demand for immediate output of a report shall not affect any scheduled reports that have
been set up previously.
The report generator shall be able to build and print many types of reports.
These shall include:
• Logic diagrams shall be printed out using Engineering tool (IES) ofDCS.
• Historical summary reports for hourly, daily, etc. type activities
• Instantaneous reports for such items as current plant status.
The types or classes of data used by the report generator shall include:
• Analog variables and associated parameters

• Operator entered values
• Status of multi state variables
• Alarm and event messages
• Calculated variables
• Historical data values and status
• Other retrievable tagged items.
The report generator shall also be able to incorporate text supplied for report titles,
subheading, messages, etc. Data validity indicators shall be propagated throughout report
production to provide information on the reliability of requested values.
Math functions shall be a standard part of the report package. The software package shall be
easy to use and not require programming skills.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 756/765
Lot 1 shall consider a sufficient number of reports in his offer.
81 .9.3.6.6.4 Alarm annunciation/Sequence of Event Recording

functions (SER)
All alarms and events of the power plant shall be recorded in the DCS alarm summary,
functional group alarm summary, and shall be available for alarm and event-recording
printers.
Sources of alarms shall be but, not limited to:
• Field process signals

• Status inputs
• Analog or derived variables
• Instrument alarms within the DCS (for example open circuit detection on analog inputs,
bad process measurement, etc.)
• Discrepancy alarms (i.e. both limit switches open etc.) by software logic ofDCS
• System fault alarms
• Data communication alarms i.e. error data
• Alarms transmitted via serial links from package systems.
Alarms shall be prioritized and identified with color coding depending on the priority of the
alarm as follows:
3 level alarm priority, color to be confirmed.

Up to 128 categories, based on the plant area.
Status by low, low-low, high, high-high etc.
Control module or hardware failure by category.
Alarm shall be acknowledged, unacknowledged or inhibited and shall be easily identified

with color code and flashing frequency. Bell or buzzer annunciation shall have different
tones depending on the priority of the alarms.
Alarms shall have pop up link to the related VDU mimics for prompt identification of source
of abnormality.
High resolution input data of 1 ms discrimination or better for SER shall be recorded during
startup, shutdown or any abnormality which may cause the plant and major equipment to
trip.
The SER shall monitor detailed tripping signals for boiler trip, turbine trip, generator trip
and major auxiliaries.
SER shall be required to record all tripping signals and sequence as per real timing to enable
correct diagnosis and analysis.
After the tripping, SER log shall be available on the DCS and print out as per operators
demand.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 757/765
Abnormal operating conditions and events in the plant shall be annunciated. For optimum
identification of the cause of faults the individual alarms shall be displayed on VDU and
printed out in their true sequence of appearance.
Under operation control, it shall be possible to enable/disable the printing of all or selected
alarms.
The design shall allow:
• Detection of fault and status annunciation in correct time sequence

• Changes in annunciation shall be printed out with annunciation tag number, clear text and
with date and time of day. The printer used shall be of the same type as the others
connected to the operation stations
• Self-checking for system faults and creating special control system alarms
• Alpha-numeric signal code;
The display shall list for each alarm:
• The time of alarm followed by MONTH/DATE/YEAR

• The alarm point tag
• The alarm point description
• The violation type such as, high, low, deviation, rate of change, "bad" process value (high
or low)
• Priority shall be indicated by color
• On alarm summary display though initiation of alarm indicated on any displays by
blinking of "ALARM" in red color. That shall be available in all operation display.
• System alarms.
It shall be possible to process a selected number of signals in the Sequence of Event
Recording (SER) function of the DCS. For this function the DCS shall provide a first out
alarm capability. In the case of an avalanche of alarms, the system shall be able to
discriminate between them by time and date in the order of their occurrence.
The time resolution of the SER function shall be 1 milliseconds or better, i.e. if the second
event occurs 1 milliseconds after the first event, then the equipment shall be capable of
resolving the two events.
If alarms transmitted from other control systems (e.g. black boxes) to the DCS via a serial
links are processed in the SER then these alarms shall be transmitted with the corresponding
time tag and the clocks of the two control systems have to be synchronized. If this
requirement cannot be fulfilled then the processing of these signals in the SER is not
allowed. In this case the important alarms from the black box's control system shall be
hardwired to the DCS.
The most important requirement for the SER function is that in case of plant upsets correct
time information shall be available for all signals processed in the SER and that all signals
of the plant which can trigger plant upsets shall be included in the SER, i.e. the offered SER
shall be a plant wide SER
Time synchronization
The system shall interface to a GPS Master clock receiver to provide accurate time for the
DCS slave clocks and the other slave clocks into the associated systems.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 758/765
GPS Time Server distributes time using the TCP/IP Network Time Protocol, NTP.
81 .9.3.6.6.5 System diagnostics and configuration
For system engineering, diagnosis and system maintenance engineering stations shall be
offered. These engineering stations shall be accommodated in a separate engineering room
adjacent to the CCR. The engineering consoles shall be equipped with VDU's, engineering
and functional keyboard used for tests, configuration and tuning purposes. The engineering
stations shall be single system, which have redundant hard disc.
The engineer's console shall allow system configuration, graphics development, report
generation, logging specification, system self-documentation functions, system monitoring
functions (which show the result of self diagnostic tests), system database load/save etc. In
addition it shall be possible to tune controllers, change limit set-points, view all loop
variables, configure control systems, add and delete alarms, change data of the DCS in
online operation, set input and output signals as well as internal variables, with automatic
logbook functionality of executed simulations.
The documentation shall be provided in machine language and according to ISA-standard.
Printers shall be provided allowing VDU hard copies, configuration and parameter printout,
report, etc.
For the generation of process graphic displays, a standard library of symbols shall be used.
Configuration of the control function shall be possible by structuring the control system
flowchart, or simply selecting a programmed algorithm and entering the required attribute
information such as input and output location and tuning constants. Control loop and
sequential logic shall be built by linking the desired control function as they appear on
control and sequential diagram. Revising the attribute information and inserting and deleting
the control function shall easily make modification.
Operation of the engineering consoles by unauthorized personnel shall be prevented by the

use of key lock, access cards or passwords.
The system shall monitor itself continuously for failures by means of selfdiagnostics.
Diagnostic routines shall be applied for each control module. Detailed diagnostic messages
shall be displayed on the instrument engineering console's VDU and printer, and group
alarms shall be given at the process operator's desk.
Diagnostic displays shall be available to assist fault location. It is expected that most faults
shall be quickly repaired by simple replacement of a card or module. The diagnostic display
shall clearly identify the faulty component, the nature of the fault and the component
location.
If the required diagnostic functions/displays are not available in the engineering station than
separate diagnostic hardware/software within the DCS shall be offered.
81 .9.3.6.6.6 Communication with power plant systems
The following plant items respectively auxiliary systems shall be provided with their own
stand-alone control system:

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 759/765
Plant item I auxiliary system Provided under:

Main Turbine Protection and Control System (MD-EHC) Lot 1
BFP Turbine Control System (BFPT-DEHC) Lot 1*
Digital Automatic Voltage Regulator (D-AVR) Lot 1*
EHV-Substation Lot 3
Electrochlorination plant (ECP) system Lot 3
Water treatment system Lot 3
Waste water treatment plant Lot 3
Compressed air system Lot 3
Burner management system (BMS) Lot 1
Boiler Protection System (BPS) Lot 1
cccws Lot 1
Soot blower system Lot 2
Coal handling plant Lot 3
Fly ash handling plant Lot 1
Bottom Ash Handling System Lot 1
Dust filter Lot 1
Flue gas treatment plant Lot 1
Flue Gas Continuous Emission Monitoring System (CEMS) Lot 1
Condensate Polishing Plant System ~
Intake Screen System Lot 3

EOG System Lot 3
Demineralization Plant Lot 3
* Primary control, protection and machine supervisory of the Turbine Generators shall be
accomplished using the control systems provided by the Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM). The control cubicles of the latter systems shall be located in the
Central Electronics Room (CER).
The control cubicles of the remaining package systems shall be housed locally respectively
in Local Control Rooms (LCR's). These proprietary packaged controls systems (PLC's)
shall be linked either by hardwiring to the plant DCS or by dual redundant serial
communication links, which shall allow reliable remote operation, monitoring and alarming
at the CCR.
Data exchange with the Load Dispatch Center (LDC)
For remote s vision and control the plant shall exchange data with the Java Control
Centre (JCC) loca · Gandul, Cinere District, Jakarta.
Direct telecommunication from substation control building to JCC shall be provided

through the existing Power Line Carn LC) equipment located in the existing substation
control building. Interconnecting protocol be en telecommunication system and JCC shall
be coordinated by the SC (supported by the Bidder with PLN.
Lot 1 shall provide all required measuring values and comman

for connection to a Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) of the SCADA syste PLN, installed at
the existing 500kV switchgear building. The signals to be transmitted to the
indicated in Appendix Cl-I03, Tanjung_Jati_Teleinformation_Plan.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 760/765
For further signals to be transmitted ro -switchgear systems to the R TU and

directly to the Power Line Carrier System for line protec · ection B4 -
Communication system
81 .9.3. 7 Cyber Security
Due to the standardization of control systems (operating systems, software, hardware and
communication protocols) on the one hand and the growing use of networks in plants and
systems on the other hand the threats and vulnerabilities of IT systems increase. Handling
errors, malware (viruses, worms, etc.) and unauthorized accesses are some of the main
problems.
The vulnerability of the control system shall be minimized without loss of functionality and
stability.
Fallowing items shall be considered generally:
• Creation of a network topology scheme with special attention to all interfaces (e.g.
patched system, use of firewalls)
• Interfaces and security methods for
• Interfaces to office LAN
• Interfaces to black box systems
• Interfaces to plant operation system
• Interfaces to set off working places
• Interface with MMS
• Interface with external media devices (like USB drive) used to collect data.
• Remote maintenance.
Patches and software updates, including anti-virus scanners, are required to lessen the
possibility of cyber attacks upon known vulnerabilities and exploits.
To ensure availability, confidentiality and integrity at least the following item shall be
considered:
• Design of DCS with security measures, segregation and availability to reflect the plant
requirements
• Measures to protect itself from unauthorized access from external systems including the
corporate office data network
• Measures that enable secure remote operation according to process requirements
• Measures for disaster recovery
• Safe operation if communication to external systems fails
• Be documented and maintained in a manner that reflects the requirements of the
connected systems.
The measures shall be based on international standards like ISO 27001, IEC 62443 and ISA
S99.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 761/765
Access level authority shall be submitted for approval at the beginning of the design phase.
A close cooperation for developing the final operation and access philosophy to the plant, as
well to the control & IT systems is necessary between client and supplier, finally.
81 .9.3.8 Sampling system
This part of the specification covers the general technical performance requirements for a
steam analyzers and instrumentation package to be used in detection and monitoring of
impurities in the generating plant's steam and condensate cycle.
Sampling system shall comprise sample system components, analytical components for the
following points:
• Condenser make up water

• Condensate pump discharge water
• Condensate at deaerator inlet water
• Deaerator effluent water
• Economizer inlet water
• Boiler blow down steam
• Saturated steam
• Main steam
• HP 5 heater drain water.
Analyzers, converters, piping, aux. equipment for sampling system shall be furnished in the
panel installed in Turbine Building.
Analyzers shall be provided as follows;
Sample Point Analyzing Reg uired

Condenser make up water specific Conductivity
Condensate pump discharge water pH, cation Conductivity, DO
Condensate at deaerator inlet water pH, specific Conductivity
Deaerator effluent water pH,DO
Economizer inlet water pH, cation Conductivity, DO
Boiler blow down steam pH, specific Conductivity
Saturated steam cation Conductivity, Si02, Na
Main steam cation Conductivity
HP5 heater drain water pH, specific Conductivity
Closed cooling water pH, specific Conductivity
Note:
DO:Dissolved Oxygen
Analyzer used each sampling point shall be common as much as possible.

Chemical reagent for the sampling system commissioning period but not exceeding 180
days shall be provided.
The sampled points of analyzers shall be indicated and monitored at the local panel.
Common alarm shall be inputted to DCS.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 762/765
Plant Simulator and Training facility for Operators
General
The introd tion of Ultra-Supercritical Power Generation Units to Indonesia is a very recent
occurrence, d hence there is a small great number of well trained, skilled and experienced
Power Unit P el Operators in Indonesia.
The training sim lator should allow or have included:
• Initial training fo newly assigned operators

• Refresher training or experienced operators
• Enhances operator's bility to carry out appropriate actions under emergency conditions
• A suitable tool for tesf g/licensing operators.
It is therefore required of the CS supplier to provide a plant Simulator, of identical layout,

functioning and feel as the uni control systems, at least eighteen months in advance of the
first unit Commercial Operation ate. This Simulator shall furthermore have the facility to
test all software and logic change before they are installed to the Plant Unit DCS.
The offered scope shall include the omplete hardware and software as well all activities
from engineering, plant data analysis d modeling up to the on-site commissioning and
hand over the system.
The following main tasks shall be conside
• delivery of all required hard- and software

• development of a detailed functional specific tion;
• collection of plant data, simulator requirement and procedure;
• development of the mathematical models and int ration of the dynamic model;
• software for monitoring, controls and logic, databa e filling;
• validation a at supplier's premises:
• factory acceptance tests;
• final adaptation of the plant configuration comm1ss10nmg, updating the
database;
• site acceptance tests;
• training and documentation;
• specific trainings courses for simulator trainers and simulators tern administrators.
• the training simulator shall be installed and initially tested on the ite before beginning of
commissioning of Lot 1.
• the simulator shall be designed to be capable of expanding and chan ·ng in the future.
• the simulator shall be designed by the Supplier for a complete and ac rate simulation of
the real plant systems. After the each retune of the simulator, an exp ienced operator
shall not readily discern differences between simulator operation and rea lant operation
as defined by this specification. Each retune shall be performed as follows;
• after synchronization for unit 1
• after initial commercial operation for unit 1
• at final SAT (Site Acceptance Test) for Simulator
• (above items are only minimum retuning schedules, but if necessary for an ad
retuning, the Contractor shall submit the schedules within his proposal).

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 763/765
e logic of the simulator shall be updated easily at least by trained maintenance

p sonnel.
lator shall cover all I&C Control and Supervisory systems including common
electrical uxiliaries.
Description of operation and functions
The steam gener ors and steam turbines with auxiliaries constituting the power plant shall
be simulated in the ollowing way:
One plant shall be si ulated in detail and shall consent the operator to carry out a realistic
simulation in a step-b step manner to fill the steam generator and deaerator, warm the
steam generator and the team turbine and boiler feed pumps, fire the ignition burners, coal
feeders, build pressure, c mence bypass steam operation, seal glands, pull vacuum, roll
turbine soak, speed-up and nchronize and load the generator to take up block load.
The other units shall be simula: ed in a very simplified way with a black box model approach,
just to represent the border varia les (water, steam, fuel, electric power) necessary to build a
Simulator capable of showing all e plant scenarios useful for training.
The Simulator shall be used primaril to train control room operators on various aspects of
the plant operations, including:
• normal operations;
• start-up (cold, warm, hot start-up and rest -up) and shut-down (normal, emergency);
• load changes including run back conditions,
• equipment malfunctions and emergency con ·tions;
• communications with field operators
• demonstration and exercise the aspects operatio and engineering and diagnostic tasks of
operation of the DCS.
81 .9.3.9.3 Plant components models
The plant models shall be a high-quality mathematical simul ion of the steam generator,
steam turbine generator, condenser, feed water and condensate ystem, steam system, etc.
The model shall be based upon detailed, complete, process-spec 1c dynamic equations for
energy transfer and material balance. It shall be modeled concerni for realistic
thermodynamic properties and mechanical coefficients for valves, p mps, vessels and line
sizes are to be based on data from the actual plant.
In order to meet the different modeling requirements at the simulator lev

simulation categories shall be used.
81 .9.3.9.4 Extent and scope of simulation of plant syste
The list of plant systems shall be divided into four categories according to the ext
scope of simulation required.
The "scope of simulation" relates to the accuracy of models and to the physical pheno
which can be reproduced by the said models.

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 764/765
The our plant system categories are as follows:
• fully imulated systems, consisting of:

• accura simulation using physical modeling
• all the R inputs and outputs are active;
• all the pla t components and actuators of the P&ID, which can be controlled from the
CCR are si ulated;
• all the contr 1 logics of the above-mentioned components are fully simulated in
accordance wit the final as built drawings;
• some component which are locally operated are simulated via instructor's variables
(remote functions), he criterion for the simulation of these components shall be that their
operation is required ·n the operating procedures for normal and accidental situations (for
the accidents pertainin to the scope of simulation and included in the malfunction list)
and that they have direc or indirect effects, which can be observed in the control room.
The components, which re useful only for maintenance or repair activities shall be
disregarded.
All systems which are participatin directly in the steam and power generation shall belong
to this group.
• Partially simulated systems

• The system shall be simulated usin less rigorous techniques, like Generator excitation
and voltage regulation systems, Lull ication system, Closed Cooling Water system,
Auxiliary Boilers, as far as it is needed.
• Simplified systems
• The system shall be greatly simplified fo the purpose of simulation, like control
system for the DC supply, Water Treatment P
• Not simulated systems

• The system is totally excluded from the scope of s1 ulation and corresponding inputs
and outputs are not included for some off line system
81.9.3.10 Clock system
The Clock System shall be state of art and as a minimum include a aster clock, necessary
number of slave clocks, independent power supply equipment and sp cified interfaces for
synchronizing all control systems and all digital and analog wall clock , installed at Site.
Final amount of clocks are subject for final requirement during the engi ering phase.
The master clock shall provide for highly reliable, accurate and stable real t1 e information
according NTP - protocol especially for the synchronization of the DCS in or er to ensure
that time accuracy less than 1 msec. It shall be provided with necessary interfac for
synchronizing form external standard time signals e.g. GPS.
The master clock in turn shall provide necessary safe synchronizing signals to the fo
• the specified slave clocks

• specified DCS

Approval on PDM
PNGMH02721 Rev. 2 765/765
pecified BPS /PPS

• G control and safeguarding system
• El trical protection
• Mai enance/data management system
• buildi management system
• all other upplied PLCs
• Package u it controllers
• Specified C TV surveillance and voice recording system
• Servers instal d in the LAN Network

Approval on PDM

Full Specs PNGMH02721 - REV2-design Basis PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Full Specs PNGMH02721 - REV2-design Basis PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

PNGMH02721 Rev.

CONDENSATE POLISHING PLANT

2 x 1,000MW Coal-Fired Power Plant Project

Revised as per the

Revised as per the Rakesh/

0 24 May '13 First Issue H.Shiraishi A.Kinoshita Y.Takano

REV. DATE DESCRIPTION APPROVED CHECKED BY PREPARED

Distribution: (Ka-Chotatsu), (Ka-Chohin), (Ka-EX), (Ka-IX), (Ka-IC), (Ka-CV), (Ka-FP)

4. WORK NOTTO BE INCLUDED 11

5. CODES AND STANDARDS 12

6. ELECTRICAL POWER AND l&C REQUIREMENT 13

8. PERMISSIBLE NOISE LEVEL 13

10. SEISMIC REQUIREMENT 13

11. SITE CONDITION 14

12. PAINTING SPECIFICATION 14

13. INSPECTION AND QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENT 14

14. SPARE PARTS/ SPECIAL TOOLS I CONSUMABLES 14

15. PRICE SCHEDULE 16

17. GUARANTEE ITEMS 16

18. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 16

19. ATTACHMENTS LIST 17

(1) Owner PT Central Java Power or SPC

(2) Employer Sumitomo Corporation.

(3) Purchaser/Sub Contractor Toshiba Corporation

(4) Bidder The firm or company submitting a proposal for

(5) Vendor The firm or company whose tender has been

(6) Contract The written agreement between the Purchaser

(7) Specification This technical specification and/or documents

(10) Work Include all equipment works to be done in

(11) Drawing All drawings indicated under the Contract, or any

(12) Unit Any 1 of 2 coal fired power generating units

(13) Site The destination of the equipment and location of

(1) Project name 2 x 1,000MW Coal-Fired Power Plant Project

(3) Name of Owner PT Central Java Power or SPC

(4) Net Capacity 1,000,000kW each unit

(5) Unit Nos. Two (2) units

(6) Delivery >- For Equipment manufactured inside

(8) Expected provisional Unit #5: (Later)

(12) Compliance with this specification

(13) Progress and expediting

The state of progress in the work

(14) Change and confirmation

(15) Alternative proposal

aa) This technical specification including Attachment~ .ffi

(18) Experience of similar equipment

(19) Product liability

(20) Design life

(21) Measure to earth environment (Green Procurement)

(23) Plant and Equipment Identification.

(24) Material Requirement.

(a) Conducting works of design, specification and selection of materials, equipment,

(b) Designing, manufacturing or procuring materials, equipment, machinery and other

(2) Design Information, Operating and Maintenance Manual

(d) CAD data submission

1. Submission of the CAD File

2. Treatment of CAD File

To review for studying, checking or confirmation of arrangement, conflicts,

To submit to Purchaser's customers as the part of official drawing material if

Purchaser may object to any design information so provided:

Drawings submitted to Purchaser and to which no objection is raised shall not be

Design Information Required for the Purchaser's Approval

Witness of Drawing Inspection

Plant Manual and Other Drawings and Information